The following document contains information on Cypress products.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS
CONTROLLER MANUAL
CM44-10129-6E
F2MC-16LX
16-bit Microcontroller
MB90330A Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
F2MC-16LX
16-bit Microcontroller
MB90330A Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
For the information for microcontroller supports, see the following web site.
This web site includes the "Customer Design Review Supplement" which provides the latest cautions on
system development and the minimal requirements to be checked to prevent problems before the system
development.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/micom/en-support/
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
PREFACE
■ Purpose of this document and intended reader
We sincerely thank you for your continued use of Fujitsu semiconductor products.
MB90330A series is a 16-bit microcontroller designed for applications such as personal computer
peripheral device requiring USB communication. The USB function is not only function operation of 12M
bps but also simple HOST operation.
MB90330A series has functions which are suitable for controlling personal computer peripheral devices
such as display and audio and mobile devices supporting the USB communication.
This manual describes the functions and operations of the MB90330A Series for engineers who develop
products using the MB90330A Series. Please read through this manual.
For more information on various instructions, refer to "Instruction Manual".
Note: F2MC is the abbreviation of FUJITSU Flexible Microcontroller.
■ Trademarks
The company names and brand names herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
■ Sample program
We provide sample programs free of charge to operate peripheral functions of the F2MC-16LX family. The
programs can be used to check the operational specification and usage of our microcontroller device.
MPU/MCU Support Information
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/micom/en-support/
Note: The sample programs are subject to change without notice. The software is designed to show the
standard operation and usage of the product, therefore, it must be used after full evaluation before
using it on your system. Moreover, we assume no liability for any damage resulting from or caused
by the use of the programs.
■ Organization of this document
This manual contains the following 27 chapters and appendix.
Chapter 1 OVERVIEW
This chapter describes basics to give the understanding of the MB90330A series as a whole such as the
features, block diagrams, and overviews of the functions.
Chapter 2 CPU
This chapter describes the basic knowledge on architecture, specifications, instructions, and others to
provide better understanding of the CPU core functions of the MB90330A Series.
i
Chapter 3 INTERRUPT
This chapter describes the overview of interruptions, interrupt vector and interrupt cause, register
configuration/function, and interrupt processing operations.
Chapter 4 Reset
This chapter describes the overview of reset, reset cause and oscillation stabilization wait time, and
reset operation.
Chapter 5 Clock
This chapter describes the overview of the clock, register configuration/function, clock mode, and
oscillation stability wait time.
Chapter 6 Low-Power Consumption Mode
This chapter describes the overview of the low-power consumption mode, register configuration/
function, and operation of the low-power consumption mode.
Chapter 7 Mode setting
This chapter describes the overview of mode settings, mode pin, mode data, and operation in each mode
of mode setting.
Chapter 8 I/O port
This chapter describes the overview of the I/O port and the register configuration/function used in the I/
O port.
Chapter 9 Time-base timer
This chapter describes the overview of the time-base time, register configuration/function, interrupt, and
operation of the time-base timer.
Chapter 10 Watchdog timer
This chapter describes the overview of the watchdog timer, register configuration/function, and
operation of the watchdog timer.
Chapter 11 Watch timer
This chapter describes a overview of the watch timer, functions and configurations of its registers, and
its operation.
Chapter 12 16-bit I/O timer
This chapter describes a overview of the 16-bit I/O timer, the functions and configurations of its
registers, and its operation.
Chapter 13 USB function
This chapter describes the overview, block diagram, register, and operation of the USB function.
Chapter 14 USB HOST
This chapter describes the features of the USB HOST, difference from the USB HOST, block diagrams,
registers and operations of USB HOST, and each token flowchart of USB HOST.
Chapter 15 PWC timer
This chapter describes an overview of PWC timer, the configuration and function of register, and the
PWC timer operation and precaution.
Chapter 16 16-bit reload timer
This chapter describes an overview of 16-bit reload timer, the configuration and functions of register
and the 16-bit reload timer operation.
ii
Chapter 17 8/16-bit PPG timer
This chapter describes an overview of 8/16-bit PPG timer, the configuration and functions of register,
and the 8/16-bit PPG timer operation.
Chapter 18 DTP/External interrupt
This chapter describes an overview of DTP/external interrupt, the configuration and functions of
register, and the DTP/external interrupt operation.
Chapter 19 8/10-bit A/D converter
This chapter describes the overview of the 8/10-bit A/D converter, the configuration/functions of the
register, and the operation of the 8/10-bit A/D converter.
Chapter 20 Extended I/O serial interface
This chapter describes an overview of the extended I/O serial interface, the configuration and function
of registers, and operations of extended I/O serial interface.
Chapter 21 UART
This chapter describes the overview of the UART, the configuration/functions of the register, the
operation of the UART, the usage note of the UART, and the example of UART program.
Chapter 22 I2C interface
This chapter gives an overview of I2C interface, the configuration and functions of registers, and
operations of I2C interface.
Chapter 23 ROM mirror function selection module
This chapter describes the functions of the ROM mirror function selection module and the
configuration/function of the register.
Chapter 24 Address match detection function
This chapter explains the address match detection function and its operation.
Chapter 25 FLASH MEMORY
This chapter describes the functions and operation of 3M/4M-bit flash memory, and the method for
writing/deleting data to the flash memory.
Chapter 26 Example of connecting serial writing
(FLASH MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMER MODE by YOKOGAWA
DIGITAL COMPUTER CORPORATION)
This chapter describes the serial on-board writing of the flash ROM (Fujitsu standard).
Chapter 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION (FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICSSERIAL
PROGRAMMER)
This chapter explains the basic configuration for serial write to flash memory by using the Fujitsu
Microelectronics Serial Programmer.
APPENDIX
Appendix includes detailed information on I/O map, interrupt vector, and instruction list, which are not
mentioned in this manual and information that is needed for programming.
iii
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.
Customers are advised to consult with sales representatives before ordering.
The information, such as descriptions of function and application circuit examples, in this document are presented solely for the
purpose of reference to show examples of operations and uses of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS device; FUJITSU
MICROELECTRONICS does not warrant proper operation of the device with respect to use based on such information. When
you develop equipment incorporating the device based on such information, you must assume any responsibility arising out of
such use of the information. FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS assumes no liability for any damages whatsoever arising out of
the use of the information.
Any information in this document, including descriptions of function and schematic diagrams, shall not be construed as license
of the use or exercise of any intellectual property right, such as patent right or copyright, or any other right of FUJITSU
MICROELECTRONICS or any third party or does FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS warrant non-infringement of any thirdparty's intellectual property right or other right by using such information. FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS assumes no
liability for any infringement of the intellectual property rights or other rights of third parties which would result from the use of
information contained herein.
The products described in this document are designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated for general use, including
without limitation, ordinary industrial use, general office use, personal use, and household use, but are not designed, developed
and manufactured as contemplated (1) for use accompanying fatal risks or dangers that, unless extremely high safety is secured,
could have a serious effect to the public, and could lead directly to death, personal injury, severe physical damage or other loss
(i.e., nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility, aircraft flight control, air traffic control, mass transport control, medical life
support system, missile launch control in weapon system), or (2) for use requiring extremely high reliability (i.e., submersible
repeater and artificial satellite).
Please note that FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS will not be liable against you and/or any third party for any claims or
damages arising in connection with above-mentioned uses of the products.
Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure. You must protect against injury, damage or loss from such
failures by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy, fire protection, and
prevention of over-current levels and other abnormal operating conditions.
Exportation/release of any products described in this document may require necessary procedures in accordance with the
regulations of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan and/or US export control laws.
The company names and brand names herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright ©2005-2009 FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED All rights reserved.
iv
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
CPU ............................................................................................................ 23
Overview of the CPU ........................................................................................................................
Memory Space ..................................................................................................................................
Linear Addressing .............................................................................................................................
Bank Addressing ...............................................................................................................................
Multibyte Data in Memory Space ......................................................................................................
Registers ...........................................................................................................................................
Accumulator (A) ...........................................................................................................................
User Stack Pointer (USP) and System Stack Pointer (SSP) .......................................................
Processor Status (PS) .................................................................................................................
Program Counter (PC) .................................................................................................................
Bank Registers (PCB, DTB, USB, SSB, ADB) ............................................................................
Direct Page Register (DPR) ........................................................................................................
Register Bank ...................................................................................................................................
Prefix Codes .....................................................................................................................................
Interrupt Disable Instructions ............................................................................................................
CHAPTER 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 1
Feature of MB90330A Series ............................................................................................................. 2
Block Diagram .................................................................................................................................... 7
Package Dimension ............................................................................................................................ 8
Pin Assignment ................................................................................................................................. 10
Pin Function ...................................................................................................................................... 11
I/O Circuit Types ............................................................................................................................... 17
Precautions when Using Devices ..................................................................................................... 20
24
25
28
29
31
32
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
47
INTERRUPT ............................................................................................... 49
Outline of Interrupt ............................................................................................................................
Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector ................................................................................................
Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function ..........................................................................
Interrupt Control Registers (ICR00 to ICR15) ..............................................................................
Interrupt Control Register Functions ............................................................................................
Hardware Interrupt ............................................................................................................................
Operation of Hardware Interrupt ..................................................................................................
Operation Flow of Hardware Interrupt .........................................................................................
Procedure for Using a Hardware Interrupt ...................................................................................
Multiple Interrupts ........................................................................................................................
Hardware Interrupt Processing Time ...........................................................................................
Software Interrupt .............................................................................................................................
Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) .....................................................................
Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Descriptor (ISD) ..........................................................
Each Register of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Descriptor (ISD) ..............................
Operation of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) ................................................................
v
50
53
56
58
60
63
66
68
69
70
72
74
76
78
80
83
3.6.4
Procedure for use of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) ................................................... 84
3.6.5
Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Processing Time ......................................................... 85
3.7
Exception Processing Interrupt ......................................................................................................... 88
3.8
Interruption by μDMAC ..................................................................................................................... 89
3.8.1
μDMAC Function ......................................................................................................................... 90
3.8.2
Register of μDMAC ...................................................................................................................... 91
3.8.2.1 DMA Descriptor Channel Specification Register (DCSR) ........................................................ 92
3.8.2.2 DMA Status Register (DSRH/DSRL) ........................................................................................ 94
3.8.2.3 DMA Stop Status Register (DSSR) .......................................................................................... 95
3.8.2.4 DMA Permission Register (DERH/DERL) ................................................................................ 96
3.8.3
DMA Descriptor Window Register (DDWR) ................................................................................. 97
3.8.3.1 DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL) ...................................................................................... 98
3.8.3.2 DMA I/O Register Address Pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL) ................................................................ 99
3.8.3.3 DMA Control Register (DMACS) ............................................................................................ 100
3.8.3.4 DMA Buffer Address Pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL) ........................................................ 102
3.8.4
Explanation of Operation of μDMAC ......................................................................................... 103
3.9
Exceptions ...................................................................................................................................... 105
3.10 Stack Operation of Interrupt Processing ......................................................................................... 106
3.11 Program Example of Interrupt Processing ...................................................................................... 108
3.12 Delayed Interrupt Generation Module ............................................................................................. 112
3.12.1 Operation of Delayed Interrupt Generation Module ................................................................... 113
CHAPTER 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Outline of Reset ..............................................................................................................................
Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times .................................................................
External Reset Pin ..........................................................................................................................
Reset Operation ..............................................................................................................................
Reset Factor Bit ..............................................................................................................................
State of Each Pin at Reset ..............................................................................................................
CHAPTER 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
116
118
120
121
123
125
CLOCK ..................................................................................................... 127
Outline of Clock ..............................................................................................................................
Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section ...................................................................................
Clock Select Register (CKSCR) .....................................................................................................
Clock Mode .....................................................................................................................................
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time ..................................................................................................
Connection of Oscillator and External Clock ..................................................................................
CHAPTER 6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
RESET ...................................................................................................... 115
128
131
134
137
140
141
LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE ................................................... 143
Outline of Low-Power Consumption Mode .....................................................................................
Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit ............................................................
Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR) ...........................................................
CPU Intermittent Operation Mode ..................................................................................................
Standby Mode .................................................................................................................................
Sleep Mode ...............................................................................................................................
Time-base Timer Mode .............................................................................................................
Watch Mode ..............................................................................................................................
vi
144
147
149
152
153
154
156
158
6.5.4
Stop Mode .................................................................................................................................
6.6
State Transition Diagram ................................................................................................................
6.7
State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset ................................................................
6.8
Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode ..............................................................
CHAPTER 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
MODE SETTING ....................................................................................... 177
Mode Setting ...................................................................................................................................
Mode Pins (MD2 to MD0) ...............................................................................................................
Mode Data ......................................................................................................................................
External Memory Access ................................................................................................................
Automatic Ready Function Selection Register (ARSR) .............................................................
External Address Output Control Register (HACR) ...................................................................
Bus Control Signal Selection Register (EPCR) .........................................................................
Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting .......................................................................................
External Memory Access Control Signal ...................................................................................
Ready Function .........................................................................................................................
Holding Function ........................................................................................................................
CHAPTER 8
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
178
179
180
184
186
187
188
190
191
194
197
I/O PORT .................................................................................................. 199
8.1
Functions of I/O Ports .....................................................................................................................
8.2
I/O Port Register .............................................................................................................................
8.2.1
Port Data Register (PDR0 to PDRB) .........................................................................................
8.2.2
Port Direction Register (DDR0 to DDRB) ..................................................................................
8.2.3
Other Registers .........................................................................................................................
CHAPTER 9
160
162
164
174
200
201
202
203
204
TIME-BASE TIMER .................................................................................. 207
Overview of Time-base Timer .........................................................................................................
Configuration of Time-base Timer ..................................................................................................
Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC) .....................................................................................
Interrupt of Time-base Timer ..........................................................................................................
Operations of Time-base Timer ......................................................................................................
Precautions when Using Time-base Timer .....................................................................................
Program Example of Time-base Timer ...........................................................................................
208
210
212
214
215
217
219
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER ................................................................................ 221
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
Overview of Watchdog Timer .........................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC) ....................................................................................
Configuration of Watchdog Timer ...................................................................................................
Operations of Watchdog Timer .......................................................................................................
Precautions when Using Watchdog Timer ......................................................................................
Program Examples of Watchdog Timer ..........................................................................................
222
224
226
228
230
231
CHAPTER 11 WATCH TIMER ........................................................................................ 233
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Overview of Watch Timer ...............................................................................................................
Configuration of Watch Timer .........................................................................................................
Watch Timer Control Register (WTC) .............................................................................................
Operation of Watch Timer ...............................................................................................................
vii
234
235
236
238
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER ..................................................................................... 239
12.1 Overview of 16-bit I/O Timer ...........................................................................................................
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer ............................................................................................................
12.2.1 16-bit Free-run Timer .................................................................................................................
12.2.2 Output Compare ........................................................................................................................
12.2.3 Input Capture .............................................................................................................................
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer ..........................................................................................................
12.3.1 Operation of 16-bit Free-run Timer ............................................................................................
12.3.2 Operation of 16-bit Output Compare .........................................................................................
12.3.3 Operation of 16-bit Input Capture ..............................................................................................
12.3.4 Timing of 16-bit Free-run Timer .................................................................................................
12.3.5 Output Compare Timing ............................................................................................................
12.3.6 Input Timing of Input Capture ....................................................................................................
240
242
243
249
254
257
258
260
262
263
264
265
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION ....................................................................................... 267
13.1 Overview of USB Function ..............................................................................................................
13.2 Block Diagram of USB Function .....................................................................................................
13.3 Registers of USB Function .............................................................................................................
13.3.1 UDC Control Register (UDCC) ..................................................................................................
13.3.2 EP0 Control Register (EP0C) ....................................................................................................
13.3.3 EP1 to EP5 Control Register (EP1C to EP5C) ..........................................................................
13.3.4 Time Stamp Register (TMSP) ...................................................................................................
13.3.5 UDC Status Register (UDCS) ....................................................................................................
13.3.6 UDC Interruption Enable Register (UDCIE) ..............................................................................
13.3.7 EP0I Status Register (EP0IS) ....................................................................................................
13.3.8 EP0O Status Register (EP0OS) ................................................................................................
13.3.9 EP1 to EP5 Status Register (EP1S to EP5S) ............................................................................
13.3.10 EP0 to EP5 Data Register (EP0DT to EP5DT) .........................................................................
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function .........................................................................................
13.4.1 Detecting Connection and Disconnection ..................................................................................
13.4.2 Each Register Operation when Command Responds ...............................................................
13.4.3 STALL Response and Release .................................................................................................
13.4.4 Suspend Function ......................................................................................................................
13.4.5 Wake-up Function .....................................................................................................................
13.4.6 DMA Transfer Function .............................................................................................................
13.4.7 NULL Transfer Function ............................................................................................................
268
269
270
273
276
278
282
283
286
288
290
293
297
298
301
303
305
309
310
311
315
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST ............................................................................................... 317
14.1 Feature of USB HOST ....................................................................................................................
14.2 Restriction on USB HOST ..............................................................................................................
14.3 Block Diagram of USB HOST .........................................................................................................
14.4 Register of USB HOST ...................................................................................................................
14.4.1 Host Control Register 0,1(HCNT0/HCNT1) ...............................................................................
14.4.2 Host Interruption Register (HIRQ) .............................................................................................
14.4.3 Host Error Status Register (HERR) ...........................................................................................
14.4.4 Host State Status Register (HSTATE) .......................................................................................
14.4.5 SOF Interruption FRAME Comparison Register (HFCOMP) .....................................................
viii
318
319
320
321
324
328
331
334
337
14.4.6 Retry Timer Setting Register (HRTIMER) .................................................................................
14.4.7 Host Address Register (HADR) .................................................................................................
14.4.8 EOF Setting Register (HEOF) ...................................................................................................
14.4.9 FRAME Setting Register (HFRAME) .........................................................................................
14.4.10 Host Token Endpoint Register (HTOKEN) ................................................................................
14.5 Operation of USB HOST .................................................................................................................
14.5.1 Connection of Device ................................................................................................................
14.5.2 Reset of USB Bus ......................................................................................................................
14.5.3 Token Packet .............................................................................................................................
14.5.4 Data Packet ...............................................................................................................................
14.5.5 Handshake Packet ....................................................................................................................
14.5.6 Retry Function ...........................................................................................................................
14.5.7 SOF Interrupt .............................................................................................................................
14.5.8 Error Status ...............................................................................................................................
14.5.9 Packet End ................................................................................................................................
14.5.10 Suspend Resume ......................................................................................................................
14.5.11 Cutting of Device .......................................................................................................................
14.6 Each Token Flow Chart of USB HOST ...........................................................................................
338
339
340
341
342
344
345
347
348
350
351
352
353
355
356
357
360
361
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER ............................................................................................. 363
15.1 Overview of PWC Timer .................................................................................................................
15.2 Register of PWC Timer ...................................................................................................................
15.2.1 PWC Control Status Register (PWCSR) ...................................................................................
15.2.2 PWC Data Buffer Register (PWCR) ..........................................................................................
15.2.3 PWC Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register (DIVR) ......................................................
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer ...............................................................................................................
15.3.1 Operation of PWM Timer Functions ..........................................................................................
15.3.2 Operation of Pulse Width Measurement Function .....................................................................
15.3.3 Count Clock Selection and Operation Mode selection ..............................................................
15.3.4 Startup and Stop of Timer/Pulse Width Measurement ..............................................................
15.3.5 Operation of Timer Mode ...........................................................................................................
15.3.6 Operation of Pulse Width Measurement Mode ..........................................................................
15.4 Precautions when Using PWC Timer .............................................................................................
364
366
367
372
373
374
375
376
377
379
381
384
389
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER ........................................................................... 391
16.1 Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer .................................................................................................... 392
16.1.1 Function of 16-bit Reload Timer ................................................................................................ 393
16.1.2 Block Diagram of 16-bit Reload Timer ....................................................................................... 395
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer .................................................................................................... 396
16.2.1 Timer Control Status Register 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2) ................................................... 397
16.2.2 16-bit Timer Register 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)/16-bit Reload Register 0 to 2 (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
.................................................................................................................................................... 401
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer .................................................................................................. 403
16.3.1 State Transition of Counter Operation ....................................................................................... 404
16.3.2 Operation of Internal Clock Mode (Reload Mode) ..................................................................... 405
16.3.3 Operation of Internal Clock Mode (Single Shot Mode) .............................................................. 407
16.3.4 Event Count Mode ..................................................................................................................... 409
ix
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER ............................................................................... 411
17.1 Overview of 8/16-bit PPG Timer .....................................................................................................
17.1.1 Block Diagram of 8/16-bit PPG Timer .......................................................................................
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer .....................................................................................................
17.2.1 PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 Operation Mode Control Register (PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4) ....................
17.2.2 PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 Operation Mode Control Register (PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5) ....................
17.2.3 PPG0 to PPG5 Output Control Register (PPG01/PPG23/PPG45) ...........................................
17.2.4 PPG Reload Registers (PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to PRLH5) ..................................................
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer ....................................................................................................
412
413
415
416
418
421
423
424
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT ................................................................. 429
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
Overview of DTP/External Interrupt ................................................................................................
Register of DTP/External Interrupt ..................................................................................................
Operation of DTP/External Interrupt ...............................................................................................
Precaution of Using DTP/External Interrupt ....................................................................................
430
431
434
436
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER ..................................................................... 439
19.1 Overview of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ................................................................................................ 440
19.2 Configuration of 8/10-bit A/D Converter .......................................................................................... 441
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter .................................................................................................. 443
19.3.1 A/D Control Status Register (High) (ADCS1) ............................................................................ 444
19.3.2 A/D Control Status Register (Low) (ADCS0) ............................................................................. 446
19.3.3 A/D Conversion Channel Set Register (ADMR) ........................................................................ 448
19.3.4 A/D Data Register (ADCR1/ADCR0) ......................................................................................... 450
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ....................................................................... 452
19.4.1 Conversion Operation Using μDMAC or EI2OS ........................................................................ 455
19.4.2 A/D-converted Data Protection Function ................................................................................... 456
19.5 Precautions when Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter ............................................................................ 458
19.6 Example of program-1 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting the EI2OS in the Single Mode)
......................................................................................................................................................... 459
19.7 Example of Program-2 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting the EI2OS in the Continuous
Mode) .............................................................................................................................................. 462
19.8 Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting the EI2OS in the Stop Mode)
......................................................................................................................................................... 465
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE ..................................................... 469
20.1 Outline of Extended I/O Serial Interface .........................................................................................
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface .......................................................................................
20.2.1 Serial Mode Control Status Register (SMCS) ...........................................................................
20.2.2 Serial Data Register (SDR) .......................................................................................................
20.2.3 Communication Prescaler Control Register (SDCR) .................................................................
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface .....................................................................................
20.3.1 Shift Clock Mode .......................................................................................................................
20.3.2 Operation State of Serial I/O .....................................................................................................
20.3.3 Start/stop Timing of Shift Operation and Timing of I/O ..............................................................
20.3.4 Interrupt Function ......................................................................................................................
x
470
471
472
476
477
478
479
480
482
484
CHAPTER 21 UART ........................................................................................................ 485
21.1 Overview of UART .......................................................................................................................... 486
21.2 UART Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 488
21.3 UART Pins ...................................................................................................................................... 491
21.4 Register of UART ............................................................................................................................ 492
21.4.1 Serial Control Register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3) ......................................................................... 493
21.4.2 Serial Mode Register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3) ........................................................................... 495
21.4.3 Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3) ........................................................................... 497
21.4.4 Serial Input Data Register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) and Serial Output Data Register 0 to 3
(SODR0 to SODR3) .................................................................................................................. 500
21.4.5 UART Prescaler Control Register 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3) and UART Prescaler Reload Register
0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3) ..................................................................................................... 502
21.5 UART Interrupt ................................................................................................................................ 504
21.5.1 Receive Interrupt Generation and Flag Set Timing ................................................................... 506
21.5.2 Transmit Interrupt Generation and Flag Set Timing .................................................................. 508
21.6 UART Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................ 510
21.6.1 Baud Rate of the UART Internal Clock Using the Dedicated Baud Rate Generator ................. 511
21.6.2 Baud Rate of the External Clock Using the Dedicated Baud Rate Generator ........................... 512
21.6.3 Baud Rate of the External Clock (One-to-one Mode) ................................................................ 513
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART ................................................................................................. 514
21.7.1 Operation in Asynchronous Mode (Operation Mode 0 or Operation Mode 1) ........................... 516
21.7.2 Operation in Synchronous Mode (Operation Mode 2) ............................................................... 519
21.7.3 Bi-directional Communication Function (Normal Mode) ............................................................ 522
21.7.4 Master/Slave Mode Communication Function (Multi-processor Mode) ..................................... 524
21.8 Notes on Using UART .................................................................................................................... 527
21.9 Example of UART Programming .................................................................................................... 528
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 531
22.1 I2C Interface Outline .......................................................................................................................
22.2 I2C Interface Register .....................................................................................................................
22.2.1 I2C Bus Status Register 0 to 2 (IBSR0 to IBSR2) .....................................................................
22.2.2 I2C Bus Control Register 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2) ....................................................................
22.2.3 I2C Bus Clock Control Register 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to ICCR2) .........................................................
22.2.4 I2C Bus Address Register 0 to 2 (IADR0 to IADR2) ..................................................................
22.2.5 I2C Bus Data Register 0 to 2 (IDAR0 to IDAR2) ........................................................................
22.3 I2C Interface Operation ...................................................................................................................
22.3.1 Transfer Flow of I2C Interface ...................................................................................................
22.3.2 Mode Flow of I2C Interface ........................................................................................................
22.3.3 Operation Flow of I2C Interface .................................................................................................
532
534
535
537
542
544
545
546
548
550
551
CHAPTER 23 ROM MIRROR FUNCTION SELECTION MODULE ................................ 553
23.1
23.2
Overview of ROM Mirror Function Select Module .......................................................................... 554
ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM) .............................................................................. 555
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION ......................................... 557
24.1
24.2
Overview of Address Match Detection Function ............................................................................. 558
Block Diagram of Address Match Detection Function .................................................................... 559
xi
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function ......................................................................
24.3.1 Address Detection Control Register (PACSR) ..........................................................................
24.3.2 Detect Address Setting Registers (PADR0, PADR1) ................................................................
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function ....................................................
24.4.1 Example of Using Address Match Detection Function ..............................................................
24.5 Program Example of Address Match Detection Function ...............................................................
560
561
563
565
566
571
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY ..................................................................................... 573
25.1 Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................................
25.2 Sector Configuration of Flash Memory ...........................................................................................
25.3 Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS) .............................................................................
25.4 Automatic Algorithm Initiation Method of Flash Memory ................................................................
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm ........................................................................
25.5.1 Data Polling Flag (DQ7) ............................................................................................................
25.5.2 Toggle Bit Flag (DQ6) ................................................................................................................
25.5.3 Timing Limit Over Flag (DQ5) ....................................................................................................
25.5.4 Sector Erasing Timer Flag (DQ3) ..............................................................................................
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory .........................................................................................................
25.6.1 Read/Reset State in Flash Memory ...........................................................................................
25.6.2 Writing Data to Flash Memory ...................................................................................................
25.6.3 Erasing All Data from Flash Memory (Chip Erase) ....................................................................
25.6.4 Erasing Any Data in Flash Memory (Sector Erasing) ................................................................
25.6.5 Flash Memory Sector Erase Suspension ..................................................................................
25.6.6 Flash Memory Sector Erase Resumption ..................................................................................
574
575
577
579
580
582
584
585
586
587
588
589
591
592
594
595
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
(FLASH MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMER MODE by YOKOGAWA
DIGITAL COMPUTER CORPORATION) ................................................. 597
26.1 Basic Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 598
26.2 Oscillation Clock Frequency and Serial Clock Input Frequency ..................................................... 600
26.3 Flash Microcontroller Programmer System Configuration .............................................................. 601
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing ............................................................................................ 602
26.4.1 Example Connection in Single-chip Mode (when Using User Power) ....................................... 603
26.4.2 Example of Minimum Connection to Flash Microcontroller Programmer (when Using User Power)
.................................................................................................................................................... 605
CHAPTER 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
(FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS SERIAL PROGRAMMER) ................ 607
27.1 Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer ................................................................................... 608
27.1.1 Pins Used .................................................................................................................................. 612
APPENDIX ......................................................................................................................... 613
APPENDIX A Memory Map ........................................................................................................................
APPENDIX B Instructions ...........................................................................................................................
B.1 Instruction Types ............................................................................................................................
B.2 Addressing .....................................................................................................................................
B.3 Direct Addressing ...........................................................................................................................
xii
614
630
631
632
634
B.4 Indirect Addressing ........................................................................................................................
B.5 Execution Cycle Count ...................................................................................................................
B.6 Effective address field ....................................................................................................................
B.7 How to Read the Instruction List ....................................................................................................
B.8 F2MC-16LX Instruction List ............................................................................................................
B.9 Instruction Map ...............................................................................................................................
APPENDIX B
640
648
651
652
655
669
690
INDEX................................................................................................................................... 691
xiii
xiv
Main changes in this edition
Page
-
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
-
Changed USB.
USB Mini-Host → USB HOST
2, 5
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Feature of MB90330A
Series
Corrected the minimum instruction execution time.
41.6 ns → 41.7 ns
22
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.7 Precautions when Using
Devices
Added "● Serial communication".
24
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.1 Overview of the CPU
■ Overview of the CPU
Corrected the "● Minimum execution time".
• 41.7 ns / 6 MHz original oscillation four-time multiplication
(at 24 MHz/3.3 V ± 0.3 V internal operation)
• PLL clock multiplication method
→
• 41.7 ns (at machine clock 24MHz)
• The frequency of the machine clock varies depending on the model.
Changed the "● CPU-independent automatic transfer function".
• Extended intelligent I/O service function from maximum 16 channels
• μDMAC from maximum 16 channels
→
• Up to 16 channels of the extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
• Up to 16 channels of the DMA transfer (μDMAC)
• The DMA transfer (μDMAC) might not be built-in by the series.)
39
41
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
Corrected "Acceptable interrupt level" in Table 2.6-1.
Corrected title and content of section 2.6.5.
44
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.8 Prefix Codes
Corrected "Bank select prefix" of PC space in Table 2.8-1.
PCC → PCB
91
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
■ μDMAC Register List
Changed the Figure 3.8-1 μDMA Register List.
bit8 to bit15 → STP15 to STP8
bit0 to bit7 → STP7 to STP0
95
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
■ DMA Stop Status Register
(DSSR)
Changed the Notes.
Bit8 to Bit15 → STP15 to STP8
Bit0 to Bit7 → STP7 to STP0
203
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2.2 Port Direction Register
(DDR0 to DDRB)
Corrected the explanation of "● When each terminal functions as a port".
319
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.2 Restriction on USB HOST
Changed the description.
Diversity with USB HOST → Restriction on USB HOST
xv
Page
421
422
580
581
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG
TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG
Timer
■ PPG0 to PPG5 Output Control Register (PPG01/PPG23/
PPG45)
Corrected the operation mode column in the table "[bit 7 to bit 5] PCS2 to
PCS0: ppg Count Select (count clock selection)".
41.6 ns → 41.7 ns
CHAPTER 25
FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State
of Automatic Algorithm
Deleted "Toggle Bit 2 Flag (DQ2)".
586
Corrected the operation mode column in the table "[bit 4 to bit 2] PCM2 to
PCM0:ppg Count Mode (count clock selection)".
41.6 ns → 41.7 ns
Deleted "Toggle Bit 2 Flag (DQ2)" in Table 25.5-2.
Deleted "*" sentence under Table 25.5-2.
Deleted "25.5.5 Toggle Bit 2 Flag (DQ2)".
593
CHAPTER 25 FLASH
MEMORY
25.6.4 Erasing Any Data in
Flash Memory (Sector Erasing)
Corrected flowchart of figure 25.6-2.
636
B.3 Direct Addressing
● I/O direct addressing (io)
Changed Figure B.3-5.
(MOVW A, i : 0C0H → MOVW A, I:0C0H)
Added the note to Figure B.3-5.
637
B.3 Direct Addressing
● Abbreviated direct addressing (dir)
Added the note to Figure B.3-6.
638
B.3 Direct Addressing
● I/O direct bit addressing
(io:bp)
Changed Figure B.3-8.
(SETB i : 0C1H : 0 → SETB I:0C1H:0)
B.3 Direct Addressing
● Abbreviated direct bit
addressing (dir:bp)
Added the note to Figure B.3-9.
644
B.4 Indirect Addressing
● Program counter relative
branch addressing (rel)
Changed Figure B.4-7.
(BRA 10H → BRA 3C32H)
645
B.4 Indirect Addressing
● Register list (rlst)
Changed Figure B.4-9.
(POPW, RW0, RW4 → POPW RW0, RW4)
Added the note to Figure B.3-8.
xvi
Page
670
671
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
B.9 Instruction Map
■ Structure of Instruction Map
Changed column: instruction in Table B.9-1.
(@RW2+d8, #8, rel → CBNE @RW2+d8, #8, rel)
Changed the operand at row: +0, column: E0 in Table B.9-2.
(#4 → #vct4)
Changed the mnemonic at row: +0, column: D0 in Table B.9-2.
(MOV → MOVN)
Changed the mnemonic at row: +0, column: B0 in Table B.9-2.
(MOV → MOVX)
Changed the mnemonic at row: +8, column: B0 in Table B.9-2.
(MOV → MOVW)
673
Changed the mnemonic at row: +0, column: E0 in Table B.9-4.
(FILSI → FILSWI)
674
Changed Table B.9-5.
(· Moved "MUL A" and "MULW A" instruction from column:60 to column:70.
· Changed mnemonic and moved the Instruction from column:60, row:+A
to column:70, row:+A.
(DIVU → DIV))
675
Changed the operand at row: +E and +F, column: F0 in Table B.9-6.
(,#8, rel → #8, rel)
678
Changed the operand at row: +8 to +E, column: 50 in Table B.9-9.
(@@ → @)
Changed the operand at row: +0 to +7, column: 20 in Table B.9-9.
(RWi → @RWi)
679
Changed the operand at column: E0 and F0 in Table B.9-10.
(,r → ,rel)
680
Changed the operand at column: 70 in Table B.9-11.
(NEG A, → NEG)
681
Changed the operand at column: E0 and F0 in Table B.9-12.
(,r → ,rel)
689
Changed Table B.9-20 XCH Ri, ea Instruction (First Byte = 7EH).
(Column "A" → Column "A0",
Changed row "+A" ( W2+d16,A → @RW2+d16 ))
The vertical lines marked in the left side of the page show the changes.
xvii
xviii
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes basics to give the understanding
of the MB90330A series as a whole such as the features,
block diagrams, and overviews of the functions.
1.1 Feature of MB90330A Series
1.2 Block Diagram
1.3 Package Dimension
1.4 Pin Assignment
1.5 Pin Function
1.6 I/O Circuit Types
1.7 Precautions when Using Devices
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
1
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Feature of MB90330A Series
1.1
MB90330A Series
Feature of MB90330A Series
The MB90330A series are 16-bit microcontrollers designed for applications, such as
personal computer peripheral devices, that require USB communications. The USB
function enables not only 12-Mbps function operations but also simplified host
operations. It is equipped with functions that are suitable for personal computer
peripheral devices such as displays and audio devices, and control of mobile devices
that support USB communications.
■ Feature of MB90330A Series
In the MB90330A series, there are the following features.
● Built-in PLL clock multiplying circuit
• When the original oscillation is 6 MHz. Operating clock (PLL clock) of 3-24 MHz can be selected from:
divided-by-two of the original oscillation or 1-, 2-, or 4-times multiplication of the original oscillation.
A clock for USB is 48 MHz.
• Minimum instruction execution time of 41.7 ns (at oscillation of 6 MHz, four multiplied PLL clock,
operation at Vcc of 3.3 V)
● Maximum memory space: 16 Mbytes
● Instruction system optimized to control usage
• Data type which can be handled: bit/byte/word/long word
• Standard addressing mode: 23 types
• High-precision operation enhanced by the employed 32-bit accumulator
• Signed multiplication and division, and enhanced RETI instructions
● Instruction system that supports high-level language (C language) multitasking
• Adoption of system stack point
• Instruction set symmetry and barrel shift instructions
● For no multi-bus/multi-bus
● Higher execution speed: 4-byte queue
● Powerful interrupt function (priority is programmable and can be set to eight levels): 8 external
interrupts
● Data transfer function
• μDMAC: maximum 16 channels
• Extended intelligent I/O service function: maximum 16 channels
2
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Feature of MB90330A Series
MB90330A Series
● Capacity of built-in ROM and ROM type
• Mask ROM:256 Kbytes, 384 Kbytes
• Flash ROM:384 Kbytes
● Built-in RAM
• Mass production products:16 Kbytes, 24 Kbytes
• Flash products:24 Kbytes, 30 Kbytes
• Evaluation chip: 28 Kbytes
● Process: CMOS technology
● Low-power consumption (standby) mode
• Sleep mode (mode by which the CPU operation clock is stopped)
• Stop mode (mode by which original oscillation is stopped)
• CPU intermittent operation mode
● Package
• LQFP-120 (FPT-120P-M24:0.4 mm pin pitch)
• LQFP-120 (FPT-120P-M21:0.5 mm pin pitch)
● Operation guaranteed temperature:
- 40 °C to +85 °C (0 °C to +70 °C when USB is in use)
● General-purpose: maximum 94 ports
General-purpose I/O (CMOS):56 ports
General-purpose I/O ports (input pull-up resistor settable): 16 ports
General-purpose I/O ports (output open drain/5 V tolerant I/O ports): 22 ports
● Timer: Time-base timer/watchdog timer/clock timer: One channel
● 16-bit I/O timer
• 16-bit free-run timer: 1 channel
• Input capture (ICU): 4 channels
• Output compare (OCU): 4 channels
● 8/16-bit PPG timer: 8 bits x 16 channels or 16 bits x 3 channels
● 16-bit reload timer: 3 channels
● 16 bit PWC timer: 1channel
● UART:4 channels
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
3
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Feature of MB90330A Series
MB90330A Series
● Extended I/O serial interface: 1 channel
● I2C interface: 3 channels
● 8/10-bit A/D converter (RC sequential comparator type):16 channels
● DTP/external interrupt: 8 channels
● USB
• USB function (Correspond to USB Full Speed):1 channel
• USB HOST:1 channel
4
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Feature of MB90330A Series
MB90330A Series
■ Product Lineup
Table 1.1-1 MB90330A Series Product Lineup List (1 / 2)
Product name
MB90V330A *
MB90F334A
MB90F335A
MB90333A
Evaluation
product
Flash memory
product
Flash memory
product
MASK ROM
products
ROM size
None
384 Kbytes
512Kbytes
256 Kbytes
RAM size
28 Kbytes
24 Kbytes
30 Kbytes
16 Kbytes
Power supply for emulator
Provided
-
-
-
Classification
CPU function
Number of basic instructions:
Instruction bit length:
Minimum instruction execution time:
Addressing type:
Maximum size of memory space:
Port
Input/output port (CMOS) : 94
16 bit
Input/Output
Timers
351
8 bits, 16 bits
41.7 ns/24 MHz
23 types
16 Mbytes
16-bit free-run timer
Channel count: 1
Overflow interrupt
Output
Comparison (OCU)
Channel count: 4
Pin input factor: matching signal of the compare register
Input
Capture (ICU)
Channel count: 4
Rewriting a register upon a pin input (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges)
8/16-bit PPG timer
Number of channels: 8 bits x 6 channels, 16 bits x 3 channels with mode
switching function
PPG operations of byte or 16 bits
Pulse waveform output at arbitrary cycle and duty
16-bit reload timer
Channel count: 3
16-bit reload timer operation
With Event Counter
16-bit PWC timer
Channel count: 1
Timer function (selects one clock for a counter from three internal clocks)
Pulse width measurement function (selects one clock for a counter from three
internal clocks)
UART
Channel count: 4
Clock synchronous/asynchronous selectable
Dedicated baud rate generator
Clock synchronizer LSB and MSB can be switched.
I/O Extended serial interface
Channel count: 1
Clock synchronous transfer
LSB first/MSB first
I2C bus communication
Channel count: 3
Serial I/O by which Inter IC BUS is supported
8/10-bit A/D converter
10-bit resolution analog input 16 channels
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
5
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Feature of MB90330A Series
MB90330A Series
Table 1.1-1 MB90330A Series Product Lineup List (2 / 2)
Product name
MB90V330A *
MB90F334A
MB90F335A
MB90333A
DTP/external interrupt
Input count: 8
Interrupt factor: rising edge/falling edge/"L" level/"H" level selectable
USB
USB Function (Corresponding to USB Full Speed)
Supports Full speed
Endpoint are specifiable up to six.
Transfer type: Control, Interrupt, Bulk, or Isochronous transfer possible
Dual port RAM (The FIFO mode is supported).
USB HOST Functions
μDMAC
Corresponded
External bus interface
It is (multi/no multi correspondence).
The others
22 I/O pins with 5 V tolerant (including pins also used for I2C)
Package
PGA299
Operating voltage
LQFP120
3.3 V ± 0.3 V
*: It is setting of Jumper switch (TOOL VCC) when Emulator (MB2147-01) is used. Please refer to the MB2147-01 or
MB2147-20 hardware manual (3.3 Emulator-dedicated Power Supply Switching) about details.
Note:
Writing to the Flash, be sure to perform VCC=3.13 V to 3.60 V more than.
6
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.2 Block Diagram
MB90330A Series
1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 1.2-1 shows the block diagram of a MB90330A series.
■ Block Diagram of the MB90330A Series
Figure 1.2-1 Block Diagram of the MB90330A Series
X0,X1
X0A,X1A
RST
Clock
control circuit
CPU
2
F MC-16LX core
Port 6
RAM(28Kbyte)*
ROM(384Kbyte)*
16-bit PWC
timer
Interrupt controller
Extended I/O serial
interface
Port B
PB6/PPG5
PB5/PPG4
PB4
PB3/SDA2
PB2/SCL2
PB1/SDA1
PB0/SCL1
P67/INT7/SDA0
P66/INT6/SCL0
P65/INT5/PWC
P64/INT4/SCK
P63/INT3/SOT
P62/INT2/SIN
P61/INT1
P60/INT0
External interrupt
(ch.0 to 7)
8/16-bit PPG
timer (ch.2)
2
I C interface
(ch.0)
I2C interface
(ch.1,2)
P57/CLK
P56/RDY
P55/HAK
P54/HRQ
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
Port 5
Port A
16-bit output
compare
(ch.0,1,2,3)
16-bit free-run
timer
Port 4
P47/A15/SCK1
P46/A14/SOT1
P45/A13/SIN1
P44/A12/SCK0
P43/A11/SOT0
P42/A10/SIN0
P41/A09/TOT0
P40/A08/TIN0
UART(ch.0,1)
16-bit reload
timer (ch.0)
2
P96/ADTG/FRCK
P95/SCK3
P94/SOT3
P93/SIN3
P92/SCK2
P91/SOT2
P90/SIN2
16-bit input
capture
(ch.0,1,2,3)
F MC-16LX BUS
PA7/OUT3
PA6/OUT2
PA5/OUT1
PA4/OUT0
PA3/IN3
PA2/IN2
PA1/IN1
PA0/IN0
P37/A07
P36/A06
P35/A05
P34/A04
P33/A03/TOT2
P32/A02/TIN2
P31/A01/TOT1
P30/A00/TIN1
Port 3
UART(ch.2,3)
16-bit reload
timer (ch.1,2)
Port 9
P87 to P80/
AN15 to AN8
AVcc, AVss
AVRH
P77 to P70/
AN7 to AN0
DVP
DVM
HVP
HVM
HCON
UTEST
Port 8
A/D converter
(16ch)
P27/A23/PPG3
P26/A22/PPG2
P25/A21/PPG1
P24/A20/PPG0
P23/A19
P22/A18
P21/A17
P20/A16
P17 to P10/
AD15 to AD08/
D15 to D08
Port 2
8/16-bit PPG
(ch.0,1)
Port 7
USB HOST
Port 1
USB function
P07 to P00/
AD07 to AD00/
D07 to D00
Port 0
Other pins
External bus
interface
Vss Vcc
MD0
MD1
MD2
*: Maximum value
Note:
In Figure 1.2-1, I/O ports share pins with each of built-in functional blocks. Any port used for built-in
module pin cannot be used as an I/O port.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
7
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.3 Package Dimension
1.3
MB90330A Series
Package Dimension
MB90330A series is available in two types of package.
■ Package Dimension (LQFP-120)
Figure 1.3-1 Package Dimension of LQFP-120 Type
120-pin plastic LQFP
Lead pitch
0.40 mm
Package width ×
package length
14.0 mm × 14.0 mm
Lead shape
Gullwing
Sealing method
Plastic mold
Mounting height
1.70 mm MAX
Code
(Reference)
P-LFQFP120-14×14-0.40
(FPT-120P-M24)
120-pin plastic LQFP
(FPT-120P-M24)
Note 1) * : These dimensions do not include resin protrusion.
Note 2) Pins width and pins thickness include plating thickness.
Note 3) Pins width do not include tie bar cutting remainder.
16.00±0.20(.630±.008)SQ
* 14.00±0.10(.551±.004)SQ
90
61
91
60
0.08(.003)
Details of "A" part
+0.20
1.50 –0.10
+.008
(Mounting height)
.059 –.004
INDEX
120
31
"A"
0~8˚
LEAD No.
1
0.40(.016)
30
0.16±0.05
(.006±.002)
0.07(.003)
M
0.145±0.055
(.006±.002)
0.50±0.20
(.020±.008)
0.60±0.15
(.024±.006)
©2006-2008
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED F120036S-c-1-2
C
2006 FUJITSU LIMITED F120036S-c-1-1
0.10±0.10
(.004±.004)
(Stand off)
0.25(.010)
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
Please check the latest package dimension at the following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/package/en-search/
8
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.3 Package Dimension
MB90330A Series
■Package Dimension (LQFP-120)
Figure 1.3-2 Package Dimension of LQFP-120 Type
120-pin plastic LQFP
Lead pitch
0.50 mm
Package width ×
package length
16.0 × 16.0 mm
Lead shape
Gullwing
Sealing method
Plastic mold
Mounting height
1.70 mm MAX
Weight
0.88 g
Code
(Reference)
P-LFQFP120-16×16-0.50
(FPT-120P-M21)
120-pin plastic LQFP
(FPT-120P-M21)
Note 1) * : These dimensions do not include resin protrusion.
Resin protrusion is +0.25(.010) MAX(each side).
Note 2) Pins width and pins thickness include plating thickness.
Note 3) Pins width do not include tie bar cutting remainder.
18.00±0.20(.709±.008)SQ
+0.40
* 16.00 –0.10 .630 +.016
–.004 SQ
90
61
60
91
0.08(.003)
Details of "A" part
+0.20
1.50 –0.10
+.008
(Mounting height)
.059 –.004
INDEX
0~8˚
120
LEAD No.
"A"
31
1
30
0.50(.020)
0.22±0.05
(.009±.002)
0.08(.003)
M
©2002-2008
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED F120033S-c-4-5
C
2002 FUJITSU LIMITED F120033S-c-4-4
0.145
.006
+0.05
–0.03
+.002
–.001
0.60±0.15
(.024±.006)
0.10±0.05
(.004±.002)
(Stand off)
0.25(.010)
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
Please check the latest package dimension at the following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/package/en-search/
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
9
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.4 Pin Assignment
1.4
MB90330A Series
Pin Assignment
Figure 1.4-1 shows the pin assignments of a MB90330A series.
■ Pin Assignment (LQFP-120)
Figure 1.4-1 Pin Assignments of the MB90330A Series (LQFP-120)
P56/RDY
P57/CLK
P00/AD00/D00
P01/AD01/D01
P02/AD02/D02
P03/AD03/D03
P04/AD04/D04
P05/AD05/D05
P06/AD06/D06
P07/AD07/D07
P10/AD08/D08
P11/AD09/D09
P12/AD10/D10
P13/AD11/D11
Vcc
Vss
X1
X0
P14/AD12/D12
P15/AD13/D13
P16/AD14/D14
P17/AD15/D15
P20/A16
P21/A17
P22/A18
P23/A19
P24/A20/PPG0
P25/A21/PPG1
P26/A22/PPG2
P27/A23/PPG3
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
P30/A00/TIN1
P31/A01/TOT1
P32/A02/TIN2
P33/A03/TOT2
P34/A04
P35/A05
P36/A06
P37/A07
P40/A08/TIN0
P41/A09/TOT0
P42/A10/SIN0
P43/A11/SOT0
X0A
X1A
Vcc
Vss
P44/A12/SCK0
P45/A13/SIN1
P46/A14/SOT1
P47/A15/SCK1
P60/INT0
P61/INT1
P62/INT2/SIN
P63/INT3/SOT
P64/INT4/SCK
P65/INT5/PWC
P66/INT6/SCL0
P67/INT7/SDA0
P90/SIN2
P91/SOT2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
MB90330A series
TOP VIEW
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
RST
MD0
MD1
MD2
P55/HAK
P54/HRQ
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
HCON
Vcc
HVP
HVM
Vss
Vcc
DVP
DVM
Vss
UTEST
PB6/PPG5
PB5/PPG4
PB4
PB3/SDA2
PB2/SCL2
PB1/SDA1
PB0/SCL1
PA7/OUT3
PA6/OUT2
PA5/OUT1
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
PA4/OUT0
PA3/IN3
PA2/IN2
PA1/IN1
PA0/IN0
P87/AN15
P86/AN14
P85/AN13
P84/AN12
P83/AN11
P82/AN10
P81/AN9
P80/AN8
Vss
P77/AN7
P76/AN6
P75/AN5
P74/AN4
P73/AN3
P72/AN2
P71/AN1
P70/AN0
AVss
AVRH
AVcc
P96/ADTG/FRCK
P95/SCK3
P94/SOT3
P93/SIN3
P92/SCK2
10
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5 Pin Function
MB90330A Series
1.5
Pin Function
Table 1.5-1 describes the MB90330A series pin functions.
■ Pin Function
Table 1.5-1 Pin Function (1 / 6)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Circuit Type
107
X1
A
It is oscillation pin.
108
X0
A
It is oscillation pin.
13
X0A
A
It is 32 kHz oscillation pin.
14
X1A
A
It is 32 kHz oscillation pin.
90
RST
F
It is reset input.
It is General-purpose I/O port.
You can set a pull-up resistor ON (RD00 to RD07= 1) with the pull-up resistor
setting register (RDR0) (When the power output is set, it is invalid).
P00 to P07
93 to 100
101 to
104
109 to
112
AD00 to AD07
Functional description
H
Functions as an I/O pin for the low-order external address/data bus in multiplex
mode.
D00 to D07
Functions as an I/O pin for the low-order external data bus in non-multiplex
mode.
P10 to P13
It is General-purpose I/O port.
You can set a pull-up resistor ON (RD10 to RD13= 1) with the pull-up resistor
setting register (RDR1) (When the power output is set, it is invalid).
AD08 to AD11
H
Functions as an I/O pin for the high-order external address/data bus in multiplex
mode.
D08 to D11
Functions as an I/O pin for the high-order external data bus in non-multiplex
mode.
P14 to P17
It is General-purpose I/O port.
You can set a pull-up resistor ON (RD14 to RD17= 1) with the pull-up resistor
setting register (RDR1) (When the power output is set, it is invalid)
AD12 to AD15
D12 to D15
CM44-10129-6E
H
Functions as an I/O pin for the high-order external address/data bus in multiplex
mode.
Functions as an I/O pin for the high-order external data bus in non-multiplex
mode.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
11
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5 Pin Function
MB90330A Series
Table 1.5-1 Pin Function (2 / 6)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Circuit Type
It is General-purpose I/O port.
Functions as the general-purpose input/output port in the external bus mode if the
bit corresponding to external address output control register (HACR) is set to
"1".
P20 to P23
113 to
116
117 to
120
A16 to A19
D
Functions as the upper output pin of an address (A16 to A19) in the nonmultiplex mode if the bit corresponding to external address output control
register (HACR) is set to "0".
P24 to P27
It is General-purpose I/O port.
Functions as the general-purpose input/output port in the external bus mode if the
bit corresponding to external address output control register (HACR) is set to
"1".
A20 to A23
Functions as the upper output pin of an address (A20 to A23) in the multiplex
mode if the bit corresponding to external address output control register (HACR)
is set to "0".
D
Functions as the upper output pin of an address (A20 to A23) in the nonmultiplex mode if the bit corresponding to external address output control
register (HACR) is set to "0".
PPG0 to PPG3
Function as ch.0 to ch.3 output pins for the PPG timer.
P30
A00
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
TIN1
A01
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
TOT1
A02
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
TIN2
A03
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
TOT2
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
A04 to A07
12
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as an output pin for 16-bit reload timer ch.2.
P34 to P37
5 to 8
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as an event input pin for 16-bit reload timer ch.2.
P33
4
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as an output pin for 16-bit reload timer ch.1.
P32
3
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as an event input pin for 16-bit reload timer ch.1.
P31
2
Functions as the upper output pin of an address (A16 to A19) in the multiplex
mode if the bit corresponding to external address output control register (HACR)
is set to "0".
A16 to A19
A20 to A23
1
Functional description
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5 Pin Function
MB90330A Series
Table 1.5-1 Pin Function (3 / 6)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Circuit Type
P40
9
A08
It is General-purpose I/O port.
G
TIN0
A09
It is General-purpose I/O port.
G
TOT0
12
A10
It is General-purpose I/O port.
G
Functions as a data input pin for UART ch.0.
P43
It is General-purpose I/O port.
A11
G
A12
It is General-purpose I/O port.
G
SCK0
19
It is General-purpose I/O port.
G
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
SIN1
Functions as a data input pin for UART ch.1.
P46
It is General-purpose I/O port.
A14
G
SOT1
A15
It is General-purpose I/O port.
G
SCK1
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as a clock I/O pin for UART ch.1.
P50
81
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as a data output pin for UART ch.1.
P47
20
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as a clock I/O pin for UART ch.0.
P45
A13
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as a data output pin for UART ch.0.
P44
18
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
SIN0
SOT0
17
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as an output pin for 16-bit reload timer ch.0.
P42
11
Functions as the external address pin in non-multi-bus mode.
Functions as an event input pin for 16-bit reload timer ch.0.
P41
10
Functional description
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
ALE
Functions as the address latch enable signal (ALE) pin in external bus mode.
P51
82
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
RD
Functions as the read strobe output (RDX) pin in external bus mode.
P52
It is General-purpose I/O port.
83
L
WRL
CM44-10129-6E
Functions as the data write strobe output (WRLX) pin on the lower side in
external bus mode. Functions as a general-purpose I/O port when the WRE bit in
the EPCR register is "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
13
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5 Pin Function
MB90330A Series
Table 1.5-1 Pin Function (4 / 6)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Circuit Type
P53
84
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
WRH
P54
85
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
Functions as the hold request input (HRQ) pin in external bus mode. Functions as
a general-purpose I/O port when the HDE bit in the EPCR register is "0".
P55
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
HAK
P56
91
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
Functions as the external ready input (RDY) pin in external bus mode. Functions
as a general-purpose I/O port when the RYE bit in the EPCR register is "0".
P57
It is General-purpose I/O port.
L
CLK
P60, P61
21, 22
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.0, ch.1.
P62
26
INT2
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.2.
SIN
It is extended serial I/O data output pin.
P63
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
INT3
C
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.3.
SOT
It is simple serial I/O data output pin.
P64
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
INT4
C
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.4.
SCK
It is extended serial I/O clock input/output pin.
P65
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
INT5
PWC
14
Functions as the machine cycle clock output (CLK) pin in external bus mode.
Functions as a general-purpose I/O port when the CKE bit in the EPCR register
is "0".
C
INT0, INT1
25
Functions as the hold acknowledge output (HAKX) pin in external bus mode.
Functions as a general-purpose I/O port when the HDE bit in the EPCR register
is "0".
RDY
92
24
Functions as the data write strobe output (WRHX) pin on the higher side in 16bit external bus mode. Functions as a general-purpose I/O port when the WRE bit
in the EPCR register is "0".
HRQ
86
23
Functional description
C
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.5.
Functions as the PWC input pin.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5 Pin Function
MB90330A Series
Table 1.5-1 Pin Function (5 / 6)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Circuit Type
P66
27
INT6
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
P67
INT7
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
P70 to P77
It is General-purpose I/O port.
I
AN0 to AN7
Function as input pins for analog ch.0 to ch.7.
P80 to P87
48 to 55
It is General-purpose I/O port.
I
AN8 to AN15
Function as input pins for analog ch.8 to ch.15.
P90
29
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
SIN2
Functions as a data input pin for UART ch.2.
P91
30
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
SOT2
Functions as a data output pin for UART ch.2.
P92
31
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
SCK2
Functions as a clock I/O pin for UART ch.2.
P93
32
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
SIN3
Functions as a data input pin for UART ch.3.
P94
33
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
SOT3
Functions as a data output pin for UART ch.3.
P95
34
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
SCK3
Functions as a clock I/O pin for UART ch.3.
P96
35
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.7.
Functions as the data I/O pin for the I2C interface ch.0.
Set port output to Hi-Z during I2C interface operations.
SDA0
39 to 46
Function as input pins for external interrupt ch.6.
Functions as the clock I/O pin for the I2C interface ch.0.
Set port output to Hi-Z during I2C interface operations.
SCL0
28
Functional description
ADTG
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
FRCK
Functions as the external clock input pin when the free-run timer is being used.
PA0 to PA3
56 to 59
Functions as the external trigger input pin when the A/D converter is being used.
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
IN0 to IN3
Captures as trigger input for ch.0 to ch.3 of the input capture.
PA4 to PA7
60 to 63
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
OUT0 to OUT3
CM44-10129-6E
Functions as the event output pins for ch.0 to ch.3 of the output compare.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
15
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5 Pin Function
MB90330A Series
Table 1.5-1 Pin Function (6 / 6)
Pin No.
Pin Name
Circuit Type
PB0
64
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
C
SCL1
PB1
65
C
PB2
C
PB3
PB4
C
Functions as the data I/O pin for the I2C interface ch.2. Set port output to Hi-Z
during I2C interface operations.
C
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
PB5
69
Functions as the clock I/O pin for the I2C interface ch.2. Set port output to Hi-Z
during I2C interface operations.
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
SDA2
68
Functions as the data I/O pin for the I2C interface ch.1. Set port output to Hi-Z
during I2C interface operations.
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
SCL2
67
Functions as the clock I/O pin for the I2C interface ch.1. Set port output to Hi-Z
during I2C interface operations.
It is General-purpose I/O port (Withstand voltage of 5 V).
SDA1
66
Functional description
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
PPG4
Function as ch.4 output pins for the PPG timer.
PB6
70
It is General-purpose I/O port.
D
PPG5
Function as ch.5 output pins for the PPG timer.
71
UTEST
C
It is USB test pin. Requires a pull-down connection in normal use.
73
DVM
K
It is USB Function D- pin.
74
DVP
K
It is USB Function D + pin.
77
HVM
K
It is USB HOST D- pin.
78
HVP
K
It is USB HOST D + pin.
80
HCON
E
It is external pull-up resistor pin.
36
AVcc
-
It is A/D converter power supply pin.
37
AVRH
J
It is A/D converter external reference power supply pin.
38
AVss
-
It is A/D converter power supply pin.
87 to 89
MD2 to MD0
B
It is Operation mode select input pin.
15, 75,
79, 105
Vcc
-
It is power supply pin.
16, 47,
72, 76,
106
Vss
-
It is power supply pin (GND).
16
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.6 I/O Circuit Types
MB90330A Series
1.6
I/O Circuit Types
Table 1.6-1 shows I/O circuit types for pins of a MB90330A series.
■ I/O Circuit Types
Table 1.6-1 I/O Circuit Types (1 / 3)
Classification
Circuit
Remarks
A
X1,X1A
Clock Input
P-ch N-ch
• Oscillation return resistance:
X1, X0 approximately 1 MΩ
X1A,X0A 10 MΩ
• With standby control
X0,X0A
Standby control signal
B
CMOS hysteresis input
CMOS hysteresis input
C
• CMOS hysteresis input
• N-ch open drain output
N-ch
N-ch open drain output
CMOS hysteresis input
Standby control signal
D
• CMOS output
• CMOS hysteresis input
• With standby control
P-ch
N-ch
CMOS hysteresis input
Standby control signal
E
CM44-10129-6E
CMOS output
P-ch
Pout
N-ch
Nout
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
17
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.6 I/O Circuit Types
MB90330A Series
Table 1.6-1 I/O Circuit Types (2 / 3)
Classification
Circuit
Remarks
F
• CMOS hysteresis input with pull-up
• Resistance: Approximately 50 kΩ
R
CMOS hysteresis input
G
P-ch
Open drain control signal
N-ch
•
•
•
•
CMOS output
CMOS hysteresis input
With open drain control
With standby control
•
•
•
•
•
CMOS output
CMOS input
With input pull-up resistor control
Resistance: Approximately 50 kΩ
With standby control
•
•
•
•
CMOS output
CMOS hysteresis input
With standby control
Analog input
CMOS hysteresis input
Standby control signal
H
Control signal
P-ch
N-ch
CMOS input
Standby control signal
I
P-ch
N-ch
Analog input
CMOS hysteresis input
Standby control signal
J
A/D converter voltage input pin
P-ch
N-ch
18
Analog input
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.6 I/O Circuit Types
MB90330A Series
Table 1.6-1 I/O Circuit Types (3 / 3)
Classification
Circuit
Remarks
K
D+ Input
USB I/O pins
D- Input
D+
D-
Differential input
Full D+ Output
Full D- Output
Low D+ Output
Low D- Output
direction
speed
L
P-ch
Pout
N-ch
Nout
• CMOS output
• CMOS input
(With input interception function at standby)
CMOS input
Standby control signal
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
19
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.7 Precautions when Using Devices
1.7
MB90330A Series
Precautions when Using Devices
This section describes the precautions when using devices.
■ Precautions when Using Devices
● Preventing Latch-up, Turning on Power Supply
Latch-up may occur on CMOS IC under the following conditions:
• If a voltage higher than VCC or lower than VSS is applied to input and output pins,
• If a voltage higher than the rated voltage is applied between VCC pin to VSS pin,
• If the AVCC power supply is turned on before the VCC voltage.
Ensure that you apply a voltage to the analog power supply at the same time as VCC or after you turn on the
digital power supply (when you perform power-off, turn off the analog power supply first or at the same
time as VCC and the digital power supply).
When latch-up occurs, power supply current increases rapidly and might thermally damage elements. When
using CMOS IC, take great care to prevent the occurrence of latch-up.
● Treatment of Unused Pins
Leaving unused input pins unconnected can cause abnormal operation or latch-up, leading to permanent
damage.
Unused input pins should always be pulled up or down through resistance of at least 2 kΩ. Any unused
input/output pins may be set to output mode and left open, or set to input mode and treated the same as
unused input pins. If there is unused output pin, make it to open.
● Treatment of Power Supply Pins on Models with A/D Converters
Even when the A/D converters are not in use, be sure to make the necessary connections AVCC = AVRH =
VCC and AVSS = VSS.
● Treatment of Power Supply Pins (VCC/VSS)
In products with multiple VCC or VSS pins, the pins of the same potential are internally connected in the
device to avoid abnormal operations including latch-up. However, you must connect the pins to external
power supply and a ground line to lower the electro-magnetic emission level, to prevent abnormal
operation of strobe signals caused by the rise in the ground level, and to conform to the total output current
rating.
Moreover, connect the current supply source with the VCC and VSS pins of this device at the low
impedance.
It is also advisable to connect a ceramic bypass capacitor of approximately 0.1 μF between VCC and VSS
near this device.
20
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.7 Precautions when Using Devices
MB90330A Series
● About Crystal oscillator circuit
Noise near the X0/X1 pins and X0A/X1A pins may cause the device to malfunction. Design the printed
circuit board so that X0/X1 pins and X0A/X1A pins, the crystal oscillator (or the ceramic oscillator) and
the bypass capacitor to ground are located as close to the device as possible.
It is strongly recommended to design the PC board artwork with the X0/X1 pins and X0A/X1A pins
surrounded by ground plane because stable operation can be expected with such a layout.
Please ask the crystal maker to evaluate the oscillational characteristics of the crystal and this device.
● Note on using external clock
If you are using the external clock, you must connect external pins as shown in the Figure 1.7-1.
Figure 1.7-1 illustrates an external clock usage. (under f=7 MHz)
Figure 1.7-1 Method for Using External Clock
X0
OPEN
X1
● Stabilization of Supply Voltage
A sudden change in the supply voltage may cause the device to malfunction even within the VCC supply
voltage operating range. For stabilization reference, the supply voltage should be stabilized so that VCC ripple
variations (peak-to-peak value) at commercial frequencies (50 Hz to 60 Hz) fall below 10% of the standard
VCC supply voltage and the transient regulation does not exceed 0.1 V/ms at temporary changes such as
power supply switching.
● Crystal oscillator circuit of low voltage use
If you are using the device with voltages of 2.0 V or less, the external crystal oscillator may not oscillate at
power-on. Therefore, It will recommend the use of the external clock.
● When the dual-supply is used as a single-supply device.
If you are using only a single-system of the MB90330A series that come in the dual-system product, use it
with X0A=VSS: X1A=OPEN.
● Writing to flash memory
For serial writing to flash memory, always make sure that the operating voltage VCC is between 3.13 V and
3.6 V.
For normal writing to flash memory, always make sure that the operating voltage VCC is between 3.0 V and
3.6 V.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
21
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.7 Precautions when Using Devices
MB90330A Series
Ensure that you must write to Flash at the operation voltage VCC of 3.0 V to 3.60 V.
● Caution on Operations during PLL Clock Mode
On this microcontroller, if in case the crystal oscillator breaks off or an external reference clock input stops
while the PLL clock mode is selected, a self-oscillator circuit contained in the PLL may continue its
operation at its self-running frequency. However, Fujitsu will not guarantee results of operations if such
failure occurs.
● Serial communication
There is a possibility to receive wrong data due to noise or other causes on the serial communication.
Therefore, design a printed circuit board so as to avoid noise.
Consider receiving of wrong data when designing the system. For example, apply a checksum to detect an
error. If an error is detected, retransmit the data.
22
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2
CPU
This chapter explains the setting and operation of the
CPU.
2.1 Overview of the CPU
2.2 Memory Space
2.3 Linear Addressing
2.4 Bank Addressing
2.5 Multibyte Data in Memory Space
2.6 Registers
2.7 Register Bank
2.8 Prefix Codes
2.9 Interrupt Disable Instructions
Code: CM44-00101-2E
Page: 24, 24
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
23
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.1 Overview of the CPU
2.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of the CPU
The F2MC-16LX CPU core is a 16-bit CPU designed for applications that require highspeed real-time processing, such as consumer or vehicle-mounted equipments. The
F2MC-16LX instruction set is designed for controller applications, and is capable of
high-speed, highly efficient control processing.
■ Overview of the CPU
In addition to 16-bit data, the F2MC-16LX CPU core can process 32-bit data using an internal 32-bit
accumulator. Up to 16Mbytes of memory space (expandable) can be used, which can be accessed by either
the linear pointer or bank method. The instruction set, based on the F2MC-8L A-T architecture, has been
reinforced by adding instructions compatible with high-level languages, expanding addressing modes,
reinforcing multiplication and division instructions, and enhancing bit processing.
The features of the F2MC-16LX CPU are explained below:
● Minimum execution time
• 41.7 ns (at machine clock 24MHz)
• The frequency of the machine clock varies depending on the model.
● Maximum memory space
16Mbytes, accessed in linear or bank method
● Instruction set optimized for controller applications
• Rich data types: Bit, byte, word, long word
• Extended addressing modes: 23 types
• Reinforced high-precision operation (32-bit length) with 32-bit accumulator
● Powerful interrupt function
8 priority levels (programmable)
● CPU-independent automatic transfer function
• Up to 16 channels of the extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
• Up to 16 channels of the DMA transfer (μDMAC)
• The DMA transfer (μDMAC) might not be built-in by the series.
● Instruction set for high-level language (C language)/multitask
System stack pointer/instruction set symmetry/barrel-shift instructions
● Higher execution speed
4-byte queue
24
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.2 Memory Space
MB90330A Series
2.2
Memory Space
F2MC-16LX CPU has the memory space of 16Mbytes.
■ Overview of CPU Memory Space
An F2MC-16LX CPU has 16Mbytes of memory space where all data program I/Os managed by the F2MC16LX CPU are located. The CPU accesses the resources by indicating their addresses using a 24-bit address
bus.
Figure 2.2-1 shows a sample relationship between the F2MC-16LX system and memory map.
Figure 2.2-1 Sample Relationship between F2MC-16LX System and Memory Map
F2MC-16LX device
FFFFFFH
FFFC00H
Programs
Vector table area
ROM area
Program area
FF0000H*1
100000H
External area*3
010000H
ROM area
(FF bank image)
008000H
2
F MC-16LX
CPU
Internal Data Bus
Peripheral circuits
I/O area
007900H
001900H*2
Data
EI2OS
000380H
000180H
000100H
Data area
General-purpose registers
RAM area
2
EI OS
descriptor area
External area*3
Peripheral circuits
Interrupts
0000F0H
0000C0H
0000B0H
Peripheral circuits
General-purpose
ports
000020H
000000H
Peripheral function
control register area
Interrupt control
register area
Peripheral function
control register area
I/O port control
register area
I/O area
*1: The size of the built-in ROM varies depending on the model.
*2: The size of the built-in RAM varies depending on the model.
*3: Access is not possible in single chip mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
25
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.2 Memory Space
MB90330A Series
■ ROM Area
● Vector table area (address: FFFC00H to FFFFFFH)
• This area is used as a vector table for the reset, interrupt, and CALLV vectors.
• This area is allocated at the highest addresses of the ROM area. The start address of the corresponding
processing routine is set as data in each vector table address.
● Program area (address: Up to FFFBFFH)
• ROM is built in as an internal program area.
• The size of internal ROM varies depending on the model.
■ RAM Area
● Data area (address: 000100H to 0018FFH (for 6Kbytes))
• The static RAM is built in as an internal data area.
• The size of internal RAM varies depending on the model.
● General-purpose register area (address: 000180H to 00037FH)
• Auxiliary registers, used for 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit arithmetic operations and transfer, are allocated in
this area.
• Since this area is allocated to a part of the RAM area, it can be used as ordinary RAM.
• When this area is used as a general-purpose register, general-purpose register addressing enables high
speed access with short instructions.
● Extended intelligent I/O service (El2OS) descriptor area (address: 0000100H to 00017FH)
• This area retains the transfer modes, I/O addresses, transfer count, and buffer addresses.
• Since this area is allocated to a part of the RAM area, it can be used as ordinary RAM.
■ I/O Area
● Interrupt control register area (address: 0000B0H to 0000BFH)
The interrupt control registers (ICR00 to ICR15) support all peripheral functions that have an interrupt
function, and perform the interrupt levels setting and the control of the extended intelligent I/O service
(EI2OS).
● Peripheral function control register area
(address: 000020H to 0000AFH, 0000C0H to 0000EFH, and 007900H to 007FFFH)
This register controls the peripheral functions and inputs/outputs of data.
● I/O port control register area (address: 000000H to 00001FH)
This register controls I/O ports, and inputs/outputs of data.
26
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.2 Memory Space
MB90330A Series
■ Address Generation Methods
The F2MC-16LX has the following two addressing methods:
● Linear addressing
An 24-bit address is specified by an instruction.
● Bank addressing
Upper 8-bit of an address are specified by an appropriate bank register, and the remaining lower 16-bit of
an address are specified by an instruction.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
27
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.3 Linear Addressing
2.3
MB90330A Series
Linear Addressing
There are two types of linear addressing:
• 24-bit operand specification: Directly specifies a 24-bit address using operands.
• 32-bit register indirect specification: Uses the lower 24-bit of a 32-bit general-purpose
register contents as the address.
■ 24-bit Operand Specification
Figure 2.3-1 and Figure 2.3-2 show examples of 24-bit operand specification and 32-bit register indirect
specification, respectively.
Figure 2.3-1 Example of Linear Method (24-bit Operand Specification)
JMPP 123456H
17452DH
Old program counter
17
program bank
452D
JMPP 123456H
123456H
Next instruction
New program counter
12
program bank
3456
Figure 2.3-2 Example of Linear Method (32-bit Register Indirect Specification)
MOV A,@RL1+7
Old
AL
090700H
XXXX
3AH
7
RL1
240906F9H
(The upper 8-bit are ignored)
New
28
AL
003A
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.4 Bank Addressing
MB90330A Series
2.4
Bank Addressing
In the bank method, the 16 M byte space is divided into 256 of 64 K byte banks. The
following five bank registers are used to specify the banks corresponding to each
space:
• Program counter bank register (PCB)
• Data bank register (DTB)
• User stack bank register (USB)
• System stack bank register (SSB)
• Additional data bank register (ADB)
■ Bank Addressing
● Program counter bank register (PCB)
The 64Kbyte bank specified by the program counter bank register (PCB) is called a program (PC) space.
The PC space typically contains instruction codes, vector tables, and immediate data.
● Data bank register (DTB)
The 64Kbyte bank specified by the data bank register (DTB) is called a data (DT) space. The DT space
typically contains readable/ writable data, and control/data registers for internal and external resources.
● User stack bank register (USB) and System stack bank register (SSB)
The 64Kbyte bank specified by the user stack bank register (USB) or system stack bank register (SSB) is
called a stack (SP) space. The SP space is accessed when a stack access occurs during a push/pop
instruction or interrupt register saving. The S flag in the condition code register determines which stack
space is to be accessed.
● Additional data bank register (ADB)
The 64Kbyte bank specified by the Additional data bank register (ADB) is called an additional (AD) space.
The AD space typically contains data that cannot fit into the DT space.
Table 2.4-1 lists the default spaces used in each addressing mode, which are pre-determined to improve
instruction coding efficiency. To use a non-default space for an addressing mode, specify a prefix code
corresponding to a bank before the instruction. This enables access to the bank space corresponding to the
specified prefix code.
By resetting, the DTB, USB, SSB, and ADB are initialized to 00H. The PCB is initialized to a value
specified by the reset vector. After reset, the DT, SP, and AD spaces are allocated in bank 00H (000000H to
00FFFFH), and the PC space is allocated in the bank specified by the reset vector.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
29
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.4 Bank Addressing
MB90330A Series
Table 2.4-1 Default Space
Default space
Addressing
Program space
PC indirect, program access, branch
Data space
@A, addr16, dir, and addressing using @RW0, @RW1, @RW4, or @RW5
Stack space
Addressing using PUSHW, POPW, @RW3, or @RW7
Additional space
Addressing using @RW2 or @RW6
The example of the physical address of the memory space divided into the register bank is shown in Figure
2.4-1.
Figure 2.4-1 The Example of Physical Addresses of Each Space
FFFFFFH
Program space
FF0000H
FFH
: PCB (Program counter bank register)
B3H
: ADB (Additional data bank register)
92H
: USB (User stack bank register)
B3FFFFH
Additional space
Physical address
B30000H
92FFFFH
User stack space
920000H
68FFFFH
Data space
680000H
68H
: DTB (Data bank register)
4BFFFFH
System stack space
4B0000H
4BH
: SSB (System stack bank register)
000000H
30
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.5 Multibyte Data in Memory Space
MB90330A Series
2.5
Multibyte Data in Memory Space
Multibyte data is allocated from the low-order addresses to the high-order addresses in
the memory space in the order from the byte in LSB to the byte in MSB.
■ Multibyte Data Allocation in Memory Space
Data is written to memory from the low-order addresses. Therefore, for a 32-bit data item, the lower 16 bits
are transferred before the upper 16 bits.
If a reset signal is input immediately after the lower bits are written, the upper bits might not be written.
Figure 2.5-1 shows a sample allocation of multibyte data in memory. The lower 8 bits of a data item are
stored at address n, then address n+1, address n+2, address n+3, etc.
Figure 2.5-1 Sample Allocation of Multibyte Data in Memory
MSB
"H"
LSB
01010101B
11001100B
11111111B
00010100B
01010101B
11001100B
11111111B
n
location
00010100B
"L"
■ Accessing Multibyte Data
Basically, all accesses are made within a bank. For an instruction accessing a multibyte data item, the next
address of FFFFH location is 0000H location of the same bank. Figure 2.5-2 shows an example of an
instruction accessing multibyte data.
Figure 2.5-2 Execution of MOVW A, FFFFH
"H"
AL before execution
80FFFFH
??
??
23H
01H
01H
·
·
·
800000H
23H
AL after execution
"L"
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
31
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
2.6
MB90330A Series
Registers
The F2MC-16LX registers are largely classified into two types: dedicated registers and
general-purpose registers.
The dedicated registers exist as dedicated internal hardware of the CPU, and they have
specific use defined by the CPU architecture.
The applications of the general-purpose registers can be specified by the user, as is
ordinary memory space. Sharing the CPU address space with RAM, the generalpurpose registers are the same as the dedicated registers in that they can be accessed
without using an address.
■ Dedicated Registers
The F2MC-16LX CPU core has the following 11 dedicated registers:
• Accumulator (A=AH: AL)
: 2 × 16-bit accumulators
(Can be used as a single 32-bit accumulator.)
• User stack pointer (USP)
: 16-bit pointer indicating the user stack area
• System stack pointer (SSP)
: 16-bit pointer indicating the system stack area
• Processor status (PS)
: 16-bit register indicating the system status
• Program counter (PC)
: 16-bit register containing the address where the program is
stored
• Program counter bank register (PCB) : 8-bit register indicating the PC space
• Data bank register (DTB)
: 8-bit register indicating the DT space
• User stack bank register (USB)
: 8-bit register indicating the user stack space
• System stack bank register (SSB)
: 8-bit register indicating the system stack space
• Additional data bank register (ADB) : 8-bit register indicating the AD space
• Direct page register (DPR)
: 8-bit register indicating a direct page
Figure 2.6-1 shows the configuration of the dedicated registers.
32
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
Figure 2.6-1 Dedicated Resisters
AH
AL
Accumulator
USP
User stack pointer
SSP
System stack pointer
PS
Processor status
PC
Program counter
DPR
Direct page register
PCB
Program counter bank register
DTB
Data bank register
USB
User bank register
SSB
System stack bank register
ADB
Additional data bank register
8 bits
16 bits
32 bits
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
33
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
■ General-purpose Registers
As described in Figure 2.6-2, the F2MC-16LX general-purpose registers are located from 000180H to
00037FH (maximum configuration) of main storage. The register bank pointer (RP) indicates which of the
above addresses is currently being used as a register bank. Each bank has the following three types of
registers. These registers are mutually dependent and have a relationship as shown below:
• R0 to R7
: 8-bit general-purpose registers
• RW0 to RW7 : 16-bit general-purpose registers
• RL0 to RL3
: 32-bit general-purpose registers
Figure 2.6-2 General-purpose Registers
MSB
LSB
16 bits
000180H RP × 10 H
RW0
Lower
RL0
Starting address of general-purpose register
RW1
RW2
RL1
RW3
R1
R0
RW4
R3
R2
RW5
R5
R4
RW6
R7
R6
RW7
RL2
RL3
Upper
The relationship between the upper/lower bytes of a byte or word register is expressed as follows:
RW(i+4)=R(i × 2+1) × 256 + R(i × 2) [i=0 to 3]
The relationship between the upper/lower bytes of RLi and RW is expressed as follows:
RL(i)=RW(i × 2+1) × 65536 + RW(i × 2) [i=0 to 3]
34
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
2.6.1
Accumulator (A)
The accumulator (A) register consists of 2 × 16-bit arithmetic operation registers (AH
and AL), and is used as a temporary register for operation results and transfer data.
■ Accumulator (A)
During 32-bit data processing, AH and AL are used together (see Figure 2.6-3). Only AL is used for word
processing in 16-bit data processing mode or for byte processing in 8-bit data processing mode (see Figure
2.6-4). The data stored in the accumulator (A) register can be operated upon with the data in memory or
registers (Ri, RWi, and RLi). In the same manner as with the F2MC-8L, when a word or shorter data item is
transferred to AL, the previous data item in AL is automatically sent to AH (data preservation function).
The data preservation function and operation between AL and AH help improve processing efficiency.
When a byte or shorter data item is transferred to AL, the data is sign-extended or zero-extended and stored
as a 16-bit data item in AL. The data in AL can be handled either as word or byte long. When a byteprocessing arithmetic operation instruction is executed on AL, the upper 8 bits of AL before operation are
ignored. The upper 8 bits of the operation result all become "0". The A register is not initialized by a reset
and holds an undefined value right after the reset.
Figure 2.6-3 An Example of 32-bit Data Transfer
MOVL A,@RW1+6
A before
execution
XXXXH
MSB
XXXXH
8F74H
8FH
74H
A6153EH
2BH
52H
15H
38H
+6
2B52H
AH
A61540H
A6H
DTB
A after
execution
LSB
RW1
AL
Figure 2.6-4 An Example of AL to AH Transfer
MSB
MOVW A,@RW1+6
A before
execution
XXXXH
1234H
DTB
A6H
LSB
A61540H
8FH
74H
A6153EH
2BH
52H
15H
38H
+6
A after
execution
CM44-10129-6E
1234H
2B52H
RW1
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
35
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
2.6.2
MB90330A Series
User Stack Pointer (USP) and
System Stack Pointer (SSP)
User stack pointer (USP) and system stack pointer (SSP) are 16-bit registers that
indicate the memory addresses for saving/restoring data when a push/pop instruction
or subroutine is executed.
■ User Stack Pointer (USP) and System Stack Pointer (SSP)
User stack pointer (USP) and system stack pointer (SSP) registers are used by the stack instructions.
However, the USP register is enabled when the S flag in the processor status register is "0", and the SSP
register is enabled when the S flag is "1" (see Figure 2.6-5). Since the S flag is set when an interrupt is
accepted, register values are always saved in the memory area indicated by SSP during interrupt
processing. SSP is used for stack processing in an interrupt routine, while USP is used for stack processing
other than in an interrupt routine. If you do not need to divide the stack space, use only the SSP.
During stack processing, the upper 8 bits of an address are indicated by SSB (for SSP) or USB (for USP).
USP and SSP are not initialized by a reset. Instead, they hold undefined values.
Figure 2.6-5 Stack Manipulation Instruction and Stack Pointer
Example of PUSHW A when the S flag is "0"
Before
execution
AL
S flag
After
execution
AL
S flag
MSB
LSB
A624 H
USB
C6H
USP
F328H
0
SSB
56H
SSP
1234H
A624 H
USB
C6H
USP
F326H
0
SSB
56H
SSP
1234H
C6F326H
A6H
24H
561232H
XX
XX
561232H
A6H
24H
C6F326H
XX
XX
System stack is used
because the S flag is "0".
Example of PUSHW A when the S flag is "1"
AL
S flag
AL
S flag
A624 H
USB
C6H
USP
F328H
1
SSB
56H
SSP
1234H
A624 H
USB
C6H
USP
F328H
1
SSB
56H
SSP
1232H
System stack is used
because the S flag is "1".
Note:
When you specify a value to be set in the stack pointer, use an even-numbered address whenever
possible.
36
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
2.6.3
Processor Status (PS)
The processor status (PS) register consists of the bits controlling the CPU operation
and the bits indicating the CPU status.
■ Processor Status (PS)
As shown in Figure 2.6-6, the upper bytes of the PS register consist of the register bank pointers (RP) and
the interrupt level mask register (ILM) that indicate the starting address of a register bank. The lower bytes
of the PS register consist of the condition code register (CCR), containing the flags to be set or reset
depending on the results of instruction execution or interrupt occurrences.
Figure 2.6-6 Processor Status (PS) Structure
bit
15
13
PS
12
8
ILM
7
0
RP
CCR
■ Condition Code Register (CCR)
Figure 2.6-7 shows the structure of the condition code register.
Figure 2.6-7 Structure of Condition Code Register (CCR)
bit
Initial value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
-
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
: CCR
* : Undefined value
● Interrupt enable flag (I)
Interrupts other than software interrupts are enabled when the I flag is "1," and are disabled when the I flag
is "0". The I flag is cleared to "0" by a reset.
● Stack flag (S)
When the S flag is "0", USP is enabled as the stack manipulation pointer. When the S flag is "1", SSP is
enabled as the stack manipulation pointer. The S flag is set to "1" by an interrupt reception or a reset.
● Sticky bit flag (T)
"1" is set in the T flag when there is one or more "1" in the data shifted out from the carry after execution of
a logical right/arithmetic right shift instruction. Otherwise, "0" is set in the T flag.
● Negative flag (N)
The "1" is set in the N flag when the MSB of the operation result is "1". Otherwise, N flag is cleared to "0".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
37
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
● Zero flag (Z)
The Z flag is set to "1" when the operation result is all "0". Otherwise, Z flag is cleared to "0".
● Overflow flag (V)
The V flag is set when an overflow of a signed value occurs as a result of operation execution. In other
cases, V flag is cleared to "0".
● Carry flag (C)
The C flag is set when a carry-up or carry-down from the MSB occurs as a result of operation execution. In
other cases, C flag is cleared to "0".
■ Register Bank Pointer (RP)
As shown in Figure 2.6-8, the register bank pointer (RP) register indicates the relationship between the
general-purpose registers of the F2MC-16LX and the internal RAM addresses where the general-purpose
registers exist. Specifically, the RP register indicates the starting memory address of the currently used
register bank in the following conversion expression: [00180H + (RP) × 10H]. The RP register that consists
of five bits can take a value between "00H" and "1FH" and allocate the register banks at addresses from
000180H to 00037FH in the memory. Even within that range, however, the register banks cannot be used as
general-purpose registers if the banks are not in internal RAM. All RP registers are initialized to "0" by a
reset. An instruction may transfer an 8-bit immediate value to the RP register but, only the lower 5 bits of
that data are used.
Figure 2.6-8 Register Bank Pointer (RP)
Initial value
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
0
0
0
0
0
: RP
■ Interrupt Level Mask Register (ILM)
As described in Figure 2.6-9, the interrupt level mask register (ILM) consists of 3 bits, indicating the CPU
interrupt masking level. Only an interrupt request of which interrupt level is higher than that indicated by
these 3 bits will be accepted. Level 0 is the highest priority interrupt, and level 7 is the lowest priority
interrupt (see Table 2.6-1). Therefore, for an interrupt to be accepted, its level value must be smaller than
the current ILM value. When an interrupt is accepted, the level value of that interrupt is set in ILM. Thus, a
subsequent interrupt of the same or lower level cannot be accepted. All ILMs are initialized to "0" by a
reset. An instruction may transfer an 8-bit immediate value to the ILM register, but only the lower 3 bits of
that data are used.
Figure 2.6-9 Interrupt Level Mask Register (ILM)
Initial value
38
ILM2
ILM1
ILM0
0
0
0
: ILM
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
Table 2.6-1 Levels Indicated by the Interrupt Level Mask Register (ILM)
ILM2
ILM1
ILM0
Level value
0
0
0
0
Interrupts disabled
0
0
1
1
Level value less than 1 (0 only)
0
1
0
2
Level value less than 2 (0 and 1)
0
1
1
3
Level value less than 3 (0, 1 and 2)
1
0
0
4
Level value less than 4 (0, 1, 2 and 3)
1
0
1
5
Level value less than 5 (0, 1, 2, 3 and 4)
1
1
0
6
Level value less than 6 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5)
1
1
1
7
Level value less than 7 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6)
CM44-10129-6E
Acceptable interrupt level
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
39
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
2.6.4
MB90330A Series
Program Counter (PC)
Program counter (PC) shows lower 16-bit of the memory address of the instruction
code that CPU should execute.
■ Program Counter (PC)
The program counter (PC) register is a 16-bit counter that indicates the lower 16 bits of the memory
address of an instruction code to be executed by the CPU. The upper 8 bits of the address are indicated by
the PCB. The PC register is updated by a conditional branch instruction, subroutine call instruction,
interrupt, or reset. The PC register can also be used as a base pointer for operand access.
Figure 2.6-10 shows the program counter.
Figure 2.6-10 Program Counter
PCB
FEH
PC
ABCDH
Next instruction to be executed
FEABCDH
40
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
MB90330A Series
2.6.5
Bank Registers (PCB, DTB, USB, SSB, ADB)
The bank register shows the memory bank where the program space, the data space,
the user stack space, the system stack space, and the Additional space are arranged.
■ Bank Registers (PCB, DTB, USB, SSB, ADB)
The bank registers includes the following five registers.
•
Program Count Bank Register (PCB) <Initial Value: Value in Reset Vector>
•
Data bank register (DTB) < Initial value: 00H >
•
User stack bank register (USB) < Initial value: 00H >
•
System stack bank register (SSB) < Initial value: 00H >
•
Additional data bank register (ADB) < Initial value: 00H >
Each bank register indicates memory banks to which PC, DT, SP (user), SP (system), and AD space are
allocated.
All bank registers has a length of 1 byte. They are initialized to "00H" by a reset. Bank registers other than
PCB can be read. PCB can be read, but writing to PCB is not permitted.
PCB is updated either when the JMPP, CALLP, RETP, RETI, or RETF instruction that branches is
executed, and it may then branch to an entire 16-M bytes space. PCB is also updated when an interrupt
occurs. For information on the operation of each register, see Section "2.2 Memory Space".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
41
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.6 Registers
2.6.6
MB90330A Series
Direct Page Register (DPR)
This section explains the direct page register (DPR) functions.
■ Direct Page Register (DPR) <Initial Value: 01H>
The direct page register (DPR) specifies, as shown in Figure 2.6-11, addresses 8 to 15 of an instruction
operand in the direct addressing mode. DPR has a length of 8 bits, and is initialized to "01H" by a reset. It
also allows reading and writing by instructions.
Figure 2.6-11 illustrates the generation of a physical address in the direct addressing mode.
Figure 2.6-11 Generating a Physical Address in Direct Addressing Mode
DTB register
DPR register
MSB
Direct address in instruction
LSB
24-bit physical address
42
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.7 Register Bank
MB90330A Series
2.7
Register Bank
A register bank that consists of 8 words can be used as the general-purpose registers
for the arithmetic operations or as the pointers for the instructions, such as byte
registers (R0 to R7), word registers (RW0 to RW7), and long word registers (RL0 to
RL3). In addition, RL0 to RL3 can also be used as the linear pointers to access directly
to the entire space in the memory space.
■ Register Bank
Table 2.7-1 lists the register functions. Table 2.7-2 shows the relationship between each register.
In the same manner as for an ordinary RAM area, the register bank values are not initialized by a reset. The
status before a reset is maintained. When the power is turned-on, however, the register bank will have an
undefined value.
Table 2.7-1 Register Functions
Used as operands of instructions.
Note: R0 is also used as a counter for barrel shift or normalization instruction
R0 to R7
RW0 to RW7
Used as pointers and operands of instructions.
Note: RW0 is used as a counter for string instructions.
RL0 to RL3
Used as long pointers and operands of instructions.
Table 2.7-2 Relationship between Registers
Address
Byte register
000180H + RP × 10H + 0
Long word register
RW0
000180H + RP × 10H + 1
RL0
000180H + RP × 10H + 2
RW1
000180H + RP × 10H + 3
000180H + RP × 10H + 4
RW2
000180H + RP × 10H + 5
RL1
000180H + RP × 10H + 6
RW3
000180H + RP × 10H + 7
000180H + RP × 10H + 8
R0
000180H + RP × 10H + 9
R1
000180H + RP × 10H + 10
R2
000180H + RP × 10H + 11
R3
000180H + RP × 10H + 12
R4
000180H + RP × 10H + 13
R5
000180H + RP × 10H + 14
R6
000180H + RP × 10H + 15
R7
CM44-10129-6E
Word register
RW4
RL2
RW5
RW6
RL3
RW7
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
43
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.8 Prefix Codes
2.8
MB90330A Series
Prefix Codes
Placing a prefix code before an instruction can partially change the operation of the
instruction. 3 types of prefix codes can be used: bank select prefix, common register
bank prefix, and flag change disable prefix.
■ Bank Select Prefix
The memory space used for accessing data depends on each addressing mode. When a bank select prefix is
placed before an instruction, the memory space used for accessing data by that instruction can be selected
regardless of the addressing mode.
Table 2.8-1 shows the bank select prefixes and selected memory spaces.
Table 2.8-1 Bank Select Prefix
Bank select prefix
Selected space
PCB
PC space
DTB
Data space
ADB
AD space
SPB
Either the SSP or USP space is used according to the stack flag value.
Use the following instructions with care:
● String instructions (MOVS / MOVSW / SCEQ / SCWEQ / FILS / FILSW)
The bank register specified by an operand is used regardless of the prefix.
● Stack manipulation instructions (PUSHW / POPW)
SSB or USB is used according to the S flag regardless of the prefix.
● I/O access instructions
MOV A,io
MOV io,#imm8
CLRB io:bp
MOV io,A
MOVW io,#imm16
BBC io:bp,rel
MOVX A,io
MOVB A,io:bp
BBS io:bp,rel
MOVW A,io
MOVB io:bp,A
WBTC
MOVW io,A
SETB io:bp
WBTS
The I/O space of the bank is used regardless of the prefix.
● Flag change instructions (AND CCR,#imm8 / OR CCR,#imm8)
The instruction is executed normally, but the prefix affects the next instruction.
44
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.8 Prefix Codes
MB90330A Series
● POPW PS
Either SSB or USB is used according to the S flag regardless of the prefix. The prefix affects the next
instruction.
● MOV ILM,#imm8
The instruction is executed normally, but the prefix affects the next instruction.
● RETI
SSB is used regardless of the prefix.
■ Common Register Bank Prefix (CMR)
To simplify data exchange between multiple tasks, the same register bank must be accessed regardless of
the RP value. When the common register bank prefix (CMR) is placed before an instruction that accesses
the register bank, that instruction accesses the common bank (the register bank selected when RP=0) at
addresses from 000180H to 00018FH regardless of the current RP value. Use the following instructions with
care:
● String instructions (MOVS / MOVSW / SCEQ / SCWEQ / FILS / FILSW)
If an interrupt request occurs during execution of a string instruction with a prefix code, the string
instruction is executed falsely because the prefix becomes invalid for the string instruction after the
interrupt is returned. Do not attach CMR prefix to any of the above string instructions.
● Flag change instructions (AND CCR,#imm8 / OR CCR,#imm8 / POPW PS)
The instruction is executed normally, but the prefix affects the next instruction.
● MOV ILM,#imm8
The instruction is executed normally, but the prefix affects the next instruction.
■ Flag Change Disable Prefix (NCC)
To disable a flag change, use the flag change disable prefix code (NCC). Placing NCC before an instruction
that disables an unwanted flag change can disable flag changes associated with that instruction. Use the
following instructions with care:
● String instructions (MOVS / MOVSW / SCEQ / SCWEQ / FILS / FILSW)
If an interrupt request occurs during execution of a string instruction with a prefix code, the string
instruction is executed falsely because the prefix becomes invalid for the string instruction after the
interrupt is returned. Do not attach NCC prefix to any of the above string instructions.
● Flag change instructions (AND CCR,#imm8 / OR CCR,#imm8 / POPW PS)
The instruction is executed normally, but the prefix affects the next instruction.
● Interrupt instructions (INT #vct8 / INT9 / INT addr16 / INTP addr24 / RETI)
CCR changes according to the instruction specifications regardless of the prefix.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
45
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.8 Prefix Codes
MB90330A Series
● JCTX @A
CCR changes according to the instruction specifications regardless of the prefix.
● MOV ILM,imm8
The instruction is executed normally, but the prefix affects the next instruction.
46
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.9 Interrupt Disable Instructions
MB90330A Series
2.9
Interrupt Disable Instructions
Interrupt requests are not accepted about following 10 instructions:
MOV ILM, #imm8
AND CCR, #imm8
PCB
ADB
SPB
CMR
OR CCR, #imm8
POPW PS
NCC
DTB
■ Interrupt Disable Instructions
As shown in Figure 2.9-1, if a valid hardware interrupt request occurs during execution of any of the above
instructions, the interrupt can be processed only when an instruction other than the above is executed.
Figure 2.9-1 Interrupt Disable Instructions
Interrupt disable instructions
••••••••
•••
(a)
(a) : Ordinary instruction
Interrupt request generated
Interrupt accepted
■ Restrictions on Interrupt Disable Instructions and Prefix Instructions
As shown in Figure 2.9-2, when a prefix code is placed before an interrupt disable instruction, the prefix
code affects the first instruction after the code other than the interrupt disable instruction.
Figure 2.9-2 Interrupt Disable Instructions and Prefix Codes
Interrupt disable instructions
MOV A, FFH
NCC
••••
MOV ILM,#imm8
ADD A,01H
CCR:XXX10XXB
CCR:XXX10XXB
CCR does not change with NCC.
■ Consecutive Prefix Codes
As shown in Figure 2.9-3, when competitive prefix codes are placed consecutively, the latter one becomes
valid.
Competitive prefix codes are PCB, ADB, DTB, and SPB.
Figure 2.9-3 Consecutive Prefix Codes
Prefix codes
•••••
ADB
DTB
PCB
ADD A,01H
•••••
PCB becomes valid as
the prefix code
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
47
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.9 Interrupt Disable Instructions
48
MB90330A Series
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3
INTERRUPT
This chapter describes the interruption, extended
intelligent I/O service (EI2OS), and direct memory access
controller (μDMAC) of MB90330A Series.
3.1 Outline of Interrupt
3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
3.5 Software Interrupt
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
3.7 Exception Processing Interrupt
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
3.9 Exceptions
3.10 Stack Operation of Interrupt Processing
3.11 Program Example of Interrupt Processing
3.12 Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
49
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.1 Outline of Interrupt
3.1
MB90330A Series
Outline of Interrupt
F2MC-16LX has the following five interrupt functions, which suspend the current
process when an event occurs and transfer control to a separately defined program.
• Hardware Interrupt
• Software interrupt
• Interrupts by extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
• Interruption by μDMAC
• Exception processing
■ Type and Function of Interrupt
● Hardware Interrupt
Transfers control to the user-defined interrupt handling program in response to an interrupt request from a
peripheral function.
Figure 3.1-1 Overview of Hardware Interrupts
PS
Register file
I
ILM
Microcode
Check
AND
Cause FF
Interrupt level IL
Peripheral
Enable FF
50
Comparator
PS : Processor status
I
: Interrupt enable flag
ILM : Interrupt level mask register
IR : Instruction register
F2MC-16LX CPU
Level comparator
F2MC-16LX bus
IR
Interrupt
controller
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.1 Outline of Interrupt
MB90330A Series
● Software interrupt
Transfers control to the user-defined interrupt handing program by executing the instruction dedicated to
software interrupt (for example, INT instruction).
Figure 3.1-2 Overview of Software Interrupts
PS
Register file
I
F2MC-16LX bus
IR
S
PS
I
S
ILM
IR
B unit
B unit
Microcode
Queue
F2MC-16LX CPU
ILM
Fetch
: Processor status
: Interrupt enable flag
: Stack flag
: Interrupt level mask register
: Instruction register
: Bus interface unit
Save
Instruction bus
RAM
● Interrupts by extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
EI2OS is involved in automatic data transfer between peripheral functions and memory. EI2OS is capable
of performing data transfer like DMA (direct memory access) although it was previously performed by the
interrupt handling program. Once the data transfer process has been performed the specified number of
times, EI2OS automatically executes the interrupt handling program.
Interruption by EI2OS is a type of hardware interrupt.
Figure 3.1-3 Overview of the Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Memory space
by IOA
I/O register
I/O register
Peripheral
Interrupt request
CPU
by ICS
ISD
Interrupt control register
Interrupt controller
by BAP
Buffer
CM44-10129-6E
by DCT
I/O requests transfer
The interrupt controller selects the
descriptor.
The transfer source and destination
are read from the descriptor.
Data is transferred between I/O and
memory.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
51
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.1 Outline of Interrupt
MB90330A Series
● Interruption by μDMAC
μDMAC is involved in automatic data transfer between peripheral functions and memory. EI2OS performs
data transfer by DMA transfer although it was previously performed by the interrupt handling program.
Once the data transfer process has been performed the specified number of times, μDMAC automatically
executes the interrupt handling program.
Interruption by μDMAC is a type of hardware interrupt.
Figure 3.1-4 Overview of the Direct Memory access (DMA)
Memory space
IOA
I/O register
I/O register
(4) (a)
RAM for
descriptor
Peripheral
function
(I/O)
(1)
(2)
(3)
DMA controller
(2)
DMA
descriptor
(4) (b)
BAP
Buffer
CPU
Interrupt
controller
DCT
IOA: I/O address pointer
BAP: Buffer address pointer
DER: DMA enable register
DCT: Data counter
(1) The peripheral resource (I/O) requests DMA transfer.
(2) When the corresponding bit of DMA enable register (DER) is "1", DMAC reads from the descriptor the transfer data
such as the transfer source address, transfer destination address, and transfer count of specified channels.
(3) DMA data transfer is started between I/O and memory.
(4) After one item (either Byte data or Word data) transferred.
(a) Transfer has not been completed (DCT does not reached to 0):
μDMAC requests to clear the DMA transfer request to the peripheral resouece.
(b) At transfer end (DCT reached to 0):
After completion of DMA transfer, the flag indicating completion of transfer is set in the DMA status register,
outputting an interrupt request to the interrupt controller.
Note: Write access to the internal registers DCSR, DSRH, DSRL, DSSR, DERH, and DERL is prohibited during DMA transfer.
● Exception processing
Exception processing, basically the same as interrupt, is executed when an exception item (execution of an
undefined instruction) is detected at an instruction-to-instruction boundary; the normal process is
suspended for this purpose. Equivalent to software interrupt instruction "INT10".
52
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector
MB90330A Series
3.2
Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector
F2MC-16LX has functions that are associated with 256 types of interrupt causes, and
256 interrupt vector tables are assigned to the most significant address area of memory.
This interruption vector is shared by all the interruptions.
All of interrupt INT0 to INT255 are available for software interrupt, although some
interrupt vectors are shared with hardware interrupt or exception processing interrupt.
Furthermore, for hardware interrupt, the fixed interrupt vectors and interrupt control
registers (ICR) are used for each of the peripheral functions.
■ Interrupt Vector
The interrupt vector table referenced during interrupt processing is assigned to the most significant of
memory address area (FFFC00H to FFFFFFH). Furthermore, the interrupt vectors share the same area with
EI2OS, μDMAC, hardware interrupt, software interrupts, and exception processing. Table 3.2-1 shows the
allocation of the interrupt numbers and interrupt vectors.
Table 3.2-1 Interrupt Vector List
Software interrupt
instruction
Vector
address L
Vector
address M
Vector
address H
Mode data
Interrupt
number
Hardware interrupt
INT0
FFFFFCH
FFFFFDH
FFFFFEH
Unused
#0
None
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
INT7
FFFFE0H
FFFFE1H
FFFFE2H
Unused
#7
None
INT8
FFFFDCH
FFFFDDH
FFFFDEH
FFFFDFH
#8
(RESET vector)
INT9
FFFFD8H
FFFFD9H
FFFFDAH
Unused
#9
None
INT10
FFFFD4H
FFFFD5H
FFFFD6H
Unused
#10
<Exception processing>
INT11
FFFFD0H
FFFFD1H
FFFFD2H
Unused
#11
Hardware Interrupt #0
INT12
FFFFCCH
FFFFCDH
FFFFCEH
Unused
#12
Hardware Interrupt #1
INT13
FFFFC8H
FFFFC9H
FFFFCAH
Unused
#13
Hardware Interrupt #2
INT14
FFFFC4H
FFFFC5H
FFFFC6H
Unused
#14
Hardware Interrupt #3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
INT254
FFFC04H
FFFC05H
FFFC06H
Unused
#254
None
INT255
FFFC00H
FFFC01H
FFFC02H
Unused
#255
None
Reference:
It is recommended that the unused interrupt vectors are set in the exception processing addresses,
etc.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
53
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector
MB90330A Series
■ Interrupt Factors, Interrupt Vectors, and Interrupt Control Registers
Table 3.2-2 shows the relationship between the causes of interrupts except software interrupt, and the
interrupt vectors and control registers.
Table 3.2-2 Interrupt Factors, Interrupt Vectors, and Interrupt Control Registers
Interrupt cause
EI2OScorresponded
μDMACcorresponded
Interrupt vector
Interrupt control
registers
*2
Number
Address
ICR
Address
08H
FFFFDCH
-
-
Reset
#08
INT9 instruction
#09
09H
FFFFD8H
-
-
Exception processing
#10
0AH
FFFFD4H
-
-
USB function 1
0,1
#11
0BH
FFFFD0H
USB function 2
2 to 6 *3
#12
0CH
FFFFCCH
USB function 3
#13
0DH
FFFFC8H
USB function 4
#14
0EH
FFFFC4H
USB HOST 1
#15
0FH
FFFFC0H
USB HOST 2
#16
10H
FFFFBCH
#17
11H
FFFFB8H
#18
12H
FFFFB4H
#19
13H
FFFFB0H
#20
14H
FFFFACH
#21
15H
FFFFA8H
#22
16H
FFFFA4H
#23
17H
FFFFA0H
#24
18H
FFFF9CH
#25
19H
FFFF98H
#26
1AH
FFFF94H
#27
1BH
FFFF90H
2
I C ch.0
DTP/ External interruption ch.0/ch.1
❍
2
I C ch.1
DTP/ External interruption ch.2/ch.3
❍
I2C ch.2
DTP/ External interruption ch.4/ch.5
❍
PWC/reload timer ch.0
Δ
DTP/ External interruption ch.6/ch.7
Δ
Input capture ch.0./ch.1
Δ
Reload timer ch.1
Δ
Input capture ch.2/ch.3
Δ
Reload timer ch.2
Δ
#28
1CH
FFFF8CH
Output compare ch.0/ch.1
❍
#29
1DH
FFFF88H
#30
1EH
FFFF84H
#31
1FH
FFFF80H
14
7
8
PPG ch.0/ch.1
Output compare ch.2/ch.3
❍
PPG ch.2/ch.3
UART transmission end ch.2/ch.3
❍
#32
20H
FFFF7CH
#33
21H
FFFF78H
#34
22H
FFFF74H
10
#35
23H
FFFF70H
11
PPG ch.4/ch.5
UART1 reception ch.2/ch.3
A/D conversion and free-run timer
Δ
15
#36
24H
FFFF6CH
UART1 transmission ch.0/ch.1
❍
13
#37
25H
FFFF68H
Extended serial I/O
9
#38
26H
FFFF64H
UART1 reception ch.0/ch.1
12
#39
27H
FFFF60H
Time-base timer/Watch timer
#40
28H
FFFF5CH
Writing and Erasing Flash Memory
#41
29H
FFFF58H
Delay interruption generation module
#42
2AH
FFFF54H
54
Priority
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
High
ICR00 0000B0 *1
H
ICR01 0000B1 *1
H
ICR02 0000B2 *1
H
ICR03 0000B3 *1
H
ICR04 0000B4 *1
H
ICR05 0000B5 *1
H
ICR06 0000B6 *1
H
ICR07 0000B7 *1
H
ICR08 0000B8 *1
H
ICR09 0000B9 *1
H
ICR10 0000BA *1
H
ICR11 0000BB *1
H
ICR12 0000BC *1
H
ICR13 0000BD *1
H
ICR14 0000BE *1
H
ICR15 0000BF *1
H
Low
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector
MB90330A Series
: Available. With EI2OS stop function. (The interrupt request flag is cleared by the interrupt clear signal.
With a stop request.)
❍: Available. (The interrupt request flag is cleared by the interrupt clear signal.)
Δ: Available when not using the interrupt factor shared with ICR
: Not available
*1: The interrupt levels for the peripheral functions sharing the ICRs are identical.
*2: The priority is given when interrupts with the same level are generated simultaneously.
*3: Ch.2 and ch.3 can use even when USB HOST is operated.
Notes:
•
If use of EI2OS is permitted when a same interrupt control register (ICR) has two interrupt
causes, EI2OS is activated when either of interrupt causes is detected. Any interrupt which is due
to a non-activation cause is masked during activation of EI2OS. It is therefore recommended that
either of the interrupt requests be masked while EI2OS is in use.
•
In a resource for which two interrupt causes exist in a same interrupt control register (ICR), the
interrupt flag is cleared by the EI2OS interrupt clear signal.
•
If two interrupt causes were found at a single interrupt number, both the interrupt request flags in
the resource are cleared by the μDMAC interrupt clear signal. Thus, if the μDMAC function is
used for one of the two causes, the other interrupt function will not be available. Set the interrupt
request permission bit to "0" in the appropriate resource, and take measures by software polling
processing.
■ Type and Function of USB interrupt
USB interrupt factor
USB function 1
USB function 2
USB function 3
USB function 4
USB HOST 1
USB HOST 2
Details
End point0-IN End Point0-OUT
End Point1-5*
SUSP SOF BRST WKUP CONF
SPK
DIRQ CNNIRQ URIRQ RWKIRQ
SOFIRQ CMPIRQ
*: End Point 1, 2 can use even when USB HOST is operated.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
55
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
3.3
MB90330A Series
Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
Interrupt control registers (ICR00 to ICR15) located in the interrupt controller, are
associated with all the peripheral functions which have the interrupt function. This
register controls the interrupt and the extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS).
■ Interrupt Control Register List
Table 3.3-1 shows the list of the peripheral functions associated with the interrupt control registers.
Table 3.3-1 Interrupt Control Register List
Address
Registers
Abbreviation
0000B0H
Interrupt control registers 00
ICR00
USB function 1 and USB function 2
0000B1H
Interrupt control registers 01
ICR01
USB function 3 and USB function 4
0000B2H
Interrupt control registers 02
ICR02
USB HOST 1 and USB HOST 2
0000B3H
Interrupt control registers 03
ICR03
I2C ch.0, DTP External interruption ch.0/ch.1
0000B4H
Interrupt control registers 04
ICR04
I2C ch.1, DTP External interruption ch.2/ch.3
0000B5H
Interrupt control registers 05
ICR05
I2C ch.2, DTP External interruption ch.4/ch.5
0000B6H
Interrupt control registers 06
ICR06
PWC, reload timer ch.0, DTP external interruption ch.6/ch.7
0000B7H
Interrupt control registers 07
ICR07
Input capture ch.0/ch.1 and reload timer ch.1
0000B8H
Interrupt control registers 08
ICR08
Input capture ch.2/ch.3, and reload timer ch.2
0000B9H
Interrupt control registers 09
ICR09
Output compare ch.0/ch.1, PPG ch.0/ch.1
0000BAH
Interrupt control registers 10
ICR10
Output compare ch.2/ch.3, PPG ch.2/ch.3
0000BBH
Interrupt control registers 11
ICR11
UART Transmission ch.2/ch.3, PPG ch.4/ch.5
0000BCH
Interrupt control registers 12
ICR12
UART reception ch.2/ch.3, AD conversion, and free-run timer
0000BDH
Interrupt control registers 13
ICR13
UART transmission ch.0/ch.1 and extended serial I/O
0000BEH
Interrupt control registers 14
ICR14
UART reception ch.0/ch.1, timer base timer, and watch timer
0000BFH
Interrupt control registers 15
ICR15
Flash writing and delay interruption generation module
56
Corresponding peripheral function
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
MB90330A Series
■ Interrupt Control Register Functions
Each of the interrupt control register (ICR) has the following four functions.
• Setting of interrupt level for peripheral function
• Selection of whether to perform normal interrupt or external intelligent for corresponding peripheral
function (EI2OS)
• Select the channel of Extended Intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
• Display of extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) status
For the interrupt control registers (ICRs), some functions are different between write and read. Details are
shown in Figure 3.1-1 and Figure 3.1-2 in Section "3.3.1 Interrupt Control Registers (ICR00 to ICR15)".
Note:
Do not use any read modify write instruction to access the interrupt control register (ICR). An attempt
of this may cause a malfunction.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
57
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
3.3.1
MB90330A Series
Interrupt Control Registers (ICR00 to ICR15)
Interrupt control registers (ICR00 to ICR15) associated with all the peripheral functions
provided with the interrupt function, controls the handling which takes place when an
interrupt request is generated. Some functions of the registers are different between
write and read.
■ Interrupt Control Registers (ICR00 to ICR15)
Figure 3.3-1 Interrupt Control Register (ICR00 to ICR15) at Writing
At write
Address
MSB
LSB
0000B0H
to
ICS3 ICS2 ICS1 ICS0
0000BFH
ISE
IL2
IL1
IL2
0
IL0
Initial value
00000111B
Interrupt level set bit
Interrupt level 0 (Highest)
IL1 IL0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
Interrupt level 7 (No interrupt)
ISE
EI2OS enable bit
0
Activate interrupt sequence during generation of an interrupt.
1
Activate EI2OS during generation of an interrupt.
ICS3 ICS2 ICS1ICS0
MSB : The most significant bit
LSB : The least significant bit
: Initial value
58
EI2OS channel select bit
Channel
Descriptor address
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
000100H
1
0
0
1
0
2
000108H
000110H
0
0
1
1
3
000118H
0
1
0
0
4
000120H
0
1
0
1
5
000128H
0
1
1
0
6
000130H
0
1
1
1
7
000138H
1
0
0
0
8
000140H
1
0
0
1
9
000148H
1
0
1
0
10
000150H
1
0
1
1
11
000158H
1
1
0
0
12
1
1
0
1
13
000160H
000168H
1
1
1
0
14
000170H
1
1
1
1
15
000178H
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
MB90330A Series
Figure 3.3-2 Interrupt Control Register (ICR00 to ICR15) at Read
At read
Address
MSB
0000B0 H
to
0000BF H
LSB
S1
S0
ISE
IL2
IL1
IL2
IL1
IL0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
: Undefined
: Initial value
CM44-10129-6E
- - 000111B
Interrupt level set bit
Interrupt level 0 (Highest)
Interrupt level 7 (No interrupt)
EI2OS enable bit
ISE
0
Activate interrupt sequence during generation of an interrupt.
1
Activate EI2OS during generation of an interrupt.
S1
MSB : The most significant bit
LSB : The least significant bit
IL0
Initial value
EI2OS status
S0
2
0
0
EI OS operation in progress or EI2OS not activated
0
1
Stop status by count end
1
0
Reserved
1
1
Stop status by request from peripheral function
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
59
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
3.3.2
MB90330A Series
Interrupt Control Register Functions
Each of the interrupt control register (ICR00 to ICR15) consists of the following bits,
which have four functions.
• Interrupt level set bit (IL2 to IL0)
• EI2OS enable bit (ISE)
• EI2OS channel select bits (ICS3 to ICS0)
• EI2OS status bit (S1, S0)
■ Configuration of Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
Figure 3.3-3 shows the bit configuration of the interrupt control register (ICR).
Figure 3.3-3 Configuration of Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
Writing to Interrupt control register (ICR)
Address
0000B0H
to
0000BFH
MSB
LSB
ICS3 ICS2 ICS1 ICS0 ISE
Reading to Interrupt control register (ICR)
MSB
Address
0000B0H
S0
S1
to
IL2
IL1
IL0
LSB
ISE
IL2
IL1
IL0
0000BFH
Initial value
00000111B
Initial value
--000111B
MSB : The most significant bit
LSB : The least significant bit
: Undefined
References:
• ICS3 to ICS0 bit are enabled only when starting the extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS). If
EI2OS is to be activated, set the ISE bit to "1". Otherwise, set it to "0". When you do not start
EI2OS, you can not set ICS3 to ICS0.
• ICS1 and ICS0 are enabled only for write. S1 and S0 are enabled only for read.
Note:
Reading the upper rank two-bit is an irregular value.
60
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
MB90330A Series
■ Interrupt Control Register Functions
● Interrupt level set bit (IL2 to IL0)
Specifies the interrupt level for the associated peripheral function. Initialized to level 7 (no interrupts) by
reset. Table 3.3-2 shows the relationship between the interrupt level set bits and each interrupt level.
Table 3.3-2 Correspondence between Interrupt Level Set Bits and Interrupt Levels
IL2
IL1
IL0
Interrupt level
0
0
0
0 (highest interrupt)
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
6 (lowest interrupt)
1
1
1
7 (No interrupt)
● EI2OS enable bit (ISE)
If the ISE bit is "1" during generation of an interrupt request, EI2OS is activated; if it is "0", the interrupt
sequence will be activated. Furthermore, when the end condition of EI2OS is satisfied, (both the S1 and S0
bits are other than "00B"), the ISE bit is cleared. If the associated peripheral function does not have the
EI2OS function, the ISE bit must have been set to "0" by software. The ISE bit is initialized to "0" by reset
by "0000B".
● EI2OS channel select bits (ICS3 to ICS0)
Specifies the channel of EI2OS with a write only bit. The address of the EI2OS descriptor is determined by
the value set here. The ICS bit is initialized to "0000B" by reset by. Table 3.3-3 shows the correspondence
between the EI2OS channel select bits and descriptor addresses.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
61
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.3 Interrupt Control Register and Peripheral Function
MB90330A Series
Table 3.3-3 Correspondence between EI2OS Channel Select Bits and Descriptor Addresses
ICS3
ICS2
ICS1
ICS0
Channel to be selected
Descriptor address
0
0
0
0
0
000100H
0
0
0
1
1
000108H
0
0
1
0
2
000110H
0
0
1
1
3
000118H
0
1
0
0
4
000120H
0
1
0
1
5
000128H
0
1
1
0
6
000130H
0
1
1
1
7
000138H
1
0
0
0
8
000140H
1
0
0
1
9
000148H
1
0
1
0
10
000150H
1
0
1
1
11
000158H
1
1
0
0
12
000160H
1
1
0
1
13
000168H
1
1
1
0
14
000170H
1
1
1
1
15
000178H
● EI2OS status bits (S1 and S0)
It is a bit only for reading. By examining the value at the end of EI2OS operation, the operating state and/or
termination status can be determined. The bit is initialized to "00B" at a reset. Table 3.3-4 shows the
relationships between the S0/S1 bit and the EI2OS status.
Table 3.3-4 Relation between EI2OS Status Bits and EI2OS Status
62
EI2OS status
S1
S0
0
0
When EI2OS in operation or not started.
0
1
Stop state by end of counting
1
0
Reserved
1
1
Stop state by request from peripheral function
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
3.4
Hardware Interrupt
Hardware interrupt suspends the active program execution by the CPU in response to
an interrupt request signal generated by a peripheral function, resulting in transfer of
control to the user-defined interrupt handling program. Extended intelligent I/O service
(EI2OS), μDMAC, external interrupts, and other similar processes are also executed as a
type of hardware interrupt.
■ Function of Hardware Interrupt
● Function of hardware interrupt
Hardware interrupt makes comparison between the interrupt level of the interrupt request signal which a
peripheral function outputs and the interrupt level mask register (ILM) in the CPU's processor status (PS).
This interrupt also refers the contents of the I flag in PS, by hardware, to determine whether the interrupt is
acceptable.
Once the hardware interrupt is accepted, the contents of the registers and their related data in the CPU are
automatically saved in the system stack. The level of the currently requested interrupt is stored in the ILM.
Then, control branches to the associated interrupt vector.
● Multiple interrupts
Multiple hardware interrupts can be activated.
● EI2OS
At the completion of transfer, a hardware interrupt is activated although EI2OS is an automatic transfer
function between EI2OS/memory and I/O. Further, EI2OS cannot be activated in a multiple manner. While
an EI2OS process is in progress, all the other interrupt requests and μDMAC requests remain pending.
● μDMAC
At the completion of transfer, a hardware interrupt is activated although μDMAC is an automatic transfer
function between memory and I/O. Further, μDMAC cannot be activated in a multiple manner. While an
μDMAC process is in progress, all the other interrupt requests and EI2OS requests remain pending.
● External interrupt
The external interrupt (including a wake-up interrupt) is accepted as a hardware interrupt through the
peripheral function (its interrupt request detector circuit).
● Interrupt vector
The interrupt vector table, referred during execution of the interrupt process, is assigned to the "FFFC00H"
to "FFFFFFH" memory for shared with software interrupt. For allocations of interrupt numbers and
interrupt vectors, see Section "3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
63
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
■ Construction of Hardware Interrupt
As shown in Table 3.4-1, there are four features related to hardware interrupt. These four must be
programmed when hardware interrupt is used.
Table 3.4-1 Mechanism Related to Hardware Interrupt
Mechanism related to hardware
interrupt
Functions
Peripheral function
Interrupt enable bits, interrupt request
bits
Controls interrupt request from peripheral function
Interrupt controller
Interrupt control registers (ICR)
Setting interrupt levels
Interrupt enable flag (I)
Identification of interrupt enable state
Interrupt level mask register (ILM)
Compares request interrupt level and current
interrupt level
Microcode
Execution of interruption handling routine
Interrupt vector table
Stores the branch destination address at interrupt
processing
CPU
FFFC00H to FFFFFFH in
memory
■ Hardware Interrupt Suppression
For hardware interrupt, acceptance of the interrupt request is suppressed in the following conditions:
● Suppressing a hardware interrupt which is generated during write to a peripheral function control
register area
While data is being written to a peripheral function control register area, no hardware interrupt request is
accepted. The purpose of this is to prevent the CPU from causing a malfunction due to some interruptrelated problem in response to an interrupt request which is generated while the interrupt control register
relation for each resource is being rewritten. The peripheral function control register area is the area
assigned to the control and data registers of the peripheral function control registers. Note that they are not
the "000000H" to "0000FFH" I/O addressing area.
Figure 3.4-1 shows the hardware interrupt operation which takes place during write to the peripheral
function control register area.
Figure 3.4-1 Hardware Interrupt Request during Write to the Peripheral Function Control Register Area
Instruction of writing to peripheral function control register area
MOV A.#08
MOV io,A
generating interrupt
request here
64
MOV A,2000H
not branch
to interrupt
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
Interrupt
processing
branch
to interrupt
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
● Hardware interrupt suppression of interrupt suppression instruction
Table 3.4-2 shows the hardware interrupt suppression instruction. If the hardware interrupt request is
generated during execution of hardware interrupt suppression instruction, an interrupt is processed after
execution of hardware interrupt suppression instruction and then other instruction.
Table 3.4-2 Hardware Interrupt Suppression Instruction
Prefix code
The instructions
which do not accept
the interrupt and
hold requests.
PCB
DTB
ADB
SPB
CMR
NCC
Interruption/holding control instruction
(The command that delays the effect of prefix code)
MOV ILM,#imm8
OR CCR,#imm8
AND CCR,#imm8
POPW PS
● Suppressing a hardware interrupt during execution of a software interrupt
When a software interrupt is activated, no other interrupt requests are acceptable to clear the I flag to "0".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
65
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
3.4.1
MB90330A Series
Operation of Hardware Interrupt
The following describes the operation sequence from generation of a hardware interrupt
request to completion of interrupt handling.
■ Start of Hardware Interrupt
● Operation of peripheral function (generation of interrupt request)
Any peripheral function provided with the hardware interrupt request function has "interrupt request flag"
and "interrupt enable flag". The interrupt request flag indicates whether an interrupt request has been
generated or not. The interrupt enable flag indicates whether an interrupt request is enabled or disabled.
The interrupt request flag is set by occurrence of an specific event to the peripheral function. It causes an
interrupt request to the interrupt controller when the interrupt enable flag indicates "enable".
● Operation of Interrupt controller (Control of interrupt request)
The interrupt controller makes a comparison between interrupt levels (ILs) of the simultaneously received
interrupt requests. It adopts the highest-level request, (the request with the smallest IL value), and notifies it
to the CPU. If two or more requests at the same level are found, the highest priority is given to the request
with the smallest interrupt number.
● CPU operation (Interrupt request acceptance and interrupt processing)
The CPU compares the received interrupt level (IL2 to IL0 of ICR) with the contents of the interrupt level
mask (ILM) register. If IL < ILM and the interrupt has been enabled (CCR I = 1), the currently active
instruction terminates, the interrupt handling microcode is then activated to execute the interrupt handling.
First, the interrupt handling saves the contents of the dedicated registers (12 bytes of A, DPR, ADB, DTB,
PCB, PC, and PS) in the system stack (system stack space indicated by SSB and SSP). Next, the interrupt
handling loads to the program counters (PCB and PC) of the interrupt vector, and updates the ILM. It also
sets the stack flag (S) (setting CCR:S = 1 to enable the system stack).
■ Return from Hardware Interrupt
When the interrupt request flag of the peripheral function causing the interrupt is cleared, and the RETI
instruction is executed in the interrupt handling program, the 12-byte data saved in the system stack returns
to the dedicated registers. Control then returns to the process which was being executed before the interrupt
branch. By clearing the interrupt request flag, the interrupt request which the peripheral function has output
to the interrupt controller is canceled automatically.
66
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of Hardware Interrupt
Figure 3.4-2 shows the operation sequence from generation of a hardware interrupt to completion of
interrupt handling.
Figure 3.4-2 Operation of Hardware Interrupt
Internal bus
PS
PS, PC
(7)
ILM
IR
Microcode
Check
(6)
F2MC-16LX
I
CPU
Comparator
(5)
(4)
Other peripheral
function
(3)
Peripheral function generated
Interrupt request
Level
comparator
Enable FF
AND
Factor FF
(8)
Interrupt
level IL
(2)
(1)
Interrupt controller
RAM
IL : Interrupt level set bit of Interrupt control register (ICR)
PS : Processor status
I : Interrupt enable flag
ILM: Interrupt level mask register
IR : Instruction register
FF : flip - flop
(1) An interrupt cause occurs in a peripheral function.
(2) The peripheral function interrupt enable bit is referred. If it indicates "enable", an interrupt request is
output from the periphery to the interrupt controller.
(3) After receiving the interrupt request, the interrupt controller determines the priorities of the
simultaneously received interrupt requests. Then, the controller sends the ILs associated with the
interrupt requests to the CPU.
(4) The CPU compares the interrupt level requested from the interrupt controller with the interrupt level
mask register (ILM).
(5) If the comparison reveals that the priority is higher than the current interrupt handling level, the contents
of the I flag of the condition code register (CCR) will be checked.
(6) If the check in Item (5) reveals that the I flag indicates "enable", that is, I = 1, control waits for
completion of the currently active instruction. The requested IL is set in the ILM on completion.
(7) The contents of the register are saved before control branches to the interrupt handling routine.
(8) The software in the interrupt handling routine clears the interrupt cause generated at 1 and executes the
RETI instruction to complete the interrupt handling.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
67
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
3.4.2
MB90330A Series
Operation Flow of Hardware Interrupt
When the peripheral function generates an interrupt request, the interrupt controller
notifies the CPU of the interrupt level. If the CPU is ready to accept the interrupt, it
suspends the currently active instruction; the CPU then executes the interrupt handling
routine or activates Extended Intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) μDMAC. Furthermore, if a
software interrupt is generated by the INT instruction, the interrupt handling routine is
executed independently of the CPU state. At this time, the hardware interrupt is
prohibited.
■ Operation Flow of Hardware Interrupt
Figure 3.4-3 shows the handling flow which takes place during interrupt operation.
Figure 3.4-3 Handling Flow in the Interrupt Operation
START
NO
ENx = 1
YES
YES
I & IF & IE = 1
AND
ILM > IL
Has the
specified number
of times been completed?
Or did a peripheral function
issue a complete
request?
YES
NO
ISE = 1
YES
YES
NO
Fetch and decode next instruction
INT
instruction
NO
Saving PS, PC, PCB,
DTB, DPR and A into
the stack of SSP,
and setting ILM=IL
Expanded intelligent I/O
service processing
(EI2OS processing)
NO
Execute normal instruction
NO
Saving PS, PC, PCB,
DTB, DPR and A into
the stack of SSP,
and setting ILM=IL
Completion
of string instruction
repetition
YES
S
Update PC
I
: Interrupt enable flag of Condition code register (CCR)
IF : Interrupt request flag of peripheral function
1
Fetch interrupt vector
S
: Stack flag of Condition code register (CCR)
ENx : DMA activation request flag of DMA enable register
IE : Interrupt enable flag of peripheral function
ILM : CPU register level
ISE : EI2OS enable flag of Interrupt control register (ICR)
IL : Interrupt level set bit of Interrupt control register (ICR)
68
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
3.4.3
Procedure for Using a Hardware Interrupt
Use of hardware interrupt requires the system stack area, peripheral functions, and
interrupt control registers (ICR) to be set up.
■ Procedure for Using a Hardware Interrupt
Figure 3.4-4 shows an example of the procedure for using a hardware interrupt.
Figure 3.4-4 Example of Procedure for Using a Hardware Interrupt
START
(1) Setting System stack area
(2)
Initialize
peripheral function
(3)
Setting ICR
in interrupt controller
Interrupt processing program
Branch to
Stack processing
interrupt vector
(8)
Execution for
peripheral interrupt
(execute interrupt routine)
(9)
Clearing interrupt factor
(10)
Interrupt return
instruction (RETI)
(7)
Set the interrupt
enable bit of operation
(4)
starting setting for
peripheral function = enable.
(5)
Processing
by Hardware
Setting ILM, I in PS
Main program
(6)
Interrupt request generation
Main program
(1) The system stack area is set.
(2) Initialize the setting of a peripheral function which can generate an interrupt request.
(3) Set the interrupt control register (ICR) in the interrupt controller.
(4) Make the peripheral function ready to start, and set the interrupt enable bit to "enable".
(5) Sets the interrupt level mask register (ILM) and interrupt enable flag (I) to accept interrupts.
(6) Generation of an interrupt in the peripheral function generates a hardware interrupt request.
(7) The contents of the registers are saved by the interrupt handling hardware, and control branches to the
interrupt handling program.
(8) The interrupt handling program handles to the peripheral function in response to generation of the
interrupt.
(9) Clear the interrupt request from the peripheral function.
(10)Execute the interrupt return instruction to return control to the program before branching.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
69
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
3.4.4
MB90330A Series
Multiple Interrupts
Multiple hardware interrupts can be implemented. To do so, set different interrupt levels
for interrupt level set bits (IL0 to IL2) of the ICR in response to two or more interrupt
requests from a peripheral function. However, multiple EI2OS and multiple μDMAC
cannot be started.
■ Multiple Interrupts
If an interrupt request with a higher interrupt level is generated during execution of the interrupt handling
routine, this higher interrupt level request is accepted with the current interrupt handling suspended. After
completion of the higher interrupt level, control returns to the handling of the suspended interrupt. The
interrupt level can be set to "0" to "7". If it is set to "7", the CPU will accept no interrupt request.
If a new interrupt at the same or a lower level is generated during execution of the current interrupt
handling, the new one remains pending until the current one is completed, unless the I flag changes the
ILM. Activation of the multiple interrupt function during the interrupt is temporarily disabled by setting the
I flag in the condition code register (CCR) to "disable" (CCR:I = 0), or setting the interrupt level mask
register (ILM) to "disable" (ILM = 000B) in the interrupt handling routine.
Note:
However, multiple EI2OS and multiple μDMAC cannot be started. If an extended intelligent I/O
service (EI2OS) or μDMAC process is in progress, all the other interrupt requests and all the EI2OS
and μDMAC requests remain pending.
70
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
■ Example of Multiple Interrupts
Aa an example of multiple interrupt processing, set the A/D converter interrupt level to 2 and the timer
interrupt level to "1", considering a case when timer interrupts are to be given higher priority than A/D
converter interrupts. At this time, the handling is executed as shown in Figure 3.4-5 if a time interrupt is
generated during the A/D converter interrupt handling.
Figure 3.4-5 Example of Multiple Interrupts
Main program
A/D interrupt processing
Timer interrupt processing
Interrupt level 2
Interrupt level 1
(ILM=010B)
(ILM=001B)
Initialize
(1)
peripheral
(3) Timer interrupt
generation
Timer interrupt
A/D interrupt (2)
(4) processing
generation
Suspend
Restart
Main processing
restart (8)
(6) A/D interrupt
processing
(5) Timer interrupt
return
(7) A/D interrupt return
● A/D Interruption generation
At the start of the A/D converter interrupt handling, the ILM is automatically set to the same value as the
A/D converter interrupt level (IL2 to IL0 in ICR). If a Level 1 or 0 interrupt request is generated, the
interrupt handling makes it a higher priority in execution.
● End of interrupt processing
When the interrupt processing has completed and the return instruction (RETI) is executed, the values of
the dedicated registers (A, DPR, ADB, DTB, PCB, PC, PS) saved in the stack are returned and the interrupt
level mask register (ILM) has the values before the interrupt.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
71
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
3.4.5
MB90330A Series
Hardware Interrupt Processing Time
Before the interrupt handling routine can be executed after a hardware interrupt request
is generated, the time to complete of the currently active instruction and the interrupt
handling time are required.
■ Hardware Interrupt Processing Time
Before the interrupt handling routine can be executed after an interrupt request is generated and the
interrupt is accepted, the waiting time for the interrupt request sample and the interrupt handling time
(required for preparation for interrupt handling) are required. Figure 3.4-6 shows the interrupt handling
time.
Figure 3.4-6 Interrupt Processing Time
Normal instruction execute
Interrupt handling
Interrupt
processing routine
Operation of CPU
Interrupt wait time
Interrupt request
sampling wait time
Interrupt handling time
(φ machine cycle)*
Interrupt request generation
*
: The last cycle, Sampling interrupt request here
: 1 machine cycle is appropriate 1 clock cycle of machine clock (φ).
● Interrupt request sampling wait time
The wait time for an interrupt request sample refers to the time from generation of an interrupt request to
the completion of the currently active instruction. Whether or not an interrupt request is present is
determined by interrupt request sampling in the final cycle of each instruction. Because the CPU cannot
recognize the interrupt request for the above reason, the wait time is produced.
The wait time for an interrupt request sample reaches the maximum if an interrupt request is generated
immediately after the start of the PCPW, PW0,..., RW7 instructions with the longest cycle of execution (45
machine cycle).
72
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.4 Hardware Interrupt
MB90330A Series
● Interrupt handling time (θ machine cycle)
The CPU must save the dedicated registers in the system stack, fetch the interrupt vectors, and execute
other processes by acceptance of the interrupt request. To do so, it requires the interrupt handling time with
the θ machine cycles. The interrupt handling time can be calculated by the expression shown below.
• When an interrupt is activated: θ = 24 + 6 × Z machine cycles
• When an interrupt is returned: θ = 11 + 6 × Z machine cycles (RETI instructions)
The interrupt handling time depends on the address to which the stack pointer points. Table 3.4-3 shows the
compensation values (Z) of the interrupt handling time.
One machine cycle is equal to one clock cycle of the machine clock (φ).
Table 3.4-3 Compensation Value of Interrupt Handling Time (Z)
CM44-10129-6E
Address which stack pointer indicates
Compensation value (Z)
For the external 8-bit
+4
For the external even address
+1
For the external odd address
+4
For internal even address
0
For internal odd address
+2
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
73
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.5 Software Interrupt
3.5
MB90330A Series
Software Interrupt
The software interrupt function transfers control from the currently active program by
the CPU to the user-defined interrupt handling program in response to execution of the
software interrupt instruction (INT instruction).
The hardware interrupt stops during execution of a software interrupt.
■ Start of Software Interrupt
● Start of software interrupt
A software interrupt is started by using the INT instruction. The software interrupt request has neither the
interrupt request flag nor enable flag, execution of the INT instruction always generates a software interrupt
request.
● Hardware interrupt inhibition
Because the INT instruction has no interrupt level, the interrupt level mask register (ILM) is not updated.
During the execution of an INT instruction, "0" is set in the I flag of the condition code register (CCR) to
mask hardware interrupts. To enable hardware interrupts also during software interrupt handling, set the I
flag to "1" in the software interrupt handling routine.
● Operation of software interrupt
Once the CPU fetches and executes the INT instruction, the software interrupt handling microcode is
activated. With this microcode, the registers and their related data in the CPU are automatically saved in the
system stack. After hardware interrupts are masked (CCR:I = 0), control branches to the associated
interrupt vector.
For allocations of interrupt numbers and interrupt vectors, see Section "3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt
Vector".
■ Return from Software Interrupt
When the return interrupt (RETI instruction) instruction is executed in the interrupt handling program, the
12-byte data saved in the system stack returns to the dedicated registers. Control then returns to the process
which was being executed before the interrupt branch.
74
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.5 Software Interrupt
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of Software Interrupt
Figure 3.5-1 shows the operation sequence from generation of a software interrupt to completion of
interrupt handling.
Figure 3.5-1 Operation of Software Interrupt
Internal bus
PS, PC
(2) Microcode
(1)
PS
I
S
IR
Queue
Fetch
RAM
PS : Processor status
I : Interrupt enable flag
S : Stack flag
IR : Instruction register
(1) Software interrupt instruction is executed.
(2) The required processes are performed; for example, the contents of the dedicated registers are saved
according to the microcode associated with the software interrupt instruction. The branching process is
then executed.
(3) The RETI instruction in the user-defined interrupt handling routine terminates the interrupt handling.
■ Precautions on Software Interrupt
If the program counter bank register (PCB) is "FFH", the vector area for the CALLV instruction overlaps
with the table for the INT#vct8 instruction. When creating the software, pay attention to overlap of the
CALLV instruction and INT#vct8 instruction addresses.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
75
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
3.6
MB90330A Series
Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
The extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) executes automatic data transfer between
the peripheral function (I/O) and memory. A hardware interrupt is generated at the end
of the data transfer.
■ Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
The extended intelligent I/O service is a kind of hardware interrupts. EI2OS executes automatic data
transfer between the peripheral function (I/O) and memory. EI2OS executes data exchange with the
peripheral function (I/O), previously executed by the interrupt handling program, like direct memory access
(DMA), at the end of transfer, and sets the end condition before control automatically branches to the
interrupt handling routine. The user has to write the program only about the start and end of EI2OS without
having to code the data transfer program between them.
● Advantages of extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
Compared with data transfer by the interrupt handling routine, EI2OS provides the user with the following
advantages:
• Because no data transfer program needs to be coded, the program size can shrink.
• Because the transfer can be stopped depending the state of the peripheral function (I/O), no unnecessary
data needs to be transferred.
• Enables the user to select whether the buffer address is incremented or not updated.
• Enables the user to select whether the I/O register address is incremented or not updated.
● Interrupt by extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) termination
After completion of data transfer by EI2OS, this sets the end condition in the S1 and S0 bits of the interrupt
control register (ICR) before automatic branch to the interrupt handling routine.
The cause for a stop of EI2OS can be determined by checking the EI2OS status (S1 and S0 of ICR) with the
interrupt handling program.
The interrupt numbers, interrupt vectors, etc. are fixed for individual peripheral functions. For details, see
Section "3.2 Interrupt Cause and Interrupt Vector".
● Interrupt control registers (ICR)
Located in the interrupt controller. Activates EI2OS, specifies the channel, and displays the at end state of
EI2OS.
● Extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) descriptor (ISD)
Located in the 000100H to 00017FH area in RAM. Contains a set of 8-byte data used to store the transfer
mode, I/O address and transfer count, and buffer address. Repeated for 16 channels. Specifies the channel
with the interrupt control register (ICR).
Note:
The CPU program execution stops while the extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS).
76
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Figure 3.6-1 shows the operation of the EI2OS.
Figure 3.6-1 Operation of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Memory space
by IOA
I/O register
I/O register
Peripheral
function (I/O)
(5)
CPU
Interrupt request
(3)
ISD
by ICS
(2)
(3)
(1)
Interrupt control register (ICR)
Interrupt controller
by BAP
(4)
ISD
IOA
BAP
ICS
DCT
Buffer
by DCT
: EI2OS descriptor
: I/O address pointer
: Buffer address pointer
: EI2OS channel select bit for Interrupt control register (ICR)
: Data counter
(1) I/O demands forwarding.
(2) The interrupt controller selects the descriptor.
(3) Reads the transfer-source or transfer-destination from the descriptor.
(4) Forwarding between I/O and the memory is executed.
(5) The interruption factor is automatically clear.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
77
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
3.6.1
MB90330A Series
Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Descriptor (ISD)
Extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) descriptor (ISD) is existed to the addresses
000100H to 00017FH in the internal RAM and consists of 8 bytes × 16 channels.
■ Configuration of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Descriptor (ISD)
Configuration of ISD consists of 8 bytes × 16 channels, and each ISD has the configuration shown in
Figure 3.6-2. The correspondence between the channel numbers and ISD addresses is as listed in Table 3.6-1.
Figure 3.6-2 Configuration of EI2OS Descriptor (ISD)
MSB
Data counter upper 8bit (DCTH)
LSB
H
Data counter lower 8bit (DCTL)
I/O Register address pointer upper 8bit (IOAH)
I/O Register address pointer lower 8bit (IOAL)
EI2OS status register (ISCS)
Buffer address pointer upper 8bit (BAPH)
Buffer address pointer middle 8bit (BAPM)
ISD start address
(000100H + 8 x ICS)
78
Buffer address pointer lower 8bit (BAPL)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
L
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
Table 3.6-1 Correspondence between Channel Numbers and Descriptor Addresses
CM44-10129-6E
Channel
Descriptor address
0
000100H
1
000108H
2
000110H
3
000118H
4
000120H
5
000128H
6
000130H
7
000138H
8
000140H
9
000148H
10
000150H
11
000158H
12
000160H
13
000168H
14
000170H
15
000178H
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
79
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
3.6.2
MB90330A Series
Each Register of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Descriptor (ISD)
The extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) descriptor (ISD) consists of the following
registers.
• Data counter (DCT)
• I/O register address pointer (IOA)
• EI2OS status register (ISCS)
• Buffer address pointer (BAP)
Note that resetting each register causes its initial value to be undefined.
■ Data Counter (DCT)
Data counter (DCT), a 16-bit length register, indicates the corresponding to the transfer data count. After
each of data has been transferred, the counter is decremented by 1 (reduced value). EI2OS ends when this
counter reaches "0". Figure 3.6-3 shows the DCT configuration.
Figure 3.6-3 Configuration of Data Counter (DCT)
DCTH
DCTL
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Initial value
DCT B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB
R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W R/WR/WR/WR/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
■ I/O Register Address Pointer (IOA)
I/O register address pointer (IOA), a 16-bit length register, contains those low address (A15 to A00) of the
I/O register which are used for data transfer to or from the buffer. The upper address (A23 to A16)
containing all "0" data, can specify any I/O from 000000H to 00FFFFH. Figure 3.6-4 shows the IOA
configuration.
Figure 3.6-4 Configuration of I/O Register Address Pointer (IOA)
IOAH
IOAL
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Initial value
IOA A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 A00 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB
R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
80
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
■ Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Status Register (ISCS)
The extended intelligent I/O service status register (ISCS) updates or fixes the buffer address and I/O
register address pointers by the 8-bit length register. It also indicates the transfer data format (byte or word)
and the direction of transfer. Figure 3.6-5 shows the configuration of the ISCS.
Figure 3.6-5 Configuration of EI2OS Status Register (ISCS)
bit7
bit6
bit5
Reserved Reserved Reserved
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
IF
BW
BF
DIR
SE
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
SE
EI2OS end control bit
0
It is completed by request from peripheral function.
1
It is not completed by request from peripheral function.
Data transfer direction specification bit
DIR
0
I/O register address pointer Buffer address pointer
1
Buffer address pointer I/O register address pointer
BF
BAP update/fix selection bit
0
Buffer address pointer is updated after transfer data. *1
1
Buffer address pointer is not updated after transfer data.
BW
Transfer data length specification bit
0
Byte
1
Word
IF
IOA update/fix selection bit
0
I/O register address pointer is updated after transfer data. *2
1
I/O register address pointer is not updated after transfer data.
Reserved
Reserved bit.
Always set this bit to "0".
R/W : Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
*1 : Buffer address pointer is changed only lower 16-bit and enabled only increment.
*2 : Address pointer is enabled only increment.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
81
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
■ Buffer address Pointer (BAP)
The buffer address pointer (BAP), a 24-bit register, contains the address used for the next attempt of
transfer by EI2OS. The BAP is provided independently for the EI2OS channels to enable the EI2OS
channels to transfer data between any address of 16 Mbytes and I/O. If the BF bit (BAP update/fix selection
bit of EI2OS status register) of the EI2OS status register (ISCS) is set to "updated", only the low order 16bit (BAPM, BAPL) will change in the BAP. The higher 8-bit (BAPH) will be unchanged in this case.
Figure 3.6-6 shows the BAP configuration.
Figure 3.6-6 Configuration of Buffer address Pointer (BAP)
bit23
BAP
bit8 bit7
bit16 bit15
bit0
BAPH
BAPM
BAPL
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
Initial value
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB
R/W : Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
Note:
In the I/O address pointer (IOA), the 000000H to 00FFFFH area is available for specification.
In the buffer address pointer (BAP), the 000000H to FFFFFFH area is available for specification.
The maximum transfer count which may be specified in the data counter (DCT) is 65536 (64 Kbytes).
82
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
3.6.3
Operation of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
If the peripheral function has generated an interrupt request and activation of EI2OS has
been set in the associated interrupt control register (ICR), the CPU will execute data
transfer using EI2OS. Once data transfer has been executed the specified number of
times, the hardware interrupt handling is executed automatically.
■ Operation of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Figure 3.6-7 shows the EI2OS operation flow chart by the microcode of the internal CPU.
Figure 3.6-7 Flow Chart of Operation of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Generation of interrupt
request from peripheral
function
NO
ISE=1
YES
Interrupt sequence
ISD/ISCS read
End request
from peripheral
function
YES
YES
SE=1
NO
NO
YES
DIR=1
NO
Data indicated by IOA
(Data transfer)
Memo indicated by BAP
Data indicated by BAP
(Data transfer)
Memo indicated by IOA
YES
IF=0
NO
BF=0
DCT=00
NO
IOA update
Update value
by BW
BAP update
YES
NO
DCT decrement
Update value
by BW
(-1)
YES
EI2OS end processing
Set "00" to S1,S0
Clearing peripheral
function interrupt request
CPU operation return
ISD : EI2OS descriptor
ISCS : EI2OS status register (ISCS)
IF
: IOA update/fix selection bit of
EI2OS status register (ISCS)
BW : Transfer data length specification bit of
EI2OS status register (ISCS)
BF : BAP update/fix selection bit of
EI2OS status register (ISCS)
DIR : Transfer data direction specification bit of
EI2OS status register (ISCS)
SE : EI2OS end control bit of
EI2OS status register (ISCS)
CM44-10129-6E
Set "01" to S1,S0
Set "11" to S1,S0
Clearing ISE to "0"
Interrupt sequence
DCT : Data counter
IOA : I/O register address pointer
BAP : Buffer address pointer
ISE : EI2OS enable bit of Interrupt control register (ICR)
S1,S0 : EI2OS status bit of Interrupt control register (ICR)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
83
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
3.6.4
MB90330A Series
Procedure for use of Extended Intelligent I/O Service
(EI2OS)
To use extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS), the system stack area, EI2OS descriptor,
peripheral function, interrupt control register (ICR), and other requirements must be set
up.
■ Procedure for Use of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Figure 3.6-8 shows the EI2OS software and the process by hardware.
Figure 3.6-8 Procedure for Use of Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
Processing by Software
Processing by Hardware
START
Initialization
Setting System stack area
Setting EI2OS descriptor
Initializing Peripheral function
Setting Interrupt control
register (ICR)
Setting Operation start
set interrupt enable bit of
internal resource
Setting ILM, I in PS
S1,S0=00
User program execution
(Interrupt request)and (ISE=1)
Data transfer
Decide whether to end counting or to NO
branch to an interrupt by termination
request from resource
YES
(Branch to Interrupt vector)
Resetting expanded
intelligent I/O service
(Changing channel etc.)
S1,S0=01 or
S1,S0=11
Data processing during buffer
RETI
ISE : EI2OS enable bit of Interrupt control register (ICR)
S1,S0 : EI2OS status of Interrupt control register (ICR)
84
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
3.6.5
Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Processing Time
The time required for extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) processing depends on
the following factors:
•
•
•
•
•
Setting of EI2OS status register (ISCS)
Address (area) indicating I/O register address pointer (IOA)
Address (area) indicating buffer address pointer (BAP)
Width of external data bus when external is accessed
Data length of transfer data
Because a hardware interrupt is activated at the end of data transfer by EI2OS, the
interrupt handling time will be added.
■ Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS) Processing Time (Time for One Transfer)
● For continued data transfer
For continued data transfer, the EI2OS processing time varies with the setting in the EI2OS status register
(ISCS), as listed in Table 3.6-2.
Table 3.6-2 Extended Intelligent I/O Service Execution Time
Setting of the EI2OS termination control bit (SE)
Setting of the IOA updating/fixing select bit (IF)
BAP address update/fixation
Setting of selection bits (BF)
Terminated by an end
request from periphery
Termination request from the
surrounding is disregarded.
Fixed
Update
Fixed
Update
Fixed
32
34
33
35
Update
34
36
35
37
Unit: One machine cycle is equal to one clock cycle of the machine clock (φ).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
85
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
MB90330A Series
Further, correction may be required, depending on the condition for executing EI2OS, as shown in Table
3.6-3.
Table 3.6-3 Compensation Value for Data Transfer at EI2OS Processing Time
Internal Access
External access
I/O register address pointer
B/Even
Odd
B/Even
8/Odd
B/Even
0
+2
+1
+4
Odd
+2
+4
+3
+6
B/Even
+1
+3
+2
+5
8/Odd
+4
+6
+5
+8
Internal Access
Buffer address
pointer
External access
B:
8:
Even:
Odd:
Byte data transfer
External bus width 8-bit/word transfer
Word transfer at even address
Word transfer at odd address
● At completion of counting by data counter (DCT) (for final data transfer)
Because a hardware interrupt is activated at the end of data transfer by EI2OS, the interrupt handling time is
added. The EI2OS processing time at the end of counting is calculated by the following expression.
EI2OS processing time when count ends =
EI2OS processing time in data transfer + (21 + 6 × Z) machine cycles
↑
Interrupt handling time
The interrupt handling time depends on the address to which the stack pointer points. Table 3.6-4 shows the
compensation values (Z) of the interrupt handling time.
Table 3.6-4 Compensation Value of Interrupt Handling Time (Z)
86
Address which stack pointer indicates
Compensation Value (Z)
At the external 8 bits
+4
At the external even number address
+1
At the external odd number address
+4
At the internal even number address
0
At the internal odd number address
+2
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.6 Interrupts by Extended Intelligent I/O Service (EI2OS)
● At the end caused by an end request from the peripheral function (I/O)
If data transfer by EI2OS is aborted due to an end request from the peripheral function (I/O) (ICR S1, ICR
S0 = 11), the hardware interrupt is activated without performing data transfer. The EI2OS processing time
is calculated using the expression below. Z in the expression represents the interrupt handling time
compensation value (see Table 3.6-4).
EI2OS processing time for aborted = 36 + 6 × Z machine cycles
Reference:
One machine cycle is equal to one clock cycle of the machine clock (φ).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
87
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.7 Exception Processing Interrupt
3.7
MB90330A Series
Exception Processing Interrupt
F2MC-16LX executes exception handling by executing undefined instructions.
Exception handling, basically the same as interrupt, is executed when an exception item
is detected during a period between instructions, the normal process is suspended for
this purpose.
In general, exception handling takes place as a result of unpredicted operation; it is
recommended that it be used only for debugging or for activating the recovery software
in the event of an emergency.
■ Exception Processing Interrupt
● Operation of exception processing
F2MC-16LX regards as an undefined instruction any code not defined in the instruction map. When
executing an undefined instruction, F2MC-16LX performs a process equivalent to software interrupt
instruction "INT#10".
Before control branches to the interrupt routine, the exception handling performs the following processes:
1) Saving the registers of A, DPR, ADB, DTB, PCB, PC, and PS in the system stack.
2) Clearing the I flag of the condition code register (CCR) to "0" to mask the hardware interrupt.
3) Setting the S flag of the condition code register (CCR) to "1" to enable the system stack.
The program counter (PC) value saved in the system stack indicates the address storing the undefined
instruction. For any instruction code of 2 or more bytes, the PC value indicates the address which stores the
code by which the instruction has been identified as an undefined one. The PC value is useful to determine
the type of the exception cause in the exception handling routine.
● Return from exception processing
After returning from the exception handling according to the RETI instruction, control starts the exception
handling again because the PC points to an undefined instruction. Some measurement such as performing a
software reset should be taken.
88
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
3.8
Interruption by μDMAC
μDMAC is a simplified DMA with the same function as EI2OS.
3.8.1 μDMAC Function
3.8.2 Register of μDMAC
3.8.2.1 DMA Descriptor Channel Specification Register (DCSR)
3.8.2.2 DMA Status Register (DSRH/DSRL)
3.8.2.3 DMA Stop Status Register (DSSR)
3.8.2.4 DMA Permission Register (DERH/DERL)
3.8.3 DMA Descriptor Window Register (DDWR)
3.8.3.1 DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL)
3.8.3.2 DMA I/O Register Address Pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL)
3.8.3.3 DMA Control Register (DMACS)
3.8.3.4 DMA Buffer Address Pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL)
3.8.4 Explanation of Operation of μDMAC
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
89
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
3.8.1
MB90330A Series
μDMAC Function
μDMAC is simple DMA with the function equal with EI2OS.
■ μDMAC Function
μDMAC has the following functions.
• Performs automatic data transfer between the peripheral resource (I/O) and memory.
• The program execution of CPU stops in the DMA startup.
• The DMA transfer channel is 16 channels (The smaller the channel number, the higher the priority of
DMA transfer).
• Can select either "incremented" or "not incremented" for the source or destination address.
• DMA transfer may be activated, depending on the interrupt cause by a peripheral resource (I/O).
• DMA transfer can be controlled with (a) DMA permission register (DERH/DERL), (b) DMA stop status
register (DSSR), (c) DMA status register (DSRH/DSRL), (d) DMA descriptor channel specification
register (DCSR), and (e) descriptor (DMACS).
• A STOP request is available for stopping DMA transfer from the resource.
• After completion of DMA transfer, the flag is set in the appropriate bit of the DMA status register
(DSRH/DSRL), resulting in output of an interrupt to the interrupt controller.
90
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
3.8.2
Register of μDMAC
μDMAC has four registers: DCSR, DSR, DSSR, and DER. The DMA descriptor used to
set up DMA transfer is described in Section "3.8.3 DMA Descriptor Window Register
(DDWR)".
■ μDMAC Register List
Figure 3.8-1 μDMA Register List
DMA descriptor channel specification register (DCSR)
14
13
12
11
10
bit 15
00009BH
STP
Reserved Reserved Reserved
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DMA status register (DSRH/DSRL)
14
13
12
bit 15
9
DCSR3 DCSR2 DCSR1 DCSR0
R/W
R/W
R/W
11
10
9
00009DH DTE15 DTE14 DTE13 DTE12 DTE11 DTE10 DTE9
bit
00009CH
8
R/W
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
DTE7
DTE6
DTE5
DTE4
DTE3
DTE2
DTE1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
3
2
DCSR
R/W Initial value 00000000B
8
DTE8
DSRH
R/W Initial value 00000000B
0
DTE0
DSRL
R/W Initial value 00000000B
DMA stop status register (DSSR)
bit
0000A4H
bit
7
6
5
4
1
0
STP15 STP14 STP13 STP12 STP11 STP10 STP9
STP8
R/W
7
0000A4H STP7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
STP6
STP5 STP4
DSSR
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W Initial value 00000000B
0
STP3
STP2
STP1
STP0
DSSR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W Initial value 00000000B
When the STP bit of DCSR is "0", DSSR uses STP15 to STP8.
When the STP bit of DCSR is "1", DSSR uses STP7 to STP0.
DMA permission register (DERH/DERL)
bit
0000ADH
bit
0000ACH
15
14
EN15
EN14
R/W
7
R/W
6
EN7
R/W
13
12
11
10
9
8
EN12
EN11
EN10
EN9
EN8
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W Initial value 00000000B
0
EN6
EN5
EN4
EN3
EN2
EN1
EN0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W Initial value 00000000B
EN13
DERH
DERL
R/W : Readable/Writable
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
91
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
DMA Descriptor Channel Specification Register (DCSR)
3.8.2.1
DMA descriptor channel specification register (DCSR) switches the descriptor of each
channel.
The descriptor is set after the channel is specified by this register.
■ DMA Descriptor Channel Specification Register (DCSR)
Figure 3.8-2 DMA Descriptor Channel Specification Register
bit
00009BH
15
STP
R/W
14
13
12
Reserved Reserved Reserved
R/W
R/W
R/W
11
10
9
8
DCSR3 DCSR2 DCSR1 DCSR0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DCSR
Initial value 00000000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
[bit 11 to bit 8] DCSRx: Specifies the DMA descriptor channel.
Table 3.8-1 Relation between DCSR and Selector Channel
92
DCSR3 to DCSR0
Selection channel
Resource interrupt request
0000B
0
USB function 1 (End Point 0-IN)
0001B
1
USB function 1 (End Point 0-OUT)
0010B
2
USB function 2 (End Point 1)*
0011B
3
USB function 2 (End Point 2)*
0100B
4
USB function 2 (End Point 3)
0101B
5
USB function 2 (End Point 4)
0110B
6
USB function 2 (End Point 5)
0111B
7
Input capture 0,1
1000B
8
Input capture 2,3
1001B
9
I/O extended serial
1010B
10
UART2/3, Reception
1011B
11
UART2/3, Transmission
1100B
12
UART0/1, Reception
1101B
13
UART0/1, Transmission
1110B
14
PWC, reload timer 0
1111B
15
A/D converter, conversion end, and free run timer
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
One descriptor channel of the 16 channels is selected by setting the DCSR. For details, see Section "3.8.3
DMA Descriptor Window Register (DDWR)".
*: This function can use even when USB HOST is operated.
[bit 15] STP:STP control bit
STP bit
Function
0 [Initial value]
STP8 to STP15 is selected as DSSR.
1
STP0 to STP7 is selected as DSSR.
[bit 14 to bit 12] Reserved: (reserved bits)
These bits are a reserved bit.
These bits are always "0" at the beginning of reading.
Please write "0".
Note:
Do not use any read modify write (RMW) instruction to access the DCSR register.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
93
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
3.8.2.2
MB90330A Series
DMA Status Register (DSRH/DSRL)
DMA status register (DSRH/DSRL) indicates that the DMA transfer ended. When "1" is
set to this register, the interrupt is generated at the same time.
■ Bit Configuration of DMA Status Register (DSRH/DSRL)
Figure 3.8-3 Bit Configuration of DMA Status Register (DSRH/DSRL)
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
00009DH DTE15 DTE14 DTE13 DTE12 DTE11 DTE10 DTE9
bit
00009CH
8
DTE8
R/W
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
0
DTE7
DTE6
DTE5
DTE4
DTE3
DTE2
DTE1
DTE0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DSRH
Initial value 00000000B
DSRL
Initial value 00000000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
[bit 15 to bit 0] DTEx: DMA Status
DTEx bit
0 [Initial value]
1
Function
The DMA transfer has not ended.
Please write "0" when DTEx is "0".
Indicates that DMA transfer was completed and an interrupt request is being executing.
The DMA transfer due to the STOP request except last transfer does not set 1 to this bit.
When DTEx is "1", writing "0" clears it to "0" and writing "1" holds the previous data.
Note:
To write data to the DSRH/DSRL, use a read-modify-write (RMW) instruction.
94
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
3.8.2.3
DMA Stop Status Register (DSSR)
DMA stop status register (DSSR) indicates that the DMA transfer stopped due to the
STOP request.
The meaning of the bit in this register is different depending on the STP bit of the DMA
descriptor channel specification register (DCSR).
■ DMA Stop Status Register (DSSR)
Figure 3.8-4 Bit Configuration of DMA Stop Status Register (DSSR)
DCSR:STP bit = 0
7
6
bit
5
4
3
2
1
0000A4H STP15 STP14 STP13 STP12 STP11 STP10 STP9
R/W
R/W
DCSR:STP bit = 1
6
bit 7
0000A4H STP7
R/W
R/W
R/W
5
4
R/W
0
STP8
R/W
R/W
3
2
1
0
DSSR
R/W Initial value 00000000B
STP6
STP5 STP4
STP3
STP2
STP1
STP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W Initial value 00000000B
R/W
DSSR
R/W : Readable/Writable
[bit15 to bit 0] STPx: DMA stop status
STPx bit
Function
During DMA transfer, no STOP request is accepted from the resource.
Please write "0" at STPx=0.
0 [Initial value]
During DMA transfer, indicates that DMA transfer stopped in response to a STOP request from the
resource. However, "1" is not set to STPx bit even though the STOP request is accepted at last transfer.
If the SE bit of DMA control register is "1" and a STOP request is received by the associated channel,
the corresponding bit of the DMA permission register is cleared to "0".
When STPx = 1, writing "0" clears it to "0" and writing "1" holds the previous data.
1
The following two channels correspond to the STOP demand.
Channel
Corresponding STPx bit
Resource
ch.10
STP10
UART2/3, Reception
ch.12
STP12
UART0/1, Reception
Bits other than STP10 and STP12 do not have the meaning.
Notes:
•
•
DSSR is controlled by most significant bit (STP) of DCSR. If STP is "0", STP15 to STP8 will be
selected as being used for the DSSR. If it is "1", STP7 toSTP0 will be used for the DSSR.
Because the initial value of STP is "0", STP15 to STP8 is initially selected.
To write data to the DSSR, use a read modify write (RMW) instruction.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
95
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
DMA Permission Register (DERH/DERL)
3.8.2.4
DMA permission register (DERH/DERL) enables the DMA transfer.
When "1" is set to this register, the interrupt request, which is the DMA transfer
request, generates to the corresponding channel, and starts the DMA transfer.
■ DMA Permission Register (DERH/DERL)
Figure 3.8-5 Bit Configuration of DMA Permission Register (DERH/DERL)
bit
15
14
0000ADH
EN15
EN14
bit
R/W
7
R/W
6
0000ACH
EN7
R/W
13
12
11
10
9
EN12
EN11
EN10
EN9
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
0
EN6
EN5
EN4
EN3
EN2
EN1
EN0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
EN13
8
EN8
DERH
Initial value 00000000B
DERL
Initial value 00000000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
[bit15 to bit0] ENx: DMA permission
ENx bit
0 [Initial value]
1
Function
This bit does not execute the DMA transfer.
The interrupt request from the resource is handled as a DMA activation request, and the
interrupt request is output to the interrupt controller at the end of DMA transfer.
When the number of DMA transfer bytes reaches 0, or a STOP request from the resource stops
DMA transfer, this is cleared to "0".
Notes:
96
•
To write data to the DERH/DERL, use a read modify write (RMW) instruction.
•
Before changing the mode to the standby mode (sleep mode, stop mode, watch mode, and timebase timer mode) or the CPU intermittent operation mode (main clock intermittent operation
mode, PLL clock intermittent mode, and sub clock intermittent mode), the DMA permission
register (DERH/DERL) must be set to "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
3.8.3
DMA Descriptor Window Register (DDWR)
The DMA descriptor, consisting of 8 bytes × 16 channels, is used to set up DMA transfer.
One of the 16 channels is specified, and mapped to the DMA descriptor window register
(DDWR) for being accessible. The address of DDWR is 007920H to 007927H.
■ Configuration of DMA Descriptor Window Register (DDWR)
The DMA descriptor consists of 8 bytes × 16 channels. The configuration of each channel is shown in
Figure 3.8-6. The descriptor of the channel selected by the DMA descriptor channel specification register
(DCSR) or interrupt request channel number is mapped to the DMA descriptor window register (DDWR).
See Table 3.8-1 for the relationship between the DMA descriptor channel specification register (DCSR)
and the selected channel.
Figure 3.8-6 Configuration of DMA Descriptor Window Register (DDWR)
Address
007927H
DMA Data counter upper 8-bit (DDCTH)
007926H
DMA Data counter lower 8-bit (DDCTL)
007925H
DMA I/O register address pointer upper 8-bit (DIOAH)
007924H
DMA I/O register address pointer lower 8-bit (DIOAL)
007923H
DMA Control register (DMACS)
007922H
DMA Buffer address pointer upper 8-bit (DBAPH)
007921H
DMA Buffer address pointer middle 8-bit (DBAPM)
007920H
DMA Buffer address pointer lower 8-bit (DBAPL)
■ Each Register of DMA Descriptor
Each register configuring the DMA descriptor is described in the following pages. The initial value of each
register is made undefined when a reset is generated. Thus, make sure that the initialization has finished
before ENx is set to "1".
Note:
If the DCSR is used to switch the channel descriptor, access to DDWR is inhibited during the two
subsequent machine cycles.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
97
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
3.8.3.1
MB90330A Series
DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL)
DMA data counter (DDCTH/DDCTL) sets the data transfer.
When DDCTH/DDCTL is 0, the DMA transfer ends.
■ DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL)
DMA data counter (DDCTH/DDCTL), a 16-bit length register, indicates the counter associated with
transferred number. After each data has been transferred, the counter is always decremented by 1 regardless
of transferred data (word or byte). The DMA transfer ends when this counter reaches 0. Figure 3.8-7 shows
the DDCT configuration.
If the DDCT is set to "0", the maximum data transfer count (65536) is set.
Figure 3.8-7 Bit Configuration of DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL)
007927H/007926H
DDCTH
DDCTL
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Initial value
DDCTH/
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
B00
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB
DDCTL
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W: Readable/Writable
X: Undefined
■ About the Set Value of DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL)
Table 3.8-2 shows the relationship between the number of transferred bytes and the DDCTH/DDCTL.
Table 3.8-2 Set Value of DMA Data Counter (DDCTH/DDCTL)
DMACS
DDCT
BW bit
BYTEL bit
0
-
N
1
0
N/2
1
1
(N+1)/2
N: Number of transfer bytes
98
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
3.8.3.2
DMA I/O Register Address Pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL)
DMA I/O register address pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL) sets the I/O address pointer.
The upper address (A23 to A16) is fixed at "00H".
■ DMA I/O Register Address Pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL)
The DMA I/O register address pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL), a 16-bit length register, indicates the 16 low
order bits (A15 to A00) of the DMA I/O register address. The upper-level address (A23 to A16), containing
all "0" data, can specify any I/O address space from 000000H to 00FFFFH. If the IF bit (DIOA update/fix
selection bit) of the DMA control register (DMACS) is set to "updated", the DIOA will be incremented by
1 during byte transfer or by 2 during word transfer. If this bit is set to "not updated", the DIOA will be
fixed. Figure 3.8-8 shows the DIOA configuration.
Figure 3.8-8 Bit Configuration of DMA I/O address Register Pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL)
007925H/007924H
DIOAH
DIOAL
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Initial value
DIOAH/
A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 A00 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB
DIOAL
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W: Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
99
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
3.8.3.3
MB90330A Series
DMA Control Register (DMACS)
DMA control register (DMACS) controls the DMA transfer.
The following can be controlled by the DMACS.
• Direction control (IOA → BAP and BAP→ IOA)
• Transfer bit length (Byte and word)
• Address update (provided or not provided)
• Transfer interval
• Odd-numbered byte control at word transfer
■ DMA Control Register (DMACS)
The DMA control register (DMACS), an 8 bit length specifies update/fix, the transfer data format (byte or
word), the direction of transfer, and byte transfer, and issues a wait instruction of DMA buffer address
pointer and DMA I/O register address pointer. Figure 3.8-9 shows the DMACS configuration.
Figure 3.8-9 Bit Configuration of DMA Control Register (DMACS)
Address bit7
bit6
bit5
007923H RDY2 RDY1 BYTEL
R/W
R/W
R/W
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
Initial value
IF
BW
BF
DIR
SE
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SE
DMA transfer end control bit
0
It is not completed by request from peripheral function.
1
It is completed by request from peripheral function.
DIR
Data transfer direction specification bit
0
DMA I/O register address pointer
1
DMA Buffer address pointer
BF
DMA Buffer address pointer
DMA I/O register address pointer
BAP update/fix selection bit
0
After data transfer, the buffer address pointer is updated.
1
After data transfer, the buffer address pointer is not updated.
Transfer data length specification bit
BW
0
Byte
1
Word
IF
IOA update/fix selection bit
0
After data transfer, the I/O register address pointer is updated.
1
After data transfer, the I/O register address pointer is not updated.
BYTEL Byte transfer specification bit (only enabled for word transfer)
0
Even number of Bytes
1
Odd number of Bytes
RDY2 RDY1
0
R/W: Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
100
0
Wait instruction bits (see Figure 3.8-10)
No wait is inserted between transfers.
0
1
A 1-cycle wait is inserted between transfers.
1
0
A 2-cycle wait is inserted between transfers.
1
1
A 3-cycle wait is inserted between transfers.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
Figure 3.8-10 Wait Specification Bit Explanation
source
destination
wait
source
destination
Length of wait part in transfer such as above
figure is defined by RDY2 and RDY1.
Note:
If writing transmission data to UART by using μDMAC, not setting RDY2 and RDY1 bit of DMACS
register in (0, 0).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
101
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
DMA Buffer Address Pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL)
3.8.3.4
DMA buffer address pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL) sets the buffer address pointer.
The DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL can be set A23 to A00.
■ DMA Buffer Address Pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL)
The DMA buffer address pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL), a 24-bit register, contains the address used
for DMA transfer. DBAP are provided independently for the DMA channels to enable the DMA channels
to transfer data between any address of 16 Mbytes and I/O. If the BF bit (DBAP update/fix selection bit) of
the DMA control register (DMACS) is set to "updated", the 16 lower order bits (DBAPM, DBAPL) of the
DBAP will be incremented by 1 during byte transfer or by 2 during word transfer. The 8 high order bits
(DBAPH) will be unchanged in this case Figure 3.8-11 shows the DBAP configuration.
Figure 3.8-11 Bit Configuration of DMA Buffer Address Pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL)
007922H/007921H/007920H
DBAPH/
DBAPM/
DBAPL
bit23
bit16 bit15
bit8 bit7
bit0
DBAPH
DBAPM
DBAPL
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB
R/W : Readable/Writable
X
: Undefined
Notes:
102
•
In the DMA I/O register address pointer (DIOAH/DIOAL), the 000000H to 00FFFFH area is
available for specification.
•
In the DMA buffer address pointer (DBAPH/DBAPM/DBAPL), the 000000H to FFFFFFH area is
available for specification.
•
μDMAC internal register DCSR, DSRH, DSRL, DSSR, DERH, or DERL, or an address of DMA
descriptor window register (DDWR) may not be specified in the DIOA or DBAP.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
3.8.4
Explanation of Operation of μDMAC
This section describes the μDMAC operation.
■ Operation of μDMAC
Figure 3.8-12 shows the DMA operation.
Data transfer using μDMAC performs the following steps in order:
1. The peripheral resource (I/O) makes a request for DMA transfer.
2. If the DMA permission register (DERH/DERL) is "1", μDMAC reads transfer-related data, such as the
source and destination addresses for the specified channel and the transfer count, from the descriptor.
3. The DMA data transfer is begun between I/O and the memory.
4. After executing forwarding one byte or 1word.
(a) If transfer is not yet completed, that is, the DMA data counter (DDCT) does not contain 0 yet,
A request to clear the DMA transfer request is issued to the peripheral resource.
(b) When forwarding ends (DMA data counter DDCT=0)
After completion of DMA transfer, the transfer end flag is set.
Note:
When writing to the internal register DSRH, DSRL, DSSR, DERH, and DERL, be sure to use the
read modify write (RMW) instruction.
Figure 3.8-12 Operation of μDMAC
Memory space
DIOA
Peripheral
function
I/O register
I/O register
RAM for descriptor
(I/O)
(4) (a)
(3)
(1)
DMA controller
(2)
DMA
descriptor
(4) (b)
Buffer
DDCT
Interrupt
DBAP
CPU
DIOA : DMA I/O address pointer
DBAP : DMA buffer address pointer
CM44-10129-6E
(2)
controller
DER : DMA enable register
DDCT : DMA data counter
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
103
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.8 Interruption by μDMAC
MB90330A Series
■ Use Procedure of μDMAC
Figure 3.8-13 shows the procedure for using μDMAC.
Figure 3.8-13 Use Procedure of μDMAC
Hardware processing
Software processing
(Interrupt generation)
START
NO
ENx=1 of appropriate ch
Setting System stack area
YES
Setting Interrupt control register
YES
Initialization
Initializing peripheral function
STOP request
and SE=1
NO
DMA transfer
(DBAP)
(DIOA)
NO
BF = 0
NO
IF = 0
YES
YES
NO
BW = 1
BW = 1
YES
Execute User program
NO
BYTEL = 0
YES
NO
YES
NO
BYTEL = 0
NO
YES
DCT = 0
DCT = 0
YES
YES
BAP = BAP+2
NO
BAP = BAP+1
STPx = 1
IOA = IOA+2
DCT = 0
IOA = IOA+1
NO
YES
DTEx = 1
(Jump to Interrupt routine)
Interrupt processing
ENx = 0
NO
Generating other
interrupt
YES
Generating
interrupt
YES
NO
End of processing
ENx : DMA enable register appropriate bit
DTEx : DMA status register appropriate bit
STPx : DMA stop status register appropriate bit
: Output interrupt request to interrupt controller
104
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.9 Exceptions
MB90330A Series
3.9
Exceptions
The F2MC-16LX performs exception processing when the following event occurs.
■ Execution of an Undefined Instruction
Exception processing is fundamentally the same as interrupt processing. When an exception is detected
between instructions, exception processing is performed separately from ordinary processing. In general,
exception processing is performed as a result of an unexpected operation. Fujitsu recommends using
exception processing only for debugging or for activating emergency recovery software.
■ Exception due to Execution of an Undefined Instruction
The F2MC-16LX handles all codes that are not defined in the instruction map as undefined instructions.
When an undefined instruction is executed, processing equivalent to the INT 10 software interrupt
instruction is performed. Specifically, the AL, AH, DPR, DTB, ADB, PCB, PC, and PS values are saved
into the system stack, and processing branches to the routine indicated by the interrupt number 10 vector. In
the undefined instruction is stored. Processing can be restored by the RETI instruction, but is of no use,
however, because the same exception occurs again.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
105
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.10 Stack Operation of Interrupt Processing
3.10
MB90330A Series
Stack Operation of Interrupt Processing
Once an interrupt is accepted, the contents of the dedicated registers are automatically
saved in the system stack before control branches to the interrupt handling. Return
from the stack at the end of the interrupt handling also takes place automatically.
■ Stack Operation at the Start of Interrupt Processing
Once the interrupt is accepted, the CPU automatically saves the contents of the current dedicated registers
and their related data in the system stack in the order below:
1. Accumulator (A)
2. Direct page register (DPR)
3. Additional data bank register (ADB)
4. Data bank register (DTB)
5. Program counter bank register (PCB)
6. Program counter (PC)
7. Processor status (PS)
Figure 3.10-1 shows the stack operation at the start of interrupt handling.
Figure 3.10-1 Stack Operation at Start of Interrupt Processing
Address
Previously interrupt
SSB
Memory
Immediately interrupt Address
SSB
08FFH
00H
SSP
08FEH
A
0000H
08FFH
00H
SP
08FEH
XX H
H
AH
XX H
AL
XX H
08F2H
A
0000H
08FEH
08H
AH
AL
FEH
00H
00H
01H
XX H
DPR
01H
ADB
00H
DTB
00H
PCB
FFH
XX H
DPR
01H
ADB
00H
DTB
00H
PCB
FFH
00H
00H
XX H
XX H
XX H
PC
803FH
PS
20E0H
XX H
FFH
L
80H
PC
803FH
PS
20E0H
3FH
20H
XX H
08F2H
XX H
SP
08FEH
SSP
XX H
08FEH
Memory
Byte
08F2H
E0H
AH
AL
DPR
ADB
DTB
PCB
PC
PS
SP after
updated
Byte
■ Stack Operation when Interrupt Processing Returns
When the interrupt return instruction (RETI) is executed at the end of interrupt process, the values of PS,
PC, PCB, DTB, ADB, DPR, and A return from the stack in the reverse order for the start of interrupt
handling. The dedicated registers are restored to the initial state preceding the start of interrupt.
106
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.10 Stack Operation of Interrupt Processing
MB90330A Series
■ Stack Area
● Securing stack area
The stack area is used to save or return the program counter (PC) used to execute the subroutine call
(CALL) or vector call (CALLV) instruction as well as execute the interrupt handling. This area is also
used, by the PUSHW or POPW instruction, to save or return the contents of temporary registers and their
related data. The stack area is located in RAM together with the data area.
Figure 3.10-2 shows the stack area.
Figure 3.10-2 Stack Area
Vector table
(Reset, Interrupt vector
call instruction)
FFFFFFH
FFFC00H
ROM area
FC0000H*1
0040FFH*2
Internal RAM area
Stack area
000380H
000180H
Generalpurpose
register
bank area
000100H
0000FBH
000000H
Internal I/O area
*1: Built-in ROM capacity is difference depending on products.
*2: Built-in RAM capacity is difference depending on products.
Notes:
•
As a general rule, even addresses should be set in the stack pointers (SSP and USP).
•
The system stack area, user stack area, and data area should not overlap.
● System stack area and user stack area
The system stack area is used for interrupt processing. Even if the user stack area is being used, generation
of an interrupt causes forcible switching to the system stack. For this reason, the system stack area must
have been set up properly even in a system where the user stack area is primarily used. In particular, only
the system stack area should be used unless it is necessary to divide the stack space.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
107
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.11 Program Example of Interrupt Processing
3.11
MB90330A Series
Program Example of Interrupt Processing
An example of interrupt processing program is shown below.
■ Program Example of Interrupt Processing
● Processing specification
An example interruption program that uses external interruption 0 (INT0).
● Coding example
DDR6
EQU
000016H
; Port 6 direction register
ENIR
EQU
00003CH
; Interruption/DTP permission register.
EIRR
EQU
00003DH
; Interruption/DTP factor register
ELVR
EQU
00003EH
; Request level setting register
ICR03
EQU
0000B3H
; Interrupt control register 03
STACK
SSEG
RW
100
STACK_T
RW
STACK
ENDS
; Stack
1
;----------Main Program-----------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
;
START:
MOV
RP, #0
; Header bank used for general-purpose registers
MOV
ILM, #07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
MOV
A, #!STACK_T
; Sets system stack
MOV
SSB, A
MOVW A, #STACK_T
; Setting of stack pointer, in this case,
MOVW SP, A
; S flag = 1, so set to SSP
MOV
DDR6,#00000000B
; Sets the P60/INT0 pin for input
OR
CCR, #40H
; Sets I flag of CCR in PS to enable interrupts.
MOV
I:ICR03, #00H
; It is assumed interrupt levels 0(Max)
MOV
I:ELVR, #00000001B
; Make INT0 "H" level request
MOV
I:EIRR, #00H
; Clears interrupt cause for INT0.
MOV
I:ENIR, #01H
; INT0 input permitted
:
LOOP:
NOP
; Dummy loop
NOP
NOP
108
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.11 Program Example of Interrupt Processing
MB90330A Series
NOP
BRA
LOOP
; Unconditional jump
;----------Interrupt Program-----------------------------------------------------------ED_INT1:
MOV
I:EIRR, #00H
; New acceptance of INT0 prohibited
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
RETI
CODE
; Returns from interrupt.
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings-----------------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FFB4H
DSL
ED_INT1
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; The vector is set in interruption #18(12H)
; Reset vector setting
; Single-chip mode setting
ENDS
END
START
● Processing specification for program example of extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS)
1. The extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS) is started upon detection of the "H" level signal which
inputs to the INT0 pin.
2. When "H" level is input to INT0 pin, EI2OS is started, which transfers data at port 0 to memory address
"3000H".
3. The number of transfer data bytes is 100. After the 100 bytes have been transferred, an interrupt is
generated because of completion of EI2OS data transfer.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
109
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.11 Program Example of Interrupt Processing
MB90330A Series
● Coding example
DDR6
EQU
000016H
; Port 6 direction register
ENIR
EQU
00003CH
; Interruption/DTP permission register
EIRR
EQU
00003DH
; Interruption/DTP factor register
ELVR
EQU
00003EH
; A register to specify the required level
ICR03
EQU
0000B3H
; Interrupt control registers 03
BAPL
EQU
000100H
; Buffer address pointer lower
BAPM
EQU
000101H
; Buffer address pointer middle
BAPH
EQU
000102H
; Buffer address pointer upper
ISCS
EQU
000103H
; EI2OS Status
IOAL
EQU
000104H
; Lower I/O address pointer
IOAH
EQU
000105H
; Higher I/O address pointer
DCTL
EQU
000106H
; Data counter lower
DCTH
EQU
000107H
; Data counter upper
ER0
EQU
EIRR:0
; Defines external interrupt request flag bit.
STACK
SSEG
RW
100
STACK_T
RW
STACK
ENDS
; Stack
1
;----------Main Program-----------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
AND
CCR,#0BFH
; Clears the I flag of CCR in PS to disable interrupts.
MOV
RP,#00
; Sets register bank pointer.
MOV
A,#!STACK_T
; Sets system stack
MOV
SSB,A
MOVW A,#STACK_T
; Setting of stack pointer, in this case,
MOVW SP,A
; S flag = 1, so set to SSP
MOV
I:DDR6,#00000000B
; Sets the P60/INT0 pin for input.
MOV
BAPL,#00H
; Sets buffer address (003000H)
MOV
BAPM,#30H
MOV
BAPH,#00H
MOV
ISCS,#00010001B
; No I/O address update, byte transfer
Buffer address updated
; The peripheral function terminates I/O to buffer
transfer.
Yes
110
MOV
IOAL,#00H
MOV
IOAH,#00H
; Sets transfer source address (port 0: 000000H)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.11 Program Example of Interrupt Processing
MB90330A Series
MOV
DCTL,#64H
; Sets transfer byte count (100 bytes)
MOV
DCTH,#00H
MOV
I:ICR00,#00001000B
; EI2OS channel 0, EI2OS enable, interrupt level 0
(highest)
MOV
I:ELVR,#00000001B
; Make INT0 "H" level request
MOV
I:EIRR,#00H
; Clears interrupt cause for INT0.
MOV
I:ENIR,#01H
; Enables INT0 interrupt.
MOV
ILM,#07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
OR
CCR,#40H
; Sets I flag of CCR in PS to enable interrupts.
LOOP
; Infinite loop
:
LOOP:
BRA
;----------Interrupt Program-----------------------------------------------------------WARI
CLRB
ER0
; Interrupt/DTP request flag clear
:
user processing
; confirmation of the cause of the EI2OS completion
:
; Processes data in buffer, resetting EI2OS etc.
RETI
CODE
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings------------------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FFB4H
DSL
WARI
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; Reset vector setting
; Single-chip mode setting
ENDS
END
CM44-10129-6E
; The vector is set in interruption #18(12H).
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
111
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.12 Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
3.12
MB90330A Series
Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
The delayed interrupt generation module is used to generate a task switching interrupt.
Use of this module enables F2MC-16LX CPU to generate or cancel an interrupt request.
■ Block Diagram of Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
Figure 3.12-1 shows the block diagram of the delayed interrupt generation module.
Figure 3.12-1 Block Diagram of Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
F2MC-16LX bus
delayed interrupt request generation/
clear decoder
Factor latch
■ List of Register of Delay Interruption Generation Module
The register configuration of the delayed interrupt generation module {delayed interrupt cause generation/
clear register (delayed interrupt request register (DIRR))} is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3.12-2 Delayed Interrupt Cause Generation/clear Register (DIRR)
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
R0
00009FH
Initial value
-------0B
R/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
Delay interruption factor generation/release register (DIRR) controls the delay factor generation and
release. Writing "1" to this register generates a delayed interrupt request. Writing "0" to it resets the
request. A reset causes the state cause to remain cleared. Either "0" or "1" may be written to the reserved bit
area. However, it is recommended that the set or clear bit instruction for accessing this register be used,
taking the future extension into account.
112
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.12 Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
MB90330A Series
3.12.1
Operation of Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
When the CPU writes "1" to the appropriate bit of the DIRR by software, the request
latch in the delay interrupt generation module is set, resulting in generation of the
interrupt request to the interrupt controller.
■ Operation of Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
When the CPU writes "1" to the appropriate bit of the DIRR by software, the request latch in the delay
interrupt generation module is set, resulting in generation of the interrupt request to the interrupt controller.
If all the other interrupt requests have a lower priority than that of this one, or no other requests have been
generated, the interrupt controller generates the interrupt to F2MC-16LX CPU. When F2MC-16LX CPU
compares the ILM bit in the internal CCR register with interrupt request, if the request level is higher than
the ILM bit, a hardware interrupt processing microprogram is activated as soon as the current execution
instruction is completed. As a result, the interrupt routine is executed for this interrupt. The interrupt cause
is cleared by writing 0 to the appropriate bit of the DIRR in the interrupt handling routine. This also causes
task switching.
Figure 3.12-3 shows the above operation flow.
Figure 3.12-3 Operation of Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
Delayed interrupt
generation module
Interrupt controller
F2MC-16LX bus
Other
request
IL
ICRYY
DIRR
CMP
ICRXX
CMP
ILM
INTA
■ Notes on Use of Delay Interruption Generation Module (Delay Interruption Request
Latch)
This latch is set by writing "1" to the appropriate bit of the DIRR, and cleared by writing "0" to this bit.
Note that for this reason, the interrupt handling may be reactivated immediately when control returns from
the interrupt cause handling, unless the software has been designed to clear the cause in the interrupt
handling routine.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
113
CHAPTER 3 INTERRUPT
3.12 Delayed Interrupt Generation Module
114
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 4
RESET
This chapter explains reset of the MB90330A series.
4.1 Outline of Reset
4.2 Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times
4.3 External Reset Pin
4.4 Reset Operation
4.5 Reset Factor Bit
4.6 State of Each Pin at Reset
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
115
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.1 Outline of Reset
4.1
MB90330A Series
Outline of Reset
When the reset cause is generated, the CPU suspends the currently executed process
immediately before entering the wait state for release of the reset. After the reset is
cleared, processing starts from the address indicated in the reset vector.
There are the following four kinds of factors of resets.
• Generation power on reset
• Watchdog timer overflow
• Generation of external reset request from RST pin
• Generation of software reset request
■ Reset Factor
Table 4.1-1 shows the causes of reset.
Table 4.1-1 Reset Factor
Reset
Generation factor
Machine clock
Watchdog timers
Oscillation
stability waiting
Power on
At power on
Main clock
(MCLK)
Stops
Yes
Watchdog timer
Watchdog timer overflow
Main clock
(MCLK)
Stops
None
External pin
Input "L" level to RST pin
Main clock
(MCLK)
Stops
None
Software
A "0" is written to the RST bit
of low-power consumption
mode control register
(LPMCR)
Main clock
(MCLK)
Stops
None
Main clock: Oscillation clock frequency divided by 2
● Power on reset
Power on reset is reset generated at power on. For an evaluation or flash product, the oscillation
stabilization wait time is 218/HCLK (approx. 43.70 ms at an oscillation clock of 6 MHz). For a MASK
product, this wait time is 217/HCLK (approx. 21.85 ms at an oscillation clock of 6 MHz). Reset operation
starts after elapsing the oscillation stabilization wait time.
● Watchdog reset
Watchdog reset generates a reset in response to an overflow of the watchdog timer after start of the
watchdog timer. This overflow occurs when a "0" is not written in the watchdog control bit (WTE) of the
watchdog timer control register (WDTC) within the predetermined time. The oscillation stabilization wait
time can be selected using the clock select register (CKSCR).
116
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.1 Outline of Reset
MB90330A Series
● External reset
An external reset is generated by inputting the "L" level signal to external reset pin (RST). The input time
of the "L" level signal to the (RST) pin must be continued for 16 machine cycles (16/φ) or more.
The external reset, that is, the RST pin input reset does not produce the oscillation stabilization wait time.
Reference:
Only when a reset request via the RST pin is generated, a reset cause generated in write operation
(An example of such write operation is the MOV instruction which is issued during execution of a
transfer instruction.) causes a wait state for release of the reset after completion of the instruction.
Thus, the write process terminates normally even if a reset signal is input during write operation.
However, if a string instruction such as MOVS is used, transfer of all the data will not be guaranteed.
This is because the instruction accepts a reset before the transfer data for the specified counter
value is completed. A reset is accepted also if extension of the bus cycle via the RDY pin continues
for 16 machine cycles or more during access to the external bus.
● Software reset
Software reset causes an internal reset by writing "0" to the internal reset signal generation bit (RST) of the
low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR). Software reset does not cause the oscillation
stabilization wait time.
Reference:
Clock definition
HCLK:
Oscillation clock, which is provided via the high speed oscillation pin.
MCLK:
Main clock (HCLK frequency divided by 4)
SCLK:
Sub clock (a clock which is frequency divided by 4 on the clock provided via the low speed
oscillation pin)
φ:
Machine clock (CPU operation clock)
1/φ:
machine cycle (CPU operating clock cycle)
Refer to the Section "5.1 Outline of Clock" for details of the machine clocks.
Note:
A reset generated in stop or sub clock mode produces an 217/HCLK oscillation stabilization wait time
(approximately 21.85 ms at the oscillation clock is 6 MHz).
Refer to the Section "5.4 Clock Mode" for details of the clock mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
117
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.2 Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times
4.2
MB90330A Series
Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times
There are four kinds of reset factors of MB90330A series. The oscillation stabilization
wait time varies with the reset cause.
■ Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times
Table 4.2-1 shows the relationship between the reset causes and the oscillation stabilization wait time.
Table 4.2-1 Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times
Reset factor
Oscillation stabilization wait time
Each value in parentheses ( ) represents the period for the oscillation clock at
6 MHz.
Power on reset
Evaluation products/flash products: 218/HCLK (about 43.70 ms).
MASK product: 217/HCLK (about 21.85 ms).
Watchdog timer
None: However, WS1 and WS0 bit are initialized by "11B".
External reset from RST pin
None: However, WS1 and WS0 bit are initialized by "11B".
Software reset
None: However, WS1 and WS0 bit are initialized by "11B".
HCLK: Oscillation clock
WS1, WS0: Bits used to select the oscillation stabilization wait time of the clock selection register (CKSCR).
Figure 4.2-1 shows the oscillation stabilization wait times for the evaluation/flash and MASK products
during power on reset time.
118
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.2 Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times
MB90330A Series
Figure 4.2-1 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times for the Evaluation/flash and MASK Products
during Power on Reset Time
Evaluation/Flash Products
VCC
217/HCLK
217/HCLK
CLK
CPU
operation
Down-conversion
Oscillation Stabilizing
Stabilizing Wait Time Wait Time
MASK Products
VCC
217/HCLK
CLK
CPU
operation
Oscillation Stabilizing Wait Time
HCLK : Oscillation clock
Note:
For ceramic or quartz oscillators, typically the oscillation stabilization wait time of several to some
tens of milliseconds is required until the oscillation is stabilized at the natural oscillation. after it
begins. For this reason, set the wait time value meeting the oscillator used.
For details, see Section "5.5 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time".
■ Oscillation Stabilization Waiting Reset State
The reset operation in response to a reset which occurs during power on reset or in stop or sub clock mode
begins after passing the oscillation stabilization wait time produced by the time-base timer expires. The
reset operation is performed after the external reset is released.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
119
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.3 External Reset Pin
4.3
MB90330A Series
External Reset Pin
The external reset pin (RST pin), dedicated to reset input pin, generates an internal
reset in response to input of the "L" level signal. MB90330A series are reset in synch
with the CPU operating clock, except for external pin in asynchronous (generated
through ports and so on), which change to the reset state.
■ Block Diagram of External Reset Pin
Figure 4.3-1 shows the block diagram of the generation of the internal reset.
Figure 4.3-1 Block Diagram of Internal Reset Generation
CPU operation clock
(PLL frequency multiplication circuit,
divided-by-two of HCLK)
RST
CPU
P-ch
Synchronous
circuit
Pin
N-ch Input buffer
HCLK : Oscillation clock
Peripheral
function
I/O port
etc.
Note:
To protect the memory from destruction by a reset during write operation, the RST pin input is
accepted with a cycle which does not cause the memory to be destroyed.
Also, the clock is required to initialize the internal circuits. In particular, when using an external clock,
the clock must be input during input of the reset.
120
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.4 Reset Operation
MB90330A Series
4.4
Reset Operation
Once the reset is released, the object from which to read the mode data and reset
vector is selected by setting the mode pin, before the mode fetch is performed. This
fetch determines the CPU operation mode and the execution activation address
succeeding the reset operation. At power on or when recovering from stop mode via a
reset, the mode fetch is performed after the oscillation stabilization delay time elapses.
■ Overview of Reset Operation
Figure 4.4-1 shows the reset operation flow.
Figure 4.4-1 Reset Operation Flow
Power on reset
Stop mode
Sub clock mode
During reset
External reset
Software reset
Watchdog timer reset
Oscillation stabilizing wait
reset state
Mode fetch
(Reset operation)
Fetch Mode data
Pin state and function change
of external bus mode relation
Fetch Reset vector
Normal operation
(RUN state)
Capture the instruction code
from the address specified
by reset vector and execute
the instruction
■ Mode Pin
The mode pins (MD2 to MD0) specify the way to fetch the reset vector and mode data. This fetch is
performed according to the reset sequence. See Section "7.2 Mode Pins (MD2 to MD0)" for details of the
mode pins.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
121
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.4 Reset Operation
MB90330A Series
■ Mode Fetch
Once the reset is released, the CPU transfers the reset vector and mode data into the appropriate register in
the CPU core. The reset vector and mode data are assigned to the four bytes of FFFFDCH to FFFFDFH.
When the reset is released, the CPU immediately outputs these addresses to the bus before fetching the
reset vector and mode data. The CPU starts the mode fetch process at the address pointed to by the reset
vector.
Figure 4.4-2 shows how the reset vector and mode data are transferred.
Figure 4.4-2 Reset Vector and Mode Data Transfers
F2MC-16LX CPU core
Memory space
FFFFDFH
Mode data
FFFFDEH
Reset vector bit 23 to 16
FFFFDDH
Reset vector bit 15 to 8
FFFFDCH
Reset vector bit 7 to 0
Mode
register
Micro ROM
Reset sequence
PCB
PC
Reference:
The object from which to read the reset vector and mode data (either internal ROM or external
memory) can be specified using the mode pins. It is recommended that the internal vector mode be
specified using the mode pins in single chip mode or internal ROM external bus mode. This is
because specifying the external vector mode with the mode pins causes an attempt to read the reset
vector and mode data from the external memory, instead of the internal memory.
● Mode data (address: FFFFDFH)
The contents of the mode register can be modified only by reset operation. The mode register settings will
take effect after reset operation. Refer to the Section "7.3 Mode Data" for details of the mode data.
● Reset vector (address FFFFDCH to FFFFDEH)
Write the execution start address after the completion of the reset operation. Execution begins from the
address of this content.
122
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.5 Reset Factor Bit
MB90330A Series
4.5
Reset Factor Bit
A reset factor can be identified by reading the watchdog timer control register (WDTC).
■ Reset Factor Bit
There are the flip-flop registers associated with respective reset causes, as shown in Figure 4.5-1. The
contents of the flip-flops are obtained by reading the watchdog timer control register (WDTC). If the reset
cause needs to be identified after the reset has been released, the values read from the WDTC register
should be processed by software before control branches to the program.
Figure 4.5-1 Block Diagram of Reset Factor Bit
RST Pin
Power on
Power on
generation
detection circuit
RST=L
External reset
request
detection circuit
Watchdog timer
control register
(WDTC)
S
R
S
F/F
Q
R
Without routine
clear
Watchdog timer
reset generation
detection circuit
S
F/F
R
S
F/F
Q
Q
RST bit set
LPMCR, RST bit
write detection
circuit
R
F/F
Delayed
circuit
Q
Watchdog timer
control register
(WDTC) read
F2MC-16LX internal bus
S: set R: reset Q: output F/F: flip-flop
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
123
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.5 Reset Factor Bit
MB90330A Series
■ Correspondence of Reset Factor Bit and Reset Factor
Figure 4.5-2 shows the configuration of the reset cause bits of the watchdog timer control register (WDTC).
Contents of reset cause bits and associated reset causes are shown in the Table 4.5-1.
For details, see the Section "10.2 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)".
Figure 4.5-2 Configuration of Reset Factor Bits (Watchdog Timer Control Register)
Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
bit
7
6
5
15 - 8
0000A8H
(TBTC)
PONR
X
R
Reserved
X
-
4
3
2
1
0
WRST
ERST
SRST
WTE
WT1
WT0
X
R
X
R
X
R
1
W
1
W
1
W
Initial value
R/W
R: Read only W: Write only X: Undefined
Table 4.5-1 Correspondence of Reset Factor Bit and Reset Factor
Reset Factor
PONR
WRST
ERST
SRST
Generating power-on reset
1
X
X
X
Generating watchdog timer overflow
*
1
*
*
Generating External reset request from RST pin
*
*
1
*
Generation of software reset request
*
*
*
1
*: Previous state held
X: Undefined
■ Notes on Reset Factor Bit
● At two or more reset factors
If more than one reset cause is generated, the corresponding each reset cause bits of the WDTC register will
be set to "1". For example, if an external reset request via the RST pin and an overflow are generated
simultaneously, ERST and WRST of reset cause bits are set to "1".
● At power on reset
When a power on reset is generated, the PONR of reset cause bit is set to "1" and all the other reset cause
bits are made undefined. For this reason, the software must be designed so that all the reset cause bits other
than PONR will be ignored if PONR is "1".
● Clearing of reset factor bit
Each of the reset cause bits is cleared only when the values are read from the WDTC register. Once a reset
cause is generated, the bit corresponding to it is not cleared even when the reset is generated (a setting of
"1" is retained).
Note:
If power is turned on when a power on reset has not been generated, the WDTC register values may
be unprotected.
124
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.6 State of Each Pin at Reset
MB90330A Series
4.6
State of Each Pin at Reset
This section explains the state of each pin at reset.
■ Pin Status during Reset
The state of each pin during reset is determined by the settings of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0).
● When internal vector mode has been set: (MD2 to MD0=011B)
All I/O, or resource, pins are placed at high impedance. The internal ROM is defined as the object form
which to read the mode data.
See the Section "6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset" for details of the state of each
pin during reset."
■ State of Pins after Mode Data Read
The pin state succeeding read of the mode data is determined by the mode data (M1, M0).
● When single chip is selected a mode (M1,M0=00B)
All I/O, or resource, pins are placed at high impedance. The internal ROM is defined as the object form
which to read the mode data.
Note:
For any pin to which place at high impedance when a reset cause is generated, give consideration
so that the equipment connected to the pin will not malfunction.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
125
CHAPTER 4 RESET
4.6 State of Each Pin at Reset
126
MB90330A Series
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5
CLOCK
This chapter explains the clock of the MB90330A series.
5.1 Outline of Clock
5.2 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
5.3 Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
5.4 Clock Mode
5.5 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
5.6 Connection of Oscillator and External Clock
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
127
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.1 Outline of Clock
5.1
MB90330A Series
Outline of Clock
The clock generation section controls operation of the internal clock which is the
operation clock for the CPU and peripheral functions. In this document, the clocks are
called as follows according to clock type.
• Machine clock:
Internal clock.
• Main clock:
Oscillation clock frequency divided by 2.
• Oscillation clock: Clock provided via a high-speed oscillation pin.
• PLL clock:
Clock generated by internal PLL oscillation.
• Sub clock:
A clock frequency divided by 4 on the clock provided via the low
speed oscillation pin.
■ Overview of Clock
The clock generation section, containing an oscillator circuit, can generate the oscillation and sub clocks by
being connected with an external oscillator. Clock generated externally can be input and used as the
oscillation clock. The generator, also containing a PLL clock frequency multiplication circuit, can generate
three frequency multiplication clocks of the oscillation clock. The clock generation section controls the
oscillation stabilization wait time, controls the PLL clock multiplication and controls the internal clock
operation by clock switching with the clock selector.
● Oscillation clock (HCLK)
This clock is generated by connecting an oscillator or inputting an external clock to the high-speed
oscillation pins.
● Sub clock (SCLK)
It is a clock which operates the watch timer. Moreover, it is available as a low-speed machine clock.
A clock frequency divided by 4 on the clock which is generated by connecting an oscillator or inputting an
external clock to the low-speed oscillation pin.
● Main clock (MCLK)
It is an oscillation clock frequency divided by 2 and an input clock to the time-base timer and clock
selector.
● PLL clock (PCLK)
An oscillation clock which is obtained by frequency multiplication through the internal PLL clock
frequency multiplication circuit (PLL oscillator circuit). Three kinds of clocks can be selected.
● Machine clock (φ)
Operation clock for CPU and peripheral functions. One cycle of this clock is used as machine cycle (1/φ).
A desired clock can be selected from among the main clock, that is, an oscillation clock frequency divided
by 2, the sub clock, and the three frequency multiplication clocks.
128
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.1 Outline of Clock
MB90330A Series
Notes:
•
As for the oscillation clock, 1 MHz to 7 MHz can oscillate. The maximum operating frequency is
24 MHz for the CPU and peripheral functions. When multiplier exceeding the maximum operating
frequency is specified, the device does not operate correctly. If the source oscillation at a
frequency of 6 MHz, only 4-time frequency multiplication can be specified.
•
To use the USB HOST or USB function, the PLL clock mode must have been set.
■ Clock Supply Map
Machine clocks generated by the clock generation section are supplied as operating clocks of the CPU and
peripheral function. For this reason, operation of the peripheral functions is influenced by switching clock
mode between the main and PLL clock or switching the PLL clock frequency multiplication rate. The
frequency divided output from the time-base timer is provided to some peripheral functions, thereby
enabling each periphery to select its operating clock. Figure 5.1-1 contains the map showing how the clocks
are provided.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
129
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.1 Outline of Clock
MB90330A Series
Figure 5.1-1 Clock Supply Map
4
Peripheral function
Watchdog timer
4
Clock generation unit
16 - bit
PPG timer
0/1/2/3/4/5
Pin
PPG0 to PPG5
16 - bit
PWC timer
Pin
PWC
Pin
SCK
Pin
SIN
Pin
SOT
Pin
SCK0 to SCK3
Pin
SIN0 to SIN3
Pin
SOT0 to SOT3
Pin
TIN0 to TIN2
Pin
TOT0 to TOT2
External interrupt
Pin
INT0 to INT7
16 - bit
output compare
0/1/2/3
Pin
OUT0 to OUT3
16 - bit
free - run timer
Pin
FRCK
16 - bit
input capture
0/1/2/3
Pin
IN0 to IN3
Pin
AN0 to 15
Pin
ADTG
Pin
DVP
Pin
DVM
Pin
HCON
Pin
UTEST
Pin
HVP
Pin
HVM
Pin
SCL0 to SCL2
Pin
SDA0 to SDA2
Watch timer
X0A
Pin
X1A
Pin
Time-base timer
Sub clock
generation
circuit
X0
Pin
X1
Pin
1
4 division
System
clock
generation HCLK
circuit
2
8 - bit
expanded serial I/O
4
PLL frequency
multiplication circuit
PCLK
SCLK
UART0/1/2/3
Clock selector
2 division
MCLK
16 - bit
reload timer
0/1/2
CPU
HCLK : Oscillation clock
MCLK : Main clock
SCLK : Sub clock
PCLK : PLL clock
: Machine clock
8/10 - bit
A/D converter
USB function
USB HOST
I2C interface
3
130
Oscillation stabilization
wait time
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.2 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
MB90330A Series
5.2
Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
The clock generation section consists of the following six blocks:
• System clock generation circuit
• Sub clock generation circuit
• PLL multiplying circuit
• Clock selector
• Clock select register (CKSCR)
• Oscillation stabilization wait time selector
■ Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
Figure 5.2-1 shows the block diagram of the clock generation section.
Figure 5.2-1 contains the standby control and time-base timer circuits.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
131
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.2 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
MB90330A Series
Figure 5.2-1 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
Low power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
STP SLP SPL RST TMD CG1 CG0
Reserved
Pin high
impedance
control circuit
Pin Hi-Z
control
Internal reset
Internal reset
generation
circuit
Intermittent cycle
selection
RST Pin
CPU intermittent
operation sector
CPU clock
control circuit
Reset (Cancellation)
Watch, Stop, Sleep signal
Standby
control circuit
2
CPU clock
Watch, Stop signal
Interrupt (Cancellation)
Oscillation stable
wait cancellation
Clock
generation
unit
Peripheral
clock
control circuit
Sub clock oscillation stabilization wait cancellation
Main clock oscillation stabilization wait cancellation
Operation
clock
selector
Machine
clock
Oscillation
stable wait
time
selector
2
2
PLL frequency
multiplication circuit
SCM MCM WS1 WS0 SCS MCS CS1 CS0
Clock selection register (CKSCR)
2
-division
X0 Pin
X1 Pin
Oscillation clock
(HCLK)
Oscillation clock
generation circuit
4
512
-division
-division
Main
clock
Time-base timer
2
-division
2
-division
4
-division
1024
-division
2
-division
2
-division
4
-division
to Watchdog timer
Sub clock
(SCLK)
X0A Pin
2
-division
8
-division
2
-division
2
-division
Watch timer
X1A Pin
System clock
generation circuit
● System clock generation circuit
Generates an oscillation clock (HCLK) using the oscillator connected to the high-speed oscillation pin. It is
also possible to input an external clock.
● Sub clock generator circuit
Generates the sub clock (SCLK) using the oscillator connected to the low-speed oscillation pin. It is also
possible to input an external clock.
132
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.2 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Section
MB90330A Series
● PLL multiplying circuit
The oscillation clock is multiplied by PLL oscillation and supplied to the CPU clock selector.
● Clock selector
From the main and sub clocks, and the three PLL clocks, this selects the clock to be supplied to the CPU
and periphery clock control circuits.
● Clock select register (CKSCR)
Switches between the oscillation and PLL clocks, selects the oscillation stabilization wait time, and selects
the PLL clock multiplier.
● Oscillation stabilization wait time selector
A circuit which selects the oscillation stabilization wait time for the oscillation clock succeeding release of
the stop mode or a watchdog reset. Four time-base timer outputs are selected.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
133
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.3 Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
5.3
MB90330A Series
Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
The clock select register (CKSCR) switches the clock mode between the main, sub, and
PLL clocks, and selects the oscillation stabilization wait time and the PLL clock
frequency multiplier.
■ Configuration of Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
Figure 5.3-1 shows the clock selection register (CKSCR) configuration. Table 5.3-1 summarizes the
functions of the clock selection register bits.
Figure 5.3-1 Configuration of Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
Address
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit 9
0000A1H SCM
MCM WS1
R
R
WS0 SCS
MCS
CS1
bit 8 bit 7
CS0
bit 0 Initial value
(LPMCR)
11111100B
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
CS1 CS0
Multiplication factor selection bit
Each value in parentheses ( ) represents the period
at 6MHz.
0
0
1
0
1
0
1×HCLK ( 6MHz)
1
1
Disable to setting
Machine clock selection bit
MCS
0
1
PLL clock selection
Main clock selection
Sub clock selection bit
SCS
0
1
2×HCLK (12MHz)
4×HCLK (24MHz)
Sub clock selection
Main clock selection
WS1 WS0
Oscillation stabilization wait time selection bit
Each value in parentheses ( ) represents the period
at 6MHz.
0
0
1
0
1
0
210/HCLK ( Approx. 170.7 μs )
1
1
217/HCLK ( Approx. 21.84 ms )*
213/HCLK ( Approx. 1.36 ms )
215/HCLK ( Approx. 5.46 ms )
*:216/HCLK (approx. 10.92 ms) at pwer-on reset
Machine clock display bit
MCM
0
1
SCM
R/W
R
: Readable/Writable
: Read only
0
1
During operating at PLL clock
During operating at Main clock
Sub clock display bit
Sub clock selection
Main clock selection
Initial value
134
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.3 Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
MB90330A Series
Note:
The machine clock selection bit (MCS) is initialized by reset to main clock selection.
Table 5.3-1 Functions of Clock Select Register (CKSCR) Bits (1 / 2)
Bit name
Functions
bit 15
SCM:
Sub clock
display bit
• Bit indicating the main clock or sub clock, whichever selected as the machine clock.
• A "0" in this bit indicates that the sub clock has been selected. A "1" in the bit indicates that the
main or PLL clock has been selected.
• If SCS = 1 and SCM = 0, now is the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time.
bit 14
MCM:
PLL clock
display bit
• Bit indicating the main or PLL clock, whichever selected as the machine clock.
• A "0" in this bit indicates that the PLL clock has been selected. A "1" in the bit indicates that the
main or sub clock has been selected.
• If the PLL clock selection bit (MCS) = 0 and MCM = 1, now is the PLL clock oscillation
stabilization wait time.
WS1, WS0:
Oscillation
stabilization
wait time
selection bits
• These bits are used to select an oscillation stabilization wait time required for the oscillation
clock when the stop mode is canceled, when transition occurs from sub clock mode to main
clock mode, or when transition occurs from sub clock mode to PLL clock.
• Initialized to "11B" by every reset cause.
Note:
The oscillation stabilization wait time must be set to a suitable value for the oscillator to use. See
Section "4.2 Reset Factors and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Times". Please set the setting of
"00B" only at the main clock mode.
Reference:
The oscillation stabilization wait time for PLL clock is fixed to 214/HCLK.
SCS:
Sub clock
selection bit
• Bit for specifying main or sub clock as the machine clock.
• A "0" in this bit selects the sub clock. A "1" in the bit selects the main clock.
• If "1" is written to this bit when it is "0", the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time is
produced, thereby clearing the time-base timer automatically.
• When the sub clock is selected, it is used as the operating clock. (If the low-speed oscillation is
32 kHz, the machine clock is 8 kHz.)
• When both SCS and MCS are "0", SCS has priority and sub clock is selected.
• Initialized to "1" by every reset cause.
MCS:
PLL clock
selection bit
• Bit for selecting main or PLL clock as the machine clock.
• A "0" in this bit selects the PLL clock. A "1" in the bit selects the main clock.
• If "0" is written to this bit when it is "1", the PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time is
produced, thereby clearing the time-base timer automatically. Also, the interrupt request flag
bit (TBOF) of the time-base timer control register (TBTC) is cleared.
• The PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time is fixed to 214/HCLK. (If the oscillation clock
is 6 MHz, the oscillation stabilization wait time will be approximately 2.73 ms.)
• If the main clock is selected, the operating clock frequency will be the oscillation clock
frequency-divided by 2. (If the oscillation clock is 6 MHz, the operating clock will be 3 MHz.)
• Initialized to "1" by every reset cause.
Note:
To write "0" if when MCS bit is "1", make sure that the time-base timer interrupt have been
masked using the TBTC register interrupt request enable bit (TBIE) or interrupt level mask
register (ILM).
bit 13,
bit 12
bit 11
bit 10
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
135
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.3 Clock Select Register (CKSCR)
MB90330A Series
Table 5.3-1 Functions of Clock Select Register (CKSCR) Bits (2 / 2)
Bit name
bit 9,
bit 8
CS1, CS0:
Multiplier
selection bit
Functions
• Bit for selecting the multiply factor for PLL clock.
• The multiplier can be selected from among three options.
• Initialized to "00B" by every reset cause.
Note:
When the MCS or MCM is "0", writing to these bits is not allowed. Rewrite the CS1 and CS0 bits
after setting the MCS bit to "1" once. "11B" is a set interdiction.
HCLK: Oscillation clock
136
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.4 Clock Mode
MB90330A Series
5.4
Clock Mode
The clock modes are the main clock mode, PLL clock mode and sub clock mode.
■ Main Clock Mode, PLL Clock Mode, Sub Clock Mode
● Main clock mode
The main clock mode stops the PLL clock by using an oscillation clock frequency divided by 2 as the
operating clock of the CPU and peripheral resources.
● PLL clock mode
The PLL clock mode uses the PLL clock as operation clock for the CPU and peripheral functions. The PLL
clock frequency multiplier factor can be selected using the clock selection register (CKSCR).
Note:
To use the USB HOST or USB function, the PLL clock mode must have been set.
● Sub clock mode
The sub clock mode stops the main and PLL clocks by using the sub clock as the operating clock of the
CPU and peripheral resources.
■ Transition of Clock Mode
Writing the PLL clock selection bit (MCS) or sub clock selection bit (SCS) of the CKSCR changes the
clock mode to main, PLL, or sub.
● Transition from main clock mode to PLL clock mode
If the CKSCR of MCS bit is rewritten from "1" to "0" while in the main clock mode, the mode will change
from main to PLL after the PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time (214/HCLK).
● Transition from PLL clock mode to main clock mode
If the CKSCR of MCS bit is rewritten from "0" to "1" while in the PLL clock mode, the mode will change
from PLL to main when the PLL and main clock edges will match (after 1 to 8 PLL clocks).
● Transition from main clock mode to sub clock mode
If the CKSCR of SCS bit is rewritten from "1" to "0" while in the main clock mode, the mode will change
from main to sub.
● Transition from sub clock mode to main clock mode
If the CKSCR of SCS bit is rewritten from "0" to "1" while in the sub clock mode, the mode will change
from sub to main after the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time. The oscillation stabilization wait
time can be selected using the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits (WS1, WS0) of the CKSCR.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
137
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.4 Clock Mode
MB90330A Series
● Transition from PLL clock mode to sub clock mode
If the sub clock selection bit (SCS) of the clock selection register (CKSCR) is rewritten from "1" to "0"
while in the PLL clock mode, the mode changes from PLL clock to sub clock.
● Transition from sub clock mode to PLL clock mode
If the SCS bit of the CKSCR is rewritten from "0" to "1" while in the sub clock mode, the mode changes
from sub clock to PLL clock after the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time. The oscillation
stabilization wait time can be selected using the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits (WS1,
WS0) of the CKSCR.
Note:
Even if the PLL clock selection (MCS) or SCS bit of the CKSCR is rewritten, the machine clock is not
switched immediately. If a resource which depends on the machine clock needs to be operated, refer
the PLL clock indicator bit (MCM) and sub clock indicator bit (SCM) of the CKSCR to check that the
machine clock has been switched, before beginning the operation.
If both the SCS and MCS bits are "0", the higher priority is given to SCS and the sub clock mode is
entered.
If the clock mode is switched, the mode must not be switched to another clock mode or the lowpower consumption mode until completion of the switching. Completion of the switching can be
checked by referring the MCM and SCM bits of the CKSCR.
■ Selection of PLL Clock Multiplication Rate
One of the three PLL clock frequency multiplier from 1 to 4 times can be selected by writing "00B" to
"10B" to the CS1 and CS0 bits of the CKSCR. "11B" is a set interdiction.
■ Machine Clock
The PLL clock, main clock, and sub clock output from the PLL multiplying circuit are used as machine
clocks. These machine are clocks supplied to the CPU or peripheral function. One of the main, PLL, and
sub clock modes can be selected by writing the CKSCR of MCS and SCS bit.
Figure 5.4-1 shows the transition chart of the machine clock selection.
138
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.4 Clock Mode
MB90330A Series
Figure 5.4-1 State Transition Diagram of Machine Clock Selection
(7)
Main
MCS=1
MCM=1
SCS=1
(1)
SCM=1
CS1, CS0= xx
(6)
(5)
Main PLLx
MCS= 0
MCM=1
SCS=1
SCM=1
CS1, CS0= xx
PLL1 Main
MCS=1
MCM= 0
SCS=1
SCM=1
(6)
CS1, CS0= 00
PLL2 Main
MCS=1
MCM= 0
SCS=1
SCM=1
(6)
CS1, CS0= 01
PLL4 Main
MCS=1
MCM= 0
SCS=1
SCM=1
(6)
CS1, CS0= 10
Main Sub
MCS=1
MCM=1
SCS= 0
SCM=1
(9)
(8)
Sub
MCS=1
MCM=1
(14)
SCS= 0
(9) SCM= 0
CS1, CS0= xx
CS1, CS0= xx
Main
MCS=1
(10) MCM=1
SCS=1
SCM=1
(2)
CS1, CS0= xx
(3)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Sub PLLx
MCS= 0
MCM=1
SCS= 1
SCM= 0
CS1, CS0= xx
PLL1 multiplication
MCS= 0
MCM= 0
(5) SCS=1
(7)
SCM=1
CS1, CS0= 00
PLL2 multiplication
MCS= 0
MCM= 0
(5) SCS=1
SCM=1
(7)
CS1, CS0= 01
PLL4 multiplication
MCS= 0
MCM= 0
(5) SCS=1
(7)
SCM=1
CS1, CS0= 10
(15)
PLL1 Sub
MCS=1
MCM= 0
SCS= 0
SCM=1
(15)
CS1, CS0= 00
PLL2 Sub
MCS=1
MCM= 0
SCS= 0
SCM=1
(15)
CS1, CS0= 01
Sub
PLL4
MCS=1
MCM= 0
SCS= 0
SCM=1
(15)
CS1, CS0= 10
(1) MCS bit "0" write
(2) PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait end & CS1, CS0=00
(3) PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait end & CS1, CS0=01
(4) PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait end & CS1, CS0=10
(5) MCS bit "1" write (within Watchdog reset)
(6) Synchronous timing of PLL clock and Main clock
(7) SCS bit "0" write
(8) Sub clock oscillation stabilization wait end (max. 215/SCLK)
(9) SCS bit "1" write
(10) Main clock oscillation stabilization wait end
(11) Main clock oscillation stabilization wait end & CS1, CS0=00
(12) Main clock oscillation stabilization wait end & CS1, CS0=01
(13) Main clock oscillation stabilization wait end & CS1, CS0=10
(14)SCS bit "1" write, MCS bit "0" write
(15)Synchronous timing of PLL clock and Sub clock
MCS
: PLL clock selection bit of Clock selection register (CKSCR)
MCM
: PLL clock display bit of Clock selection register (CKSCR)
SCS
: Sub clock selection bit of Clock selection register (CKSCR)
SCM
: Sub clock display bit of Clock selection register (CKSCR)
CS1, CS0 : Multiplication factor selection bit of Clock selection register (CKSCR)
Note:
The initial value for machine clock is the main clock (MCS = 1, SCS = 1).
If both the SCS and MCS bits are "0", the higher priority is given to SCS and the sub clock mode is
entered.
When the mode needs to be switched from sub to PLL, the oscillation stabilization wait time
selection bits (WS1, WS0) of CKSCR must be set to "01B", "10B", or "11B".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
139
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.5 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
5.5
MB90330A Series
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
When power is turned on, the stop mode is quit, or the clock mode changes from the
sub to main or PLL clock, the oscillation stabilization wait time is required after the
oscillation begins. This is because the oscillation of the oscillation clock remains in
stopped state. Also when the clock mode changes from main to PLL, the oscillation
stabilization wait time is required after the PLL oscillation begins.
■ Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
In general, ceramic and crystal oscillators require several milliseconds to some tens of milliseconds until
the they provide stable oscillation at their natural frequency (oscillation frequency). Accordingly, CPU
operation is disabled immediately after the oscillation starts and the clock supply to the CPU is enabled
until the oscillation stabilization wait time has elapsed. This gives the oscillation time to stabilize. It is
necessary to select a oscillation stabilization wait time appropriate to an oscillator to be used because the
oscillation stabilization time depends on the type of oscillator (crystal, ceramic, etc.). The oscillation
stabilization wait time can be selected by setting in the clock selection register (CKSCR).
When changing the clock mode from main to PLL, the CPU operates with the main clock during the PLL
oscillation stabilizing wait time before the mode actually changes to PLL.
Figure 5.5-1 shows the operation immediately after starting the oscillation.
Figure 5.5-1 Operation Immediately after the Start of Oscillation
Oscillation time
of oscillator
Oscillation stabilization Starting normal operation or
switching to PLL clock
wait time
X1
Oscillation start
140
Oscillation stabilization
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.6 Connection of Oscillator and External Clock
MB90330A Series
5.6
Connection of Oscillator and External Clock
MB90330A series, containing a system clock generator circuit, generates the clock with
the oscillator connected externally. It is also possible to input an externally generated
clock.
■ Connection of Oscillator and External Clock
● Example of connection of crystal oscillator or ceramic oscillator
Connect the crystal or ceramic oscillator as shown in Figure 5.6-1.
Figure 5.6-1 Example of Connection of Crystal Oscillator or Ceramic Oscillator
MB90330A series
X0 (X0A)
X1 (X1A)
● Example of connection of external clock
As shown in Figure 5.6-2, connect the external clock to the X0 pin and open the X1 pin.
Figure 5.6-2 Example of Connection of External Clock
MB90330A series
X0 (X0A)
X1 (X1A)
Open
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
141
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK
5.6 Connection of Oscillator and External Clock
142
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6
LOW-POWER
CONSUMPTION MODE
This chapter describes the low-power consumption
mode of the MB90330A series.
6.1 Outline of Low-Power Consumption Mode
6.2 Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit
6.3 Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
6.4 CPU Intermittent Operation Mode
6.5 Standby Mode
6.6 State Transition Diagram
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
6.8 Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
143
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.1 Outline of Low-Power Consumption Mode
6.1
MB90330A Series
Outline of Low-Power Consumption Mode
The MB90330A series have the following CPU operation modes by selecting the
operation clock and operating the control of the clock.
• Clock mode
(PLL clock mode, main clock mode, and sub clock mode)
• CPU Intermittent operation mode
(PLL clock intermittent operation mode, main clock intermittent operation mode, and
sub clock intermittent operation mode)
• Standby mode
(sleep mode, time-base timer mode, and stop, watch mode)
■ CPU Operation Modes and Current Consumption
Figure 6.1-1 shows the relationships between the CPU operation modes and current consumption.
Figure 6.1-1 CPU Operation Modes and Current Consumption
Current consumption
Several
dozen mA
CPU
Operation mode
PLL clock mode
Clock multiplied by four
Clock multiplied by two
Clock multiplied by one
Clock multiplied by four
PLL clock intermittent
operation mode
Clock multiplied by two
Clock multiplied by one
Main clock mode (1/2 HCLK)
Main clock intermittent operation mode
Sub clock mode
Sub clock intermittent operation mode
Several
mA
Standby mode
Sleep mode
Time-base timer mode
Watch mode
Several
μA
Stop mode
Low-power consumption mode
Note: This diagram shows an image of each mode, so its values may differ from actual current consumption.
144
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.1 Outline of Low-Power Consumption Mode
MB90330A Series
■ Clock Mode
● PLL clock mode
In PLL clock mode, the CPU and peripheral function operate on a PLL multiplying clock of oscillation
clock (HCLK).
Note:
When using USB HOST and the USB function, you need to set to the PLL clock mode.
● Main clock mode
In main clock mode, the CPU and peripheral function operate on a clock with 2-frequency division of
oscillation clock (HCLK). In this mode, the PLL multiplying circuit stops.
● Sub clock mode
In sub clock mode, the CPU and peripheral function operate on a sub clock (SCLK). In this mode, the main
clock and PLL multiplying circuit stop.
Reference:
For the clock mode, see Section "5.4 Clock Mode".
■ CPU Intermittent Operation Mode
The CPU intermittent mode operates the CPU intermittently and lowers the power consumption while
supplying the high-speed clock to the peripheral functions. The CPU intermittent operation mode is a mode
for supplying intermittent clock only to the CPU when it makes access to the registers, internal memory,
peripheral functions, or external devices.
■ Standby Mode
Standby mode reduces the power consumption by the low-power consumption control circuit which stops
clock supply to the CPU (sleep mode), stops clock supply to the CPU and peripheral functions (time-base
timer mode), or stops the oscillation clock (stop mode).
● PLL sleep mode
The PLL sleep mode terminates the CPU operation clock in the PLL clock mode and operates components
except for CPU under the PLL clock.
● Main sleep mode
The main sleep mode terminates the CPU operation clock in the main clock mode and operates components
except for the CPU under the main clock.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
145
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.1 Outline of Low-Power Consumption Mode
MB90330A Series
● Sub sleep mode
The sub sleep mode terminates the CPU operation clock in the sub clock mode and operates components
except for the CPU under the sub clock.
● Time-base timer mode
The time-base timer mode terminates all the operations other than the oscillation clock, the time-base timer,
and the clock timer, terminating all the functions other than the time-base timer and the watch timer.
● Watch mode
It is a mode by which only the clock timer is operated. Only the sub clock operates and the main clock and
PLL multiplication circuit stops.
● Stop mode
Stop mode is mode for stopping original oscillation and all functions are stopped.
Note:
In the stop mode, data is kept at the lowest power consumption since the oscillation clock is
terminated.
When you change the clock mode, be sure not to shift to other clock modes or the low-power
consumption mode until you complete the clock mode change. Completion of the switching can be
checked by referring the MCM and SCM bits of the CKSCR.
The mode transits to the standby mode is also inhibited during the USB is transferred.
146
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.2 Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit
MB90330A Series
6.2
Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit
The low-power consumption control circuit is composed of the following seven blocks.
• CPU intermittent operation selector
• Standby controller circuit
• CPU clock controller circuit
• Peripheral clock controller circuit
• Pin high-impedance controller circuit
• Internal reset generator circuit
• Low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
■ Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit
Figure 6.2-1 shows the block diagram of the low-power consumption control circuit.
Figure 6.2-1 Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit
Low power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
STP SLP SPL RST TMD CG1 CG0
Reserved
Pin high
impedance
control circuit
Pin Hi-Z
control
Internal reset
Internal reset
generation
circuit
Intermittent cycle
selection
RST Pin
CPU intermittent
operation sector
CPU clock
control circuit
Reset (Cancellation)
Watch, Stop, Sleep signal
Standby
control circuit
2
CPU clock
Watch, Stop signal
Interrupt (Cancellation)
Oscillation stable
wait cancellation
Clock
generation
unit
Peripheral
clock
control circuit
Sub clock oscillation stabilization wait cancellation
Main clock oscillation stabilization wait cancellation
Operation
clock
selector
Machine
clock
Oscillation
stable wait
time
selector
2
2
PLL frequency
multiplication circuit
SCM MCM WS1 WS0 SCS MCS CS1 CS0
Clock selection register (CKSCR)
2
-division
X0 Pin
X1 Pin
Oscillation clock
(HCLK)
Oscillation clock
generation circuit
2
-division
2
-division
1024
-division
2
-division
2
-division
2
-division
4
-division
to Watchdog timer
Sub clock
(SCLK)
4
-division
X0A Pin
4
512
-division
-division
Main
clock
Time-base timer
8
-division
2
-division
2
-division
Watch timer
X1A Pin
System clock
generation circuit
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
147
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.2 Block Diagram of Low-power Consumption Control Circuit
MB90330A Series
● CPU intermittent operation selector
The CPU intermittent operation sector selects the number of the suspended clocks in the CPU intermittent
operation mode.
● Standby controller circuit
The standby controller circuit controls the CPU clock control circuit and the peripheral clock control
circuit, and then performs the transition to the low-power consumption mode or cancellation.
● CPU clock controller circuit
The CPU clock controller circuit controls the clock supplied to CPU.
● Peripheral clock controller circuit
The peripheral clock controller circuit controls the clock supplied to the peripheral functions.
● Pin high-impedance controller circuit
The pin high-impedance controller circuit makes the external pin to the high-impedance while the mode is
in the time-base timer mode and the stop mode. For the pin to which pull-up option is selected, you need to
cut the pull-up resistance during the stop mode.
● Internal reset generator circuit
This circuit generates internal reset signals.
● Low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
The low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR) shifts to/cancels the standby mode or sets the
CPU intermittent operation function.
148
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.3 Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
MB90330A Series
6.3
Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
The low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR) performs transition to/
cancellation of the low-power consumption mode or sets the number of the CPU clock
suspend cycles in the CPU intermittent operation mode.
■ Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
Figure 6.3-1 shows the configuration of the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR).
Figure 6.3-1 Configuration of Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
Address
bit15
0000A0H
bit7
(CKSCR)
bit3
bit2 bit1
bit0
Initial value
STP SLP SPL RST TMD CG1 CG0
RESV
00011000B
W
bit6 bit5
W
R/W
bit4
W
W
0
CG1 CG0
R/W
Count bit for CPU clock temporary halt cycle
0
0 0 cycles (CPU clock = Resource clock)
0
1
1
0
8 cycles (CPU clock: Resource clock = 1:3 to 4 approx.)
1
1
32 cycles (CPU clock: Resource clock = 1:9 to 10 approx.)
TMD
16 cycles (CPU clock: Resource clock = 1:5 to 6 approx.)
Time-base timer mode bit
0
Switches to the time-base timer mode or watch mode
1
No change, no effect on operation
RST
Internal reset signal generation bit
0
Generates an internal reset signal of three machine cycles
1
No change, no effect on operation
SPL
Watch and pin state setting bit
(for time-base timer mode and stop mode)
0
Previous pin state retained
1
High impedance
SLP
Sleep mode bit
0
No change, no effect on operation
1
Switches to sleep mode
STP
CM44-10129-6E
R/W
Reserved
Always write "0" to this bit
RESV
R/W : Read/write
W : Write-only
: Initial value
R/W
Stop mode bit
0
No change, no effect on operation
1
Switches to stop mode
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
149
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.3 Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
MB90330A Series
Table 6.3-1 Function Description of Each Bit of Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
Bit name
Functions
STP:
Stop mode bit
• This bit indicates the transition to the stop mode.
• Writing "1" to this bit changes the stop mode.
• Writing "0" to this bit has no influence on operation.
• Cleared to "0" by generation of a reset or interrupt request.
• The bit always returns "0" when read.
bit 6
SLP:
Sleep mode bit
• This bit indicates the transition to the sleep mode.
• Writing "1" to this bit changes the sleep mode.
Writing "0" to this bit has no influence on operation.
• Cleared to "0" by generation of a reset or interrupt request.
• The bit always returns "0" when read.
bit 5
SPL:
Pin state
specification bit
(At the stop mode of
the watch and the
time-base timer)
• Valid only while in the watch mode, time-base timer, or stop mode.
• A "0" in this bit causes the clock to remain at the level of the external pin.
• An external pin is made high impedance in case of "1".
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset.
bit 4
RST:
Internal reset signal
generation bit
• Writing "0" to this generator generates the internal reset signal three machine cycle.
• Writing "1" to this bit has no influence on operation.
• The bit always returns "1" when read.
bit 3
TMD:
Clock, time-base
timer mode bit
• This bit indicates the transition to the watch and time-base timer mode.
• Writing "0" to this bit while in main or PLL clock mode changes the time-base timer
mode.
• Writing "0" to this bit while in sub clock mode changes the watch mode.
• Initialized to "1" by generation of a reset or interrupt request.
• The bit always returns "1" when read.
bit 2,
bit 1
CG1,CG0:
Temporary CPU
clock stop
Cycle count
selection bit
• Bit used for setting the number of suspension cycles of the CPU clock for CPU
intermittent operation function.
• Stops the CPU clock supply for the specified number of cycles each time the instruction
is executed once.
• Selectable from four types of clocks counts.
• The bit is initialized to "00B" at a reset.
bit 0
Reserved:
Reserved bit
bit 7
150
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.3 Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR)
MB90330A Series
■ Access to Low-power Consumption Mode Control Register
Transition to the low-power consumption modes (stop mode, sleep mode, time-base timer mode, and watch
mode) by writing to the low-power consumption mode control register is made, in this case, be sure to use
the instructions in Table 6.3-2.
The low-power consumption mode transition instruction in Table 6.3-2 must always be followed by an array
of instructions highlighted by a line below.
MOV LPMCR, #H'XX
; the low-power consumption mode transition instruction in Table 6.3-2
NOP
NOP
JMP
$+3
MOV A,#H'10
; jump to next instruction
; any instruction
The devices does not guarantee its operation after returning from the low-power consumption mode if you
place an array of instructions other than the one enclosed in the line. To access the low-power consumption
mode control register (LPMCR) with C language, refer to "■ Notes on Accessing the Low-Power
Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR) to Enter the Standby Mode" in the Section "6.8
Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode".
To write word length data into the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR), use even
addresses. Transition to the low-power consumption mode is made by writing at odd addresses may cause
an erroneous operations.
When you control other functions than the functions listed in Figure 6.3-1, you may use any instruction.
Table 6.3-2 List of Instructions Used for Transition to Low-power Consumption Mode
MOV io,#imm8
MOV io,A
MOV @RLi+disp8,A
MOVW io,#imm16
MOVW io,A
MOVW @RLi+disp8,A
SETB io:bp
CLRB io:bp
MOV dir,#imm8
MOV dir,A
MOV eam,#imm8
MOV addr16,A
MOV eam,Ri
MOV eam,A
MOVW dir,#imm16
MOVW dir,A
MOVW eam,#imm16
MOVW addr16,A
MOVW eam,RWi
MOVW eam,A
SETB dir:bp
CLRB dir:bp
SETB addr16:bp
CLRB addr16:bp
■ Priority Level of STP, SLP, and TMD Bit
When the stop mode, sleep mode, and watch mode • time-base timer mode requests are performed at the
same time, requests are processed according to the following order.
Stop mode request > watch mode • time-base timer mode request > sleep mode request
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
151
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.4 CPU Intermittent Operation Mode
6.4
MB90330A Series
CPU Intermittent Operation Mode
The CPU intermittent operation mode is a mode for reducing the power consumption by
intermittently operating the CPU while operating the external bus and peripheral
functions at high speed.
■ CPU Intermittent Operation Mode
The CPU intermittent operation mode is a mode for stopping the clock supplied to the CPU for a
predetermined period of time for each instruction execution to delay the internal bus cycle start when
accessing the registers, internal memory (ROM, RAM), I/O, peripheral functions, or external bus. If the
CPU operation speed is decreased while supplying a high-speed peripheral clock to the peripheral
functions, processing at low-power consumption becomes available.
• Selection of the number of the suspend cycles of the clock supplied to CPU is made in the CPU clock
suspend cycle number selection bit (CG1 and CG0) of the low-power consumption mode control
register (LPMCR).
• The external bus operation itself uses the same clock as the peripheral functions.
• The instruction execution time in CPU intermittent operation mode can be calculated by adding to the
ordinary execution time the compensation value obtained by multiplying the instruction execution count
for accessing the registers, internal memory, internal peripheral function, and external bus by the
number of suspension cycles. Figure 6.4-1 shows the operation clock for CPU intermittent operation
mode.
Figure 6.4-1 Clock for the CPU Intermittent Operation Mode
Peripheral clock
CPU clock
Suspended cycle
1 instruction
execution cycle
Internal bus activation
152
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
MB90330A Series
6.5
Standby Mode
Standby modes are: sleep (PLL sleep, main sleep, sub sleep), watch, time-base timer,
and stop mode.
■ Operation Status in Standby Mode
Table 6.5-1 shows the operation state in the standby mode.
Table 6.5-1 Operation Status in Standby Mode
Standby Mode
Transition
Condition
PLL sleep mode
SCS=1
MCS=0
SLP=1
Main sleep mode
SCS=1
MCS=1
SLP=1
Sub sleep mode
SCS=0
SLP=1
Main
Clock
Sub
Clock
Machine
Clock
CPU
Peripheral
Pin
Operation
Operation
Release
Method
Operation
Sleep
mode
Time-base timer mode
Time-base
(SPL=0)
timer
Time-base timer mode
mode
(SPL=1)
Watch
mode
Watch mode
(SPL=0)
Operation
Stops
Operation
SCS=1
TMD=0
Hold
Operation
Stops
SCS=1
TMD=0
Hi-Z
SCS=0
TMD=0
Reset
or
interrupt
Hold
Stops
Watch mode
(SPL=1)
Stops
*1
Stops
*2
SCS=0
TMD=0
Hi-Z
Stops
Stop mode
(SPL=0)
STP=1
Stop mode
(SPL=1)
STP=1
Stop mode
*1:
*2:
SPL:
SLP:
STP:
TMD:
MCS:
SCS:
Hi-Z:
RST:
Hold
Stops
Stops
Hi-Z
The time-base timer and the clock timer work.
The watch timer operates.
Pin state specification bit of low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
Sleep mode bit of low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
Stop mode bit of low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
Watch and time-base timer mode bit of low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR)
Machine clock selection bit of clock selection register (CKSCR)
Machine clock selection bit (sub) of clock selection register (CKSCR)
High impedance
External reset pin
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
153
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
6.5.1
MB90330A Series
Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is mode for stopping the CPU operation clock and the operation other than
CPU continues. When you instruct the transition to the sleep mode with the low-power
consumption mode control register (LPMCR), the transition to the PLL sleep mode is
made if the PLL clock mode is set, the transition to the main sleep mode is made if the
main clock mode is set, and the transition to the sub sleep mode is made if the sub
clock mode is set.
■ Transition to Sleep Mode
If you write "1" to the sleep mode bit (SLP), "1" to the watch/time-base timer mode bit (TMD), and "0" to
the stop mode bit (STP) of the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR), the transition to
the sleep mode is made. In this case, the transition to the PLL sleep mode is made if the clock selection
register (CKSCR) is in the state of PLL clock selection bit (MCS)=0 and sub clock selection bit (SCS)=1,
transition to the main sleep mode is made if MCS=1 and SCS=1, and transition to the sub sleep mode is
made if SCS=0.
Note:
If you write "1" to the SLP bit and the STP bit of the LPMCR register at the same time, the STP bit is
prioritized and the transition to the stop mode is made.
If you write "1" to the SLP bit and "0" to the TMD bit in the low-power consumption mode control
register, the TMD bit is prioritized and the transition to the time-base timer mode or the watch mode
is made.
● Data retention function
In the sleep mode, the contents of the dedicated registers such as accumulators and the internal RAM are
held unchanged.
● Holding function
In the sleep mode, the external bus hold function operates and the state becomes the hold status upon a hold
request.
● Operation during an interrupt request
Writing "1" to the SLP bit in the LPMCR register does not make the transition to the sleep mode if there is
an interrupt request. Therefore, the CPU executes the next instruction when it is in a state accepting no
interrupts and branches immediately to the interrupt processing routine when it is in a state accepting
interrupts.
● Pin state
In the sleep mode, the preceding state is retained except for the pins used as the bus input/output or the bus
control.
154
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
MB90330A Series
■ Cancellation of Sleep Modes
The low-power consumption control circuit clears sleep mode by reset input or interrupt generation.
● Return by reset
Initialization to the main clock mode is made by reset.
● Return by interrupt
If there is an interrupt request higher than level 7 from the peripheral circuit and others in the sleep mode,
the sleep mode is canceled. After clearing sleep mode, the action is the same as for ordinary interrupt
processing. When an interrupt is acceptable by settings in the I flag of the condition code register (CCR),
the interrupt level mask register (ILM), and the interrupt control register (ICR), the CPU performs interrupt
processing. When an interrupt is not acceptable, processing from the instruction succeeding the one which
has specified sleep mode continues.
Figure 6.5-1 shows clearing sleep mode by interrupt generation.
Figure 6.5-1 Cancellation of Sleep Mode of Interrupt Generation
Interrupt enable flag setting
of Peripheral function
INT generation
(IL<7)
No Sleep cancellation
NO
No Sleep cancellation
YES
YES
I=0
Next instruction execution
Sleep cancellation
NO
YES
ILM<IL
Next instruction execution
NO
Interrupt execution
Note:
When handling an interrupt, the CPU usually services the interrupt after executing the instruction that
follows the one specifying the sleep mode. However, if the transition to the sleep mode and the
receipt of the external bus hold request occur at the same time, the transition to the interruption
procedure before executing the next instruction will be made.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
155
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
6.5.2
MB90330A Series
Time-base Timer Mode
The time-base timer mode terminates the original oscillation and all the operations
other than the time-base timer and the watch timer, resulting in termination of all the
functions other than the time-base timer and the watch timer.
■ Transition to Time-base Timer Mode
In the PLL clock mode or the main clock mode (the sub clock display bit (SCM)=1 of the clock selection
register (CKSCR)), writing "0" to the watch/time-base timer mode bit (TMD) of the low-power
consumption mode control register (LPMCR) makes the transition to the time-base timer mode.
● Data retention function
In the time-base timer mode, the contents of dedicated registers such as accumulators and the internal RAM
are held unchanged.
● Holding function
In the time-base timer mode, the external bus hold function is terminated, thereby neglecting a hold request
even a request is input. If a hold request is input during the transition to the time-base timer mode, the
condition of bus high-impedance is maintained and the HAK signal may not become "L".
● Operation during an interrupt request
Writing "0" to the TMD bit of the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR) does not make
the transition to the time-base timer mode if there is an interrupt request.
● Pin state
You can set whether the external pin in the time-base timer mode should be retained in the preceding state
or becomes to the high impedance state by controlling the pin state specification bit (SPL) in the LPMCR
register.
156
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
MB90330A Series
■ Cancellation of Time-base Timer Modes
The low-power consumption circuit cancels the time-base timer mode by generating a reset input or an
interrupt request.
● Return by external reset
The external reset initializes the mode to the main clock mode.
● Return by interrupt
If there is an interrupt request higher than level 7 from peripheral circuit and others in the time-base timer
mode (except for IL2, IL1, IL0 of the interrupt control register (ICR) = 111B), the low-power consumption
control circuit cancels the time-base timer mode. After cancellation of time-base timer modes, the action is
the same as for ordinary interrupt processing. When an interrupt is acceptable according to the setting of
the I flag of the condition code register (CCR), the interrupt level mask register (ILM), and the interrupt
control register (ICR), interrupt processing is performed. When an interrupt is not acceptable, processing
from the instruction succeeding the one before entering time-base timer mode continues.
Note:
When handling an interrupt, the CPU usually services the interrupt after executing the instruction that
follows the one specifying the time-base timer mode. When transition to time-base timer mode and
acceptance of an external bus hold request have occurred at the same time, interrupt processing
may transit before executing the next instruction.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
157
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
6.5.3
MB90330A Series
Watch Mode
The watch mode terminates all the operations other than the sub clock and the watch
timer, where almost all the functions of the chip are terminated.
■ Transition to Watch Mode
In the sub clock mode (the sub clock display bit of the clock selection register (CKSCR) (SCS)=0), when
you write "0" into the watch/time-base timer mode bit (TMD) of the low-power consumption mode control
register (LPMCR the transition to the watch mode).
● Data retention function
In the watch mode, contents of the dedicated registers such as accumulators and the internal RAM are held
unchanged.
● Holding function
During the watch mode, the external bus hold function halts, thereby neglecting a hold request if a hold
request is input. If a hold request is input during the transition to the watch mode, the condition of bus highimpedance is maintained and the HAK signal may not become "L".
● Operation during an interrupt request
When "0" is set to the TMD bit of the LPMCR register, transition to the watch mode is not made if there is
an interrupt request.
● Pin state setting
You can set whether the external pin in the watch mode should be retained in the preceding state or become
to the high impedance state by controlling the pin state specification bit (SPL) in the LPMCR register.
■ Cancellation of Watch Mode
The low-power consumption circuit cancels the watch mode by generating a reset input or an interrupt
request.
● Return by Reset
When clearing watch mode by a reset cause, transition occurs to oscillation stabilization wait reset state
after clearing watch mode. The reset sequence is executed after the oscillation stabilization wait time.
● Return by interrupt
If there is an interrupt request higher than level 7 from peripheral circuits and others in the watch mode
(except for IL2, IL1, IL0 of the interrupt control register (ICR) = 111B), the low-power consumption
control circuit cancels the watch mode and immediately changes to the sub clock mode. After transiting to
sub clock mode, the action is the same as for ordinary interrupt processing. When an interrupt is acceptable
by settings in the I flag of the condition code register (CCR), the interrupt level mask register (ILM), and
the interrupt control register (ICR), interrupt processing is carried out. When an interrupt is not acceptable,
processing from the instruction succeeding the one caused to enter clock mode continues.
158
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
MB90330A Series
Note:
When handling an interrupt, the CPU usually services the interrupt after executing the instruction that
follows the one specifying the watch mode. However, if the transition to the watch mode and the
receipt of the external bus hold request occur at the same time, transition to interruption procedure
may be made before execution of the next instruction.
Figure 6.5-2 shows the cancellation operation of the watch mode.
Figure 6.5-2 Cancellation of Watch Mode (External Reset)
RST Pin
Watch mode
Main clock
Sub clock
suspension
oscillation
PLL clock
oscillation
Oscillation stabilizing wait
suspension
oscillation
CPU clock
suspension
CPU operation
suspension
Main clock
Processing
Reset sequence
Reset cancellation
Watch mode cancellation
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
159
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
6.5.4
MB90330A Series
Stop Mode
Stop mode is mode for stopping original oscillation and all functions are stopped. That
means, data can be held with the lowest power consumption.
■ Transition to Stop Mode
If you write "1" into the stop mode bit (STP) of the low-power consumption mode control register
(LPMCR), the transition to the stop mode is made.
● Data retention function
In the stop mode, the contents of the dedicated registers such as accumulators and the internal RAM are
held unchanged.
● Holding function
In the stop mode, the external bus hold function is terminated, thereby neglecting a hold request even a
request is input. If you input a hold request while transiting to the stop mode, the HAK signal may not get
to "L" with the bus being high impedance.
● Operation during an interrupt request
When you write "1" into the SLP bit of the LPMCR register, the transition to the stop mode is not made if
there is an interrupt request.
● Pin state setting
You may determine by the pin state specification bit (SPL) of the LPMCR register whether the external pin
in the stop mode should be retained in the preceding state or be shifted into the high impedance state.
■ Cancellation of Stop Modes
The low-power consumption control circuit clears stop mode when reset input or interrupt occurs. As
oscillation of the operation clock is stopped when returning from stop mode, the low-power consumption
control circuit first transits to the oscillation stabilization wait state and then clears stop mode.
● Return by Reset
When clearing stop mode by a reset cause, transition occurs to oscillation stabilization wait reset state after
clearing stop mode. The reset sequence is executed after the oscillation stabilization wait time.
● Return by interrupt
If there is an interrupt request higher than level 7 from the peripheral circuit and others in the stop mode
(except for IL2, IL1, IL0 of the interrupt control register (ICR) = 111B), the low-power consumption
control circuit cancels the stop mode. After canceling the stop mode, a normal interrupt procedure is
executed when elapsing the main clock oscillation stable wait time specified by the oscillation stable wait
time selection bit (WS1, WS0) of the clock selection register (CKSCR). When an interrupt is acceptable by
settings in the I flag of the condition code register (CCR), the interrupt level mask register (ILM), and the
interrupt control register (ICR), interrupt processing is carried out. When an interrupt is not acceptable,
processing from the instruction succeeding the one caused to enter stop mode continues.
160
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.5 Standby Mode
MB90330A Series
Notes:
•
When handling an interrupt, the CPU usually services the interrupt after executing the instruction
that follows the one specifying the stop mode. When transition to stop mode and acceptance of
an external bus hold request have occurred at the same time, interrupt processing may transit
before executing the next instruction.
•
In PLL stop mode, the main clock and PLL multiplier circuit remain stopped. When the CPU
returns from PLL stop mode, therefore, it is necessary to allow for the main clock oscillation
stabilization wait time and PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time. In this case, the oscillation
stabilization wait time concurrently counts the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time and the
PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time, according to the value specified in the oscillation
stabilization wait time selection bit (CKSCR; WS1, WS0) of the clock selection register, thus the
CKSCR; WS1, WS0 bit must be set in accordance with the longer oscillation stabilization wait
time. However, as the PLL clock stabilization wait time requires at least 214/HCLK, be sure to set
the CKSCR; WS1, WS0 bit to "10B" or "11B".
Figure 6.5-3 shows the cancellation operation of the stop mode.
Figure 6.5-3 Cancellation of Stop Mode (External Reset)
RST Pin
Stop mode
Main clock
Oscillation stabilizing wait
oscillation
Sub clock
CPU clock
CPU operation
oscillation
PLL clock
suspension
Main clock
suspension
Processing
Reset sequence
Reset cancellation
Stop mode cancellation
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
161
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.6 State Transition Diagram
6.6
MB90330A Series
State Transition Diagram
The transition of the operation state and the transition conditions of MB90330A series
are shown.
■ State Transition Diagram
Figure 6.6-1 shows the transition of the operation state and the transition conditions of MB90330A series.
Figure 6.6-1 State Transition and Transition Conditions
External reset, Watchdog timer reset, Software reset
Power on
Reset
Power on reset
SCS=0
Oscillation
stabilization
wait end
SCS=1
MCS=0
Main clock mode
MCS=1
SLP=1
SCS=0
PLL clock mode
Interruption
PLL sleep mode
TMD=0
Main time-base
timer mode
STP=1
Interruption
TMD=0
Interruption
Oscillation
stabilization
wait end
Main clock oscillation
stablization wait
Interruption
Sub sleep mode
TMD=0
PLL time-base
timer mode
STP=1
Main stop mode
SLP=1
Interruption
Main sleep mode
TMD=0
SCS=1
SLP=1
Interruption
Sub clock mode
Watch mode
STP=1
PLL stop mode
*
Interruption
Interruption
Oscillation
stabilization
wait end
PLL clock oscillation
stabilization wait
Sub stop mode
Interruption
Oscillation
stabilization
wait end
Sub clock oscillation
stabilization wait
* : Interrupt from USB bus at interrupt + USB function
162
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.6 State Transition Diagram
MB90330A Series
■ Operation Status in Low-power Consumption Mode
Table 6.6-1 lists the operation states in low-power consumption mode.
Table 6.6-1 Operation States in Low-power Consumption Mode
Operating State
Main
Clock
Sub
Clock
PLL
Clock
PLL
PLL sleep
CPU
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Peripheral
Operation
Clock
Time-base
Timers
Operation
Operation
PLL time-base timer
PLL stop
PLL oscillation stabilization
waiting
Stops
Stops
Stops
Operation
Operation
Operation
Main
Main sleep
Operation
Operation
Operation
Main time-base timer
Main stop
Main oscillation stabilization
waiting
Stops
Stops
Stops
Operation
Operation
Sub
Operation
Stops
Sub-stop
Reset
CM44-10129-6E
Stops
Stops
Sub oscillation stabilization
waiting
Power on reset
Stops
Operation
Sub sleep
Clock
Stops
Stops
Stops
Operation
Stops
Operation
Stops
Operation
Operation
Operation
Stops
Stops
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Stops
Stops
Operation
Operation
Clock
Source
PLL
Clock
Main
Clock
Operation
Stops
Sub
Clock
Operation
Main
Clock
Stops
Operation
Stops
Operation
Stops
Stops
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
Operation
163
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
6.7
The state of the pin at the time of the stand by mode, the hold, or the reset is shown for
each memory access code.
■ Pin State in Single-chip Mode
Table 6.7-1 shows the state of the pin in the single-chip mode.
Table 6.7-1 Pin State in Single-chip Mode
In stop mode
Pin Name
At sleep
At holding
SPL=0
SPL=1
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately
before hold
Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z
At a reset
P07 to P00
P17 to P10
P27 to P20
P37 to P30
P47 to P40
P57 to P50
The state immediately
before hold*2
P77 to P70
*3
*2,*3
This state does
not exist.
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
P87 to P80
P96 to P90
PA7 to PA0
PB6 to PB0
P67 to P60
Possible to input*1
Possible to input*1
Impossible to input
USB port input
USB port input *4
Hi-Z
DVP
DVM
HVP
*5
HVM
UTEST
Pull-down connect
Pull-down connect
Pull-down connect
HCON
The state immediately
before hold
Hold state preserved
"H" output
*1: Same as the other ports if this is being used for the output state. "Input enabled" means that the input function is
currently enabled; Pull-up/Pull-down or an input from the external is required.
*2: Outputs the initial output preceding this mode. Alternatively, this means "Input disabled" if the signal is input. "Input
disabled" means that the contents of a pin are not accepted internally, because the internal circuit is not in operation
although operation of the input gate nearest to the pin is currently enabled.
164
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
*3: In the input shutoff state, the input is masked and the "L" level is passed to the internal.
*4: When operation stops due to a cause in the USB, the signal is input via the USB port. When it stops due to another cause,
the preceding state remains unchanged.
*5: There is no influence in the pin USB operation.
Note:
The mode transits to the standby mode is also inhibited during the USB is transferred.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
165
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
■ Pin State in External Bus 16-bit Data Bus and Multiplex 16-bit External Bus Mode
Table 6.7-2 shows the state of the pins of the external bus 16-bit data bus mode and the multiplex 16-bit
external bus mode.
Table 6.7-2 Pin State in External Bus 16-bit Data Bus and Multiplex 16-bit External Bus Mode
In stop mode
Pin Name
At sleep
At holding
SPL=0
P07 to P00
(AD07 to AD00)
P17 to P10
(AD15 to AD08)
P27 to P20
(A23 to A16)
P57(CLK)
P56(RDY)
P55(HAK)
Impossible to
Input cutoff/
input/ output Hi-Z output Hi-Z
Impossible to input/ Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
output Hi-Z
Output state *1,*4
Output state *1,*4
Impossible to input/
Output state*1
output Hi-Z *4
Impossible to
input/
possible to
output*2,*4
Impossible to
input/
output state *1,*4
Impossible to input/
Impossible to input/
possible to
possible to output*2
output*2,*4
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately
before hold *5,*6
Impossible to input
The state
immediately
before hold*5
P54(HRQ)
P53(WRH)
At a reset
SPL=1
*4
"L" output
Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z *6
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
"1" input
"H" output *4
"H" output *4
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z *4
"H" output
P51(RD)
"H" output
"H" output
P50(ALE)
"L" output
"L" output
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Possible to output *2
The state
immediately
before hold*5
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately
before hold*5
Hold state
preserved*5
P52(WRL)
P37 to P30
P47 to P40
P77 to P70
P87 to P80
P96 to P90
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
PA7 to PA0
PB6 to PB0
P67 to P60
Possible to input*3 Possible to input *3 Possible to input *3
Impossible to input
DVP
DVM
HVP
USB port input
USB port input *7
Hi-Z
*8
HVM
UTEST
Pull-down connect Pull-down connect
Pull-down connect
HCON
Hold state
preserved
"H" output
Hold state preserved
*1: "Output status" means that although the pin driving transistor is left drive enabled, fixed value "H" or "L" is output,
because operation of the internal circuit remains in stopped state. If the internal peripheral circuit is in operation and the
output function is in use, the output varies except when a reset is generated. There is no output change in reset.
166
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
*2: "Output enabled" means that the contents of operation appear via the pin because the pin driving transistor is in driven
state and operation of the internal circuit remains enabled.
*3: Same as the other ports if this is being used for the output state. "Input enabled" means that the input function is
currently enabled; Pull-up/Pull-down or an input from the external is required.
*4: If this is being used as an output port, it holds the preceding value.
*5: Outputs the initial output preceding this mode. Alternatively, this means "input disabled" if the signal is input. "Input
disabled" means that the contents of a pin are not accepted internally, because the internal circuit is not in operation
although operation of the input gate nearest to the pin is currently enabled.
*6: In the input shutoff state, the input is masked and the "L" level is passed to the internal.
*7: When operation stops due to a cause in the USB, the signal is input via the USB port. When it stops due to another cause,
the preceding state remains unchanged.
*8: There is no influence in the pin USB operation.
Note:
The mode transits to the standby mode is also inhibited during the USB is transferred.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
167
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
■ Pin State in External Bus 8-bit Data Bus and Multiplex 8-bit External Bus Mode
Table 6.7-3 shows the state of the pins of the external bus 8-bit data bus mode and the multiplex 8-bit
external bus mode.
Table 6.7-3 Pin Signal State in External Bus 8-bit Data Bus and Multiplex 8-bit External Bus Mode
Pin Name
P07 to P00
(AD07 to AD00)
P17 to P10
(A15 to A08)
P27 to P20
(A23 to A16)
P57(CLK)
In stop mode
At sleep
SPL=0
Output state *1
Impossible to input/ Impossible to input/
possible to output
output state
Output state *1
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z *4
Impossible to input/ Impossible to input/
possible to output
possible to output
*2,*4
*2,*4
Output state
*1,*4
Output state
*1,*4
*1,*4
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z *6
Hold state
preserved*5
P53(WRH)
P52(WRL)
P51(RD)
P50(ALE)
P37 to P30
P47 to P40
P77 to P70
P87 to P80
P96 to P90
PA7 to PA0
PB6 to PB0
P67 to P60
DVP
DVM
HVP
HVM
UTEST
HCON
*2
Impossible to
input*4
P56(RDY)
P55(HAK)
P54(HRQ)
At a reset
Impossible to input/
Impossible to input/ output Hi-Z
output Hi-Z
Impossible to input/ Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z
output Hi-Z
Output state *1
At holding
SPL=1
"H" output*5
"H" output*5
"H" output
"H" output
"L" output
"L" output
Hold state
preserved*5
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Possible to input*3
Possible to input*3
USB port input
USB port input *7
"L" output
Impossible to input/
"1" input
output Hi-Z
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z *4
"H" output
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
"L" output
Impossible to input/
The state
output Hi-Z
immediately before
*5
hold
Possible to
input*3
Impossible to input
Hi-Z
*8
Pull-down connect Pull-down connect
The state
immediately before Hold state preserved
hold
Pull-down connect
"H" output
*1: "Output status" means that although the pin driving transistor is left drive enabled, fixed value "H" or "L" is output,
because operation of the internal circuit remains in stopped state. If the internal peripheral circuit is in operation and the
output function is in use, the output varies except when a reset is generated. There is no output change in reset.
168
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
*2: "Output enabled" means that the contents of operation appear via the pin because the pin driving transistor is in driven
state and operation of the internal circuit remains enabled.
*3: Same as the other ports if this is being used for the output state. "Input enabled" means that the input function is currently
enabled; Pull-up/Pull-down or an input from the external is required.
*4: If this is being used as an output port, it holds the preceding value.
*5: Outputs the initial output preceding this mode. Alternatively, this means "Input disabled" if the signal is input. "Input
disabled" means that the contents of a pin are not accepted internally, because the internal circuit is not in operation
although operation of the input gate nearest to the pin is currently enabled.
*6: In the input shutoff state, the input is masked and the "L" level is passed to the internal.
*7: When operation stops due to a cause in the USB, the signal is input via the USB port. When it stops due to another cause,
the preceding state remains unchanged.
*8: There is no influence in the pin USB operation.
Note:
The mode transits to the standby mode is also inhibited during the USB is transferred.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
169
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
■ Pin State in External Bus 16-bit Data Bus and Non-multiplex 16-bit External Bus Mode
Table 6.7-4 shows the state of the pins of the external bus 16-bit data bus mode and the non-multiplex 16bit external bus mode.
Table 6.7-4 Pin State in External Bus 16-bit Data Bus and Non-multiplex 16-bit External Bus Mode
Pin Name
P07 to P00
(D07 to D00)
P17 to P10
(D15 to D08)
P37 to P30
(A07 to A00)
P47 to P40
(A15 to A08)
P27 to P20
(A23 to A16)
P57(CLK)
P56(RDY)
P55(HAK)
P54(HRQ)
P53(WRH)
P52(WRL)
P51(RD)
P50(ALE)
P77 to P70
P87 to P80
P96 to P90
PA7 to PA0
PB6 to PB0
P67 to P60
DVP
DVM
HVP
HVM
UTEST
HCON
In stop mode
At sleep
SPL=0
Possible to input/
output Hi-Z
At holding
SPL=1
At a reset
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Output state*1
Output state*1
Output state*1
Output state *1,*4
Output state *1,*4
Impossible to input/ Impossible to input/
possible to
possible to
output*1,*4
output*2,*4
The state
immediately before
hold*5
"H" output*5
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z *4
Impossible to input/
possible to
output*2,*4
Impossible to input
Impossible to input/
possible to output*2
*4
*6
"L" output
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
"1" input
"H" output*5
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z *4
"H" output
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Possible to output*2
"H" output
"H" output
"L" output
"L" output
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Possible to input*3
Possible to input*3
The state
immediately before
hold*5
Possible to
input*3
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Impossible to input
Hi-Z
*7
USB port input
USB port input
Pull-down connect
The state
immediately before
hold
Pull-down connect
Pull-down connect
Hold state preserved
"H" output
*8
*1: "Output status" means that although the pin driving transistor is left drive enabled, fixed value "H" or "L" is output,
because operation of the internal circuit remains in stopped state. If the internal peripheral circuit is in operation and the
output function is in use, the output varies except when a reset is generated. There is no output change in reset.
*2: "Output enabled" means that the contents of operation appear via the pin because the pin driving transistor is in driven
state and operation of the internal circuit remains enabled.
170
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
*3: Same as the other ports if this is being used for the output state. "Input enabled" means that the input function is currently
enabled; Pull-up/Pull-down or an input from the external is required.
*4: If this is being used as an output port, it holds the preceding value.
*5: Outputs the initial output preceding this mode. Alternatively, this means "Input disabled" if the signal is input. "Input
disabled" means that the contents of a pin are not accepted internally, because the internal circuit is not in operation
although operation of the input gate nearest to the pin is currently enabled.
*6: In the input shutoff state, the input is masked and the "L" level is passed to the internal.
*7: When operation stops due to a cause in the USB, the signal is input via the USB port. When it stops due to another cause,
the preceding state remains unchanged.
*8: There is no influence in the pin USB operation.
Note:
The mode transits to the standby mode is also inhibited during the USB is transferred.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
171
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
■ Pin State in External Bus 8-bit Data Bus and Non-multiplex 8-bit External Bus Mode
Table 6.7-5 shows the state of the pins of the external bus 8-bit data bus mode and the non-multiplex 8-bit
external bus mode.
Table 6.7-5 Pin State in External Bus 8-bit Data Bus and Non-multiplex 8-bit External Bus Mode
Pin Name
P07 to P00
(D07 to D00)
P37 to P30
(A07 to A00)
P47 to P40
(A15 to A08)
P27 to P20
(A23 to A16)
P57(CLK)
In stop mode
At sleep
SPL=0
Output state
*1
Output state
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
*1
Output state *1
Output state *1,*4
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z *4
Impossible to input/
Impossible to input/
possible to output
possible to output *2
*2,*4
Output state *1,*4
Impossible to input/ Impossible to input/
possible to output
possible to output
*1,*4
Impossible to input/
P56(RDY)
P53(WRH)
P52(WRL)
P51(RD)
P50(ALE)
P17 to P10
P77 to P70
P87 to P80
P96 to P90
PA7 to PA0
PB6 to PB0
P67 to P60
DVP
DVM
HVP
HVM
UTEST
HCON
At a reset
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Impossible to input/ Input cutoff/
output Hi-Z
output Hi-Z
*2,*4
P55(HAK)
P54(HRQ)
At holding
SPL=1
*4
Input cutoff/
The state
"L" output
The state
Impossible to input/
immediately before immediately before Input cutoff/*6
output Hi-Z
*5
output
Hi-Z
"1"
input
hold
hold *5
Hold state
preserved*5
Impossible to input/
"H" output *4
"H" output *4
output Hi-Z *4
"H" output
"H" output
"H" output
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
"L" output
"L" output
Possible to output*2
Input cutoff/
The state
immediately before The state
immediately before
hold *5
hold *5
Possible to input*3
Possible to input*3
USB port input
USB port input *7
Hold state
preserved*5
Possible to
input*3
Impossible to input/
output Hi-Z
Impossible to input
Hi-Z
*8
Pull-down connect Pull-down connect
The state
immediately before Hold state preserved
hold
Pull-down connect
"H" output
*1: "Output status" means that although the pin driving transistor is left drive enabled, fixed value "H" or "L" is output,
because operation of the internal circuit remains in stopped state. If the internal peripheral circuit is in operation and the
output function is in use, the output varies except when a reset is generated. There is no output change in reset.
172
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.7 State of the Pin during Standby Mode, Hold, and Reset
MB90330A Series
*2: "Output enabled" means that the contents of operation appear via the pin because the pin driving transistor is in driven
state and operation of the internal circuit remains enabled.
*3: Same as the other ports if this is being used for the output state. "Input enabled" means that the input function is currently
enabled; Pull-up/Pull-down or an input from the external is required.
*4: If this is being used as an output port, it holds the preceding value.
*5: Outputs the initial output preceding this mode. Alternatively, this means "input disabled" if the signal is input. "Input
disabled" means that the contents of a pin are not accepted internally, because the internal circuit is not in operation
although operation of the input gate nearest to the pin is currently enabled.
*6: In the input shutoff state, the input is masked and the "L" level is passed to the internal.
*7: When operation stops due to a cause in the USB, the signal is input via the USB port. When it stops due to another cause,
the preceding state remains unchanged.
*8: There is no influence in the pin USB operation.
Note:
The mode transits to the standby mode is also inhibited during the USB is transferred.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
173
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.8 Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode
6.8
MB90330A Series
Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode
Special attention for the following is needed when using the low-power consumption
mode.
• Transition to standby mode and interrupt
• Cancellation of standby mode by interrupt
• Oscillation stabilization wait time
• Switching clock mode
• Notes on Accessing the Low-Power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR) to
Enter the Standby Mode
■ Transition to Standby Mode and Interrupt
When there is the generation of an interrupt request to the CPU from the peripheral functions, the transition
to each standby mode is not made (the transition to the standby mode is not made even after the interrupt
processing) because even if you set "1" to the stop mode bit (STP) and the sleep mode bit (SLP) of the lowpower consumption mode control register (LPMCR), or "0" to the watch/time-base timer mode bit (TMD),
it is ignored. In this case, if the interrupt level is higher than 7, whether or not the interrupt request is
accepted by the CPU is not related to this operation.
Even when the CPU is currently performing interrupt processing, the device can go to the standby mode if
no other interrupt request is present with the interrupt request flag bit cleared.
■ Cancellation of Standby Mode by Interrupt
When an interrupt request with an interrupt level higher than 7 has been generated from a peripheral circuit,
etc. in sleep, time-base timer, or stop mode, standby mode is cleared. Whether or not the interrupt request is
accepted by the CPU is not related to this operation.
After the standby mode is canceled by the interruption, the operation is branched off to the interrupt
processing routine, if the priority of the interruption level set bit (IL2, IL1, IL0 bits of ICR register) to the
interrupt request is over the interrupt level mask register (ILM), and the interrupt is permitted by the I flag
of the condition cord register (CCR) (I=1). When an interrupt is not acceptable, processing from the
instruction succeeding the one which has specified standby mode continues.
When performing interrupt processing, interrupt processing normally transits after executing the instruction
succeeding the one specifying standby mode.
Depending on the conditions for transiting to standby mode, interrupt processing may starts before
executing the next instruction.
Note:
To prohibit a branch to the interrupt processing routine immediately after return, interrupts must be
prohibited before standby mode is set.
174
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.8 Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode
MB90330A Series
■ Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
● Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time of oscillation clock
Because the oscillator for original oscillation is stopped in stop mode, the oscillation stabilization wait time
must be required. For the oscillation stabilization wait time, you take the time selected in the oscillation
stabilization wait time selection bit (WA1, WA0) of the clock selection register (CKSCR).
Note:
Be sure to set "00B" for the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bit (WS1, WS0) of the CKSCR
register ONLY at the time of the main clock.
● Oscillation stabilization wait time of PLL clock
When the transition is made from a state where the CPU is operated by the main clock and the PLL clock
halts, to a mode where CPU and the peripherals are operated by the PLL clock, transition to the PLL clock
oscillation stabilization wait state is made and it is operated by the main clock during the oscillation
stabilization wait state.
The PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time is fixed to 214/HCLK (HCLK: oscillation clock).
In sub clock mode, the main clock and PLL multiplication circuit stop. When changing to PLL clock mode,
it is necessary to reserve the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time and PLL clock oscillation
stabilization wait time. The oscillation stabilization wait times for main clock and PLL clock are counted
simultaneously according to the value specified in the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits
(CKSCR: WS1, WS0) in the clock selection register. The oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits
(CKSCR: WS1, WS0) in the clock selection register must be selected accordingly to account for the longer
of the main clock and PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait times. The PLL clock oscillation stabilization
wait time, however, requires 214/HCLK or more. Set the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits
(CKSCR: WS1, WS0) in the clock selection register to "10B" or "11B".
In PLL stop mode, the main clock and PLL multiplication circuit stop. During recovery from PLL stop
mode, it is necessary to allot the main clock oscillation stabilization wait time and PLL clock oscillation
stabilization wait time. The oscillation stabilization wait times for main clock and PLL clock are counted
simultaneously according to the value specified in the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits
(CKSCR: WS1, WS0) in the clock selection register. The oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits
(CKSCR: WS1, WS0) in the clock selection register must be selected accordingly to account for the longer
of the main clock and PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time. The PLL clock oscillation stabilization
wait time, however, requires 214/HCLK or more. Set the oscillation stabilization wait time selection bits
(CKSCR: WS1, WS0) in the clock selection register to "10B" or "11B".
■ Switching Clock Mode
When switching of the clock mode is made, be sure not to change to other clock modes or the low-power
consumption mode until the completion of the switching. Completion of the switching can be checked by
referencing the MCM and SCM bits of the CKSCR. If the mode is switched to another clock mode or lowpower-consumption mode before completion of switching, the mode may not be switched.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
175
CHAPTER 6 LOW-POWER CONSUMPTION MODE
6.8 Precautions when Using Low-power Consumption Mode
MB90330A Series
■ Notes on Accessing the Low-Power Consumption Mode Control Register (LPMCR) to
Enter the Standby Mode
● To access the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR) with assembler language
•
To set the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR) to enter the standby mode, use the
instruction listed in Table 6.3-2.
•
The low-power consumption mode transition instruction in Table 6.3-2 must always be followed by an array of
instructions highlighted by a line below.
MOV LPMCR,#H'XX
NOP
NOP
JMP $+3
MOV A,#H'10
; the low-power consumption mode transition instruction in Table 6.3-2
; jump to next instruction
; any instruction
The devices does not guarantee its operation after returning from the low-power consumption mode if you
place an array of instructions other than the one enclosed in the line.
● To access the low-power consumption mode (LPMCR) with C language
To enter the standby mode using the low-power consumption mode control register (LPMCR), use one of
the following methods (1) to (3) to access the register:
(1) Specify the standby mode transition instruction as a function and insert two _wait_nop() built-in
functions after that instruction. If any interrupt other than the interrupt to return from the standby mode
can occur within the function, optimize the function during compilation to suppress the LINK and
UNLINK instructions from occurring.
Example: Watch mode or time-base timer mode transition function
Void enter_watch(){
IO_LPMCR_byte = 0x10
/* Set LPMCR TMD bit to 0 */
_wait_nop();
_wait_nop();
}
(2) Define the standby mode transition instruction using _asm statements and insert two NOP and JMP
instructions after that instruction.
Example: Transition to sleep mode
_asm(" MOV I: _IO_LPMCR,#H'58"); /* Set LPMCR SLP bit to 1 */
_asm(" NOP");
_asm(" NOP");
_asm(" JMP $+3");
/* Jump to next instruction */
(3) Define the standby mode transition instruction between #pragma asm and #pragma endasm and insert
two NOP and JMP instructions after that instruction.
Example: Transition to stop mode
#pragma asm
MOV I: _IO_LPMCR,#H'98
NOP
NOP
JMP $+3
#pragma endasm
176
/* Set LPMCR STP bit to 1 */
/* Jump to next instruction */
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7
MODE SETTING
This chapter describes the mode setting and the
external memory access.
7.1 Mode Setting
7.2 Mode Pins (MD2 to MD0)
7.3 Mode Data
7.4 External Memory Access
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
177
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.1 Mode Setting
7.1
MB90330A Series
Mode Setting
F2MC-16LX has respective modes in the access method, access area, and test.
Respective mode is set according to the mode pin at the time of reset and the modefetched mode data.
■ Mode Setting
F2MC-16LX has respective modes in the access method, the access area, and the test, and Figure 7.1-1
shows the classification.
Figure 7.1-1 Classification of Mode
Operation mode
Bus mode
Single chip mode
Internal ROM external bus mode
External ROM external bus mode
RUN operation
Flash write mode
Various test function mode
Access mode
External bus data bus length
8/16-bit
Address data bus
Non-multiplex mode
Multiplex mode
■ Operating Mode
The operation mode controls the operation state of the device and is specified by the mode setting pin
(MDx) and the contents of the Mx bit in the mode data. Selecting the operation mode, you may perform the
normal operation/the start of the internal test program/the start of the special test function.
■ Bus Modes
The bus mode controls the internal ROM operation and the external access function operation, and is
specified by the mode setting pin (MDx) and the contents of the Mx bit in the mode data. The mode setting
pin (MDx) specifies the bus mode to read the reset vector and the mode data. The Mx bit in the mode data
specifies the bus mode at the normal operation.
■ Access Mode
The access mode controls the external data bus width and is specified by the mode setting pin (MDx) and
the Sx bit in the mode data. Selecting the access mode specifies either the 8-bit length or the 16-bit length
for the external data bus. Also, this mode specifies either the non-multiplex mode or the multiplex mode for
the address data bus.
178
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.2 Mode Pins (MD2 to MD0)
MB90330A Series
7.2
Mode Pins (MD2 to MD0)
The mode pin is the three external pins (MD2 to MD0) and specifies the load methods
for the reset vector and the mode data.
■ Setting of Mode Pins (MD2 to MD0)
With the mode pin (MD2 to MD0), you may select either the external data bus or the internal data bus for
the reset vector read and select the bus width while selecting the external data bus. For the internal Flash
ROM products, the mode pin also specifies the Flash ROM write mode to write the internal ROM program
and so forth.
Table 7.2-1 shows the content of the mode pin setting.
Table 7.2-1 Content of Setting of Mode Pins
P61 P60 MD2 MD1 MD0
Mode Name
Reset vectors
access area
External Data
Bus width
Remark
-
-
0
0
0
External vector mode 0
External
Multiplex mode
Reset vector
bus width access
-
-
0
0
1
External vector mode 1
External
Multiplex mode
Reset vector
bus width access
-
-
0
1
0
External vector mode 2
External
Non-multiplex
mode
Reset vector
bus width access
-
-
0
1
1
External vector mode
Internal
Mode Data
Operation after reset
sequence is controlled with
mode data
-
-
1
0
0
-
-
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
-
-
1
1
1
Setting disabled
Flash serial writing
Flash writer write mode
-
-
-
Note:
Set MD2 to MD0:0=VSS or 1=VCC. For the external vector mode 2, the data bus width also has the
initial value of 8-bit. When setting 16-bit as the data bus width, specify the mode data for the nonmultiplex external data bus 16-bit mode, and then the LMBS areas are set to the 16-bit size access.
To set the HMBS area for the 16-bit size access change the EPCR:HMBS bit setting.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
179
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.3 Mode Data
7.3
MB90330A Series
Mode Data
The mode data is located on the memory of the FFFFDFH address and specifies the
operation after the reset sequence. The mode data is automatically taken into the CPU
by a mode fetch.
■ Mode Data
While executing the reset sequence, the mode data in the FFFFDFH address is captured into the mode
register in the CPU core. CPU sets the memory access mode by this mode data. The values of the mode
register can be changed only in the reset sequence. The setting of the mode data is enabled after the reset
sequence.
Figure 7.3-1 shows the configuration of the mode data.
Figure 7.3-1 Bit Configuration of Mode Data
bit
Mode data
7
6
M1 M0
5
0
Bus setting bit
4
S1
3
2
1
0
S0
0
0
0
Various mode Function extended bit
setting bit
(Reserved area)
■ Set Bit of Various Modes (S1, S0)
The S1and S0 bits specify the bus mode and access mode after the reset sequence.
Table 7.3-1 shows the content of the S1, S0 bit setting.
Table 7.3-1 Content of S1 and S0 Bit Setting
S1
S0
Functions
0
0
External data bus
8-bit mode
0
1
External data bus
16-bit mode
1
0
External data bus
8-bit mode
1
External data bus
16-bit mode
Address data bus multiplex
Address data bus non-multiplex
1
180
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.3 Mode Data
MB90330A Series
■ Set Bit of Bus Mode (M1, M0)
The M1and M0 bits specify the operation mode after the reset sequence.
Table 7.3-2 shows the content of the M1, M0 bit setting.
Table 7.3-2 Content of M1 and M0 Bit Setting
M1
M0
Function
0
0
Single-chip mode
0
1
Internal ROM external bus modes
1
0
External ROM external bus modes
1
1
(Setting prohibited)
■ Relation between Access Area and Physical Address
Figure 7.3-2 shows the relation between the access area and the physical address.
Figure 7.3-2 Relation between Access Area and Physical Address
Single chip
Internal ROM external bus
External ROM bus
(with ROM mirrorring function) (with ROM mirrorring function)
FFFFFFH
ROM area
ROM area
Image of
FF bank
in ROM area
Image of
FF bank
in ROM area
Extended
I/O area
Extended
I/O area
RAM Register
RAM Register
Address#1
00FFFFH
Address#2
007900H
Extended
I/O area
Address#3
RAM
Register
000100H
0000FBH
Peripheral
Peripheral
Peripheral
000000H
: Internal
: External
: No access
Note:
The "address #X" is determined by each family. Please refer to "Appendix A memory map" for
details.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
181
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.3 Mode Data
MB90330A Series
■ Relation between Mode Pin and Mode Data (Recommended Example)
Table 7.3-3 shows the relation between the mode pin and the mode data.
Table 7.3-3 Relation between Mode Pin and Mode Data
Mode
MD2
MD1
MD0
M1
M0
S1
S0
Single Chip
0
1
1
0
0
X
X
Internal ROM external bus mode 8 bits
(Address data multiplex)
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Internal ROM external bus Mode 16 bits
(Address data multiplex)
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Internal ROM external bus Mode 8 bits
(Address data non-multiplex)
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
Internal ROM external bus Mode 16 bits
(Address data non-multiplex)
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
External ROM external bus mode 16 bits bus vector 16
bits width (Address data multiplex)
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
External ROM external bus mode 8 bits
(Address data bus multiplex)
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
External ROM external bus mode 8 bits
(Address data bus non-multiplex)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Note:
The maximum accessible capacity is 64 Kbytes when you control the output of the upper
addresses A23 to A16.
182
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.3 Mode Data
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of External Pin in Each Mode
Table 7.3-4 shows the operation relation of each external pin in the non-multiplex mode and the multiplex
mode.
Table 7.3-4 Operation Relation of External Pin in Each Mode
Functions
Non- multiplex mode
Multiplex mode
External Address control
External Address control
Permission (Address)
Prohibit (port)
External bus
expansion
External bus
expansion
8 bits
16 bits
P07 to P00/
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
P17 to P10/
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
8 bits
16 bits
Permission (Address)
External bus expansion External bus expansion
8 bits
16 bits
D07 to D00
Port
D15 to D08
Prohibit (port)
8 bits
AD07 to AD00
Port
D15 to D08 A15 to A08
P27 to P20
A23 to A16
Port
P37 to P30
A07 to A00
A07 to A00
P47 to P40
A15 to A08
A15 to A08
AD15 to
AD08
A15 to A08
A23 to A16
Port
ALE
ALE
RD
RD
RD
P52/WRL
WRL
WRL
Port
WRH
Port
WRH
AD15 to
AD08
Port
ALE
P53/WRH
16 bits
Port
WRH
Port
P54/HRQ
HRQ
HRQ
P55/HAK
HAK
HAK
P56/RDY
RDY
RDY
P57/CLK
CLK
CLK
WRH
Notes:
• The single chip mode is all available as the port.
• The upper addresses, (WRL), (WRH), (HAK), HRQ, RDY, and CLK are used as a port according to the function selection.
• While using the multiplex, you can use the upper addresses A23 to A20 as a port or PPG3 to PPG0.
• While using the non-multiplex, you may not use the reload time ch.0/ch.1/ch.2, UART ch.0/ch.1. It works as an address.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
183
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.4 External Memory Access
7.4
MB90330A Series
External Memory Access
The block diagram of the external memory access, the configuration/function of the
register, and the operation of the external memory access are described.
■ I/O Signal Pin of External Memory Access
F2MC-16LX provides the following address/data/control signal to access the external memory/peripheral.
• CLK(P57): Machine cycle clock (KBP) is output.
• RDY(P56): It is an external ready input pin.
• (HAK)(P55): It is a hold acknowledge output pin.
• HRQ(P54): It is a holding request input pin.
• (WRH)(P53): It is a writing signal of a data bus upper byte.
• (WRL)(P52): It is a data bus lower 8 bit write signal.
• (RD)(P51): It is a reading signal.
• ALE(P50): It is an address latch permission signal (enabled in the multiplex mode).
■ Block Diagram
Figure 7.4-1 shows the block diagram of the external bus pin control circuit.
Figure 7.4-1 Block Diagram of External Bus Pin Control Circuit
P0
Internal
address bus
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P0 data
P5
P0
P0 direction
Internal
data bus
Data control
Address control
Access control
184
Access control
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.4 External Memory Access
MB90330A Series
■ Register List
Figure 7.4-2 shows the list of the registers of the external bus pin control circuit.
Figure 7.4-2 List of the Registers of External Bus Pin Control Circuit
bit
0000A5H
15
12
(W)
(1)
7
6
E23
10
9
8
LMR1 LMR0
(W)
(1)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(W)
(0)
(W)
(0)
5
4
3
2
1
0
E22
E21
E20
E19
E18
E17
E16
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
15
14
13
12
CKE
RYE
HDE
Reserved
(W)
(1)
(W)
(0)
(W)
(0)
(W)
(0)
bit
11
HMR1 HMR0
(W)
(0)
(W)
(*)
0000A7H
13
(W)
(0)
bit
0000A6H
14
Reserved Reserved
11
10
9
8
HMBS WRE LMBS
(W)
(*)
(W)
(1)
(W)
(0)
(-)
(-)
Automatic Ready Function
Selection Register (ARSR)
Read/write
Initial value
External Address Output
Control Register (HACR)
Read/write
Initial value
Bus Control Signal
Selection Register (EPCR)
Read/write
Initial value
W: Write only
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
185
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.4 External Memory Access
7.4.1
MB90330A Series
Automatic Ready Function Selection Register (ARSR)
The configuration and functions of the automatic ready function selection register
(ARSR) are described.
■ Automatic Ready Function Selection Register (ARSR)
Figure 7.4-3 shows the bit configuration of the automatic ready function selection register (ARSR).
Figure 7.4-3 Bit Configuration of automatic Ready Function Selection Register (ARSR)
15
bit
0000A5H
14
Reserved Reserved
(W)
(0)
13
12
11
10
(W)
(0)
(W)
(1)
(W)
(1)
9
8
LMR1 LMR0
HMR1 HMR0
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(W)
(0)
(W)
(0)
Automatic Ready Function
Selection Register (ARSR)
Read/write
Initial value
W: Write only
Function of each bit for the automatic ready function selection register (ARSR) shows as follows.
[bit 15, bit 14] Reserved
It is Reserved bit. Please write "00B".
[bit 13, bit 12] HMR1, HMR0
The automatic wait function is selected when executing the external access to the area 800000H to
FFFFFFH. A set content is a table below.
HMR1
HMR0
Setting
0
0
Automatic wait interdiction
0
1
At the external access, an automatic wait of 1 machine cycle
1
0
At the external access, an automatic wait of 2 machine cycle
1
1
At the external access, an automatic wait of 3 machine cycles [Initial value]
[bit 11, bit 10] Undefined bit
Nothing is affected when it is written.
[bit 9, bit 8] LMR1, LMR0
The automatic wait function is selected when executing the external access to the area 007100H to
7FFFFFH (however, the extended I/O area 007900H to 007FFFH is disable). A set content is a table
below.
186
LMR1
LMR0
Setting
0
0
Automatic wait interdiction [Initial value]
0
1
At the external access, an automatic wait of 1 machine cycle
1
0
At the external access, an automatic wait of 2 machine cycle
1
1
At the external access, an automatic wait of 3 machine cycle
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.4 External Memory Access
MB90330A Series
7.4.2
External Address Output Control Register (HACR)
The configuration and functions of the external address output control register are
described.
■ External Address Output Control Register (HACR)
Figure 7.4-4 shows the bit configuration of the external address output control register.
Figure 7.4-4 Bit Configuration of External Address Output Control Register (HACR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
E23
E22
E21
E20
E19
E18
E17
E16
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
bit
0000A6H
(W)
(*)
(W)
(*)
External Address Output
Control Register (HACR)
Read/write
Initial value
W: Write only
The external address output control register controls the output of the address (A23 to A16) to the outside.
Each bit corresponds to the addresses A23 to A16 respectively, and controls each address output pin as
shown in the following table.
0
The corresponding pin is address output (AXX). [Initial value]
1
The corresponding pin is I/O port (PXX).
The HACR register is not accessible when the device is in the single chip mode. In that case, all the ports
function as the I/O ports regardless of the value of the HACR register. All the bits of the HACR register are
write-only and the read-out value is "1". Furthermore, when expecting an output of an address by selecting
the address output, be sure to use DDR with "0".
The initial value is "1" only when starting in the internal vector mode. Otherwise, it is "0".
Note:
When using PPG, be sure to set to "1" (I/O port setting).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
187
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.4 External Memory Access
7.4.3
MB90330A Series
Bus Control Signal Selection Register (EPCR)
The configuration and functions of the bus control signal selection register are
described.
■ Bus Control Signal Selection Register (EPCR)
The bus control signal selection register sets the control functions of the bus operation in the external bus
mode.
Figure 7.4-5 shows the bit configuration of the bus control signal selection register.
Figure 7.4-5 Bit Configuration of Bus Control Signal Selection Register (EPCR)
15
14
13
12
CKE
RYE
HDE
Reserved
(W)
(1)
(W)
(0)
(W)
(0)
(W)
(0)
bit
0000A7H
11
10
9
8
HMBS WRE LMBS
(W)
(*)
(W)
(1)
(W)
(0)
(-)
(-)
Bus Control Signal
Selection Register (EPCR)
Read/write
Initial value
W: Write only
The EPCR register is not accessible when the device is in the single chip mode. In the single chip mode, all
pins function as the I/O ports regardless of the register value. All the bits of the EPCR register are writeonly and the read-out value is "1".
The functions of each bit of the bus control signal selection register are described below.
[bit 15] CKE
The output of external clock (CLK) is controlled.
0
I/O port (P57) operation (clock interdiction)
1
Clock signal (CLK) output permission [Initial value]
[bit 14] RYE
The input of external ready (RDY) is controlled.
0
I/O port (P56) operation (external RDY input prohibited) [Initial value]
1
External ready (RDY) input permission
[bit 13] HDE
This is the bit that specifies the I/O permission of hold related pin. The setting controls the hold request
input (HRQ) and the hold acknowledge output (HAK).
0
I/O port (P55, P54) operation (hold function input/output prohibited) [Initial value]
1
Hold Request (HRQ) Input/Hold acknowledge (HAK) output permission
[bit 12] Reserved
Reserved bit. Please write "0".
188
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.4 External Memory Access
MB90330A Series
[bit 11] HMBS
Specify the bus size when accessing the external bus to the area 800000H to FFFFFFH in the external data
bus 16-bit mode.
0
Bus size access of 16 bits (Initial Value in the external vector mode 1)
1
Bus size access of 8 bits (Initial Value in the external vector mode 0.2)
[bit 10] WRE
Control the output of the external write signal (WRH/WRL) pins in the external data bus 16-bit mode, and
(WRL) pin in the external data bus 8-bit mode).
0
I/O Port (P53, P52) operation (Write signal output permission)
1
Write strobe signal (WRH/WRL or WRL only) output permission. [Initial value]
[bit 9] LMBS
Specify the bus size when accessing the external bus to the area 007100H to 7FFFFFH (however, the
extended I/O area 007900H to 007FFFH is disable) in the external data bus 16-bit mode.
0
16-bit bus size access [Initial value]
1
8-bit bus size access
Note:
In the external data bus 16-bit mode, when you permit the WRH/WRL) function by the WRE bit, be
sure to place P53/P52 in the input mode (set the bit 3 and 2 of DDR5 to "0").
In addition, the I/O function of the port is enabled even when the RDY and HRQ inputs by RYE and
HDE bits are permitted. Therefore, be sure to set to "0" (input mode) for the bit corresponding to the
port in DDR5.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
189
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
7.5
MB90330A Series
Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
Operation in each mode of mode setting is described in the timing chart.
■ Mode Type
Operations of the following items are described for each function.
• External memory access control signal
- External data bus 8-bit mode (non-multiplex mode)
- External data bus 8-bit mode (multiplex mode)
- External data bus 16-bit mode (non-multiplex mode)
- External data bus 16-bit mode (multiplex mode)
• Ready Function
- Non-multiplex mode
- Multiplex mode
• Holding function
- Non-multiplex mode
- Multiplex mode
190
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
7.5.1
External Memory Access Control Signal
The access to the external memory is performed at 3 cycles unless the ready function is
not used.
■ External Memory Access Control Signal
Figure 7.5-1 to Figure 7.5-4 show the timing charts of the external access in each mode. The 8-bit bus
width access in the external data bus 16-bit mode reads or writes the 8-bit width peripheral chip when you
connect to the external bus by mixing the 8-bit width peripheral chip and the 16-bit width peripheral chip.
Be sure to connect the 8-bit width peripheral chip to the lower 8-bit of data because the 8-bit bus width
access is executed by the lower 8-bit of the data bus. Whether performing the 16-bit bus width access or the
8-bit bus width access in the external data bus 16-bit mode is determined by the specification of the HMBS/
LMBS bit of EPCR. Furthermore, in the multiplex mode, any actual bus operation may not be performed
by executing only the address output and the assert output of ALE and not asserting RD/WRL/WRH.
Note:
Be sure not to execute the access to the peripheral chip only by using the ALE signal.
● External data bus 8-bit mode (non-multiplex mode)
Figure 7.5-1 Timing Chart of External Memory Access (External Data Bus 8-bit/non-multiplex Mode)
Read
Write
Read
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
(Port data)
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Read address
A15 to A08
Read address
Write address
Read address
Read address
Write address
Read address
A07 to A00
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
CM44-10129-6E
Write address
Read address
(Port data)
Read data
Write data
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
191
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
● External Data Bus 8-Bit Mode (External Data Bus 8-Bit/Multiplex Mode)
Figure 7.5-2 Timing Chart of External Memory Access (Multiple Mode)
Read
Write
Read
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
(Port data)
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Read address
A15 to A08
(Port data)
A07 to A00
(Port data)
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Read address
Write address
Read address
Write address
Read address
Write address
Read address
Read data
Read address
Write data
● External Data Bus 16-bit Mode (External Data Bus 16-bit/Non-Multiplex Mode)
Figure 7.5-3 Timing Chart of External Memory Access (External Data Bus 16-bit/non-multiplex Mode)
Even address word read
Odd address word write
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Read address
Write address
Read address
A15 to A08
Read address
Write address
Read address
A07 to A00
Read address
Write address
Read address
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Read data
192
Write data
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
■ External 16-bit Bus Mode (External Data Bus 16-bit/Multiplex Mode)
Figure 7.5-4 Timing Chart of External Memory Access (External Data Bus 16-bit/multiplex Mode)
Read
Write
Read
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Read address
A15 to A08
(Port data)
A07 to A00
(Port data)
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Write address
Read address
Read address
Write address
Read data
CM44-10129-6E
Read address
Write address
Read address
Read address
Write data
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
193
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
7.5.2
MB90330A Series
Ready Function
The setting of the P56/RDY pin or the automatic ready function selection register
(ARSR) enables the access to the low-speed memory and the peripheral circuits. When
the RYE bit in the bus control signal selection register (EPCR) is set to "1", the
condition is in the wait cycle while the period "L" level is being input to the P56/RDY pin
at the time of accessing to the external area, and then it is possible to extend the
access cycle.
■ Ready Function
The F2MC-16LX has two built-in auto-ready functions for the external memory. The auto-ready function
inserts the wait cycle of 1 to 3 cycles without the external circuit and extends the access cycle, when an
access to the lower address external area located between the addresses 007100H to 7FFFFFH (however, the
extend I/O area 007900H to 007FFFH is disable) is generated, and when an access to the upper address
external area located between the addresses 800000H to FFFFFFH is generated. The auto-ready function is
activated by the setting of the LMR1/LMR0 bit (lower address external area) in the ARSR and the HMR1/
HMR0 bit (upper address external area) in the ARSR.
In the auto-ready functions for the external memory or the external I/O, when the RYE bit in the EPCR is
set to "1", the wait cycle is maintained if the "L" level is input into the P56/RDY pin after the wait cycle
ends by the above auto-ready function.
The timing charts of the ready functions in the non-multiplex mode and the multiplex mode are illustrated
below. In both modes, the above chart does not set the ready function; the following chart sets this function.
Note:
When inputting from the RDY pin, note that the device may run away if the AC standard is not
satisfied.
194
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
● Non-multiplex mode
Figure 7.5-5 Timing Chart of Ready Function (Non-multiplex Mode)
Even address word read
Odd address word write
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Read address
Write address
A15 to A08
Read address
Write address
A07 to A00
Read address
Write address
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
P56/RDY
Read data
RDY pin fetching
Even address word read
Write data
Odd address word write
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Read address
Write address
A15 to A08
Read address
Write address
A07 to A00
Read address
Write address
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Write data
CM44-10129-6E
Cycle lengthened by auto ready
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
195
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
● Multiplex mode
Figure 7.5-6 Timing Chart of Ready Function (Multiplex Mode)
Even address word read
Odd address word write
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
Write address
Read address
A15 to A08
(Port data)
A07 to A00
(Port data)
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
Read address
Write address
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Read address
Write address
P56/RDY
RDY pin fetching
Read data
Even address word read
Write data
Odd address word write
P57/CLK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
A15 to A08
(Port data)
A07 to A00
(Port data)
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
Write address
Read address
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Write address
Read address
Write data
196
Write address
Read address
Cycle length end by auto ready
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
7.5.3
Holding Function
The operation of the hold function is described in the timing chart.
■ Operation of Holding Function
If the HDE bit in the EPCR is set to "1", the hold function of the external bus by both the P54/HRQ and the
P55/HAK pins are enabled. When the "H" level is input to the P54/HRQ pin, the pin enters in the hold state
when CPU's instruction ends (for the string instruction, when 1 element data procedure ends), and outputs
the "L" level from the P55/HAK and the following pin enters into the high-impedance state.
● Non-multiplex mode
• Address output:
A23 to A00
• Data I/O:
D15/AD15 to D00/AD00
• Bus control signal: P51/RD,P52/WRL,P53/WRH
● Multiplex mode
• Address output:
A23 to A16
• Data I/O:
D15/AD15 to D00/AD00
• Bus control signal: P51/RD,P52/WRL,P53/WRH
Thus, the device external circuit enables the use of the external bus. If the "L" level is input to the P54/
HRQ pin, the p55/HAK pin becomes the "H" level output and the external pin state is restored, and then the
CPU restarts the operation. In the state of STOP, the holding demand is not accepted.
■ Non-multiplex Mode
Figure 7.5-7 shows the timing chart of the hold function of the non-multiplex mode in the external data bus
16-bit mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
197
CHAPTER 7 MODE SETTING
7.5 Operation in Each Mode of Mode Setting
MB90330A Series
Figure 7.5-7 Timing Chart of Holding Function (Non-multiplex Mode)
Read cycle
Hold cycle
Write cycle
P57/CLK
P54/HRQ
P55/HAK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
(Address)
(Address)
A15 to A08
(Address)
(Address)
A07 to A00
(Address)
(Address)
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
Read data
Write data
■ Multiple Mode
Figure 7.5-8 shows the timing chart of the hold function of the multiplex mode in the external data bus 16bit mode.
Figure 7.5-8 Timing Chart of Holding Function (Multiplex Mode)
Read cycle
Hold cycle
Write cycle
P57/CLK
P54/HRQ
P55/HAK
P53/WRH
P52/WRL
P51/RD
P50/ALE
A23 to A16
(Address)
A15 to A08
(Port data)
A07 to A00
(Port data)
(Address)
D15 to D08/
AD15 to AD08
(Address)
D07 to D00/
AD07 to AD00
(Address)
Read data
Write data
Note:
When "H" level is inputted to the P54/HRQ pin, it is retained until P55 pin becomes "L" level.
198
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 8
I/O PORT
This chapter describes the configuration and functions
of the register used in the I/O port.
8.1 Functions of I/O Ports
8.2 I/O Port Register
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
199
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.1 Functions of I/O Ports
8.1
MB90330A Series
Functions of I/O Ports
The overview of functions of the I/O ports is shown.
■ Functions of I/O Ports
The I/O port outputs data from the CPU to the I/O pin and loads the signal input in the I/O pin in the CPU
by using the port data register (PDR). In addition, the port can randomly set the direction of the input/
output of the I/O pin in bit unit by the port direction register (DDR).
The MB90330A Series has 72 input/output pins and 22 open drain output pins.
P07 to P00, 17 to P10, P27 to P20, P37 to P30, P47 to P40, P57 to P50, P77 to P70, P87 to P80, P95 to P90,
PB6, and PB5 are I/O ports; P67 to P60, P96, and PA7 to PA0, PB4 to PB0 are open drain pins.
200
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2 I/O Port Register
MB90330A Series
8.2
I/O Port Register
The configuration and functions of the register used in the I/O port are described.
■ I/O Port Registers
There are the following registers in I/O port.
• Port data register (PDR0 to PDRB)
• Port direction register (DDR0 to DDRB)
• Input resistance register (RDR0,RDR1)
• Output terminal register (ODR4)
• Analog input enable register (ADER0,ADER1)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
201
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2 I/O Port Register
8.2.1
MB90330A Series
Port Data Register (PDR0 to PDRB)
The configuration and functions of the port data register (PDR0 to PDRB) are described.
■ Port Data Register (PDR0 to PDRB)
Figure 8.2-1 shows the list of the port data register (PDR0 to PDRB).
Figure 8.2-1 List of Port Data Register (PDR0 to PDRB)
PDR0
bit
Address : 000000H
PDR1
bit
Address : 000001H
7
P07
15
P17
7
P27
15
P37
7
P47
15
P57
7
P67
15
P77
7
P87
15
bit
PDR2
Address : 000002H
bit
PDR3
Address : 000003H
bit
PDR4
Address : 000004H
bit
PDR5
Address : 000005H
bit
PDR6
Address : 000006H
bit
PDR7
Address : 000007H
bit
PDR8
Address : 000008H
bit
PDR9
Address : 000009H
bit 7
PDRA
Address : 00000AH PA7
bit 7
PDRB
Address : 00000CH
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P06 P05 P04 P03 P02 P01 P00
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P56 P55 P54 P53 P52 P51 P50
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P66 P65 P64 P63 P62 P61 P60
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P76 P75 P74 P73 P72 P71 P70
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81 P80
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P96 P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
-XXXXXXXB
R/W *
XXXXXXXXB
R/W *
-XXXXXXXB
R/W *
R/W *
*: The R/W access to the input/output port operates slightly different from the R/W access to the memory.
Please note that the following operations are done.
• Input mode
- When reading: Read the level of the corresponding pin.
- When writing: Write into the latch for the input/output.
• Output mode
- When reading: Read the value of the data register latch.
- When writing: Output into the corresponding pin.
202
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2 I/O Port Register
MB90330A Series
8.2.2
Port Direction Register (DDR0 to DDRB)
The configuration and functions of the port direction register are described.
■ Port Direction Register (DDR0 to DDRB)
Figure 8.2-2 shows the list of the port direction register (DDR0 to DDRB).
Figure 8.2-2 List of Port Direction Register (DDR0 to DDRB)
6
D06
bit
14
DDR1
Address : 000011H
D16
bit
6
DDR2
Address : 000012H
D26
bit
14
DDR3
Address : 000013H
D36
bit
6
DDR4
Address : 000014H
D46
bit
14
DDR5
Address : 000015H
D56
6
bit
DDR6
Address : 000016H
D66
bit
14
DDR7
Address : 000017H
D76
6
bit
DDR8
Address : 000018H
D86
bit
14
DDR9
Address : 000019H
D96
6
bit 7
DDRA
Address : 00001AH DA7 DA6
bit 15
14
DDRB
Address : 00000DH
DB6
DDR0
bit
Address : 000010H
7
D07
15
D17
7
D27
15
D37
7
D47
15
D57
7
D67
15
D77
7
D87
15
5
D05
13
D15
5
D25
13
D35
5
D45
13
D55
5
D65
13
D75
5
D85
13
D95
5
DA5
13
DB5
4
D04
12
D14
4
D24
12
D34
4
D44
12
D54
4
D64
12
D74
4
D84
12
D94
4
DA4
12
DB4
3
D03
11
D13
3
D23
11
D33
3
D43
11
D53
3
D63
11
D73
3
D83
11
D93
3
DA3
11
DB3
2
D02
10
D12
2
D22
10
D32
2
D42
10
D52
2
D62
10
D72
2
D82
10
D92
2
DA2
10
DB2
1
D01
9
D11
1
D21
9
D31
1
D41
9
D51
1
D61
9
D71
1
D81
9
D91
1
DA1
9
DB1
0
D00
8
D10
0
D20
8
D30
0
D40
8
D50
0
D60
8
D70
0
D80
8
D90
0
DA0
8
DB0
Initial value
00000000B
Access
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
-0000000B
R/W
00000000B
R/W
-0000000B
R/W
R/W
● When each terminal functions as a port
When each terminal functions as a port, controls the corresponding each terminal as follows.
• 0: Input mode.
• 1: Output mode
Reset sets to "0".
Note:
When accessing the DDR0 to DDRB registers by using the instruction of the read modify write
system (instructions such as bit set) is made, the bit targeted by an instruction becomes the defined
value, while the content of the output register set with the other bit changes to the input value to the
pin. Therefore, be sure to write an expected value into PDR firstly, and then set DDR, and finally
change to the output when changing the input pin to the output pin is made.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
203
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2 I/O Port Register
8.2.3
MB90330A Series
Other Registers
The configuration and functions of the register other than the port data register (PDR0
to PDRB) and the port direction register (DDR0 to DDRB) are described.
■ Port 0, 1 Pull-up Resistance Register (RDR0, RDR1)
Figure 8.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the pull-up resistance register (RDR0, RDR1).
Figure 8.2-3 Bit Configuration of Pull-up Resistance Register (RDR0,RDR1)
RDR0
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address : 00001CH RD07 RD06 RD05 RD04 RD03 RD02 RD01 RD00
RDR1
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Initial value
00000000B
Access
00000000B
R/W
R/W
8
Address : 00001DH RD17 RD16 RD15 RD14 RD13 RD12 RD11 RD10
The pull-up resistance register (RDR0, RDR1) determines whether the pull-up resistor is enabled or not in
the input mode.
• 0: There is not a pull-up resistor none at input mode
• 1: There is a pull-up resistor at the input mode.
The RDR0 and RDR1 registers do not have any function in the output mode (no pull-up resistor).
The input/output register is decided by the setting of the direction register (DDR).
There is no pull-up resistor at the time of stop (SPL=1) (high impedance).
This function is disable for the external bus. Be sure not to write into the RDR0 and RDR1 registers.
■ Port 4 Output Terminal Register (ODR4)
Figure 8.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the output pin register (ODR4).
Figure 8.2-4 Bit Configuration of Output Terminal Register (ODR4)
ODR4
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Address : 00001BH OD47 OD46 OD45 OD44 OD43 OD42 OD41 OD40
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
The output terminal register (ODR4) executes open drain control in the output mode.
• 0: Entering in the standard output port in the output mode
• 1: Entering in the open drain output port in the output mode
The output terminal register (ODR4) does not have it function in the input mode (Output of Hi-Z).
The input/output mode is decided by the setting of the direction register (DDR).
This function is disable for the external bus. Do not write to the output terminal register (ODR4).
204
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2 I/O Port Register
MB90330A Series
■ Analog Input Enable Register (ADER0, ADER1)
Figure 8.2-5 shows the bit configuration of the analog input permission registers (ADER0, ADER1).
Figure 8.2-5 Bit Configuration of analog Input Enable Register (ADER0, ADER1)
ADER0
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address : 00001EH ADE07 ADE06 ADE05 ADE04 ADE03 ADE02 ADE01 ADE00
bit
Address : 00001FH
ADER1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Initial value
11111111B
Access
11111111B
R/W
R/W
8
ADE15 ADE14 ADE13 ADE12 ADE11 ADE10 ADE09 ADE08
The analog input enable registers (ADER0, ADER1) control each pin of port 7, 8 as follows;
• 0: Entering in the port I/O mode
• 1: Entering in the analog input mode. This bit becomes 0 after a reset.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
205
CHAPTER 8 I/O PORT
8.2 I/O Port Register
206
MB90330A Series
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9
TIME-BASE TIMER
This chapter describes the function and operation of the
time-base timer.
9.1 Overview of Time-base Timer
9.2 Configuration of Time-base Timer
9.3 Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
9.4 Interrupt of Time-base Timer
9.5 Operations of Time-base Timer
9.6 Precautions when Using Time-base Timer
9.7 Program Example of Time-base Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
207
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.1 Overview of Time-base Timer
9.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of Time-base Timer
The time-base timer has an interval timer function that enables a selection of four
interval times using 18-bit free-run counter (time-base counter) count-up with
synchronizing to the internal count clock (2 division of original oscillation).
Furthermore, the function of timer output of oscillation stabilization wait time or
function supplying operation clocks for watchdog timer are provided.
■ Interval Timer Function
The interval timer function generates interrupt requests at regular intervals.
• An overflow of the bit for the interval timer in the time-base counter generates an interrupt request.
• You can select one of four bits (interval time) for the interval timer.
Table 9.1-1 shows the interval time of the time-base timer.
Table 9.1-1 Interval Time of Time-base Timer
Internal count clock cycle
Time of interval
212/HCLK (Approx. 0.68 ms)
2/HCLK(0.33 μs)
214/HCLK (Approx. 2.7 ms)
216/HCLK (Approx. 10.9 ms)
219/HCLK (Approx. 87.4 ms)
HCLK: Oscillation clock
The value in parentheses is applicable when the oscillation clock operates at 6 MHz.
208
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.1 Overview of Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Function of Clock Supply
The clock supply function supplies the operating clock to the timer for oscillation stabilization wait time
and some peripheral functions. Table 9.1-2 shows the clock cycle supplied from the time-base timer to each
peripheral.
Table 9.1-2 Clock Cycles Supplied from Time-base Timer
Where to Supply Clock
Clock Cycle
213/HCLK (Approx. 1.4 ms)
Oscillation Stabilization
Wait Time
Remark
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time for ceramic oscillator
215/HCLK (Approx. 5.5 ms)
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time for crystal oscillator
217/HCLK (Approx. 21.8 ms)
212/HCLK (Approx. 0.68 ms)
214/HCLK (Approx. 2.7 ms)
Watchdog timer
Watchdog timer count up clock
216/HCLK (Approx. 10.9 ms)
219/HCLK (Approx. 87.4 ms)
HCLK: Oscillation clock
The value in parentheses is applicable when the oscillation clock operates at 6 MHz.
Reference:
Because oscillation cycles is unstabled after oscillation starts, the oscillation stabilization wait time is
listed for reference.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
209
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.2 Configuration of Time-base Timer
9.2
MB90330A Series
Configuration of Time-base Timer
The time-base timer consists of the following four blocks.
• Time-base timer counter
• Counter clear circuit
• Interval timer selector
• Time-base timer control register (TBTC)
■ Block Diagram of Time-base Timer
Figure 9.2-1 shows the block diagram of the time-base timer.
Figure 9.2-1 Block Diagram of Time-base Timer
to Watchdog
timer
to PPG timer
Time-base timer counter
2 division
of HCLK
× 28 × 29 × 210 × 211 × 212 × 213 × 214 × 215 × 216 × 217 × 218
× 2 1 × 2 2 × 23
OF
OF
Power-on reset
Stop mode start
CKSCR : MCS = 1
CKSCR : SCS = 0
Counter
clear
circuit
0 *1
1 *2
OF
OF
to Oscillation
stabilization wait
time selector
in Clock control
unit
Interval timer
selector
TBOF
set
TBOF clear
Time-base timer control register(TBTC) Reserved
TBIE TBOF TBR
TBC1 TBC0
Time-base timer interrupt signal
OF
HCLK
*1
*2
Undefined
Overflow
Oscillation clock
Switch Machine clock to PLL clock from Main clock or Sub clock
Switch Machine clock to PLL clock from Sub clock
● Time-base timer counter
This is an 18-bit up-counter whose count clock is two-division clock of oscillation clock (HCLK).
210
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.2 Configuration of Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
● Counter clear circuit
This circuit clears the counter by writing "0" to time-base timer initialization bit (TBR) of time-base timer
control register (TBTC), power-on reset, transition to the stop mode, switching to PLL clock mode from the
main clock mode or sub clock, or switching to the main clock mode from sub clock.
● Interval timer selector
This selects the output of the time-base timer counter from one of four types. The overflow of selected bit
will be the interrupt cause.
● Time-base timer control register (TBTC)
Interval time selection, counter clearance, and interrupt request control and status check are executed.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
211
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.3 Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
9.3
MB90330A Series
Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
The time-base timer control register (TBTC) executes interval time selection, time-base
timer counter clearance, and interrupt control and status check.
■ Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
Figure 9.3-1 Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
Address
0000A9H
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
bit8 bit7
bit9
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
W
0
Initial value
1--00100B
R/W
TBC1 TBC0
0
0
bit0
(WDTC)
TBIE TBOF TBR TBC1 TBC0
Reserved
0
0
Interval time selection bit
212/HCLK (Approx. 0.68 ms)
214/HCLK (Approx. 2.7 ms)
216/HCLK (Approx. 10.9 ms)
0
219/HCLK (Approx. 87.4 ms)
1
1
The value in parentheses is applicable
when the oscillation clock operates at 6 MHz.
Time-base timer initialization bit
TBR
Read
Write
Clear Time-base timer
counter, TBOF bit.
0
1
Always "1" is read.
No change,
no others are affected
Interrupt request flag bit
TBOF
Read
Write
0
No overflow of
specification bit
Clear this bit.
1
Overflow of
specification bit
No change,
no others are affected
TBIE
Interrupt request enable bit
0
Interrupt request output disabled
1
Interrupt request output enables
Reseved
Reseved bit
Always write this bit to "1".
R/W
W
HCLK
212
: Readable/Writable
: Write only
: Undefined
: Oscillation clock
: Initial value
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.3 Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
MB90330A Series
Table 9.3-1 Time-base Timer Control Register (TBTC)
Bit name
Functions
bit 15
Reserved:
Reserved bit
Note:
Be sure to write "1".
bit 14,
bit 13
Unused bits
• The value at the time of reading is irregular.
• No effect on writing.
bit 12
TBIE:
Interrupt request
enable bit
• This bit permits or prohibits an interrupt request output to the CPU.
• If the TBIE bit and interrupt request flag bit (TBOF) is set to "1", an interrupt request is
output.
bit 11
TBOF:
Interrupt request
flag bit
• An overflow of time-base timer counter specification bit sets the status to "1".
• If the TBOF bit and interrupt request permission bit (TBIE) is set to "1", an interrupt request
is output.
Setting to "0" executes clearance during writing and no changes are made at "1", making no
influences on others.
Note:
• When clearing the TBOF bit, set to the condition that prohibits time-base timer interrupt
with the interrupt request permission bit (TBIE) or by specifying interrupt level mask
register (ILM) in processor status (PS).
• The status is cleared to "0" by "0" writing, transition to the stop mode, transition from the
sub clock mode to main clock mode, transition from the main clock mode to the PLL clock
mode, "0" writing to time-base timer initialization bit (TBR), or resetting.
bit 10
TBR:
Time-base timer
initialization bit
• This bit clears the time-base timer counter.
• Writing "0" clears the counter, immediately after that, clears the TBOF bit. No changes are
made at "1", making no influences on others.
Reference:
Always read value is "1".
bit 9,
bit 8
TBC1, TBC0:
Interval time
select bits
• These bits specify a cycle for the interval timer.
• The bit for the interval timer of time-base timer counter is specified.
• One of four interval time can be selected.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
213
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.4 Interrupt of Time-base Timer
9.4
MB90330A Series
Interrupt of Time-base Timer
The time-base timer can generate an interrupt request by the overflow of the specified
bit of the time-base timer counter (interval timer function).
■ Interrupt of Time-base Timer
After the time-base counter undergoes count-up with the internal count clock and the bit for the selected
interval timer overflows, the interrupt request flag bit (TBOF) of time-base timer control register (TBTC) is
set to "1". In this case, an interrupt request to CPU is generated if interrupt request is permitted by setting
the interrupt request permission bit (TBIE) is set to "1". Clear the interrupt request by writing "0" to the
TBOF bit in the interrupt processing routine. The TBOF bit is set when the specified bit overflows
regardless of the value of interrupt request permission bit (TBIE).
Note:
When clearing the interrupt request flag bit (TBOF) in the time-base timer control register (TBTC),
perform while the time-base timer interrupt is prohibited by the setting of the interrupt level mask
register (IML) of the interrupt request permission bit (TBIE) or the processor status (PS).
References:
•
When the TBOF bit is "1", an interrupt request is immediately generated upon the transition of the
TBIE bit from prohibition to permission ("0" to "1").
•
EI2OS and μDMAC cannot be used.
■ Interrupt of Time-base Timer and EI2OS, μDMAC
Table 9.4-1 shows the time-base timer interrupt and EI2OS, μDMAC.
Table 9.4-1 Interrupt of Time-base Timer and EI2OS, μDMAC
Interrupt
number
Interrupt level setting register
Address in Vector Table
Register Name
Address
Low
High
Bank
ICR14
0000BEH
FFFF5CH
FFFF5DH
FFFF5EH
#40
EI2OS
μDMAC
: Not available
Note:
ICR14 can be used for three interrupts, time-base timer interrupt, watch timer interrupt, and UART
reception end ch.0/1 interrupt, but the interrupt level is the same.
214
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.5 Operations of Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
9.5
Operations of Time-base Timer
The time-base timer has functions of interval timer and clock supply to peripheral
functions.
■ Operation of Interval Timer Function (Time-base Timer)
Interval timer function generates interrupt requests at regular intervals. In order to function as an interval
timer, setup in Figure 9.5-1 is needed.
Figure 9.5-1 Setting of Time-base Timer
bit15
Address
0000A9H
TBTC
Reserved
1
bit14
bit13
bit12
TBIE
bit11
bit10
TBOF TBR
0
bit9
bit8
TBC1 TBC0
bit7
bit0
(WDTC)
0
: Used bit
: Unused bit
0 : Set to "0".
1 : Set to "1".
• The time-base timer counter continues count-up synchronizing to the internal count clock (two division
of oscillation clock) as long as the clock oscillate.
• Count-up from "0" is made when the counter is cleared; the interrupt request flag bit (TBOF) is set to
"1" when the bit for the interval timer overflows. In this case, interrupts are generated at selected
intervals based on the cleared if the interrupt request output is permitted (TBIE = 1).
• The interval time may be longer than the set period by the clearance operation of the time-base timer.
■ Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time Function
The time-base timer can also be used for the oscillation clock or timer for PLL clock oscillation
stabilization wait time. The oscillation stabilization wait time is the duration elapsed by counting up from
"0" (count clear) to the moment at which the bit for oscillation stabilization wait time overflows. When the
mode recovers from the time-base timer mode to the PLL clock mode or main clock mode, the oscillation
stabilization wait time is the duration from the middle of counting because the time-base timer counter has
not cleared. Table 9.5-1 shows the clearance operation of the time-base timer counter and oscillation
stabilization wait time.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
215
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.5 Operations of Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
Table 9.5-1 Time-base Timer Counter Clearance Operation and Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
Operation
Counter
Clear
TBOF
Writing "0" to time-base timer
initialization bit (TBR) of time-base
timer control register (TBTC)
❍
❍
Power-on reset
❍
❍
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
❍
Watchdog reset
Release of main stop mode
❍
❍
Release of PLL stop mode
❍
❍
Release of Sub-stop mode
Main clock oscillation stabilization wait time
Sub clock oscillation stabilization wait time
Transition from main clock mode to
PLL clock mode (MCS=1 → 0)
❍
❍
PLL clock oscillation stabilization wait time
Transition from sub clock mode to
main clock mode (MCS=1 → 1)
❍
❍
Main clock oscillation stabilization wait time
Release of time-base timer mode
Release of sleep mode
❍: Yes
: None
■ Function of Clock Supply
The time-base timer supplies clock to the watchdog timer. The clearance of time-base counter effects the
operation of watchdog timer.
216
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.6 Precautions when Using Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
9.6
Precautions when Using Time-base Timer
Cautions about influences on peripheral functions due to interrupt request and timebase timer clearances.
■ Precautions when Using Time-base Timer
● Clearing Interrupt request
When clearing the interrupt request flag bit (TBOF) in the time-base timer control register (TBTC),
perform while the time-base timer interrupt is masked by the setting of the interrupt level mask register
(IML) of the interrupt request permission bit (TBIE) or the processor status (PS).
● Effect from time-base timer clear
By clearing the time-base timer counter, the following operations are affected.
• When using the interval timer function (interval interrupt) in the time-base timer
• When using the watchdog timer
● Using time-base timer as oscillation stabilization wait time
After power on, since the oscillation clock halts in the main stop mode, oscillation stabilization wait time of
the oscillation clock will be needed using the operation clock supplied from the time-base timer after the
oscillator starts operating. Selection of suitable oscillation stabilization wait time is necessary depending on
the types of resonators connected to the high-speed oscillation pin. For details, see Section "5.5 Oscillation
Stabilization Wait Time".
● Notes on peripheral functions the time-base timer supplies to the clock
The mode that stops the main clock clears the counter, and then the time-base timer stops operation. The
clock supplied from the time-base timer may shorten the "H" level or lengthen the "L" level for up to 1/2
cycle because the clock is supplied from the initial state when the counter of the time-base timer is cleared.
The clock for the watchdog timer is also supplied from the initial status, however, the watchdog timer
operates in the normal cycles because the counter of the watchdog timer is cleared at the same time.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
217
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.6 Precautions when Using Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Operations of Time-base Timer
Operations in the following situations are shown in Figure 9.6-1.
• At a power-on reset occurs.
• At a transition to sleep mode during the operation of interval timer function
• At a transition to stop mode.
• At a counter clear request occurs.
The transition to the stop mode clears the time-base timer, terminating operations. Upon the recovery from
the stop mode, oscillation stabilization wait time is counted with the time-base timer.
Figure 9.6-1 Operations of Time-base Timer
Counter value
3FFFFH
Clear by transition
to the stop mode
Oscillation
stabilization
wait overflow
00000H
CPU operation
start
Power-on reset
(Option)
Interval cycle
(TBTC : TBC1, TBC0=11B)
Counter clear
(TBTC : TBR=0)
Clear by interrupt routine
TBOF bit
TBIE bit
Sleep
SLP bit
(LPMCR register)
Interval interrupt sleep cancellation
Stop
STP bit
(LPMCR register)
Stop cancellation by External interrupt
When setting "11B" to interval time selection bit (TBTC: TBC1, TBC0) of time-base
timer control register (219/HCLK)
: Oscillation stabilization wait time
HCLK : Oscillation clock
218
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.7 Program Example of Time-base Timer
MB90330A Series
9.7
Program Example of Time-base Timer
Programming examples for the time-base timer are shown below.
■ Program Example of Time-base Timer
● Processing specification
Interval interruptions of 212/HCLK (oscillation clock) are repeatedly generated. In this case, the interval
time is about 0.68 ms (at 6-MHz operation).
● Coding example
ICR14
EQU
0000BEH
; Interrupt control register for time-base timer
TBTC
EQU
0000A9H
; Time-base timer control register
TBOF
EQU
TBTC:3
; Interrupt request flag bit
;----------Main Program---------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
;
:
; Initialize such as a stack pointer (SP)
AND
CCR, #0BFH
; Disables the interrupt
MOV
I:ICR14, #00H
; Interrupt level 0 (highest)
MOV
I:TBTC, #10010000B
; Upper 3 bits fixed
; Interrupt enabled, TBOF Clear
; Counter Clear
; Interval Time Selection 212/HCLK selection
LOOP:
MOV
ILM, #07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
OR
CCR, #40H
; Interruption permission
MOV
A,#00H
; infinite loop
MOV
A,#01H
BRA
LOOP
;----------Interrupt Program---------------------------------------------------WARI:
CLR bit BOF
;
:
;
User processing
;
:
RETI
CODE
; The interrupt request flag is clear
; Returns from interrupt
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings---------------------------------------------------------VECT
CM44-10129-6E
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
219
CHAPTER 9 TIME-BASE TIMER
9.7 Program Example of Time-base Timer
VECT
ORG
0FF6CH
DSL
WARI
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; The interruption vector is set
; Reset vector setting
; Single-chip mode
ENDS
END
220
MB90330A Series
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 10
WATCHDOG TIMER
This chapter describes the function and operation of the
watchdog timer.
10.1 Overview of Watchdog Timer
10.2 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
10.3 Configuration of Watchdog Timer
10.4 Operations of Watchdog Timer
10.5 Precautions when Using Watchdog Timer
10.6 Program Examples of Watchdog Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
221
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.1 Overview of Watchdog Timer
10.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is a 2-bit counter operating with an output of the time-base timer or
clock timer as the count clock and resets the CPU when the counter is not cleared for a
preset period of time.
■ Functions of Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is a counter for preventing programs from hanging up. The timer must be cleared at
specified intervals after being activated. If the watchdog timer is not cleared within a certain time due to an
infinite loop of the program, etc., a watchdog reset is generated to the CPU. The interval time of the
watchdog timer can be set by the watchdog timer control register (WDTC), as shown in Table 10.1-1.
When the watchdog timer is not cleared, a watchdog reset occurs following the time between the minimum
time interval and the maximum time interval. The counter must be cleared within the time of the minimum
time interval.
Table 10.1-1 Interval Time of Watchdog Timer
WT1
WT0
WDCS &
SCM
Interval Time
Clock cycle number
Min. *
Max. *
0
0
1
Approx. 2.39 ms
Approx. 3.07 ms
(214 ± 211)/HCLK
0
1
1
Approx. 9.56 ms
Approx. 12.29 ms
(216 ± 213)/HCLK
1
0
1
Approx. 38.23 ms
Approx. 49.15 ms
(218 ± 215)/HCLK
1
1
1
Approx. 305.83 ms
Approx. 393.22 ms
(221 ± 218)/HCLK
0
0
0
Approx. 0.448 s
Approx. 0.576 s
(212 ± 29)/SCLK
0
1
0
Approx. 3.584 s
Approx. 4.608 s
(215 ± 212)/SCLK
1
0
0
Approx. 7.168 s
Approx. 9.216 s
(216 ± 213)/SCLK
1
1
0
Approx. 14.336 s
Approx. 18.432 s
(217 ± 214)/SCLK
*: Value for when operating at oscillator clock (HCLK) of 6 MHz, sub clock (SCLK) of 32 kHz divided by 4 (= 8 kHz).
The maximum and minimum watchdog timer interval time and the number of oscillation clock cycles are determined by
the timing of clear operation. The interval time will be 3.5 to 4.5 times of the count clock (supplied clock of time-base
timer) cycle. For the watchdog timer interval time, see Section "10.4 Operations of Watchdog Timer".
Note:
The watchdog counter is a 2-bit counter that counts carry-up signals from the time-base timer.
Therefore, when the time-base timer is cleared, the time period until the occurrence of a watchdog
timer reset may be longer than the preset period of time.
222
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.1 Overview of Watchdog Timer
Reference:
When the watchdog timer is activated, it is initialized and set to the stopped state by a reset upon
power-on or by a reset by the watchdog. Also, the watchdog counter is cleared by writing to the reset
by the external pin, the software reset, and the watchdog control bit (WTE) of the watchdog timer
control register and by changing to sleep, stop, and watch mode, but the watchdog timer is still
activated.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
223
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.2 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
10.2
MB90330A Series
Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
The watchdog timer control register (WDTC) displays the activation, clearance, and
reset factor of the watchdog timer.
■ Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
Figure 10.2-1 shows the watchdog timer control register (WDTC). Table 10.2-1 describes the function of
each bit of the WDTC register.
Figure 10.2-1 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
Address
bit15
bit7
bit8
(TBTC)
0000A8H
bit6
PONR
R
WT1 WT0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
bit5
bit3
bit4
bit2
WRST ERST SRST WTE
R
R
R
W
bit1
bit0
Initial value
WT1 WT0
X-XXX111B
W
W
Interval time select bit (HCLK: 6MHz, SCLK: operating at 32 kHz)
Interval time
Number of oscillation
WDCS & SCM
clock cycles
Minimum
Maximum
Approx. 2.39ms
Approx. 3.07ms
1
(214 ± 211)/HCLK cycles
Approx. 9.56ms
Approx. 12.29ms
1
(216 ± 213)/HCLK cycles
1
Approx. 38.23ms
Approx. 49.15ms
(218 ± 215)/HCLK cycles
1
Approx. 305.83ms Approx. 393.22ms
(221 ± 218)/HCLK cycles
Approx. 0.448s
Approx. 0.576s
0
(212 ± 29)/SCLK cycles
Approx. 3.584s
(215 ± 212)/SCLK cycles
Approx. 4.608s
0
Approx. 7.168s
Approx. 9.216s
0
(216 ± 213)/SCLK cycles
0
Approx. 14.336s
(217 ± 214)/SCLK cycles
Approx. 18.432s
HCLK: Oscillation clock
SCLK: Sub clock
Watchdog control bit
Starts the watchdog timer
(at first write event after reset)
Clears the watchdog timer
(at second write event after reset)
No operation
WTE
0
1
Reset cause bits
PONR WRST
W
R
X
*
ERST
SRST
Reset cause
1
X
X
X
Power on
Read only
*
1
*
*
Watchdog timer
Write only
*
*
1
*
External pin (RST ="L" input)
*
*
*
1
RST bit (software reset)
Undefined
Not used
The previous state is held.
Default value
The interval time will be 3.5 to 4.5 times of the count clock (output value from the time-base timer) cycle.
For details, see Section "10.4 Operations of Watchdog Timer".
224
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.2 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
MB90330A Series
Table 10.2-1 Function of Each Bit of Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTC)
Bit name
Functions
bit 7,
bit 5
to
bit 3
PONR
WRST
ERST
SRST
Reset factor bit
bit 6
Reserved
Reserved bit
bit 2
WTE
bit 1,
bit 0
WT1
WT0
CM44-10129-6E
• Read-only bits that indicate reset factors. When a reset factor occurs, the
relevant bit is set to "1".
• The PONR, WRST, ERST and SRST bits are all cleared to "0" after the
WDTC register is read.
• The contents of the bits other than the PONR bit are not assured at power-on.
Therefore, when the PONR bit is "1", ignore the contents of the bits other
than the PONR bit.
• The reading value is irregular.
• Writing does not have the influence in the operation.
Watchdog
control bit
• Writing "0", activates the watchdog timer (at the first write after reset) or
clears the 2-bit counter (at the second write after reset).
• There is no influence in the operation in writing "1".
Interval time
select bit
• This is a bit to select the interval time of the watchdog timer.
• The interval timer when the sub clock mode is selected as the clock mode (the
sub clock display bit (SCM) of clock select register (CKSCR) sets to "0") or
when the watch timer is used as the clock source of watchdog timer
(watchdog timer clock source select bit (WDCS) sets to "0") is different from
when the main clock mode or PLL clock mode is selected as the clock mode
and the WDCS bit of the WTC is set to "1" as shown in Figure 10.2-1
according to the setting of the watch timer control register (WTC).
• The data at the activation of the watchdog timer is valid. Data written after
the activation of the watchdog timer is ignored.
• The WT1 and WT0 bit are only for writing.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
225
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.3 Configuration of Watchdog Timer
10.3
MB90330A Series
Configuration of Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer consists of following five blocks.
• Count clock selector
• Watchdog counter (two bits counter)
• Watchdog reset generator circuit
• Counter clear control circuit
• Watchdog timer control register (WDTC)
■ Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
Figure 10.3-1 shows a watchdog timer block diagram.
Figure 10.3-1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
Watchdog timer control register (WDTC)
PONR
WRST ERST SRST WTE
Reset Generation
Watch mode start Watchdog timer
Time-base timer mode start
Sleep mode start
Hold state start
Counter
μDMAC state*
clear control
circuit
Stop mode start
WT1
WT0
WDCS bit of
Watch timer control register (WTC)
SCM bit of
Clock selection register (CKSCR)
2
CLR and
Activation
CLR
OverWatchdog flow Watchdog reset
generation
counter
circuit
Counter
clock
selector
to Internal reset
generation circuit
CLR
4
4
Clear
(Time-base timer counter)
2 divided of HCLK
21
22
28
29
210 211 212 213 214
215 216 217
218
HCLK
21
22
28
29
210 211 212 213 214
215 216 217
218
HCLK: Oscillation clock
SCLK: Sub clock
*:
Hold state means a state at the HRQ (Hold Request) input in the external bus operation mode
and at the tool hold input (for MB90V330A only).
● Count clock selector
Circuit that selects the count clock of the watchdog timer from four types of time-base timer output and
four types of watch timer output. This determines the watchdog reset generation time.
● Watchdog counter (two bits counter)
2-bit up-counter that uses time-base timer output as the count clock.
● Watchdog reset generator circuit
Generates a reset signal by an overflow of the watchdog counter.
226
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.3 Configuration of Watchdog Timer
MB90330A Series
● Counter clear control circuit
Clears the watchdog counter and controls operation/stop of the counter.
Table 10.3-1 Watchdog Timer Clearing Conditions
Operation
mode
Reset
WDTC
register
WTE=0
Stop
mode
Sleep
mode
Time-base
timer mode
Watch
mode
Hold
μDMAC
Clear
In transition
In writing
In transition
In transition
In transition
In transition
In transition
In starting
Operating
(Starts
counting
after
clearing)
Operating
(Starts
counting
after
clearing)
Operating
(Starts
counting
after
clearing)
Stopped
(Keeps
cleared)
Stopped
(Keeps
cleared)
Watchdog timer
state in modes
Disabled
-
Stopped
(Keeps
cleared)
Watchdog reset in
modes
Not occur
-
Not occur
Occur
Occur
Occur
Not occur
Not occur
Operating
Operating
(Restarts
counting
after
clearing)
Operating
(Continues
counting)
Operating
(Continues
counting)
Operating
(Continues
counting)
Operating
(Restarts
counting
after
clearing)
Operating
(Restarts
counting
after
clearing)
Watchdog timer
state after
canceling and
returning modes
Disabled
● Watchdog timer control register (WDTC)
Activates/clears the watchdog timer and holds the reset occurrence factor.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
227
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.4 Operations of Watchdog Timer
10.4
MB90330A Series
Operations of Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer generates a watchdog reset upon an overflow of the watchdog
counter.
■ Operations of Watchdog Timer
Figure 10.4-1 shows the setting required to operate the watchdog timer.
Figure 10.4-1 Setting of Watchdog Timer
bit15
Address
0000A8H
WDTC
bit8 bit7
(TBTC)
PONR
bit6 bit5
bit4
bit3
WRST ERST SRST
bit2 bit1
bit0
WT1
WT0
WTE
0
0
Used bit
Unused bit
Set to "0".
● Activating watchdog timer
• The watchdog timer is activated at the first write of "0" to the watchdog control bit (WTE) of the
watchdog timer control register (WDTC) after reset. In this case, specify the interval time at the same
time by the interval time selection bits (WT1, WT) of the WDTC register.
• Once the watchdog time is activated, it cannot stop until power-on or a watchdog reset occurs.
● Clearing watchdog timer
• The 2-bit counter of the watchdog timer is cleared by the second write of "0" to the WTE bit. If the
counter is not cleared within the interval time, the counter overflows and the watchdog is reset.
• The watchdog counter is cleared when a reset operation occurs or when a change to sleep mode, stop
mode or time-base timer mode is made.
• When a change to time-base timer mode or watch mode is made, the watchdog counter is once cleared.
However, be careful that the watchdog counter does not stop after being cleared.
• When watch mode is used (sub clock), do not use the watchdog timer.
● Interval Time of Watchdog Timer
Figure 10.4-2 shows the relationship between watchdog timer clear timing and interval time. The interval
time varies depending on the timing of clearing the watchdog timer and takes 3.5 to 4.5 times of the count
clock cycle.
● Checking reset factors
By checking the reset factor bit (PONR, WRST, ERST, SRST) of the WDTC register after reset, the factor
of the reset can be identified.
228
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.4 Operations of Watchdog Timer
MB90330A Series
Figure 10.4-2 Relationship between Clear Timing and Interval Time of Watchdog Timer
[Block diagram of Watchdog timer]
2-bit counter
Clock selector
a
2 divided
circuit
b
2 divided
circuit
c
Reset circuit
d Reset
signal
Count enable and clear
Count enable
output circuit
WTE bit
[Minimum interval time] When clear WTE bit immediately before rising of count clock
Count start
Counter clear
Count clock a
2 divided value b
2 divided value c
Count enable
Reset signal d
7
(Count clock cycle/2)
WTE bit clear
Watchdog reset generation
[Maximum interval time] When clear WTE bit immediately after rising of count clock
Counter clear
Count start
Count clock a
2 divided value b
2 divided value c
Count enable
Reset signal d
WTE bit clear
CM44-10129-6E
7
(Count clock cycle/2)
Watchdog reset generation
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
229
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.5 Precautions when Using Watchdog Timer
10.5
MB90330A Series
Precautions when Using Watchdog Timer
This section explains precautions when using watchdog timer.
■ Precautions when Using Watchdog Timer
● Stopping watchdog timer
Once the watchdog time is activated, it cannot stop until power-on or a watchdog-external reset occurs.
● Interval Time
Because the interval time uses carry-up signals from the time-base timer, as the count clock, clearing the
time-base timer may make the interval time of the watch dog timer longer than the preset period of time.
● Selecting Interval Time
The interval time can be set when activating the watchdog timer. Data written after the activation of the
watchdog timer is ignored.
● Precautions when creating program
When creating a program that clears the watchdog timer repeatedly in the main loop, the main loop
processing time including the interrupt processing must not exceed the minimum interval time of the
watchdog timer.
230
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.6 Program Examples of Watchdog Timer
MB90330A Series
10.6
Program Examples of Watchdog Timer
Program example of watchdog timer is given below.
■ Program Examples of Watchdog Timer
● Processing specification
• The watchdog timer is cleared each time in loop of the main program.
• The processing of the main loop must go round within the minimum interval time.
● Coding example
WDTC
EQU
0000A8H
; Watchdog timer control register
WTE
EQU
WDTC:2
; Watchdog timer control bit
;----------Main program--------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
;
:
; Initialize such as a stack pointer (SP).
WDG_START:
MOV
WDTC, #00000011B
; Activating watchdog timer
; 221 ± 218 cycles in time of the interval are selected.
;----------Main loop------------------------------------------------------MAIN:
CLRB
;
:
;
User processing
;
:
JMP
I:WTE
; Clearing watchdog timer
It is regularly clearness of two bits.
MAIN
; Interval Time of Watchdog Timer
; Loop in the shortest possible time
CODE
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings--------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; Single-chip mode setting
ENDS
END
CM44-10129-6E
; Reset vector setting
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
231
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.6 Program Examples of Watchdog Timer
232
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 11
WATCH TIMER
This chapter describes a overview of the watch timer,
functions and configurations of its registers, and its
operation.
11.1 Overview of Watch Timer
11.2 Configuration of Watch Timer
11.3 Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
11.4 Operation of Watch Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
233
CHAPTER 11 WATCH TIMER
11.1 Overview of Watch Timer
11.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of Watch Timer
The watch timer is a 15-bit timer using the sub clock. It can generate interval interrupts.
The watch timer can also be used as the clock source of the watchdog timer by setting
so.
■ Functions of Watch Timer
The watch timer consists of a 15-bit timer and a circuit that controls interval interrupt.
The watch timer uses the sub clock, regardless of the values of the PLL clock selection bit (MCS) and sub
clock selection bit (SCS) of the clock selection register (CKSCR).
The interval time of the watch timer are shown in Table 11.1-1.
Table 11.1-1 Interval Times of Watch Timer
WTC2
WTC1
WTC0
Interval Time*
0
0
0
31.25 ms
0
0
1
62.5 ms
0
1
0
125 ms
0
1
1
250 ms
1
0
0
500 ms
1
0
1
1.000 s
1
1
0
2.000 s
1
1
1
Setting disabled
*: Four dividing of sub clock 32 kHz (=8 kHz)
234
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 11 WATCH TIMER
11.2 Configuration of Watch Timer
MB90330A Series
11.2
Configuration of Watch Timer
The watch timer is composed of the following four blocks.
• Interval selector
• Watch Counter
• Watch timer interruption generation circuit
• Watch timer control register (WTC)
■ Block Diagram of Watch Timer
Figure 11.2-1 shows the watch timer block diagram.
Figure 11.2-1 Block Diagram of Watch Timer
Watch timer control register (WTC)
WDCS SCE
WTIE WTOF WTR WTC2 WTC1 WTC0
Clear
Watch Counter
Sub clock
210
213
214
215
28
29
210
211
212
213
214
Interval selector
Interrupt
generation
circuit
Watch timer
interrupt
to Watchdog timer
● Clock Counter
A 15-bit up-counter using the sub clock as the clock source.
● Interval selector
A selector that selects one from seven types of interval of the watch timer interrupt.
● Interrupt generation circuit
Generates an interval interrupt of the watch timer.
● Watch timer control register (WTC)
It specifies the operation of the watch timer, the control of the watch timer interrupt, and the clock source
of the watchdog timer.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
235
CHAPTER 11 WATCH TIMER
11.3 Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
11.3
MB90330A Series
Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
Watch timer control register (WTC) controls the operation of watch timer. It also
controls the interval interrupt time.
■ Configuration of Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
Figure 11.3-1 shows the watch timer control register (WTC) configuration. Table 11.3-1 summarizes the
functions of each bit functions of watch timer control register (WTC).
Figure 11.3-1 Configuration of Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
Address
bit15
0000AAH
bit8
bit7
bit6
WDCS SCE
R/W
R
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
WTIE WTOF WTR WTC2 WTC1 WTC0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
WTC2 WTC1 WTC0
R/W
10001000B
R/W
0
0
0
31.5 ms
0
0
1
62.5 ms
0
1
0
125 ms
0
1
1
1
0
0
250 ms
500 ms
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1000 s
2000 s
Setting disabled
Watch counter clear bit
0
Clear all bits of counter in Watch timer to "0"
1
No effect
WTOF
Watch timer interrupt request flag bit
0
No interrupt request generation
1
Interrupt request generation
WTIE
Watch timer interval interrupt enable bit
0
Interrupt disabled
1
Interrupt enabled
SCE
0
1
WDCS
R : Write only
Initial value
Watch timer interval selection bit
Interval time
(Sub clock: 32kHz)
WTR
R/W : Readable/Writable
bit0
Sub clock oscillation stabilization wait time end bit
Oscillation stabilization wait period
Oscillation stabilization wait period termination
Watchdog timer clock source selection bit
0
Select clock of Watch timer
1
Select clock of Time-base timer
: Initial value
236
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 11 WATCH TIMER
11.3 Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
Table 11.3-1 Each Bit Functions of Watch Timer Control Register (WTC)
Bit name
Functions
bit 7
WDCS:
Watchdog timer clock
source selection bit
• This bit selects the clock source of the watchdog timer.
• Watch timer clock is selected if this bit is "0", and otherwise time-base timer clock is
selected if this bit is "1".
• Initialized to "1" by a reset.
bit 6
SCE:
Sub clock oscillation
stabilization wait time
end bit
• It is a bit that indicates the oscillation stabilization wait time for the sub clock ends.
• When this bit is "0", it indicates that the oscillation stabilization wait time is elapsing.
• The oscillation stabilization wait time for the sub clock is fixed to 214 sub clock
cycles.
• Initialized to "0" upon power-on reset and upon stop.
bit 5
WTIE:
Watch timer interval
interrupt enable bit
• This bit enables an interval interrupt by the watch timer.
• Interrupt is enabled if this bit is "1", and otherwise it is disabled if this bit is "1".
• Initialized to "0" by a reset.
bit 4
WTOF:
Watch timer interrupt
request flag bit
• This bit indicates that an interrupt request of the watch timer has occurred.
• When the WTIE bit is 1 and this bit is set to "1", an interrupt request is generated.
• It is set to "1" at every interval set with the WTC2 to WTC0 bits.
• It is cleared with "0" by writing "0" into it, shifting to stop mode, and reset operation.
• Writing "1" does not have the meaning.
bit 3
WTR:
Watch counter clear bit
• This bit clears all bits of the watch timer counter.
• The watch timer counter is cleared to "0" by writing "0".
• Writing "1" does not have the meaning.
• The bit always returns "1" when read.
bit 2
to
bit 0
WTC2,WTC1,WTC0:
Watch timer interval
selection bit
• It is a bit by which the interval of the watch timer is set.
• Initialized to "000B" by reset.
• To change the WTC2, WTC1, and WTC0 bits, clear the WTOF bit at the same time.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
237
CHAPTER 11 WATCH TIMER
11.4 Operation of Watch Timer
11.4
MB90330A Series
Operation of Watch Timer
The watch timer functions as s clock source for the watchdog timer, a timer for sub
clock oscillation stabilization delay time and an interval timer that generates an
interrupt at regular intervals.
■ Watch Counter
The watch counter is a 15-bit counter that counts sub clock and continues counting while sub clock is input.
● Clearing Watch Counter
The watch counter is cleared upon a power-on reset, change to stop mode and writing "0" to the watch
counter clear bit (WTR) of the watch timer control register (WTC).
Notes:
•
The watchdog timer and interval interrupts that use the output of the watch timer effect on the
operation by clearing the watch counter.
•
To clear the watch timer by writing "0" to the WTR bit in the watch timer control register (WTC),
set the WTIE bit to "0" and set the watch timer to interrupt inhibited state. Before permitting an
interrupt, clear the interrupt request issued by writing "0" to the WTOF flag.
■ Interruption Function of Interval of Watch Timer
A carry-up signal from the watch counter causes an interrupt at regular intervals.
● Specification of Interval Time
The (WTC2, WTC1 and WTC0) bits of the WTC register specifies interval time.
● Generation of Watch timer interrupt
The watch timer interrupt request flag bit (WTOF) is set for each interval time set by the WTC2, WTC1
and WTC0 bits. In this case, if interrupt is enabled by setting "1" in the watch timer interval interrupt
enable bit (WTIE), a watch timer interrupt is generated.
The WTOF bit is set, based on the time the watch timer was cleared last.
Because, in stop mode, the watch timer functions as a timer for sub clock oscillation stabilization delay
time, the WTOF bit is cleared immediately when mode is changed to stop mode.
■ Specification Function of Clock Source of Watchdog Timer
The clock source of the watchdog timer can be specified by the watchdog timer clock source selection bit
(WDCS) of the WTC register. However, when clock mode is sub clock mode, the counter value of the
watch timer is used, regardless of the value of the WDCS bit.
■ Sub Clock Oscillation Stabilization Delay Time Function
When recovering from power-on reset or stop mode, the watch timer functions as a timer for sub clock
oscillation stabilization delay time. The sub clock oscillation stabilization delay time is fixed to 214 sub
clock cycles.
238
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12
16-BIT I/O TIMER
This chapter describes a overview of the 16-bit I/O timer,
the functions and configurations of its registers, and its
operation.
12.1 Overview of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
239
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.1 Overview of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of 16-bit I/O Timer
The 16-bit I/O timer consists of one 16-bit free-run timer, and four output compare and
four input capture modules. This function enables four independent waveforms to be
output based on the 16-bit free-run timer, and input pulse widths and external clock
cycle to be measured.
■ Configuration Function of 16-bit I/O Timer
The functions of a 16-bit free-run timer, output compare, and input captures that make up the 16-bit I/O
timer are as follows:
● 16-bit free-run timer (x1)
The 16-bit free-run timer consists of a 16-bit up counter, control register, and prescaler. A value output
from the timer counter is used as a basic time by the input capture and output compare. Clock for the
counter operation can be selected from eight types (φ: Machine clock).
• Eight types of internal clocks (φ,φ/2,φ/4,φ/8,φ/16,φ/32,φ/64,φ/128)
• Either the internal or external clock (FRCK) for the basic machine clock can be selected.
An interrupt can be generated through the overflow of the counter value and comparing match with the
compare clear register (Mode setting is required for comparing match).
The count value can be initialized to "0000H" with reset, software clear, and compare match operations
with compare clear register.
● Output compare (x4)
The output compare consists of four 16-bit compare registers, compare output latch, and control registers. It
can reverse the output level and at the same time generate an interrupt when the 16-bit free-run timer value
matches that of the compare registers.
• Four compare registers are operated independently of each other. There are an output pin and interrupt
flag that correspond to each compare register.
• The output pin can be controlled by pairing two compare registers.
• The initial value of the output pin can be set.
• An interrupt can be generated by a comparing match.
● Input capture (x4)
The input capture consists of four independent external input pins and associated capture and control
registers. It can detect an arbitrary edge of the signal input from external input pin to generate an interrupt
while holding the 16-bit free-run timer value in the capture register.
• The edge of an external input signal is optional. The external input signal edge can be selected from a
rising edge, falling edge, or both edges.
• Four input capture can operate independently.
Interrupts can be generated through valid edges of external input signals. The input capture can activate
μDMAC via interrupt.
240
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.1 Overview of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Block Diagram
Figure 12.1-1 shows the 16-bit I/O timer block diagram.
Figure 12.1-1 Block Diagram of 16-bit I/O Timer
Control logic
Interrupt
to each
blocks
16-bit free-run timer
Compare clear register
Clear
16-bit free-run timer
16-bit timer
Output compare 0
TQ
OUT0
TQ
OUT1
Compare register 2
TQ
OUT2
Output compare 3
Compare register 3
TQ
OUT3
F2MC-16LX Bus
Compare register 0
Output compare 1
Compare register 1
Output compare 2
Input capture 0
CM44-10129-6E
Capture register 0
Edge selection
IN0
Input capture 1
Capture register 1
Edge selection
IN1
Input capture 2
Capture register 2
Edge selection
IN2
Input capture 3
Capture register 3
Edge selection
IN3
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
241
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.2
MB90330A Series
Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
Registers for the 16-bit I/O timer are classified into the following general categories:
• 16-bit free-run timer
• 16-bit output compare
• 16 bit input capture
The configuration and functions of register are described.
■ Register Configuration of 16-bit I/O Timer
The register configuration of the 16-bit I/O timer is shown in the following.
● 16-bit free-run timer
Figure 12.2-1 16-bit Free-run Timer Configuration
0
bit 15
00008BH,00008AH
CPCLR
000087H,000086H
TCDT
Timer counter data register
000089H,000088H
TCCS
Timer control status register
Compare clear register
● 16-bit Output compare
Figure 12.2-2 16-bit Output Compare Configuration
0
bit 15
007919H,007918H
00791BH,00791AH
00791DH,00791CH
00791FH,00791EH
000055H,000054H
000057H,000056H
OCCP0
OCCP1
OCCP2
OCCP3
OCS1
OCS3
Output compare register
OCS0
OCS2
Output compare control register
● 16 bit input capture
Figure 12.2-3 16 Bit Input Capture Configuration
0
bit 15
007911H,007910H
007913H,007912H
007915H,007914H
007917H,007916H
000053H,000052H
242
IPCP0
IPCP1
IPCP2
IPCP3
ICS23
Input capture data register
ICS01
Input capture control status register
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
12.2.1
16-bit Free-run Timer
The 16-bit free-run timer consists of a 16-bit up-down counter and control status
register.
A value of the timer counter is used as a basic time of the input capture and output
compare (base timer).
• Clock for the counter operation can be selected from eight types.
• The counter overflow interruption can be generated.
• Setting the mode enables initialization of the counter through match operation with
the value of the compare clear register in the output compare.
■ Register List of 16-bit Free-run Timer
Figure 12.2-4 lists the 16-bit free-run timer registers.
Figure 12.2-4 Register List of 16-bit Free-run Timer
bit
15
CL15
00008BH
R/W
7
bit
00008AH CL07
R/W
bit 15
000087H T15
R/W
14
CL14
R/W
6
CL06
R/W
14
T14
R/W
13
CL13
R/W
5
CL05
R/W
13
T13
R/W
7
000086H T07
R/W
bit 15
000089H ECKE
R/W
bit
7
000088H IVF
R/W
6
T06
R/W
14
5
T05
R/W
13
bit
12
CL12
R/W
4
CL04
R/W
12
T12
R/W
11
CL11
R/W
3
CL03
R/W
11
T11
R/W
10
CL10
R/W
2
CL02
R/W
10
T10
R/W
9
CL09
R/W
1
CL01
R/W
9
T09
R/W
8
CPCLR
CL08 Compare clear register upper
R/W Initial value XXXXXXXXB
0
CPCLR
CL00 Compare clear register lower
R/W Initial value XXXXXXXXB
TCDT
8
Timer counter data register upper
T08
R/W Initial value 00000000B
4
T04
R/W
12
MSI2
R/W R/W R/W
6
5
4
IVFE STOP MODE
R/W R/W R/W
3
T03
R/W
11
MSI1
R/W
3
CLR
R/W
2
T02
R/W
10
MSI0
R/W
2
CLK2
R/W
1
T01
R/W
9
ICLR
R/W
1
CLK1
R/W
0
T00
R/W
8
ICRE
R/W
0
CLK0
R/W
TCDT
Timer counter data register lower
Initial value 00000000B
TCCS
Timer control status register upper
Initial value 0XX00000B
TCCS
Timer control status register lower
Initial value 00000000B
R/W :Readable/Writable
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
243
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Block Diagram of 16-bit Free-run Timer
Figure 12.2-5 shows the 16-bit free-run timer block diagram.
Figure 12.2-5 Block Diagram of 16-bit Free-run Timer
φ
Interrupt request #36
F2MC-16LX Bus
Comparator
IVFE STOP MODE CLR CLK2 CLK1
IVF
CLK0
Clock
16-bit free-run timer
Count value output T15 to T00
16-bit compare clear register
Compare
circuit
MSI 2 to MSI 0
ICLR ICRE
Interrupt request #36
■ Compare Clear Register (CPCLR)
Figure 12.2-6 shows the bit configuration of the compare clear register (CPCLR).
Figure 12.2-6 Bit Configuration of Compare Clear Register (CPCLR)
15
00008BH CL15
R/W
7
bit
00008AH CL07
R/W
bit
14
CL14
R/W
6
CL06
R/W
13
CL13
R/W
5
CL05
R/W
12
CL12
R/W
4
CL04
R/W
11
CL11
R/W
3
CL03
R/W
10
CL10
R/W
2
CL02
R/W
9
CL09
R/W
1
CL01
R/W
8
CPCLR
CL08 Compare clear register upper
R/W Initial value XXXXXXXXB
0
CPCLR
CL00 Compare clear register lower
R/W Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R/W :Readable/Writable
The compare clear register (CPCLR) is a 16-bit length compare register that is compared with the 16-bit
free-run timer. Since the CPCLR register has an indefinite, initial value, you must set the value before
enabling the operation. Moreover, please access the CPCLR register the word.
When the MODE bit of the timer control status register (TCCS) is set to "1", 16-bit free-run timer value is
cleared to "0000H" at matching between the register value and 16-bit free-run timer value. And when the
register value is matched with 16-bit free-run timer value, 16-bit free-run timer value is initialized to
"0000H", and the compare clear interrupt flag is set. When the interrupt is enabled on the compare clear
interrupt flag = 1, the interrupt request is generated to CPU.
244
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Timer Counter Data Register (TCDT)
Figure 12.2-7 shows the bit configuration of the timer counter data register (TCDT).
Figure 12.2-7 Bit Configuration of Timer Counter Data Register (TCDT)
bit
000087H
bit
000086H
15
14
T15 T14
R/W R/W
13
T13
R/W
12
11
T12 T11
R/W R/W
10
9
8
T10 T09 T08
R/W R/W R/W
TCDT
7
6
T07 T06
R/W R/W
5
T05
R/W
4
3
T04 T03
R/W R/W
2
1
0
T02 T01 T00
R/W R/W R/W
TCDT
Timer counter data register upper
Initial value 00000000B
Timer counter data register lower
Initial value 00000000B
R/W :Readable/Writable
The timer counter data register (TCDT) is a register that can read a count value of the 16-bit free-run timer.
A reset operation clears the count value with "0000H". A timer value can be set by writing the value into
the TCDT register, but ensure to perform at the stop state (STOP=1) before doing so.
Please access the TCDC register the word. The 16-bit free-run timer is initialized with the following
causes:
• Initialization by Reset
• Initialization by clear bit (CLR) of control status
• Initialization by match operation between the compare clear register and the timer counter value (setting
the mode is required)
■ Timer Control Status Register (TCCS)
Figure 12.2-8 shows the bit configuration of the timer control status register (TCCS).
Figure 12.2-8 Bit Configuration of Timer Control Status Register (TCCS)
15
14
13
12
MSI2
000089H ECKE
R/W R/W R/W R/W
bit
7
6
5
4
000088H IVF IVFE STOP MODE
R/W R/W R/W R/W
bit
11
MSI1
R/W
3
CLR
R/W
10
9
8
TCCS
MSI0 ICLR ICRE Timer control status register upper
R/W R/W R/W Initial value 0XX00000B
2
1
0
TCCS
CLK2 CLK1 CLK0 Timer control status register lower
R/W R/W R/W Initial value 00000000B
R/W :Readable/Writable
The function of each bit in the timer control status register (TCCS) is described in the following.
[bit 15] ECKE (External clock input enable bit)
This bit enables selection of the count clock source of the 16-bit free-run timer from the internal or
external source. Since the clock is changed immediately after writing into the ECKE bit, you must
change it when the output compare and input capture are in stopping state.
0
The internal clock source is selected
1
The clock is input from external pin (FRCK).
[Initial value]
[bit 14, bit 13] Undefined bit
The reading value is irregular. No effect on writing.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
245
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 12 to bit 10] MSI2,MSI1,MSI0 (Interrupt mask selection bit)
Bit to set the number of times the compare clear interrupt be masked. It consists of a 3-bit reload
counter and the count value is reloaded every time the counter value is "000B". In addition, when
writing into the MSI2, MSI1, and MSI0 registers, the count value is also loaded. The number of masks
is the number of settings. (Example: Set "010B" if masked twice, interrupted at the third time) However,
setting "000B" cannot mask interrupt causes.
[bit 9] ICLR (Compare clear interrupt flag bit)
It is the interrupt request flag of compare clear. When the compare clear register value matches with the
16-bit free-run timer value by compare operation, this bit is set to "1". When the interrupt request enable
bit (ICRE of bit 8) is set, an interrupt is generated. The ICLR bit is cleared by writing "0". Writing "1"
does not have the meaning. By the read-modify-write instruction, this bit is always read "1".
0
No Interrupt request
1
Interrupt request
[Initial value]
[bit 8] ICRE (Compare clear interrupt request enable bit)
It is the interrupt enable bits of compare clear. When the bit is "1" and the interrupt flag (ICLR of bit 9)
is set to "1", an interrupt is generated.
0
Interrupt disabled
1
Interruption permission
[Initial value]
[bit 7] IVF (Time overflow generation flag bit)
It is the interrupt request flag of 16-bit free-run timer.
If the 16-bit free-run timer overflows, or the counter is cleared when it matches the compare clear
register through compare operation as a result the mode setting, the IVF bit is set to "1". When the
interrupt request enable bit (IVFE of bit 5) is set, an interrupt is generated. Writing "0" into it clears it.
Writing "1" does not have the meaning. The read-modify-write instructions always read "1" from this
bit.
0
No Interrupt request [Initial value]
1
Interrupt request
[bit 6] IVFE (Time overflow interrupt enable bit)
It is Interrupt enable bit of 16-bit free-run timer. When the bit is "1" and the write flag (IVF of bit 5) is
set to "1", an interrupt is generated.
246
0
Interrupt disabled
1
Interruption permission
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
[Initial value]
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 5] STOP (Timer operation stop bit)
It is bit for stopping count of 16-bit free-run timer. Writing "1" into this bit stops counting the 16-bit
free-run timer and writing "0" starts counting it.
0
Count permission (operation)
1
Count disabled (Stop)
[Initial value]
Note that the output compare operation will stop when the 16-bit free-run timer stops counting.
[bit 4] MODE (Clear condition selection bit)
This bit specifies the initialization conditions of the 16-bit free-run timer.
If this bit is "0", the value of the count can be initialized with reset operation and clear bit ((CLR) of bit
2).
If this bit is "1", the value of the count can be initialized with reset operation and clear bit ((CLR) of bit
2), and through matching the value of the compare clear register.
0
Initialization by reset and clear bit
1
Initialization by a reset, clear bit or the compare clear register.
[Initial value]
Further, note that the value of the counter is initialized on the point of change in the count value.
[bit 3] CLR (Timer clear bit)
This bit initializes the value of the 16-bit free-run timer to "0000H" while it is operating.
Writing "1" into the bit initializes the value of the counter to "0000H". Writing "0" into the bit has no
meaning. This bit is always "0" at the beginning of reading. The value of the counter is initialized on the
point of change in the counter value.
0
No meaning.
1
The counter value is initialized to "0000H"
[Initial value]
Note that you must write "0000H" into the data register if you want to initialize the counter value while the
timer is stopped.
Note:
If "0" is written to this bit after writing "1" and until next count clock, counter value is not initialized.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
247
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 2 to bit 0] CLK2,CLK1,CLK0 (Count clock cycle selection bit)
Select count clock of 16-bit free-run timer. Since the clock is changed immediately after writing into the
CLK2, CLK1, and CLK0 bits you must change it when the output compare and input capture are in
stopping state.
248
CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
Count Clock
φ=24 MHz
φ=12 MHz
φ=6 MHz
φ=3 MHz
0
0
0
φ
41.7 ns
83.3 ns
0.17 μs
0.33 μs
0
0
1
φ/2
83.3 ns
0.17 μs
0.33 μs
0.67 μs
0
1
0
φ/4
0.17 μs
0.33 μs
0.67 μs
1.33 μs
0
1
1
φ/8
0.33 μs
0.67 μs
1.33 μs
2.67 μs
1
0
0
φ/16
0.67 μs
1.33 μs
2.67 μs
5.33 μs
1
0
1
φ/32
1.33 μs
2.67 μs
5.33 μs
10.7 μs
1
1
0
φ/64
2.67 μs
5.33 μs
10.7 μs
21.3 μs
1
1
1
φ/128
5.33 μs
10.7 μs
21.3 μs
42.7 μs
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
12.2.2
Output Compare
The output compare consists of 16-bit compare registers, compare output pin part, and
a control register. It can reverse the output level for the pin and, at the same time,
generate an interrupt when the 16-bit free-run timer value matches a value set in the 16bit compare registers.
• It has a total of four compare registers that can operate independently.
In addition, the output can be set to be controlled by using two compare registers.
• Interrupt can be set through compare-match operation.
■ List of Output Compare Registers
Figure 12.2-9 lists the output compare registers.
Figure 12.2-9 List of Output Compare Registers
bit
ch.0:007919H
ch.1:00791BH
ch.2:00791DH
ch.3:00791FH
bit
ch.0:007918H
ch.1:00791AH
ch.2:00791CH
ch.3:00791EH
bit
ch.1:000055H
ch.3:000057H
bit
ch.0:000054H
ch.2:000056H
14
C14
13
C13
12
C12
11
C11
10
C10
9
C09
8
C08
OCCP0 to OCCP3
Output compare register upper
R/W R/W
R/W
R/W R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
7
6
C07 C06
R/W R/W
5
4
3
C05 C04 C03
R/W R/W R/W
2
C02
R/W
1
C01
R/W
0
C00
R/W
OCCP0 to OCCP3
Output compare register lower
15
C15
15
14
13
-
-
-
12
11
10
9
8
CMOD OTE1 OTE0 OTD1 OTD0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
7
6
5
4
ICP1 ICP0 ICE1 ICE0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
3
2
-
-
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
OCS1/OCS3
Output compare
control register upper
Initial value ---00000B
OCS0/OCS2
1
0
Output compare
CST1 CST0 control register lower
R/W R/W Initial value 0000--00B
R/W :Readable/Writable
Note:
If you rewrite compare registers, you must rewrite them in a compare interrupt routine or in the state
of disabled compare operation to ensure that compare-match operation and write operation never
occur at the same time.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
249
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Block Diagram of Output Compare
Figure 12.2-10 shows the output compare block diagram.
Figure 12.2-10 Block Diagram of Output Compare
F2MC-16LX Bus
Compare control
TQ
OTE0
OUT0,OUT2
Compare register 0,2
CMOD
16-bit timer counter value (T15 to T00)
OTE1
TQ
Compare control
OUT1,OUT3
Compare register 1,3
ICP1 ICP0 ICE1 ICE0
Control unit
Compare 1, 3 interrupt #29,#31
Each
control blocks
Compare 0, 2 interrupt #29,#31
■ Output Compare Registers (OCCP0 to OCCP3)
Figure 12.2-11 shows the bit configurations of the output compare registers (OCCP0 to OCCP3).
Figure 12.2-11 Bit Configurations of Output Compare Registers (OCCP0 to OCCP3)
bit
ch.0:007919H
ch.1:00791BH
ch.2:00791DH
ch.3:00791FH
bit
ch.0:007918H
ch.1:00791AH
ch.2:00791CH
ch.3:00791EH
14
C14
13
C13
12
C12
11
C11
10
C10
9
C09
8
C08
OCCP0 to OCCP3
Output compare register upper
R/W R/W
R/W
R/W R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
7
6
C07 C06
R/W R/W
5
4
3
C05 C04 C03
R/W R/W R/W
2
C02
R/W
1
C01
R/W
0
C00
R/W
OCCP0 to OCCP3
Output compare register lower
15
C15
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R/W :Readable/Writable
The output compare registers (OCCP0 to OCCP3) are 16-bit length compare registers any of which is
compared with the 16-bit free-run timer. Since the registers have indefinite, initial values, set the initial
values before enabling them. Please access the OCCP0 to OCCP3 register the word. When the values of the
OCCP0 to OCCP3 registers match that of the 16-bit free-run timer, the compare signal is generated and the
output compare interrupt flag is set. In addition, if output is enabled, the output level corresponding to each
of the compare registers is reversed.
250
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Output Compare Control Registers (OCS0 to OCS3)
Figure 12.2-12 shows the bit configurations of the output compare control registers (OCS0 to OCS3).
Figure 12.2-12 Bit Configurations of Output Compare Control Registers (OCS0 to OCS3)
bit
ch.1:000055H
ch.3:000057H
bit
ch.0:000054H
ch.2:000056H
15
14
13
-
-
-
12
11
10
9
8
CMOD OTE1 OTE0 OTD1 OTD0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
7
6
5
4
ICP1 ICP0 ICE1 ICE0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
3
2
-
-
OCS1/OCS3
Output compare
control register upper
Initial value ---00000B
OCS0/OCS2
1
0
Output compare
CST1 CST0 control register lower
R/W R/W Initial value 0000--00B
R/W :Readable/Writable
The function of each bit in the output compare control registers (OCS0 to OCS3) is described in the
following.
[bit 15 to bit 13] Undefined bit
The reading value is irregular. No effect on writing.
[bit 12] CMOD (Output level inverse mode bit)
If pin output is enabled (OTE1=1 or OTE0=1), pin output level inverse operation mode is switched
when there is a comparing match.
• When CMOD=0 (initial value), the pin output level that correspond to the compare register is reversed.
- OUT0/OUT2: Reverses the level at a match with the compare register 0/2.
- OUT1/OUT3: Reverses the level at a match with the compare register 1/3.
• When CMOD=1, compare register 0/2 reverses the output level the same way as when CMOD=0, and
the output level of the pin (OUT1/OUT3) that corresponds to compare register 1/3 is reversed when
there are comparing matches with both compare register 0/2 and compare register 1/3. If compare
register 0/2 and compare register 1/3 have the same value, the operation would be the same as if they
were one compare register.
- OUT0/OUT2: Reverses the level at a match with the compare register 0/2.
- OUT1/OUT3: Reverses the level at a match with the compare register 1/3 or 0/2.
[bit 11, bit 10] OTE1,OTE0 (Output enable bit)
Bit to enable the pin output of the output compare. The initial value is "0".
0
It operates as a general-purpose port. [Initial value]
1
Becomes the output compare pin output.
• OTE1: Corresponding to output compare 1/3
• OTE0: Corresponding to output compare 0/2
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
251
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 9, bit 8] OTD1,OTD0 (Output level bit)
It is used when you want to change the pin output level if the pin output of the output compare is
enabled. The initial value of the compare pin output is "0". To perform a write operation, first, stop the
compare operation. When you perform a read operation, the output value of the output compare pin is
read out.
0
Sets the compare pin output to "0". [Initial value]
1
Sets the compare pin output to "1".
• OTD1: Corresponding to output compare 1/3
• OTD0: Corresponding to output compare 0/2
[bit 7, bit 6] ICP1,ICP0 (Compare match interrupt flag bit)
It is output compare interrupt flag.When the values of the compare registers match that of the 16-bit
free-run timer, it is set to "1". If the interrupt request bits (ICE1 and ICE0) are enabled, an output
compare interrupt is generated when ICP1 and ICP0 bits are set. It is cleared by writing "0" and writing
"1" has no meaning. In the read modify system, "1" is read.
0
No Compare match[Initial value]
1
Compare match
• ICP1: Corresponding to output compare 1/3
• ICP0: Corresponding to output compare 0/2
[bit 5, bit 4] ICE1,ICE0 (Compare match interrupt enable bit)
It is the interrupt enable bit for the output compare. If the ICE1 and ICE0 bits are "1", an output
compare interrupt is generated when the interrupt flags (ICP1 and ICP0) are set.
0
Output compare interruption interdiction [Initial value]
1
Output compare interruption permission.
• ICE1: Corresponding to output compare 1/3
• ICE0: Corresponding to output compare 0/2
[bit 3, bit 2] Undefined bit
The reading value is irregular. No effect on writing.
[bit 1, bit 0] CST1,CST0 (Compare operation enable bit)
These bits permit a matching operation with the 16-bit free-run timer.
0
Compare operation disabled [Initial value]
1
Compare Operation enabled
• CST1: Corresponding to output compare 1/3
• CST0: Corresponding to output compare 0/2
Set the compare register values before enabling a compare operation.
252
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
Note:
Since the output compare is synchronous with the clock of the 16-bit free-run timer, stopping the
timer means the stop of the compare operation.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
253
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.2.3
MB90330A Series
Input Capture
This module has a function that detects a rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of
externally input signal and holds a value of the 16-bit free-run timer in a register at the
time of detection. It can also generate an interrupt when detecting an edge.
■ Input Capture
The input capture consist of input capture and control registers. Each input capture has its corresponding
external input pin.
• The valid edge of the external input can be selected from three types: Rising edge/falling edge/both
edges.
• It can generate an interrupt when it detects the valid edge of the external input.
■ Block Diagram of Input Capture
Figure 12.2-13 shows the input capture block diagram.
Figure 12.2-13 Block Diagram of Input Capture
Interrupt #25
F2MC-16LX Bus
ICP1 ICP0 ICE1 ICE0 EG11 EG10 EG01 EG00
Input capture data register 0
Edge detection
IN0
Input capture data register 1
Edge detection
IN1
Input capture data register 2
Edge detection
IN2
Input capture data register 3
Edge detection
IN3
16-bit timer counter value (T15 to T00)
ICP3 ICP2 ICE3 ICE2 EG31 EG30 EG21 EG20
Interrupt #27
254
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ List of Register of Input Capture
Figure 12.2-14 lists input capture registers.
Figure 12.2-14 List of Register of Input Capture
ch.0:007911H
ch.1:007913H
ch.2:007915H
ch.3:007917H
ch.0:007910H
ch.1:007912H
ch.2:007914H
ch.3:007916H
000053H
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
CP15 CP14 CP13 CP12 CP11 CP10 CP09 CP08
R
bit
bit
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
IPCP0 to IPCP3
Input capture data register upper
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IPCP0 to IPCP3
CP07 CP06 CP05 CP04 CP03 CP02 CP01 CP00 Input capture data register lower
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ICS23
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Input capture
ICP3 ICP2 ICE3 ICE2 EG31 EG30 EG21 EG20 control status register 23
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value 00000000B
ICS01
000052H
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICP1 ICP0 ICE1 ICE0 EG11 EG10 EG01 EG00
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Input capture
control status register 01
Initial value 00000000B
R/W :Readable/Writable
Read Only
R:
■ Input Capture Data Registers (IPCP0 to IPCP3)
Figure 12.2-15 shows the bit configurations of the input capture data registers (IPCP0 to IPCP3).
Figure 12.2-15 Bit Configurations of Input Capture Data Register (IPCP0 to IPCP3)
ch.0:007911H
ch.1:007913H
ch.2:007915H
ch.3:007917H
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
CP15 CP14 CP13 CP12 CP11 CP10 CP09 CP08
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
IPCP0 to IPCP3
Input capture data register upper
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IPCP0 to IPCP3
ch.0:007910H CP07 CP06 CP05 CP04 CP03 CP02 CP01 CP00 Input capture data register lower
ch.1:007912H
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ch.2:007914H
ch.3:007916H
R :Read Only
The input capture data registers (IPCP0 to IPCP3) are registers that hold a value of the 16-bit free-run timer
when the valid edges of waveforms input from their corresponding external pins are detected.
Please access the IPCP0 to IPCP3 register the word. The IPCP0 to IPCP3 registers are not permitted to
write.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
255
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.2 Register of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Control Status Registers (ICS01, ICS23)
Figure 12.2-16 shows the bit configurations of the control status registers (ICS01 and ICS23).
Figure 12.2-16 The Configuration of Input Capture Control Status Register (ICS01,ICS23)
000053H
bit
ICS23
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Input capture
ICP3 ICP2 ICE3 ICE2 EG31 EG30 EG21 EG20 control status register 23
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value 00000000B
ICS01
000052H
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICP1 ICP0 ICE1 ICE0 EG11 EG10 EG01 EG00
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Input capture
control status register 01
Initial value 00000000B
R/W :Readable/Writable
The function of each bit in the input capture control status registers (ICS01, ICS23) is described in the
following.
[bit 15, bit 14, bit 7, bit 6] ICP3,ICP2,ICP1,ICP0 (Valid edge detection flag bit)
It is input capture interrupt flag. The input capture sets the ICP3 to ICP0 bits to "1" when it detects valid
edges of external input pins. It can generate an interrupt by detecting a valid edge when any of the
interrupt enable bits (ICE3, ICE2, ICE1, and ICE0) is set.
Writing "0" into it clears it. Writing "1" does not have the meaning. The read-modify-write instructions
always read "1" from this bit.
0
There is no effective edge detection
1
There is effective edge detection.
[Initial value]
ICPn: a number denoted by n corresponds to the channel number of the input capture.
[bit 13, bit 12, bit 5, bit 4] ICE3,ICE2,ICE1,ICE0 (Capture interrupt enable bit)
It is input capture interrupt enable bit. An input capture interrupt is generated when any of ICE3 to
ICE0 bits is "1" and its corresponding interrupt flag (ICP3 to ICP0) is also set.
0
Interrupt disabled
[Initial value]
1
Interruption permission
ICEn: a number denoted by n corresponds to the channel number of the input capture.
[bit 11 to bit 8, bit 3 to bit 0] EG31,EG30,EG21,EG20,EG11,EG10,EG01,EG00
(Edge selection bit)
It specifies the polarity of a valid edge of the external input. The input capture operation permission is
used combinedly.
EGn1
EGn0
Edge detection polarity
0
0
No edge detection (stopped state)
0
1
Rising edge detection
1
0
Falling edge detection
1
1
Both edges detection
[Initial value]
EGn1/EGn0: a number denoted by n corresponds to the channel number of the input capture.
256
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
12.3
Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
The operation and timing of the 16-bit I/O timer are described.
■ Operation and Timing of 16-bit I/O Timer
The following items related to the operation and timing of the 16-bit I/O timer are described.
• Operation of 16-bit free-run timer
• Operation of 16-bit output compare
• Operation of 16-bit input capture
• Timing of 16-bit free-run timer
- Count timing
- Clear timing
• Output compare timing
- Timing of compare operation
- Interrupt timing
- Changing timing of the output pin
• Input timing of input capture
Capture timing to input signal
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
257
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.3.1
MB90330A Series
Operation of 16-bit Free-run Timer
The operation and timing of the 16-bit free-run timer are described.
■ Operation of 16-bit Free-run Timer
The 16-bit free-run timer starts counting at the counter value of "0000H" when a reset has been released.
This counter value is a reference time for the 16-bit output compare and 16-bit input capture.
The count value is cleared by the following condition.
• When an overflow occurs
• When there is a comparing match with the value of compare clear register (setting mode is required).
• When "1" is written into the CLR bit in the TCCS register while it is operating.
• When you write "0000H" in the TCDC register while operating.
• At a reset
An interrupt is raised when an overflow occurs, or there is a comparing match with the value of compare
clear register and the counter value of 16-bit free-run timer (the compare-match interrupt requires mode
setting).
Figure 12.3-1 shows the timing chart for clearing the counter due to overflow, and Figure 12.3-2 shows the
timing chart for clearing the counter due to compare-match operation.
Figure 12.3-1 Timing Chart of Counter Clear by Overflow
Counter value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Interrupt
258
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
Figure 12.3-2 Timing Chart of Counter Clear by Comparison Result Agreement
Counter value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare
register value
BFFFH
Interrupt
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
259
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.3.2
MB90330A Series
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
The 16-bit output compare compares the value of the 16-bit free-run timer with that set
in one of the compare registers, sets the interrupt request flag and, at the same time,
reverses the output level when a match is detected.
■ Example of Output Waveform
Examples of the output waveform are illustrated in the following.
● Example of the output waveform when using compare register 0 and 1:
Figure 12.3-3 shows an example of the output waveform when the output initial value is "0".
Figure 12.3-3 Example of Output Waveform when Using Compare Register 0 and 1
(for Output Initial Value=0, CMOD=0)
Compare value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare register 0
value
Compare register 1
value
BFFFH
7FFFH
OUT0
Corresponding to compare 0
OUT1
Corresponding to compare 1
Compare 0
interrupt
Compare 1
interrupt
The output level can be changed by using two pairs of compare registers. (At CMOD=1)
260
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
● Example of the output waveform by two pairs of compare registers
Figure 12.3-4 shows an example of the output waveform when the output initial value is "0".
Figure 12.3-4 Example of Output Waveform by Two Pairs of Compare Registers
(for Output Initial Value=0, CMOD=1)
Compare value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare register 0
value
Compare register 1
value
BFFFH
7FFFH
OUT0
Corresponding to
compare 0
Corresponding to
compare 1
OUT1
Compare 0
interrupt
Compare 1
interrupt
Note:
To rewriting the compare register, within the compare interrupt routine or compare operation is
disabled. Be sure not to occur simultaneously a compare match and writing the compare register.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
261
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.3.3
MB90330A Series
Operation of 16-bit Input Capture
The 16-bit input capture can capture the value of the 16-bit free-run timer into the
capture register and generate an interrupt when it detects a predefined valid edge.
■ Example of Taking Timing of Input Capture
Figure 12.3-5 shows the input capture capturing timing example.
Figure 12.3-5 Example of Taking Timing of Input Capture
Compare value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
IN0
IN1
IN example
Capture 0
Indeterminate
Capture 1
Indeterminate
Capture
example
Indeterminate
3FFFH
7FFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
Capture 0
interrupt
Capture 1
interrupt
Capture example
interrupt
262
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
12.3.4
Timing of 16-bit Free-run Timer
The 16-bit free-run timer is counted up by the input clock (internal or external clock).
When an external clock is selected, this timer is counted up at a rising edge.
■ Count Timing of Free-run Timer
Figure 12.3-6 shows the count timing for the free-run timer.
Figure 12.3-6 Count Timing of Free-run Timer
φ
External clock input
Count clock
Counter value
N
N+1
The counter can be cleared by a reset operation, software, and match operation with compare clear register.
Clearing the counter with a reset operation and software is performed as a clear is generated. Clearing the
counter with a match with compare clear register is performed in sync with the count timing.
■ Free-run Timer Clear Timing (for a Match with Compare Clear Register)
Figure 12.3-7 shows the free-run timer clear timing for a match with compare clear register.
Figure 12.3-7 Free-run Timer Clear Timing (for a Match with Compare Clear Register)
φ
Compare clear
register value
N
Compare match
Counter value
CM44-10129-6E
N
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
0000H
263
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
12.3.5
MB90330A Series
Output Compare Timing
The output compare indicates that a compare match signal that is generated when the
free-run timer match the value set in the compare registers can reverse the output value
and raise an interrupt. The output inverse timing when a comparing match is detected is
in sync with the counter timing.
■ Interrupt Timing
Figure 12.3-8 shows the output compare interrupt timing.
Figure 12.3-8 Output Compare Interrupt Timing
φ
Counter value
N
Compare register
value
N
N+1
Compare match
Compare match
■ Change Timing for Output Pin
Figure 12.3-9 shows the change timing for the output pin of the output compare.
Figure 12.3-9 Change Timing for Output Pin of Output Compare
Counter value
Compare register
value
N
N+1
N
N+1
N
Compare match
signal
Output pin
Note:
If you rewrite compare registers, you must rewrite them in a compare interrupt routine or in the state
of disabled compare operation to ensure that compare-match operation and write operation never
occur at the same time.
264
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
MB90330A Series
12.3.6
Input Timing of Input Capture
Capture timing to input signal of input capture is described.
■ Capture Timing to Input Signal
Figure 12.3-10 shows the capture timing to the input signal of the input capture.
Figure 12.3-10 Capture Timing to Input Signal of Input Capture
φ
Counter value
Input capture
input
N
N+1
valid edge
Capture signal
Capture register
N+1
Interrupt
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
265
CHAPTER 12 16-BIT I/O TIMER
12.3 Operation of 16-bit I/O Timer
266
MB90330A Series
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13
USB FUNCTION
This chapter describes the functions and overview of
the USB Function.
13.1 Overview of USB Function
13.2 Block Diagram of USB Function
13.3 Registers of USB Function
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
Code: CM44-00104-1E
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
267
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.1 Overview of USB Function
13.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of USB Function
The USB Function is an interface that supports the USB (Universal Serial Bus)
communication protocol. It operates supporting the transfer speed of FULL (12 Mbps)
and has the following characteristics.
■ Features of USB Function
• FULL speed (12 Mbps) is supported. (Correspond to USB Full Speed)
• The device status is auto-answer.
• Bit string, bit stuffing, and automatic generation and check of CRC5 and CRC16
• Toggle check by data synchronization bit
• Automatic response to all standard commands except Get/SetDescriptor and SynchFrame commands
(these three commands can be processed the same way as the class vendor commands.)
• The class vendor commands can be received as data and responded via firmware.
• Support up to six EndPoints (EndPoint0 is fixed to control transfer.)
• 2 built-in transfer data buffers for each EndPoint (each of two built-in buffers dedicated to IN and OUT,
respectively, for EndPoint0)
• Support automatic transfer mode for transfer data via DMA (except buffers for EndPoint0)
268
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.2 Block Diagram of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.2
Block Diagram of USB Function
Figure 13.2-1 shows the USB Function block diagram.
■ Block Diagram of USB Function
Figure 13.2-1 Block Diagram of USB Function
EndPoint0
In buffer
Internal
data bus
EndPoint0
Out buffer
EndPoint1
buffer
Interrupt
#11,12
EndPoint2
buffer
UDC
interface
CLK(48MHz)
UDC
EndPoint3
buffer
EndPoint4
buffer
Pin
DVM
DRV USB
DVP
EndPoint5
buffer
SUSP
SPT
CPU interface
UDCC register
UDCS register
Timestamp
Interrupt #13
Interrupt #14
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
269
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
13.3
MB90330A Series
Registers of USB Function
The configuration and functions of registers used in the USB Function are described.
■ Register List of USB Function
Figure 13.3-1 Register List of USB Function
bit
15
8
7
UDCC
(R/W)
EP0C
(R/W)
EP1C
(R/W)
EP2C
(R/W)
EP3C
(R/W)
EP4C
(R/W)
EP5C
(R/W)
TMSP
(R)
UDCIE
8 bits
270
0
UDCS
(R/W)
EP0IS
(R/W)
EP0OS
(R/W)
EP1S
(R/W)
EP2S
(R/W)
EP3S
(R/W)
EP4S
(R/W)
EP5S
(R/W)
EP0DT
(R/W)
EP1DT
(R/W)
EP2DT
(R/W)
EP3DT
(R/W)
EP4DT
(R/W)
EP5DT
(R/W)
8 bits
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Figure 13.3-2 Registers of USB Function
bit
Address:0000D0H
7
6
5
4
RST
RESUM
HCON
USTP
3
2
Reserved Reserved
1
0
RFBK
PWC
UDC control register (UDCC)
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Address:0000D1H Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
bit
7
Address:0000D2H Reserved
6
5
4
bit
Address:0000D3H
15
14
13
12
-
-
-
-
bit
Address:0000D4H
7
6
5
4
bit
Address:0000D5H
15
3
2
1
0
10
9
8
STAL
Reserved
PKS0
11
EP0 control register (EP0C)
Reserved Reserved
3
2
1
0
12
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
PKS1
4
3
2
1
0
PKS1
14
EPEN
TYPE
bit
7
Address:0000D6H Reserved
6
bit
Address:0000D7H
14
15
EPEN
13
TYPE
6
bit
Address:0000D9H
14
5
EP2 control register (EP2C)
12
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
Reserved
4
3
2
1
0
PKS3
EPEN
13
TYPE
bit
7
Address:0000DAH Reserved
6
bit
Address:0000DBH
14
15
5
EP1 control register (EP1C)
PKS2
bit
7
Address:0000D8H Reserved
15
13
5
EP3 control register (EP3C)
12
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
Reserved
4
3
2
1
0
PKS4
EPEN
13
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
Reserved
bit
7
Address:0000DCH Reserved
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
bit
Address:0000DDH
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
Reserved
4
3
2
1
0
11
10
9
8
15
TYPE
EP4 control register (EP4C)
12
PKS5
EPEN
TYPE
6
5
EP5 control register (EP5C)
bit
Address:0000DEH
7
bit
Address:0000DFH
15
-
-
-
-
-
bit
Address:0000E0H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
SUSP
SOF
BRST
WKUP
SETP
CONF
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
SUSPIE
SOFIE
BRSTIE
WKUPIE
CONFN
CONFIE
0
TMSP
14
Address:0000E1H Reserved Reserved
13
12
Time stamp register (TMSP)
TMSP
bit
Address:0000E2H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
bit
Address:0000E3H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIIE
-
-
-
DRQI
-
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
bit
Address:0000E4H Reserved
bit
Address:0000E5H
UDC status register (UDCS)
UDC interruption permission
register (UDCIE)
EP0I status register (EP0IS)
EP0O status register
(EP0OS)
SIZE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQOIE
SPKIE
-
-
DRQO
SPK
Reserved
(Continued)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
271
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
(Continued)
7
6
5
4
Address:0000E6H
bit
Address:0000E7H
bit
3
bit
bit
Address:0000EBH
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
SIZE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SIZE
Address:0000EDH
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
Reserved
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SIZE
Address:0000EFH
bit
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
Reserved
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SIZE
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
Reserved
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
Reserved
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SIZE
15
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
15
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
15
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
15
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
15
14
13
12
bit
272
0
EP 1 data register
(EP1DT)
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
EP 2 data register
(EP2DT)
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
EP 3 data register
(EP3DT)
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
EP 4 data register
(EP4DT)
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
BFDT
7
6
5
4
Address:0000FAH
Address:0000FBH
1
BFDT
Address:0000F9H
bit
2
BFDT
Address:0000F8H
bit
3
BFDT
Address:0000F7H
bit
8
BFDT
Address:0000F6H
bit
9
BFDT
Address:0000F5H
bit
10
BFDT
Address:0000F4H
bit
11
BFDT
Address:0000F3H
bit
EP0 data register (EP0DT)
BFDT
Address:0000F2H
bit
EP5 status register (EP5S)
BFDT
Address:0000F1H
bit
EP4 status register (EP4S)
15
Address:0000F0H
bit
EP3 status register (EP3S)
15
Address:0000EEH Reserved
bit
EP2 status register (EP2S)
BFINI
Address:0000ECH Reserved
bit
0
BFINI
Address:0000EAH Reserved
bit
1
EP1 status register (EP1S)
Address:0000E8H Reserved
Address:0000E9H
2
SIZE
EP 5 data register
(EP5DT)
BFDT
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFDT
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.3.1
UDC Control Register (UDCC)
UDC control register (UDCC) controls the UDC core circuit.
■ UDC Control Register (UDCC)
Figure 13.3-3 shows the bit configuration of the UDC control register (UDCC).
Figure 13.3-3 UDC Control Register (UDCC)
Address
bit
0000D0H
Address
bit
0000D1H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RST
RESUM
HCON
USTP
Reserved
Reserved
RFBK
PWC
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
← Access
UDC control register
← Initial value
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
Note:
The UDC control register (UDCC) should be set when bit7:RST=1 and not be rewritten when USB is
in operating. However, bit 6 of RESUM and bit 4 of USTP are exclusive. RESUM of bit6 should be
set or reset in suspend status of USB only by the remote wake-up enable status due to the following
commands.
Set USTP of bit4 to "1" before entering the stop mode state.
To deselect the stop mode, set the order of SUSP in the UDCS and USTP in the UDCC to "0".
The following describes the function of each bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
[bit15 to bit8] Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits. Please write "0". The bit always reads "0".
[bit7] RST: Function reset bit
Apply an individual reset that is equivalent to the system reset to the chip to the USB Function. Apply a
reset to the USB Function with the RST bit when connecting a cable to the HOST PC. Since the RST
bit has the initial value of "1" and the USB Function is in reset status, release the Function by writing
"0" to the bit.
CM44-10129-6E
RST
Operating mode
0
Reset of USB Function release
1
Reset USB Function
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
273
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Note:
The RST bit initializes the corresponding bits of the timestamp register, UDC status register, and
interrupt enable register at once. In addition, since it sets EP0I, EP0O, and BFINIs of EP1 to EP5
status registers at the same time after initialization, clear the RST bit (which does not clear the BFINI
bits), and clear the BFINI of an endpoint to be used in this sequence.
[bit6] RESUM: Resume setting bit
When it is in remote Wake-up enabled status (or DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP bit is set with the
SET_FEATURE command by the host) and in suspend status, the resume operation is started by writing
"1" to the RESUM bit. Clear the resume direction by writing "0" to the RESUM bit that was set to "1".
RESUM
Operating mode
0
USB resume start dictating bit release
1
USB resume start dictate
[bit5] HCON: Host connection bit
Control a switch between an external pull-up resistor and the USB data line and allows the USB
Function to recognize connections to HOST PC or HUB.
HCON
Operating mode
0
HOST PC or HUB and connection
1
HOST PC or HUB and state of cutting
Note:
Even if the external pull-up resistor is HOST at the state of ON or the connection is recognized from
the HUB, the bus reset and the command of the USB bus ignores when the HCON bit is set to "1".
[bit4] USTP:USB operation clock stop bit
Stop the clock of the USB operation part by setting the USTP bit. Setting the USTP bit can reduce
power consumption when keeping the USB out of service.
274
USTP
Operating mode
0
Normal mode
1
Clock stop of USB operation part
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Note:
If the USTP bit is not used in the stop mode, wait for 3 cycles or 43 cycles to elapse in FULL speed
or in LOW speed (that is supported only in HOST mode) so that you can ensure that the reset
operation will function when you have set RST=1. You may clear the USTP bit and the RST bit at
once.
[bit3, bit2] Reserved bits
It is reserved bit. Please write "0". The bit always reads "0".
[bit1] RFBK: Data toggle mode selection bit (rate feedback mode)
It is a bit that selects data toggle mode for USB Interrupt transfer.
RFBK
Operating mode
0
Selection of alternation data toggle mode
It toggles a data PID when a transfer has been successfully completed.
1
Selection of data toggle mode
It is a toggle the data PID in unconditional.
The data toggle mode selection can be used for rate feedback information in ISO transfer.
[bit0] PWC: Power supply control bit
It specifies the operating power supply mode (self power or bus power) for the USB Function.
(The setting of the PWC bit is reflected in the standard command GetStatus.)
CM44-10129-6E
PWC
Operating mode
0
Bus power
1
Self power
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
275
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
13.3.2
MB90330A Series
EP0 Control Register (EP0C)
EP0 control register (EP0C) controls concerning end point 0.
■ EP0 Control Register (EP0C)
Figure 13.3-4 shows the bit configuration of the EP0 control register (EP0C).
Figure 13.3-4 EP0 Control Register (EP0C)
Address
bit
0000D2H
Address
0000D3H
7
6
5
4
3
Reserved
bit
2
1
0
PKS0
EP0 control register
← Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
-
-
-
-
Reserved
Reserved
STAL
Reserved
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
-
-
-
-
-
-
R/W
-
← Access
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
Note:
Ensure that you must set the EP0 control register (EP0C), except bit9 STAL, when both bit7 RST of
the UDC control register (UDCC) and bit15 BFINI of the EP0I/EP0O status register (EP0IS/EP0OS)
are "1" and must not rewrite it while the USB is operating.
The following describes the function of each bit in the EP0 control register (EP0C).
[bit15 to bit12] Undefined bits
Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
[bit11, bit10] Reserved bits
It is reserved bit. Please write "00B".
These bits always reads "00B" when read.
[bit9] STAL:STALL EndPoint0 set bit
Setting the STAL bit can put EndPoint0 in STALL status (STALL response).
STAL
276
Operating mode
0
Release of state of STALL
1
Set of state of STALL (STALL response)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Note:
The STALL response is continued to the host while the STAL bit is set. The USB Function returns
from STALL status when it receives a normal SETUP packet after the STAL bit is deselected.
[bit8, bit7] Reserved bits
It is reserved bit. Please write "00B".
These bits always reads "00B" when read.
[bit6 to bit0] PKS0:Packet size end point 0 set bits
It specifies the maximum number of transfer bytes per packet. The maximum number of transfer bytes
per packet that EndPoint0 can specify is 64 bytes, which is a setting common to IN and OUT.
<Example> "08H" → 8 Byte, "40H" → 64 Byte (maximum specified value)
Note:
Setting a value not less than the maximum number of transfer bytes (40H) and "00H" is forbidden.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
277
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
EP1 to EP5 Control Register (EP1C to EP5C)
13.3.3
EP1 to EP5 control register (EP1C to EP5C) controls concerning end point 1 to end
point 5.
■ EP1 to EP5 Control Register (EP1C to EP5C)
Figure 13.3-5 shows the bit configuration of the EP1 to EP5 control register (EP1C to EP5C).
Figure 13.3-5 EP1 to EP5 Control Register (EP1C to EP5C)
Address
bit
7
6
5
4
EP1C 0000D4H
Address
bit
EP2C 0000D6H
EP3C 0000D8H
EP4C 0000DAH
EP5C 0000DCH
Address
bit
EP1C 0000D5H
Address
bit
EP2C 0000D7H
EP3C 0000D9H
EP4C 0000DBH
EP5C 0000DDH
3
2
1
0
PKS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
← Initial value
← Access
PKS5 to PKS2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
PKS1
EPEN
TYPE
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIR
DMAE
NULE
STAL
Reserved
EPEN
TYPE
← Initial value
← Access
← Initial value
← Access
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
Note:
Ensure that you must set the EP1 to EP5 control registers (EP1C to EP5C), except DMAE, NULE,
and STAL, when both bit7 RST of the UDC control register (UDCC) and bit15 BFINI of the EP0 to
EP5 status registers (EP1S to EP5S) are "1" and must not rewrite them while the USB is operating.
The following describes the function of each bit in the EP1 to EP5 control register (EP1C to EP5C).
[bit15] EPEN: End Point 1 to End Point 5 permission bit
The end point is made effective. Setting the EPEN bit allows it to be configures by the host as an end
point for use in the USB Function. TYPE, DIR, and PKS of the EP1 to EP5 control registers become
valid for configuration information.
278
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
EPEN
Operating mode
0
End Point is invalid.
1
End Point is assumed to be effective.
[bit14, bit13] TYPE: End point forwarding type selection bits
The forwarding type supported by the end point is specified.
TYPE
Operating mode
00
Specification prohibited
01
Isochronous transfer
10
Bulk transfer
11
Interrupt transfer
Note:
In Isochronous transfer of USB 2.0, the following item was added to the specification. Initial setting:
Alternate value 0 and Maximum number of packets 0. For USB function of this series, if the Alternate
value is set to the number other than 0, STALL response is given to Host automatically and the
Alternate value cannot be changed. Therefore, maximum number of packets cannot be set by changing
the Alternate value.
[bit12] DIR: End point forwarding direction selection bit
It specifies a transfer direction that the end point supports.
DIR
Function operating mode
HOST operating mode
(for EP1 and EP2 only)
0
OUT end point
IN end point
1
IN end point
OUT end point
[bit11] DMAE: DMA automatic transfer enable bit
It is a mode setting that uses DMA for read and write operations to transmit and receive buffers for
transfer data and automatically transfers transmit and receive data in sync with IN and OUT data
requests from the HOST until data whose pieces are as many as the number of transfer data set in DMA
is transferred.
DMAE
Operating mode
0
Release of the automatic buffer TRANSFER mode
1
Set of the automatic buffer TRANSFER mode
Note:
Access to transmit and receive buffers by CPU is forbidden while the DMAE bit is set. Set the
number of DMA transfer data to a multiple of the value of the PKS set in direction the EP1 to EP5
control registers (EP1C to EP5C) when transferring data to OUT.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
279
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit10] NULE: NULL automatic transfer enable bit
This bit sets up a mode where the last packet transfer will be detected and 0-byte data transfer will be
automatically sent when IN- direction data transfer request arrives if the automatic buffer transfer mode
is set (DMAE=1).
NULE
Operating mode
0
Release of the NULL automatic TRANSFER mode
1
Set of the NULL automatic TRANSFER mode
Note:
Setting the NULE bit has no effect on communications when transferring data to OUT direction or the
automatic buffer transfer mode is not set.
[bit9] STAL:STALL set bit
Setting the STAL bit can put EndPoint in STALL status (STALL response).
STAL
Operating mode
0
Release of state of STALL
1
Set of state of STALL (STALL response)
Note:
STALL keeps responding for HOST while setting the STAL bit. The USB Function can return from
STALL status with the ClearFutcher command from the host after the STAL bit was deselected.
EP2 to EP5: [bit8, bit7] Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bit. Please write "00B". These bits always read "00B".
EP1:[bit8 to bit0] PKS: Packet size set bits
EP2 to EP5:[bit6 to bit0] PKS: Packet size set bits
The number of maximum forwarding by one packet is specified. The following lists a maximum
number of transfer packets that can be specified in each of EndPoint1 to EndPoint5.
280
EndPoint
Max. number of transfer
Range which can be set
1
256 bytes (The odd can be set).
001H to 100H
2 to 5
64 bytes (The odd can be set).
01H to 40H
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Note:
Setting any number not less than a maximum number of transfer (100H or 40H) and "00H" are
prohibited. Please write "00" in bit8, bit7 about EndPoint2 to EndPoint5. In addition, when using the
automatic buffer transfer mode (DMAE=1), setting bit0 to bit2 in the corresponding EndPoint is
forbidden.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
281
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
13.3.4
MB90330A Series
Time Stamp Register (TMSP)
The time stamp register (TMSP) displays a frame number when an SOF packet is
received.
■ Time Stamp Register (TMSP)
Figure 13.3-6 shows the bit configuration of the timestamp register (TMSP).
Figure 13.3-6 Time Stamp Register (TMSP)
Address bit
7
6
5
4
0000DEH
Address bit
0000DFH
3
2
1
0
TMSP
Time stamp register
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
← RST Reset
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
← Access
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
← Initial value
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
← RST Reset
-
-
-
-
-
R
R
R
← Access
TMSP
R : Read only
The functions of each bit of the time stamp register (TMSP) are described below.
[bit15 to bit11] Undefined bits
Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
[bit10 to bit0] TMSP: Time stamp bits
Frame number by the reception of the SOF packet is shown. When the SOF packet is received, frame
number is updated.
282
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.3.5
UDC Status Register (UDCS)
The UDC status register (UDCS) is a register that indicates the status of a bus on USB
communications and a particular command received. Each bit in the register except
SETP indicates an interrupt factor and raises an interrupt to CPU if its corresponding
interrupt enable bit is specified and valid.
■ UDC Status Register (UDCS)
Figure 13.3-7 shows the bit configurations of the UDC status register (UDCS).
Figure 13.3-7 UDC Status Register (UDCS)
Address
bit
0000E0H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
SUSP
SOF
BRST
WKUP
SETP
CONF
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
← RST Reset
-
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
UDC status register
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
The function of each bit in the UDC status register (UDCS) is described in the following.
[bit7, bit6] Undefined bits
Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
[bit5] SUSP: Suspend detection bit
It displays the fact that the USB Function shifts to suspend status. The SUSP bit is an interrupt factor
and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the read modification write.
SUSP
Operating mode
0
Suspend undetection and interruption clear factor
1
Suspend detection
[bit4] SOF:SOF reception detection bit
It indicates that an SOF packet has been received, and the value of the time stamp register is updated.
The SOF bit is an interrupt factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at
the read modification write.
SOF
CM44-10129-6E
Operating mode
0
SOF unreception and interruption clear factor
1
The SOF packet is received.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
283
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit3] BRST: Bus reset detection bit
The detection of USB bus reset is displayed. The BRST bit is an interrupt factor and writing "1" is
ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the read modification write.
BRST
Operating mode
0
USB bus reset undetected and interrupt factors clear
1
USB bus reset is detected.
Note:
Set registers again by initializing the USB Function with RST in the UDCC register when the BRST
bit is detected.
[bit2] WKUP: Wake-Up detection bit
It displays the fact that the USB Function has returned from suspend status. What causes the USB
Function to return from suspend status are a remote wake-up by setting the RESUM bit and a wake-up
from the host request, and the WKUP bit is automatically set only by a return request from the host. The
WKUP bit is an interrupt factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the
read modification write.
WKUP
Operating mode
0
HOST factor RESUME undetected and interrupt factors clear
1
HOST factor RESUME is detected.
Note:
Even if a wake up is caused by a host request, the WKUP bit is not set when the RESUM bit in the
UDCC register is set.
[bit1] SETP:SETUP stage detection bit
It indicates that received data belongs to the Setup stage of USB control transfer. "1" Writing is
disregarded. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the read modification write.
SETP
Operating mode
0
SETUP unreception and clear factor
1
Control forwarding SETUP stage is received.
Note:
It is not set when automatically responding to any standard command. The SETP bit is not an
interruption factor.
284
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit0] CONF: Configuration detection bit
It displays the fact that the USB Function has been configured. The CONF bit is set when a SetConfig,
a USB command, has been successfully received. The CONF bit is an interrupt factor and writing "1" is
ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the read modification write.
CONF
CM44-10129-6E
Operating mode
0
SetConfig undetection and interruption clear factor
1
SetConfig is detected.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
285
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
UDC Interruption Enable Register (UDCIE)
13.3.6
The UDC interrupt enable register (UDCIE) is a register that allows each interrupt factor
in the UDC status register to be raised as an interrupt bit wisely except CONFN.
■ UDC Interruption Enable Register (UDCIE)
Figure 13.3-8 shows the bit configuration of the UDC interrupt enable register (UDCIE).
Figure 13.3-8 UDC Interrupt Enable Register (UDCIE)
Address
0000E1H
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
Reserved
SUSPIE
SOFIE
BRSTIE
WKUPIE
CONFN
CONFIE
UDC interrupt
enable register
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
← RST Reset
-
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
R:
Read Only
The function of each bit in the UDC interrupt enable register (UDCIE) is described in the following.
[bit15, bit14] Reserved bits
It is reserved bit. Please write "00B". These bits always read "00B".
[bit13] SUSPIE: Suspend interrupt enable bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the UDC status register "SUSP" to be generated.
SUSPIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by SUSP factor
1
Interruption permission by SUSP factor
[bit12] SOFIE: SOF reception interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the UDC status register "SOF" to be generated.
286
SOFIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by SOF factor
1
Interruption permission by SOF factor
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit11] BRSTIE: Bus reset interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the UDC status register "BRST" to be generated.
BRSTIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by BRST factor
1
Interruption permission by BRST factor
[bit10] WKUPIE: Wake-Up interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the UDC status register "WKUP" to be generated.
WKUPIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by WKUP factor
1
Interruption permission by WKUP factor
[bit9] CONFN: Configuration number display bit
It displays a configuration number. It is updated when setting the interrupt cause for the UDC status
register "CONF".
CONFN
Operating mode
0
CONFIG Number 0
1
CONFIG Number 1
[bit8] CONFIE: Configuration interrupt enable bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the UDC status register "CONF" to be generated.
CM44-10129-6E
CONFIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by CONF factor
1
Interruption permission by CONF factor
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
287
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
13.3.7
MB90330A Series
EP0I Status Register (EP0IS)
The EP0I status register (EP0IS) displays status related to transfer toward In for
EndPoint0.
■ EP0I Status Register (EP0IS)
Figure 13.3-9 shows the bit configuration of the EP0I Status Register (EP0IS).
Figure 13.3-9 EP0I Status Register (EP0IS)
Address
bit
0000E2H
Address
0000E3H
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EP0I status register
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← Initial value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← BFINI Reset
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
← Access
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIIE
-
-
-
DRQI
-
-
1
0
X
X
X
1
X
X
← Initial value
1
Irrelevance
X
X
X
1
X
X
← BFINI Reset
R/W
R/W
-
-
-
R/W
-
-
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
The function of each bit in the EP0I status register (EP0IS) is described in the following.
[bit15] BFINI: Transmission buffer initialization bit
The forwarding data transmission buffer is initialized. The BFINI bit is automatically set by setting the
RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). Consequently, when the reset operation has been
performed with the RST bit, clear the RST bit before clearing the BFINI bit.
BFINI
Operating mode
0
Cancelling Initialization
1
Initialization of transmission buffer
Note:
The initialization of the BFINI bit initializes a buffer and the DRQI bit. You must initialize the buffer
when you have set the STAL bit if necessary after you ensure that the DRQI or DRQO bit is set and
there is no access from the HOST.
288
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit14] DRQIIE: Transmit data interrupt enable bits
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the EP0I status register "DRQI" to be generated.
DRQIIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by DRQI factor
1
Interruption permission by DRQI factor
[bit13 to bit11] Undefined bits
Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
[bit10] DRQI: Transmission data interrupt request bit
It indicates that IN packet has been successfully transferred from the EP0 host, data has been read from
the transmission buffer, and the next transmit data can be written into the buffer. The DRQI bit is a
interrupt factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the read
modification write.
DRQI
Operating mode
0
Clearing interrupt cause
1
Writing transmit data enable state
Note:
After the data write of the transmission buffer is processed, the DRQI must be cleared. Also, when
the DRQI is not set, writing "0" is prohibited. When the DRQI is set to "1", writing data to the
transmission buffer is enabled. Furthermore, it indicates the data is set to the transmission buffer at
the time of clearing. Therefore, when IN packet request is performed with DRQI set "1", the NAK is
responded to the HOST automatically.
[bit9 to bit0] Undefined bits
Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
289
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
13.3.8
MB90330A Series
EP0O Status Register (EP0OS)
The EP0O status register (EP0OS) displays status related to transfer toward out for
EndPoint0.
■ EP0O Status Register (EP0OS)
Figure 13.3-10 shows the bit configuration of the EP0O Status Register (EP0OS).
Figure 13.3-10 EP0O Status Register (EP0OS)
Address
bit
0000E4H
Address
0000E5H
7
6
5
4
Reserved
bit
3
2
1
0
SIZE
EP0O status register
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← Initial value
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← BFINI Reset
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
← Access
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQOIE
SPKIE
-
-
DRQO
SPK
Reserved
1
0
0
X
X
0
0
0
← Initial value
X
X
0
0
0
← BFINI Reset
-
-
R/W
R/W
-
← Access
1
Irrelevance Irrelevance
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
R:
Read Only
The function of each bit in the EP0O status register (EP0OS) is described in the following.
[bit15] BFINI: Reception buffer initialization bit
The forwarding data reception buffer is initialized. The BFINI bit is automatically set by setting the
RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). Consequently, when the reset operation has been
performed with the RST bit, clear the RST bit before clearing the BFINI bit.
BFINI
Operating mode
0
Cancelling Initialization
1
Initialization of reception buffer
Note:
The initialization of the BFINI bit initializes a DRQO and the SPK bit. You must initialize the buffer
when you have set the STAL bit if necessary after you ensure that the DRQI or DRQO bit is set and
there is no access from the HOST.
290
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit14] DRQOIE: Received data interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the EP0O status register "DRQO" to be generated.
DRQOIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by DRQO factor
1
Interruption permission by DRQO factor
[bit13] SPKIE: Short packet interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the EP0O status register "SPK" to be generated.
SPKIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by SPK factor
1
Interruption permission by SPK factor
[bit12, bit11] Undefined bits
These bits are undefined at read. No effect on writing.
[bit10] DRQO: Received data interrupt request bit
It indicates that OUT packet has been successfully transferred from the EP0 host, data has been written
into the receive buffer, and the receive data can be read from the buffer. The DRQO bit is an interrupt
factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is read at the read modification write.
DRQO
Operating mode
0
Clearing interrupt cause
1
Reading receive data enable state
Note:
After the data read of reception buffer is processed, the DRQO must be cleared. Also, writing "0"
when the DRQO is not set is disabled. When the DRQO is set to "1", the reception buffer is not
updated. The buffer is enabled to update when it is cleared. When the OUT packet request is
executed with DRQO set "1", the NAK is responded to the HOST automatically.
[bit9] SPK: Short packet interrupt request bit
It indicates that the number of pieces of transfer data that has been successfully received from the host
is less than a maximum number of packets set in PKS in the EP0 control register (EP0C) (including 0
byte). The SPK bit is a interrupt factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1" is
read at the read modification write.
CM44-10129-6E
SPK
Operating mode
0
Maximum number of transfer packets received
1
Data less than the maximum number of transfer packets received
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
291
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit8, bit7] Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits. Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
[bit6 to bit0] SIZE: Packet size display bit
When OUT packets have been transferred from EP0, the number of data bytes that has been written into
the receive buffer is displayed. The SIZE bit is updated to a valid value when the interrupt factor for
DRQO in the EP0O status register (EP0OS) has been set.
<Example> 8 bytes → "08H", 64 bytes → "40H" (maximum value)
292
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.3.9
EP1 to EP5 Status Register (EP1S to EP5S)
The EP1 to EP5 status registers (EP1S to EP5S) displays status related to EndPoint1 to
EndPoint5.
■ EP1 to EP5 Status Register (EP1S to EP5S)
Figure 13.3-11 shows the bit configurations of the EP1 to EP5 status registers (EP1S to EP5S).
Figure 13.3-11 EP1 to EP5 Status Register (EP1S to EP5S)
Address
bit
7
6
5
4
EP1S 0000E6H
Address
bit
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← Initial value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← BFINI Reset
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
← Access
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
bit
EP1S 0000E7H
bit
EP2S 0000E9H
EP3S 0000EBH
EP4S 0000EDH
EP5S 0000EFH
SIZE
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← Initial value
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
← BFINI Reset
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
← Access
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
SIZE
1
0
0
-
0
0
0
X
← Initial value
-
Irrelevance
0
0
X
← BFINI Reset
← Access
1
Address
2
SIZE
EP2S 0000E8H
EP3S 0000EAH
EP4S 0000ECH
EP5S 0000EEH
Address
3
Irrelevance Irrelevance
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
R
R/W
R/W
R
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BFINI
DRQIE
SPKIE
Reserved
BUSY
DRQ
SPK
Reserved
1
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
← Initial value
-
Irrelevance
0
0
0
← BFINI Reset
-
R
R/W
R/W
-
← Access
1
R/W
Irrelevance Irrelevance
R/W
R/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
R:
Read Only
The function of each bit in the EP1 to EP5 status register (EP1S to EP5S) is described in the following.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
293
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit15] BFINI: Transmission/receive buffer initialization bit
The transmission and reception buffer of the forwarding data is initialized. The BFINI bit is
automatically set by setting the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). Consequently, when the
reset operation has been performed with the RST bit, clear the RST bit before clearing the BFINI bit.
BFINI
Operating mode
0
Cancelling Initialization
1
Initialization of transmitting and receiving buffer
Note:
The transmission/receive buffer for EP1 to EP5 has a configuration of double buffers and
initialization by the BFINI bit initializes the double buffers at once and also initializes the DRQ and
SPK bits. You must initialize the buffers when you have set the STAL bit after you ensure that the
DRQ bit is set and the BUSY bit shows no access from the HOST.
[bit14] DRQIE: Packet forwarding interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the EP1 to EP5 status register "DRQ" to be
generated.
DRQIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by DRQ factor
1
Interruption permission by DRQ factor
Note:
If you use the automatic buffer transfer mode (DMAE=1), you must enable the settings of DMA and
transfer before enabling the DRQIE bit.
[bit13] SPKIE: Short packet interruption permission bit
It allows an interrupt due to the interrupt factor for the EP1 to EP5 status register "SPK" to be
generated.
SPKIE
Operating mode
0
Interrupt disabled by SPK factor
1
Interruption permission by SPK factor
[bit12] Reserved bit
This bit is reserved bit. Writing has no effect on the operation. Reading is undefined.
294
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit11] BUSY: Busy flag bit
It indicates that writing into the transmission/receive buffer or accessing it for read from the HOST is
under way. The BUSY bit is set by the automatic operation, and reset.
BUSY
Operating mode
0
There is no access by HOST.
1
During writing/reading from HOST
Note:
It indicates that the HOST is accessing a buffer that is different from either of the double buffer
accessed from CPU or DMA when the DRQ bit is set and the BUSY bit is set. Normally, you do not
need to control via the BUSY bit, but if you initialize the buffer with BFINI set, you must initialize the
buffer by setting the STAL bit after you ensure that the DRQ bit is set and the BUSY bit shows no
access from the HOST.
[bit10] DRQ: Packet forwarding interrupt request bit
It indicates that the packet transfer for EP1 to EP5 has been successfully completed and data processing
is needed. The DRQ bit is a interrupt factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by writing "0". "1"
is read at the read modification write.
DRQ
Operating mode
0
Clearing Interrupt cause
1
The packet forwarding ends normally.
Note:
When the automatic buffer transfer mode (DMAE=1) is not used after the data read or write of
transmission and reception buffers is processed, "0" must be write to DRQ bit. When the DRQ bit is
cleared, access buffer is switched. When the transfer direction is set to IN direction if the DRQ bit is
"1" and the buffer is cleared without writing data, 0-byte data is set to it. In the initial setting, when the
DIR of the EP1 to EP5 control register (EP1C to EP5C) is set to "1", the DRQ bit of the
corresponding end point is set at the same time. Furthermore, writing 0 is prohibited when the DRQ
bit is not set.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
295
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
[bit9] SPK: Short packet interrupt request bit
It indicates that the number of pieces of transfer data that has been successfully received from the host
is less than a maximum number of packets set the PKS in the EP1 to EP5 control register (EP1C to
EP5C) (including 0 packet). The SPK bit is a interrupt factor and writing "1" is ignored. Please clear by
writing "0". "1" is read at the read modification write.
SPK
Operating mode
0
Max. number of transfer packets received
1
Data less than the Max. number of transfer packets received
Note:
The SPK bit is not set when data toward IN is transferred.
EP2 to EP5:[bit8, bit7] Reserved bits
In EP2 to EP5, these bits are reserved bits.
"0" is read out from the bit. No effect on writing.
EP1:[bit8 to bit0] PKS: Packet size display bits
EP2 to EP5:[bit6 to bit0] PKS: Packet size display bits
It displays the number of data bytes that have been written into the receive buffer when OUT packet
transfer for EP1 to EP5 has been completed. The SIZE bit is updated to a valid value when the interrupt
factor for DRQ in the EP1 to EP5 status register (EP1S to EP5S) has been set.
The following lists each maximum number of transfer data for EndPoint1 to 5.
EndPoint
Max. number of transfer
Range of display
1
256 Bytes
000H to 100H
2 to 5
64 Bytes
00H to 40H
Note:
Since the SIZE bit is set to the number of pieces of data that are written into the buffer from the
HOST for the OUT direction transfer, any value read from the SIZE bit when IN direction is under
way has no meaning.
296
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.3 Registers of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.3.10
EP0 to EP5 Data Register (EP0DT to EP5DT)
The EP0 to EP5 data registers (EP0DT to EP5DT) are access registers used to read or
write into the transmission/receive buffer for transfer data related to EndPoint0 to
EndPoint5.
■ EP0 to EP5 Data Register (EP0DT to EP5DT)
Figure 13.3-12 shows the bit configurations of the EP0 to EP5 data registers (EP0DT to EP5DT).
Figure 13.3-12 EP0 to EP5 Data Register (EP0DT to EP5DT)
Address
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BFDT
EP0DT 0000F0H
EP1DT 0000F2H
EP2DT 0000F4H
EP3DT 0000F6H
EP4DT 0000F8H
EP5DT 0000FAH
Address
bit
EP0DT 0000F1H
EP1DT 0000F3H
EP2DT 0000F5H
EP3DT 0000F7H
EP4DT 0000F9H
EP5DT 0000FBH
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
← Initial value
← Access
BFDT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
← Initial value
← Access
R/W : Readable/Writable
The following describes the function of each bit in the EP0 to EP5 data registers (EP0DT to EP5DT).
[bit15 to bit0] BFDT: EndPoint transmission/receive buffer data bits
It is a data read and data write register for the transmission/receive buffer for each EndPoint. Access to
the BFDT register via DMA transfer is supported on a word access only. If you transfer the odd number
of pieces of data through DMA transfer, you can do so by setting a byte transfer for the last data
transfer. If you perform word transfer via CPU access, the last transfer must be byte transfer the same
way as in DMA transfer.
Note:
CPU access to the EP0DT to EP5DT registers are possible both on a per-byte basis and on a perword basis, and if you byte access any of the registers, first, access bit7 to bit0, then access bit15 to
bit8, and subsequently access the high-order and low-order alternately. Accessing the EP0DT to
EP5DT registers via bit instruction is prohibited.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
297
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
13.4
MB90330A Series
Operation Explanation of USB Function
The USB Function conforms to the USB (Universal Serial Bus) communication protocol
and supports basic protocol operations (handshake) by hardware. Consequently, only
processing communication data can provide the USB communication.
■ Operation of USB Function
The USB Function performs two-way packet transfer with a host controller that supports the USB protocol.
A host PC and its devices are connected and configured through enumeration. Then, communications based
on various types of transfers using device drivers are performed.
This section describes the operation of the USB communications between a host PC and its devices by
using enumeration as an example.
It illustrates the operations of registers and USB packets to understand the overview of USB
communication processing.
● Enumeration process
It is the first process that establishes the connection between a host PC and its device before the USB can
operate. The host PC examines which devices are connected to the USB bus by using USB control transfer
(USB transfer type). This uses EP0 (EndPoint0) out of six endpoints (as defined in the USB specifications)
(USB Specification).
When EP1 to EP5 are used, the following must be received on the USB bus.
1. USB bus reset
2. Address set by SET_Address
3. Configuration set by SET_Config
298
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Figure 13.4-1 Connection Example of USB Cable Pin
Direction
Overview of operation
USB bus connection
detection
Host
Device
Operation is not started until the host detects
pull-up on the USB bus.
Acquiring descriptor
information
Host
Device
Data of descriptor is returned to the host.
Setting device
address
Host
Device
Any address is divided from the host.
Acquiring descriptor
information (device)
Host
Device
Data of descriptor is returned to the host.
Acquiring descriptor
information
(configuration)
Host
Device
Data of descriptor is returned to the host.
Setting configuration
Host
Device
Configuration number is divided from the host.
● Detecting a connection
The device notifies the host PC.
The host monitors the two signals (D+ and D-) on the USB bus and detects a device connection if either
signal goes to the "H" level.
For the detailed procedure in the case of a self-powered device, see "13.4.1 Detecting Connection and
Disconnection". In the case of a bus-powered device, perform the operation described in "● Example
Register Initialization and Operation Startup Procedure".
● Example Register Initialization and Operation Startup Procedure
The following is an example of how to initialize the registers and start operation.
1. Set EP0 in the EP0C register (packet size, etc.)
2. Set the EPEN, DIR, and TYPE settings for each EP in the EP1C to EP5C registers.
3. Clear the RST bit in the UDCC register
4. Clear BFINI in the EP0IS, EP0OS, and EP1S to EP5S registers
5. Clear the HCON bit in the UDCC register
● USB bus reset
A bus reset is applied from the host PC to the device and the USB device core is initialized.
A device must perform processing in the following steps. (The first bus reset after USB has been connected
does not need any processing.)
1. Initializes the USB Function with RST in the UDCC register.
2. Set transmission/receive buffers and related control registers again it will use.
3. Return firmware control to the state prior to enumeration.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
299
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
● Getting descriptor
The device receives a request from the host PC and sends data to the host.
In more detail, communications are performed in the following three stages:
Figure 13.4-2 Communication Stage
Setup stage
→
data stage
→ status stage
The setup stage ensures that the device receives normal packets from the host PC and identify the command
by decoding it. In addition, the next data stage prepares information on a descriptor to be sent back in a
transmission buffer. The data stage simply confirms that normal data is sent from the host PC. The status
stage performs end processing when the host PC sends a packet without data.
300
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.4.1
Detecting Connection and Disconnection
This section describes how to detect connection to and disconnection from the USB
host.
■ Example USB System Connection
Connection to and disconnection from the USB host can be detected by connecting an external interrupt pin
to the VBUS pin on the USB connector and connecting a pull-down resistor. Figure 13.4-3 shows an
example connection for the D+, D-, and VBUS pins on the USB connector.
Figure 13.4-3 Example USB System Connection
USB device
B connector
This device
USB host
VBUS(5V)
VBUS
External interrupt
(3.3V)
D+
1.5kΩ
27Ω
D+
USB
USB
HCON
I/O
I/O
27Ω
D-
D-
● Detecting connection
Figure 13.4-4 Operation When Detecting a Connection
Connection to HOST
VBUS
Enable external interrupts
ENx
Change in interrupt level
ERx
{LBx,LAx}
{0,1}
{0,0}
HCON
Enable connection
Time for VBUS to stabilize
The device uses the following sequence to detect a connection with the host PC.
1. Set the external interrupt connected to the VBUS to detect "H" level inputs and enable the interrupt.
2. Detection of an "H" level on the external interrupt pin indicates a connection to a USB host. When this
occurs, wait for the VBUS to stabilize.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
301
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
3. Temporarily disable the external interrupt. Change the interrupt setting to detect "L" level inputs to the
external interrupt pin, and then clear and re-enable the external interrupt.
4. Perform initialization (complete initialization including the USB Function Register). See "Example
Register Initialization and Operation Startup Procedure".
5. Clear the HCON bit in the UDCC register and connect the D+ pull-up resistor. (Clear the HCON bit
even if not performing control of the pull-up resistor.)
Note:
You do not need to allow for the above VBUS stabilization time in your program if using an external
noise filter on the external interrupt pin.
● Detecting disconnection
Figure 13.4-5 Operation When Detecting Disconnection
VBUS
Disconnect from host
ENx
Change in source level
ERx
{LBx,LAx}
{0,0}
{0,1}
On recovery from stop mode
SUSP
USTP
HCON
VBUS stabilization
time or oscillation
stabilization time
Set disconnection
The device uses the following sequence to detect a disconnection from the host PC.
1. Detection of an "L" level on the external interrupt pin connected to VBUS indicates disconnection from
the USB host.
2. On recovery from stop mode:
After waiting for the oscillation stabilization time, clear SUSP in the UDCS register followed by
USTP in the UDCC register.
When not recovering from stop mode:
Wait for the VBUS stabilization time.
3. Temporarily disable the external interrupt. Change the interrupt setting to detect "H" level inputs to the
external interrupt pin, and then clear and re-enable the external interrupt.
4. Set the HCON bit in the UDCC register and disconnect the D+ pull-up resistor. (Set the HCON bit even
if not performing control of the pull-up resistor.)
Note:
You do not need to allow for the above VBUS stabilization time in your program if using an external
noise filter on the external interrupt pin.
302
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.4.2
Each Register Operation when Command Responds
This section describes basic operations and control of registers and then how to
process USB packets (architecture). Firmware tasks triggered via CPU interrupt are
processed for each handshake operation. This is equivalent to processing each packet
on a per-stage basis.
■ Each Register Operation when Read Command Responds
For GetDescripter, SynchFrame, and the class vender command
Figure 13.4-6 Each Register Operation when Read Command Responds
Setup stage
Host PC
Device
Data stage
SET DATA
UP
0
Device
Host PC
ACK
IN
DATA0 DATA
0
write
ACK
Status stage
IN
DATA1
write
ACK
DATA
1
OUT DATA
1
ACK
DRQIIE
Command
read
DRQI
DRQOIE
Soft clear
Soft clear
DRQO
DATA1
read
SETP
Setup
processing
Next processing for
data stage
Command
completed
processing
● Set-up processing
When the setup stage is received, DRQO is set. If the DRQO is set, CPU interrupt is raised and the SETP
flag is confirmed. It reads as many commands as necessary in the receive buffer if the DRQO is set (which
does not mean all eight bytes need to be read), decode the commands, performs setting tasks, and returns to
a point where a process was interrupted after it clears the SETP flag and DRQO interrupt cause.
● Data stage processing
If the data stage indicates IN direction as a result of a decoded command, it enables the DRQIIE (as the
interrupt cause DRQI has the initial value of "1", it only sets an interrupt to be enabled), and transfers
transmission data to the transmission buffer triggered by an CPU interrupt. When transfer has been
completed, it clears the interrupt cause DRQI before returning to the interrupted point.
The DRQI is set when the data packet toward IN has been completed. The CPU interrupt is entered when
the DRQI is set, the transfer data is transferred to the transmission buffer to prepare for the next data
packet. When transfer has been completed. it clears the interrupt cause DRQI before returning to the
interrupted point.
Note:
This USB function is not compatible with the newly added commands for USB 2.0; for GetDescripter
command, respond with the USB 1.1.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
303
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
● Command completion processing
The DRQI is set when the status stage toward OUT has been completed. It enters a CPU interrupt process
when the DRQO is set, confirms that the number of received data is 0, and clears the interrupt cause DRQO
and returns to the interrupted point to prepare for the next setup stage.
■ Each Register Operation when Write Command Responds
For GetDescripter and the class vender command
Figure 13.4-7 Each Register Operation when Write Command Responds
Setup stage
Host PC
Device
SETUP DATA0
Data stage
OUT DATA0
OUT DATA1
ACK
ACK
Device
Host PC
Status stage
IN
ACK
ACK
DATA1
DRQIIE
Soft clear
DRQI
Command
read
DRQOIE
DATA0
read
DATA1 Soft clear
Soft clear read
DRQO
SETP
Setup processing
Next processing for
data stage
Command
completed
processing
● Set-up processing
When the setup stage is received, DRQO is set. If the DRQO is set, CPU interrupt is raised and the SETP
flag is confirmed. It reads as many commands as necessary in the receive buffer if the DRQO is set (which
does not mean all eight bytes need to be read), decode the commands, performs setting tasks. It clears the
DRQI (the interrupt cause DRQI due to the initial value of "1") without writing data to the transmission
buffer to prepare for a 0-byte response in the status stage, and sets the DRQIIE to confirm the successful
completion of the status stage. It also clears the SETP flag and the DRQO interrupt cause before returning
from the interrupt to the interrupted point.
● Data stage processing
The DRQO is set when the data stage toward OUT has been completed. It enters a CPU interrupt process
when the DRQO is set, and first, confirms SIZE of the EP0 status register, and then activates DMA as
many times as required for the received number of pieces of data or reads data from the receive buffer via
CPU read. Then, it clears the DRQO interrupt cause before returning from the interrupt to the interrupted
point.
● Command completion processing
The DRQI is set when the status stage toward IN has been completed. It enters a CPU interrupt process
when the DRQI is set, and can confirm that the status stage has been successfully completed. Then, it clears
the DRQIIE interrupt enable before returning to the interrupted point.
304
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.4.3
STALL Response and Release
For Endpoint0 and For Endpoints 1 to 5, this section explains STALL response and
release procedures.
■ STALL response and release procedures for Endpoint0
STALL response and release procedures for Endpoint0 are executed with STAL bit of EP0 Control
Register (EP0C).
• Set timing of STAL bit
For STALL response, interprets the command at detecting SETP bit of "1" (DRQO bit = 1 for interrupt)
that indicates the set-up stage of control transfer. (See Figure 13.4-8.)
After setting STAL bit, clear interrupt cause (DRQO bit).
Figure 13.4-8 Figure 31.4-7 STAL Bit Set Timing
Idle time
Data stage
Set-up stage
Token
packet
Data
packet
Handshake
packet
Token
packet
Data
packet
Handshake
packet
DRQO bit
SETP bit
STAL bit
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
305
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
• STAL Bit Clear Timing
For STALL release, clears STAL bit at detecting SETP bit of "1" (DRQO bit = 1 for interrupt) that
indicates the set-up stage of control transfer, and sets STAL bit if the STALL response is required. (See
Figure 13.4-9.)
Figure 13.4-9 STAL Bit Clear Timing
Idle time
Data stage
Set-up stage
Token
packet
Data
packet
Handshake
packet
Token
packet
Data
packet
Handshake
packet
DRQO bit
SETP bit
STAL bit clear timing
STAL bit
Within idle time and 2.75 μs
For STALL response release (STAL bit clear), clear STAL bit the period between the time when SETP
bit of "1" (DRQO bit= 1 for interrupt) is detected and the time when the data packet transmission/
reception of the next data stage is started. The period between the time when DRQO becomes "1" and
the time when STAL bit is cleared is as follows: (Transfer speed: at Full speed of 12Mbps) When STAL
bit is not cleared in the following period, execute STAL response with the handshake of data stage.
The period between the time when DRQO bit of "1" is detected and the time when STAL bit is cleared:
within idle time + 2.75 μs
* When idle time is the shortest period of 2-bit transfer time, the above period is within about 2.9 μs.
If the STAL bit clear cannot executed within the above period, take an appropriate countermeasures such
as lengthening of the idle time with a driver of USB host.
■ STALL response /release of Endpoints 1 to 5
STALL response /release of Endpoints 1 to 5 are controlled with Control registers of EP1 to EP5 and
internal condition bit
• To execute STAL response with software
The procedures to execute STAL response with software are shown in Figure 13.4-10. To execute STAL
response, set STAL bit of the relevant endpoint with software. In this time, the internal condition bit
does not change. Furthermore, when a host generates a transaction to the endpoint where STAL bit is set,
hardware would automatically set the internal condition bit of the relevant endpoint and gives STALL
response to the host.
Once the internal condition bit is set, the internal condition bit has been set and continues STAL response
until Clear Feature command is issued from the host despite of the clearing of STAL bit.
As long as the STAL bit is set, STAL bit response continues even if the internal condition bit is cleared
with Clear Feature command because the internal condition bit is set every time a transaction to the
relevant endpoint occurs. Therefore, to release the STAL response, be sure to clear STAL bit and the
internal condition bit with the Clear Feature command.
306
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Figure 13.4-10 Case where STALL response is executed with software processing
Host or hub
Function
EPn (End Point n)
of Function Macro
Internal
STAL bit
Condition bit
0
Internal
Condition bit
0
Software
0
STAL bit
Sets STAL bit
to "1".
1
IN/OUT token
Data (at OUT)
STAL handshake
Internal
Condition bit
STAL bit
1
1
When STAL bit is "1", if a
transaction occurs, the
internal condition bit is
set to "1".
IN/OUT token
Data (at OUT)
Transaction
to EPn
When the internal condition
bit is "1", STALL response to
a transaction continues.
STAL handshake
Internal
Condition bit
IN/OUT token
Data (at OUT)
STAL handshake
1
STAL bit
0
Clear STAL bit
to "0"
When the internal condition
bit is "1", STALL response to
a transaction continues
Although STAL bit is "0", it
does not affect the internal
condition bit.
Setup token
Clear Feature
command to EP0
(EPn is specified.)
Data
ACK handshake
When EPn is specified with
Clear Feature command,
the internal condition bit is
cleared to "0".
Internal
Condition bit
0
CM44-10129-6E
STAL bit
0
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
307
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
• To automatically execute STALL response with hardware.
The procedures to execute STAL response with hardware are shown in Figure 13.4-11. When STALL
response is set with Set Feature command, the hardware would automatically set the internal condition
bit of the relevant endpoint and gives the STALL response regardless of the STAL bit. Once the internal
condition bit is set, the internal condition bit has been held until Clear Feature command is issued from
the host to clear the internal condition bit regardless of STAL bit. After the relevant bit is cleared with
Clear Feature command, STAL bit is referenced. Therefore, to clear STAL response, be sure to clear the
internal condition bit with Clear Feature command.
Figure 13.4-11 Case where STALL response is executed with hardware automatically
Host or hub
Function
EPn (End Point n)
of Function Macro
Internal
STAL bit
Condition bit
0
Software
0
Setup token
Set Feature
command to EP0
(EPn is specified.)
Data (at OUT)
ACK handshake
When EPn is specified with
Set Feature command, the
internal condition bit is set
to "1".
Internal
Condition bit
1
STAL bit
0
IN/OUT token
Data (at OUT)
Transaction
to EPn
STALL handshake
When the internal condition
bit is "1", STALL response to
a transaction continues.
Although STAL bit is "0", it
does not affect the internal
condition bit.
Setup token
Clear Feature
command to EP0
(EPn is specified.)
308
Data
ACK handshake
Internal
Condition bit
STAL bit
0
0
When EPn is specified with
Set Feature command, the
internal condition bit is
cleared to "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.4.4
Suspend Function
A USB device must have a configuration of bus power supply where power
consumption is 500μA or less in suspend status. The section covers a USB device from
its transmitting to suspend status to its entering STOP mode.
■ Suspend Processing
When the USB device core detects suspend status, SUSP of the UDCS register is set to be enabled.
The following shows an example of suspend operation:
Figure 13.4-12 Suspend Operation
Host PC
Device
1ms
SOF
1ms
SOF
3ms
SOF
Suspend state
Remote wake-up support
2ms
SUSP
STP
SUSP flag
Soft clear
● Suspend processing
The USB Function determines that it detects suspend status when there is no operation for not less than 3
ms on the USB bus, and the SUSP interrupt cause in the UDCS register is set. If a USB device supports
remote wake-up, the USB Function waits another 2 ms (which blocks remote wake-up during this time
period), and set the device to stop mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
309
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
13.4.5
MB90330A Series
Wake-up Function
To shift a USB device from suspend status to wake-up status, the USB protocol
provides the following two ways:
• Remote wake-up from device
• Wake-up from host PC
The above is explained.
■ Remote Wake-up
Figure 13.4-13 Remote Wake-up Operation
Suspend state
Host PC
Device
Device
Host PC
20ms
1ms
1ms
RESUME
SOF
SOF
RESUME
Oscillation
stabilization time
10ms
RESUM
STP
INT pin
RESUM
Soft set, clear
External interrupt
A device must perform processing in the following steps:
1. Recover the device from stop mode through external interrupt.
2. RESUM of the UDCC register is set.
3. RESUM of the UDCC register is cleared.
■ Wake-up from Host
Figure 13.4-14 Wake-up Operation from Host
Suspend state
not less than 20ms
Host PC
Device
RESUME
Oscillation
stabilization time
WKUP
1ms
1ms
SOF
SOF
WKUP flag
Soft clear
STP
For the devices, the following processing is required:
1. Set oscillation stabilizing time to be not more than 10 ms.
2. Enter an interrupt due to the WKUP factor and clear WKUP of UDCS that is the interrupt cause and
return from the interrupt.
310
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.4.6
DMA Transfer Function
It is possible to transfer data between transmission/receive buffer and internal RAM that
the USB Function communicates. You can select the following two modes in DMA
transfer: one is packet transfer mode where data is transferred based on the number of
pieces of transfer set on a per-packet basis and another is data number automatic
transfer mode where all data is transferred based on the number of pieces of data
specified once. Each DMA transfer mode is explained.
■ Packet Transfer Mode
• The packet transfer mode performs transfer by setting the number of pieces of transfer per packet in
DMA and clearing the interrupt cause when transfer has been completed. The transfer mode can access
any buffer in each endpoint.
• Timing by which the buffer is accessed in OUT direction and IN direction is shown as follows.
• OUT direction (host PC → device) forwarding
Figure 13.4-15 OUT Packet Forwarding
OUT packet
Host PC
Device
Device
Host PC
DMAE
OUT
OUT packet
OUT
DATA0
DATA1
ACK
ACK
DRQ flag*
CPU clear
DRQ flag*
CPU clear
DRQIE
DRQ
SIZE
DER(ENx)
DMA receive buffer read
(DATA0)
DMA receive buffer read
(DATA1)
In OUT- direction transfer, a USB device must perform processes in the follows steps:
1. It confirms the number of pieces of transfer data when the DRQ flag is set and the interrupt process is
entered.
2. It sets the number of pieces of transfer data in the data counter register DDCT of DMA, enables DMA
with the DER register, and start transfer.
3. Once transfer has been completed, it clears the corresponding DRQ flag in the EP1S to EP5S registers
and the corresponding interrupt factor flag in the DSR register of μDMAC and returns from the interrupt
process.
*: EP1 to EP5 consists of the double buffers, it can be cleared only when one buffer that is not being
accessed is empty and data is read from another buffer being accessed and cannot be cleared even
though "0" is written to it if one buffer that is not being accessed has data left to be read (Dotted line
status). It continuously enters the DRQ interrupt process.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
311
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
● IN direction (host PC → device) forwarding
Figure 13.4-16 IN Packet Forwarding
IN packet
IN packet
Host PC
Device
Device
DRQ flag*
Host PC CPU clear
DMAE
DRQIE
IN
ACK
DATA0
IN
DRQ flag*
CPU clear
ACK
DATA1
DRQ
DER(Enx)
DMA sending buffer write
(DATA0)
DMA sending buffer write
(DATA1)
In IN- direction transfer, a USB device must perform processes in the follows steps:
1. When the DRQ flag is set and enters the interrupt process, it sets the number of pieces of data to be
transferred in an IN packet in the data counter register DDCT of DMA, enables DMA with the DER
register, and start transfer.
2. Once DMA transfer has been completed, it clears the corresponding DRQ flag in the EP1S to EP5S
registers and the corresponding interrupt factor flag in the DSR register of μDMAC and returns from the
interrupt process.
*: EP1 to EP5 consists of the double buffers, it can be cleared only when one buffer that is not being
accessed has already data written into it and data is written into another buffer that is being accessed
and cannot be cleared even though "0" is written to it when one buffer that is not being accessed is
empty (Dotted line status). It continuously enters the DRQ interrupt process.
312
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
■ Data Number Automatic Transfer Mode
It sets the total number of pieces of data to be transferred in DMA and sets the transfer enable bit in
advance. When DMAE is enabled and the DRQ is set after transfer from the HOST has been completed,
the interrupt cause is automatically cleared when data whose number of pieces is equal to the PKS in the
EP1 to EP5 control registers (EPxC) has been transferred (Whether the DRQ flag is actually cleared
depends on the fact that both buffers in a double buffer are empty or full). Subsequently, when transfer
from the HOST has been completed, repeat the similar process until data equivalent to the number of pieces
of transfer data predefined in DMA. has been transferred. Meanwhile, any intervention from CPU is not
required, and transfer will be completed with only one setting, which is the automatic transfer mode. If the
device performs the next transfer, it sets μDMAC again and enables DMA when a CPU interrupt is raised
when the last data has been transferred, and returns from the CPU interrupt. Since the data number
automatic transfer mode is used for DMAE=1, only buffer access to endpoint 1 to endpoint5 is enabled.
Timing by which the buffer is accessed in OUT direction and IN direction is shown as follows.
Figure 13.4-17 OUT Direction (Host PC → Device) Forwarding
OUT packet
Host PC
Device
Device
Host PC
OUT
Last OUT packet
OUT DATA1
DATA0
ACK DRQ flag*
Automatic
clear
DRQ flag*
ACK Automatic
clear
DMAE
DRQIE
DATA0
DRQ
SIZE
DATA1
DER(Enx)
Read PKS part of
DMA receive buffer
Read the rest of
DMA receive buffer
In both OUT- direction and IN- direction transfer, a USB device must perform processes in the following
steps:
1. It sets the total number of pieces of data to be transferred in the data counter register DDCT in DMA
and enables DMA with the DER register.
2. DMAE and DRQIE, are permitting set.
3. Once transfer has been completed, it sets μDMAC again with an interrupt due to the corresponding
interrupt factor in the DSR register of μDMAC and clear the flag if necessary, and returns from the
interrupt process.
*: It consists the double buffers of EP1 to EP5. It should be cleared only (auto-reset) when one buffer that
is not being accessed is empty and data is read from another buffer being accessed (Automatic clear)
and cannot be cleared if one buffer that is not being accessed has data left to be read. It continuously
enters the DRQ interrupt process.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
313
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
Figure 13.4-18 IN Direction (Device → Host PC) Forwarding
Last data
Data
Host PC
Device
Device
Host PC
ACK
IN
DRQ flag *
Automatic
clear
DATA0
ACK
IN
DRQ flag*
Automatic
clear
DATA1
DMAE
DRQIE
DRQ
DATA0
DATA1
DER(Enx)
Write PKS part of
DMA sending buffer
Write the rest of
DMA sending buffer
In both OUT- direction and IN- direction transfer, a USB device must perform processes in the following
steps:
1. It sets the total number of pieces of data to be transferred in the data counter register DDCT in DMA
and enables DMA with the DER register.
2. DMAE and DRQIE, are permitting set.
3. Once transfer has been completed, it sets μDMAC again with an interrupt due to the corresponding
interrupt factor in the DSR register of μDMAC and clear the flag if necessary, and returns from the
interrupt process.
*: EP1 to EP5 consists of the double buffers, it can be cleared only when one buffer that is not being
accessed has already data written into it and data is written into another buffer that is being accessed
and cannot be cleared when one buffer that is not being accessed is empty. It continuously enters the
DRQ interrupt process.
314
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
MB90330A Series
13.4.7
NULL Transfer Function
If data sent from the USB Function is the last packet and a maximum number of
packets, it is possible to automatically transfer 0-byte data in the next packet transfer.
The NULL transfer function requires that DMAE is enabled and is a function that is only
valid for IN transfer.
■ NULL Transfer Mode
● This is the mode where if the automatic buffer transfer mode is set (DMAE=1) and IN-direction data
transfer request arrives, and a maximum number of packets are written via DMA and the last data write
decrements the number of DMA count data to "0", it automatically sets 0-byte data transfer and will
send 0-byte data for the next IN-direction data transfer request when the last IN-direction data transfer
request from the HOST has been received. The DRQ interrupt flag is not set until 0-byte data is read
from the HOST after the last data was written into a buffer via DMA. Timing by which the buffer is
accessed is shown as follows.
● Only IN direction (device → host PC) forwarding
Figure 13.4-19 NULL Data Transfer Operation
Data before last
Host PC
Device
DRQ flag
Device
Automatic
Host PC clear
IN
Last data
ACK
IN
DATA0
0 byte data
ACK
DATA1
IN
ACK
DATA0
DMAE
DRQIE
DRQ
Last data
DATA1
NULE
DER(ENx)
DMA sending buffer
MAX packet write
Interrupt factor is
not set.
For the devices, the following processing is required:
DMAE, DRQIE, and NULE are permitting set.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
315
CHAPTER 13 USB FUNCTION
13.4 Operation Explanation of USB Function
316
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14
USB HOST
This chapter describes the functions and operation of
USB HOST.
14.1 Feature of USB HOST
14.2 Restriction on USB HOST
14.3 Block Diagram of USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.6 Each Token Flow Chart of USB HOST
Code: CM44-00102-1E
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
317
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.1 Feature of USB HOST
14.1
MB90330A Series
Feature of USB HOST
USB HOST provides minimum host operations required and is a function that enables
data to be transferred to and from Device without PC intervention.
■ Feature of USB HOST
USB HOST has not only original function as the USB host but also the USB function by switching
operation mode.
USB HOST has the following features.
• Automatic detection of Low Speed/Full Speed forwarding
• Low Speed/Full Speed forwarding support
• Automatic detection of connection and cutting device
• Reset sending function support to USB bus
• Support of IN/OUT/SETUP/SOF token
• Automatic transmission of handshake packet for IN token (excluding STALL)
• Handshake packet automatic detection at OUT token
• Supports a maximum packet length of 256 bytes.
• Various error (CRC error/toggle error/time-out) supports
• Wake Up function support
318
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.2 Restriction on USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.2
Restriction on USB HOST
This section indicates Restriction on USB HOST.
■ Restriction on USB HOST
HOST
❍*
Support Hub
Transfer
Transfer speed
Bulk transfer
❍
Control transfer
❍
Interrupt transfer
❍
Isochronous transfer
×
Low Speed
❍
Full Speed
❍
PRE packet support
×
SOF packet support
❍
Error
CRC error
❍
Toggle error
❍
Time-out
❍
Max. packet < Receive Data
❍
Detection of connection and cutting of device
❍
Transfer speed detection
❍
❍: Supported
: Not supported
* : Only Full Speed corresponds, and HUB is a support up to one step.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
319
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.3 Block Diagram of USB HOST
14.3
MB90330A Series
Block Diagram of USB HOST
Figure 14.3-1 shows the block diagram of USB HOST.
■ UART Block Diagram of USB HOST
Figure 14.3-1 Block Diagram of USB HOST
RX
Selector
Receive
control unit
Buffer
HRX
CPU I/F
UDC I/F
TX
TXENL
Transmit
control unit
HTX
USB bus reset
control unit
Explanation of block
CPUI/F
Buffer
CPUI/F
USB bus reset control part
RX control part
TX control part:
Host TX control part:
TX
RX
TXENL
HTX
HRX
HTXENL
320
Host receive
control unit
HTXENL
: Interface circuit block with CPU
: Buffer and buffer control circuit block
: Interface circuit block with CPU
: USB bus reset and connection control block
: Receive data serial to parallel conversion circuit and RX control circuit block
: Transmission data parallel to serial conversion circuit
and TX control circuit block for the USB Function
: Transmission data parallel to serial conversion circuit
and TX control circuit block for HOST
: Transmission data signal of function
: Received data signal of function
: Function transmission and receive direction signal
: HOST transmit data signal
: HOST receive data signal
: HOST transmission and receive direction signal
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.4
Register of USB HOST
In USB HOST, there are the following ten types of registers:
• Host control register 0,1(HCNT0/HCNT1)
• Host interruption register (HIRQ)
• Host error status register (HERR)
• Host state status register (HSTATE)
• SOF interruption FRAME comparison register (HFCOMP)
• Retry timer setting register (HRTIMER)
• HOST address register (HADR)
• EOF setting register (HEOF)
• FRAME setting register (HFRAME)
• Host token end point register (HTOKEN)
■ Register of USB HOST
• Host control register 0
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RWKIRE
URIRE
CMPIRE
CNNIRE
DIRE
SOFIRE
URST
HOST
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SOFSTEP
CANCEL
RETRY
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address: 0000C2H
TCAN
Reserved
RWKIRQ
URIRQ
CMPIRQ
CNNIRQ
DIRQ
SOFIRQ
Read/Write
→
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
Initial value
→
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LSTSOF
RERR
TOUT
CRC
TGERR
STUFF
HS
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(11B)
Address: 0000C0H
Read/Write
→
Initial value →
HCNT0
• Host control register 1
bit
15
Address: 0000C1H Reserved
Read/Write
→
Initial value →
HCNT1
• Host interruption register
bit
HIRQ
• Host error status register
bit
Address: 0000C3H
Read/Write
→
Initial value →
HERR
(Continued)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
321
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
(Continued)
• Host state status register
bit
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
ALIVE
CLKSEL
SOFBUSY
SUSP
TMODE
CSTAT
→
(-)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R)
(R)
Initial value →
(x)
(0)
(1)
(0)
(0)
(1)
(0)
11
10
9
8
Address: 0000C4H
Read/Write
6
HSTATE
• SOF interruption FRAME comparison register
bit
15
14
13
12
Address: 0000C5H
Read/Write
FRAMECOMP
→
HFCOMP
(R/W)
Initial value →
(00000000B)
• Retry timer setting register
bit
7
6
5
4
Address: 0000C6H
Read/Write
→
bit
1
0
HRTIMER
(R/W)
(00000000B)
15
14
13
12
Address: 0000C7H
11
10
9
8
RTIMER1
→
HRTIMER
(R/W)
Initial value →
bit
2
RTIMER0
Initial value →
Read/Write
3
(00000000B)
7(23)
6(22)
5(21)
Address: 0000C8H
4(20)
3(19)
2(18)
1(17)
0(16)
Reserved
RTIMER2
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(00B)
Read/Write
HRTIMER
• Host address register
bit
15
14
13
12
Address: 0000C9H Reserved
11
10
8
Address
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(0000000B)
Read/Write
9
HADR
• EOF setting Register
bit
7
6
5
4
3
Address:0000CAH
EOF0
→
(R/W)
Read/Write
Initial value →
bit
Address:0000CBH
2
0
HEOF
(00000000B)
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved
EOF1
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(000000B)
Read/Write
1
9
8
HEOF
(Continued)
322
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
(Continued)
• FRAME setting Register
bit
7
6
5
4
Address:0000CCH
Read/Write
2
1
HFRAME
(R/W)
Initial value →
(00000000B)
15
14
Address:0000CDH
13
12
11
10
9
Reserved
FRAME1
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(000B)
Read/Write
0
FRAME0
→
bit
3
8
HFRAME
• Host token end point register
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Address:0000CEH
TGGL
TKNEN
ENDPT
→
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(000B)
(0000B)
Read/Write
Initial value →
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
0
HTOKEN
323
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.4.1
MB90330A Series
Host Control Register 0,1(HCNT0/HCNT1)
Host control registers 0,1(HCNT0/HCNT1) specify the USB operation mode and the
settings of an interrupt.
■ Host Control Register 0, 1(HCNT0/HCNT1)
Figure 14.4-1 Bit Configuration of Host Control Register 0, 1 (HCNT0/HCNT1)
Host control register 0
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RWKIRE
URIRE
CMPIRE
CNNIRE
DIRE
SOFIRE
URST
HOST
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
(❍)
( )
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SOFSTEP
CANCEL
RETRY
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
Address: 0000C0H
Read/Write
→
HCNT0
Host control register 1
bit
Address: 0000C1H Reserved
Read/Write
→
HCNT1
[bit 15 to bit 11] Reserved
It is reserved bit.
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
[bit 10] SOFSTEP: SOF interrupt condition selection
It sets whether an interrupt due to SOF is generated every time SOF is executed. The interrupt is
enabled when the SOFIRE bit in host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1".
When it is "0", the interrupt is generated via the setting of the SOF interrupt FRAME comparison
register (HFCOMP), and when it is "1", the interrupt is unconditionally generated every time SOF is
executed. However, the interruption is not generated at the first SOF token. It is not initialized with the
RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
SOFSTEP
324
Operation mode
0
Interrupt is generated due to the setting of HFCOMP.
1
Interruption generation
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 9] CANCEL: Token cancellation permission
This bit sets whether a token is to be cancelled when the token (which is issued in an EOF area) has
never been executed and is in waiting status if the SOFIRQ bit in the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is
"1". It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
CANCEL
Operation mode
0
Token continuance
1
Token discontinuance
[bit 8] RETRY: Retry permission
This bit sets whether a retry is attempted when a NAK and CRC errors happen. It is not initialized with
the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
RETRY
Operation mode
0
No retry
1
Retry
[bit 7] RWKIRE: Reactivation interrupt request permission
It is a bit to set whether an interrupt is to be generated when the HOST function can be operational after
resume operation has been completed. In host mode, to enter suspend status, write "1" to the SUSP bit
in the host state status register. Only the host mode is effective. It is not initialized with the RST bit in
the UDC control register (UDCC).
RWKIRE
Operation mode
0
Reactivation interrupt disable
1
Reactivation interrupt enable
[bit 6] URIRE: USB bus reset interrupt request enable
This bit sets whether an interrupt is to be generated when reset operation to the USB bus has been
completed. Only the host mode is effective. It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control
register (UDCC).
URIRE
CM44-10129-6E
Operation mode
0
Interrupt disabled after USB bus is reset
1
Interruption enable after USB bus is reset
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
325
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 5] CMPIRE: Completion interrupt request enable
It sets whether an interrupt is generated when a token has been completed. Only the host mode is
effective. It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
CMPIRE
Operation mode
0
Completion interrupt disabled
1
Completion interrupt enabled
[bit 4] CNNIRE: Connection interrupt request enable
It is a bit used to set whether an interrupt is generated when a connection is made to a device. Only the
host mode is effective. It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
CNNIRE
Operation mode
0
Interrupt disabled when device is connected
1
Interruption enable when device is connected
[bit 3] DIRE: Disconnection interrupt request enable
It is a bit used to set whether an interrupt is generated when a disconnection is made to a device. Only
the host mode is effective. It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
DIRE
Operation mode
0
Interrupt disabled when device is cut
1
Interruption enable when device is cut
[bit 2] SOFIRE:SOF interrupt request enable
It is a bit used to set whether an interrupt is generated when sending an SOF. Only the host mode is
effective. It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
SOFIRE
326
Operation mode
0
Interrupt disabled when SOF is transmitted
1
Interrupt enabled when SOF is transmitted
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 1] URST: USB bus reset
It is set to USB bus whether reset is generated. It indicates "1" while the USB bus is being reset and
turns "0" when it has been completed. It is forbidden to set it to "1" when the SUSP bit in the host state
status register (HSTATE) is "1" or while a token is being executed. It is also forbidden to update the
host control registers (HCNT0, HCNT1) while it is set to "1". Only the host mode is effective. To
update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
URST
Operation mode
0
USB bus state maintenance
1
USB bus reset
[bit 0] HOST: Host mode
The LSI is set whether it is a function or HOST. Since it is not initialized due to the RST bit in the UDC
control register (UDCC), change it when the RST bit is "1".
And, if you change the mode from function mode to host mode, make a disconnection to the HOST PC
or HUB by setting the HCON bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "1". If you change the mode
from host mode to function mode, ensure that the SOFBUSY bit in the host status register (HSTATE) is
set to "0" and the TKNEN bit in the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) is 000B.
HOST
CM44-10129-6E
Operation mode
0
Function mode
1
Host mode
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
327
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.4.2
MB90330A Series
Host Interruption Register (HIRQ)
The host interrupt register (HIRQ) indicates for the interrupt request flag for USB HOST.
It can allow an interrupt to be generated by setting the interrupt enable bit in the host
control registers (HCNT0/HCNT1) except the TCAN bit.
■ Host Interruption Register (HIRQ)
Figure 14.4-2 Bit Configuration of Host Interruption Register (HIRQ)
Host interruption register
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address: 0000C2H
TCAN
Reserved
RWKIRQ
URIRQ
CMPIRQ
CNNIRQ
DIRQ
SOFIRQ
→
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
( )
( )
(❍)
Read/Write
Initial value →
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
HIRQ
[bit 7] TCAN: Token cancellation flag
When the SOFIRQ bit in the host interrupt register (HIRQ) becomes "1", it indicates that a token is
cancelled without being executed once. Any interrupt is not raised because the register is combined with
interrupt due to SOF. To set it to "0", write "0" to it.
To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
TCAN
Operation mode
0
There is no token discontinuance.
1
There is token discontinuance.
[bit 6] Reserved
It is reserved bit.
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
[bit 5] RWKIRQ: Reactivation interrupt request
It indicates that resume operation has been completed. When it becomes "1", it gets back to "0" by
writing "0" to it. When you write "1" to it, the current state will be preserved. If the RWKIRE bit in the
host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt is generated when it is "1". The interrupt signal is
cleared when it is cleared with "0".
To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
RWKIRQ
328
Operation mode
0
There is no interrupt request by reactivation.
1
There is an interrupt request by reactivation.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 4] URIRQ: USB bus interrupt request
It is shown that reset in USB bus ended. When it becomes "1", it gets back to "0" by writing "0" to it.
When you write "1" to it, the current state will be preserved. If the URIRE bit in the host control
register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt is generated when it is "1". The interrupt signal is cleared when
it is cleared with "0".
To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
URIRQ
Operation mode
0
There is no interrupt request by USB bus reset.
1
There is an interrupt request by USB bus reset.
[bit 3] CMPIRQ: Completion interrupt request
It is shown to have completed the token. It is not set to "1" when the TCAN bit in the host interrupt
register (HIRQ) is "1". When it becomes "1", it gets back to "0" by writing "0" to it. When you write
"1" to it, the current state will be preserved. If the CMPIRE bit in the host control register 0 (HCNT0) is
"1", an interrupt is generated when it is "1". The interrupt signal is cleared when it is cleared with "0".
To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
CMPIRQ
Operation mode
0
There is no interrupt request by token completion.
1
There is an interrupt request by the token completion.
[bit 2] CNNIRQ: Connected interrupt request
It is shown to have detected the connection of the device. When it becomes "1", it gets back to "0" by
writing "0" to it. When you write "1" to it, the current state will be preserved. If the CNNIRE bit in the
host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt is generated when it is "1". The interrupt signal is
cleared when it is cleared with "0".
It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
CNNIRQ
CM44-10129-6E
Operation mode
0
Interrupt request none by device connection detection.
1
Indicates interrupt request due to device connection detected.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
329
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 1] DIRQ: Cutting interrupt request
It is shown to have detected cutting the device. When it becomes "1", it gets back to "0" by writing "0"
to it. When you write "1" to it, the current state will be preserved. If the DIRE bit in the host control
register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt is generated when it is "1". The interrupt signal is cleared when
it is cleared with "0".
It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
DIRQ
Operation mode
0
There is no interrupt request by device cutting detection.
1
There is interrupt request by device cutting detection.
[bit 0] SOFIRQ: SOF interruption requests
Whether the SOF token was begun is shown. When it becomes "1", it gets back to "0" by writing "0" to
it. When you write "1" to it, the current state will be preserved. If the SOFIRE bit in the host control
register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt is generated when it is "1". The interrupt signal is cleared when
it is cleared with "0".
To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
SOFIRQ
330
Operation mode
0
There is no interrupt request by SOF token beginning.
1
There is an interrupt request by the SOF token beginning.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.4.3
Host Error Status Register (HERR)
The host error status register (HERR) is a register that indicates whether an error
occurs or not when sending or receiving data in host mode.
■ Host Error Status Register (HERR)
Figure 14.4-3 Bit Configuration of Host Error Status Register (HERR)
Host error status register
bit
Address: 0000C3H
Read/Write
→
Initial value →
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LSTSOF
RERR
TOUT
CRC
TGERR
STUFF
HS
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(11B)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
HERR
[bit 15] LSTSOF:SOF execution error
It indicates that an SOF token could not be executed because another token was running when you tried
to execute it in host mode. Please do "0" in the writing to clear "1". To update them, you must set the
RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
LSTSOF
Operation mode
0
SOF execution
1
SOF execution error
[bit 14] RERR: Receive error
It indicates whether data more than a maximum number of packets set was received in host mode.
When the reception error occurs, TOUT is set in "1".
Please do "0" in the writing to clear "1". To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control
register (UDCC) to "0".
RERR
CM44-10129-6E
Operation mode
0
No receive error
1
The maximum packet reception error
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
331
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 13] TOUT: Time-out
It indicates whether time-out was generated. If "1" is cleared, write "0" to this bit. The bit is updated
after the RST bit of the UDC control register (UDCC) is set to "0".
TOUT
Operation mode
0
There is no time-out.
1
There is a time-out.
[bit 12] CRC:CRC error
It is shown whether the CRC error occurred at the host mode. When the CRC error occurs, TOUT is set
in "1".
Please do "0" in the writing to clear "1".
To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
CRC
Operation mode
0
There is no CRC error.
1
There is a CRC error.
[bit 11] TGERR: Toggle error
In indicates whether an toggle error occurs in host mode. Please do "0" in the writing to clear "1". To
update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
TGERR
Operation mode
0
There is no toggle error.
1
There is a toggle error.
[bit 10] STUFF: Stuffing error
It indicates whether a stuffing error happens in host mode. TOUT is also set to "1" when a stuffing error
occurs.
Please do "0" in the writing to clear "1". To update it, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control
register (UDCC) to "0".
332
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 9, bit 8] HS: Handshake status
It indicates the status of handshake operations between transmission and reception in host mode. It
indicates NULL when handshake operation is not performed due to any reasons such as an error and the
SOF token is completed. It is updated when transmission or reception has been completed. To update
them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
Table 14.4-1 Handshake
HS
Handshake
CM44-10129-6E
bit9
bit8
0
0
ACK
0
1
NAK
1
0
STALL
1
1
NULL
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
333
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.4.4
MB90330A Series
Host State Status Register (HSTATE)
The host state status register (HSTATE) is a register that indicates the status of the USB
circuit such as connections to devices and transfer mode. Note that the CLKSEL bit is
also enabled in the function mode.
■ Host State Status Register (HSTATE)
Figure 14.4-4 Bit Configuration of Host State Status Register (HSTATE)
Host state status register
bit
7
Address: 0000C4H Reserved
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
ALIVE
CLKSEL
SOFBUSY
SUSP
TMODE
CSTAT
→
(-)
(-)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R)
(R)
Initial value →
(x)
(x)
(0)
(1)
(0)
(0)
(1)
(0)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
(-)
(-)
( )
( )
(❍)
(❍)
( )
Read/Write
HSTATE
( )
[bit 7, bit 6] Reserved
It is reserved bits. The reading is undefined. The writing does not influence the operation.
[bit 5] ALIVE: Keep-Alive function setting
It is a bit that sets the Keep-Alive function in Low Speed. If you set it to "1" when the CLKSEL bit in
the host state status register (HSTATE) is "0", SE0 is will be output instead of an SOF. If it is enabled
when the CLKSEL bit in the host state status register (HSTATE) is "0", and the CLKSEL becomes "1",
an SOF will be output regardless of the setting of the ALIVE bit.
ALIVE
Operation mode
0
SOF
1
SE0 output (Keep-Alive)
[bit 4] CLKSEL: Clock selection
The operation clock of USB is selected. You must set it to "1" for Full Speed, and to "0" for Low
Speed.
You must switch clock when the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) is "1" and both the
function mode and host mode are enabled. "0" setting at the function mode is a interdiction.
CLKSEL
334
Operation mode
0
Clock for Low Speed
1
Clock for Full Speed
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 3] SOFBUSY:SOF timer operation
It indicates whether the SOF timer is operating in host mode. Sending SOF stops when "0" is done in
the writing. To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
SOFBUSY
Operation mode
0
SOF timer is stop.
1
SOF timer is working.
[bit 2] SUSP: Suspend
It is a bit used to set suspend status in host mode. Writing "1" to the bit enables suspend status. When
you write "0" to the bit that holds "1" or the USB bus changes to k-state status, the suspend status is
deselected, the RWKIRQ bit in the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is "1". When connection or
disconnection is detected if the SUSP bit is "1", you must write "0" to the bit. Then, when disconnection
or connection is detected and the SUSP bit is cleared, the RWKIRQ bit in the host interrupt register
(HIRQ) is set to "1" twice, and overwrite the RWKIRQ bit with "1" when it is set to "1". It is forbidden
to set the bit to "1" while the USB is operating (such as resetting the USB bus or sending/receiving
data).
In host mode, it is forbidden to stop the USB clock even in suspend status. To update it, you must set
the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0" and are prohibited to set it to "1" in function
mode. In addition, if it is "1" when you change the mode from host mode to function mode, you must
get out of suspend status by writing "0" into it before changing the mode.
Table 14.4-2 Suspend Setting
SUSP
Operation
"1" Write
Suspend
They are "0" writing at "1" state.
Resume
The others
State maintenance
[bit 1] TMODE: Transfer mode
The transfer mode at the host mode is shown. Write "1" for the write operation. It is not initialized with
the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). Please use the CPU clock at 24 MHz.
TMODE
CM44-10129-6E
Operation mode
0
Low Speed
1
Full Speed
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
335
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
[bit 0] CSTAT: Connected state
It is whether the device is connected is shown. The pin for HOST becomes an object. It is not initialized
with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC).
CSTAT
336
Operation mode
0
Device cut off
1
Device connect
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.4.5
SOF Interruption FRAME Comparison Register (HFCOMP)
The SOF interrupt FRAME comparison register (HFCOMP) is a register used to set data
that is compared with the lower 8 bits of FRAME Number for SOF token. If the lower 8
bits of FRAME Number is compared with the HFCOMP register and a match is detected
with the SOFIRE bit in host control register 0 (HCNT0) set to "1", an interrupt will be
generated by setting the SOFIRQ bit in the host interrupt register (HIRQ) to "1" when
starting SOF transmission.
■ SOF Interruption FRAME Comparison Register (HFCOMP)
Figure 14.4-5 Bit Configuration of SOF Interruption FRAME Comparison Register (HFCOMP)
SOF interruption FRAME comparison register
bit
15
14
13
Address: 0000C5H
12
11
10
FRAMECOMP
Read/Write
→
(R/W)
Initial value
→
(00000000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
9
8
HFCOMP
( )
[bit 15 to bit 8] FRAMECOMP
It sets data that is to be compared with the lower 8 bits of Frame Number. It is not initialized with the
RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC
control register (UDCC) to "0".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
337
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.4.6
MB90330A Series
Retry Timer Setting Register (HRTIMER)
The retry timer setting register (HRTIMER) is a register used to set a retry time period
for a token.
■ Retry Timer Setting Register (HRTIMER)
Figure 14.4-6 Bit Configuration of Retry Timer Setting Register (HRTIMER)
Retry timer setting register
bit
7
6
5
4
Address: 0000C6H
Read/Write
3
HRTIMER
(00000000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
( )
15
14
13
12
Address: 0000C7H
11
10
9
8
RTIMER1
→
HRTIMER
(R/W)
Initial value →
(00000000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
bit
0
(R/W)
Initial value →
Read/Write
1
RTIMER0
→
bit
2
( )
7(23)
6(22)
Address: 0000C8H
5(21)
4(20)
3(19)
2(18)
1(17)
0(16)
Reserved
RTIMER2
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(00B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
(-)
( )
Read/Write
HRTIMER
[bit 23 to bit 18] Reserved
These are reserved bits.
The reading is undefined. The writing does not influence the operation.
[bit 17 to bit 0] HRTIMER0, HRTIMER1, HRTIMER2
These bits set a time to retry a token. When the RETRY bit of the host control register (HCNT1) is "1",
a retry timer is activated after the token is started, and the timer is decremented by "1" due to 1-bit
transfer clock (12 MHz at Full Speed). When the retry timer becomes "0", token retry dose not execute.
When the token retry occurs in an EOF area, the retry timer stops until the SOF is completed. The timer
value that was stopped is decremented by 1 after the SOF is executed. It is not initialized with the RST
bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control
register (UDCC) to "0".
338
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.4.7
Host Address Register (HADR)
The host address register (HADR) is a register used for an address field when a token is
sent.
■ Host Address Register (HADR)
Figure 14.4-7 Bit Configuration of Host address Register (HADR)
Host address register
bit
15
14
13
Address: 0000C9H Reserved
12
11
Address
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(0000000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
(-)
( )
Read/Write
10
9
8
HADR
[bit 15] Reserved
It is reserved bit. The reading is undefined. The writing does not influence the operation.
[bit 14 to bit 8] Address: Address
The address of the token is set. It is not initialized with the RST bit in the UDC control register
(UDCC). To update them, you must set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
339
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.4.8
MB90330A Series
EOF Setting Register (HEOF)
The EOF setting register (HEOF) is a register that sets a time period for which a token is
inhibited before the execution of the SOF token. If the data of the SOF timer turns out to
be lower than data in the HEOF register as a result of comparing both, and any of an IN
token, OUT token, and SETUP token execution requests is made, it will be run after the
SOF token is executed. This prevents an SOF token generated by hardware and other
tokens from being simultaneously executed. The unit of time for the HEOF register is
one-bit transfer time.
■ EOF Setting Register (HEOF)
Figure 14.4-8 Bit Configuration of EOF Setting Register (HEOF)
EOF setting register
bit
7
6
5
4
3
Address: 0000CAH
EOF0
→
(R/W)
Read/Write
Initial value →
Address: 0000CBH
0
HEOF
( )
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved
EOF1
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(000000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
(-)
( )
Read/Write
1
(00000000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
bit
2
9
8
HEOF
[bit 15, bit 14] Reserved
These are reserved bits. The reading is undefined. The writing does not influence the operation.
[bit 13 to bit 0] EOF1,EOF0:EOF
Set a time period during which the execution of a token is inhibited before the execution of SOF. Set a
margin that is longer than one packet length. The unit is one bit forwarding time. It is not initialized
with the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC). To update them, you must set the RST bit in the
UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
For the MAXPKT=64 byte and Full Speed of set example
(Token_length + packet_length + header + CRC)×7/6 + Turn_around_time
=(34bit + 546bit)×7/6 + 36bit = 712.7bits
As the above is true, specify 2C9H.
340
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.4.9
FRAME Setting Register (HFRAME)
The FRAME setting register (HFRAME) is a register that sets a FRAME Number in
handling SOF tokens. When you set the TKNEN bits of the host token endpoint register
(HTOKEN) to SOF activation, the SOF timer starts and, afterwards, an SOF is
automatically sent out every 1 ms. The FRAME setting register is automatically
incremented by 1 every time an SOF is completed.
■ FRAME Setting Register (HFRAME)
Figure 14.4-9 Bit Configuration of FRAME Setting Register (HFRAME)
FRAME setting register
bit
7
6
5
4
Address: 0000CCH
Read/Write
1
HFRAME
(00000000B)
(❍)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Reserved
FRAME1
→
(-)
(R/W)
Initial value →
(x)
(000B)
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
(-)
(❍)
Read/Write
0
(R/W)
Initial value →
Address: 0000CDH
2
FRAME0
→
bit
3
8
HFRAME
[bit 15 to bit 11] Reserved
These are reserved bits. The reading is undefined. The writing does not influence the operation.
[bit 10 to bit 0] FRAME1, FRAME0
Frame Number is set. Before setting the TKNEN bits of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) to
SOF, set Frame Number. Furthermore, when the SOFBUSY bit of the host status register (HSTATE) is
"1" and an SOF token is being executed, write operation is inhibited. To update them, you must set the
RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
341
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
14.4.10
MB90330A Series
Host Token Endpoint Register (HTOKEN)
The host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) is a register that sets a toggle, endpoint,
and token.
■ Host Token Endpoint Register (HTOKEN)
Figure 14.4-10 Bit Configuration of Host Token Endpoint Register (HTOKEN)
Host token end point register
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Address: 0000CEH
TGGL
TKNEN
ENDPT
→
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(0)
(000B)
(0000B)
(❍)
(❍)
(❍)
Read/Write
Initial value →
Reset On/Off at UDCC RST bit →
0
HTOKEN
[bit 7] TGGL: Toggle
This bit sets toggle data. At transmission, the toggle data is sent according to the bit. At reception, the
received toggle data is compared to the toggle data which the bit shows and use at the error detection.
The bit is updated after the RST bit of the UDC control register (UDCC) is set to "0" and the TKNEN
bit to 000B.
TGGL
Operation Mode
0
Data 0
1
Data 1
[bit 6 to bit 4] TKNEN: Token permission
These bits send a token corresponding to the setting. After the operation is completed TKNEN = 000B,
the CMPIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is set to "1". At that time, if the CMPIRE bit of
the host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt generates.
The TGGL and ENDPT bits are ignored during the SOF token. To write to the TKNEN bits, you must
set the RST bit in the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0" and turn the mode to host mode. In addition,
if you issue a token again because an interrupt due to a token is generated, you must wait three cycles or
longer in terms of USB transfer clock (12 MHz for Full Speed and 1.5 MHz for Low Speed) before
writing to the TKNEN bits. Note that writing to the TKNEN bits will not run a token in disconnection
status (HSTATE CSTAT= 0).
342
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.4 Register of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
Table 14.4-3 Token Setting
bit6
bit5
bit4
Operation
0
0
0
No send out
0
0
1
SETUP is sent
0
1
0
IN is sent.
0
1
1
OUT is sent.
1
0
0
SOF is sent.
1
0
1
Reserved (Set prohibition)
1
1
0
Reserved (Set prohibition)
1
1
1
Reserved (Set prohibition)
Note:
The PRE packet is not supported.
When the SOFBUSY bit in the host state status register (HSTATE) is "1", setting TKNEN = 100B
respectively, is forbidden.
[bit 3 to bit 0] ENDPT: end point
The transmitted and received endpoint to the device is set. To update them, you must set the RST bit in
the UDC control register (UDCC) to "0".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
343
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.5
MB90330A Series
Operation of USB HOST
The operation of USB HOST is explained.
■ Operation of USB HOST
● Connection of device
The software detects that the external USB device was connected.
● Reset of USB bus
USB bus is reset.
● Token packet
Three kinds of tokens can be selected at the host mode.
● Data packet
The data packet is transmitted and received.
● Handshake packet
It informs send/receive partners of status via handshake packet.
● Retry function
When an error etc. occur at the packet termination, the retry operation is continued.
● SOF INTERRUPT
The interruption is generated.
● Error status
Various errors are displayed.
● Packet end
When the packet ends, the interruption is generated.
● Suspend-resume
It puts the USB circuit in suspend-resume status.
● Cutting of device
The detection of the status of HOST pins determines the disconnection.
344
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.5.1
Connection of Device
The method for detecting the connection of the external USB device by software is
described.
■ Setting of HOST Function
To make it operate as a host of the USB device, set the HOST bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) to
"1".
■ Disconnection Status, Connection Status of the External USB Device
When the external USB device is disconnected, both HOST pins, D + and D-, are "L" by the pull-down
resistor. Then, the CSTAT bit in the host state status register (HSTATE) is "0", and the TMODE bit is
indefinite. The CSTAT bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) becomes "1" when the external USB
device is connected.
■ Connected Detection of External USB Device
To detect the connection of the external USB device, set the CNNIRE bit of the host control register 0
(HCNT0) to "1". The CNNIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) becomes "1", and a device
connection interrupt is generated. To clear this interrupt, write "0" to the CNNIRQ bit of the host interrupt
register (HIRQ). To detect the connection of the external USB device not through interrupt but through
polling, create a program so that it ensures that the CNNIRE bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) is
set to "0" and the CNNIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is "1".
■ Acquiring Transfer Speed of Destination USB Device and Selecting Clock
To acquire the transfer speed of a destination USB after detecting the connection, make reference to the
value of the TMODE of the host state status register (HSTATE). The relation between the transfer speed
and the TMODE bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) is as follows:
• When a destination device is a Full Speed-enabled device → TMODE= 1
• When a destination device is a Low Speed-enabled device → TMODE= 0
After the transfer speed of the external USB device is acquired, when the RST bit of the UDC control
register (UDCC) is "1", update the CLKSEL bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) based on the
acquired transfer speed. The relation between the TMODE and CLKSEL bits of the host status register
(HSTATE) is as follows:
• TMODE = 1 → "1" is set to CLKSEL bit.
• TMODE = 0 → "0" is set to CLKSEL bit.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
345
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
Figure 14.5-1 Connecting Detection Timing Example of Speed Device (HCNT0 Bit 0 = 0)
Device connection
Pin D+ for HOST
Pin D- for HOST
2.5μs
CSTAT bit of HSTATE
TMODE bit of HSTATE
Indeterminate
CNNIRQ bit of HIRQ
"0"
HOST bit of HCNT
Note:
The CSTAT bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) becomes "1" in 2.5 μs after the connection
of the external USB device.
The TMODE and CSTAT bits of the host state status register (HSTATE) are updated regardless of
the setting of the HOST bit in the host control register 0 (HCNT0).
346
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.5.2
Reset of USB Bus
When you set the URST bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) to "1" in the host
mode, it sends out SE0 for not less than 10 ms and resets the USB bus. When the USB
bus has been reset, it sets back the URST bit of the host control register to "0" and
generates an interrupt and the URIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is set to
"1" when the URIRE bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1." If you clear the
interrupt, write "0" to the URIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ).
■ Notes before and after Reset of USB Bus
Please note the following points about reset of USB bus.
1. Before the USB bus is reset, confirm that the device is connected to and the CSTAT bit of the host state
status register (HSTATE) is set to "1".
2. When you reset the USB bus, the CSTAT bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) turns to "0" and
the USB device is put into disconnection status. Then, the DIRQ bit of the host interrupt control register
(HIRQ) does not become "1".
3. After the USB bus is reset, you must update the CLKSEL bit of the host state status register (HSTATE)
to match the TMODE bit of the same register if you compare them and they do not match. Before you
update the CLKSEL bit, ensure that the RST bit of the UDC control register (UDCC) is "1".
Figure 14.5-2 Reset Timing Example to Device
Pin D + for HOST
Pin D - for HOST
URST bit of HCNT
CSTAT bit of HSTATE
URIRQ bit of HIRQ
(HCNT URIRE=1)
Write "1" to URST bit of HCNT
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
347
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.5.3
MB90330A Series
Token Packet
If you execute any of an IN token, OUT token, and SETUP token in the host mode, a
token packet is started when you set necessary data in the host token register
(HTOKEN) after you set the PKS bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) or EP2 control
register (EP2C) based on the host address register (HADR) and the DIR bit in EP1C. In
handling an SOF token, you must set necessary data in the host token register
(HTOKEN) after configuring the FRAME setting register (HFRAME) and EOF setting
register (HEOF). If registers (HADR, EP1C, EP2C, HFRAME, and HEOF) have not been
changed, setting them is not required.
■ Setting of Token Packet
For the IN token, OUT token, and SETUP token, set the destination address to the host address register
(HADR), and set the maximum bytes of one packet to the PKS bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) or the
EP2 control register based on the token to be executed and the DIR bit of the EP1 control register.
If the DIR bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) is "1", the buffer for endpoint 1 is used as an OUTdirection buffer and the one for endpoint 2 is used as an IN- direction buffer. Then, set the DIR bit of the
EP2 control register (EP2C) to "0".
If the DIR bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) is "0", the buffer for endpoint 1 is used as an IN- direction
buffer and the one for endpoint 2 is used as an OUT- direction buffer. Then, set the DIR bit of the EP2
control register (EP2C) to "1".
If you want to use the buffer for endpoint 1, you must ensure that the DRQ bit of EP1 status register (EP1S)
is set to "0" and if you want to use the buffer for endpoint 2, you must ensure that the DRQ bit of EP2
status register (EP2S) is set to "1," before setting the target endpoint, token, and toggle data in the host
token endpoint register (HTOKEN). The USB circuit sends out a token packet in the order of a Sync, token,
address, endpoint, CRC5, and EOP based on the specified token (a Sync, CRC5, and EOP are automatically
sent). After one packet is ended, the CMPIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) becomes "1", and
the TKNEN bit of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) is set to 000B (See Section "14.5.7 SOF
Interrupt"). At that time, if the CMPIRE bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt
occurs. To clear the interrupt, write "0" to the CMPIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ).
Figure 14.5-3 Example of Register Setting until Execution of IN/OUT/SETUP Token
Write to HADR
(when a change is required)
Write to EP1C or EP2C
(when a change is required)
Write to HTOKEN
Register write signal
Confirm the status of the buffer for endpoint 1/endpoint 2
In the case of an SOF token, when you set an EOF time and FRAME number in the EOF setting register
(HEOF) and FRAME setting register (HFRAME), and write the code of the SOF token to the TKNEN bits
of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN), a Sync, SOF token, FRAME number, CRC5, and EOP will
be sent out and the SOFBUSY bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) is set to "1" and HFRAME is
348
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
incremented by 1. In this case, the CMPIRQ of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is also set to "1", and the
TKNEN bit of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) is cleared to 000B. When the CMPIRE bit of
host control register (HCNTO) is "1", an interrupt occurs. Then, when the SOF that generates automatically
is used, the interrupt by the CMPIRQ does not occur. To clear the interrupt of the token completion, write
"0" to the CMPIRQ of the HIRQ.
SOF is automatically sent out every 1 ms while the SOFBUSY bit of the host state status register
(HSTATE) is "1". The conditions (SOF stop conditions) that make the SOFBUSY bit of the host state
status register (HSTATE) "0" are as follows:
"0" write to SOFBUSY bit of host state register (HSTATE)
Reset ("1" write to URST bit of HCNT) in USB bus
"1" write to SUSP bit of host state status register (HSTATE)
Cutting of the device (For "0" the CSTAT bit of HSTATE).
To switch from host mode to function mode, first, ensure that the SOFBUSY bit of the host state status
register (HSTATE) is "0" after writing "0" to it.
If you want to set back the SOFBUSY bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) to "1" again, you need
to run an SOF token once again.
To prevent the simultaneous executions of an SOF token and other tokens, the EOF setting register is used
to run a token you have set after making it wait for the end of SOF execution if you write to the TKNEN
bits of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) in a time period from the EOF setting time to SOF start
time. The unit of time for the EOF setting register is one-bit time. For example, when setting 10H to the
EOF setting register, the following time is required: 16×1/12 MHz = 13333.3 ns in Full speed mode and
16×1/1.5 MHz = 10666.6 ns in Low speed mode. If the EOF set time is shorter than one packet time, the
SOF execution max overlap other token execution. In this case, the LSTOF bit of host error status register
(HERR) is set to "1", the SOF is not executed. When the LSTOF bit of the host error status register
(HERR) is set to "1", you must increase data of the EOF setting register. (See Section "14.4.8 EOF Setting
Register (HEOF)")
Figure 14.5-4 SOF Timing
SOF start
SOF start
EOF set time
EOF set time
1ms
EOF >1 packet time
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
349
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.5.4
MB90330A Series
Data Packet
If a data packet is transmitted after a token packet has been sent, toggle data will be
transmitted based on the TGGL bit of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN), and
the buffer data for endpoint 1 or endpoint 2 according to the DIR bit of the EP1 control
register (EP1C), CRC16 data, and EOP is sent. In the case of receiving a data packet, the
TGGL bit of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) and received toggle data are
compared, and, if they match, the received data is written to the buffer for endpoint 1 or
endpoint 2 based on the DIR bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) and the CRC16 is
checked for an error.
■ Data Packet
After sending a token packet, the data packet is executed in the following procedure:
● At Transmission
• Automatic sending of Sync
• DATA0 is transmitted when the TGGL bit of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) is "0" and
DATA1 is transmitted when the TGGL bit is "1".
• The buffer for endpoint 1 is selected when the DIR bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) is "1" and
otherwise the one for endpoint 2 is selected when the DIR bit is "0" and all transmit data is sent.
• The CRC16-bit is sent.
• The EOP 2-bit is sent.
• The J State 1-bit is sent.
● At Reception
• Reception of Sync
• The toggle data is received, and is compared with the TGGL bit of the host token endpoint register
(HTOKEN).
• If they match as a result of the comparison, the buffer for endpoint 2 is selected when the DIR bit of the
EP1 control register (EP1C) is "1" and the one for endpoint 0 is selected when the DIR bit is "0" and the
received data is written into it.
• When the EOF is received, the CRC16 bit is inspected.
You must set inversion data, respectively, in the DIR bits of the EP1 control register (EP1C) and EP2 control
register (EP2C) when the HOST bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) is "1". For example, when the DIR bit of
the EP1 control register (EP1C) is "0", the DIR bit of the EP2 control register (EP2C) is set to "1".
350
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.5.5
Handshake Packet
Transmission/reception partner must be informed of your own status via handshake
packet.
■ Handshake Packet
The reception side transmits one of ACK, NAK, and STALL when it determines through handshake packet
whether it can receive data properly or the endpoint supports it. Then, when the USB circuit receives a
handshake packet, the received handshake packet is set to the HS bit of the host error status register
(HERR). When the handshake packet is transmitted, the transmitted handshake packet is set to the HS bit of
the host error status register (HERR).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
351
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.5.6
MB90330A Series
Retry Function
At the termination of the packet, when NAK or an error such as CRC error occurs, and
the RETRY bit of the host control register 1 (HCNT1) is "1", it continues to retry during a
time period set in the retry timer register (HRTIMER).
■ Retry Function
If an error except STALL and disconnected device happens, it retries to process the token when the
RETRY bit of the host control register 1 (HCNT1). The end condition of retry
"0" setting of RETRY bit of host control register 1(HCNT1)
• Detecting 0 in the retry timer
• Occurrence of an interrupt due to SOF (SOFIRE= 1 of HCNT0 and SOFIRQ= 1 of HIRQ)
• Detection of ACK
• Detection of cutting device
The retry timer is activated when the process of a token is started, counts down with one-bit transfer clock,
and stops counting when a retry happens in an EOF area. The retry timer restarts at the value when the
timer stopped if the SOFIRQ bit of HIRQ was "0". The SOF token was completed, and when the timer
counts down to "0" and a packet ends, any retry request it receives is cancelled and the packet will be
terminated.
Figure 14.5-5 Retry Timer Operation (SOFIRQ of HIRQ = 0)
Token beginning
EOF
SOF
retry
Token execution
Timer countdown
Timer stop
Timer restart
Retry generation
When the retry operation is completed, end information on the completed packet is set in related registers.
352
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.5.7
SOF Interrupt
Once you have set the SOFIRE bit of the host control register 0 (HCNT0) to "1", it sets
the SOFIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) to "1" and will generate an interrupt
when starting an SOF with the SOFSTEP bit of the host control register 1 (HCNT1) and
the SOF interrupt FRAME comparison register (HFCOMP). The SOF execution with the
host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) does not set the SOFIRQ bit of the host
interrupt register (HIRQ) to "1".
■ SOF Interrupt
Once you have set the SOFIRE bit in host control register 0 (HCNT0) to "1", an interrupt is generated when
sending an SOF, and the SOFIRQ bit in the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is set to "1". You can select one
of an SOF interrupt conditions: One is generation of an SOF interrupt every time an SOF is sent out with
the setting of the SOFSTEP bit of the host control register 1 (HCNT1) and another generation is due to the
Frame number in the lower 8 bits indicated by the SOF interrupt FRAME comparison register (HFCOMP).
Figure 14.5-6 SOF Interrupt
For " 1 " the SOFSTEP bit of host control register 1(HCNT1)
following SOF
transmission
The SOF
transmission
SOFIRQ bit of HIRQ
Soft clear
Soft clear
For " 0 " the SOFSTEP bit of host control register 1(HCNT1)
following SOF
transmission
The SOF
transmission
HFRAME
HFCOMP
010 H
011H
011H
SOFIRQ bit of HIRQ
HFRAME lower 8 bit and
HFCOMP is corresponding.
If you set the CANCEL bit of the host control register 1 (HCNT1) to "1" and set a token other than an SOF
token in the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) in the EOF area, and the SOFIRQ bit of the host
interrupt register (HIRQ) is set to "1" in the next SOF, the token is not executed and the TKNEN bits of the
HTOKEN are set to 000B. Then, the CMPIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) does not become "1".
Canceling the token can be known by the TCAN bit of the HIRQ when the SOFIRQ bit becomes "1". If
you execute the token again, write "0" to the TCAN bit of the HIRQ, and write the token to be executed to
the TKNEN bit of HTOKEN.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
353
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
If you set the CANCEL bit of host control register 1 (HCNT1) to "0", the token set in the host token
endpoint register (HTOKEN) is executed after the SOF is sent.
Figure 14.5-7 Example of Token Cancel Operation when CANCEL Bit of HCNT1 is "1".
IN TOKEN write
EOF area
SOF
execution
SOFIRQ bit of HIRQ
TKNEN bit of HTOKEN
000B
010B
000B
CMPIRQ bit of HIRQ
"0"
Figure 14.5-8 Example of Token Cancel Operation when CANCEL Bit of HCNT1 is "0".
IN TOKEN write
EOF area
SOF
execution
IN TOKEN
execution
SOFIRQ bit of HIRQ
TKNEN bit of HTOKEN
000B
010B
000B
CMPIRQ bit of HIRQ
354
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.5.8
Error Status
USB HOST supports various error information.
■ Error Status
● Stuffing error
If continuous 6 bits happen to be "1", one bit of "0" should be inserted in somewhere in the sequence, but
the STUFF bit of the host error status register (HERR) is set to "1" as a stuffing error if continuous 7 bits of
"1" are detected. Please do "0" to the STUFF bit in the writing to clear this. If the next token is executed
without clearing the STUFF bit, it is updated at the termination of the next token.
● Toggle error
When receiving an IN token, the TGERR bit in the host error register (HERR) is set to "1" if the toggle data
for the data packet and the TGGL bit of the host token endpoint register (HTOKEN) are compared and a
match is not detected. To clear the TGERR bit, write "0" to it of the host error register (HERR). If the next
token is executed without clearing the TGERR bit, it is updated at the termination of the next token.
● CRC error
When receiving an IN token, data in the received data packet and CRC are calculated with the CRC
polynomial G(X)=X16+X15+X2+1, and if the remainder is not 800DH, then a CRC error is assumed to
happen and the CRC bit of the host error register (HERR) is set to "1". To clear the CRC bit, write "0" to it
of the host error register (HERR). If the next token is executed without clearing the CRC bit, it is updated
at the termination of the next token.
● Time-out error
The TOUT bit of the host error status register (HERR) is set to "1" if a data packet or handshake is not
received in a given time, SE0 is detected in received data, or a stuffing error is detected. To clear the TOUT
bit, write "0" to it of the host error register (HERR). If the next token is executed without clearing the
TOUT bit, it is updated at the termination of the next token.
● Receive error
If EP1 or EP2 is used as the reception buffer, the PKS bit of the EP1 control register (EP1C) or EP2 control
register (EP2C), respectively. If the received data is greater than that of the received packet size, the RERR
bit of the host error status register (HERR) is set to "1". To clear the RERR bit, write "0" to it of the host
error register (HERR). If the next token is executed without clearing the RERR bit, it is updated at the
termination of the next token.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
355
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.5.9
MB90330A Series
Packet End
When one packet terminates in USB HOST, if the CMPIRE bit of the host control register
0 (HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt is generated to set the CMPIRQ bit of the host interrupt
register (HIRQ) to "1".
■ Packet End Timing
When one packet terminates, an interrupt is generated in the following timing:
When the TKNEN bits of the host token end point register (HTOKEN) are 001B, 010B or 011B (SETUP
token, IN token, and OUT token)
Figure 14.5-9 CMPIRQ Bit Set Timing Example 1 of HOST Interrupt Register (HIRQ)
To the TKNEN bit of HTOKEN
Write
Token packet
J-ST
Sync
handshake packet
data packet
TKN ADR ENDPT CRC5 EOP J-ST
Sync TGGL DATA
CRC16
CMPIRQ bit
(HIRQ)
EOP
J-ST
Sync ACK EOP
J-ST
J-ST : J State
TKN : Token
ADR : Address
ENDPT : Endpoint
TGGL : Toggle
When the TKNEN bit of the host token end point register (HTOKEN) is 100B (SOF token)
Figure 14.5-10 CMPIRQ Bit Set Timing Example 2 of HOST Interrupt Register (HIRQ) (SOF TOKEN)
To the TKNEN bit of HTOKEN
Write
J-ST
Sync
TKN
FRAME
CRC5
EOP
J-ST
CMPIRQ bit
(HIRQ)
J-ST :J State
TKN
:Token
FRAME :Frame Number
356
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.5.10
Suspend Resume
USB HOST supports suspend and resume operations.
■ Suspend Operation
When writing "1" to the SUSP bit of the host state status register (HSTATE),
• USB bus high impedance state
• Stop of circuit block where clock is not necessary
USB HOST follows the steps above, and puts the USB circuit in suspend status. When the USB circuit is
put in suspend status, it sets the SUSP bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) to "1".
It is inhibited for USB HOST to set the USB circuit to suspend status or stop clock supplied to the circuit
when the USB bus is being reset or the SOFBUSY of HSTATE is "1" or data is being sent or received.
■ Resume Operation
Before it can start resume operation in suspend status, one of the following conditions must be true:
(1) Write "0" to the SUSP bit of the host state status register (HSTATE).
(2) The pins D+ and D- for HOST are detected to be k-state.
(3) The device is detected being cut.
(4) The device is detected being connected.
After the RWKIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is set to "1", an issuance of the token is
allowed. The followings show the operation timing for each condition.
Figure 14.5-11 Resume Operation by Register (Full Speed Mode)
(1) Write "0" to the SUSP bit of the host state status register (HSTATE)
To bit2 of HCNT
"0" Write
Pin D+ for HOST
Pin D- for HOST
20μs∗
1.33μs∗
1 bit time
RWKIRQ bit of HIRQ
(RWKIRE=1)
: Power output from USB HOST
: Drive by resistances of pull-up and pull-down
∗ : This value is not guaranteed.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
357
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
Figure 14.5-12 Resume Operation by Device (Full Speed Mode)
(2) The simple host pins D+ and D- are detected to be K State.
Discovers that HOST pin D + and HOST pin D - become K State.
Pin D+ for HOST
Pin D- for HOST
20μs∗
1.33μs∗
1 bit time
RWIRQ bit of HIRQ
(RWKIRE=1)
: Power output from USB HOST
: Power output from device
: Drive by resistances of pull-up and pull-down
∗: This value is not guaranteed.
Figure 14.5-13 Resume Operation by Device Cutoff
(3) The device is detected being cut.
The device is detected being cut.
Cutting
Pin D+ for HOST
Pin D- for HOST
RWKIRQ bit of HIRQ
(RWKIRE=1)
HIRQ bit1
(DIRE=1)
Interrupt
occurs
CSTAT bit of HSTATE
2.5μs or more
: Drive by resistances of pull-up and pull-down
358
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
Figure 14.5-14 Resume Operation by Device Connection
(4) The device is detected being connected.
Connect
Pin D+ for HOST
Pin D- for HOST
RWKIRQ bit of HIRQ
(RWKIRE=1)
HIRQ bit2
(DIRE=1)
Interrupt
occurs
CSTAT bit of HSTATE
2.5μs or more
: Drive by resistances of pull-up and pull-down
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
359
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.5 Operation of USB HOST
14.5.11
MB90330A Series
Cutting of Device
Once both HOST pins D + and D- become "L", the disconnection timer starts, and sets
the CSTAT bit of the host state status register (HSTATE) to "0" when both pins detect
"L" for 2.5 μs or longer.
■ Cutting of Device
Regardless of Host mode and function mode, when both Host pins D+ and D- detect "L" for 2.5 μs or
longer, it determines that the device is cut. Therefore, the CSTAT bit of the host state status register
(HSTATE) becomes "0", and the DIRQ bit of the host interrupt register (HIRQ) is set to "1". If the DIRE
bit of the host control register 0(HCNT0) is "1", an interrupt generates. To clear the interrupt, write "0" to
the DIRQ bit of the HIRQ.
When a reset is performed on the USB bus, it determines that the device is disconnected and sets the
CSTAT bit of the host state status register 0 (HSTATE) to "0", but the DIRQ bit of the host interrupt
register (HIRQ) does not become "1".
360
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.6 Each Token Flow Chart of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
14.6
Each Token Flow Chart of USB HOST
The flow chart of each token of USB HOST is as follows.
■ IN, OUT, SETUP Token
Figure 14.6-1 Flow Chart at IN, OUT, SETUP Token
IN,OUT,
SETUP TOKEN
HADR change?
YES
NO
HADR change
YES
IN TOKEN
NO
EP1 DIR=1?
YES
YES
EP1 DIR=1?
NO
EP2C PKS
change?
YES
NO
NO
NO
EP1 PKS
change?
YES
PKS change
Buffer direction
OK?
NO
Buffer direction change
YES
Buffer usable?
NO
YES
Set Buffer usable
Set toggle and Endpoint,
Execute TOKEN
CMPIRQ of
HIRQ=1?
NO
YES
END
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
361
CHAPTER 14 USB HOST
14.6 Each Token Flow Chart of USB HOST
MB90330A Series
■ SOF Token
Figure 14.6-2 Flow Chart at SOF Token
SOF TOKEN
HFRAME
change?
YES
NO
HEOF change?
HFRAME change
YES
NO
HEOF change
TOKEN execution
(Setting TGGL and ENDPT
is disregarded.)
CMPIRQ of
HIRQ=1?
NO
YES
END
362
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15
PWC TIMER
This chapter describes an overview of PWC timer, the
configuration and function of register, and the PWC
timer operation and precaution.
15.1 Overview of PWC Timer
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
15.4 Precautions when Using PWC Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
363
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.1 Overview of PWC Timer
15.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of PWC Timer
The PWC timer is the multi-functional 16-bit up count timer that has the function to
measure the pulse width of input signal.
PWC: Pulse Width Count (pulse width measurement)
■ Function of PWC Timer
Following functions are implemented by hardware of a single channel including a 16-bit up count timer, a
register to control input pulse divider and division ratio, a measurement input pin, and a 16-bit control
register:
● Timer Functions
• The set interval interrupt request can be generated.
• Standard internal clock can be selected from three types.
● Pulse width measurement function
• The time interval between arbiter events of external pulse input is measured.
• Standard internal clock can be selected from three types.
• Each kind of measurement mode
- "H" pulse width(↑ - ↓)/"L" pulse width(↑ - ↓)
- Rising cycle(↑ - ↑)/falling cycle(↓ - ↓)
- Measurement between edges(↑ or ↓ to ↓ or ↑)
• The 8-bit input divider enables the division measurement by dividing the input pulses with a
denominator of 22n (n = 1, 2, 3, or 4).
• You can make an interrupt occur at the end of measurement.
• You can select either a single measurement or continuous measurements.
364
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.1 Overview of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Block Diagram of PWC Timer
Figure 15.1-1 shows the PWC timer block diagram.
Figure 15.1-1 Block Diagram of PWC Timer
PWCR read
Error
detection
ERR
Internal clock (Machine clock/4)
PWCR
16
Reload
Data transmit
16
Clock
Overflow
22
16-bit Up count timer
Clock divider
23
F2MC-16LX Bus
Timer
clear
Count enabled
Control bit output
Flag set etc.
Control circuit
Start edge End edge
selection selection
Measurement
start edge
Divider clear
Division ON/OFF
Input
waveform
comparator
Edge
detection
PWC
Measurement
end edge
Measurement end PIS0/PIS1
interrupt request
Overflow interrupt
request
8-bit
divider
ERR CKS0/CKS1
PWCSR
Ratio selection
15
2
CM44-10129-6E
CKS1/CKS0
DIVR
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
365
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
15.2
MB90330A Series
Register of PWC Timer
Configuration and function of the register used for PWC timer are described.
■ Register List of PWC Timer
Figure 15.2-1 shows the PWC timer register list.
Figure 15.2-1 Register List of PWC Timer
bit 15
8 7
PWCSR
0
(R/W)
(R/W)
PWCR
(R/W)
DIVR
bit 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
00005DH STRT STOP EDIR EDIE OVIR OVIE ERR
(R/W) (R/W) (R) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R)
8
Reserved
(R/W)
PWCSR
PWC control status register
Initial value 0000000XB
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
bit 7
PWCSR
00005CH CKS1 CKS0 PIS1 PIS0 S/C MOD2 MOD1 MOD0 PWC control status register
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 00000000B
bit 15
00005FH
bit
00005EH
bit
000060H
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
D15 D14
D13
D12
D11 D10
D9
D8
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
7
−
(−)
6
−
(−)
5
−
(−)
4
−
(−)
3
−
(−)
2
−
(−)
1
0
DIV1 DIV0
(R/W) (R/W)
PWCR
PWC data buffer register
Initial value 00000000B
PWCR
PWC data buffer register
Initial value 00000000B
DIVR
PWC ratio of dividing frequency control register
Initial value ------00B
R/W : Readable/Writable
R
: Read only
−
366
: Undefined
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.2.1
PWC Control Status Register (PWCSR)
Configuration and function of PWC control status register (PWCSR) are described.
■ PWC Control Status Register (PWCSR)
Figure 15.2-2 shows the bit configuration of PWC control status register (PWCSR).
Figure 15.2-2 Bit Configuration of PWC Control Status Register (PWCSR)
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
00005DH STRT STOP EDIR EDIE OVIR OVIE ERR
(R/W) (R/W) (R) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R)
8
Reserved
(R/W)
PWCSR
PWC control status register
Initial value 0000000XB
bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWCSR
00005CH CKS1 CKS0 PIS1 PIS0 S/C MOD2 MOD1 MOD0 PWC control status register
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 00000000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
R
: Read only
−
: Undefined
The function of each bit in the PWC control status register (PWCSR) is described in the following.
[bit 15, bit 14] STRT, STOP (Timer Start Bit, Timer Stop Bit)
This bit controls to start, restart, and stop the 16-bit up count timer. Timer operation status is displayed
when reading.
The table below shows the function of STRT and STOP bit.
Table 15.2-1 Functions for Write Operation (Controlling the 16-bit Up Count Timer Operation)
STRT
STOP
Operation control functions
0
0
The influence is not in the function none/the operation.
0
1
Timer start/restart (count enabled).*
1
0
Timer operation forced stop (count disabled). *
1
1
The influence is not in the function none/the operation.
*: Enable use for clear bit instruction.
Table 15.2-2 Functions for Read Operation (Displaying the 16-bit Up-count Timer Operation Status)
STRT
STOP
0
0
Timer under suspension (unstarted or measurement completed). [initial value]
1
1
During timer count operating (during measurement).
CM44-10129-6E
Operation control functions
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
367
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Read and write are enabled. However, meanings are different between when writing and reading as
shown in Table 15.2-1 and Table 15.2-2.
• The value read by read-modify-write instructions is always "11B" regardless of the bit value.
• Note that no bit instruction can be used for reading in the operating status (reading always produces the
operating status) although the bit instruction (bit clear) can be used for either STRT or STOP bit to start
or stop the timer.
[bit 13] EDIR (measurement end interrupt request flag)
This flag indicates the measurement termination in the pulse width measurement. When the
measurement termination interrupt factor is permitted (bit 12: EDIE = 1) and this bit is set, the
measurement termination interrupt request occurs.
EDIR
Set factor
Clear factor
Operation mode
Set when the pulse width measurement terminates (measured results are stored in PWCR).
Because PWCR (measurement result) is read, it is clear.
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Only reading is allowed.
• Bit values cannot be changed by writing.
[bit 12] EDIE (measurement end interruption permission)
Measurement termination interrupt request during the pulse width measurement is controlled as shown
in the table below:
EDIE
Operation mode
0
Measurement end interrupt request output disabled (interrupt is not generated even if EDIR is set).
[Initial value]
1
Measurement end interrupt request output enabled (interrupt is generated if EDIR is set).
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading or writing is allowed.
[bit 11] OVIR (timer overflow interrupt request flag)
This flag indicates the 16-bit up count timer overflowed from FFFFH to 0000H. When the timer
overflow interrupt factor is permitted (bit 10: OVIE = 1) and this bit is set, the timer overflow interrupt
request occurs.
OVIR
Set factor
Clear factor
Operation mode
Set when the overflow generates (FFFFH to 0000H).
It is clear because of "0" writing or μDMAC.
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed; however, only writing "0" is effective, while writing "1" causes no
changes in the bit value.
• The read value is "1" in the read-modify write instructions regardless of the bit value.
368
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 10] OVIE (timer overflow interrupt request permission)
Measurement termination interrupt request during the pulse width measurement is controlled as shown
in the table below:
OVIE
Operation mode
0
Overflow interrupt request output disabled (interrupt is not generated even if OVIR is set). [Initial value]
1
Overflow interrupt request output enabled (interrupt is generated when OVIR is set).
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 9] ERR (error flag)
This flag indicates the next measurement termination before reading the measured result in the PWCR
in the pulse width measurement in the continuous measurement mode. In this case, the PWCR value is
updated with the new measurement result and the previous measurement result is lost. The
measurement is continued regardless of the bit value.
ERR
Operation mode
Set factor
Set when measurement results that are not read yet are erased due to the following results:
Clear factor
Because PWCR (measurement result) is read, it is clear.
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Only reading is allowed. Write operations have no effect.
[bit 8] Reserved bit
It is Reserved bit. Be sure to write "0".
[bit 7, bit 6] CKS1 and CKS0 (clock selection)
Internal count clock can be selected from three types shown in Table 15.2-3.
Table 15.2-3 Count Clock of 16 Bit Up Count Timer
CKS1
CKS0
Operation mode
0
0
Clock of machine clock divided by 4 (0.17 μs for 24 MHz machine clock) [Initial value]
0
1
Clock of machine clock divided by 16 (0.67 μs for 24 MHz machine clock)
1
0
Clock of machine clock divided by 32 (1.337 μs for 24 MHz machine clock)
1
1
Setting disabled (Undefined)
• Initialized to 00B at reset.
• Read and write are enabled. However, setting "11B" is a interdiction.
Note:
Rewriting after the startup is an interdiction. Always perform the write operation before start or after
stop.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
369
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 5, bit 4] PIS1, PIS0 (pulse width measurement input pin selection)
The pulse width measurement input pin is selected.
Table 15.2-4 Selection of Pulse Width Measurement Input Pin
PIS1
PIS0
Operation mode
0
0
(The pin PWC is selected). [Initial value]
0
1
Setting disabled
1
0
Setting disabled
1
1
Setting disabled (Undefined)
• Initialized to 00B at reset.
• Read and write are enabled. However, do not set "01B", "10B", and "11B".
Note:
Rewriting after the startup is an interdiction. Always perform the write operation before start or after
stop.
[bit 3] S/C (Measurement mode (single/continuous) selection)
The measurement mode is selected.
Table 15.2-5 Selection of Measurement Mode of 16-bit Up-count Timer
S/C
Measurement mode selection
At timer mode
Pulse width
0
Single measurement mode
[Initial value]
Reload none (single shot)
Stop after one measurement
1
Continuous measurement mode
There is reload (reload timer).
Continuous measurement: buffer
register enabled
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
Note:
Rewriting after the startup is an interdiction. Always perform the write operation before start or after
stop.
370
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 2 to bit 0] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0 (operation mode/measurement edge selection)
Operation mode and width measurement edge are selected.
Table 15.2-6 Selection of Operating Mode/measurement Edge of 16-bit Up-count Timer
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Operation mode/measurement edge selection
0
0
0
Timer mode [Initial value]
0
0
1
Timer mode (only Reload mode)
0
1
0
Pulse width measurement mode between all edges
(↑ or ↓ - ↓ or ↑)
0
1
1
Divided cycle measurement mode (input divisor enabled)
1
0
0
Cycle between rising edges measurement mode (↑ - ↑)
1
0
1
"H" pulse width measurement mode (↑ - ↓)
1
1
0
"L" pulse width measurement mode (↓ - ↑)
1
1
1
Cycle between falling edges measurement mode (↓ - ↓)
• Initialized to "00B" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
Note:
Rewriting after the startup is an interdiction. Always perform the write operation before start or after
stop.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
371
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
15.2.2
MB90330A Series
PWC Data Buffer Register (PWCR)
Configuration and function of PWC data buffer register (PWCR) are described.
■ PWC Data Buffer Register (PWCR)
Figure 15.2-3 shows the bit configuration of PWC data buffer register (PWCR).
Figure 15.2-3 Bit Configuration of PWC Data Buffer Register (PWCR)
bit 15
00005FH
bit
00005EH
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
D15 D14
D13
D12
D11 D10
D9
D8
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
PWCR
PWC data buffer register
Initial value 00000000B
PWCR
PWC data buffer register
Initial value 00000000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
The function of PWC data buffer register (PWCR) varies in between the timer mode and the pulse width
setting mode that are set by the PWCSR register bit 2 to "0" (MOD2 to MOD0).
● In the timer mode (read/write enabled)
Becomes the reload register that holds the reload data when the reload timer operates (PWCSR bit 3: S/C =
1). It is reading/writing in this case, it is possible in both writing.
Becomes a direct access to the up count timer in the one-shot timer operation mode (PWCSR bit 3: S/C =
0). Perform the write operation when the timer stops although either read or write is possible also in this
case. Reading is always enabled to read the timer value in the count operation.
● In the pulse width measurement mode (read only enabled)
Becomes the buffer register that holds the previous measurement result in the continuous measurement
mode (PWCSR bit 3: S/C = 1).
In this case, the read only is enabled and no register value will be changed even when writing.
Becomes a direct access to the up count timer in the single mode (PWCSR bit 3: S/C = 0).
Also in this case, the read only is enabled and no register value will be changed even when writing.
Reading is anytime enabled to obtain the timer value during the count operation. When the measurement is
finished, the measured value is held.
Note:
Please access the PWCR register by word move operation. Be initialized to "00B" when resetting.
372
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.2 Register of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.2.3
PWC Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register
(DIVR)
Configuration and function of PWC Ratio of dividing frequency control register (DIVR)
are described.
■ PWC Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register (DIVR)
Figure 15.2-4 shows the bit configuration of a PWC ratio of dividing frequency control register (DIVR).
Figure 15.2-4 Bit Configuration of PWC Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register (DIVR)
bit
000060H
7
−
(−)
6
−
(−)
5
−
(−)
4
−
(−)
3
−
(−)
2
−
(−)
1
0
DIV1 DIV0
(R/W) (R/W)
DIVR
PWC ratio of dividing frequency control register
Initial value ------00B
R/W : Readable/Writable
− : Undefined
[bit 7 to bit 2] Undefined bit
The reading value is irregular. No effect on writing.
[bit 1, bit 0] DIV1, DIV0 (division ratio selection)
This register is used in the division cycle measurement mode (PWCSR bit 2.1.0: MOD2.MOD1.MOD0 =
001B) and has no meaning in the other mode else.
In the division cycle measurement mode, pulses input to the measurement pin are divided by the
division ratio set in the DIVR register and a single cycle width is measured after dividing.
Table 15.2-7 Division Ratio Selection
DIV1
DIV0
Count clock selection
0
0
4-dividing frequency [Initial value]
0
1
16-frequency division
1
0
64-frequency division
1
1
256-frequency division
• Initialized to "00B" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
Note:
Rewriting after the startup is an interdiction. Always perform the write operation before start or after
stop.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
373
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
15.3
MB90330A Series
Movement of PWC Timer
The movement of the PPG timer is explained.
■ Outline of PWC Timer Operation
The PWC timer, a multi-functional timer based on the 16-bit up count timer has built-in measurement input
pin, 8-bit input division, etc. PWC timer has the following two main functions:
• Timer Functions
• Pulse width count function
Either function can select three kinds of count clocks. Basic performance and operation of each function are
described as follows:
374
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.3.1
Operation of PWM Timer Functions
The up count timer enables the reload and one-shot operations.
■ Operation of PWM Timer Functions
Performs the count up at every count clock after starting the timer. An interrupt request may occur when an
overflow occurs in the range between 0000H and FFFFH.
The following operation is executed due to the mode when an overflow occurs:
• One-shot mode: Stops Counting
• Reload mode: The contents of reload register is reloaded to the timer and the counting restarts.
Figure 15.3-1 shows the timer function operation in the one-shot and reload modes.
Figure 15.3-1 Operation of Timer Functions
[One-shot mode]
(A solid line shows the timer count value.)
Timer count value
Overflow
Overflow
FFFFH
Write to PWCR
(Restart disabled)
0000H
Timer start
OVIR flag set/Timer stop
Timer start
OVIR flag set/Timer stop
Time
[Reload mode]
Timer count value
Overflow Overflow
FFFFH
Overflow Overflow Overflow
Reload
PWCR
write value
Reload
Reload Reload Reload
Reload
0000H
PWCR write Timer start
*
*
Restart
*
*
Reload
*
Timer stop
Time
* :OVIR flag set
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
375
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
15.3.2
MB90330A Series
Operation of Pulse Width Measurement Function
Time cycle between arbiter events of input pulse can be measured by the time.
■ Operation of Pulse Width Measurement Function
The pulse width measurement function does not start the count until the set measurement start edge is input
after it is started. Starts the count up after clearing the timer to be 0000H when detecting the start edge and
stops the count when detecting the stop edge. The value counted in this period is registered as the pulse
width. When the measurement ends, the interruption is detected.
Operates as follows depending on the measurement mode after the measurement.
• Single measurement mode: Suspends the operation.
• Continuous measurement mode: The timer value is transferred to the buffer register and the
measurement is suspended until the next start edge is input.
Figure 15.3-2 and Figure 15.3-3 show the single measurement mode operation and the continuous measurement
mode operation, respectively.
Figure 15.3-2 Pulse Width Measurement Operation (Single Measurement Mode/ "H" Width Measurement)
PWC input measured pulse
(A sold line shows the timer count value.)
Timer count value
FFFFH
Timer clear
0000H
Measurement
start
Timer
start
Timer
stop
Time
EDIR flag set (Measurement end)
Figure 15.3-3 Pulse Width Measurement Operation
(Continuous Measurement Mode/ "H" Width Measurement)
PWC input measured pulse
(A solid line shows the timer count value.)
Timer count value
Overflow
FFFFH
Transfer data to PWCR
Timer clear
Timer clear
0000H
Measurement
start
Timer
start
Timer
stop
Timer
start
Time
EDIR flag set (Measurement end)
376
EDIR flag set
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.3.3
Count Clock Selection and Operation Mode selection
Count clock selection and operation mode selection are described.
■ Count Clock Selection
Timer count clock can be selected from three types of internal clock sources by setting the RWCSR bit 7
(CKS1) and bit 6 (CKS0).
Table 15.3-1 shows the count clock selection contents.
Table 15.3-1 Count Clock Selection Contents
PWCSR/
bit7,bit6:CKS1,CKS0
Selected internal count clock
00B
4-division of Machine clock
(0.17 μs in case of machine clock of 24 MHz) [Initial value]
01B
16-division of Machine clock
(0.67 μs in case of machine clock of 24 MHz)
10B
32-division of Machine clock
(1.33 μs in case of machine clock of 24 MHz)
• 4-division clock of machine clock is selected for the initial value after the reset.
Note:
Select the count clock always before starting the timer.
■ Selects Operation Mode
Select each of operation and measurement modes by setting the PWCSR bit.
• Operation mode selection: PWCSR bit 2, 1, 0 (MOD2, MOD1, and MOD0 bits) timer mode/pulse width
measurement mode selection, measurement edge decision, etc.
• Measurement mode setting: PWCSR bit 3 (S/C bit) single measurement/continuous measurement or
reload/one-shot selection.
Table 15.3-2 shows the setting contents of operation mode/measurement mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
377
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
Table 15.3-2 Setting Contents of Operation Mode/measurement Mode Content
Operating mode
S/C
MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
Single shot timer
0
0
0
0
Reload timer
1
0
0
0
↑ or ↓ - ↑ or ↓
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
Measurement between all
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
edges
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Measurement at cycle of Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
dividing frequency
1-256 frequency division Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
↑-↑
Measurement of cycle
between rising
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
1
0
0
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
1
0
0
↑-↓
"H" pulse width
measurement
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
1
0
1
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
1
0
1
↓-↑
"L" pulse width
measurement
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
1
1
0
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
1
1
0
↓-↓
Measurement of cycle
between falling
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
1
1
1
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
1
1
1
Timer
Pulse width
measurement
• One-shot timer is selected in the initial setting after the reset.
Note
Select the operation mode always before starting the timer.
378
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.3.4
Startup and Stop of Timer/Pulse Width Measurement
Start/restart/stop/forced stop of each operation are performed by using the PWCSR bit
15 and PWCSR bit 14 (STRT and STOP bits).
■ Startup and Stop of Timer/Pulse Width Measurement
Functions are separated so that the STRT bit starts and restarts the timer/pulse width measurement and the
STOP bit forcibly stops the measurement when "0" is written in either one of bits. However, no function is
effective unless the values written in both bits are exclusive each other. When writing an instruction other
than bit manipulation instructions (one-byte instruction or more), the bits combination is always limited as
shown in Table 15.3-3.
Table 15.3-3 Function of STRT Bit and STOP Bit
STRT
STOP
Function
0
1
Startup/reactivation of timer/pulse width measurement
1
0
Compulsion stop of timer/pulse width measurement
When using a bit manipulation instruction (clear bit instruction), the hardware automatically writes it in the
combination as shown in Table 15.3-3 and no care is necessary.
■ Operation after Startup
Operations are as follow after starting the timer mode or the pulse width measurement mode.
● Timer mode
The count operation begins at once.
● Pulse width measurement mode
No count is performed until the measurement start edge is input. After the measurement start edge is
detected, the 16-bit up count timer is cleared to be 0000B and the count starts.
■ Reactivation
Starting (writing "0" in the STRT bit) during the operation after starting the timer/pulse width measurement
mode is called as restarting.
Restarting performs the following operations depending on the mode:
● Single shot timer mode
There is no influence in the operation.
● Reload timer mode
Reload operates, and the operation is continued. Restarting at the same timing when an overflow occurs
sets the overflow flag (OVIR).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
379
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
● Pulse width measurement mode
In the state of measurement starting edge waiting there is no influence in the operation. During the
measurement, the count is stopped and the measurement start edge is again waited. In this case, if the
measurement termination edge detection and the restart occur at the same time, the measurement
termination flag (EDIR) is set and the result is transferred to PWCR in the continuous measurement mode.
■ Stops
In the one-shot timer mode and the single measurement mode, the timer overflow or the measurement
termination automatically stops the count and no intentional stop is necessary. In the other modes, however,
the timer must be forcibly stopped. Similarly, if you want to stop the timer before the automatic stop, you
must forcibly stop it.
■ Check Operating State
When the above-mentioned STRT and STOP bits are read, they are functional as the operating state
indication bits.
Table 15.3-4 shows the function of operating state indication bit.
Table 15.3-4 Function of Operating State Indication Bit
STRT
STOP
Operating State
0
0
Timer stop (excluding status of waiting for measurement start edge):
It is not active or shows that the measurement ended.
1
1
During timer counting or waiting for measurement start edge
Note:
Reading either the STRT or STOP bit provides a same value. Do not use, however, the read-modifywrite instructions (bit process instructions, etc.) to read the STRT and STOP bits because "11B"
always results.
380
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.3.5
Operation of Timer Mode
The operation of the timer mode is explained.
■ Clearing Timer
The 16-bit up count timer is cleared to be 0000H in the following case:
• At a reset
• In the pulse width measurement mode, when the measurement start edge is detected and the count is
started.
■ One-shot Operation Modes.
In the one-shot operation mode, the count up is performed at every count clock after the timer started and
an overflow occurrence at counting from FFFFH to 0000H automatically stops the count. When a value is
set in the PWCR before starting the timer, the count is started from the value. In this case, the set value is
not held and the PWCR value indicates the current count value.
■ Reload Operation Mode
In the reload operation mode, the count up is performed at every count clock after the reload value in the
PWCR is set in the timer after starting the timer. Overflow occurrence at counting from FFFFH to 0000H
again sets the reload value in the PWCR in the timer (reload operation) to repeat the count operation. The
timer does not stop until it is forcibly stopped by writing into the PWCSR STOP bit or it is reset. The value
set in the PWCR before starting the timer is held as the reload value during the count operation and always
set in the timer at starting/restarting and an overflow occurrence. Use a newly changed reload value to
change the set value during the count operation at the next overflow occurrence or the timer restarting.
■ Timer Value and Reload Value
The PWCR in the one-shot operation mode has a direct access to the up count timer. The value written in
the PWCR is written in the timer as it is so that you can acquire the timer value in the count operation by
reading the PWCR value during the timer operation. If you write an arbiter value in the PWCR before
starting the timer, the count operation is started from this specified value. In the reload operation mode,
accessing the up count timer is impossible. The PWCR functions as the reload register to hold the reload
value. When the timer start, restart, or overflow occurs, the value written in the PWCR always set to the
timer. When PWCR is read, the stored reload value is read.
The PWCR value and the timer value are undefined when the timer is set to the one-shot operation mode
after forcibly suspending the reload operation mode. Therefore, always write the value before using the
timer.
■ Interrupt Generation Request
In timer mode operation, interrupt request by the timer overflow can be generated. An interrupt request is
generated when the overflow flag is set at an overflow occurrence caused by the count up and the overflow
interrupt request is permitted.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
381
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Timer Cycle
If 0000H is set to the PWCR in the one-shot operation mode and the timer is started, an overflow occurs
after 65536 times counted up to stop the count. The time period from the start to the stop is calculated by
the following expression:
T1=(65536-n1) × t
T1: Time from startup to stop (μs)
n1: Timer value written in the PWCR at the start
t: Count Clock cycle (μs)
If 0000H is set to the PWCR in the reload operation mode and the timer is started, an overflow occurs at
every 65536-time counted up. Reload cycle time is calculated by the following expression:
TR=(65536-nR) × t
TR: Reload cycle (overflow cycle) (μs)
nR: Reload value held in the PWCR
t: Count Clock cycle (μs)
■ Count Clock and Maximum Cycle
Maximum cycle is provided when 0000H is set for the PWCR value in the timer mode.
The count clock cycle and the maximum cycle of the timer are shown in Table 15.3-5 when the machine
clock frequency (called F hereafter) is 24 MHz.
Table 15.3-5 Count Clock and Cycle
Count clock selection
in CSK1,CSK0=00:(φ/4)
in CSK1,CSK0=00:(φ/16)
in CSK1,CSK0=00:(φ/32)
Count Clock Cycle
0.17 μs
0.67 μs
1.33 μs
Timer maximum cycle
10.92 ms
43.7 ms
87.4 ms
382
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Operation Flow of Timer
Figure 15.3-4 shows the timer operation flow.
Figure 15.3-4 Operation Flow of Timer
Count clock selection
Operation/
Each
Measurement
settings mode selection
Interrupt flag clear
Interrupt enabled
Set value to PWCR
Restart
Reload operation mode
Start by STRT bit
One-shot operation mode
Read PWCR value to Timer
Count start
Count start
Count up
Count up
Overflow generation
OVIR flag set
Overflow generation
OVIR flag set
Count stop
Operation stop
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
383
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
15.3.6
MB90330A Series
Operation of Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Operation of pulse width measurement mode is described.
■ Single Measurement and Continuous Measurement
Pulse width measurement modes include a mode to perform only one-time measurement and a mode to
perform continuous measurements. Each mode is selected by the PWCSR S/C bits (see Section "15.3.3
Count Clock Selection and Operation Mode selection").
● One-time measurement mode
When the first measurement termination edge is input, the timer counter stops and the measurement
termination flag (EDIR) in the PWCSR is set not to perform measurement anymore (however, when the
restart occurs at the same time, the measurement start is waited).
● Continuous measurement mode
When the measurement termination edge is input, the timer counter stops and the measurement termination
flag (EDIR) in the PWCSR is set to stop the count until the measurement start edge is again input. When
the measurement start edge is again input, the measurement is started after the timer is cleared to 0000H. At
the measurement termination, the measured result in the timer is transferred to the PWCR.
Note:
Always change the measurement mode selection when the timer stops.
■ Data of Measurement Result
Measured results, the timer value handling, and the PWCR function are different between the single
measurement mode and the continuous measurement mode. The measurement result in both modes is as
follows:
● One-time measurement mode
• When the PWCR is read during the operation, the timer value in the measurement is acquired.
• When the PWCR is read after the measurement termination, the measured result data is acquired.
● Continuous measurement mode
• At the measurement termination, the measured result in the timer is transferred to the PWCR.
• When the PWCR is read, the last measurement result is acquired and the previous measurement result is
held even in the measurement operation. The timer value under the measurement cannot be read.
When the next measurement is terminated before reading the measured result in the continuous
measurement mode, the previous measurement result is erased by a new measurement result. In this case,
the gill in PWCSR-Flag (ERR) is set. Error flag (ERR) is automatically cleared when reading the PWCR.
384
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Measurement Mode and Counter Operation
The measurement mode can be selected from six types depending on the place where the input pulse is
measured. The cycle measurement mode is also prepared to arbitrarily divide the input pulse for highprecision measurement of higher frequency pulse width. Table 15.3-6 shows the measurement mode list.
Table 15.3-6 The Measurement Mode List (1 / 2)
Measurement
mode
MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
Measurement mode measured target
(W: width of a measured pulse)
W
"H" pulse width
measurement
1
0
1
Count start
W
Count stop
Start
Stop
The width at "H" period is measured.
Count (measurement) start: when detecting a rising edge
Count (measurement) end: when detecting a falling edge
W
"L" pulse width
measurement
1
1
0
Count start
W
Count stop
Start
Stop
The width at "L" period is measured.
Count (measurement) start: when detecting a falling edge
Count (measurement) end: when detecting a rising edge
W
Rising
Between edges
Measurement at
cycle
1
0
0
Count stop
Start
Count start
1
1
1
W
Count stop
Start
Count start
Stop
Start
Stop
W
Stop
Start
Stop
A cycle between falling edges is measured.
Count (measurement) start: when detecting a falling edge
Count (measurement) end: when detecting a falling edge
W
Between all edges
pulse width
measurement
W
A cycle between rising edges is measured.
Count (measurement) start: when detecting a rising edge
Count (measurement) end: when detecting a rising edge
W
Falling
Between edges
Measurement at
cycle
W
W
W
Count stop
0
1
0
Count start
Start
Stop
Start
Stop
The width between the edges continuously input is measured.
Count (measurement) beginning: When edge is detected
Count (measurement) end: When edge is detected
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
385
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
Table 15.3-6 The Measurement Mode List (2 / 2)
Measurement
mode
Measurement mode measured target
(W: width of a measured pulse)
MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
W
Measurement at
cycle of dividing
frequency
0
1
Count start
(Example of 4 division)
1
W
Count stop
Start
W
Stop
For only dividing ratio selected by division setting register DIVR
The input pulse is divided and the cycle is measured.
Count (measurement) start: when detecting a rising edge immediately after
counting starts
Count (measurement) end: when one cycle ends after it is divided
No timer count is performed from start of the count to input of the count start edge in any modes. The timer
is cleared to 0000H after inputting the count start edge and the timer count is performed at every count
clock until the count termination edge is input. When the count termination edge is input, the next operation
is executed.
1. Measurement ending flag (EDIR) in PWCSR is set.
2. The timer count operation stops (excluding when it is at the same time of restarting).
3. Continuous measurement mode: The timer value (measured result) is transferred to the PWCR and the
count is suspended until the next measurement start edge is input.
4. Single measurement mode: The measurement is terminated (excluding when it is at the same time of
restarting).
When the pulse width measurement between all edges or the division measurement is performed in the
continuous measurement mode, the termination edge is the next measurement edge.
■ Minimum Input Pulse Width
There are following limitations for pulses that can be input to width measurement input pins (PWC).
Pulse width must be 4-machine cycle (0.17 μs for the 24-MHz machine clock) or more.
■ Calculation Method of Pulse Width/cycle
Pulse width/cycle to be measured can be calculated by the following expression:
TW=n × t/DIV (μs)
TW: pulse width to be measured/cycle (μs)
n: Measurement result data in PWCR
t: Count Clock cycle (μs)
DIV: Division ratio selected by the division ratio register DIVR
(Frequency of dividing frequency measurement mode)
386
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Range of Count at Pulse Width/cycle
Measurable ranges of pulse width/cycle vary depending on the selected combination of division ratios of
count clock and input divider.
Table 15.3-7 shows the measurement range list of machine clock when the clock frequency (called φ
hereafter) is 24 MHz.
Table 15.3-7 Pulse Width Measurement Range List
Divide ratio
DIV1
DIV0
in CKS1,CKS0=
00(φ/4)
in CKS1,CKS0=
01(φ/16)
in CKS1,CKS0=
10(φ/32)
None
-
-
0.17 μs to 10.92 ms
(0.25 μs)
0.17 μs to 43.7 ms
(1.6 μs)
0.17 μs to 87.4 ms
(3.2 μs)
4-frequency division
0
0
0.17 μs to 2.73 ms
(6.25 μs)
0.17 μs to 10.92 ms
(0.4 μs)
0.17 μs to 21.85 ms
(0.8 μs)
16-frequency division
0
1
0.17 μs to 683 μs
(15.6 ns)
0.17 μs to 2.73 ms
(1.6 μs)
0.17 μs to 5.46 ms
(0.2 μs)
64-frequency division
1
0
0.17 μs to 170 μs
(3.91 μs)
0.17 μs to 683 μs
(25 μs)
0.17 μs to 1.36 ms
(50 ns)
256-frequency division
1
1
0.17 μs to 43 μs
(0.98 μs)
0.17 μs to 171 μs
(6.25 μs)
0.17 μs to 341 μs
(12.5 ns)
Note: These values enclosed in brackets ( ) indicate the granularity per bit
■ Interrupt Request Generation
Two following interrupt requests can be generated in the pulse width measurement mode:
● Interrupt request by overflow of timer
When an overflow is generated by the count up during the measurement, the overflow flag is set. When the
overflow interrupt request is permitted, an interrupt request occurs.
● Interrupt request by measurement termination
When the measurement termination edge is detected, the measurement termination flag (EDIR) in the
PWCSR is set. If the measurement termination interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request occurs.
The measurement termination flag (EDIR) is automatically cleared as soon as the measured result PWCR is
read.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
387
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.3 Movement of PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Operation Flow of Pulse Width Measurement
Figure 15.3-5 shows the pulse width measurement operation flow.
Figure 15.3-5 Operation Flow of Pulse Width Measurement
Count clock selection
Operation/
Each
Measurement
settings mode selection
Interrupt flag clear
Interrupt enabled
Restart
Start by STRT bit
Continuous
measurement mode
Measurement start
edge detection
Measurement start
edge detection
Clear timer
Clear timer
Count start
Count start
Count up
Count up
Overflow generation
OVIR flag set
388
Single
measurement mode
Overflow generation
OVIR flag set
Measurement edge
detection
EDIR flag set
Measurement edge
detection
EDIR flag set
Count stop
Count stop
Read Timer value to PWCR
Operation stop
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.4 Precautions when Using PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
15.4
Precautions when Using PWC Timer
Precautions when using the PWC timer are described.
■ Precautions when Using PWC Timer
● Notes concerning rewriting register
Following bits among PWCSRs are inhibited to be updated during the operation. Always update the bits
before starting or after stopping the operation.
• (Bit 7, bit 6) CKS1,CKS0 (clock selection)
• (Bit 5, bit 4) PIS1, PIS0 (input signal selection)
• (Bit 3) S/C (Measurement mode (single/continuous) selection)
• (Bit 2 to bit 0) MOD2, MOD1, MOD0 (operation mode/measurement edge selection)
It is inhibited to update the DIVR during the operation. Always update the bits before starting or after
stopping the operation.
● Handling of measurement ending flag of timer mode
Measurement termination interrupt request flag (EDIR) value in the PWCSR has no meaning in the timer
mode. Therefore, always set "0" to the measurement termination interrupt request bit (EDIE) in the
PWCSR, when using in the timer mode.
● Treatment of STRT and STOP bit in PWCSR
Note that both bits have different meaning between when writing and reading (see Section "15.2.1 PWC
Control Status Register (PWCSR)"). In addition, the read value is "11B" when using a read-modify-write
instruction regardless of the bit value. Therefore, note that no bit process instruction can be used to read the
operating status (reading always produces the operating status). When writing to the STRT and STOP bits
to start/stop the timer, bit process instruction (bit clear instruction, etc.) can be used for the respective bits.
● Clearing Timer
Since the timer is cleared by the measurement start edge in the pulse width measurement mode, the data
present in the timer before starting become invalid.
● Value of PWCR and timer when mode is changed
• Always write the value before using the timer because the held value in the PWCR and the timer value
become undefined when they are used in the reload timer mode before forcibly stopping the timer to
switch to the one-shot timer mode.
• Always write the value before the use because the PWCR value becomes undefined if it is used in the
one-shot timer mode.
• Always reset the value to the PWCR before starting the operation when switching the pulse width
measurement mode to the timer mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
389
CHAPTER 15 PWC TIMER
15.4 Precautions when Using PWC Timer
MB90330A Series
● Minimum pulse width
There are following limitations for pulses that can be input to width measurement input pins:
• Minimum pulse width: 2 divisions of machine clock (0.25μs or more for 16-MHz machine clock)
• Minimum input frequency: 4 divisions of machine clock (4 MHz or less for 16-MHz machine clock)
When the input pulse width is smaller or the input pulse frequency is higher than the above description, the
operation cannot be guaranteed. If there is a possibility of such noise in the input signal, use, for example, a
filter outside of the chip to eliminate the noise before the signal is input.
● Frequency of dividing frequency measurement mode
Note that the pulse width obtained from the measured result calculation is the average value because the
input pulses are divided in the division cycle measurement mode among the pulse width measurement
modes.
● Handling of clock select bit
Do not set "11B" to (Bit 7, bit 6) CKS1, CKS0 (clock selection) in the PWCSR.
● Reactivation under operation
When restarting after starting the count operation, following cases may occur depending on the timing:
• When restarting at the same time of an overflow occurrence in the reload timer mode, the overflow flag
(OVIR) is set.
• When restarting at the same time of measurement termination edge input in the pulse width single
measurement mode, the measurement start edge is waited and the measurement termination edge
(EDIR) is set.
• When restarting at the same time of measurement termination edge input in the pulse width single
measurement mode, the measurement start edge is waited and the measurement termination edge
(EDIR) is set and the current measured result is transferred to the PWCR.
● When the PWC timer is used in "the "H" pulse-width or "L" pulse-width measurement mode in the
continuous measurement mode":
The pulse width measurement is completed, the next pulse width measurement start is waited, the timer
operation is unexpectedly continued, and the overflow flag (OVIR) of timer may be sometime set before
starting the next pulse width measurement. In this case, even when no overflow occurs at the next pulse
width measurement termination, the overflow flag has been set. Therefore, do not use the overflow flag
when using the PWC timer in the "H" pulse width or "L" pulse width measurement mode in the continuous
measurement mode.
390
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16
16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
This chapter describes an overview of 16-bit reload
timer, the configuration and functions of register and the
16-bit reload timer operation.
16.1 Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
391
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.1 Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
16.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
The 16-bit reload timer provides two functions either one of which can be selected, the
internal clock that performs the count down by synchronizing with 3-type internal
clocks and the event count mode that performs the count down by detecting the arbiter
edge of pulses input to the external pin.
■ Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
Underflow of the 16-bit reload timer is defined as a case when the count value becomes from 0000H to
FFFFH. Therefore, when the equation (reload register setting value + 1) holds, an underflow occurs. Either
mode can be selected for the count operation from the reload mode which repeats the count by reloading
the count setting value at the underflow occurrence or the one-shot mode which stops the count at the
underflow occurrence. The interrupt can be generated at the counter underflow occurrence so as to
correspond to the DTC.
392
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.1 Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.1.1
Function of 16-bit Reload Timer
This section describes overview and Function of 16-bit reload timer.
■ Operation Modes of 16-bit Reload Timer
Clock Mode
Counter operation
Reload mode
Internal clock
One-shot mode
16-bit reload timer operation
Software trigger operation
External trigger operation
External gate input operation
Reload mode
Event count mode
(External clock Mode)
Software trigger operation
One-shot mode
■ Internal Clock Mode
One type can be selected for the count clock from 3 types of internal clocks.
● Software trigger operation
When 1 is written to TGR bit of timer control status register (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2), counter operation is
started. Trigger input using the TRG bit is valid for the external trigger input and the external gate input.
● External trigger operation
When the selected edges (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges) are input to the TIN0/TIN1/TIN2 pin, the
count operation is started.
● External gate input operation
While the selected signal ("L" or "H") is being input to TIN0/TIN1/TIN2, the count operation is continued.
■ Event Count Mode (External Clock Mode)
This function count downs at the edge when the selected edges (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges) are
input to the TIN0/TIN1/TIN2 pin.
External clock of a constant cycle can be also used for the interval timer.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
393
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.1 Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Counter Operation Mode
● Reload mode
When an underflow (0000H → FFFFH) occurs during the count down, the count setting value is reloaded to
continue the count operation. Interrupt request that can be generated at the underflow occurrence can be
also used as an interval timer. The toggle waveform which reverses at every underflow occurrence can be
also output from the TOT0/TOT1/TOT2 pin.
Count Clock
Internal clock
External clock
Count Clock Cycle
Time of interval
21/ φ (0.083 μs)
0.083 μs to 5.461 ms
23/ φ (0.33 μs)
0.33 μs to 21.845 ms
25/ φ (1.33 μs)
1.33 μs to 87.38 ms
23/ φ (0.5 μs)
0.5 μs or more
φ: Machine clock values in parentheses ( ) are when machine clock is in 24 MHz operating.
● One-shot mode
When an underflow (0000H → FFFFH) occurs during the count down, the count operation is stopped.
The interruption can be generated by the underflow. Short waveform which indicates the count operation
can be also output from the TOT0/TOT1/TOT2 pin during the count operation.
394
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.1 Overview of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.1.2
Block Diagram of 16-bit Reload Timer
Block Diagram of 16-bit Reload Timer is shown.
■ Block Diagram of 16-bit Reload Timer
Figure 16.1-1 Block Diagram of 16-bit Reload Timer
Internal data bus
TMRLR0 to TMRLR2
16-bit reload register
Reload signal
TMR0 to TMR2
Reload
control circuit
16-bit timer register (down-counter) UF
CLK
Count clock generation circuit
Machine
clock
frequency
3
Prescaler
Gate
input
Circuit to determine
which clock is valid
Clear
Wait signal
CLK
Output signal
generation circuit
Reserved
Input
control circuit
Pin
Output signal
generation circuit
External clock
TIN0 to TIN2
Function
selection
Clock selector
3
Selection
signal
Pin
EN
2
OUTL
RELD
TOT0 to TOT2
Operation
control circuit
OUTE
Timer control status register (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
395
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
16.2
MB90330A Series
Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
Configuration and functions of register used for the 16-bit reload timer are described.
■ Register List of 16-bit Reload Timer
Figure 16.2-1 is shown the list of the register of 16-bit reload timer.
Figure 16.2-1 List of Register of 16-bit Reload Timer
bit 15
−
ch.0 : 000063H
ch.1 : 000067H ( − )
ch.2 : 00006BH
(X)
14
13
−
−
(−)
(X)
(−)
(X)
12
TMCSR0 to TMCSR2
11
10
9
8
CSL1 CSL0 MOD2 MOD1 Timer control status register (Upper)
( − ) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Read/Write
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(X)
Initial value
−
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TMCSR0 to TMCSR2
bit 7
ch.0 : 000062H MOD0 OUTE OUTL RELD INTE UF CNTE TRG Timer control status register (Lower)
ch.1 : 000066H (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Read/Write
ch.2 : 00006AH (0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
Initial value
bit 15
ch.0 : 000065H D15
ch.1 : 000069H (R)
ch.2 : 00006DH (W)
(X)
bit 7
ch.0 : 000064H D07
ch.1 : 000068H (R)
ch.2 : 00006CH (W)
(X)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
D14
(R)
(W)
(X)
D13
(R)
(W)
(X)
D12
(R)
(W)
(X)
D11
(R)
(W)
(X)
D10
(R)
(W)
(X)
D09
(R)
(W)
(X)
D08
(R)
(W)
(X)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
TMR0 to TMR2/TMRLR0 to TMRLR2
16-bit timer register/
16-bit reload register (Upper)∗
Read (TMR0 to TMR2)
Write (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Initial value
TMR0 to TMR2/TMRLR0 to TMRLR2
16-bit timer register/
16-bit reload register (Lower)∗
Read (TMR0 to TMR2)
Write (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Initial value
∗ : This functions as 16-bit timer register (TMR0 to TMR2) at reading,
This functions as 16-bit timer register (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2) at writing.
396
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.2.1
Timer Control Status Register 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)
Configuration and functions of timer control status registers 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to
TMCSR2) are described.
■ Timer Control Status Register 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)
The timer control status registers 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2) control the operation mode and interrupt of
16-bit reload timer. Bits other than UF/CNTE/TRG are modified at CNTE=0.
Figure 16.2-2 shows the bit configuration of timer control status registers 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2).
Figure 16.2-2 Bit Configuration of Timer Control Status Registers 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)
Address:
bit
ch.0 : 000063H
ch.1 : 000067H
ch.2 : 00006BH
15
(X)
14
(X)
12
13
(X)
(X)
11
10
9
8
CSL1 CSL0 MOD2 MOD1
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
Address:
6
5
2
0
bit
7
4
3
1
ch.0 : 000062H
MOD0 OUTE OUTL RELD INTE
UF CNTE TRG
ch.1 : 000066H
ch.2 : 00006AH (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
TMCSR0 to TMCSR2 (upper)
Initial value
XXXX0000B
TMCSR0 to TMCSR2 (lower)
Initial value
00000000B
R/W Readable/Writable
X Undefined value
Undefined
The functions of each bit of timer control status registers 0 to 2 (TMCSR0 to TMCSR2) are described in
the following:
[bit 15 to bit 12] Undefined bit
The reading value is irregular. No effect on writing.
[bit 11, bit 10] CSL1, CSL0 (clock selection)
Clock source is selected by count clock selection.
CM44-10129-6E
Clock source (machine clock φ=24 MHz time)
CSL1
CSL0
0
0
φ/21(0.083 μs) [Initial value]
0
1
φ/23(0.33 μs)
1
0
φ/25(1.33 μs)
1
1
Event count mode
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
397
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 9 to bit 7] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0
This bit is used to set the operation mode and the I/O pin functions. The input pin functions as a trigger
at MOD2=0. When the active edge is input to the input pin and the count operation proceeds, the
content of the reload register is loaded to the counter. When the MOD2 value is "1", the timer operates
in the gate counter mode and the input pin functions as the gate input. In this mode, the counter operates
only while the active level is being input to the input pin.
The internal clock mode and the event counter mode are selected from the modes shown in Table 16.2-1
and Table 16.2-2 by combining the bits from MOD2 to MOD0.
Table 16.2-1 Internal Clock Mode (CSL1, CSL0 = 00, 01 or 10)
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Input Pin function
Active edge or level
0
0
0
Trigger invalidity
- [Initial value]
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
0
Rising edge
Trigger input
Falling edge
Both edges
"L" level
Gate input
1
X
1
"H" level
Table 16.2-2 Event Counter Mode (CSL1, CSL0 = 11)
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Input Pin function
Active edge or level
X
0
0
Trigger invalidity
- [Initial value]
X
0
1
X
1
0
X
1
1
Rising edge
Trigger input
Falling edge
Both edges
[bit 6] OUTE (power output permission)
The power output permission is controlled.
The TOT0 to TOT2 pin functions as the general-purpose port and the timer output pin when "0" and "1"
are provided, respectively. The output waveform becomes a toggle waveform in the reload mode. In the
one-shot mode, the TOT0 to TOT2 pin outputs a short-shape wave which indicates the proceeding
count operation.
OUTE
398
Function
0
General-purpose port [Initial value]
1
Timer output
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 5] OUTL (setting of output level)
This bit is used to set the TOT0 to TOT2 pin output level. OUTL and the output pin level reverses in 0/1.
OUTL
At One-shot mode (RELD=0)
At Reload mode (RELD=1)
0
Short-shape wave during counting "H"
0 [Initial value]
1
Short-shape wave during counting "L"
1
X
1
0
X
1
1
[bit 4] RELD (reload operation permission)
It is a bit by which the reload operation is permitted. When the RELD is "1", the timer operates in the
reload mode operation. In this mode, the timer loads the reload register content to the counter and
continues the count operation even when an underflow occurs (when the counter value changes from
0000H to FFFFH). The timer works in the single shot mode when RELD is "0". In this mode, the
counter operation stops when the counter value changes from 0000H to FFFFH and the underflow
occurs.
RELD
Function
0
One-shot mode [Initial value]
1
Reload mode
[bit 3] INTE (timer interruption demand permission)
This bit permits the timer interrupt request. If the INTE value is 0, no interrupt request is generated even
when the UF value becomes "1".
INTE
Function
0
Interrupt request power output interdiction [Initial value]
1
Interrupt request output enabled
[bit 2] UF (timer interruption demand flag)
It is Interrupt request flag. When the underflow is generated, UF is set in "1". Cleared by writing "0" or
by μDMAC. The read value is "1" when using a read-modify-write instruction.
CM44-10129-6E
UF
At write
At programming
0
Underflow none of counter [Initial value]
Clearness of this bit
1
There is an underflow of the counter.
There is no change
(There is no influence on another).
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
[Initial value]
399
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 1] CNTE (timer counter permission)
It is a bit by which the timer counter is permitted.
CNTE
Function
0
Counter stop [Initial value]
1
Counter permission (startup trigger waiting)
[bit 0] TRG (Software trigger)
It is Software trigger bit. When 1 is written on the TRG, the software trigger is applied so that the reload
register contents of timer is loaded to the counter to start the count operation. Writing "0" has no
meaning. Reading is always "0". Always enabled only when the CNTE value is 1 regardless of the
operation mode.
TRG
400
Function
0
There is no change (There is no influence on another).
1
Count operation start
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.2.2
16-bit Timer Register 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)/
16-bit Reload Register 0 to 2 (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Configuration and functions of 16-bit timer registers 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)/16-bit reload
registers 0 to 2 (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2) are described.
■ 16-bit Timer Register 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)/16-bit Reload Register 0 to 2 (TMRLR0 to
TMRLR2)
Figure 16.2-3 shows the bit configuration of 16-bit timer registers 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)/16-bit reload
registers (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2).
Figure 16.2-3 Bit Configuration of 16-bit Timer Registers 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)/16-bit Reload Registers 0
to 2 (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
bit
ch.0 : 000065H
ch.1 : 000069H
ch.2 : 00006DH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
D15
(R)
(W)
(X)
D14
(R)
(W)
(X)
D13
(R)
(W)
(X)
D12
(R)
(W)
(X)
D11
(R)
(W)
(X)
D10
(R)
(W)
(X)
D09
(R)
(W)
(X)
D08
(R)
(W)
(X)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
(R)
(W)
(X)
bit 7
ch.0 : 000064H D07
ch.1 : 000068H (R)
ch.2 : 00006CH (W)
(X)
TMR0 to TMR2/TMRLR0 to TMRLR2
16-bit timer register/
16-bit reload register (Upper)∗
Read (TMR0 to TMR2)
Write (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Initial value
TMR0 to TMR2/TMRLR0 to TMRLR2
16-bit timer register/
16-bit reload register (Lower)∗
Read (TMR0 to TMR2)
Write (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Initial value
∗ : This functions as 16-bit timer register (TMR0 to TMR2) at reading.
This functions as 16-bit timer register (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2) at writing.
■ 16-bit Timer Register 0 to 2 (TMR0 to TMR2)
This register can read the counter value of 16-bit down counter. When the counter operation is permitted
(CNTE = 1 for TMCSR0 to TMCSR2) and the count operation is started, the value written in the 16-bit
reload register is loaded to the registers TMR0 to TMR2 and the count down is started. In the count stop
status (CNTE = 0 for TMCSR0 to TMCSR2), the TMR0 to TMR2 register value is held.
Note:
Always use the word transfer instruction (MOVW A 003AH, etc.) when reading the TMR0 to TMR2
register that is enabled during the counter operation.
The 16-bit timer register (TMR0 to TMR2) has a read-only function despite its location at the same
address as the write-only 16-bit reload register (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2). Therefore, the write process
does not affect the TMR0 to TMR2 value but the TMRLR0 to TMRLR2 is written.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
401
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.2 Registers of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
■ 16-bit Reload Register 0 to 2 (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Set the initial counter value to the registers TMRLR0 to TMRLR2 in the status the counter operation is
inhibited (CNTE = 0 for TMCSR0 to TMCSR2) regardless of the 16-bit reload timer operation. When the
counter operation is permitted (CNTE = 1 for TMCSR0 to TMCSR2) and the counter is started, the count
down is started from the value written in the registers TMRLR0 to TMCSR2. Values set in the registers
TMRLR0 to TMCSR2 are reloaded to the counter to continue the count down at the underflow occurrence
in the reload mode. In the one-shot mode, the counter stops at FFFFH when an underflow occurs.
Note:
Write the TMRLR0 to TMRLR2 register in the status the counter stops (CNTE = 0 for TMCSR0 to
TMCSR2).
In addition, always use the word transfer instruction (MOVW A 003AH, etc.) when writing.
The 16-bit timer register (TMRLR0 to TMRLR2) has a write-only function despite its location at the
same address as the read-only 16-bit reload register (TMR0 to TMR2). Therefore, since the read
value is the TMR0 to TMR2 value, instructions such as INC, DEC, etc. cannot be used to perform
the read-modify-write (RMW) operations.
402
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.3
Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
The 16-bit reload timer setting and the counter operation status transition are
described.
■ Setting of 16-bit Reload Timer
● Setting of internal clock mode
To operate it as an interval timer, the setting shown in Figure 16.3-1 is necessary.
Figure 16.3-1 Setting of Internal Clock Mode
TMCSR0 bit 15
−
to
TMCSR2
14
13
12
−
−
−
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
CSL1 CSL0 MOD2 MOD1 MOD0 OUTE OUTL RELD INTE
2
1
0
UF CNTE TRG
1
Other than "11"
Setting initial value (Reload value) of Counter
TMRLR0
to
TMRLR2
Used bit
Set "1".
1
● Setting of Event Count Mode
To operate it in the event counter mode, the setting shown in Figure 16.3-2 is necessary.
Figure 16.3-2 Setting of Event Count Mode
bit 15
−
TMCSR
14
13
12
−
−
−
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
CSL1 CSL0 MOD2 MOD1 MOD0 OUTE OUTL RELD INTE
2
UF
1
0
CNTE TRG
1
Other than "11"
Setting initial value (Reload value) of Counter
TMRLR
DDR3
D37
DDR4
D46
1
CM44-10129-6E
D36
D46
D35
D45
D34
D44
D33
D43
D32
D42
D31
D41
D30
D40
Used bit
Set "1".
Set the bit corresponding to using pin to "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
403
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
16.3.1
MB90330A Series
State Transition of Counter Operation
The state transition of the counter operation is shown.
■ State Transition of Counter Operation
Figure 16.3-3 State Transition of Counter Operation
Reset
STOP state
CNTE = 0, WAIT = 1
TIN pin: input disabled
TOT pin: general-purpose I/O port
16-bit timer register:
Retained the value at stop
The value which is immediately
after reset is undefined.
CNTE = 0
CNTE = 0
CNTE = 1/TRG = 0
WAIT state
RUN state
CNTE = 1, WAIT = 1
TIN pin: only trigger input
TOT pin: output value
of 16-bit reload register
UF = 1 &
RELD = 0
(One-shot
mode)
16-bit timer register:
Retained the value at stop
the value is undefined until loading
immediately after reset.
TRG = 1
(Software trigger)
LOAD
External trigger of TIN
CNTE = 1/TRG = 1
CNTE = 1, WAIT = 0
TIN pin: function as input pin
of 16-bit reload timer
TOT pin: function as output pin
of 16-bit reload timer
16-bit timer register:
Counter operation
UF = 1 &
RELD = 1
(Reload mode)
TRG = 1
(Software trigger)
CNTE = 1, WAIT = 0
Load setting value of 16-bit reload
register to 16-bit timer register
Load end
Status transition by Hardware
Status transition by Register access
404
WAIT
WAIT signal (internal signal)
TRG
Software trigger bit (TMCSR)
CNTE
Timer counter enable bit (TMCSR)
UF
Timer interrupt request flag bit (TMCSR)
RELD
Reload operation enable bit (TMCSR)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.3.2
Operation of Internal Clock Mode (Reload Mode)
It is synchronized with the internal count clock, the 16-bit counter performs the count
down, and the counter underflow generates the CPU interrupt request. Also can output
toggle waveforms from the timer output pin.
■ Operation of Internal Clock Mode (Reload Mode)
When the count operation is permitted (CNTE = 1 for TMCSR) and the timer is started by the software
trigger bit (TRG of TMCSR) or an external trigger, the reload register (TMRLR) value is loaded to the
counter and the counter operation is started.
When the counter permission bit and the software trigger bit are simultaneously set to "1", the count
operation starts at the same time of the counter permission. When the counter value underflows ("0000H" →
"FFFFH"), the 16-bit reload register (TMRLR) value is loaded to the counter and the count operation is
continued. At this moment, if the underflow interrupt request flag bit (UF) is set to "1" and the interrupt
request permission bit (INTE) is set to "1", the interrupt request occurs. In addition, the toggle waveform
which reverses at every underflow can be output from the TOT pin.
● Operation of Software trigger
When "1" is written to TRG bit of timer control status register (TMCSR), the counter is started.
Figure 16.3-4 shows the software trigger operation at reloading.
Figure 16.3-4 Count Operation (Software Trigger Operation) in the Reload Mode
Count clock
−1
Reload
data
Counter
Data load
signal
UF bit
0000H
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
CNTE bit
TRG bit
T*
TOT pin
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 1T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
● Operation of External trigger
When a valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected) is input to the TIN pin, the
counter is started.
Figure 16.3-5 shows the external trigger operation in the reload mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
405
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
Figure 16.3-5 Count Operation in the Reload Mode (external Trigger Operation)
Count clock
Counter
Data load
signal
UF bit
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
CNTE bit
TIN pin
TOT pin
2T to 2.5T*
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 2T to 2.5T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
Note:
Input a trigger pulse of which width is 2/φ or more to the TIN pin.
● Operation of gate input
When "1" is set to the count permission bit (CNTE) of timer control status register (TMCSR) and "1" is set
to the software trigger bit (TRG), the count operation is started.
While a valid level ("L" or "H" can be set) of gate input, which is, set in the operation mode-setting bit
(MOD2, MOD1, and MOD0) is being input to the TIN pin, the count operation is performed.
Figure 16.3-6 Count Operation in the Reload Mode (Soft Trigger Operation)
Count clock
Counter
Reload data
−1
−1
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
−1
Data load
signal
UF bit
CNTE bit
TRG bit
T*
TIN pin
TOT pin
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 1T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
Note:
Input a trigger pulse of which width is 2/φ or more to the TIN pin.
406
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.3.3
Operation of Internal Clock Mode (Single Shot Mode)
It is synchronized with the internal count clock, the 16-bit counter performs the count
down, and the counter underflow generates the CPU interrupt request. Also the TOT pin
can output rectangular waveforms indicating that counting is going on.
■ Internal Clock Mode (Single Shot Mode)
When the count operation is permitted (CNTE = 1 for TMCSR) and the timer is stared by the software
trigger bit (TRG of TMCSR) or an external trigger, the count operation is started. When the count
permission bit and the software trigger bit are simultaneously set to "1", the count is started at the same
time of the count permission. When the counter value underflows ("0000H" → "FFFFH"), the counter stops
in the state of "FFFFH". At this moment, if the underflow interrupt request flag bit (UF) is set to "1" and the
interrupt request permission bit (INTE) is set to "1", the interrupt request occurs.
In addition, the rectangular waveform indicating the count operation can be output from the TOT pin.
● Operation of Software trigger
When "1" is written to TRG bit of timer control status register (TMCSR), the counter is started.
Figure 16.3-7 shows the software trigger operation in the one-shot mode.
Figure 16.3-7 Count Operation in One-shot Mode (Software Trigger Operation)
Count clock
Reload
data
Counter
−1
0000H FFFFH
Reload
data
−1
0000H FFFFH
Data load
signal
UF bit
CNTE bit
TRG bit
T*
TOT pin
Start trigger input wait
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 1T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
● Operation of External trigger
When a valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected) is input to the TIN pin, the
counter is started.
Figure 16.3-8 shows the external trigger operation in the one-shot mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
407
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
Figure 16.3-8 Count Operation in One-shot Mode (external Trigger Operation)
Count clock
Reload
data
Counter
−1
0000H FFFFH
Reload
data
−1
0000H
FFFFH
Data load
signal
UF bit
CNTE bit
TIN pin
2T to 2.5T*
TOT pin
Start trigger input wait
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 2T to 2.5T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
Note:
Input a trigger pulse of which width is 2/φ or more to the TIN pin.
● Operation of gate input
While the valid level ("H" level or "L" level can be selected) is being input to the TIN pin, the count
operation is performed. Figure 16.3-9 shows the gate input operation in the one-shot mode.
Figure 16.3-9 Count Operation in One-shot Mode (Soft Trigger Gate Input Operation)
Count clock
Reload
data
Counter
−1
0000H
FFFFH
Reload
data
−1
0000H
FFFFH
Data load
signal
UF bit
CNTE bit
TRG bit
T*
TOT pin
Start trigger input wait
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 1T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
Note:
Input a gate input of which pulse width is 2/φ or more to the TIN pin.
408
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
16.3.4
Event Count Mode
When the input edge from the TIN pin is counted, the 16-bit counter is counted down
and the counter underflow occurs, the CPU interrupt request is generated. In addition,
the toggle waveform or the rectangular waveform can be output from the TOT pin.
■ Event Count Mode
When the count operation is permitted (CNTE = 1 for TMCSR) and the counter is started (TRG = 1 for
TMCSR), the 16-bit reload register (TMRLR) value is loaded to the counter. Every time when the valid
edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both edge can be selected) of pulses (external count clock) input to the
TIN pin is detected, the count down is performed. When the count permission bit and the software trigger
bit are simultaneously set to "1", the count is started at the same time of the count permission.
● Operation of Reload mode
When the counter value underflows ("0000H" → "FFFFH"), the 16-bit reload register (TMRLR) value is
loaded to the counter and the count operation is continued. At this moment, if the underflow interrupt
request flag bit (UF) is set to "1" and the interrupt request permission bit (INTE of TMCSR) is "1", the
interrupt request is generated. In addition, the toggle waveform which reverses at every underflow can be
output from the TOT pin.
Figure 16.3-10 shows Count operation (event count mode) at reload mode.
Figure 16.3-10 Count Operation (Event Count Mode) at Reload Mode
Count clock
Reload
data
Counter
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
0000H
Reload
data
−1
Data load
signal
UF bit
CNTE bit
TRG bit
T*
TOT pin
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 1T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
Note:
Use the 4/φ or more "H" width and "L" width of the clock to be input to the TIN pin.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
409
CHAPTER 16 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
16.3 Movement of 16-bit Reload Timer
MB90330A Series
● Operation of One-shot mode
When the counter value underflows ("0000H" → "FFFFH"), the counter stops in the state of "FFFFH". At
this moment, if the underflow request flag bit (UF) is set to "1" and the interrupt request output permission
bit (INTE) is "1", the interrupt request is generated. In addition, the rectangular waveform indicating the
count operation can be output from the TOT pin.
Figure 16.3-11 shows Counter operation (event count mode) at single shot mode.
Figure 16.3-11 Counter Operation (Event Count Mode) at Single Shot Mode
Count clock
Reload
data
Counter
−1
0000H FFFFH
Reload
data
−1
0000H FFFFH
Data load
signal
UF bit
CNTE bit
TRG bit
T*
TOT pin
Start trigger input wait
T: Machine cycle
*: It takes 1T time from trigger input to loading of reload data.
Note:
Use the 4/φ or more "H" width and "L" width of the clock to be input to the TIN pin.
410
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17
8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
This chapter describes an overview of 8/16-bit PPG
timer, the configuration and functions of register, and
the 8/16-bit PPG timer operation.
17.1 Overview of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
411
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.1 Overview of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
17.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
The 8/16-bit PPG timer provides the PPG output via the pulse output according to the
timer operation with the 8-bit reload timer module.
It has the following as a hardware.
• Six 8-bit down counters
• Twelve 8-bit reload timers
• Three 16-bit control registers
• Six external pulse output pins
• Six interrupt outputs.
Further, the MB90330A series provides 6 channels as the 8-bit PPG that also operate as
the 16-bit PPG (3 channels) in the combination of PPG0 + PPG1/PPG2 + PPG3/PPG4 +
PPG5.
■ Overview of 8/16-bit Timer PPG Timer
Overview of 8/16-bit PPG timer function is shown below.
● 8-PPG power output six channel independent operation mode
Independent 6-channel PPG output operation is enabled.
● 16-bit PPG output operation mode
The 3-channel and 16-bit PPG output operation is enabled.
Combination of PPG0 + PPG1, PPG2 + PPG3, and PPG4 + PPG5 are used.
● 8 + 8-bit PPG output operation mode
When the PPG0 (PPG2/PPG4) output is clock-input of PPG1 (PPG3/PPG5), the 8-bit PPG output in an
arbiter cycle is enabled.
● PPG output operation
Pulse waves in an arbiter cycle and of duty ratio are output.
Reference:
Only the PPG1 can be used for the interrupt trigger of A/D converter.
412
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.1 Overview of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
17.1.1
Block Diagram of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
Block diagram of ch.0/ch.2/ch.4 and ch.1/ch.3/ch.5 of 8/16-bit PPG timer is shown.
■ Block Diagram of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
Figure 17.1-1 shows the block diagram of ch.0/ch.2/ch.4. Figure 17.1-2 shows the block diagram of
channels 1/3/5.
Figure 17.1-1 Block Diagram of 8/16-bit PPG Timer (ch.0/ch.2/ch.4)
Peripheral clock 16 division
Peripheral clock 8 division
Peripheral clock
4 division
Peripheral clock
2 division
Peripheral clock
PPG0/PPG2/PPG4
Output enabled
PPG0/PPG2/PPG4
PPG0/PPG2/PPG4
Output latch
PEN0
S
R
Q
IRQ
PCNT (Down counter)
ch.1/ch.3/ch.5 borrow
L/H selector
Count clock
selection
PUF0
Time-base counter output:
divided by 512 of Main clock
PIE0
L/H selection
PRLL
PRLBH
PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4
(Operation mode control)
PRLH
“L” data bus
“H” data bus
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
413
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.1 Overview of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
Figure 17.1-2 Block Diagram of 8/16-bit PPG Timer (ch.1/ch.3/ch.5)
PPG1/PPG3/PPG5
Output enabled
Peripheral clock 16 division
Peripheral clock 8 division
Peripheral clock
4 division
Peripheral clock
2 division
Peripheral clock
PPG1/PPG3/PPG5
A/D converter
(only PPG1)
PPG1/PPG3/PPG5
Output latch
PEN1
S
R
Q
IRQ
PCNT (Down counter)
L/H
Count clock
selection
PUF1
Time-base counter output:
divided by 512 of Main clock
PIE1
L/H selection
PRLL
PRLBH
PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5
(Operation mode control)
PRLH
"L" data bus
"H" data bus
414
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
17.2
Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
Configuration and functions of register used for the 8/16-bit PPG timer are described.
■ Register List of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
Figure 17.2-1 shows the register list of 8/16-bit PPG timer.
Figure 17.2-1 Register List of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
ch.0 : 000046H
ch.2 : 000048H
ch.4 : 00004AH
ch.1 : 000047H
ch.3 : 000049H
ch.5 : 00004BH
bit
7
6
PEN0
(R/W)
(0)
bit 15
(X)
14
PEN1
(R/W)
(0)
5
PE00
3
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
13
PE10
(X)
4
2
1
PIE0 PUF0
12
11
PIE1 PUF1
0
Reserved
(X)
(X)
(R/W)
(1)
10
9
8
MD1
MD0
Reserved
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4
PPG Operation mode control register
Read/Write
Initial value
PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5
PPG Operation mode control register
Read/Write
Initial value
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PPG01/PPG23/PPG45
ch.0, 1 : 00004CH bit 7
PCS2 PCS1 PCS0 PCM2 PCM1 PCM0 Reserved Reserved PPG Output control register
ch.2, 3 : 00004EH
ch.4, 5 : 000050H
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Read/Write
(0)
ch.0 : 007900H
ch.1 : 007902H
ch.2 : 007904H
ch.3 : 007906H
ch.4 : 007908H
ch.5 : 00790AH
ch.0 : 007901H
ch.1 : 007903H
ch.2 : 007905H
ch.3 : 007907H
ch.4 : 007909H
ch.5 : 00790BH
CM44-10129-6E
bit
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(X)
(X)
Initial value
PRLL0 to PRLL5
PPG Reload register lower
Read/Write
Initial value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
bit 15
D15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D09
D08
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
PRLH0 to PRLH5
PPG Reload register upper
Read/Write
Initial value
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
415
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
17.2.1
MB90330A Series
PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 Operation Mode Control Register
(PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4)
Configuration and functions of PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 operation mode control register
(PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4) are described.
■ PPG0/2/4 Operation Mode Control Register (PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4)
The PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 operation mode control register (PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4) selects the operation
mode of ch.0/ch.2/ch.4, controls the pin output, selects the count clock, and controls the trigger.
Figure 17.2-2 shows the bit configuration of PPG0/PPG2/v4 operation mode control registers (PPGC0/
PPGC2/PPGC4).
Figure 17.2-2 Bit Configuration of PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 Operation Mode Control Registers
(PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4)
ch.0 : 000046H
ch.2 : 000048H
ch.4 : 00004AH
bit
7
6
5
PEN0
(R/W)
(0)
PE00
4
3
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(X)
2
1
0
PIE0 PUF0
Reserved
(X)
(X)
(R/W)
(1)
PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4
PPG Operation mode control register
Read/Write
Initial value
The following describes functions of each bit of PPG0/PPG2/PPG/4 operation mode control registers
(PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4):
[bit 7] PEN0: ppg Enable (operation permission)
The operation start and operation mode of PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 are selected.
PEN0
Operating State
0
Operation stop ("L" level output maintenance)
1
PPG Enabling Operations
• With this bit is set to "1", the PPG starts counting.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 6] Undefined bit
The read value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
[bit 5] PE00: ppg output Enable 00 (PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 output pin enabled)
Inhibition and permission of pulse output to the external pulse output pin PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 are
controlled.
PE00
Operating State
0
General-purpose port pin (pulse output interdiction).
1
PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 pulse output (pulse output permission).
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
416
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 4] PIE0: ppg Interrupt Enable (interrupt to PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 enabled)
PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 interrupt inhibition and permission are controlled.
PIE0
Operating State
0
Disables the interrupt
1
Interruption permission
• If PUF0 is changed to "1" while this bit is "1", an interrupt request is generated. If this bit is "0", no
interrupts are generated.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 3] PUF0: ppg Underflow Flag (PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 counter underflow)
Detected result of counter underflow of the PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 is shown.
PUF0
Operating State
0
The PPG counter underflow is not detected.
1
The PPG counter underflow was detected.
In the 8-bit PPG6 channel mode (PPG0, PPG1/PPG2, PPG3/PPG4, PPG5) and the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit
PPG mode, the counter values of ch.0, ch.2, ch.4 are set to "1" when they underflow from 00H to FFH. In
the 16-bit PPG3 channel mode (PPG0, PPG1/PPG2, PPG3/PPG4, PPG5), the counter values of ch.1, ch.3,
ch.5/ch.0, ch.2, ch.4 are set to "1" when they underflow from 0000H to FFFFH. Becomes "0" by written "0".
"1" writing in the PUF0 bit is not significant. "1" is read with a read-modify-write instruction.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 2, bit 1] Undefined bit
The read value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
[bit 0] Reserved bit
It is Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "1".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
417
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
17.2.2
MB90330A Series
PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 Operation Mode Control Register
(PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5)
Configuration and functions of PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 operation mode control register
(PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5) are described.
■ PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 Operation Mode Control Register (PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5)
The PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 operation mode control register (PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5) selects the operation
mode of ch.1/ch.3/ch.5, controls the pin output, selects the count clock, and controls the trigger.
Figure 17.2-3 shows the bit configuration of PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 operation mode control registers (PPGC1/
PPGC3/PPGC5).
Figure 17.2-3 Bit Configuration of PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 Operation Mode Control Registers
(PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5)
ch.1 : 000047H bit 15
PEN1
ch.3 : 000049H
ch.5 : 00004BH
(R/W)
(0)
14
13
PE10
(X)
12
11
PIE1 PUF1
10
9
8
MD1
MD0
Reserved
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5
PPG Operation mode control register
Read/Write
Initial value
The following describes functions of each bit of PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 operation mode control registers
(PPGC1/PPGC3/PPGC5):
[bit 15] PEN1: ppg Enable (operation permission)
The operation start and operation mode of PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 are selected.
PEN1
Operating State
0
Operation stop ("L" level power output maintenance)
1
PPG Enabling Operations
• When this bit is set to "1", PPG count starts.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 14] Undefined bit
The lead value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
418
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 13] PE10: ppg output Enable10 (PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 output pin enabled)
Inhibition and permission of pulse output to the external pulse output pin PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 are
controlled.
PE10
Operating State
0
General-purpose port pin (pulse output interdiction)
1
PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 pulse output (pulse output permission)
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 12] PIE1: ppg Interrupt Enable (interrupt to PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 enabled)
PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 interrupt inhibition and permission are controlled.
PIE1
Operating State
0
Disables the interrupt.
1
Interruption permission.
• If PUF1 is set to "1" when this bit is "1", an interrupt request is generated. When this bit is "0", no
interrupts are generated.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 11] PUF1:Ppg Underflow Flag (PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 counter underflow)
Detected result of counter underflow of the PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 is shown.
PUF1
Operating State
0
The PPG counter underflow has not been detected.
1
The PPG counter underflow was detected.
In the 8-bit PPG6 channel mode (PPG0, PPG1/PPG2, PPG3/PPG4, PPG5) and the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit
PPG mode, the counter values of ch.1, ch.3, ch.5 are set to "1" when they underflow from 00H to FFH. In
the 16-bit PPG3 channel mode (PPG0, PPG1/PPG2, PPG3/PPG4, PPG5), the counter values of ch.1, ch.3,
ch.5/ch.0, ch.2, ch.4 are set to "1" when they underflow from 0000H to FFFFH. Becomes "0" by written "0".
"1" writing in the PUF0 bit is not significant. "1" is read with a read-modify-write instruction.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
419
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 10, bit 9] MD1, MD0: ppg count Mode (operation mode selection)
The operation mode of the PPG timer is selected.
MD1
MD0
Operating mode
0
0
Byte PPG2 channel independent mode (The case multiplied by 3 is enabled).
0
1
8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG 1channel.
1
0
Reserved (Setting prohibited).
1
1
16-bit PPG1 channel mode (The case multiplied by 3 is enabled).
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
Notes:
•
Please set neither MD1 nor MD0 bits in "10B".
•
Do not set the PPGC0 PEN0 bit and the PPGC1 PEN1 bit to "01B" when setting the MD1 and
MD0 bits to "01B". In addition, the PEN0 and PEN1 bits are recommended to simultaneously set
to "11B" or "00B".
•
Set the PEN0/PEN1 to "11B" or "00B" simultaneously, when setting the MD1 and MD0 bits to
"11B" by updating the PPGC0/PPGC1 via the word transfer.
[bit 8] Reserved bit
It is Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "1".
420
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
17.2.3
PPG0 to PPG5 Output Control Register
(PPG01/PPG23/PPG45)
Configuration and functions of PPG0 to PPG5 output control register (PPG01/PPG23/
PPG45) are described.
■ PPG0 to PPG5 Output Control Register (PPG01/PPG23/PPG45)
Figure 17.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the PPG0 to PPG5 output control registers (PPG01/PPG23/
PPG45).
Figure 17.2-4 PPG0 to PPG5 Output Control Register (PPG01/PPG23/PPG45)
1
bit
7
6
3
2
5
4
0
ch.0, 1 : 00004CH PCS2 PCS1 PCS0 PCM2 PCM1 PCM0 Reserved Reserved
ch.2, 3 : 00004EH
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
ch.4, 5 : 000050H
(0)
(X)
(X)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
PPG01/PPG23/PPG45
PPG Output control register
Read/Write
Initial value
PPG0 to PPG5 output control register (PPG01/PPG23/PPG45)
[bit 7 to bit 5] PCS2 to PCS0: ppg Count Select (count clock selection)
Selects the operation clock of the ch.1, ch.3, and ch.5 down counters.
PCS2
PCS1
PCS0
Operating mode
0
0
0
Peripheral Clock (41.7 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
0
0
1
Peripheral Clock /2 (83.3 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
0
1
0
Peripheral Clock /4 (167 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
0
1
1
Peripheral Clock /8 (333 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
1
0
0
Peripheral Clock /16 (667 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
1
1
1
Input clock from time-base counter
(29 × 167 ns=85μs field oscillation 6 MHz time)
• These bits are initialized to "000B" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
Note:
Since the PPG of ch.1, ch.3, and ch.5 operates by receiving the count clock from the ch.0, ch.2, and
ch.4 in the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit PPG mode, the specified PCS2 to PCS0
bits become invalid.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
421
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
[bit 4 to bit 2] PCM2 to PCM0:ppg Count Mode (count clock selection)
These bits select the down counter operation clock of ch.0, ch.2, and ch.4.
PCM2
PCM1
PCM0
Operating mode
0
0
0
Peripheral Clock (41.7 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
0
0
1
Peripheral Clock /2 (83.3 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
0
1
0
Peripheral Clock /4 (167 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
0
1
1
Peripheral Clock /8 (333 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
1
0
0
Peripheral Clock /16 (667 ns machine clock 24 MHz time) in surrounding
1
1
1
Input clock from time-base counter
(29 × 167 ns=85 ms field oscillation 6 MHz time)
• These bits are initialized to "000B" at reset.
• Reading and writing are allowed.
[bit 1, bit 0] Reserved bit
It is Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "00B".
422
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.2 Registers of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
17.2.4
PPG Reload Registers
(PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to PRLH5)
Configuration and functions of PPG reload registers (PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to
PRLH5) are described.
■ PPG Reload Registers (PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to PRLH5)
Figure 17.2-5 shows the bit configuration of PPG reload registers (PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to PRLH5).
Figure 17.2-5 PPG Reload Registers ((PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to PRLH5)
ch.0 : 007900H
ch.1 : 007902H
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ch.2 : 007904H bit 7
D07 D06 D05
D04
D03
D02
D01 D00
ch.3 : 007906H
ch.4 : 007908H
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
ch.5 : 00790AH
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
ch.0 : 007901H
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ch.1 : 007903H bit 15
ch.2 : 007905H
D15 D14 D13
D12
D11
D10
D09 D08
ch.3 : 007907H
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
ch.4 : 007909H
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
ch.5 : 00790BH
PRLL0 to PRLL5
PPG Reload register lower
Read/Write
Initial value
PRLH0 to PRLH5
PPG Reload register upper
Read/Write
Initial value
The PPG reload registers (PRLL0 to PRLL5, PRLH0 to PRLH5) are the 8-bit registers that hold the reload
values for the down counter (PCNT). Each of them has roles as shown in the following table:
Register Name
Function
PRLL
Hold the reload value of L side.
PRLH
Hold the reload value of H side.
• Both registers can be read and written.
Note:
When different values are set for the PRLL and PRLH of the ch.0, ch.2, and ch.4 using the 8-bit
prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, the PPG waveforms of ch.1, ch.3, and ch.5 may be different each other
according to the cycle. Therefore, the same value is recommended to set for the PRLL and PRLH of
the ch.0, ch.2, and ch.4.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
423
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
17.3
MB90330A Series
Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
The 8/16-bit PPG timer has the 6 channels (PPG0, PPG1/PPG2, PPG3/PPG4, PPG5) of 8bit length PPG unit. Each of them can operate 3-type operations in total, the 8-bit
prescaler + 8-bit PPG modes and the 16-bit PPG mode by performing the direct-coupled
(PPG0 + PPG1/PPG2 + PPG3/PPG4 + PPG5) operations in addition to the independent
mode.
■ Outline of Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
Each of 8-bit length PPG units has two 8-bit-length reload registers for the "L" and "H" sides (PRLL,
PRLH).
Values written in the PRLL and PRLH registers are reloaded to the 8-bit down counter (PCNT) for the "L"
and "H" sides alternately and down-counted at every count clock so that the output pin value is reversed
when the registers are reloaded at the count borrow occurrence. This operation causes the pin output to be
the "L"-width/"H"-width pulse output corresponding to the reload register value.
Operation is started/restarted by the written register bit.
The relation between the reload operation and the pulse output is shown in the following table.
Reload operation
Pin output change
PRLH → PCNT
PPG0/PPG1 (0 → 1) rising
In addition, when the bit 4 (PIE0) in PPGC0/PPGC2/PPGC4 is "1" and the bit 2 (PIE1) in PPGC1/PPGC3/
PPGC5 is "1", the interrupt request is output at a borrow occurrence from 00H to FFH (borrow from 0000H
to FFFFH in the 16-bit PPG mode) for respective counter.
■ Operating Mode
The 8/16-bit PPG timer has 3-type operation modes in total, the 2-channel independent mode, the 8-bit
prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, and the 16-bit PPG mode (MB90330A series have 3 channels for each mode).
The 2-channel independent mode is a mode to allow an independent 2-channel operation as the 8-bit PPG.
The PPG outputs of ch.0 and ch.1 are connected to the PPG0 and PPG1 pins, respectively (PPG2 to PPG5
correspond to ch.2 to ch.5).
The 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode is the operation mode to operate the ch.0 (ch.2/ch.4) as the 8-bit
prescaler and to enable the 8-bit PPG waveform output in an arbiter cycle, by counting the ch.1 (ch.3/ch.5)
at a ch.0 (ch.2/ch.4) borrow output. The PPG0 (PPG2/PPG4) pin is connected to the bit prescaler output of
ch.0 (ch.2/ch.4) and the PPG1 pin is connected to the PPG output of ch.1 (ch.3/ch.5).
The 16-bit PPG channel mode (MB90330A series provide 3 channels) is the operation mode to allow the
direct-coupling of ch.0 and ch.1 (direct-coupled ch.2, ch.3/ch.4, ch.5) to be operated as the 16-bit PPG.
Both PPG0 and PPG1 16-bit PPG power outputs are both connected.
424
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
■ PPG Output Operation
The 8/16-bit PPG timer is started to begin the count when both the bit 7 (PEN0) of PPGC0 register for 0
(ch.2/ch.4) PPG and the bit 15 (PEN1) of PPGC1 register for 1 (ch.3/ch.5) PPG are set to "1". After the
operation started, when "0" is written to the bit 7 (PEN0) of PPGC0 or the bit 15 (PEN1) of PPGC1, the
count operation is stopped and the pulse output is held at the "L" level thereafter.
Do not set the ch.1 (ch.3/ch.5) to the operating status in the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode when the ch.0
(ch.2/4) is in the stop state.
Control the bit 7 (PEN0) in the PPGC0 register and the bit 15 (PEN1) in the PPGC1 register to
simultaneously start and stop in the 16-bit PPG mode.
PPG output operation is explained as follows.
When the PPG operates, the pulse wave is continuously output in an arbiter cycle and arbiter duty ratio
(ratio of "H" level period and "L" level period of pulse wave). The PPG starts the pulse wave output and
does not stop until the operation stop is set.
Figure 17.3-1 shows the output waveform in the PPG output operation.
Figure 17.3-1 Output Waveform in the PPG Output Operation
PEN
Operation start by PEN (from "L" side)
Output pin PPG
T × (L + 1)
T × (H + 1)
L : PRLL value
H : PRLH value
(START)
T : Peripheral clock
(by Clock select of PPGC)
■ Relation between Reload Value and Pulse Width
The written value in the reload register added to "1" and multiplied by the count clock cycle produces the
output pulse width. Note, therefore, that the pulse width is one count clock cycle when the reload register
value is 00H during the 8-bit PPG operation or when the reload register value is 0000H during the 16-bit
PPG operation. Note also that the pulse width is the 256 count clock cycles when the reload register value
is FFH during the 8-bit PPG operation and the pulse width is the 65536 divisions of count clock when the
reload register value is FFFFH during the 16-bit PPG operation. The equations for calculating the pulse
width are shown below:
PL=T × (L+1)
PH=T × (H+1)
PL: Width of "L" pulse
PH: Width of "H" pulse
T: Clock Cycle
L: PRLL value
H: PRLH value
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
425
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Count Clock Selection
The count clock used for 8/16-bit PPG timer operation uses the peripheral clock and the time-base counter
input to allow 6 types of count clock input selection.
The bit4 to bit2 (PCM2 to PCM0) of PPG01/PPG23/PPG45 register selects the ch.0 (ch.2/ch.4) clock and
the bit7 to bit5 (PCS2 to PCS0) of PPG01/PPG23/PPG45 register selects the ch.1 (ch.3/ch.5) clock.
For the clock selection, 1/16 to 1 times of machine clock and the time-base counter input are selected.
Notes:
•
The bit 14 (PCS1) value of PPGC1 register is invalid in the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode and
16-bit PPG mode.
•
When the time-base timer input is used, the trigger or the first count cycle after stopping may
deviate. In addition, if the time-base counter is initialized in the 8/16-bit PPG timer operation, the
cycle may deviate.
•
When the ch.0/ch.2/ch.4 is in the operating status, the ch.1/ch.3/ch.5 is in the stopped status, and
the ch.1 (ch.3/ch.5) is started in the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, the first count cycle may
deviate.
■ Pin Output Control of Pulse
The pulse generated by the 8/16-bit PPG timer can be output from the external pins (PPG0 to PPG5). To
output pulses from the external pin, "1" is written in the bit corresponding to each pin. The PPGC0 bit 5
(PE0) and the PPGC1 bit 3 (PE1) are used for the PPG0/PPG2/PPG4 and PPG1/PPG3/PPG5 pins,
respectively. When "0" is written in this pin (initial value), no pulse is output from the external pin that then
functions as a general-purpose port.
Since the same waveform is output from the PPG0 to PPG5 in the 16-bit PPG mode, either of external pins
can be enabled to obtain the same output.
The 8-bit prescaler toggle waveform and the 8-bit PPG waveform are output from the PPG0/PPG2/PPG4
and the PPG1/PPG3/PPG5, respectively, in the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode.
The output waveform in this mode is shown in Figure 17.3-2.
Figure 17.3-2 8 + 8PPG Output Operation Waveform
PH0
P L0
PPG0
PPG1
PH1
PL1
The pulse width shown in Figure 17.3-2 can be calculated by the following expression.
426
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
PL0=T × (L0+1)
PH0=T × (L0+1)
PL1=T × (L0+1) × (L1+1)
PH1=T × (L0+1) × (H1+1)
L0:
Value of PRLL of ch.0 and value of PRLH of ch.1
L1:
Value of PRLL of ch.1
H1:
Value of PRLH of ch.1
T:
input clock cycle
PH0: Width of "H" pulse of PPG0
PL0: Width of "L" pulse of PPG0
PH1: Width of "H" pulse of PPG1
PL1: Width of "L" pulse of PPG1
Note:
PRLL of ch.0 and PRLH of ch.1 set the same value.
■ Interrupts of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
The 8/16-bit PPG timer interrupt becomes active when the reload value is counted out and a borrow occurs.
In the 8-bit PPG2 channel mode or the 8-bit prescaler + 9 bit PPG mode (each of MB90330A series has 3
channels), each interrupt request is generated by each borrow. In the 16-bit PPG mode, however, the PUF0
and the PUF1 are simultaneously set by the 16-bit counter borrow. Permit, therefore, either only one of
PIE0 or PIE1 to unify interrupt factors. Also clear interrupt factors for the PUF0 and the PUF1 at the same
time.
■ Initial Value of Hardware Component
The 8/16-bit PPG timer hardware component is initialized to the following value at the reset:
<REGISTERS > PPG0 → 0X000001B
PPG1 → 00000001B
PPG01 → XXXXXX00B
<pulse output > PPG0 → "L"
PPG1 → "L"
PE0 → PPG0 power output interdiction
PE1 → PPG1 power output interdiction
<interruption requests > IRQ0 → "L"
IRQ1 → "L"
Hardware components not listed above are not initialized.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
427
CHAPTER 17 8/16-BIT PPG TIMER
17.3 Operation of 8/16-bit PPG Timer
MB90330A Series
■ Writing Timing to Reload Register
In any modes other than the 16-bit PPG mode, the word transfer instruction is recommended to write data
into the reload registers PRLL and PRLH. When the data item is written in the register by using the byte
transfer instructions for two times, an unexpected pulse width output may be generated depending on the
timing.
Figure 17.3-3 shows the timing for writing in reload register.
Figure 17.3-3 Timing Chart for Writing in Reload Register
PPG0
A
B
A
B
C
B
C
D
C
D
[1]
In Figure 17.3-3, when the PRLL is updated from A to C before the [1] timing and the PRLH value is
updated from B to D after the [1] timing, the PRL values at the [1] timing are represented as PRLL = C and
PRLH = B to generate pulses of the count number C for the L side and the count number B for H side only
once. Similarly, in order to write data in the PRL of ch.0/ch.2/ch.4 and ch.1/ch.3/ch.5 in the 16-bit PPG
mode, the long-word transfer instruction is used or the word transfer instruction is sequentially used for the
PRL of the ch.0 → ch.1 (ch.2 → ch.3/ch.4 → ch.5). In this mode, the data are temporally written from the
ch.0/ch.2/ch.4 to the PRL. Then, when they are written in the PRL of ch.1/ch.3/ch.5, they actually written
in the PRL of ch.0.
In modes other than the 16-bit PPG mode, data can be written independently to the ch.0/ch.2/ch.4 and ch.1/
ch.3/ch.5.
Figure 17.3-4 shows the block diagram of writing to PRL register.
Figure 17.3-4 Block Diagram of Writing to PRL Register
Writing data of PRL of ch.0
Writing to ch.0
other than
16-bit PPG mode
Temporary latch
Writing data of PRL of ch.1
Synchronize with writing
to ch.1 at 16-bit PPG mode
and transfer
Written data of ch.1
PRL of ch.0
428
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
PRL of ch.1
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 18
DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
This chapter describes an overview of DTP/external
interrupt, the configuration and functions of register,
and the DTP/external interrupt operation.
18.1 Overview of DTP/External Interrupt
18.2 Register of DTP/External Interrupt
18.3 Operation of DTP/External Interrupt
18.4 Precaution of Using DTP/External Interrupt
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
429
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.1 Overview of DTP/External Interrupt
18.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of DTP/External Interrupt
The DTP (Data Transfer Peripheral) is located between peripherals existing out of the
device and the F2MC-16LX CPU. It is the peripheral control section that receives a DMA
request or an interrupt request generated by the external peripheral, reports it to the
F2MC-16LX CPU, and starts the μDMAC or the interrupt processing.
■ Overview of DTP/External Interrupt
Two types, "H" and "L" can be selected as the request level for μDMAC. Four types in total, the rising
edge and falling edge in addition to "H" and "L" can be selected for an external interrupt request.
■ Block Diagram of DTP/External Interrupt
Figure 18.1-1 shows the block diagram of DTP/external interrupt.
Figure 18.1-1 Block Diagram of DTP/External Interrupt
F2MC-16LX bus
4
4
4
8
430
DTP/Interrupt enable register
Gate
Factor F/F
Edge detection
circuit
4
Request input
DTP/Interrupt factor register
Request level setting register
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.2 Register of DTP/External Interrupt
MB90330A Series
18.2
Register of DTP/External Interrupt
This section describes the configuration and functions of registers used for the DTP
and external interrupts.
■ Register List of DTP/External Interrupt
Figure 18.2-1 shows the register list of the DTP/external interrupts.
Figure 18.2-1 Register List of DTP/External Interrupt
bit
Address : 00003CH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EN7
EN6
EN5
EN4
EN3
EN2
EN1
EN0
bit
Address : 00003DH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ER7
ER6
ER5
ER4
ER3
ER2
ER1
ER0
bit
Address : 00003EH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB3
LA3
LB2
LA2
LB1
LA1
LB0
LA0
bit
Address : 00003FH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LB7
LA7
LB6
LA6
LB5
LA5
LB4
LA4
DTP/Interrupt register
(ENIR)
DTP/Interrupt register
(EIRR)
Request level setting register
(ELVR)
Request level setting register
(ELVR)
■ DTP/Interruption Permission Register (ENIR: Enable Interrupt Request Register)
Figure 18.2-2 shows the bit configuration of the DTP and enable interrupt register (ENIR).
Figure 18.2-2 Bit Configuration of the DTP and the Enable Interrupt Request Register (ENIR)
ENIR
bit
Address : 00003CH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EN7
R/W
EN6
R/W
EN5
R/W
EN4
R/W
EN3
R/W
EN2
R/W
EN1
R/W
EN0
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
R/W: Readable/Writable
The DTP and the enable interrupt register (ENIR) determine to issue the request to the interrupt controller
by using the device pin as the external interrupt and the DTP request input. The pin corresponding to the
bits set to "1" in the ENIR register is used to input an external interrupt or DTP request to issue the requests
to the interrupt controller. The pin corresponding to the bits set to "0" holds the external interrupt or DTP
request input factor but issues no request to the interrupt controller.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
431
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.2 Register of DTP/External Interrupt
MB90330A Series
■ DTP/Interruption Request Register (EIRR: External Interrupt Request Register)
Figure 18.2-3 shows the bit configuration of DTP/interruption request register (EIRR).
Figure 18.2-3 Bit Configuration of DTP/interruption Request Register (EIRR)
bit 15
EIRR
Address : 00003DH ER7
R/W
R/W: Readable/Writable
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ER6
ER5
ER4
ER3
ER2
ER1
ER0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
(However, the object is different
between both of them.)
The DTP/interruption request register (EIRR) indicates the presence of corresponding external DTP/
interruption request when reading and clears the flip-flop contents that indicates this request when writing.
When "1" is read from the EIRR register it indicates the external DTP/interruption request presence in a pin
corresponding to the ERx bit. In addition, when "0" is written in the EIRR register, the request flip-flop of
the corresponding bit is cleared. Writing "1" causes no operation. "1" is read with a read-modify-write
instruction.
Notes:
•
The initial value is "00H" while the value is changed after the reset depending on the status of pin
in the common-use with the external interrupt.
•
Clear only the bits that the CPU accepted the interrupt (those bits that ER7 to ER0 are set to "1")
to "0" when plural external interrupt request outputs are enabled (ENIR: EN7 to EN0 = 1). No
other bits must be cleared unconditionally.
•
The value of the DTP/external interrupt request bit (EIRR:ER) is available only when the
corresponding DTP/external internal enable bit (ENIR:EN) is set to "1".
When the DTP/external interrupt is not enabled (ENIR:EN = 0), the DTP/external interrupt factor
may be set regardless of whether the DTP/external interrupt request exists or not.
•
Clear the corresponding DTP/external interrupt request bit (EIRR:ER) just before enabling the
DTP/external interrupts (ENIR:EN = 1).
■ Request Level Setting Register (ELVR: External Level Register)
Figure 18.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the request level setting register (ELVR).
Figure 18.2-4 Request Level Setting Register (ELVR)
ELVR
bit
Address : 00003EH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB3
R/W
LA3
R/W
LB2
R/W
LA2
R/W
LB1
R/W
LA1
R/W
LB0
R/W
LA0
R/W
bit 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LB7
LA7
LB6
LA6
LB5
LA5
LB4
LA4
R/W
R/W: Readable/Writable
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address : 00003FH
Initial value
00000000B
Initial value
00000000B
The request level setting register (ELVR) selects the request detection level. Two bits are allocated per pin
as shown in Table 18.2-1. When the request input is in the level mode and the input is active, it is again set
even if it is cleared.
432
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.2 Register of DTP/External Interrupt
MB90330A Series
Table 18.2-1 ELVR allocation (LA0-LA7,LB0-LB7)
CM44-10129-6E
LBx
LAx
Operation
0
0
There is a demand at "L" level.
0
1
There is a demand at "H" level.
1
0
Request present at the rising edge
1
1
Request present at the falling edge
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
433
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.3 Operation of DTP/External Interrupt
18.3
MB90330A Series
Operation of DTP/External Interrupt
This section describes the Operation of DTP/External Interrupt.
■ External Interrupt Operation
If a request set by the ELVR register at the corresponding pin is input after setting an external interrupt
request, this resource issues an interrupt request signal for the interrupt controller. When the interrupt from
this resource had the highest priority as a result of the priority identification of the interrupts
simultaneously occurred in the interrupt controller, the interrupt controller issues an interrupt request to the
F2MC-16LX CPU. The F2MC-16LX CPU compares the interrupt level mask register (ILM) in the
processor status (PS) with the interrupt request. When the request level is higher than the ILM bit, the
hardware interrupt process microprogram is started as soon as the current instruction execution is
terminated.
Figure 18.3-1 shows the external interrupt operation flow.
Figure 18.3-1 External Interrupt Operation
External interrupt/DTP
Other
requests
ELVR
Interrupt controller
IL
ICRyy
CMP
CMP
EIRR
ENIR
F2MC-16LX CPU
ICRxx
ILM
INTA
Factor
The interrupt process microprogram reads the interrupt vector area, issues the interrupt acknowledge to the
interrupt controller, transfers the macro instruction jump address generated by the vector to the program
counter, and executes the user interrupt process program.
■ Operation of DTP
As an initialization in the user program before starting the μDMAC, the register addresses allocated in from
000000H to 0000FFH are set to the I/O address pointer in the μDMAC descriptor and the memory buffer
start address is set to the buffer address pointer.
The DTP operation sequence is almost same with those of external interrupt and are quite identical until the
CPU starts the hardware interrupt process microprogram. When the μDMAC is started, the read or write
signal is sent to the addressed external peripheral device for the transfer operation with this chip. The
external peripheral device must cancel the interrupt request to this chip within three machine cycles after
the transfer operation. When the transfer is terminated, the descriptor, etc. are updated and the interrupt
controller generates the signal to clear the transfer factor. When this resource receives the signal to clear the
transfer factor, it clears the flip-flop that holds the factor and prepares for the next pin request.
Figure 18.3-2 shows the timing to cancel the external interrupt request at the DTP operation termination.
In addition, Figure 18.3-3 shows the example of interfaces with external peripheral devices.
434
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.3 Operation of DTP/External Interrupt
MB90330A Series
Figure 18.3-2 Timing to Cancel the External Interrupt Request at the DTP Operation Termination
Edge request or H level request
Interrupt factor
Internal operation
Descriptor
select/read
Address bus pin
Note : μDMAC
I/O register
At memory transfer
Read address
Write address
Read data
Data bus pin
Write data
Read signal
Write signal
Withdraw within 3-machine cycle.
Data, Address, Bus
Internal bus
Register
External
peripheral device
Figure 18.3-3 Example of an External Peripheral Interface
INT
IRQ
DTP
CORE
MEMORY
When transfer is terminated,
withdraw within 3-machine cycle
MB90330A
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
435
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.4 Precaution of Using DTP/External Interrupt
18.4
MB90330A Series
Precaution of Using DTP/External Interrupt
Notes DTP/an external interruption is used are explained.
■ Condition of Peripheral Equipment Connected Outside
The external peripheral device that the DTP can support must automatically clear the request at the transfer
execution. In addition, if the transfer request is not canceled within three-machine-cycle (an interim value)
after the transfer operation started, this resource handles it as if the next transfer request occurs.
■ Operation Process of DTP/External Interrupt
Set the registers within the DTP/external interrupt by using the following procedures:
1. Set the general purpose I/O port that is shared with the external interrupt as input port.
2. Disable the bits for the enable register.
3. The target bit for request level set register is set.
4. The target bit for the factor register is cleared.
5. Enable the bits for the enable register.
Simultaneous writing is possible for 4 and 5 with the word specification.
Before setting registers in this resource, the enable register must be disabled. In addition, before enabling
the enable register, the factor register must be cleared. These actions prevent erroneous interrupt factor
occurrence at register setting or in the interrupt enable state.
■ External Interrupt Request Level
• Minimum 3 machine cycles are necessary for the pulse width to detect the edge presence when the
request level is set to the edge request.
• When the request input level is set to the level setting, the request to the interrupt controller remains
active even if an external request is input and canceled afterward, in case of the interrupt request enable
state (ENIR:EN=1). To cancel the request for the interrupt controller, the interrupt request flag bit
(EIRR: ER) must be cleared.
Figure 18.4-1 Clearness of Interrupt Request Flag Bit (EIRR: ER) when Level is Set
Interrupt factor
Level detection
Interrupt request
flag bit (EIRR: ER)
Enable gate
to Interrupt
controller
Continue to retain the factor
as long as it is not cleared.
436
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.4 Precaution of Using DTP/External Interrupt
Figure 18.4-2 Interrupt Factor when Enabling the Interrupt and the Interrupt Request for the Interrupt
Controller
Interrupt factor
(e.g. "H" level detection)
Interrupt request
to interrupt controller
Cancel of interrupt request
Inactive by clearing interrupt
request flag bit (EIRR: ER)
Note:
Returning from the clock mode is impossible at the edge detection.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
437
CHAPTER 18 DTP/EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
18.4 Precaution of Using DTP/External Interrupt
438
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19
8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
This chapter explains the functions and operation of
8/10-bit A/D converter.
19.1 Overview of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.2 Configuration of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.5 Precautions when Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.6 Example of program-1 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
(Example of Starting the EI2OS in the Single
Mode)
19.7 Example of Program-2 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
(Example of Starting the EI2OS in the
Continuous Mode)
19.8 Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
(Example of Starting the EI2OS in the Stop
Mode)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
439
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.1 Overview of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
The 8/10-bit A/D converter has a function to convert the analog input voltage to the 8-bit
or 10-bit digital value by the RC sequential comparison conversion method. The input
signal can be selected from the 16-channel analog input pin. The conversion start can
be selected from three types of the software, the PPG timer 1 output, and the trigger
input start from external pin.
■ Function of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
There is a function having following features to perform the A/D conversion of the analog voltage input
from the analog input pin (input voltage) to the digital value:
• The conversion time is a minimum of 7.16 μs (including the sampling time using the 24 MHz machine
clock).
• Sampling time is 3.33 μs or more (machine clock 6 MHz time).
• The used conversion method is the RC sequential compare conversion method with sample hold circuit.
• The analog input pin can be selected from the 16 channels using the program.
• The interrupt request can be generated at the A/D conversion termination and the EI2OS can be also
started.
No data are lost in the interrupt enable status since the conversion data protection function works even
in the continuous conversion.
• The conversion start factor can be selected from the software, the PPG timer 1 output (rising edge), and
the external trigger input (falling edge).
Conversion mode has three types shown in Table 19.1-1.
Table 19.1-1 Conversion Modes of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Conversion
Mode
Single conversion operation
Scanning conversion operation
Single-shot
conversion
mode
The specified channel (one channel
only) is converted for one time and
terminated.
Continuous plural channels (maximum 16 channels can be
specified) are converted for one time and terminated.
Continuous
conversion
mode
The specified channel (one channel
only) is repetitively converted.
Continuous plural channels (maximum 16 channels can be
specified) are repetitively converted.
Pauseconversion
mode
The specified channel (one channel
only) is converted for one time and
suspended until the next start.
Continuous plural channels (maximum 16 channels can be
specified) are converted.
However, one channel is converted and suspended until the next
start.
440
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.2 Configuration of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
19.2
Configuration of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
8/10-bit A/D converter is composed of the following 9 blocks.
• A/D control status register (ADCS)
• A/D data register (ADCR)
• A/D conversion channel set register (ADMR)
• Decoder
• Analog channel selector
• Sample hold circuit
• D/A converter
• Comparator
• Control circuit (Sequential comparison register)
■ Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Figure 19.2-1 Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
AVcc
AVRH
AVss
Comparator
Sample & Hold circuit
A/D data register
Decoder
P87/AN15
Control circuit
2
to
D/A converter
F MC-16LX Bus
P70/AN0
analog channel selector
MPX
ADCR1, ADCR0
A/D conversion channel set register
ADMR
A/D Control status register upper
A/D Control status register lower
PPG1 output
Timer start
P96/ADTG/FRCK
Trigger start
ADCS1, ADCS0
Operation clock
Prescaler
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
441
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.2 Configuration of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
● A/D control status registers (ADCS)
Displayed are the start and start trigger selection by software, the conversion mode selection, the A/D
conversion channel selection, the enabled and disabled interrupt requests, the interrupt request status
confirmation, the suspension status and the conversion status.
● A/D data registers (ADCR)
This register stores the A/D conversion result and also has a function to select the A/D conversion
resolution.
● A/D conversion channel set register (ADMR)
This register selects the A/D conversion channel.
● Decoder
This circuit selects the analog input pin to be used from the setting of bits from ANE0 to ANE3 and from
ANS0 to ANS3 of A/D conversion channel set register (ADMR).
● Analog channel selector
This circuit selects the pin to be used from the 16 analog input pins.
● Sample hold circuit
This circuit holds the input voltage selected by the analog channel selector. The input voltage can be
converted without affected by the input voltage fluctuation in the A/D conversion (in the comparison) by
holding the sample of input voltage immediately after starting the A/D conversion.
● D/A converter
The reference voltage is generated to compare the held sample of input voltage.
● Comparator
This compares the input voltage for which sample hold is performed, with the output voltage of the D/A
converter to determine which is the greater of the two.
● Control circuit (Sequential comparison register)
The signal from the comparator (higher or lower) determines the A/D conversion value. When the A/D
conversion is terminated, the conversion result is stored in the A/D data register (ADCR) and the interrupt
request is generated.
442
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
19.3
Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Register list of 8/10-bit A/D converter is shown.
■ Register List of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Figure 19.3-1 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
6
bit 7
Address: 000040H MD1 MD0
5
−
(R/W) (R/W) ( − )
14
bit 15
Address: 000041H BUSY INT
4
−
3
−
2
−
(−)
(−)
(−)
1
−
0
A/D Control status register (Lower)
(ADCS0)
( − ) (R/W) Initial value 0 0 - - - - - 0B
13
12
11
10
9
INTE PAUS STS1 STS0 STRT
Reserved
8
A/D Control status register (Upper)
(ADCS1)
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (W) (R/W) Initial value 00000000B
Reserved
bit 7
Address: 000042H
D7
6
D6
5
D5
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
bit 15
Address: 000043H S10
14
ST1
13
ST0
12
CT1
11
CT0
10
−
9
D9
8
D8
(R/W) (W)
(W)
(W)
(W)
(−)
(R)
(R)
A/D Data register (Lower)
(ADCR0)
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
A/D Data register (Upper)
(ADCR1)
Initial value 00101XXXB
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
bit 15
A/D Conversion Channel Set register
Address: 000045H ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE3 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0 (ADMR)
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 00000000B
R/W: Readable/Writable
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
443
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.3.1
MB90330A Series
A/D Control Status Register (High) (ADCS1)
The A/D control status register "H" level (ADCS1) has functions to start the software, to
select the start trigger, to enable and disable the interrupt request, and to confirm the
interrupt request, suspension and conversion statuses.
■ A/D Control Status Register (High) (ADCS1)
Figure 19.3-2 A/D Control Status Register (High) (ADCS1)
Address
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9
000041H
BUSY INT
R/W
R/W
INTE PAUS STS1 STS0 STRT
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
W
bit 8 bit 7
Reserved
bit 0
(ADCS0)
Initial value
00000000B
R/W
Reserved bit
Reserved
Always write this to "0".
A/D conversion start bit
(only valid for Software start)
STRT
0
No A/D conversion function start
1
A/D conversion function start
STS1 STS0
A/D start factor selection bit
0
Software start
0
1
Trigger start or Software start
1
0
Timer start or Software start
1
Trigger star, Timer start or
Software start
0
1
PAUS
0
1
INTE
Suspension flag bit
(only valid for using EI2OS)
A/D conversion operation doesn't stop temporarily.
A/D conversion operation stops temporarily.
Interrupt request enable bit
0
Interrupt request output disabled
1
Interrupt request output enabled
Interrupt request flag bit
INT
Read
Write
0
Not finish A/D conversion Clear this bit.
1
Finish A/D conversion
No change, no effection to others
In operating bit
BUSY
Read
R/W
W
444
Write
0
Stop A/D conversion
1
In operating of A/D conversion No change, no effection to others
Stop A/D conversion forcibly
: Readable/Writable
: Write only
: Initial value
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
Table 19.3-1 Description and Functions of Each Bit of A/D Control Status Register (High) (ADCS1)
Bit name
Functions
BUSY:
Under the
conversion bit
• The operation display bit of A/D converter.
• When the BUSY bit is "0" and "1" in the read process, it indicates the stopped A/D conversion
and the operated A/D conversion, respectively.
• When "0" is written in the BUSY bit in the write process, the A/D conversion operation is
forcibly stopped. When "1" is written, the conversion is not changed and no others are
affected.
Note:
Do not perform the forced stop and the software start (BUSY = 0, STRT = 1) at the same
time.
INT:
Interrupt
request flag
bit
• When the data are set to the A/D data register by the A/D conversion, the INT bit is set to "1".
• When the INT bit and the interrupt request enabled bit (ADCS1: INTE) are set to "1", the
interrupt request is generated. If EI2OS has been permitted, EI2OS is started.
• When "0" is set in the write process, the INT bit is cleared. When "1" is set, it is not changed
and no others are affected.
• The INT bit is cleared by the startup of EI2OS.
Note:
The A/D must be stopped when writing "0" in the INT bit for clearing.
INTE:
Interrupt
demand
permission bit
• This bit is used to enable and disable the interrupt output to CPU.
• When the INTE bit and the interrupt request flag bit (ADCS1: INT) are set to "1", the interrupt
request is generated.
• Set it to "1" when using the EI2OS.
PAUS:
Temporary
stop flag bit
• It is set to "1" when the A/D conversion operation is suspended.
• Since this A/D converter has only one A/D data register, when the CPU has not yet completed
to read the old conversion result by using the continuous conversion mode, the old conversion
data are lost by a new conversion result. Therefore, to use the continuous conversion mode, the
automatic transfer of conversion result to the memory must be basically set by using the EI2OS
at every conversion termination. However, such case can be assumed that the conversion data
transfer is not completed before the next conversion in the multiple interrupts, etc. The PAUS
bit is the function to prepare for the such case. When the PAUS bit is set to "1", the A/D
conversion is stopped so that the next conversion data are not stored during the period from the
conversion termination to the data register contents transfer with the EI2OS. After that, the A/
D converter automatically restarts the conversion at the transfer termination with the EI2OS.
Note:
Only when EI2OS is used, the PAUS bit is effective.
STS1, STS0:
A/D startup
factor
selection bits
• The start factor of A/D conversion is selected.
• When the start factor is in the common use, the first start factor generation starts the operation.
Note:
Switch the start factor when the target start factor is not present to update it during the A/D
conversion operation because it is changed at the same time of updating.
bit 9
STRT:
Analog to
digitalizing
A/D converter
start up bit
• This bit is used to start the A/D conversion operation by the software.
• When "1" is written in the STRT bit, the A/D conversion is started.
• During the suspend conversion mode, the restart operation by STRT bit is not performed.
Note:
Forcibly stop and software start up must not be done at the same time.
bit 8
Reserved:
reserved bit
Note:
Be sure to write "0".
bit 15
bit 14
bit 13
bit 12
bit 11,
bit 10
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
445
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.3.2
MB90330A Series
A/D Control Status Register (Low) (ADCS0)
The A/D control status register low-level (ADCS0) has a function to select the
conversion mode.
■ A/D Control Status Register (Low) (ADCS0)
Figure 19.3-3 A/D Control Status Register (Low) (ADCS0)
Address
000040H
bit 15
(ADCS1)
bit 8 bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
MD1
MD0
Reserved
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value
00 - - - - - 0B
Reserved bit
Always set this bit to "0".
Reserved
MD1 MD0
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Undefined
: Initial value
446
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
A/D conversion mode selection bit
Single conversion mode 1
(Enable restart during operation)
Single conversion mode 2
(Disable restart during operation)
Continuous conversion mode
(Disable restart during operation)
Stop conversion mode
(Disable restart during operation)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
Table 19.3-2 Description and Functions of Each Bit of A/D Control Status Register (Low) (ADCS0)
Bit name
bit 7,
bit 6
MD1, MD0:
A/D
conversion
mode
selection bits
bit 5
to
bit 1
Undefined
bits
bit 0
Reserved bit
CM44-10129-6E
Functions
• This bit is used to select the conversion mode during the A/D conversion operation.
• Two bit values of MD1 and MD0 allow the selection of either the single conversion mode 1, the
single conversion mode 2, the continuous conversion mode, or the stop conversion mode.
• The meaning of each mode is as follows.
Single conversion mode 1:The continuous A/D conversion from the setting channels of ANS3
to ANS0 to the setting channels of ANE3 to ANE0 is performed
only once. It is possible to reactivate while operating.
Single conversion mode 2:The continuous A/D conversion from the setting channels of ANS3
to ANS0 to the setting channels of ANE3 to ANE0 is performed
only once. It is not possible to reactivate while operating.
Continuous conversion mode:The continuous A/D conversion from the setting channels of
ANS3 to ANS0 to the setting channels of ANE3 to ANE0 is
repetitively performed until it is forcibly stopped with the BUSY
bit. It is not possible to reactivate while operating.
Stop conversion mode:The A/D conversion from the setting channels of ANS3 to ANS0 to the
setting channel of ANE3 to ANE0 is repeated and suspended at every
channel until it is forcibly stopped with the BUSY bit. It is not possible
to reactivate while operating. The suspended conversion is restarted by
the start factor occurrence selected by the STS1 and STS0 bits.
Note:
The disabled restart in each of the single, continuous, and stop conversion modes is applied
to the external trigger and software start.
The read value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
447
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.3.3
MB90330A Series
A/D Conversion Channel Set Register (ADMR)
A/D conversion channel set register (ADMR) has the function to select the A/D
conversion.
■ A/D Conversion Channel Set Register (ADMR)
Figure 19.3-4 A/D Conversion Channel Set Register (ADMR)
Address
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10
000045H
ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE3 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0
bit 9
bit 8
Initial value
00000000B
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W)
ANE3 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0
A/D conversion end selection bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
AN0 Pin
0
0
1
1
AN3 Pin
0
1
0
0
AN4 Pin
0
1
0
1
AN5 Pin
0
1
1
0
AN6 Pin
0
1
1
1
AN7 Pin
1
0
0
0
AN8 Pin
1
0
0
1
AN9 Pin
1
0
1
0
AN10 Pin
1
0
1
1
AN11 Pin
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
AN12 Pin
1
1
1
0
AN14 Pin
1
1
1
1
AN15 Pin
AN1 Pin
AN2 Pin
AN13 Pin
A/D conversion start selection bit
ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Initial value
448
Reading stopped
Read
temporarily in stop
In stop mode during
conversion conversion mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
AN0 Pin
0
0
1
1
AN3 Pin
0
1
0
0
AN4 Pin
0
1
0
1
AN5 Pin
0
1
1
0
AN6 Pin
0
1
1
1
AN7 Pin
1
0
0
0
AN8 Pin
1
0
0
1
AN9 Pin
1
0
1
0
AN10 Pin
1
0
1
1
AN11 Pin
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
AN12 Pin
1
1
1
1
1
1
AN1 Pin
AN2 Pin
Number
during
conversion
Number
converted
immediately
before
AN13 Pin
0 AN14 Pin
1 AN15 Pin
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Table 19.3-3 Description and Functions of Each Bit of A/D Conversion Channel Set Register (ADMR)
Bit name
bit 15
to
bit 12
bit 11
to
bit 8
Functions
ANS3, ANS2,
ANS1, ANS0:
A/D conversion
beginning channel
selection bits
• This bit set the start channel of the A/D conversion and indicates the channel numbers
under A/D conversion during conversion operation.
• When the A/D conversion is started, it is begun from the channels written in these bits.
• Channel numbers under the conversion can be read during the A/D conversion. The
channel number converted immediately before can be read during the suspension in the
stop conversion mode.
ANE3, ANE2,
ANE1, ANE0:
A/D conversion
end channel
selection bits
• This bit sets the end channel of the A/D conversion.
• A/D conversion is performed up to the specified channel.
• When the same channels with ANS3 to ANS0 are set, only those channels are converted.
In addition, when the continuous conversion mode or the stop conversion mode is set and
the conversion is completed for the channels set by those bits, the start channel set by the
ANS3 to ANS0 is resumed.
Note: Do not set the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) and A/D
conversion end channel selection bits (ANE3, ANE2, ANE1 and ANE0) through
read-modify-write commands after the start channel is set in the A/D conversion start
channel selection bits (ANS3, ANS2, ANS1 and ANS0).
The ANS3, ANS2, ANS1 and ANS0 bits will read the last conversion channel until the
A/D conversion operation starts. Accordingly when the MD1 and MD0 bits and the
ANE3, ANE2, ANE1 and ANE0 bits are set through read-modify-write commands
after the start channel is set in the ANS3, ANS2, ANS1 and ANS0 bits, the values of
the ANE3, ANE2, ANE1 and ANE0 bits may be rewritten.
Note:
Setting that the A/D conversion end channel is smaller than the A/D conversion start channel (ANS >
ANE) is disabled. Analog to digital conversion channel set register (ADMR) should be set by byte
access.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
449
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.3.4
MB90330A Series
A/D Data Register (ADCR1/ADCR0)
The A/D data register (ADCR1/ADCR0) stores the A/D conversion result and also has a
function to select the A/D conversion resolution.
■ A/D Data Register (ADCR1/ADCR0)
Figure 19.3-5 A/D Data Register (ADCR1/ADCR0)
Address bi t15 bi t14 bi t13 bit12 bi t11 bi t10 bi t9
000043H/
S10 ST1 ST0 CT1 CT0
D9
000042H
W
W
W
W
W
R
bi t8
bi t7
bi t6
bi t5
bi t4
bit3
bi t2
bit1
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0 00101XXX B
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
450
Initial value
XXXXXXXX B
A/D data bit
D9 to D0
Conversion data
R: Read only
W: Write only
bit0
CT1
0
0
1
1
CT0
0
1
0
1
Compare time setting bit
44 Machine cycle (1.83ms@24MHz)
66 Machine cycle (2.75ms@24MHz)
88 Machine cycle (3.67ms@24MHz)
176 Machine cycle (7.33ms@24MHz)
ST1
0
0
1
1
ST0
0
1
0
1
20 Machine cycle (3.33ms@6MHz)
32 Machine cycle (5.33ms@6MHz)
48 Machine cycle (4.0ms@12MHz)
128 Machine cycle (5.33ms@24MHz)
S10
0
1
Sampling time setting bit
AD data bit
10-bit conversion resolution mode (D9 to D0)
8-bit conversion resolution mode (D7 to D0)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.3 Register of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Table 19.3-4 Functional Explanation of Each Bit in the A/D Data Register (ADCR0/ADCR1)
Bit name
Functions
S10:
A/D
conversion
resolution
selection bit
• This bit is used to select the A/D conversion resolution.
• When "0" and "1" are written in the S10 bit, 10-bit and 8-bit resolutions are selected,
respectively.
Note:
The A/D data bits used are different depends on the resolution.
bit 14,
bit 13
ST1,ST0:
Sampling
time setting
bit
• This bit is used to select the sampling time at the A/D conversion.
• When the A/D is started, the set time and the analog input are fetched into the ST1 and ST0
bits.
Note:
When the setting for "00" 6 MHz is provided during the 24 MHz operation, the normal
analog voltage sometime cannot be fetched.
bit 12,
bit 11
CT1,CT0:
Comparison
time setting
bit
• This bit is used to select the comparison time at the A/D conversion.
• The analog input is fetched (sampling time elapsed), the CT1 and CT0 bits are set, the
conversion result data is determined, and then they are stored in the bit 9 to bit 0 of this register.
Note:
When the setting for "00" 6 MHz is provided during the 24 MHz operation, the normal
analog conversion value sometime cannot be fetched.
Undefined
bit
The read value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
D9 to D0
• The A/D conversion result is stored and the register is updated at every conversion termination.
• The final conversion value is stored usually.
• The initial value of the ADCR register is irregular.
Note:
The conversion data protection function is provided. (Please refer to Section "19.4
Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter".)
Do not write data in the D9 to D0 bits during the A/D conversion.
bit 15
bit 10
bit 9
to
bit 0
Notes:
•
Rewrite the S10 bit always when the A/D operation before the conversion is stopped. When
updating after the conversion, the ADCR contents become undefined.
•
Always use the word transfer instruction (MOVW A, 0042H, etc.) to read the ADCR register by
specifying the 10 bit mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
451
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.4
MB90330A Series
Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Three mode types, the single conversion, continuous conversion, and stop conversion
modes are available for the 8/10-bit A/D converter. The operation explanation in each
mode is done.
■ Operation of Single-shot Conversion Mode
In single conversion mode, it sequentially converts the analog input on the channels which have been set by
the ANS bit and ANE bit, and when it reaches to the end channel set in ANE bit, it stops the A/D
conversion. When the start channel and the termination channel are same (ANS = ANE), only one channel
specified by the ANS bit is converted. For the operation in the single conversion mode, the setting as
shown in Figure 19.4-1 is necessary.
Figure 19.4-1 Setting of Single Conversion Mode
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
ADCS
BUSY INT
bit9
bit8
bit7
bit6
INTE PAUS STS1 STS0 STRT Reserved MD1
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
MD0
bit0
Reserved
0
ADCR
S10
ST1
ST0
CT1
Store conversion data
CT0
ADMR ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE3 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0
ADER
ADE15 ADE14 ADE13 ADE12 ADE11 ADE10 ADE9
ADE8
ADE7
ADE6
ADE5
ADE4
ADE3
ADE2
ADE1
ADE0
: Used bit
: Set bit corresponding to using pin to "1".
0 : Set "0"
Example of Conversion Order in Single Conversion Mode.
In the case of ANS = 000B and ANE = 011B: AN0 → AN1 → AN2 → AN3 → termination
In the case of ANS = 011B and ANE = 011B: AN3 → termination
452
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of Continuous Conversion Mode
In the continuous conversion mode, the analog inputs set by the ANS and ANE bits are sequentially
converted, the analog input set by the ANE bit is resumed at the end of conversion of the termination
channel set by the ANS bit, and the A/D conversion operation is continued. When the start channel and the
termination channel are same (ANS = ANE), the conversion of only channels specified by the ANS is
repeated. For the operation in the continuous conversion mode, the setting as shown in Figure 19.4-2 is
necessary.
Figure 19.4-2 Setting of Continuous Conversion Mode
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
ADCS
BUSY INT
S10
ADCR
ADMR
ST1
INTE
ST0
bit9
PAUS STS1 STS0 STRT
CT1
bit7
bit6
Reserved
bit8
MD1
MD0
0
1
0
CT0
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
Reserved
0
Store conversion data
ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE3 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0
ADER ADE15 ADE14 ADE13 ADE12 ADE11 ADE10 ADE9 ADE8 ADE7 ADE6 ADE5 ADE4 ADE3 ADE2 ADE1 ADE0
: Used bit
: Set bit corresponding to using pin to "1".
1 : Set "1"
0 : Set "0"
Example of Conversion Order in Continuous Conversion Mode is shown below.
In the case of ANS = 000B and ANE = 011B: AN0 → AN1 → AN2 → AN3 → AN0 → repeat
In the case of ANS = 011B and ANE= 011B: AN3 → AN3 → repeat
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
453
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of Pause-conversion Mode
In the stop conversion mode, the analog input set by the ANS and ANE bits is converted by being
suspended for every channel, the analog input set by the ANE bit is resumed at the end of conversion of the
termination channel set by the ANS bit, and the operation of A/D conversion and suspension is continued.
When the start channel and the termination channel are same (ANS = ANE), the conversion of only
channels specified by the ANS is repeated. When the conversion is restarted during the suspension, the start
factor specified by the STS1 and STS0 bits is generated. For the operation in the stop conversion mode, the
setting as shown in Figure 19.4-3 is necessary.
Figure 19.4-3 Setting of Operation of Pause Conversion Mode
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
ADCS
ADCR
BUSY INT
S10
ST1
bit9
INTE PAUS STS1 STS0 STRT
ST0
CT1
bit7
bit6
Reserved
bit8
MD1
MD0
0
1
1
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
0
Store conversion data
CT0
ADMR ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE3 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0
ADER
ADE15 ADE14 ADE13 ADE12 ADE11 ADE10
ADE9
ADE8
ADE7
ADE6
ADE5
ADE4
ADE3
ADE2
ADE1
ADE0
: Used bit
: Set bit corresponding to using pin to "1".
1 : Set "1"
0 : Set "0"
Example of Conversion Order in Pause-conversion Mode is shown below.
In the case of ANS=000B, ANE=011B: AN0 → Suspension → AN1 → Suspension → AN2 →
Suspension → AN0 → Repetitive
In the case of ANS = 011B and ANE = 011B: AN3 → Suspension → AN3 → Suspension → Repetitive
454
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
19.4.1
Conversion Operation Using μDMAC or EI2OS
The 10-bit A/D converter allows the transfer of A/D conversion result to memory using
the μDMAC or EI2OS.
■ Conversion Operation Using μDMAC or EI2OS
Figure 19.4-4 shows the operation flow when using the μDMAC or EI2OS.
Figure 19.4-4 Example of Operation Flow Chart when μDMAC or EI2OS is Used
A/D conversion start
Sample hold
μDMAC or EI2OS start
A/D convert start
Conversion data transmission
A/D conversion end
Specified
number of times*
end?
YES
Interrupt processing
NO
Interrupt generation
Interrupt clear
*: Decided by the setting of μDMAC or EI2OS
By using the μDMAC or EI2OS, the conversion data protection function allows the assured data transfer to
the memory without losing data even in the continuous conversion.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
455
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.4.2
MB90330A Series
A/D-converted Data Protection Function
When the A/D conversion is executed in the interrupt enable status, the conversion data
protection function works.
■ A/D-converted Data Protection Function
Since this A/D converter has only one data register to store the converted data, the A/D conversion
operation rewrites the data stored in data register at the conversion termination. Therefore, when the
converted data transfer to the memory is delayed, a part of previous data may be lost. To cope with this
problem, when the interrupt is enabled (INTE = 1), the data protection function operates as follows:
● Data protection function when μDMAC or EI2OS is not used
When the converted data is stored in the A/D data register (ADCR), the INT bit of the A/D control status
register "H" level (ADCS1) is set to "1". While this INT bit is set to "1", the A/D conversion is in the
temporally stopped state. When the INT bit is cleared after the A/D data register (ADCR) transferred to the
memory, etc. in the interrupt routine, the stopped state is released.
● Data protection function when μDMAC or EI2OS is used
When the μDMAC or EI2OS is used to specify the continuous conversion, the PAUS bit of A/D control
status register "H" level (ADCS1) is set to "1" in the period from the conversion termination to the
completion of converted data transfer from the data register to the memory with the μDMAC or EI2OS, the
A/D conversion operation is stopped, and the next conversion data is not stored. When the data transfer to
the memory is completed, the PAUS bit is cleared to "0" and the conversion operation is restarted. Figure
19.4-5 shows the flow of the data protection function when using the μDMAC or EI2OS.
456
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.4 Explanation of Operation of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
MB90330A Series
Figure 19.4-5 Data Protection Function Flow when μDMAC or EI2OS is Used
A/D continuous conversion
start
Converted for 1 time
Store in A/D data register
Converted for 2 times
NO
A/D suspend
YES
Store in A/D data register
Converted for 3 times
continue
Converted for all
continue
Store in A/D data register
Interrupt processing routine
A/D initialize or stop
END
Note: Flow at A/D converter operation stop is omitted.
Notes:
•
The converted data protection function operates only in the interrupt enabled (ADCS1: INTE=1)
status.
•
When the μDMAC or EI2OS operates, the A/D conversion is suspended, and the interrupt is
disabled, the A/D conversion may operate to write new data before the old data transfer. Also
when the conversion is restarted during the suspension, the old data are destroyed.
•
When the conversion is restarted during the suspension, the waiting data are destroyed.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
457
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.5 Precautions when Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter
19.5
MB90330A Series
Precautions when Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Precautions when using 8/10-bit A/D converter is indicated.
■ Precautions when Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter
● Analog input pin
The A/D input pin is in the common use with the input-output pins of port 7 and port 8 to be used by
switching between the port 7 and port 8 direction register (DDR7 and DDR8) and the analog input enable
register (ADER). Write "0" to the corresponding bits of DDR7 and DDR8 to input the port setting and set
the analog input mode (ADEx = 1) to the ADER register to fix the port side input gate for pins to be used as
analog input. When the intermediate level signal is input in the port input mode (ADEx = 0), the input leak
current flows through the gate.
● Notes on using in Internal timer (16-bit reload timer 1)
Set the input value of internal timer to the inactive side ("L" for the internal timer) when setting the STS1
and STS0 bits of A/D control status register "H" level (ADCS1) to start the A/D converter by the internal
timer. When it is set to the active side, the operation may be started at the same time of writing on the
ADCS1 register.
Set the STS1 and STS0 in the status of the "1" input to the ADTG and the "0" output from the internal
timer (PPG1).
● Turning-on sequence of power supply to A/D converter and analog inputs
Apply the A/D converter power supply (AVcc and AVRH) and the analog input (AN0 to AN15) always
after or simultaneously turning on the digital power supply (Vcc). In addition, turn off the A/D converter
power supply and the analog input after or simultaneously turn off the digital power supply (Vcc).
● Power supply voltage of the A/D converter
Keep the A/D converter power supply voltage (AVcc) not to exceed the digital power supply voltage (Vcc)
to prevent the latch up.
458
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.6 Example of program-1 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Single Mode)
MB90330A Series
19.6
Example of program-1 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example
of Starting the EI2OS in the Single Mode)
This section shows the A/D conversion program started in single mode EI2OS
■ Example of EI2OS Start Program in Single Mode
● Processing specification
Conversion is performed up to analog inputs AN1 to AN3.
The converted data is transferred to addresses 200H to 205H.
Resolution is assumed to be ten bits.
Startup is performed by software.
Figure 19.6-1 shows flow of the EI2OS start program (single mode).
Figure 19.6-1 Flow of the EI2OS Start Program (single Mode)
Activation
start
AN1
Interrupt
EI2OS transfer
AN2
Interrupt
EI2OS transfer
AN3
Interrupt
EI2OS transfer
End
Interrupt sequence
Parallel process
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
459
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.6 Example of program-1 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Single Mode)
● Coding example
MB90330A Series
BAPL
EQU
000100H
; Buffer address pointer lower
BAPM
EQU
000101H
; Buffer address pointer middle
BAPH
EQU
000102H
; Buffer address pointer upper
ISCS
EQU
000103H
; EI2OS status register
IOAL
EQU
000104H
; I/O address register lower
IOAH
EQU
000105H
; I/O address register upper
DCTL
EQU
000106H
; Data counter lower
DCTH
EQU
000107H
; Data counter upper
DDR7
EQU
000017H
; Port 7 direction register
ADER0
EQU
00001EH
; Analog input enable register 0
ICR12
EQU
0000BCH
; Interrupt control register for A/DC
ADMR
EQU
000045H
; A/D conversion channel set register
ADCS0
EQU
000040H
; A/D Control status register
ADCS1
EQU
000041H
;
ADCR0
EQU
000042H
; A/D data register
ADCR1
EQU
000043H
;
;----------Main Program-----------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
; Stack pointer (SP), etc. shall be initialized.
AND
CCR, #0BFH
; Disables the interrupt.
MOV
ICR12, #00H
; Interrupt levels (0 strength)
MOV
BAPL, #00H
; Setting the converted data storage address
MOV
BAPM, #02H
; (uses 200H to 205H)
MOV
BAPH, #00H
;
MOV
ISCS, #18H
; Transferring the word data, Transferred address + 1,
; I/O → Transfer to the memory
460
MOV
IOAL, #42H
; As forwarding former address pointer
MOV
IOAH, #00H
; Setting analog data register address
MOV
DCTL, #03H
; Transferring the EI2OS for three times, Performing
; the conversion for the same number of times.
MOV
DDR7, #11110001B
; P71 to P73 are set to input.
MOV
DCTH, #00H
;
MOV
ADER0, #00001110B
; P71/AN1 to P73/AN3 are set in the analog input.
MOV
ADMR, #013H
; AN1 to AN3 CH are converted
MOV
ADCSL, #000H
; Single startup
MOV
ADCSH, #0A2H
; Starting the software, Starting the A/D conversion,
; Enabling the interrupt
MOV
ILM, #07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
OR
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.6 Example of program-1 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Single Mode)
CCR, #40H
; Interruption permission
MOV
A,#00H
MOV
A,#01H
BRA
LOOP
MB90330A Series
LOOP:
; Infinite loop
;----------Interrupt Program-----------------------------------------------------------ED_INT1:
MOV
I:ADCS1, #00H
RETI
CODE
; Stopping the A/D, Disabling the interrupt and the
; flag clearance
; Returns from interrupt.
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings-----------------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FF6CH
DSL
ED_INT1
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; Reset vector setting
; Set Single-chip mode
ENDS
END
CM44-10129-6E
; The vector is set in interruption #36(24H).
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
461
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.7 Example of Program-2 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Continuous Mode)
19.7
MB90330A Series
Example of Program-2 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example
of Starting the EI2OS in the Continuous Mode)
This section shows the A/D conversion program started the EI2OS in continuous mode.
■ Example of EI2OS Start Program in Continuous Mode
● Processing specification
Convert the analog inputs AN3 to AN5 twice to acquire two converted data for each of channels.
The converted data is transferred to addresses 600H to 60BH.
Resolution is assumed to be ten bits.
Start up is performed by 16-bit reload timer 0
Figure 19.7-1 shows flow of the EI2OS start program (continuous mode).
Figure 19.7-1 Flow of the EI2OS Start Program (Continuous Mode)
Activation
start
After 6 times transfer
AN3
Interrupt
EI2OS transfer
AN4
Interrupt
EI2OS transfer
Interrupt sequence
AN5
Interrupt
EI
2OS
transfer
End
462
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.7 Example of Program-2 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Continuous Mode)
● Coding example
BAPL
EQU
000100H
; Buffer address pointer lower
BAPM
EQU
000101H
; Buffer address pointer middle
BAPH
EQU
000102H
; Buffer address pointer upper
ISCS
EQU
000103H
; EI2OS status register
IOAL
EQU
000104H
; I/O address register lower
IOAH
EQU
000105H
; I/O address register upper
DCTL
EQU
000106H
; Data counter lower
DCTH
EQU
000107H
; Data counter upper
DDR7
EQU
000017H
; Port 7 direction register
ADER0
EQU
00001EH
; Analog input enable register 0
ICR12
EQU
0000BCH
; Interrupt control register for A/DC
ADMR
EQU
000045H
; A/D conversion channel set register
ADCS0
EQU
000040H
; A/D Control status register
ADCS1
EQU
000041H
;
ADCR0
EQU
000042H
; A/D data register
ADCR1
EQU
000043H
;
TMCSR1L
EQU
000062H
; Timer control status register 0 Low
TMCSR0H
EQU
000063H
;
TMRLR0L
EQU
000064H
; Reload Register 0
TMRLR0H
EQU
000065H
;
;----------Main Program-----------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
; Stack pointer (SP), etc. shall be initialized.
AND
CCR,#0BFH
; Disables the interrupt.
MOV
ICR12, #08H
; Interrupt level 0 (the strongest), Interrupt enabled
MOV
BAPL, #00H
; Setting the converted data storage address
MOV
BAPM, #06H
; (uses 600H to 60BH)
MOV
BAPH, #00H
;
MOV
ISCS, #18H
; Transferring the word data, Transferred address +,
; I/O → Transfer to the memory
CM44-10129-6E
MOV
IOAL, #42H
; As forwarding former address pointer
MOV
IOAH, #00H
; Setting analog data register address
MOV
DCTL, #06H
; EI2OS transfer for 6 times, Transfer for 3ch x 2
; times
MOV
DCTH, #00H
MOV
DDR7, #00000000B
; P70 to P77 are set in the input.
MOV
ADER0, #00111000B
; P73/AN3 to P75/AN5are set in the analog input.
MOV
ADMR, #035H
; AN3 to AN5 CH are converted.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
463
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.7 Example of Program-2 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Continuous Mode)
MOV
ADCS0, #080H
; Continuous mode
MOV
LOOP:
ADCS1, #0A8H
MB90330A Series
; Starting the 16-bit timer, Starting the A/D
; conversion, Interrupting permission
MOVW TMRLR0L, #0320H
; Setting the timer value 800 (320H) 66 ms
MOV
TMCSR0H, #00H
; Setting the clock source to 83 ns, External trigger
; Interdiction
MOV
TMCSR0L, #12H
; Disabling the timer output, Disabling the interrupt,
; Enabling the reload
MOV
TMCSR0L, #13H
; 16-bit timer startup
MOV
ILM, #07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
OR
CCR, #40H
; Interruption permission
MOV
A,#00H
; Infinite loop
MOV
A,#01H
BRA
LOOP
;----------Interrupt Program-----------------------------------------------------------ED_INT1:
MOV
I:ADCS1, #80H
; The A/D does not stop, The A/D conversion process
; program started by the EI2OS with the interrupt flag
; clearance in the stop mode is shown.
; Interdiction
RETI
CODE
; Returns from interrupt.
ENDS
;----------Vector Setting-----------------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FF7CH
DSL
ED_INT1
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; Reset vector setting
; Setting Single-chip mode
ENDS
END
464
; The vector is set in interruption #36(24H).
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.8 Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Stop Mode)
MB90330A Series
19.8
Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example
of Starting the EI2OS in the Stop Mode)
This section shows the A/D conversion program started the EI2OS in stop mode.
■ Example of EI2OS Start Program in Continuous Mode
● Processing specification
Analog input AN3 is converted for 12 times in a constant period.
The converted data is transferred to addresses 600H to 617H.
Resolution is assumed to be ten bits.
Start up is performed by 16-bit reload timer 0.
Figure 19.8-1 shows flow of the EI2OS start program (stop mode).
Figure 19.8-1 Flow of the EI2OS Start Program (Stop Mode)
Activation
start
AN3
Interrupt
After 12 times transfer
EI2OS transfer
STOP
Interrupt sequence
External edge start
End
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
465
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.8 Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Stop Mode)
● Coding example
MB90330A Series
BAPL
EQU
000100H
; Buffer address pointer lower
BAPM
EQU
000101H
; Buffer address pointer middle
BAPH
EQU
000102H
; Buffer address pointer upper
ISCS
EQU
000103H
; EI2OS status register
IOAL
EQU
000104H
; I/O address register lower
IOAH
EQU
000105H
; I/O address register upper
DCTL
EQU
000106H
; Data counter lower
DCTH
EQU
000107H
; Data counter upper
DDR7
EQU
000017H
; Port 7 direction register
ADER0
EQU
00001EH
; Analog input enable register 0
ICR12
EQU
0000BCH
; Interrupt control register for A/DC
ADMR
EQU
000045H
: A/D conversion channel set register
ADCS0
EQU
000040H
; A/D Control status register
ADCS1
EQU
000041H
;
ADCR0
EQU
000042H
; A/D data register.
ADCR1
EQU
000043H
;
TMCSR0L
EQU
000062H
; Timer control status register 0 Low
TMCSR0H
EQU
000063H
;
TMRLR0L
EQU
000064H
; Reload Register 0
TMRLR0H
EQU
000065H
;
;----------Main Program-----------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
466
; Stack pointer (SP), etc. shall be initialized.
AND
CCR,#0BFH
; Disables the interrupt.
MOV
ICR12, #08H
; Interrupt levels (0 strength)
MOV
BAPL, #00H
; Setting the converted data storage address
MOV
BAPM, #06H
; (uses 600H to 617H).
MOV
BAPH, #00H
;
MOV
ISCS, #19H
; Transferring the word data, Transferred address +,
; I/O → Transfer to the memory, Termination at the
; resource request
MOV
IOAL, #42H
; As forwarding former address pointer
MOV
IOAH, #00H
; Setting analog data register address
MOV
DCTL, #0CH
; EI2OS transfer for 12 times, 3ch only
MOV
DCTH, #00H
;
MOV
DDR7, #00000000B
; P70 to P77 are set in the input
MOV
ADER, #00001000B
; P73/AN3 are set in the analog input
MOV
ADMR, #033H
; AN3 CH is converted
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MOV
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.8 Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Stop Mode)
ADCS0, #0C0H
; Stop mode
MOV
ADCS1, #0A8H
MB90330A Series
LOOP:
; Starting the 16-bit timer, Starting the A/D
; conversion, Interrupting permission
MOVW TMRLR0L, #0320H
; Setting the timer value 800 (320H) 66 ms
MOV
TMCSR0H, #00H
; Setting the clock source to 83 ns, External trigger
; Interdiction
MOV
TMCSR0L, #12H
; Disabling the timer output, Disabling the interrupt,
; Enabling the reload
MOV
TMCSR0L, #13H
; 16-bit timer startup
MOV
ILM, #07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
OR
CCR, #40H
; Interruption permission
MOV
A,#00H
; Infinite loop
MOV
A,#01H
BRA
LOOP
;----------Interrupt Program-----------------------------------------------------------ED_INT1:
MOV
I:ADCS1, #80H
; The A/D does not stop, The A/D conversion process
; program started by the EI2OS with the interrupt flag
; clearance in the stop mode is shown.
; Interdiction
RETI
CODE
; Returns from interrupt.
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings-----------------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FF6CH
DSL
ED_INT1
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; Reset vector setting
; Setting Single-chip mode
ENDS
END
CM44-10129-6E
; The vector is set in interruption #36(24H).
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
467
CHAPTER 19 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
19.8 Example of Program-3 of 8/10-bit A/D Converter (Example of Starting
the EI2OS in the Stop Mode)
468
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20
EXTENDED I/O SERIAL
INTERFACE
This chapter describes an overview of the extended I/O
serial interface, the configuration and function of
registers, and operations of extended I/O serial
interface.
20.1 Outline of Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
469
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.1 Outline of Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.1
MB90330A Series
Outline of Extended I/O Serial Interface
The extended I/O serial interface is a serial I/O interface that can transfer data through
the adoption of 8-bit × 1 channel configured clock synchronization scheme. LSB first/
MSB first can be selected in data transfer.
■ Outline of Extended I/O Serial Interface
The following two operation modes are available for the extended I/O serial interface.
• Internal shift clock mode: Transfers data in sync with the internal clock.
• External shift clock mode: Transfers data in sync with the clock input through an external pin (SCK). In
this mode, transfer operation performed by the CPU instruction is also
available by operating the general-use port sharing an external pin (SCK).
■ Block Diagram in Extended I/O Serial Interface
Figure 20.1-1 shows the block diagram of extended I/O serial interface.
Figure 20.1-1 Block Diagram of Extended I/O Serial Interface
Internal data bus
Initial value
D7 to D0 (LSB first)
(MSB first) D0 to D7
Transfer direction selection
SIN
Read
Write
SDR (Serial data register)
SOT
SCK
Control circuit
Shift clock counter
Internal clock
2
1
0
SMD2 SMD1 SMD0 SIE
SIR BUSY STOP STRT MODE BDS SOE SCOE
Interrupt
request
#38
SMCS
Internal data bus
470
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
20.2
Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
The configuration and functions of registers used in the extended I/O serial interface
are described.
■ List of Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
Figure 20.2-1 shows the list of register in extended I/O serial interface.
Figure 20.2-1 List of Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
SMCS
13
bit 15
14
Address : 000059H SMD2 SMD1 SMD0
12
11
10
9
8
Serial mode control
SIE
SIR BUSY STOP STRT status register (SMCS)
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 00000010B
bit
SMCS
Address : 000058H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Serial mode control
MODE BDS SOE SCOE status register (SMCS)
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value XXXX0000B
SDR
bit 7
Address : 00005AH D7
6
bit
SDCR
Address : 00005BH
14
5
4
3
2
1
0
Serial data register (SDR)
D1
D0
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value XXXXXXXXB
15
MD
(R/W)
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIV3
DIV2
DIV1
DIV0
Communication prescaler
control register (SDCR)
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 0XXX0000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Undefined
X : Undefined
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
471
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.2.1
MB90330A Series
Serial Mode Control Status Register (SMCS)
The configuration and functions of Serial mode control status register (SMCS) is
described.
■ Serial Mode Control Status Register (SMCS)
Serial mode control status register (SMCS) is a register which controls the transfer operating mode of serial
I/O.
Figure 20.2-2 shows the bit configuration of serial mode control status register (SMCS).
Figure 20.2-2 Bit Configuration of Serial Mode Control Status Register (SMCS)
SMCS
13
bit 15
14
Address : 000059H SMD2 SMD1 SMD0
11
12
10
9
8
Serial mode control
SIE
SIR BUSY STOP STRT status register
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 00000010B
bit
SMCS
Address : 000058H
7
6
5
3
4
2
1
0
Serial mode control
MODE BDS SOE SCOE status register
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value XXXX0000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Undefined
Function of each bit of serial mode control status register (SMCS) is described as follows:
[bit 15 to bit 13] SMD2,SMD1,SMD0:Serial Shift Clock Mode (shift clock selection)
The serial shift clock mode is selected.
Table 20.2-1 and Table 20.2-2 show the settings of the serial shift clock mode.
Table 20.2-1 Serial Shift Clock Mode Selection
SMD2
SMD1
SMD0
φ=24 MHz
div=8
φ=12 MHz
div=4
φ=6 MHz
div=6
Value of dividing
frequency
0
0
0
1.5 MHz
1.5 MHz
500 kHz
2
0
0
1
750 kHz
750 kHz
250 kHz
4
0
1
0
188 kHz
188 kHz
62.5 kHz
16
0
1
1
93.4 kHz
93.4 kHz
31.2 kHz
32
1
0
0
46.9 kHz
46.9 kHz
15.6 kHz
64
1
0
1
External shift clock mode
1
1
0
Setting disabled
1
1
1
Setting disabled
Initialized to "000B" by reset. Rewriting under forwarding is a interdiction.
Shift clock includes five alternatives of internal shift clock and one alternative of external shift clock. The
external shifts. Please set neither "110B" nor "111B" to SMD2, SMD1, and SMD0.
472
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
Table 20.2-2 Example of Settings of the Communication Prescaler (SDCR)
(Machine clock)
Div
Machine cycle
(Recommended Setting)
MD
DIV3
DIV2
DIV1
DIV0
1
1
0
0
0
0
3 MHz
2
1
0
0
0
1
6 MHz
4
1
0
0
1
1
12 MHz
8
1
0
1
1
1
24 MHz
Providing shift operation for each instruction is also possible by defining SCOE=0 on clock selection and
operating the port sharing SCK pin.
[bit 12] SIE: Serial I/0 Interrupt Enable (enabling serial I/O interrupt)
Serial I/O interrupt request is controlled as shown in the table below.
SIE
Operation
0
Interrupt disabled [Initial value]
1
Serial I/O interrupt enabled
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can be read and written.
[bit 11] SIR: Serial I/0 Interrupt Request (serial I/O interrupt request)
On completion of the serial data transfer, this bit is set to "1". And when this bit turns to "1" on interrupt
enabled (SIE= 1), an interrupt request to the CPU occurs. A clear condition is different according to the
MODE bit.
• When MODE bit is "0", it is cleared by writing "0" to SIR bit.
• When MODE bit is "1", it is cleared by writing to or reading SDR bit.
• Regardless of values of MODE bit, it is cleared by resetting or writing "1" to STOP bit.
• It is not significant to write "1".
• On reading read/modify/write instructions, "1" is read in all cases.
[bit 10] BUSY (forwarding status display)
This bit indicates whether serial transfer is running or not.
BUSY
Operation
0
Stop or serial data register R/W standby [Initial value]
1
State of serial transfer
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can only be read.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
473
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
[bit 9] STOP (stop bit)
This bit forcibly suspends serial transfer. When this bit is "1", the state changes into HALT based on
STOP=1.
STOP
Operation
0
Normal Operation
1
Forwarding stop [Initial value] by STOP=1
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can be read and written.
[bit 8] STRT: Start (start bit)
It is a bit by which the serial transfer is started. Forwarding is begun by writing "1" in the stopped state.
Lines specified as "1" are ignored, where serial transfer operation is on-going and the state is in serial
shift register R/W WAIT.
• Writing "0" is not significant.
• The bit always returns "0" when read.
[bit 7 to bit 4] Undefined bit
The read value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
[bit 3] MODE (serial mode selection)
The startup condition from the stopped state is selected. However, rewriting under the operation is a
interdiction.
MODE
Operation
0
Started when STRT = 1. [Initial value]
1
Started by reading or writing the serial data register.
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can be read and written.
• This bit set to "1" at μDMAC start.
[bit 2] BDS: Bit Direction Selection (transfer direction selection)
On input and output of the serial data, Select either of the following alternatives: transfer in ascending
order from the least significant bit (LSB first); transfer in descending order from the most significant bit
(MSB first).
BDS
Operation
0
LSB first [Initial value]
1
MSB first
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can be read and written.
474
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
Note:
Select transfer direction before writing data to SDR.
[bit 1] SOE: Serial Out Enable (serial output permission)
Controls the external pin (SOT) for serial I/O.
SOE
Operation
0
General-purpose port [Initial value]
1
Serial data output
• This bit is initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can be read and written.
[bit 0] SCOE: SCk1 Output Enable (shift clock output enable)
Controls output of the input/output external pins (SCK1,SCK2) for shift clock.
SCOE
Operation
0
At the transfer by general-purpose port pin and instruction
1
Shift clock output pin
[Initial value]
Set this bit to "0", when you transfer data in external shift clock mode for each individual instruction.
• Initialized to "0" at reset.
• This bit can be read and written.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
475
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.2.2
MB90330A Series
Serial Data Register (SDR)
The configuration and functions of Serial data register (SDR) are described.
■ Serial Data Register (SDR)
Figure 20.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the serial data register (SDR).
Figure 20.2-3 Bit Configuration of Serial Data Register (SDR)
bit 7
SDR
Address : 00005AH D7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Serial data register
D1
D0
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R/W : Readable/Writable
X : Undefined
The serial data register (SDR) is a serial data register to hold transfer data of the serial I/O.
Both writing and reading to and from SDR during transfer are disabled.
476
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.2 Register in Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
20.2.3
Communication Prescaler Control Register (SDCR)
The configuration and functions of communication prescaler control register (SDCR)
are described.
■ Communication Prescaler Control Register (SDCR)
Figure 20.2-4 shows the bit configuration of communication prescaler control register (SDCR).
Figure 20.2-4 Communication Prescaler Control Register (SDCR)
SDCR
bit
Address : 00005BH
15
14
MD
(R/W)
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIV3
DIV2
DIV1
DIV0
Communication prescaler
control register
(R/W) (R/W) (R/W) (R/W) Initial value 0XXX0000B
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Undefined
The functions of each bit of the communication prescaler control register (SDCR) are described below.
[bit 15] MD: Machine clock divide moDe select
Bit to enable the operation of the communication prescaler
MD
Operation
0
Communication Prescaler stops.
1
Communication Prescaler is operating.
[bit 11 to bit 8] DIV3,DIV2,DIV1,DIV0:DIVide3 to DIVide0
These bits determine the machine clock division ratio.
DIV3 to DIV0
Rate of division
0000B
1-frequency division
0001B
2-frequency division
0010B
3-frequency division
0011B
4-frequency division
0100B
5-frequency division
0101B
6-frequency division
0110B
7-frequency division
0111B
8-frequency division
Note:
In the case of making changes to the rate of division, allow for two divisions of intervals as the
duration of stabilization of the clock before communication.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
477
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.3
MB90330A Series
Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
Extended I/O interface consists of a serial mode control status register (SMCS) and a
serial data register (SDR) and is used to input and output 8-bit serial data.
Operation of extended I/O serial interface is described.
■ Outline of Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
When serial data is input or output, each of input and output operations is performed as described below.
● Input of Serial data
The content of the serial data register is output in a bit serial fashion to the serial output pin (SOT pin) in
synchronization with the falling edge of the serial shift clock (external clock, internal clock).
● Output of Serial data
Input from the serial input pin (SIN pin) into SDR (serial data register) in a bit serial fashion in
synchronization with the rising edge of the serial shift clock (external clock, internal clock).
The direction of shift (transfer from MSB or LSB) can be specified by the bit of direction specification
(BDS) of SMCS (serial mode control status register).
Once the transfer completes, the state goes into STOP or into data register R/W wait (or SDR R/W WAIT)
by MODE bit of the serial mode control status register (SMCS). To change state into TRANSFER from
each of the states, you should do each of the following steps.
• To return from HALT, write "0" in STOP bit, and "1" in STRT bit (STOP and STRT can be set
concurrently).
• To return from serial data register R/W wait (SDR R/W WAIT), read or write the data register.
478
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
20.3.1
Shift Clock Mode
Shift clock includes two types of modes; one is Internal Shift Clock Mode, the other is
External Shift Clock Mode, both of which are specified by settings of SMCS. Please
switch the mode with serial I/O stopped. Reading BUSY bit allows the checking of the
state of HALT.
■ Internal Shift Clock Mode
Operation is driven by the internal clock, and the shift clock whose duty ratio is 50% is output from SCK
pin as an output of the timing of synchronization.
Data is forwarded by one bit per a clock.
Transfer rate can be calculated using the following formula.
transfer rate (S) =
A
Internal clock machine cycle (A)
A indicates the rate of division represented by SMD bit of SMCS.
(φ/div)/2, (φ/div)/22, (φ/div)/24, (φ/div)/25, (φ/div)/26
■ External Shift Clock Mode
In synchronization with the external shift clock input through SCK pin, 1 bit of data is transferred for each
individual clock.
Allowed transfer rate varies from DC to 1/(8 machine cycles). When 1 machine cycle = 62.5 ns for
example, a maximum of 2 MHz is allowable.
Transfer by instruction by instruction can be accomplished by setting as described below.
• Select the external shift clock mode, and set SCOE bit of SMCS to "0".
• Write "1" in the direction register of which the port shares SCK pin, and place the port in the output
mode.
Once the settings complete as indicated above, write "1" or "0" in the data register (PDR) of the port, then
the value to be delivered to SCK pin is captured as the external clock and transfer operation is
accomplished. Have the shift clock start at "H".
Note:
Writing to SMCS.SDR during serial I/O operation is disabled.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
479
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.3.2
MB90330A Series
Operation State of Serial I/O
The states of serial I/O operation includes the following 4 types of states; STOP, HALT,
R/W WAIT of SDR, and TRANSFER.
■ Operation State of Serial I/O
● STOP State
On RESET or in the state of writing "1" in STOP bit of SMCS, the shift counter is initialized, resulting in
SIR=0.
Returning from the stop state is performed by setting STOP = 0 and STRT = 1 (both can be set at the same
time). Even though STRT=1 is provided when STOP=1, transfer operation is not executed, since STOP bit
is upper than STRT bit.
● HALT State
When MODE bit is "0", termination of transfer provides SMCS with BUSY=0 and SIR=1, resulting in the
initialization of the counter to go into HALT state. To return from the HALT state, set STRT to "1", then
transfer operation restarts.
● Serial data register R/W standby
When MODE bit of SMCS is "1", termination of serial transfer provides SMCS with BUSY=0 and SIR=1,
resulting in the serial data register to go into R/W WAIT state. If the interrupt enable register is enabled,
this block issues interrupt signals.
To return from the R/W WAIT state, when the serial data register is read or written, then BUSY is set to
"1", which allows to transfer operation to restart.
● Transfer State
It is a state to do the serial transfer by BUSY = 1. MODE bit triggers the transition to the state of HALT
and R/W WAIT respectively.
Figure 20.3-1 shows the transition diagram of each state, and Figure 20.3-2 shows the conceptual diagram
of read/write of the serial data register.
480
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
Figure 20.3-1 Transition Diagram of Operation in Extended I/O Serial Interface
Reset
Stop state (Transfer complete)
STOP=0 & STRT=0
STOP=1
STRT=0, BUSY=0
MODE=0
STOP=0
&
STRT=1
MODE=0
&
STOP=0
&
END
STOP=1
STOP
STRT=0, BUSY=0
STOP=0
&
STRT=1
Transfer operation
Serial data register R/wait
MODE=1 & END & STOP=1
STRT=1, BUSY=1
STOP=1
STRT=1, BUSY=0
MODE=1
SDR R/W & MODE=1
Serial data
Figure 20.3-2 Conceptual Diagram of Reading/writing Serial Data Register
Data bus
Data bus
Read
SIN
Write
Interrupt output
SOT
Extended I/O
serial interface
Read
Write
CPU
(1)
(2)
Interrupt input
Data bus
Interrupt
controller
(1) When MODE=1, transfer is terminated by the shift clock counter. This allows SIR=1 to go into read/
write state. If the SIE bit is "1", the interruption signal is generated. However, when SIE is inactive, or
when writing "1" in STOP causes the suspend of transfer, interrupt signals are not generated.
(2) Once the serial data register is read or written, interrupt requests are cleared, and serial transfer starts.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
481
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.3.3
MB90330A Series
Start/stop Timing of Shift Operation and Timing of I/O
Start/stop timing of shift operation and timing of I/O is described.
■ Start/stop Timing of Shift Operation and Timing of I/O
• Start
STOP bit of Start SMCS is set to "0", while STRT bit to "1".
• Stop
One halt is triggered from the termination of transfer; the other from STOP=1.
- Halt from STOP=1: Halts staying with SIR=0, regardless of MODE bit.
- Halt from transfer termination: Halts with SIR=1, regardless of MODE bit.
Regardless of MODE bit when BUSY bit is in the state of serial transfer, it is set to "1", and when in HALT
or R/W WAIT state, it is set to "0". Please read this bit to confirm forwarding.
The following chart shows the operation for each mode and the timing of halt operation. DO7 to DO0 in
figure shows output data.
● Internal shift clock mode (LSB first)
Figure 20.3-3 Start/stop Timing of Shift Operation (Internal Clock)
"1" Output
SCK
(Transfer start)
STRT
(Transfer complete)
MODE=0
BUSY
DO0
SOT
DO7 (Data hold)
● External shift clock mode (LSB first)
Figure 20.3-4 Start/stop Timing of Shift Operation (External Clock)
SCK
STRT
(Transfer start)
(Transfer complete)
MODE=0
BUSY
SOT
DO0
DO7
(Data hold)
● For instruction shift in external shift clock mode (LSB first)
In instruction shift, when "1" is written to the bit corresponding to SCK of PDR, "H" is output, and when
"0" is written, "L" is output (where external shift clock mode is selected, and SCOE=0).
482
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
MB90330A Series
Figure 20.3-5 When Instruction Shift is Performed in the External Shift Clock Mode.
SCK bit "0" of PDR
SCK
SCK bit "1" of PDR
SCK bit "0" of PDR
(Transfer end)
STRT
When Mode = 0
BUSY
SOT
DO7 (Data hold)
DO6
● Stop by STOP=1 (LSB first, At internal clock)
Figure 20.3-6 Stop Timing when STOP Bit is Assumed to be "1"
"1" Output
SCK
(Transfer complete)
(Transfer start)
STRT
MODE=0
BUSY
STOP
SOT
DO3
DO4
(Data hold)
DO5
■ Operation during Transfer Serial Data
During transferring serial data, data from the serial output pin (SOT) is output on the falling edge of the
shift clock, data of the serial input pin (SIN) is input on the rising edge.
● LSB first (when BDS bit is set to "0")
Figure 20.3-7 Shift Timing of I/O (LSB First)
SCK
SIN
DI0
DI1
SOT
DO0
DO1
SIN Input
DI3
DI2
DI4
SOT Output
DO3
DO2
DO4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DO5
DO6
DO7
● MSB first (when BDS bit is set to "1")
Figure 20.3-8 Shift Timing of I/O (LSB First)
SCK
CM44-10129-6E
SIN
DI7
DI6
SOT
DO7
DO6
SIN Input
DI4
DI5
DI3
SOT Output
DO4
DO5
DO3
DI2
DI1
DI0
DO2
DO1
DO0
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
483
CHAPTER 20 EXTENDED I/O SERIAL INTERFACE
20.3 Operation of Extended I/O Serial Interface
20.3.4
MB90330A Series
Interrupt Function
Extended I/O serial interface can generate the interrupt request to the CPU.
■ Interruption Function of Extended I/O Serial Interface
Upon completion of data transfer, SIR bit indicating an interrupt flag is set, and when SIE bit of the SMCS
enabling interrupts is "1", the interrupt request is output to the CPU.
Figure 20.3-9 shows the output timing of interrupt signal.
Figure 20.3-9 Output Timing of Interruption Signal
SCK
(Transfer complete)
BUSY
SIR
MODE=1
SIE=1
RD/WR of SDR
SOT
484
DO6
DO7
(Data hold)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21
UART
This chapter explains the function and operation of the
UART.
21.1 Overview of UART
21.2 UART Block Diagram
21.3 UART Pins
21.4 Register of UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
21.6 UART Baud Rate
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
21.8 Notes on Using UART
21.9 Example of UART Programming
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
485
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.1 Overview of UART
21.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of UART
UART is a general purpose serial data communication interface for synchronous or
asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) communications with external devices. Not
only the typical function of bi-directional communication (normal mode), but also the
function of master/slave communication (multiprocessor mode: only supported master
side) are supported.
■ UART Function
● UART function
UART, or a general serial data communication interface that sends and receives serial data to and from
other CPU and peripherals, has the functions listed in Table 21.1-1.
Table 21.1-1 UART Function
Functions
Data buffer
Transfer mode
Baud rate
Full-duplicate double-buffer
• Clock synchronous (No start/stop bit)
• Clock asynchronous (start-stop synchronization to clock)
• Dedicate baud-rate generator
• External clock input enabled.
Data length
• 8 bits or 7 bits (in the asynchronous normal mode only)
• 1 to 8 bit (s) (synchronous mode only)
Signal type
NRZ (Non Return to Zero) type
Detection of receive error
Interrupt request
Master/slave type communication
function (multi processor mode)
• Framing error
• Overrun error
• Parity error (Not supported in operation mode 1)
• Receive interrupt (receive, detection of receive error)
• Transmission interrupt (transmission complete)
• Extended intelligent I/O service for both sending and receiving
Support of (EI2OS) μDMA
Capable of 1 (master) to n (slaves) communication
(available just as master)
Note:
At clock synchronous transfer, data is transferred alone with neither start nor stop bit added.
486
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.1 Overview of UART
MB90330A Series
Table 21.1-2 UART Operation Modes
Data length
Operating mode
Without
Parity
With Parity
7 bits or 8 bits
Synchronous
type
Length of
Stop Bit
Asynchronous
0
Normal mode
1
Multiprocessor mode
8 bits + 1 *1
-
Asynchronous
1 bit
or
2 bits *2
2
Normal mode
1 to 8 bits
-
Synchronous
None
-: Unavailable
*1: "+1" indicates the address/data select bit (A/D) used for communication control.
*2: During reception, only one bit is detected as the stop bit.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
487
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.2 UART Block Diagram
21.2
MB90330A Series
UART Block Diagram
UART is composed of the following block.
■ UART Block Diagram
Figure 21.2-1 UART Block Diagram
Control bus
Receive
interrupt signal
UART prescaler
control register
(UTCR0 to UTCR3)
UART prescaler
reload register
(UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
Clock selector
Machine clock
Dedicated baud
rate generator
Pin
Transfer clock
Transmit
interrupt signal
Receive clock
Receive
control
circuit
Transmit
control
circuit
Start bit
detection circuit
Transmit start
circuit
Receive bit
counter
Transmit bit
counter
Receive parity
counter
Transmit parity
counter
SCK0 to SCK3
External clock
Pin
SOT0 to SOT3
Receiving
shift register
Pin
Transmit
shift register
SIN0 to SIN3
Receiving
end
SIDR0 to SIDR3
SODR0 to SODR3
Transmission
end
Receive state
judge circuit
F2MC - 16LX Bus
SMR0 to
SMR3
register
488
MD1
MD0
SCKL
M2L2
M2L1
M2L0
SCKE
SOE
SCR0 to
SCR3
register
PEN
P
SBL
CL
AD
REC
RXE
TXE
SSR0 to
SSR3
register
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
PE
ORE
FRE
RDRF
TDRE
BDS
RIE
TIE
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.2 UART Block Diagram
MB90330A Series
● Clock selector
Dedicated baud rate generator, selecting the send and receive clock from external input clocks.
● Reception Control Circuit
The reception control circuit is configured with the reception bit counter, start bit detecting circuit, and
reception parity counter. The receive bit counter counts receiving data. Once this counter completes
receiving a piece of data based on the specified data length, then a receiving interrupt request is generated.
The start bit detection circuit is a circuit that detects the start bit from serial input signals. When detecting
the start bit, this circuit writes the data in the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) with
shifting based on specified transfer rates. The receive parity counter calculates parity in received data.
● Transmission Control Circuit
The transmission control circuit is configured with the transmission bit counter, transmission start circuit,
and transmission parity counter. The send bit counter counts sending data. Once this counter completes
sending a piece of data based on the specified data length, then a sending interrupt request is generated. The
sending start circuit starts sending operation by writing to the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to
SODR3). The transmit parity counter generates a parity bit for data to be transmitted if the data is paritychecked.
● Receive shift register
This circuit captures the receiving data, shifting bit by bit, that is input from SIN0 to SIN3 pins. On
completion of reception, this circuit transfers the receiving data to the serial input data registers 0 to 3
(SIDR0 to SIDR3).
● Transmit shift register
The data that is written to the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) is transferred to the
sending shift register, which outputs it to the SOT pin with shifting bit by bit.
● Serial mode register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3)
Specifies selecting operation modes, enabling/disabling output of serial data to the pin, setting to enable/
disable output of the clock to the pin, setting the arbitrary number of 1 bit to 8 bits to be transferred in the
synchronous communication mode, and setting levels of serial clock output (fixed on "L", fixed on "H")
when not operating.
● Serial control register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3)
Specifies setting the presence or the absence of parity, selection of parity, setting stop bit length, setting
data length, selecting frame data format in the mode 1, clearance of flags, and enabling/disabling of sending
and receiving.
● Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3)
Checking sending and receiving, or the states of errors, and specifies enabling/disabling sending and
receiving interrupt requests.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
489
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.2 UART Block Diagram
MB90330A Series
● Serial input data register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3)
The register retains the receive data. The serial input is converted and then stored in this register.
● Serial output data register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3)
The register sets the transmit data. Data written to this register is serially converted to be output.
● UART prescaler control register 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3)
Specifies start-up/halt of the communication prescaler, forced reset of UART, selecting of clock sources,
and the rate of division of the machine clock.
● UART prescaler reload register 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTCR3)
Specifies the division rate of the machine clock.
490
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.3 UART Pins
MB90330A Series
21.3
UART Pins
The pin of UART is shown.
■ UART Pins
The UART pins also serve as general-purpose ports. Table 21.3-1 shows the functions of pins, input-output
formats, and settings in using UART, etc.
Table 21.3-1 UART Pins
Pin Name
Pin Function
P42/A10/SIN0
P45/A13/SIN1
P90/SIN2
P93/SIN3
Port 4,9 I/O /
serial data
input
P43/A11/SOT0
P46/A14/SOT1
P91/SOT2
P94/SOT3
Port 4,9 I/O /
serial data
output
P44/A12/SCK0
P47/A15/SCK1
P92/SCK2
P95/SCK3
I/O Type
Pull-up
Selection
Stand-by
control
Setting for the use of the pin
Set to the input port
(DDR4: bit2=0)
(DDR4: bit5=0)
(DDR9: bit0=0)
(DDR9: bit3=0)
CMOS output/
CMOS
hysteresis
input
Set to output enable.
(SMR0 to SMR3: SOE=1)
None
Yes
Port 4,9 I/O /
serial clock
input/output
Set to the input port at clock input.
(DDR4: bit4=0)
(DDR4: bit7=0)
(DDR9: bit2=0)
(DDR9: bit5=0)
Set to output enable at clock output.
(SMR0 to SMR3: SCKE=1)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
491
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
21.4
MB90330A Series
Register of UART
The list of the register of UART is shown.
■ List of UART Register
Figure 21.4-1 List of UART Register
Address
bit8 bit7
bit15
bit0
ch.0 : 000021H, 20H
ch.1 : 000027H, 26H
ch.2 : 00002DH, 2CH
ch.3 : 000033H, 32H
SCR0 to SCR3
(Serial control register 0 to 3)
SMR0 to SMR3
(Serial mode register 0 to 3)
ch.0 : 000023H, 22H
ch.1 : 000029H, 28H
ch.2 : 00002FH, 2EH
ch.3 : 000035H, 34H
SSR0 to SSR3
(Serial status register 0 to 3)
SIDR0 to SIDR3 · SODR0 to SODR3
(Serial input · Output data register 0 to 3)
UTCR0 to UTCR3
(UART prescaler control register 0 to 3)
UTRLR0 to UTRLR3
(UART prescaler reload register 0 to 3)
ch.0 : 000025H, 24H
ch.1 : 00002BH, 2AH
ch.2 : 000031H, 30H
ch.3 : 000037H, 36H
Note:
When you set the communication mode, do this while operation is halted. Any data sent or received
while setting modes is not guaranteed.
492
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
21.4.1
Serial Control Register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3)
Serial control registers 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3) are responsible for setting parity,
selecting the stop bit length and data length, selecting the frame data format in mode 1,
clearing receiving error flags, and enabling/disabling send and receive operations.
■ Serial Control Register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3)
Figure 21.4-2 Serial Control Register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3)
Address
bit15 bit14
ch.0 : 000021H
P
ch.1 : 000027H PEN
ch.2 : 00002DH
R/W R/W
ch.3 : 000033H
bit9
bit8
REC
RXE
TXE
W
R/W
R/W
bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
SBL
CL
A/D
R/W
R/W R/W
bit7
bit0
(SMR0 to SMR3)
Bit indicating that sending operation
TXE
0
Sending operation disabled
1
Sending operation enabled
RXE
0
1
Initial value
00000100B
Bit indicating that receiving operation
Receiving operation disabled
Receiving operation enabled
Receiving error clear bit
REC
0
Clear FRE, ORE, PE flag.
1
The conversion is not changed and no others are affected
A/D
0
1
Address/Data selection bit
Data frame
Address frame
CL
0
1
SBL
Data length selection bit
7 bit
8 bit
Stop bit length selection bit
0
1 bit length
1
2 bit length
Parity selection bit
P
Only enable when parity is existent (PN = 1)
0
Even parity
1
Odd parity
Parity enable bit
PEN
R/W : Readable/Writable
W: Write only
: Initial value
CM44-10129-6E
0
1
No Parity
With Parity
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
493
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
Table 21.4-1 Functional Description of Each Bit in Serial Control Register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3)
Bit name
Functions
bit 15
PEN:
Parity enable bit
Specify whether to add (at sending) or detect (at receiving) a parity bit.
Note: In operation mode1 and operation mode 2, parity bit cannot be appended. Always set
this bit to "0".
bit 14
P:
Parity selection
bit
Select either odd or even parity when the use of the parity bit has been selected (SCR0 to
SCR3: PEN = 1).
bit 13
SBL:
Stop bit length
selection bit
Set the length of the stop bits (transmit data’s frame end mark) in operation mode 0 and
operation mode 1 (asynchronous).
Note: During receiving data, only the first bit of the stop bit is detected in all cases.
bit 12
CL:
Data length
selection bit
Specify the data length of data to be transmitted and received.
It is only operation mode 0 to be able to select seven bits. In operation mode 1 and
operation mode 2, be sure to set a data length of 8 bits.
bit 11
A/D:
Address/Data
selection bit
• In operation mode 1, set the data format of frames to be transmitted/received.
• When the bit is set to "0": The frame format is set to data frame.
• When the bit is set to "1": The frame format is set to address data frame.
bit 10
REC:
Receive error flag
clear bit
• Clear the reception error flags (SSR0 to SSR3: FRE, ORE, PE) in the serial status register to
"0".
• When the bit is set to "0": The FRE, ORE, and PE flags are cleared.
• When the bit is set to "1": No effect.
• When read: "1" is always read.
Note: When the receiving interrupt is set to be enabled (SSR0 to SSR3:RIE=1), REC bit
may be set to "0" as long as each of FRE, ORE, PE flag is set to "1".
bit 9
RXE:
Reception
operation enable
bit
• The bit enables or disables the UART for reception.
• When the bit is set to "0": Reception is disabled.
• When the bit is set to "1": Reception is enabled.
Note: During receiving data, if the receiving operation is set to be disabled, the receiving
operation is halted after in-coming data is stored in the serial input data register.
bit 8
TXE:
Transmission
operation enable
bit
• The bit enables or disables the UART for transmission.
• When the bit is set to "0": Transmission is disabled.
• When the bit is set to "1": Transmission is enabled.
Note: If transfer operation is set to be disabled during data transfer, the transfer operation is
stopped on completion of data transfer of the serial output data register.
494
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
21.4.2
Serial Mode Register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3)
The serial mode registers 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3) are responsible for selecting operation
modes, setting pins related to serial data and cock to be enabled or disabled, and
setting how many bit to transfer ranging from 1to 8 bits, setting the serial clock output
level in the inactive operation (fixed to "L" and "H").
■ Serial Mode Register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3)
Figure 21.4-3 Serial Mode Register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3)
Address
ch.0 : 000020H
ch.1 : 000026H
ch.2 : 00002CH
ch.3 : 000032H
bit15
bit8
(SCR0 to SCR3)
bit7
bit6
bit0
Initial value
MD1
MD0 SCKL M2L2 M2L1 M2L0 SCKE SOE
00100000B
R/W
R/W
bit5
R/W
bit4
R/W
bit3
R/W
bit2
R/W
bit1
R/W
R/W
Serial data output enable bit
SOE
0
As general-purpose port
1
As Serial data output pin of UART
Serial clock input/output enable bit
SCKE
0
As general-purpose port or Clock input pin of UART0/1
1
As Clock output pin of UART
M2L2 to M2L0
Synchronous mode transfer number setting bit
"000B"
Transfer number: 8 bit
"001B"
Transfer number: 1 bit
"010B"
Transfer number: 2 bit
"011B"
Transfer number: 3 bit
"100B"
Transfer number: 4 bit
"101B"
Transfer number: 5 bit
"110B"
Transfer number: 6 bit
"111B"
Transfer number: 7 bit
Serial clock output level setting bit
SCKL
0
Serial clock output "L" level when not operating
1
Serial clock output "H" level when not operating
Operation mode selection bit
MD1 MD0
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Initial value
CM44-10129-6E
Operation mode
0
0
0
Asynchronous mode (Normal mode)
0
1
1
Asynchronous mode (multiprocessor mode)
1
0
2
Synchronous mode (Normal mode)
1
1
Setting disabled
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
495
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
Table 21.4-2 Functional Description of Each Bit in Serial Mode Register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3)
Bit name
Functions
bit 7,
bit 6
MD1, MD0:
Operating mode
selection bits
Set Operating mode
Notes:
- In operation mode 1, the device can be used only as the master for master/slave
communication. In operation mode 1, the address/data bit as bit 9 cannot be received, so
the device cannot be used as the slave.
- In operation mode 1, set the parity addition enable bit to no parity (SCR0 to SCR3: PEN =
0) as the parity check function cannot be used.
bit 5
SCKL:
Serial clock
output level set bit
• When communication is performed in the clock synchronous mode, serial clock output level
at non-operating is set.
• When set to "0": Output of serial clock is "L" level.
• When set to "1": Output of serial clock is "H" level.
M2L2, M2L1,
M2L0:
Synchronous
mode transfer
numerical set bits
• Specify the number of bits transferred in the synchronous communication mode.
• It is invalid at the asynchronous communication mode.
• When set to "000B": Specify as 8-bit transmission.
• When set to "001B": Specify as 1-bit transmission.
• When set to "010B": Specify as 2-bit transmission.
• When set to "011B": Specify as 3-bit transmission.
• When set to "100B": Specify as 4-bit transmission.
• When set to "101B": Specify as 5-bit transmission.
• When set to "110B": Specify as 6-bit transmission.
• When set to "111B": Specify as 7-bit transmission.
bit 1
SCKE:
Serial clock
input/output
enable bit
• Switch between input and output of the serial clock.
• When the bit is set to "0":The pin is set as a general-purpose I/O port or serial clock input
pin.
• When the bit is set to "1":The pin is set as a serial clock output pin.
Notes:
- When using the SCK0 to SCK3 pin as the serial clock input (SCK=0), set the pin to the
input port using the port direction register (DDR). Also, use the clock input source select
bit to select the external clock (UTCR0 to UTCR3: CKS=1).
- When using this as serial clock output, set the clock input source selection bit to the
dedicated baud rate generator (UTCR0 to UTCR3: CKS=0).
- When SCK pins (0 to 3) are set to serial clock output, they function as serial clock output
pins, regardless of the settings of the generic input-output port.
bit 0
SOE:
Serial data output
enable bit
• Enable or disable output of serial data.
• When the bit is set to "0": The pin is set as a general-purpose I/O port.
• When the bit is set to "1": The pin is set as a serial data output pin.
• When SOT pins (0 to 3) are set to serial data output, they function as serial clock output
pins, regardless of the settings of the generic input-output port.
bit 4
to
bit 2
496
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
21.4.3
Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3)
The serial status registers 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3) are responsible for checking sending
and receiving and the states of errors, and setting interrupts to be enabled or disabled.
■ Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3)
Figure 21.4-4 Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3)
Address
ch.0 : 000023H
ch.1 : 000029H
ch.2 : 00002FH
ch.3 : 000035H
bit15 bit14
PE
R
bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
bit9
(SIDR0 to SIDR3,
SODR0 to SODR3)
RIE
TIE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
00001000B
Transfer interrupt request enable bit
0
1
Transfer interrupt request output disabled
Transfer interrupt request output enabled
RIE
Receive interrupt request enable bit
0
Receive interrupt request output disabled
Receive interrupt request output enabled
BDS
Transfer direction selection bit
0
LSB first (Transfer form Least significant bit)
1
MSB first (Transfer form Most significant bit)
TDRE
Transfer data empty flag bit
0
With Transfer data (Transfer data writing disabled)
1
No Transfer data (Transfer data writing enabled)
RDRF
Receive data full flag bit
0
No Receive data
1
With Receive data
FRE
0
1
ORE
0
1
PE
0
R/W : Readable/Writable
R : Read only
: Initial value
Initial value
TIE
1
CM44-10129-6E
bit7
ORE FRE RDRF TDRE BDS
R
bit0
bit8
1
Framing error flag bit
No Framing error
With Framing error
Over run error flag bit
No Over run error
With Over run error
Parity error flag bit
No Parity error
With Parity error
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
497
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
Table 21.4-3 Description of Each Bit of the Serial Status Registers 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3) (1 / 2)
Bit name
bit 15
bit 14
bit 13
bit 12
bit 11
bit 10
498
Functions
PE:
Parity error flag
bit
• Detect a parity error of receiving data.
• This bit is set to "1" when a parity error occurs.
• This is cleared by writing "0" in the receiving error clear bit (SCR0 to SCR3: REC).
• When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: RIE=1), a receiving interrupt
request is generated if a parity error occurs
• When the parity error flag bit is set (SSR0 to SSR3: PE = 1), data in serial input data
register is invalid.
ORE:
Overrun error flag
bit
• Detect an overrun error in receiving.
• This bit is set to "1" when an overrun error occurs.
• This is cleared by writing "0" in the receiving error flag clear bit (SCR0 to SCR3: REC).
• When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: RIE=1), a receiving interrupt
request is generated if a overrun error occurs.
• When the overrun error flag bit is set (SSR0 to SSR3: ORE = 1), data in serial input data
register is invalid.
FRE:
Framing error
flag bit
• Detect a framing error of receive data.
• This bit is set to "1" when a framing error occurs.
• This is cleared by writing "0" in the receiving error clear bit (SCR0 to SCR3: REC).
• When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: RIE=1), a receiving interrupt
request is generated if a framing error occurs.
• When the framing error flag bit is set (SSR0 to SSR3: FRE = 1), data in serial input data
register is invalid.
RDRF:
Receive data full
flag bit
• Show the status of the serial input data register.
• When received data is loaded to serial input data register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3), "1" is
set.
• This bit is cleared to "0" when data is read from the serial input data register 0 to 3
(SIDR0 to SIDR3).
• When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: RIE=1), a receiving interrupt
request are generated if receiving data is loaded to the serial input data registers (SIDR0
to SIDR3).
TDRE:
Transmission data
empty flag bit
• Show the status of the serial output data register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3).
• The bit is cleared to "0" by writing sending data to the serial output data registers 0 to 3
(SODR0 to SODR3).
• This bit is set to "1" when data is loaded to the send shift register and transmission starts.
• When sending interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: TIE=1) and if the data that has
written to the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) is transferred to the
sending shift register, then a sending interrupt request is generated.
BDS:
Transfer direction
selection bit
• This bit sets the direction of serial data transfer.
• When set to "0": Serial data is transferred from the LSB bit first (LSB first).
• When set to "1": Serial data is transferred from the MSB bit first (MSB first).
Note:
If BDS bit is rewritten after the completion of the access to the register, the rewritten
data will be invalid, since in reading to the serial input data register and in writing to
the serial output data register, the LSB data and the MSB data are turned upside
down.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
Table 21.4-3 Description of Each Bit of the Serial Status Registers 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3) (2 / 2)
Bit name
Functions
bit 9
RIE:
Reception
interrupt request
enable bit
• Enable or disable receive data.
• When set to "1": If receiving data is loaded to the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SSR0
to SSR3: RDRF=1). Or if an receiving error occurs (SSR0 to SSR3:
PE=1, or ORE=1, or FRE=1), then a receiving interrupt request is
generated.
bit 8
TIE:
Transmission
interrupt request
enable bit
• Enable or disable send interrupt.
• When set to "1": If the data written to the serial output data registers 0 to 3 is sent to the
sending shift register (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE=1), then a sending
interrupt request is generated.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
499
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
21.4.4
MB90330A Series
Serial Input Data Register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) and
Serial Output Data Register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3)
Serial input data and serial output data registers are located in the same address. They
function as a serial input data register in reading, while in writing as a serial output data
register.
■ Serial Input Data Register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3)
Figure 21.4-5 shows the bit configuration of the serial input data register.
Figure 21.4-5 Serial Input Data Register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3)
Address
ch.0 : 000022H
ch.1 : 000028H
ch.2 : 00002EH
ch.3 : 000034H
bit1
bit0
Initial value
D2
D1
D0
XXXXXXXXB
R
R
R
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
R
R
R
R
R
R : Read only
X : Undefined
Serial input data register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) is a data buffer register for receiving serial data.
• The serial data signals sent to the serial input pins (SIDR0 to SIDR3) are converted in the shift register,
and stored in the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3).
• When the data length is 7 bits, the upper one bit (SIDR0 to SIDR3:D7) becomes invalid.
• When the receiving data is stored in the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3), the receiving
data full flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set to "1". When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to
SSR3: RIE=1), receiving interrupt requests are generated.
• Read the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) in the state that the receiving data full flag
bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set to "1". When the receiving data full flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF)
reads the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3), it is automatically cleared to "0".
• If any receiving error occurs (SSR0 to SSR3: PE, ORE, or FRE is "1"), the data of the serial input data
registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) is invalid.
500
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
■ Serial Output Data Register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3)
Figure 21.4-6 shows the bit configuration of serial output data register.
Figure 21.4-6 Serial Output Data Register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3)
Address
bit7
ch.0 : 000022H
ch.1 : 000028H
ch.2 : 00002EH
ch.3 : 000034H
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
W
W
W
W
W
bit1
bit0
Initial value
D2
D1
D0
XXXXXXXXB
W
W
W
bit2
W : Write only
X : Undefined
The serial output data register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) is a data buffer register for transmitting serial
data.
• When sending operation is allowed (SCR0 to SCR3: TXE=1), and if the sending data is written to the
serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3), the sending data is transferred to the sending shift
register to be converted into the serial data and is sent out from the serial data output pins (SOT0 to SOT
3 pins).
• When the data length is seven bits, the data in upper one bit (SODR0 to SODR3:D7) is invalid.
• The sending data empty flag (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is cleared to "0" as soon as sending data is written
into the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3).
• The sending data empty flag (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1" as soon as transmission to the sending
shift register completes.
• If the sending data empty flag (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1", the next sending data can be written
in. When sending interrupts are enabled, a sending interrupt is generated. Write the subsequent sending
data in the state that the sending data empty flag (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is "1".
Note:
Serial output data registers are write-only, while serial input data registers are read-only. Both of the
registers are located in the same address, so the writing values and reading values are different.
Instructions, such as the INC/DEC instruction, which provide the read modify write (RMW) operation,
cannot be used.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
501
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
21.4.5
MB90330A Series
UART Prescaler Control Register 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3)
and UART Prescaler Reload Register 0 to 3
(UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
UART prescaler control registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3) are responsible of setting
start-up/halt of the prescaler, forced reset, and selecting clock sources. The UART
prescaler control registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3) are also responsible of setting the
division rate of the machine clock by combining their lower 3 bits with UART prescaler
reload registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3).
■ UART Prescaler Control Register 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3) and UART Prescaler
Reload Register 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
The UART operation clock is obtained by dividing the machine clock. Is designed to obtain a certain level
of baud rate for a wide variety of machine cycles using this prescaler. Figure 21.4-7 shows the configuration
of UTCR0 to UTCR3.
Figure 21.4-7 UART Prescaler Control Register 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3) and UART Prescaler Reload
Register 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
UART prescaler control register 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3)
bit15 bit14
Address
ch.0 : 000025H
ch.1 : 00002BH
ch.2 : 000031H
ch.3 : 000037H
MD
bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
SRST CKS
R/W
R/W
R/W
bit9
bit8
Initial value
Reserved
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0000-000B
UART prescaler reload register 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
Initial value
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
00000000B
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address
ch.0 : 000024H
ch.1 : 00002AH
ch.2 : 000030H
ch.3 : 000036H
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Undefined
[bit 15] MD: Prescaler permission bit
It is an operation permission bit of the prescaler.
0: Prescaler is stop.
1: Prescaler is in operation.
[bit 14] SRST: UART compulsion reset bit
It is an internal reset bit for UART. Forcibly resets UART to initialize. Once initialized, turns to "0"
automatically.
0:State maintenance
1: Forced reset
502
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.4 Register of UART
MB90330A Series
[bit 13] CKS: clock source selection bit
The clock source is selected.
0: Dedicated baud rate generator
1: External clock
[bit 12] Reserved: reserved bit
It is Reserved bit.
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
[bit 11] Undefined bit
This bit is undefined when it is read. Nothing is affected when it is written.
[bit 10 to bit 0] D10 to D0:Fundamental period set bit
<Asynchronous mode>
Two cycles of the serial clock worth of a cycle is decided.
UART is responsible for dividing the serial clock into 8 pieces, and baud rate is as follows.
BAUD RATES= φ/4n(bps)
φ:Machine clock n:D10 to D0 (fundamental period set bit)
However, please set neither n=1 or 2 nor 3.
<Clock synchronous mode>
BAUD RATES = 2φ/n (bps)
φ : Machine clock n : D10 to D0 (fundamental period set bit)
However, please set n to "00B", in case of n ≥ 16 (D1, D0).
Notes:
•
Setting "01B", "10B", and "11B" to D1 and D0 (bit 1 and 0 of UTRLR0 to UTRLR3) of the basic
cycle set bit generates the serial clock whose duty ratio is different. So set D1 and D0 (bit 1 and 0
of UTRLR0 to UTRLR3) to "00B" when in the clock synchronization mode.
•
Please access UTCR0 to UTCR3 and UTRLR0 to UTRLR3 by word move operation.
•
Halt the operation of the prescaler (MD=0 and CKS=0) before you switch the clock source.
•
When the external selection mode is selected and if you need to modify the reload value, halt the
operation of the prescaler (MD=0 and CKS=0) before you change to your reload value.
•
Please set neither reload value n=1, 2 nor 3.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
503
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
21.5
MB90330A Series
UART Interrupt
The UART support reception and transmission interrupts, capable of generating an
interrupt request in the following conditions:
• Where the receiving data is set to the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to
SIDR3), or an receiving error has occurred.
• When data to transmit is transferred from serial output data register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to
SODR3) to the transmission shift register.
Also, support for each extended intelligent I/O service (EI2OS), μDMAC.
■ UART Interrupt
Table 21.5-1 shows the interrupt control bit and interrupt factor of UART.
Table 21.5-1 Interrupt Control Bit of UART and Interruption Factor
Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3)
Transmission/
Reception
Reception
Transmission
Interrupt
flag bit
Operating mode
0
1
2
RDRF
❍
❍
❍
ORE
❍
❍
❍
FRE
❍
❍
PE
❍
TDRE
❍
Interrupt cause
Interruption
permission
bit
Load receive data to the
buffer (SIDR0 to
SIDR3)
Generating overrun
error
Generating framing
error
• Reading receive data
• Reset
RIE
Generating parity error
❍
❍
Transmission buffer
(SODR0 to SODR3) is
empty.
Clear Interrupt flag
TIE
• Writing "0" to the
reception error flag
clear bit (SSR0 to
SSR3: REC)
• Reset
• Writing transmit data
• Reset
❍: Using bit
: Unused bit
● Reception Interrupt
When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: RIE=1) and if either completion of data reception
(SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF=1), an overrun error (SSR0 to SSR3: ORE=1), a framing error (SSR0 to SSR3:
FRE=1), or a parity error (SSR0 to SSR3: PE=1) occurs, then an receiving interrupt request is generated.
When the receiving data full flag (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) reads the serial input data registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0
to SIDR3: RDRF), it is automatically cleared to "0". Each reception error flag (SSR0 to SSR3: PE, ORE,
FRE) is cleared to "0" when "0" is written to the reception error flag clear bit (SCR0 to SCR3: REC).
In the case that any receiving error (a parity error, an overrun error, a framing error) occurs, handle such
error where necessary, and then write "0" in the receiving error flag clear bit (SCR0 to SCR3: REC) to clear
each of the receiving error flags.
504
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
MB90330A Series
● Transmission Interrupt
When sending data is sent from the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) to the sending
shift register, then the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1". When sending
interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: TIE=1), a sending interrupt request is generated.
■ Interruption of UART, EI2OS, and μDMAC
Table 21.5-2 Interruption of UART, EI2OS, and μDMAC
Interrupt control register
Interrupt cause
Interrupt
number
Vector table address
Register
Name
Address
Low
High
Bank
μDMAC
Channel
number
10
EI2OS
UART3
Reception Interrupt
#35(23H)
ICR12
0000BCH
FFFF70H
FFFF71H
FFFF72H
UART3
Transmission Interrupt
#33(21H)
ICR11
0000BBH
FFFF78H
FFFF79H
FFFF7AH
UART2
Reception Interrupt
#35(23H)
ICR12
0000BCH
FFFF70H
FFFF71H
FFFF72H
UART2
Transmission Interrupt
#33(21H)
ICR11
0000BBH
FFFF78H
FFFF79H
FFFF7AH
UART1
Reception Interrupt
#39(27H)
ICR14
0000BEH
FFFF60H
FFFF61H
FFFF62H
UART1
Transmission Interrupt
#37(25H)
ICR13
0000BDH
FFFF68H
FFFF69H
FFFF6AH
UART0
Reception Interrupt
#39(27H)
ICR14
0000BEH
FFFF60H
FFFF61H
FFFF62H
UART0
Transmission Interrupt
#37(25H)
ICR13
0000BDH
FFFF68H
FFFF69H
FFFF6AH
❍
11
10
❍
11
12
❍
13
12
❍
13
: Available; with a function that stops EI2OS by detecting a UART receive error
❍: Available
■ UART EI2OS Function
UART has the circuit of the EI2OS correspondence. This allows EI2OS to start up separately on the
occasion of each of the send interrupt and the receive interrupt.
● At Transmission/Reception
At the transmission / reception, EI2OS is available regardless of the states of any other peripherals.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
505
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
21.5.1
MB90330A Series
Receive Interrupt Generation and Flag Set Timing
Interrupts during reception are one generated upon completion of reception (SSR0 to
SSR3: RDRF) and one generated upon occurrence of a reception error (SSR0 to SSR3:
PE, ORE, FRE).
■ Receive Interrupt Generation and Flag Set Timing
When data is received, it is stored in serial input data register 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) upon detection of
the stop bit (in operation mode 0 or 1) or of the data’s last bit (SIDR0 to SIDR3: D7) (in operation mode 2).
When a receiving error occurs, an error flag (SSR0 to SSR3: PE, ORE, FRE) is set, a receiving data full
flag (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set. If any of the flags is set to the each operation mode, the serial input data
registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) that have received are invalid.
● Operation mode 0 (Asynchronous normal mode)
The receiving data full flag (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set on detection of the stop bit. When a reception
occurs, the error flag (SSR0 to SSR3: PE, ORE, FRE) is set.
● Operating mode 1 (asynchronous multiprocessor mode)
The receiving data full flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set when the stop bit is detected. When a
reception error occurs, the error flag (SSR0 to SSR3: ORE, FRE) is set. But parity errors (SSR0 to
SSR3:PE) cannot be detected.
● Operation mode 2 (clock synchronizer normal mode)
When the last bit (SIDR0 to SIDR3: D7) of the receiving data is detected, the receiving data full flag bit
(SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set. When a reception error occurs, the error flag (SSR0 to SSR3:ORE) is set.
Neither a parity error (SSR0 to SSR3:PE) nor a framing error (SSR0 to SSR3:FRE) can be detected.
Figure 21.5-1 shows the timing of receiving operation and the set of flags.
506
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
MB90330A Series
Figure 21.5-1 Timing of Receiving Operation and Set of Flags
Receive data
(Operation mode 0)
ST
D0
D1
D5
D6
D7/P
SP
Receive data
(Operation mode 1)
ST
D0
D1
D6
D7
AD
SP
D0
D1
D4
Receive data
(Operation mode 2)
D5
D6
D7
PE, ORE, FRE*
RDEF
Receive Interrupt generation
* : PE flag cannot be use in mode 1.
PE, FRE flag cannot be used in mode 2.
ST : Start bit
SP : Stop bit
AD : Address of mode 1 (multiprocessor mode)/Data selection bit
● Timing of receiving interrupt generation
When receiving interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: RIE=1), any of a receiving data full flag (SSR0 to
SSR3: RDRF), a parity error flag (SSR0 to SSR3: PE), an overrun error flag (SSR0 to SSR3:ORE), and a
framing error flag (SSR0 to SSR3: FRE) is set to "1", then a receiving interrupt request is generated.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
507
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
21.5.2
MB90330A Series
Transmit Interrupt Generation and Flag Set Timing
An interrupt during transmission is generated when serial output data register 0 to 3
(SODR0 to SODR3) becomes empty, or ready to accommodate the next data to transmit.
■ Transmit Interrupt Generation and Flag Set Timing
The sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1" in the state that the sending data that is
written to the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) is transferred to the sending shift
register, the subsequent data goes into the readable state. When the subsequent data is written to the serial
output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3), the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is
cleared to "0".
Figure 21.5-2 shows the timing of sending operation and the set of flags.
Figure 21.5-2 Timing of Sending Operation and the Set of Flags
[Operation mode 0, 1]
Transfer interrupt generation
Transfer interrupt generation
SODR0 to SODR3 write
TDRE
SOT0 to SOT3 output
[Operation mode 2]
ST
D0 D1 D2
D3
Transfer interrupt generation
D4
SP
D5 D6 D7
SP
AD
ST D0 D1 D2
D3
Transfer interrupt generation
SODR0 to SODR3 write
TDRE
SOT0 to SOT3 output
ST:
D0 to D7:
SP:
AD:
508
D0 D1 D2
D3
D4
D5 D6 D7
D0 D1 D2
D3
D4
D5 D6 D7
Start bit
Data bit
Stop bit
Address/Data selection bit
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.5 UART Interrupt
MB90330A Series
● Timing transmission interrupt request generation
When sending interrupts are enabled (SSR0 to SSR3: TIE=1) and if the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0
to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1", a sending interrupt request is generated.
Note:
If the sending operation is set to be disabled (SCR0 to SCR3: TXE=0, in the operation mode 1, also
including receiving operation disabled RXE) in the middle of sending operation, the sending data
empty flag bit is set (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE=1), the shift operation of the sending shift register is
halted and then UART communication operation is disabled. The send data written to the serial
output data register 1 before the transmission stops 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) is sent.
By default TDRE bit is "1". So, as soon as sending interrupts are enabled (TIE=1), the interrupt
indicating completion of transmission is generated. TDRE bit is a read-only bit and has no other way
to clear than by writing new data in the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) to
clear. So be careful when to enable a sending interrupt.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
509
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.6 UART Baud Rate
21.6
MB90330A Series
UART Baud Rate
The sending and receiving clocks of UART has the following alternatives.
• Internal clock (reload counter)
• External clock (reload counter)
• External clock (clock input to SCK pin)
■ UART Baud Rate Selection
You can select one of the following three different baud rates:
● Baud rate resulting from a dedicated baud rate generator of the internal clock.
The baud rate can be selected by setting the 11-bit reload value on settings of the UART prescaler control
registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3), and the UART prescaler reload registers 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to
UTRLR3). The reload counter divides the machine clock by the specified value. It is used in the
synchronous and asynchronous modes.
● Baud rate resulting from a dedicated baud rate generator of the external clock.
The external clock is used as the clock source for the reload counter. The baud rate can be selected by
setting the 11-bit reload value on settings of the UART prescaler control registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to
UTCR3), and the UART prescaler reload registers 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3). The reload counter
divides the external clock frequency by the set value. It is used in the asynchronous modes.
● Baud rate of the external clock (one-to-one mode)
The clock that is entered from the UART clock input pins (SCK0 to SCK3) is used as the baud rate as it is.
It is used in the synchronous mode.
510
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.6 UART Baud Rate
MB90330A Series
21.6.1
Baud Rate of the UART Internal Clock Using the
Dedicated Baud Rate Generator
Indicates baud rates possible to set when selecting a dedicated baud rate generator, as
an UART transfer clock.
■ Baud Rate of the Internal Clock Using the Dedicated Baud Rate Generator
Divides the machine clock by setting the 11-bit reload value at the UART prescaler control registers 0 to 3
(UTCR0 to UTCR3), and the UART prescaler reload registers 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3).
<Asynchronous mode>
BAUD RATES= φ/4n (bps)
φ: Frequency of the machine clock, n: Values of D10 to D0 (UTCR0 to UTCR3, UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
However, please set neither n=1, 2 nor 3.
<Synchronous mode>
BAUD RATES = 2φ/n (bps)
φ : Frequency of the machine clock, n : Values of D10 to D0 (UTCR0 to UTCR3, UTRLR0 to UTRLR3)
However, please set n to "00B", in case of n ≥ 16 (D1, D0).
Note:
Setting "01B", "10B", and "11B" to D1 and D0 (bit1 and bit0 of UTRLR0 to UTRLR3) of the basic cycle
set bit generates the serial clock whose duty ratio is different. So set D1 and D0 (bit1 and bit0 of
UTRLR0 to UTRLR3) to "00B" when in the clock synchronization mode.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
511
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.6 UART Baud Rate
21.6.2
MB90330A Series
Baud Rate of the External Clock Using the Dedicated
Baud Rate Generator
Indicates baud rates possible to set when a dedicated baud rate generator of an
external clock is selected, as UART transfer clock. It is used in the clock asynchronous
modes.
■ Baud Rate of the External Clock Using the Dedicated Baud Rate Generator
Divides the clock by setting the 11-bit reload value at the UART prescaler control registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0
to UTCR3), and the UART prescaler reload registers 0 to 3 (UTRLR0 to UTRLR3).
Provided f for the frequency of the external clock, baud rates are described as follows:
• UTCR0 to UTCR3: If MD is set to "1".
b= f/4n (bps), f
≤ φ × n/4
f: Frequency of the external clock,
b: Baud rate
n: Values of D10 to D0 (UTCR0 to UTCR3, UTRLR0 to UTRLR3),
However, please set neither n=1, 2 nor 3.
The maximum frequency of f is 24 MHz.
512
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.6 UART Baud Rate
MB90330A Series
21.6.3
Baud Rate of the External Clock (One-to-one Mode)
Indicates the formula for the settings and the baud rates for selecting the external
clock, as UART transfer clock.
■ Baud Rate of the External Clock (One-to-one Mode)
Selecting the baud rate of external clock (one-to-one mode) requires the following three settings.
Write "0" in MD bit of UART prescaler control registers 0 to 3 (UTCR0 to UTCR3), and "1" to CKS bit,
and select the baud rate resulting from the external clock (one-to-one mode).
Set SCK pins 0 to 3 to Enter (DDR4: bit4=0, bit7=0, DDR9: bit2=0, bit5=0).
Write "0" in SCKE bit of the serial mode registers 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3) to define the pin as external
clock input pin.
It is used in the synchronous modes.
● Calculation expression for baud rate
When the baud rate resulting from the external clock (one-to-one mode) is selected (UTCR0 to UTCR3:
MD=0, CKS=1), resulted baud rate is as follows (f for the frequency of the external clock).
Synchronous = f' (bps)
f': External clock frequency
However, the maximum of f' is up to 1/8 of the machine clocks.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
513
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
21.7
MB90330A Series
Explanation of Operation of UART
UART supports the master/slave connection based communication function (operation
mode 1) as well as the typical bi-directional serial communication function (operation
mode 0, operation mode 2).
■ Operation of UART
● Operating mode
UART has 3 types of operation modes (i.e. mode 0 to 3), which can be selected based on the appropriate
connection system or data transfer system between CPUs as shown in Table 21.7-1.
Table 21.7-1 UART Operation Modes
Data length
Operating mode
Without
Parity
With
Parity
7 bits or 8 bits
Synchronous
type
Length of Stop
Bit
Asynchronous
0
Normal mode
1
Multiprocessor mode
8+1 *1 bits
-
Asynchronous
1 bit
or
2 bits*2
2
Normal mode
8 bits
-
Synchronous
None
- : Unavailable
*1: "+1" indicates the address/data select bit (AD) used for communication control.
*2: Only one bit can be detected as a stop bit at reception.
Note:
The UART operation mode 1 is used only for the master connection on the master/slave connection.
● Inter-CPU connection method
Two alternatives are provided; one-to-one connection and master/slave connection. In both cases, the data
length, parity, synchronous mode, must be the same for all CPUs. The operation modes are selected as
follows.
One-to-one connection: 2 CPUs should adopt the same method either in the mode 0 or in the mode 2.
Select the mode 0 in the asynchronous method and the mode 2 in the synchronous
method.
Master/slave connection: Set the operation mode 1. When selecting the operation mode 1, use this as
master. For this connection, select no parity and a data length of 8 bits.
514
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
● Synchronous type
Either asynchronous method or (start-stop synchronization) clock synchronous method can be selected.
● Signal type
Data in NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format is only supported.
● Start of transmission/reception
When the bit indicating that sending operation is enabled (SCR0 to SCR3: TXE) is set to "1", sending
operation starts.
Receiving operation starts when the reception enable bit of the serial control register (SCR0 to SCR3:RXE)
is set to "1".
● Stop of transmission/reception
Transmission stops when the transmission enable bit (SCR0 to SCR3:TXE) in the serial control register is
set to "0".
Reception stops when the reception enable bit (SCR0 to SCR3:RXE) in the serial control register is set to
"0".
● Stop during transmission/reception
When receiving operation (SCR0 to SCR3: RXE=0) is disabled in the middle of reception (while data is
being input to the receiving shift register), the receiving operation is halted after the frame that is being
received has completely received and the received data has been stored into the serial input data registers 0
to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3).
When sending operation (SCR0 to SCR3: TXE=0) is disabled in the middle of transmission (while data is
being output from the sending shift register), the sending operation is halted after one frame has been
completely sent.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
515
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
21.7.1
MB90330A Series
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
(Operation Mode 0 or Operation Mode 1)
The UART uses asynchronous transfer when used in operation mode 0 (normal mode)
or operation mode 1 (multiprocessor mode).
■ Operation in Asynchronous Mode
● Format of transmit/receive data
Sending and receiving always start with the start bit ("L" Level), specified data bit length is sent and
received, and end with the stop bit ("H" Level).
For use in operation mode 0, select a data length of seven or eight bits. You can select whether to use the
parity bit.
In operation mode 1, the data length is fixed at 8 bits. There is no parity bit. The address/data bit (SCR0 to
SCR3:AD) is added as bit 9.
Figure 21.7-1 shows the data formats for sending and receiving in the asynchronous mode.
Figure 21.7-1 Data Format for Sending and Receiving (Operation Mode 0 and 1)
[Operation mode 0]
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
SP SP
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
SP
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
No P
Data 8 bit
SP SP
with P
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
SP SP
SP
No P
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
SP
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
P
SP
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
P
SP
Data 7 bit
SP
with P
[Operation mode 1]
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
AD
SP SP
ST
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
AD
SP SP
Data 8 bit
ST : Start bit
SP : Stop bit
P : Parity bit
AD : Address/Data bit
516
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
● Transmission Operation
• Sending data is written in the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) in the state of "1"
being set to the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE).
• When the sending data is written, and the bit of the serial control register indicating that sending
operation is enabled (SCR0 to SCR3: TXE) is set to "1", then sending starts.
• When the sending data is written to the serial output data register, the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0
to SSR3: TDRE) is once cleared to "0".
• When the sending data is transferred from the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) to
the sending shift register, the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1" again.
• When the sending data is transferred from the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) to
the sending shift register, the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1" again.
• When the bit indicating that the sending interrupts (SSR0 to SSR3: TIE) is enabled has already been set to
"1", a sending interrupt request is generated if the sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is
set to "1". In interrupt processing, the following data can be written to the serial output data registers 0 to
3 (SODR0 to SODR3).
● Reception Operation
• Receiving operation are always performed when the receiving operations are set to be enabled (SCR0 to
SCR3: RXE=1).
• When the start bit of the receiving data is detected, one frame of data is received in the serial input data
registers 0 to 3 (SIDR0 to SIDR3) based on the data format that is set in the serial input control register 0
to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3).
• One frame of data reception is completed, the receiving data full flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is set to
"1".
• When reading receiving data, check the state of error flags of the serial status registers 0 to 3 (SSR0 to
SSR3). If receiving is successful, then read the receiving data from the serial input data register. When a
reception error occurs, perform error handling.
• When the receiving data has been read, the receiving data full flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is cleared
to "0".
● Stop Bit
One bit or two bits length can be selected. However, the receive side always detects only the first bit.
● Error detection
In mode 0, parity, overrun, and framing error can be detected.
In the operation mode 1, overrun and framing errors can be detected. But parity errors cannot be detected.
● Parity bit
The addition of a parity bit can be set only in operation mode 0. The parity addition enable bit (SCR0 to
SCR3: PEN) and parity select bit (SCR0 to SCR3:P) can be used to select whether to use parity and to set
the even or odd parity, respectively.
In the operation mode 1 and 2, parity cannot be appended.
Figure 21.7-2 shows the sending and receiving data when parity bits are valid.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
517
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
Figure 21.7-2 Sending and Receiving Data when Parity Bits are Valid
ST
SIN0 to SIN3
SP
When receiving by even parity
Parity error generation
(SCR0 to SCR3 : P=0)
SP
Transfer even parity
(SCR0 to SCR3 : P=0)
SP
Transfer odd parity
(SCR0 to SCR3 : P=1)
1 0 1 1 0 0 0
SOT0 to SOT3
ST
1 0 1 1 0 0 1
SOT0 to SOT3
ST
1 0 1 1 0 0 0
Data
parity
ST : Start bit
SP : Stop bit
(Note) Parity cannot be used in operation mode 1, 2.
518
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
21.7.2
Operation in Synchronous Mode (Operation Mode 2)
The UART uses clock-synchronous transfer when used in operation mode 2 (normal
mode).
■ Operation in Synchronous Mode (Operation Mode 2)
● Format of transmit/receive data
In the synchronous mode, 1 to 8 bits of data is transferred and the stop bit is not appended. Figure 21.7-3
shows the formats of send and receive data in the clock synchronization mode.
Figure 21.7-3 Format of Transmit/Receive Data (Operation Mode 2)
When transfer by output serial clock
Mark level
SCK0 to SCK3 output
SOT0 to SOT3
(LSB)
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
(MSB)
Transfer data
Transfer data write
TXE
When transfer by input serial clock
Mark level
SCK0 to SCK3 output
SIN0 to SIN3
(LSB)
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
(MSB)
Receive data
Receive data write
RXE
● Clock Supply
In the clock synchronous mode, count of clocks equal to the transmit and receive bits count must be
supplied.
When the internal clock (a dedicated baud rate generator) has been selected, the synchronous clock for
receiving data is automatically generated by sending data.
When the external clock has been selected, exactly one byte of clock should be provided externally after
making sure that the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) contains sending data (SSR0 to
SSR3: TDRE=0). Also, both before and after sending, ensure that the level is marked with "H".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
519
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
● Specification of serial clock output level at inoperative
Serial clock output level (SMR: SCL) at the clock synchronous mode and inoperative can be set.
Figure 21.7-4 Setting of Serial Clock Output Level at Inoperative
Transfer data write
Transfer/receive
clock
(SCKL=1)
Mark level
Transfer/receive
clock
(SCKL=0)
RXE, TXE
Transfer data
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
● Error detection
Only overrun errors can be detected. Parity and framing errors cannot be detected.
● Initialization
The setting value of each control register is described when using the synchronous mode.
[Serial mode register 0 to 3 (SMR0 to SMR3)]
MD1, MD0
:"10B"
SCKL
:If the level of the serial clock output in the inactive operating state is "L", set to "1"
:If the level of the serial clock output in the inactive operating state is "L", set to "0".
M2L2 to M2L0 :If 8-bit transmission is specified, set to "000B".
:If 7-bit transmission is specified, set to "111B".
:If 6-bit transmission is specified, set to "110B".
:If 5-bit transmission is specified, set to "101B".
:If 4-bit transmission is specified, set to "100B".
:If 3-bit transmission is specified, set to "011B".
:If 2-bit transmission is specified, set to "010B".
:If 1-bit transmission is specified, set to "001B".
520
SCKE
: "1" for the dedicated baud rate generator, "0" for the clock output and the external
clock (clock input).
SOE
: "1" for transmitting, "0" only in case of reception
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
[Serial control register 0 to 3 (SCR0 to SCR3)]
PEN
: "0"
P, SBL, and AD : These bits do not have the meaning.
CL
: "1"(8-bit data)
REC
: "0" (for initialization, error flags cleared).
RXE and TXE
: At least, it is "1" as for either
[Serial Status Register 0 to 3 (SSR0 to SSR3)]
RIE
: "1" to use interrupts, "0" not to use interrupts.
TIE
: "1" to use interrupts, "0" not to use interrupts.
● Starting communications
When the sending data is written in the serial output data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3),
communication starts. To start communication, temporal sending data must be written to the serial output
data registers 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) even when only receiving operation is necessary.
● Terminating communications
As soon as one frame of data is sent and received, the receiving data full flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: RDRF) is
set to "1". Having received the data, check the overrun error flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: ORE) to ensure that
the communication was successfully done.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
521
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
21.7.3
MB90330A Series
Bi-directional Communication Function (Normal Mode)
In the mode 0 and 2, typical serial bi-directional communication on the one-to-one
connection is available. The communication clock mode becomes asynchronous for the
operation mode 0, synchronous for the operation mode 2.
■ Bi-directional Communication Function
To operate UART in the normal mode (operation mode 0, operation mode 2), the settings described in
Figure 21.7-5 must be executed.
Figure 21.7-5 Setting of Operation Mode 0 in UART
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
SCR3 to SCR0,
SMR3 to SMR0
PEN
Mode 0
Mode 2
SSR3 to SSR0,
SIDR3 to SIDR0/
SODR3 to SODR0
Mode 0
Mode 2
P
SBL
CL
A/D
bit9
bit8
REC RXE
TXE
0
0
0
1
PE
ORE FRE RDRF TDRE BDS
: Used bit
: Unused bit
1 : Set to "1"
0 : Set to "0"
: Set to "0" when using input of pin
bit7
TIE
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
0
0
0
1
RIE
bit6
MD1 MD0 SCKL M2L2 M2L1 M2L0 SCKE SOE
Setting transfer data (at writing)/
Holding receive data (at reading)
DDR4
D47 D46 D45 D44 D43 D42 D41 D40
DDR9
D96 D95 D94 D93 D92 D91 D90
● Inter-CPU connection
As shown in Figure 21.7-6, connect 2 CPUs each other.
Figure 21.7-6 Example of Bi-directional Communication Connect for UART
SOT
SIN
SCK
CPU-1
522
SOT
Output
Input
SIN
SCK
CPU-2
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
● Communication procedure
Communications start at any timing from the transmitting side when transmit data is provided. On the
transmission side, load transmit data into the serial output data register 0 to 3 (SODR0 to SODR3) and set
the transmission enable bit (SCR0 to SCR3:TXE) in the serial control register to "1" to start transmission.
Figure 21.7-7 shows the example of transferring the receiving data to the sender to indicate that the data
was successfully sent. Upon the receipt of the sending data, the receiver periodically returns ANS (1 byte in
this example).
Figure 21.7-7 Flowchart for Bi-directional Communication
(Sender)
(Receiver)
START
START
Operation mode setting
(either of 0 or 2)
Operaiton mode setting
(tune to transfer side)
Set 1 byte data to SODR
and communicate.
Data transfer
NO
Reception data is
existence.
YES
NO
Reception data is
existence.
Reception data read
and process
YES
Receive data reading
and processing
CM44-10129-6E
Data transfer
1 byte data transfer
(ANS)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
523
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
21.7.4
MB90330A Series
Master/Slave Mode Communication Function
(Multi-processor Mode)
Operation mode 1 allows communication between multiple CPUs connected in a
master/slave configuration. However, this is available only as master.
■ Master/Slave Mode Communication Function
To operate UART in the multi-processor mode (operation mode 1), the settings described in Figure 21.7-8
must be executed.
Figure 21.7-8 UART Operation Mode 1 Setting
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
SCR0 to SCR3,
SMR0 to SMR3
SSR0 to SSR3,
SIDR0 to SIDR3/
SODR0 to SODR3
PEN
P
SBL
CL
A/D
bit9
bit8
REC RXE
TXE
0
1
0
PE
ORE FRE RDRF TDRE BDS
: Used bit
: Unused bit
1 : Set to "1"
0 : Set to "0"
: Set to "0" when using input of pin
bit7
0
RIE
TIE
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
MD1 MD0 SCKL M2L2 M2L1 M2L0 SCKE SOE
1
Setting transfer data (at writing)/
Holding receive data (at reading)
DDR4
D47 D46 D45 D44 D43 D42 D41 D40
DDR9
D96 D95 D94 D93 D92 D91 D90
● Inter-CPU connection
One master CPU and two or more slave CPUs are connected to a pair of common communication lines to
make up the master/slave communication system as shown in Figure 21.7-9. The UART1 can be used only
as the master CPU.
Figure 21.7-9 Connection Example for UART Master-slave Communications
SOT0 to
SOT3
SIN0 to
SIN3
Master CPU
SOT
SIN
Slave CPU #0
524
SOT
SIN
Slave CPU #1
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
● Function Selection
When it comes to master/slave communication, select the operation mode and data transfer direction, as
shown in Table 21.7-2. Since the parity check function cannot be used in operation mode 1, set the parity
enable bit (SCR0 to SCR3:PEN) to "0".
Table 21.7-2 Select of Master/Slave Communication Function
Operating mode
Master
CPU
Slave
CPU
Data
Parity
Synchronous type
Stop bit
Not provided
Asynchronous
1 bit
or
2 bits
AD= 1
+
8 bits
Address
Address
Trans-mission/
Reception
Mode 1
AD= 0
+
8 bits
Data
Data
Trans-mission/
Reception
● Communication procedure
The communication starts when the master CPU transmits the address data. The address data, having an AD
bit as 1, locates the slave CPU as the destination. Each slave CPU identifies the address data based on the
program, and if there is a match with the address that is already assigned, the slave CPU communicates
(typical data) with the master CPU.
Figure 21.7-10 shows the flowchart of the master/slave communication (multiprocessor mode).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
525
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.7 Explanation of Operation of UART
MB90330A Series
Figure 21.7-10 Flowchart for Master/Slave Communications
(Master CPU)
START
Setting operating
mode to "1"
Set SIN pin to
Serial data input
Set 1 byte data (address
data) selecting the slave
CPU to D0 to D7
and transfer
(AD=1)
Set AD to "0"
Receive operation enabled
Slave CPU and
communication
Communication end?
NO
YES
Other slave CPU
and communication
NO
YES
Receive operation disabled
END
526
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.8 Notes on Using UART
MB90330A Series
21.8
Notes on Using UART
Use of the UART requires the following cautions.
■ Notes on Using UART
● Enabling sending and receiving
• The bits indicating that sending operation is enabled (SCR0 to SCR3: TXE) and that receiving operation
is enabled (SCR0 to SCR3: RXE) is provided for sending and receiving respectively.
• In the initial state after a reset, transmission and reception are both disabled (SCR0 to
SCR3:TXE=0,RXE=0). Transmission and reception must therefore be enabled in advance.
• The device can stop transmission and reception by disabling them (SCR0 to SCR3:TXE=0,RXE=0).
● Setting operation mode
Set the operation mode after disabling transmission and reception (SCR0 to SCR3:TXE=0,RXE=0). When
the operation mode is changed during transmission or reception, the transmitted/received data is not
guaranteed.
● About clock synchronous mode
Operation mode 2 is set as a clock synchronizer method. Transmit/receive data is associated with no start
and stop bits.
● Transmission interrupt enable timing
The sending data empty flag bit (SSR0 to SSR3: TDRE) is set to "1" (no sending data, enabled to write
sending data) by default after resetting. So, as soon as a sending interrupt is enabled (SSR0 to SSR3:
TIE=1), the sending interrupt request is generated. Be sure to prepare data to transmit before enabling
transmission (SSR0 to SSR3:TIE=1).
● Receiving Multiprocessor mode
In the multiprocessor mode, receiving operation based on 9-bit receipt is not allowed.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
527
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.9 Example of UART Programming
21.9
MB90330A Series
Example of UART Programming
This section provides program example for UART.
■ Example of UART Programming
● Processing specification
Perform serial transmission/reception using the bi-directional communication function (normal mode) of
the UART.
Defined as: Operation mode 0, asynchronous, 8 bits of data length, 2 bits of stop bit length, without parity.
Use the P42/A10/SIN0, P43/A11/SOT0 pins for communication.
The baud rate is set to about 9600 bps using the dedicated baud rate generator.
Send character "13H" from the SOT0 pin to receive using an interrupt.
Set the machine clock (φ) to 16 MHz.
● Coding example
ICR14
EQU
0000BEH
; UART send/receive interrupt control register.
DDR4
EQU
000014H
; Port 4 direction register
SMR0
EQU
000020H
; Serial mode register 0
SCR0
EQU
000021H
; Serial control register 0
SIDR0
EQU
000022H
; Serial input data register 0
SODR0
EQU
000022H
; Serial output data register 0
SSR0
EQU
000023H
; Serial Status Register 0
UTCR0
EQU
000025H
; UART prescaler control register 0
UTRLR0
EQU
000024H
; UART prescaler reload register 0
REC
EQU
SCR:2
; Receive error flag clear bit
;----------Main Program-----------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
ABS = 0FFH
START:
;
:
; Initialize such as a stack pointer (SP).
; Defined as done.
AND
CCR,#0BFH
; Disables the interrupt.
MOV
I:ICR14, #00H
; Interrupt levels 0 (strength)
MOV
I:DDR4, #00000000B
; Sets the SIN0 pin for input.
MOV
I:SMR0, #00000001B
; operation mode 0 (asynchronous)
; Disables the clock output and enables the data
; output.
MOVW I:UTRL0, #81A0H
; uses Dedicated baud rate generator
; (9615bps Selection)
528
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.9 Example of UART Programming
MB90330A Series
MOV
I:SCR0, #00010011B
; Parity none and stop bit 2 bits
; Data length 8 bits and reception clear error flag
; Enables the transmission/reception operation
LOOP:
MOV
I:SSR0, #00000010B
; sending interrupt disabled, receiving interrupt
; enabled
MOV
I:SODR0, #13H
; Transmission data writing
MOV
ILM, #07H
; Sets ILM in PS to level 7
OR
CCR, #40H
; Interruption permission
MOV
A,#00H
; infinite loop
MOV
A,#01H
BRA
LOOP
;----------Interrupt Program-----------------------------------------------------------WARI:
MOV
A, SIDR0
; Reading receive data
CLRB
I:REC
; The reception interrupt request flag is clear.
;
:
;
User processing
;
:
RETI
CODE
; Returns from interrupt.
ENDS
;----------Vector Settings-----------------------------------------------------------------VECT
CM44-10129-6E
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
0FF60H
DSL
WARI
ORG
0FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
VECT
ENDS
; The vector is set in interruption #39(27H).
; Reset vector setting
; Set to Single-chip mode
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
529
CHAPTER 21 UART
21.9 Example of UART Programming
530
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22
I2C INTERFACE
This chapter gives an overview of I2C interface, the
configuration and functions of registers, and operations
of I2C interface.
22.1 I2C Interface Outline
22.2 I2C Interface Register
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
531
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.1 I2C Interface Outline
22.1
MB90330A Series
I2C Interface Outline
I2C interface is Serial I/O by which Inter IC BUS is supported. Operates as the master/
slave devices on I2C bus.
■ I2C Interface Function
The I2C interface has the following functions:
• Master/slave sending and receiving
• Arbitration function
• Clock synchronous function
• Slave address/General call address detection function
• Forwarding direction detection function
• Repetitive generation and detection function of the start condition
• Bus error detection function
532
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.1 I2C Interface Outline
MB90330A Series
■ Block Diagram of I2C Interface
Figure 22.1-1 shows the block diagram of I2C interface.
Figure 22.1-1 Block Diagram of I2C Interface
ICCR
I2C enable
EN
Peripheral clock
Clock divider 1
5
ICCR
CS4
6
7
8
Clock selection 1
CS3
Clock divider 2
CS2
2 4 8 16 32 64 128
CS1
CS0
256
Synch
Shift clock generation
Clock selection 2
Shift clock
edge change
timing
IBSR
Bus busy
BB
Repeat start
RSC
Last Bit
LRB
Stop
Condition detection
Send/
receive
TRX
F2MC-16LX Bus
Start
Error
First Byte
FBT
Arbitration lost detection
AL
IBCR
SCL0 to SCL2
BER
BEIE
Interrupt request
IRQ #17,19,21
SDA0 to SDA2
INTE
INT
IBCR
SCC
MSS
ACK
End
Start
Master
Start
ACK enable
Stop
Condition generation
GC-ACK enable
GCAA
IDAR
IBSR
Slave
AAS
GCA
Global call
Slave address
compare
IADR
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
533
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
22.2
MB90330A Series
I2C Interface Register
The configuration and functions of registers used in the I2C interface are described.
■ Register List of I2C Interface
Figure 22.2-1 Register List of I2C Interface
ch.0:000070H
ch.1:000076H
ch.2:00007CH
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IBSR0 to IBSR2
I2C Bus status register
0
BB RSC
AL LRB TRX AAS GCA FBT
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
IBCR0 to IBCR2
I2C Bus status register
Initial value 00000000B
Read/Write
bit 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
ch.0:000071H
GCAA
INTE
INT
BER
BEIE
SCC
MSS
ACK
ch.1:000077H
ch.2:00007DH R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
ch.0:000072H
ch.1:000078H
ch.2:00007EH
7
bit
6
ICCR0 to ICCR2
I2C Clock control register
EN CS4 CS3 CS2 CS1 CS0 Initial value --0XXXXXB
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Read/Write
5
4
3
2
1
0
IADR0 to IADR2
I2C Bus address register
Initial value -XXXXXXXB
Read/Write
bit 15 14 13
12 11 10
9
8
ch.0:000073H
A6 A5
A4
A3
A2 A1
A0
ch.1:000079H
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
ch.2:00007FH
ch.0:000074H
ch.1:00007AH
ch.2:000080H
bit
Initial value 00000000B
Read/Write
IDAR0 to IDAR2
I2C Bus data register
D7 D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0 Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Read/Write
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W : Readable/Writable
R:
Read only
534
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
22.2.1
I2C Bus Status Register 0 to 2 (IBSR0 to IBSR2)
The configuration and functions of I2C bus status register 0 to 2 (IBSR0 to IBSR2) are
described.
■ I2C Bus Status Register 0 to 2 (IBSR0 to IBSR2)
Figure 22.2-2 shows the bit configuration of I2C bus status registers 0 to 2 (IBSR0 to IBSR2).
Figure 22.2-2 Bit Configuration of I2C Bus Status Register 0 to 2(IBSR0 to IBSR2)
ch.0:000070H bit
ch.1:000076H
ch.2:00007CH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BB RSC
AL LRB TRX AAS GCA FBT
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
IBSR0 to IBSR2
I2C Bus status register
Initial value
00000000B
R : Read only
The function of each bit of the I2C bus status registers 0 to 2 (IBSR0 to IBSR2) is described as follows:
[bit 7] BB: Bus Busy
It is a bit shown the state of the I2C bus.
0
Stop condition is detected.
1
Start condition is detected. (The bus is used.)
[bit 6] RSC: Repeated Start Condition
It is a start condition detection repeatedly bit.
0
The start condition is not repeatedly detected.
1
The start condition was detected in the bus Occupied again.
Is cleared either by writing "0" in INT bit, with no addressing on the slave connection, or by detecting the
start condition during the halted bus, or by detecting the stop condition.
[bit 5] AL: Arbitration Lost
It is an arbitration lost detection bit.
0
The arbitration lost is not detected.
1
When arbitration lost has occurred on master transmission, or when other
systems are using the bus, "1" was written in MSS bit.
It is cleared by writing "0" in INT bit.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
535
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
[bit 4] LRB: Last Received bit
It is the acknowledgement storage bit. Stores the acknowledge from the receiver.
0
Reception is acknowledged.
1
Reception is not acknowledged.
It is cleared by detecting the start condition or the stop condition.
[bit 3] TRX: Transfer/Receive
It is the bit indicating sending and receiving of data transfer.
0
Receiving state
1
Transmission state
[bit 2] AAS: Addressed As Slave
It is Addressing detection bit.
0
Addressing is not done at the slave.
1
Addressing was done at the slave.
It is cleared by detecting of the start condition or stop condition.
[bit 1] GCA: General Call Address
It is General call address (00H) detection bit.
0
The General call address is not received at the slave.
1
The General call address was received at the slave.
It is cleared by detecting of the start condition or stop condition.
[bit 0] FBT: First Byte Transfer
It is a first byte detection bit.
0
Received data is things except the first byte.
1
Received data is a first byte (address data).
It is cleared either if "0" is written in INT bit or if no addressing is provided on the slave connection, even
though detection of the start condition has set "1".
536
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
22.2.2
I2C Bus Control Register 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2)
The configuration and functions of I2C bus control register 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2) are
described.
■ I2C Bus Control Register 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2)
Figure 22.2-3 shows the bit configuration of bus control register 0 to 2(IBCR0 to IBCR2).
Figure 22.2-3 Bit Configuration of I2C Bus Control Register 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2)
bit 15
ch.0:000071H
ch.1:000077H
ch.2:00007DH
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BER BEIE SCC MSS ACK GCAA INTE INT
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
IBCR0 to IBCR2
I2C Bus status register
Initial value 00000000B
Read/Write
R/W : Readable/Writable
The function of each bit of the bus control registers 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2) is described as follows:
[bit 15] BER: Bus ERror
It is Bus error Interrupt request flag. Functions in writing phase differ from those as follows.
(at writing)
0
Clear bus error interrupt request flag.
1
No effect on operation
(at reading)
0
The bus error is not detected.
1
Illegal start and stop condition was detected during data transfer.
If BER bit is set, EN bit of ICCR register is cleared, the I2C interface goes into a halted state, and data
transfer is terminated.
[bit 14] BEIE: Bus Error Interrupt Enable
It is bus error Interrupt enable bit.
0
Bus error interrupt disabled
1
Bus error interrupt enabled
The interruption is generated if the BER bit is "1" when this bit is "1".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
537
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
[bit 13] SCC: Start Condition Continue
It is a start condition generation bit.
(at writing)
0
No effect on operation
1
A start condition is regenerated on master transmission.
This bit is always "0" at the beginning of reading.
[bit 12] MSS: Master Slave Select
It is Master/slave selection bit.
0
Generates the stop condition, and goes into the slave mode after the
completion of transmission.
1
Goes into the master mode, generates the start condition, and starts
transferring.
If the arbitration lost has occurred during the master sending, it will be cleared and will switch to the slave
mode.
Note:
The transmission of the general call address is prohibited, because the receiving as the slave cannot
be operation on the following condition.
•
When (1) other LSI that is a master mode without this LSI exists on the bus, and (2) this LSI
transmits the general call address as master, and (3) the arbitration lost is generated since the
second byte.
[bit 11] ACK: ACKnowledge
It is the acknowledge generation enable bit when the data is received.
0
Acknowledgement is disabled to be generated.
1
Acknowledgement is enabled to be generated.
Is invalid during receiving address data in the slave.
[bit 10] GCAA: General Call Address Acknowledge
It is an acknowledge generating enable bit, when you receive the General call address.
0
Acknowledgement is disabled to be generated
1
Acknowledgement is enabled to be generated.
[bit 9] INTE: INTerrupt Enable
It is Interrupt enable bits.
0
Disables the interrupt.
1
Enables the interrupt.
The interruption is generated if the INT bit is "1" when this bit is "1".
538
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
[bit 8] INT: INTerrupt
It is transfer stop interrupt request flag bit.
(at writing)
0
Clear Transfer stop interrupt request flag.
1
No effect on operation
(at reading)
0
Transfer has not been finished yet.
1
This is set when 1 byte of data including the ACK bit has already been transferred and if
the following condition is applied.
• It is a bus master.
• It is a slave that the address is done.
• The General call address was received.
• The arbitration lost happened.
• Other systems tried to generate a start condition while the bus was in use.
The SCL line is kept at "L" level at "1". Is cleared by writing "0", releases SCL line, and sends the
subsequent bite. And is reset to "0" by occurrence of the start condition or the stop condition on the master
connection.
Notes:
When an instruction which generates a start condition is executed (the MSS bit is set to "1") at the
timing shown in Figure 22.2-4 and Figure 22.2-5, arbitration lost detection (AL bit=1) prevents an
interrupt (INT bit=1) from being generated.
• Condition 1 in which an interrupt (INT bit=1) upon detection of "AL bit=1" does not occur.
When an instruction which generates a start condition is executed (setting the MSS bit in the IBCR register to
"1") with no start condition detected (BB bit=0) and with the SDA or SCL pin at the "L" level.
Figure 22.2-4 Diagram of Timing at which an Interrupt upon Detection of "AL bit=1" does not Occur
SCL or SDA pin at "L" level
SCL pin
"L"
SDA pin
"L"
1
I2C operation enable state (EN bit=1)
Master mode setting (MSS bit=1)
Arbitration lost detection (AL bit=1)
CM44-10129-6E
Bus busy (BB bit)
0
Interrupt (INT bit)
0
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
539
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
• Condition 2 in which an interrupt (INT bit=1) upon detection of "AL bit=1" does not occur
When an instruction which generates a start condition by enabling I2C operation (EN bit=1) is executed
(setting the MSS bit in the IBCR register to "1") with the I2C bus occupied by another master.
This is because, as shown in Figure 22.2-5, when the other master on the I2C bus starts communication with
I2C disabled (EN bit=0), the I2C bus enters the occupied state with no start condition detected (BB bit =0).
Figure 22.2-5 Diagram of Timing at which an Interrupt upon Detection of "AL bit=1" does not Occur
Start Condition
The INT bit interrupt does not occur
in the ninth clock cycle.
Stop Condition
SCL pin
SDA pin
SLAVE ADDRESS
ACK
DATA
ACK
EN bit
MSS bit
AL bit
BB bit
0
INT bit
0
If a symptom as described above can occur, follow the procedure below for software processing.
1. Execute the instruction that generates a start condition (set the MMS bit to "1").
2. Use, for example, the timer function to wait for the time* for three-bit data transmission at the I2C transfer
frequency set in the ICCR register.
Example: Time for three-bit data transmission at an I2C transfer frequency of 100 kHz
{1/(100×103)}×3=30 μs
3. Check the AL and BB bits in the IBSR register and, if the AL and BB bits are "1" and "0", respectively, set
the EN bit in the ICCR register to "0" to initialize I2C. When the AL and BB bits are not so, perform normal
processing.
A sample flow is given below.
Master mode setting
Set the MSS bit in the bus control register (IBCR) to 1.
Wait* for the time for three-bit data transmission at the I2C
transfer frequency set in the clock control register (ICCR).
BB bit=0 and AL bit=1?
YES
NO
to normal process
Set the EN bit to 0 to initialize I2C
540
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
*: When "arbitration lost" is detected, the MSS bit is set to "1" and then the AL bit is set to "1" without failure
after the time for three-bit data transmission at the I2C transfer frequency.
• Example of occurrence of an interrupt (INT bit=1) upon detection of "AL bit=1"
When an instruction which generates a start condition is executed (setting the MSS bit to "1") with "bus busy"
detected (BB bit=1) and arbitration is lost, the INT bit interrupt occurs upon detection of "AL bit=1".
Figure 22.2-6 Diagram of Timing at which an Interrupt upon Detection of "AL bit=1" Occurs
Start Condition
Interrupt in the ninth clock cycle
SCL pin
SDA pin
SLAVE ADDRESS
ACK
DATA
EN bit
MSS bit
Clearing the AL bit by software
AL bit
BB bit
Releasing the SCL by clearing
the INT bit by software
INT bit
■ Notes on Use of I2C Bus Control Register 0 to 2 (IBCR0 to IBCR2)
The following care should be taken to conflicts among SCC bit, MSS bit, and INT bit.
Writing to SCC bit, MSS bit, INT bit simultaneously causes conflicts of transferring the next bite, occurrence
of the start condition, and occurrence of the stop condition. The priority in this case is as follows.
● The following byte forwarding and stop condition generation
If "0" is written in INT bit and "0" in MSS bit, writing "0" in MSS bit is preferred and the stop condition
occurs.
● The following byte forwarding and start condition generation
If "0" is written in INT bit and "1" in SCC bit, writing "1" in SCC bit is preferred and the start condition
occurs.
● Start condition generation and stop condition generation
Simultaneous writing is disabled that not only "1" is written in SCC bit but also "0" is written in MSS bit.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
541
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
22.2.3
MB90330A Series
I2C Bus Clock Control Register 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to ICCR2)
The configuration and functions of I2C bus clock control register 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to
ICCR2) are described.
■ I2C Bus Clock Control Register 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to ICCR2)
Figure 22.2-7 shows the bit configuration of I2C bus clock control registers 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to ICCR2).
Figure 22.2-7 Bit Configuration of I2C Bus Clock Control Register 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to ICCR2)
ch.0:000072H
ch.1:000078H
ch.2:00007EH
bit
7
6
5
EN
4
3
2
1
0
ICCR0 to ICCR2
CS4 CS3 CS2 CS1 CS0
I2C Clock control register
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value XX0XXXXXB
R/W : Readable/Writable
The functions of I2C bus clock control registers 0 to 2 (ICCR0 to ICCR2) are described below.
[bit 7, bit 6] undefinition bit
The read value is irregular. Nothing is affected when it is written.
[bit 5] EN: ENable
It is an operation permission bit in the I2C interface.
0
Operation disabled
1
Operation enabled
• When "0", each bit of IBSR register and IBCR register (except BER and BEIE bits) is cleared.
• Is cleared when BER bit is set.
Notes:
• If the I2C interface operation is inhibited, transmit/receive operation is immediately stopped.
• If you wish to inhibit the I2C interface operation after generating the stop condition by writing "0" to
the MSS bit, confirm the stop condition is generated (BB=0 for IBSR) before inhibiting the
operation (EN=0 for ICCR).
542
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
[bit 4 to bit 0] CS4 to CS0:Clock Period Select 4-0
It is the bit which sets the serial clock frequency. The frequency fsck in the shift clock is set as shown in
the next formula.
fsck
φ
m n 4
φ : Machine clock
Note:
The cycle + 4 is minimum overhead for checking that the output level of SCL pin has changed. If
delay is longer on the rising edge of SCL pin, or a slave device delays a clock, it exceeds this value.
Note that the frequency of the serial clock must be set to 100 kHz or less.
m and n for CS4 to CS0 is as shown in Table 22.2-1.
Table 22.2-1 Setting of Serial Clock Frequency
CM44-10129-6E
m
CS4
CS3
n
CS2
CS1
CS0
5
0
0
4
0
0
0
6
0
1
8
0
0
1
7
1
0
16
0
1
0
8
1
1
32
0
1
1
64
1
0
0
128
1
0
1
256
1
1
0
512
1
1
1
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
543
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
22.2.4
MB90330A Series
I2C Bus Address Register 0 to 2 (IADR0 to IADR2)
The configuration and functions of I2C bus address register 0 to 2 (IADR0 to IADR2) are
described.
■ I2C Bus Address Register 0 to 2 (IADR0 to IADR2)
Figure 22.2-8 shows the bit configuration of the I2C bus address registers 0 to 2 (IADR0 to IADR2).
Figure 22.2-8 I2C Bus address Register 0 to 2 (IADR0 to IADR2)
ch.0:000073H bit
ch.1:000079H
ch.2:00007FH
15
14
A6
R/W
13
A5
12
A4
R/W R/W
11
10
9
8
A3
A2
A1
A0
R/W R/W
IADR0 to IADR2
I2C Bus address register
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R/W R/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
[bit 14 to bit 8] A6 to A0
It is a slave address bit. It is a register which specifies the slave address. In the slave, the address data is
compared to the IDAR register upon reception of the address, and if they match, then it will send the
acknowledge to the master.
544
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.2 I2C Interface Register
MB90330A Series
22.2.5
I2C Bus Data Register 0 to 2 (IDAR0 to IDAR2)
The configuration and functions of I2C bus data register 0 to 2 (IDAR0 to IDAR2) are
described.
■ I2C Bus Data Register 0 to 2 (IDAR0 to IDAR2)
Figure 22.2-9 shows the bit configuration of the I2C bus data registers 0 to 2 (IDAR0 to IDAR2).
Figure 22.2-9 Bit Configuration of I2C Bus Data Register 0 to 2 (IDAR0 to IDAR2)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ch.0:000074H bit 7
D7 D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
ch.1:00007AH
ch.2:000080H
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
IDAR0 to IDAR2
I2C Bus data register
Initial value XXXXXXXXB
R/W : Readable/Writable
[bit 7 to bit 0] D7 to D0
It is a data bit.
It is the data register used for the serial transfer, and transferred from MSB. During the data receiving
(TRX= 0), the data output value becomes "1".
The writing side of IDAR register is double buffering. If the bus is in use (BB=1), the data to be written
to is loaded to the register for serial transferring when each byte is transferred. In reading the register
for serial transferring is directly read, so the receiving data is valid only when INT bit is set.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
545
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
22.3
MB90330A Series
I2C Interface Operation
For I2C bus, 1 serial data line (SDA), 1 serial clock line (SCL), and 2 bi-directional bus
lines are responsible for communication. I2C interface, which has 2 open drain inputoutput pins (SDA and SCL) to them, allows wired logic.
■ Start Condition
If "1" is written to MSS bit in the state of the bus being released (BB=0 and MSS=0), I2C interface
generates the start condition as soon as it changes to the master mode. In the master mode the start
condition can be regenerated by writing "1" to SCC bit even though the bus is in use (BB=1). To generate
start conditions, 2 methods are provided as follows.
• Writing "1" to MSS bit in the state that the bus is not in use (MSS=0 * BB=0 * INT=0 * AL=0).
• Writing "1" to SEC bit in the state of interrupting in bus master (MSS=1 * BB=1 * INT=1 * AL=0).
When the bus (in the idle state) is used by other systems and if "1" is written to MSS bit, then AL bit is set
to "1". Writing to MSS bit and SCC bit in any other state than being mentioned above is ignored.
■ Stop Condition
When "0" is written to MSS bit in the state of the master mode (MSS=1), the stop condition is generated,
resulting in the slave mode. The condition to generate the stop condition is as follows.
Writing "0" to MSS bit in the state of interrupting in bus master (MSS=1 * BB=1 * INT=1 * AL=0).
Writing "0" excluding this in the MSS bit is disregarded.
■ Addressing
In the master mode, BB= 1 and TRX= 1 will be set after the start condition generation, and it outputs the
IDAR register contents from the MSB. After sending the address data, receives the acknowledgement from
the slave, reverses bit 0 (bit 0 of IDAR register that is already sent) of the sending data, and then stores it
into TRX bit.
In the slave mode, BB is set to "1" and TRX is set to "0" after the start condition is generated, and the
sending data from the master is received in IDAR register. After the address data is received, IDAR register
is compared with IADR register. If they matches, AAS is set to "1" and the acknowledgement is sent to the
master. Then, bit 0 of the receiving data (bit 0 of IDAR register that is already received) is stored in TRX
bit.
■ Arbitration
If other master are sending the data simultaneously in the master sending mode, the arbitration will occur.
When the sending data of its own is "1", and the data on SDA line is "L" level, it is considered that its
arbitration is lost and AL is set to "1". When an attempt is made that the start condition is generated in the
state the bus is in use as mentioned above, Al is also set to "1".When AL is set to "1", MSS is "0" and TRX
is "0", resulting in the slave receiving mode.
546
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
MB90330A Series
■ Acknowledge
The receiver send the acknowledge to the sender. During data reception, ACK bit can specify
acknowledgement is necessary or not. During the data sending, the acknowledge from the receiver is stored
in the LRB bit.
If the sender as slave does not receive any acknowledgement from the receiver as master, TRX becomes
"0", resulting in the slave receiving mode. This allows the master to generate the stop condition when the
slave releases the SCL line.
■ Bus Error
If the following conditions exist, it will be considered as bus error, and the I2C interface will be in the
stopped state.
• Detecting of violation of the basic rules on I2C bus during data transfer (including ACK bit)
• Stop condition detection at master
• Detecting of violation of the basic rules on I2C bus in bus idle.
■ The Others
● Processing after arbitration lost is detected
After arbitration lost occurs, must decide if it is addressed or not by software.
Once arbitration lost occurs, it becomes slave from the viewpoint of hardware. After one byte of data
transfer both CLK line and DATA line are pulled to "L". For this reason, if addressing is done, CLK line
and DATA line should be released after slave transmission or slave reception is ready. if no addressing is
done, then CLK line and DATA line should be immediately released. (Software is responsible for this all.)
● Interruption factor when arbitration lost is detected
When arbitration lost is detected, causes of interrupts are not issued immediately but after one byte of data
has been transferred.
When arbitration lost is detected, it becomes slave from the viewpoint of hardware. Even if so, it outputs 9
clocks in all in order to issue causes of interrupts. For this reason, causes and interrupts are not immediately
issued, so no processing is allowed after arbitration lost.
● Interrupt condition
It is specified that I2C bus has one interrupt and causes of interrupts are issued once one byte of transfer
completes or if the conditions of interrupts are satisfied.
Each flag should be checked within the interrupt routine, since multiple conditions of interrupts is
identified based on one interrupt. Multiple conditions of interrupts on completion of one byte transfer is as
follows.
• When it is a bus master
• When it is a slave that the address is done
• When you receive the General call address
• When arbitration lost has occurred.
● Transfer rate
Note that I2C bus can support up to 100 kHz of the serial clock frequency of transmission.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
547
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
22.3.1
MB90330A Series
Transfer Flow of I2C Interface
Figure 22.3-1 shows the 1-byte transfer flow from master to slave, and Figure 22.3-2
shows the 1-byte transfer flow from slave to master.
■ Transfer Flow of I2C Interface
Figure 22.3-1 1-byte Transfer Flow from the Master to Slave
Master
Slave
Start
IDAR: Writing
MSS: Writing 1
Start condition
BB set, TRX set
BB set, TRX set
Address data transfer
AAS set
Acknowledgement
LRB reset
INT set,TRX set
IDAR: Writing
INT : Writing 0
Interrupt
INT set,TRX set
ACK: Writing 1
INT: Writing 0
Data transfer
Acknowledgement
LRB reset
INT set
Interrupt
MSS: Writing 0
INT reset
BB reset,TRX reset
Stop condition
INT set
IDAR: Read
INT: Writing 0
BB reset,TRX reset
AAS reset
End
548
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
MB90330A Series
Figure 22.3-2 1-byte Transfer Flow from Slave to Master
Master
Slave
Start
IDAR: Writing
MSS: Writing 1
Start condition
BB set,TRX set
BB set,TRX set
Address data transfer
AAS reset
Acknowledgement
LRB reset
INT set,TRX reset
Interrupt
INT: Writing 0
INT set,TRX set
IDAR: Writing
INT: Writing 0
Data transfer
Negative acknowledgement
INT set
IDAR: Read
LRB set,TRX set
INT set
Interrupt
INT: Writing 0
MSS: Writing 0
INT reset
BB reset,TRX reset
Stop condition
BB reset,TRX reset
AAS reset
End
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
549
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
22.3.2
MB90330A Series
Mode Flow of I2C Interface
Figure 22.3-3 shows the flow of mode transitions for the I2C interface.
■ Flow of I2C Interface Mode Transitions
Figure 22.3-3 I2C Mode Flow
Slave receive mode
SCC
NO
YES
TRX,AAS,LRB:reset
FBT:set
SCC&BB=1
YES
RSC:set
NO
BB:set
8 bits received
Address comparison
RSC,FBT:reset
Match
AAS: set
INT:set
Acknowledgement
output
SCL line
retained at "L"
NO
TRX=1
Slave receive mode
YES
SCC
Slave send mode
YES
AAS,LRB,BB,RSC
NO
:reset
INT: 0 write
FBT:reset
SCL line freed
Send/receive
YES
Acknowledgement
received?
NO
TRX:reset
550
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
MB90330A Series
Operation Flow of I2C Interface
22.3.3
Figure 22.3-4 shows the operation flow of a master send/receive program (with
interrupts) for the I2C interface. Figure 22.3-5 shows the operation flow of the slave
program (with interrupts) for the I2C interface.
■ Operation Flow of I2C Interface
Figure 22.3-4 Operation Flow of the Master Send/Receive Program (with Interrupts) for the I2C Interface
Main routine
Interrupt routine
Start
Start
Set the slave
address
Bus error
occurred?
I2C operating enabled
Master
receive operation?
Master send
YES
NO
Send the slave address set
(Data direction bit=0)
AL occurred?
RETI
I2C operation enabled
I2C operation disabled
RETI
Acknowledge occurrence enabled
3
To the slave program
interrupt routine
NO
1
YES
BBbit=1?
BB bit=0 and
AL bit=1?
NO
LOOP
Is the number
of remaining bytes to
be received 0?
NO
Is the data direction
bit (TRX)=1?
YES
Is the number
of remaining bytes to
be sent 0?
Wait for a certain
amount of time
YES
I2C initial setting
3
YES
Was ACK
returned?
Generate the start condition
while sending the slave address
Wait for a certain
amount of time
LOOP
Clear the bus error
interrupt factor
3
NO
NO
Generate the start condition
while sending the slave address
YES
Master?
Receive the slave address set
(Data direction bit=1)
NO
NO
STOP condition generated
2
NO
Master receive
Set the number of bytes
to be sent for each
time that data is written
YES
BBbit=1?
BB bit=0 and
AL bit=1?
2
NO
Set the number of bytes to be sent
for each time that data is written
YES
YES
1
Is the number
of remaining bytes to
be received 1?
1
YES
NO
Decrement the number of bytes to be sent
I2C operation disabled
1
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
Acknowledge occurrence enabled
Acknowledge occurrence enabled
Set the send data
Is the first byte
being received?
Clear the end interrupt factor
YES
NO
RETI
Decrement the number of bytes to be received
Store the receive data to the RAM
Clear the end interrupt factor
RETI
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
551
CHAPTER 22 I2C INTERFACE
22.3 I2C Interface Operation
MB90330A Series
Figure 22.3-5 Operation Flow of the Slave Program (with Interrupts) for the I2C Interface
Main routine
Interrupt routine
Start
Start
Set the slave
address
I2C operation enabled
Set slave mode
LOOP
Bus error
occurred?
YES
2
NO
Is addressing
completed?
1
2
Clear the transfer end
interrupt source
Clear the bus error
interrupt factor
RETI
I2C operation enabled
I2C initial setting
NO
1
RETI
YES
Is the data direction
bit (TRX)=1?
Is the
receive data an
address?
NO
YES
Is ACK
returned?
Yes
Set the send data
Clear the transfer end
interrupt source
NO
1
YES
NO
Store the data
in RAM
Clear the transfer end
interrupt source
RETI
RETI
552
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 23
ROM MIRROR FUNCTION
SELECTION MODULE
This chapter describes the ROM mirror function
selection module.
23.1 Overview of ROM Mirror Function Select Module
23.2 ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM)
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
553
CHAPTER 23 ROM MIRROR FUNCTION SELECTION MODULE
23.1 Overview of ROM Mirror Function Select Module
23.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of ROM Mirror Function Select Module
The ROM mirror function selection module is used to select via register settings an FF
bank in ROM, whose contents can be viewed via 00 bank.
■ Block Diagram of ROM Mirror Function Select Module
Figure 23.1-1 shows the block diagram of ROM mirror function selection module.
Figure 23.1-1 Block Diagram of ROM Mirror Function Select Module
F2MC-16LX Bus
ROM mirror function
selection
Address area
FF bank
00 bank
ROM
■ Register of ROM Mirror Function Selection Module
Figure 23.1-2 shows the configuration of ROM mirror function select module.
Figure 23.1-2 ROM Mirror Function Selection Module Configuration
bit
ROMM Address : 00006FH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
MI
R/W
W
initial value
11B
R/W : Readable/Writable
W:
Write only
554
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 23 ROM MIRROR FUNCTION SELECTION MODULE
23.2 ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM)
MB90330A Series
23.2
ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM)
The configuration and functions of ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM) are
described.
■ ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM)
Figure 23.2-1 shows the bit configuration of ROM mirror function select register (ROMM).
Figure 23.2-1 Bit Configuration of ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM)
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
ROMM Address : 00006FH
9
8
Reserved
MI
R/W
W
initial value
11B
R/W : Readable/Writable
W:
Write only
[bit 9] Reserved bit
It is Reserved bit. Please write "1".
[bit 8] MI
• When "1" is written, ROM data in FF bank can be also read in 00 bank.
• When "0" is written, this function is not available to 00 bank.
• Only writing is enabled.
Notes:
•
Do not access to ROMM register in the middle of the operation of the address 008000H to
00FFFFH.
•
When ROM mirror function is activated, the addresses from FF8000H to FFFFFFH are mirrored to
the addresses from 008000H to 00FFFFH of 00 bank. So ROM addresses under the address
FF7FFFH are not mirrored even though ROM mirror function is set.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
555
CHAPTER 23 ROM MIRROR FUNCTION SELECTION MODULE
23.2 ROM Mirror Function Select Register (ROMM)
556
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
MB90330A Series
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24
ADDRESS MATCH
DETECTION FUNCTION
This chapter explains the address match detection
function and its operation.
24.1 Overview of Address Match Detection Function
24.2 Block Diagram of Address Match Detection Function
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
24.5 Program Example of Address Match Detection Function
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
557
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.1 Overview of Address Match Detection Function
24.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of Address Match Detection Function
If the address of the instruction to be processed next to the instruction currently
processed by the program matches the address set in the detect address setting
registers, the address match detection function forcibly replaces the next instruction to
be processed by the program with the INT9 instruction to branch to the interrupt
processing program. Since the address match detection function can use the INT9
interrupt for instruction processing, the program can be corrected by patch processing.
■ Overview of Address Match Detection Function
• The address of the instruction to be processed next to the instruction currently processed by the program
is always held in the address latch through the internal data bus. The address match detection function
always compares the value of the address held in the address latch with that of the address set in the
detect address setting registers. When these compared values match, the next instruction to be processed
by the CPU is forcibly replaced by the INT9 instruction, and the interrupt processing program is
executed.
• There are two detect address setting registers (PADR0 and PADR1), each of which has an interrupt
enable bit. The generation of an interrupt due to a match between the address held in the address latch
and the address set in the detect address setting registers can be enabled and disabled for each register.
558
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.2 Block Diagram of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
24.2
Block Diagram of Address Match Detection Function
The address match detection module consists of the following blocks:
• Address latch
• Address detection control register (PACSR)
• Detect address setting registers (RADR0, RADR1)
■ Block Diagram of Address Match Detection Function
Figure 24.2-1 shows the block diagram of the address match detection function.
Figure 24.2-1 Block Diagram of the Address Match Detection Function
Internal data bus
PADR0 (24bit)
Detect address setting register 0
PADR1 (24bit)
Comparator
Address latch
INT9 instruction
(INT9 interrupt
generation)
Detect address setting register 1
PACSR
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved AD1E Reserved AD0E Reserved
Address detection control register (PACSR)
Reserved: Always set to "0"
● Address latch
The address latch stores the value of the address output to the internal data bus.
● Address detection control register (PACSR)
The address detection control register enables or disables output of an interrupt at an address match.
● Detect address setting registers (PADR0, PADR1)
The detect address setting registers set the address that is compared with the value of the address latch.
Note:
The addresses of the detect address setting register are 1FF0H to 1FF5H and are included in the
RAM area. Therefore, the access to the RAM area should not be performed during the use of this
function.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
559
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
24.3
MB90330A Series
Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
This section details the registers used by the address match detection function.
■ List of Registers and Reset Values of Address Match Detection Function
Figure 24.3-1 List of Registers and Reset Values of Address Match Detection Function
bit
Address detection control register (PACSR)
Address : 009EH
Detect address setting register 0 (PADR0):
High
Address : 1FF2H
Detect address setting register 0 (PADR0):
Middle
Address : 1FF1H
Detect address setting register 0 (PADR0):
Low
Address : 1FF0H
Detect address setting register 1 (PADR1):
High
Address : 1FF5H
Detect address setting register 1 (PADR1):
Middle
Address : 1FF4H
Detect address setting register 1 (PADR1):
Low
Address : 1FF3H
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
× : Undefined
560
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
24.3.1
Address Detection Control Register (PACSR)
The address detection control register (PACSR) enables or disables output of an
interrupt at an address match. When an address match is detected when output of an
interrupt at an address match is enabled, the INT9 interrupt is generated.
■ Address Detection Control Register (PACSR)
Figure 24.3-2 Address Detection Control Register (PACSR)
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved AD1E Reserved AD0E Reserved
00000000B
Address
009EH
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
bit 0
Reserved bit
Reserved
0
Always set to "0"
bit 1
Address match detection enable bit 0
AD0E
0
Disables address match detection in PADR0
1
Enables address match detection in PADR0
bit 2
Reserved bit
Reserved
0
Always set to "0"
bit 3
Address match detection enable bit 1
AD1E
0
Disables address match detection in PADR1
1
Enables address match detection in PADR1
bit 4
Reserved bit
Reserved
0
Always set to "0"
bit 5
Reserved bit
Reserved
0
Always set to "0"
bit 6
Reserved bit
Reserved
0
Always set to "0"
bit 7
Reserved bit
Reserved
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Initial value
CM44-10129-6E
0
Always set to "0"
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
561
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
Table 24.3-1 Functions of Address Detection Control Register (PACSR)
Bit Name
bit 7
to
bit 4
562
Function
Always set to "0".
Reserved bit
bit 3
AD1E:
Address match
detection enable bit 1
The address match detection operation with the detect address setting
register 1 (PADR1) is enabled or disabled.
When set to "0": Disables the address match detection operation.
When set to "1": Enables the address match detection operation.
• When the value of detect address setting registers 1 (PADR1) matches
with the value of address latch at enabling the address match detection
operation (AD1E = 1), the INT9 instruction is immediately executed.
bit 2
Reserved bit
Always set to "0".
bit 1
AD0E:
Address match
detection enable bit 0
The address match detection operation with the detect address setting
register 0 (PADR0) is enabled or disabled.
When set to "0": Disables the address match detection operation.
When set to "1": Enables the address match detection operation.
• When the value of detect address setting register 0 (PADR0) matches
with the value of address latch at enabling the address match detect
operation (AD0E = 1), the INT9 instruction is immediately executed.
bit 0
Reserved bit
Always set to "0".
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
24.3.2
Detect Address Setting Registers (PADR0, PADR1)
The value of an address to be detected is set in the detect address setting registers.
When the address of the instruction processed by the program matches the address set
in the detect address setting registers, the next instruction is forcibly replaced by the
INT9 instruction, and the interrupt processing program is executed.
■ Detect Address Setting Registers (PADR0, PADR1)
Figure 24.3-3 Detect Address Setting Registers (PADR0, PADR1)
PADR0, PADR1: High
Address 1FF2H, 1FF5H
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5
bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Initial value
D23 D22
D20 D19 D18
XXXXXXXXB
D21
D17
D16
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8
PADR0, PADR1: Middle
Address 1FF1H, 1FF4H
D15 D14
D13
D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
Reset value
XXXXXXXXB
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
bit 7 bit 6 b it 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
PADR0, PADR1: Low
Address 1FF0H, 1FF3H
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Reset value
XXXXXXXXB
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W : Readable/Writable
X
: Undefined
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
563
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.3 Configuration of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
■ Functions of Detect Address Setting Registers
• There are two detect address setting registers (PADR0, PADR1) that consist of a high byte (bank), middle
byte, and low byte, totaling 24 bits.
Table 24.3-2 Address Setting of Detect Address Setting Registers
Register Name
Interrupt Output Enable
Address Setting
High
Detect address setting
register 0 (PADR0)
Detect address setting
register 1 (PADR1)
PACSR: AD0E
PACSR: AD1E
Set the upper 8 bits of detect address 0 (bank).
Middle
Set the middle 8 bits of detect address 0.
Low
Set the lower 8 bits of detect address 0.
High
Set the upper 8 bits of detect address 1 (bank).
Middle
Set the middle 8 bits of detect address 1.
Low
Set the lower 8 bits of detect address 1.
• In the detect address setting registers (PADR0, PADR1), starting address (first byte) of instruction to be
replaced by INT9 instruction should be set.
Figure 24.3-4 Setting of Starting Address of Instruction Code to be Replaced by INT9
Set to detect address (High : FFH, Middle : 00H, Low : 1FH)
Address
Instruction code
FF001C :
FF001F :
FF0022 :
A8 00 00
4A 00 00
4A 80 08
Mnemonic
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
RW0, #0000
A, #0000
A,#0880
Notes:
564
•
When an address of other than the first byte is set to the detect address setting register (PADR0,
PADR1), the instruction code is not replaced by INT9 instruction and a program of an interrupt
processing is not be performed. When the address is set to the second byte or subsequent, the
address set by the instruction code is replaced by "01H" (INT9 instruction code) and, which may
cause malfunction.
•
The detect address setting registers (PADR0, PADR1) should be set after disabling the address
match detection (PACSR: AD0E = 0 or AD1E = 0) of corresponding address match control
registers. If the detect address setting registers are changed without disabling the address match
detection, the address match detection function will work immediately after an address match
occurs during writing address, which may cause malfunction.
•
The address match detection function can be used only for addresses of the internal ROM area. If
addresses of the external memory area are set, the address match detection function will not
work and the INT9 instruction will not be executed.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
24.4
Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection
Function
If the addresses of the instructions executed in the program match those set in the
detection address setting registers (PADR0, PADR1), the address match detection
function will replace the first instruction with the INT9 instruction (01H) to branch to the
interrupt processing program.
■ Operation of Address Match Detection Function
Figure 24.4-1 shows the operation of the address match detection function when the detect addresses are set
and an address match is detected.
Figure 24.4-1 Operation of Address Match Detection Function
Program execution
The instruction address to be
executed by program matches
detect address setting register 0
Address
Instruction code
FF001C :
FF001F :
FF0022 :
A8 00 00
4A 00 00
4A 80 08
Mnemonic
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
RW0, #0000
A, #0000
A, #0880
Replaced by INT9 instruction (01H)
■ Setting Detect Address
1. Disable the detection address setting register 0 (PADR0) where the detect address is set for address
match detection (PACSR: AD0E = 0).
2. Set the detect address in the detection address setting register 0 (PADR0). Set "FFH" at the higher bits of
the detection address setting register 0 (PADR0), "00H" at the middle bits, and "1FH" at the lower bits.
3. Enable the detect address setting register 0 (PADR0) where the detect address is set for address match
detection (PACSR: AD0E = 1).
■ Program Execution
1. If the address of the instruction to be executed in the program matches the set detect address, the first
instruction code at the matched address is replaced by the INT9 instruction code (01H).
2. INT9 instruction is executed. INT9 interrupt is generated and then interrupt processing program is
executed.
Table 25.5-2 shows the function list of the hardware sequence flag.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
565
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
24.4.1
MB90330A Series
Example of Using Address Match Detection Function
This section gives an example of patch processing for program correction using the
address match detection function.
■ System Configuration and E2PROM Memory Map
● System configuration
Figure 24.4-2 gives an example of the system configuration using the address match detection function.
Figure 24.4-2 Example of System Configuration Using Address Match Detection Function
MCU
SIN0
Serial E2PROM
Interface
E2PROM
Storing patch program
MB90330A
series
■ E2PROM Memory Map
Figure 24.4-3 shows the allocation of the patch program and data at storing the patch program in E2PROM.
566
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
Figure 24.4-3 Allocation of E2PROM Patch Program and Data
E2PROM
Address
PADR0
PADR1
0000H
Patch program byte count
0001H
Detect address 0 (Low)
0002H
Detect address 0 (Middle)
0003H
Detect address 0 (High)
0004H
Patch program byte count
0005H
Detect address 1 (Low)
0006H
Detect address 1 (Middle)
0007H
Detect address 1 (High)
For patch program 0
For patch program 1
0010H
Patch program 0
(main body)
0020H
Patch program 1
(main body)
● Patch program byte count
The total byte count of the patch program (main body) is stored. If the byte count is "00H", it indicates that
no patch program is provided.
● Detect address (24 bits)
The address where the instruction code is replaced by the INT9 instruction code due to program error is
stored. This address is set in the detection address setting registers (PADR0, PADR1).
● Patch program (main body)
The program executed by the INT9 interrupt processing when the program address matches the detect
address is stored. Patch program 0 is allocated from any predetermined address. Patch program 1 is
allocated from the address indicating <starting address of patch program 0 + total byte count of patch
program 0>.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
567
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
■ Setting and Operating State
● Initialization
• E2PROM data are all cleared to "00H".
● Occurrence of program error
• By using the connector (UART), information about the patch program is transmitted to the MCU
(MB90330A series) from the outside according to the allocation of the E2PROM patch program and
data.
• The MCU (MB90330A series) stores the information received from outside in the E2PROM.
● Reset sequence
• After reset, the MCU (MB90330A series) reads the byte count of the E2PROM patch program to check
the presence or absence of the correction program.
• If the byte count of the patch program is not "00H", the higher, middle and lower bits at detect addresses
0 and 1 are read and set in the detection address setting registers 0 and 1 (PADR0, PADR1). The patch
program (main body) is read according to the byte count of the patch program and written to RAM in
the MCU (MB90330A series).
• The patch program (main body) is allocated to the address where the patch program is executed in the
INT9 interrupt processing by the address match detection function.
• Address match detection is enabled (PACSR: AD0E = 1, AD1E = 1)
● INT9 Interrupt processing
• Interrupt processing is performed by the INT9 instruction. The MB90330A series has no interrupt
request flag by address match detection. Therefore, if the stack information in the program counter is
discarded, the detect address cannot be checked. When checking the detect address, check the value of
program counter stacked in the interrupt processing routine.
• The patch program is executed, branching to the normal program.
568
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
■ Operation of Address Match Detection Function at Storing Patch Program in
E2PROM
Figure 24.4-4 shows the operation of the address match detection function at storing the patch
program in E2PROM.
Figure 24.4-4 Operation of Address Match Detection Function at Storing Patch Program in
E2PROM
000000H
(3)
Patch program
RAM
Detection address setting register
(1)
Detection address setting
(reset sequence)
Serial E2PROM
interface
E2PROM
. Patch program byte count
. Address for address detection
. Patch program
ROM
(2)
(4)
Program error
FFFFFFH
(1) Execution of detection address setting of reset sequence and normal program
(2) Branch to patch program which expanded in RAM with INT9 interrupt processing by address match detection
(3) Patch program execution by branching of INT9 processing
(4) Execution of normal program which branches from patch program
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
569
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.4 Explanation of Operation of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
■ Flow of Patch Processing
Figure 24.4-5 shows the flow of patch processing using the address match detection function.
Figure 24.4-5 Flow of Patch Processing
E2PROM
MB90330A series
I/O area
000000H
000100H
Register/RAM area
000400H
Patch program
000480H
RAM area
RAM
Stack area
0000H
Patch program byte count : 80H
0001H
Detect address (Low) : 00H
0002H
Detect address (Middle) : 80H
0003H
Detect address (High) : FFH
0010H
Patch program
000900H
Detection address setting register
0090H
FFFFH
FF0000H
ROM
Program error
FF8000H
FF8050H
FFFFFFH
YES
Reset
INT9
Read the 00H
of E2PROM
Branch to patch program
JMP 000400H
Execution of patch program
000400H to 000480H
E2PROM : 0000H
=0
NO
End of patch program
JMP FF8050H
Read detect address
E2PROM : 0001H to 0003H
↓
MCU : Set to PADR0
Read patch program
E2PROM : 0010H to 008FH
↓
MCU : 000400H to 00047FH
Enable address match detection
(PACSR : AD0E = 1)
Execution of normal
program
NO
570
Program address
PC= PADR0
YES
INT9
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.5 Program Example of Address Match Detection Function
MB90330A Series
24.5
Program Example of Address Match Detection Function
This section gives a program example for the address match detection function.
■ Program Example for Address Match Detection Function
● Processing specifications
If the address of the instruction to be executed by the program matches the address set in the detection
address setting register (PADR0), the INT9 instruction is executed.
● Coding example
PACSR
EQU
00009EH
; Address detection control register
PADRL
EQU
001FF0H
; Detection address setting register 0 (Low)
PADRM
EQU
001FF1H
; Detection address setting register 0 (Middle)
PADRH
EQU
001FF2H
; Detection address setting register 0 (High)
;
;-----Main program--------------------------------------------------------------CODE
CSEG
START:
; Stack pointer (SP), etc.,
; already reset
MOV
PADRL,#00H
; Set address detection register 0 (Low)
MOV
PADRM,#00H
; Set address detection register 0 (Middle)
MOV
PADRH,#00H
; Set address detection register 0 (High)
;
MOV I:PACSR,#00000010B
; Enable address match
:
processing by user
:
LOOP:
:
processing by user
:
BAR LOOP
;-----Interrupt program---------------------------------------------------------WARI:
:
processing by user
:
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
571
CHAPTER 24 ADDRESS MATCH DETECTION FUNCTION
24.5 Program Example of Address Match Detection Function
BETI
CODE
MB90330A Series
; Return from interrupt processing
ENDS
;-----Vector setting------------------------------------------------------------VECT
VECT
CSEG
ABS=0FFH
ORG
00FFDCH
DSL
WARI
ORG
00FFDCH
DSL
START
DB
00H
; Set to single-chip mode
ENDS
END
572
; Set reset vector
START
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25
FLASH MEMORY
This chapter describes the functions and operations of
3M/4M-bit flash memory.
There are three methods for writing and erasing date on
flash memory as described in the following.
• Programming and erasing by executing program
• Writing by cereal writer
• Flash memory writer
In this chapter, we describe "Write/Erase by Program
Execution".
25.1 Overview of Flash Memory
25.2 Sector Configuration of Flash Memory
25.3 Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS)
25.4 Automatic Algorithm Initiation Method of Flash Memory
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
Code: CM44-00105-1E
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
573
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.1 Overview of Flash Memory
25.1
MB90330A Series
Overview of Flash Memory
The flash memory is allocated from F9 to FF banks on the CPU memory map. The flash
memory can be read-accessed and program-accessed from the CPU using the function
of the flash memory interface circuit. Writing/erasing on flash memory can be executed
by the instructions from the CPU through the flash memory interface circuit.
Additionally, rewriting can be executed in the mounted condition by the control of the
built-in CPU, the effective improvement of the program and data are realized.
■ Features of Flash Memory
Flash memory has the following features.
• Uses automatic program algorithm (Embedded Algorithm: the same manner as MBM29LV400TC.)
• Erase pause/restart function
• Detection of completion of writing/erasing by data polling and toggle bit.
• Detection of completion of writing/erasing by CPU interrupts.
• Erase per sector enabled (random sector combination)
• Programming/erase count 10000 (min.)
• Sector protect function (Possibility that sets up with a recommendation parallel writer)
■ Flash Memory Size and Products
Either 3M-bit or 4M-bit flash memory is mounted, depending on your model type.
● 3M-bit flash memory
• Product: MB90F334A
• Size: 384K Bytes / 192K words
• Sector configuration: 64K × 5 + 32K + 8K × 2 + 16K
● 4M-bit flash memory
• Product: MB90F335A
• Size: 512K Bytes / 256K words
• Sector configuration: 64K × 6 + 32K × 2 + 8K × 4 + 16K × 2
■ Method for Writing/deleting Flash Memory
Programming and erasing flash memory cannot be performed at one time. In other words, to perform
writing/erasing data on flash memory, it possible to execute writing operation by copying the program on
the flash memory on RAM and executing from RAM, without program-accessing from the flash memory.
574
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.2 Sector Configuration of Flash Memory
MB90330A Series
25.2
Sector Configuration of Flash Memory
Sector configuration of the flash memory is shown.
■ Sector Configuration
Figure 25.2-1 and Figure 25.2-2 show the sector configuration of the 3M-bit and 4M-bit flash memory
respectively. The upper and lower addresses of each sector are shown in the figure.
Figure 25.2-1 Sector Configuration of 3M-bit Flash Memory
Flash memory
CPU address
Writer address*
FFFFFFH
7FFFFH
FFC000H
FFBFFFH
7C000H
7BFFFH
FFA000H
FF9FFFH
7A000H
79FFFH
FF8000H
FF7FFFH
78000H
77FFFH
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
70000H
6FFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
60000H
5FFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
50000H
4FFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
40000H
3FFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
30000H
2FFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
20000H
1FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
10000H
0FFFFH
F80000H
00000H
SA8 (16K bytes)
SA7 ( 8K bytes)
SA6 ( 8K bytes)
SA5 (32K bytes)
SA4 (64K bytes)
SA3 (64K bytes)
Using disabled
SA2 (64K bytes)
SA1 (64K bytes)
SA0 (64K bytes)
Using disabled
In the case of access from CPU, SA0 is allocated on the F9 bank register,
SA1 on the FA bank register, SA2 on the FB bank register, SA3 on the FD bank
register, SA4 on the FE bank register, and SA5 to SA8 on the FF bank register.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
575
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.2 Sector Configuration of Flash Memory
MB90330A Series
Figure 25.2-2 Sector Configuration of 4M-bit Flash Memory
Flash memory
CPU address
FFFFFF H
Writer address*
7FFFFH
FFC000 H
FFBFFFH
7C000H
7BFFFH
FFA000 H
FF9FFF H
7A000H
79FFF H
FF8000 H
FF7FFF H
78000H
77FFF H
FF0000 H
FEFFFFH
70000 H
6FFFF H
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
60000 H
5FFFF H
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
50000H
4FFFF H
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
40000H
3FFFFH
FBC000 H
FBBFFFH
3C000 H
3BFFFH
FBA000H
FB9FFF H
3A000H
39FFF H
FB8000 H
FB7FFF H
38000H
37FFF H
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
30000H
2FFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
20000H
1FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
10000H
0FFFFH
F80000H
00000H
SA13 (16K bytes)
SA12 (8K bytes)
SA11 (8K bytes)
SA10 (32K bytes)
SA9 (64K bytes)
SA8 (64K bytes)
SA7 (64K bytes)
SA6 (16K bytes)
SA5 (8K bytes)
SA4 (8K bytes)
SA3 (32K bytes)
SA2 (64K bytes)
SA1 (64K bytes)
SA0 (64K bytes)
In the case of access from CPU, SA0 is allocated on the F8 bank register, SA1 on the F9 bank register,
SA2 on the FA bank register, SA3 to SA6 on the FB bank register, SA7 on the FC bank register, and
SA8 on the FD bank register, SA9 on the FE bank register, SA10 to SA13 on the FF bank register.
*: The writer address
The writer address is the address corresponding to the CPU address when data is written on the flash
memory with the parallel writer. When writing/erasing is executed using a general-purpose writer, writing/
erasing is executed in this address.
576
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.3 Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS)
MB90330A Series
25.3
Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS)
The flash memory control status register (FMCS), which is allocated in the flash
memory interface circuit, is used for writing/erasing on the flash memory.
■ Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS)
Figure 25.3-1 shows the bit configuration of the flash memory control status register (FMCS).
Figure 25.3-1 Bit Configuration of Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS)
Flash memory control status register (FMCS)
bit
Address: 0000AEH
7
INTE
R/W
6
RDYINT
R/W
5
4
WE RDY
R/W R
3
2
1
0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
W
W
W
Initial value
000X0000B
W
R/W : Readable/Writable
R:
Read only
W:
Write only
The function of each bit in the flash memory control status register (FMCS) is described in the following.
[bit 7] INTE: INTerrupt Enable
Finishing writing/erasing on the flash memory allows the CPU to generate an interrupt.
If the INTE bit is "1" and the RDYINT bit is "1", an interrupt to the CPU is generated. If the INTE bit is
"0", the interrupt is not generated.
0
Interrupt disabled in writing/erasing end
1
Interruption permission by writing/erase end
[bit 6] RDYINT: ReaDY INTerrupt
This is the bit representing the operation state of flash memory.
Completion of writing/erasing on the flash memory allows this bit to set to "1". After writing/erasing on
flash memory, it is not possible to write/erase to flash memory while the RDYINT bit is "0". After
writing/erasing is completed and "1" is set, writing/erasing to flash memory is possible.
Writing "0" clears to "0" and writing "1" is ignored. The completion timing of the flash memory
automatic algorithm (see Section "25.4 Automatic Algorithm Initiation Method of Flash Memory") sets
to "1". When the read modify write (RMW) instruction is used, "1" is always read.
CM44-10129-6E
0
During writing/the deletion operation execution
1
Completion of writing/erasing operation (occurrence of interrupt requests)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
577
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.3 Flash Memory Control Status Register (FMCS)
MB90330A Series
[bit 5] WE: Write Enable
It is a write enable bit to the flash memory area.
When the setting is "1", writing after issuing command sequences for F9 to FB, FD to FF banks (see
Section "25.4 Automatic Algorithm Initiation Method of Flash Memory") is executed on the area in the
flash memory. The signal of writing/ deletion is not generated at "0". It is used for activating the write/
erase command of flash memory.
In order to avoid erroneous data writing to the flash memory, it is recommended to set "0" permanently
when the writing/erasing command is not used.
0
Writing Erasing on Flash Memory disabled
1
Writing Erasing on Flash Memory enabled
[bit 4] RDY: ReaDY
This is the writing/erasing permission bit of flash memory.
While this is "0", the writing/erasing flash memory are disabled. However, the read/reset command or
sector erase suspend command is enabled in this state.
0
During writing/ deletion operation execution
1
Completion of writing/erasing operation (write/erase the next data enabled)
[bit 3 to bit 0] Reserved bit
These are reserved bits. Be sure to set to "0".
Note:
As for the FMCS register, only byte access is possible.
■ Automatic Algorithm End Timing
Figure 25.3-2 shows the relation between automatic algorithm end timing and RDYINT bit and RDY bit.
RDYINT and RDY bits do not change at the same time. Please make the program to judge either by one of
bits.
Figure 25.3-2 Relation between Automatic Algorithm End Timing and RDYINT Bit and RDY Bit
Automatic algorithm
End timing
RDYINT bit
RDY bit
1 Machine cycle
578
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.4 Automatic Algorithm Initiation Method of Flash Memory
MB90330A Series
25.4
Automatic Algorithm Initiation Method of Flash Memory
There are four types of commands to start the automatic algorithm of flash memory:
read/reset, write, sector erase, and chip erase. The control of the suspend and the
restart is enabled for the sector erase.
■ Command Sequence Table
Table 25.4-1 lists the commands used for flash memory write/erase. All data written on the command
register is in the units of byte, but be sure that the data can be written in word access. In this case, highorder byte data is ignored.
Table 25.4-1 Command Sequence Table
Command
Sequence
Bus
Programming
Cycle
the 1th bus
Programming
Cycle
the 2th bus
Programming
Cycle
the 3th bus
Programming
Cycle
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
the 4th bus
Programming
Cycle
the 5th bus
Programming
Cycle
the 6th bus
Programming
Cycle
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
-
-
-
-
-
-
Read/
Reset *
1
FxXXXX
XXF0
-
-
Read/
Reset *
4
FxAAAA
XXAA
Fx5554
XX55
FxAAAA
XXF0
RA
RD
-
-
-
-
Programming
4
FxAAAA
XXAA
Fx5554
XX55
FxAAAA
XXA0
PA
(even)
PD
(word)
-
-
-
-
Chip Erasing
6
FxAAAA
XXAA
Fx5554
XX55
FxAAAA
XX80
FxAAAA
XXAA
Fx5554
XX55
FxAAAA
XX10
XX55
SA
(even)
XX30
Sector Erasing
6
FxAAAA
XXAA
Fx5554
XX55
FxAAAA
XX80
FxAAAA
XXAA
Fx5554
Sector Erasing being Suspended
Entry of Address "FxXXXX" Data(xxB0H) temporally suspends erasing a sector in the middle of erasing the sector.
Sector Erasing being restarted
Entry of Address "FxXXXX" Data(xx30H) restarts erasing after the temporal suspension of erasing of the sector.
Auto-Select
3
FxAAAA XXAA
Fx5554
XX55
FxAAAA XX90
-
-
-
-
-
-
RA: Read address
PA: Program address. Only even addresses can be specified.
SA: See sector addresses (see Section "25.2 Sector Configuration of Flash Memory").
RD: Read data
PD: Program data. Only word data can be specified.
*:Two kinds of read/reset commands can reset flash memory to the read mode.
Notes: • The address Fx in the table means FF, FE, FD, FB, FA, and F9. In each operation, specify this as the value of the bank to be accessed.
• Addresses in the table are the values in the CPU memory map. All addresses and data are expressed as hexadecimals. However, "X" is any value.
The Auto-Select in Table 25.4-1 is a command that is used to recognize the state of the sector protection.
Actually, an address is needed to be set along with the above command as follows:
Table 25.4-2 Address Setting at Auto-Select
Sector protection
AQ13 to AQ17
AQ7
AQ2
AQ1
AQ0
DQ7 to DQ0
Sector address
L
H
L
L
CODE *
*: "01H" for the output in protected sector addresses, "00H" for the output in non-protected sector addresses.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
579
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
25.5
MB90330A Series
Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
Because write/erase flow are performed through automatic algorithm in flash memory,
the algorithm must wait signals from hardware that notify the operation conditions or
operation end. This automatic algorithm can check the operation state of the internal
flash memory by the following hardware sequence.
■ Hardware Sequence Flag
The hardware sequence flag consists of 4-bit outputs: DQ7, DQ6, DQ5, and DQ3. Each bit has the
functions of the data polling flag (DQ7), toggle bit flag (DQ6), timing limit excess flag (DQ5), and sector
erase timer flag (DQ3). These flags can be used to confirm whether write/chip sector erase end and erase
code write are effective or not.
Reference to the hardware sequence flag, read-access to the address in the target sector in the flash memory
after setting the command sequence (See Table 25.4-1). Table 25.5-1 shows the bit allocation of the
hardware sequence flag.
Table 25.5-1 Bit Allocation of Hardware Sequence Flag
Bit No.
Hardware sequence flag
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
-
DQ3
-
-
-
To check if the automatic write/chip sector erase is operating or ended, verify the hardware sequence flag
or the RDY bit of the flash memory control register (FMCS). After the write/erase commands end, it
returns to the read/reset state. When actually creating a program, perform the following procedures
including data read after verifying the automatic write/erase end with one of these flags. Also, you can
check if the sector erase code write after the second command is enabled by using the hardware sequence
flag. The next section describes each hardware sequence flag.
Table 25.5-2 shows the list of the hardware sequence flag functions.
580
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
MB90330A Series
Table 25.5-2 Function List of Hardware Sequence Flag
State
State change in
Writing operation → writing completion
normal operation (when program address specified)
Chip sector deletion operation
Wait for Sector Erasing
→ deletion completion
Sector erasing suspended
(Sector being erased)
→ Resumed
Sector erasing being suspended
(Sector not being deleted)
Programming
Chip sector deletion operation
CM44-10129-6E
DQ6
DQ5
DQ3
DQ7 →
DATA:7
Toggle →
DATA:6
0→
DATA:5
0→
DATA:3
0
→ erasing start
Sector Erasing being Suspended
(Sector being erased)
Abnormal
operation
DQ7
→1
Toggle
→ Stop
1
0
→1
0
→1
0
→1
1
→0
0
→ Toggle
0
→1
0
DATA:7
DATA:6
DATA:5
DATA:3
DQ7
Toggle
0
1
0
Toggle
1
1
0
Toggle
0
→1
Toggle
1
→0
1
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
581
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
25.5.1
MB90330A Series
Data Polling Flag (DQ7)
The data polling flag (DQ7) is a hardware sequence flag that notifies the state that the
automatic algorithm execution is proceeding or ended by using the data polling
function.
■ State Transition of Data Polling Flag (DQ7)
Table 25.5-3 and Table 25.5-4 shows the state transition of the data polling flag.
Table 25.5-3 State Transition of Data Polling Flag (State Change in Normal Operation)
Operation
State
Programming
→
Completion
DQ7 →
DATA:7
DQ7
Chip and
sector erasing
→
Completion
Sector
erasing wait
→ start
0→1
0
Sector Erasing
being
Suspended
→ Restart
Sector being
erased
Sector Erasing
→ Temporary
deletion stop
Sector being
erased
0→1
1→0
Sector Erasing
Temporary
Sector not
being deleted
DATA:7
Table 25.5-4 State Transition of Data Polling Flag (State Change in Abnormal Operation)
Operation State
Programming operation
Chip sector erase operation
DQ7
DQ7
0
■ At Programming Operation
If you execute read-access while executing the automatic write algorithm, the flash memory outputs the
inversion data of the last update of bit 7 regardless of address specifications. If you execute read-access
when the automatic write algorithm ends, the flash memory outputs the bit 7 of the read value of the
specified address.
■ When Chip/sector Deletion Operates
If you execute read-access from the sector which is currently being erased, while executing the automatic
sector-erase algorithm, the flash memory outputs "0". If you execute read-access while executing the
automatic chip-erase algorithm, the flash memory outputs "0", regardless of the specified address. Once the
chip/sector-erase operation ends, the flash memory outputs "1".
■ Sector Erasing being Suspended
If you execute read-access when the sector erase suspends, the flash memory outputs "1" if the specified
address is the erased sector, and it outputs bit 7 (DATA: 7) of the read value of the specified address if it is
not the erased sector. You can determine whether the current state is the sector suspend or not and which
sector is being erased by referencing with the toggle bit flag (DQ6).
582
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
MB90330A Series
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
Note:
At the start-up of the automatic algorithm, the read-access to the specified address is disregarded.
As the data polling flag (DQ7) ends, other bit outputs are enabled for data read. Therefore, be sure
to read data after the automatic algorithm ends, following read-access whose end of the data polling
has confirmed.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
583
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
25.5.2
MB90330A Series
Toggle Bit Flag (DQ6)
Like the data polling flag (DQ7), the toggle bit flag (DQ6) is a hardware sequence flag
that indicates that the automatic algorithm execution is proceeding or ended by the
toggle bit function.
■ Transition State of Toggle Bit Flag (DQ6)
Table 25.5-5 and Table 25.5-6 shows the transition state of the toggle bit flag.
Table 25.5-5 Transition State of Toggle Bit Flag (State Change in Normal Operation)
Operation
State
Programming
→ Completion
Chip and
sector erasing
→
Sector
erasing wait
→ start
Sector Erasing
→ Temporary
deletion stop
Sector being
erased
Sector Erasing
being
Suspended
→ Restart
Sector being
erased
Sector Erasing
Temporary
Sector not
being deleted
Toggle
Toggle → 1
1 → Toggle
DATA:6
Completion
Toggle
DQ6
→ DATA:6
Toggle → Stop
Table 25.5-6 Transition State of Toggle Bit Flag (State Change in Abnormal Operation)
Operation State
Programming operation
Chip sector deletion operation
DQ6
Toggle
Toggle
■ When Writing/chip Sector is Deleted
If you execute read-access sequentially while executing the automatic write algorithm and the automatic
algorithm of chip/sector erase, the flash memory outputs the toggle state generating "1" and "0" alternately
per read, regardless of the specified address. If you execute read-access sequentially after the automatic
write algorithm and the automatic chip/sector-erase algorithm end, the flash memory stops the toggle
operation of bit 6 and outputs the bit 6 (DATA: 6) of the read value of the specified address.
■ Sector Erasing being Suspended
If you execute read-access when the sector erase suspends, the flash memory outputs "1" if the specified
address belongs to the sector being erased. If the specified address does not belong to the sector being
erased, it outputs the bit 6 (DATA: 6) of the read value of the specified address.
Reference:
During writing, when the sector being written is rewrite-protected, the toggle operation is terminated
without rewriting the data after toggle-operating for about 2μs.
During erasing, if all the selected sectors are rewrite-protected, the toggle bit performs toggleoperation for about 100 μs, and then it goes back to the read/reset state without rewriting the data.
584
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
MB90330A Series
25.5.3
Timing Limit Over Flag (DQ5)
The timing limit excess flag (DQ5) is a hardware sequence flag that indicates that the
automatic algorithm execution is over the predefined time (internal pulse frequency) in
the flash memory.
■ Transition State of Timing Limit Over Flag (DQ5)
Table 25.5-7 and Table 25.5-8 shows the transition state of the timing limit over flag.
Table 25.5-7 Transition State of Timing Limit Over Flag (State Change in Normal Operation)
Operation
State
Programming
→
Completion
Chip and
sector erasing
→
Sector
erasing wait
→ start
Completion
0 → DATA:5
DQ5
0→1
0
Sector Erasing
being
Suspended
→ Restart
Sector being
erased
Sector Erasing
→ Temporary
deletion stop
Sector being
erased
0
Sector Erasing
Temporary
Sector not being
deleted
0
DATA:5
Table 25.5-8 Transition State of Timing Limit Over Flag (State Change in Abnormal Operation)
Operation State
Programming operation
Chip sector deletion operation
DQ5
1
1
■ When Writing/chip Sector is Deleted
If you execute read-access after starting the automatic algorithms of the write or the chip erase/sector erase,
the flash memory outputs "0" if it is within the predefined time (time necessary for write/erase) and "1" if it
is over the predefined time. As this flag is irrelevant to the state of the automatic algorithm, you can judge
whether the write/erase algorithm was successfully executed or not. In other words, the automatic
algorithm is still operating by the data polling or toggle bit functions when this flag outputs "1", you can
recognize that writing was failed.
For example, if you write "1" into the flash memory address to which "0" is already written, the operation
fails. In this case, the flash memory is locked and the automatic algorithm does not end. In rare cases, it
ends normally as if "1" was written to the address. Therefore, an effective data is not output from the data
polling flag (DQ7). Also, the toggle bit flag (DQ6) does not terminate the toggle operation, and the timing
limit excess flag (DQ5) outputs "1" overrunning the time limit. This state means that the flash memory does
not have any defect, but it was not used properly. Be sure to execute the reset command if this state
appears.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
585
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm
25.5.4
MB90330A Series
Sector Erasing Timer Flag (DQ3)
The sector erase timer flag (DQ3) is a hardware sequence flag that indicates whether
the status is in the sector erase wait period or not after starting the sector erase
command.
■ Transition State of Sector Erasing Timer Flag (DQ3)
Table 25.5-9 and Table 25.5-10 shows the transition state of the sector erasing timer flag.
Table 25.5-9 Transition State of Sector Erasing Timer Flag (State Change in Normal Operation)
Operation
State
Programming
→
Completion
Sector
erasing wait
→ start
Chip and
sector
erasing
→
Completion
DQ3
0 → DATA:3
0→1
1
Sector Erasing
→ Temporary
deletion stop
Sector being
erased
Sector Erasing
being
Suspended
→ Restart
Sector being
erased
1→0
0→1
Sector Erasing
Temporary
Sector not being
deleted
DATA:3
Table 25.5-10 Transition State of Sector Erasing Timer Flag (State Change in Abnormal Operation)
Operation State
Programming operation
Chip sector deletion operation
DQ3
0
1
■ When Sector Deletion Operate
If you execute read-access after starting the sector erase command, the flash memory outputs "0" if this
access is in the sector erase wait period and "1" if this access is over the sector erase wait period, regardless
of the specified address of the sector.
When the erase algorithm is in execution with the data polling and toggle bit functions, the internal erasing
is beginning if this flag is "1". Any subsequent commands are ignored except for the write command or
erase suspend command for the sector erase code until erasing finishes.
When this flag is "0", the flash memory accepts writing of an additional sector erase code. To verify that, it
is recommended to check this flag state before writing of subsequent erase codes. If it is "1" at the second
state checking, the additional sector erase code may not be accepted.
■ Sector Erasing being Suspended
If you execute read-access when the sector erase suspends, the flash memory outputs "1" if the specified
address is the erased sector, and it outputs bit 3 (DATA: 3) of the read value of the specified address if it is
not the erased sector.
586
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
MB90330A Series
25.6
Write/Erase of Flash memory
This section describes the procedure to issue a command to start the automatic
algorithm and how to perform the operations of the read/reset, write, chip erase, sector
erase, sector erase suspend, and sector erase restart.
■ Write/Erase of Flash Memory
The flash memory can execute the automatic algorithm by performing the read/reset, write, chip erase,
sector erase, sector erase suspend, and sector erase restart operations to write in cycle into the bus of the
command sequence (See Table 25.4-1). The write cycle into each bus needs to be performed consecutively.
Besides, the automatic algorithm can detect the end time with data polling function or other functions.
After normal termination, it returns to the read/reset state.
In the following section, the following items regarding the write/erase on the flash memory are described.
• Read/reset state
• Writing Data
• All data erasing (chip all erase)
• Any data erasing (sector erase)
• Suspend Sector erasing
• Restart Sector erasing
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
587
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
25.6.1
MB90330A Series
Read/Reset State in Flash Memory
This section describes the procedure to issue the read/reset commands and to set the
read/reset state in flash memory.
■ Read/Reset State in Flash Memory
To set the flash memory to the read/reset state, it is possible to execute by sending the read/reset command
sequentially in the command sequence table (See Table 25.4-1) to the target sector in the flash memory.
The read/reset command has two kinds of command sequences of the one-time bus operation and the threetimes bus operation, while in fact, there is no fundamental differences between them.
The read/reset state is the initial state of the flash memory, and this system is always the read/reset state at
the time of the power-on or the normal command completion. Reading/reset is an input waiting state of
other commands.
In the read/reset state, you can read-access normally to read data. As with mask ROM, program access
from the CPU is enabled. This command is not needed to read data in the normal data read. When you need
to initialize the automatic algorithm as in the case of an abnormal command completion for some causes,
this command is mainly used.
588
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
MB90330A Series
25.6.2
Writing Data to Flash Memory
The procedure to issue the write command and write data into the flash memory is
described.
■ Writing Data to Flash Memory
To start the data write automatic algorithm, you may send the write command sequentially in the command
sequence table (See Table 25.4-1) to the target sector in the flash memory. When data writing to the target
address ends at the forth cycle, the automatic algorithm is activated and then the automatic writing starts.
● How to specify address
Only an even address is acceptable for the write address specified in the data write cycle. An odd address
does not allow you to write properly. In other words, writing into an even address per word data is required.
However, execution of one programming command, permits programming of only one word for data.
● Notes on data programming
Data "0" cannot be returned to data "1" by writing. If you write data "1" into data "0", the data polling
algorithm (DQ7) or the toggle operation (DQ5) do not finish and the flash memory device is determined to
have a defect, and as a result writing exceeds the predefined time, and the timing limit excess. However,
when data is read while read/reset, data is "0". You can change data from "0" to "1" only in the erase
operation.
All commands are disregarded while the automatic write command is being executed. Please note that if the
hardware reset is started while writing, the address data currently being written is not secured.
■ Writing Procedure of Flash Memory
Figure 25.6-1 shows an Procedure example for writing to flash memory. You may determine the state of
the automatic algorithm in the flash memory by using the hardware sequence flag (See Section "25.5
Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm"). In this section data polling flag (DQ7) is used to
confirm an end of writing.
Flag check data should be read from the address where data was last written.
As the data polling flag (DQ7) is changed along with the timing limit excess flag (DQ5), you need to
recheck the data polling flag bit (DQ7) even if the timing limit excess flag (DQ5) is "1".
Likewise, the toggle bit flag (DQ6) terminates the toggle operation just when the timing limit excess flag
(DQ5) changes into "1", you need to recheck the toggle bit flag (DQ6).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
589
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
MB90330A Series
Figure 25.6-1 Procedure Example for Writing to Flash Memory
Writing start
FMCS : WE(bit5)
Flash memory writing
enabled
Write command sequence
FxAAAAH
Fx555AH
FxAAAAH
Write address
XXAAH
XX55H
XXA0H
Write data
Internal address read
Data polling (DQ7)
Next address
Data
Data
0
Timing limit (DQ5)
Internal address read
Data
Data polling (DQ7)
Data
NO
Write error
End address
YES
FMCS : WE(bit5)
Flash memory writing
disabled
Write complete
590
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
MB90330A Series
25.6.3
Erasing All Data from Flash Memory (Chip Erase)
This section describes the procedure for issuing the chip erase command and erasing
all the data from flash memory.
■ Erasing All Data from Flash Memory (Chip Erase)
To erase all the data from the flash memory, you can erase by sending the chip erase command in the
command sequence table (See Table 25.4-1) to the target sector in the flash memory.
Chip deletion command is done by six bus operations. When data writing into the target address ends at the
sixth cycle, the chip erase operation is started. Before chip erasing, the user need not perform programming
to flash memory. While the automatic algorithm is executed, the flash memory writes "0" to check
conditions before erasing all the cells automatically.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
591
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
25.6.4
MB90330A Series
Erasing Any Data in Flash Memory (Sector Erasing)
The procedure to issue the sector erase command and erase any data in the flash
memory is described. Sector-by-sector erasing is enabled and multiple sectors can be
specified at a time.
■ Erasing Any Data in Flash Memory (Sector Erasing)
To erase any data in the flash memory, you may send the sector erase command sequentially in the
command sequence table (See Table 25.4-1) to the target sector in the flash memory.
● How to specify sector
The sector erase command is executed in six bus operations. In the sixth cycle, the minimum 50 μs sector
erase wait is started by writing the sector erase code (30H) into any even one address accessible in the target
sector. To erase multiple sectors, write the erase code (30H) into the address in the target sector to be
erased, following the above procedure.
● Notes on specifying multiple sectors
Sector erasing is started after a minimum 50 μs period waiting for sector erasing is completed after the last
sector erase code has been programmed. In other words, when multiple sectors are erased at the same time,
the next erase sector address and the erase code (in the command sequence sixth cycle) need to be entered
within 50 μs, after which they may not be accepted. You may check if writing the subsequent sector erase
code is enabled or not by the sector erase timer (hardware sequence flag: DQ3). In this case, make sure that
the address to read the sector erase timer indicates the sector to be erased.
■ Procedure of Sector Deletion
You may determine the state of the automatic algorithm in the flash memory by using the hardware
sequence flag (See Section "25.5 Check the Execution State of Automatic Algorithm"). Figure 25.6-2
shows an example of the sector erase procedure of the flash memory. In this example, the toggle bit flag
(DQ6) is used to check that erase ends.
Please note that data to be read for flag check is read from the sector to be erased.
The toggle bit flag (DQ6) terminates the toggle operation at the moment at which the timing limit excess
flag (DQ5) changes into "1", you need to recheck the toggle bit flag (DQ6) even if the timing limit excess
flag (DQ5) is "1".
Likewise, the data polling flag (DQ7) changes at the moment at which the timing limit excess flag (DQ5)
changes into "1", you need to recheck the data polling flag (DQ7).
592
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
MB90330A Series
Figure 25.6-2 Example of Sector Erasing Procedure of Flash Memory
Erase start
FMCS : WE(bit5)
Flash memory erase
enabled
Erase command sequence
FxAAAAH
Fx5554H
FxAAAAH
FxAAAAH
Fx5554H
Input to erase sector (30H)
YES
XXAAH
XX55H
XX80H
XXAAH
XX55H
Is there any
other sector?
NO
Internal address read
Internal address read 1
Sector
erase timer (DQ3)
Internal address read 2
toggle bit (DQ6)
YES
Data 1 (DQ6) =Data 2 (DQ6)
No erasing specification
occurs within 50 μs
additionally.
Set the flag for starting
again from the remainder
andsuspend the erasing.
NO
Timing limit (DQ5)
Internal address read 1
Internal address read 2
NO
Toggle bit (DQ6)
Data 1 (DQ6) =Data 2 (DQ6)
YES
Erase error
Set the flag
for starting again from
the remainder
YES
NO
FMCS : WE(bit5)
Flash memory erase
disabled
Erase complete
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
593
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
25.6.5
MB90330A Series
Flash Memory Sector Erase Suspension
This section describes the procedure to issue the sector erase suspend command and
suspend the sector erase of flash memory. Data can be read from the sector not being
deleted.
■ Flash Memory Sector Erase Suspension
To suspend the sector erase of the flash memory, you can perform the suspension by sending the sector
erase suspend command in the command sequence table (See Table 25.4-1) to the flash memory.
The sector erase suspend command enables you to suspend the erase while erasing a sector and read data
from the sector that is not being erased. In this state, you can only read but cannot write. This command is
enabled only when a sector is being erased including the erase wait time and ignored while erasing or
writing to a chip.
This command can be executed by writing the erase suspend code (B0H), for which the address should
indicate any address in the flash memory. The sector erase suspend command is ignored at the second time
for erase suspend.
If the sector erase suspend command is entered during a sector erase wait period, sector erase wait is
finished immediately and erase operation is stopped, and the state enters in erase-terminated condition.
During sector deletion following the waiting period for sector deletion, if a deletion suspension command is
input, deletion suspension status starts after a maximum of 15 μs. The sector erase suspend command is
performed after 20 μs following the issuance of the sector erase command or sector erase resume
command.
594
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
MB90330A Series
25.6.6
Flash Memory Sector Erase Resumption
The procedure to issue the sector erase restart command and restart the flash memory
sector erase that is suspended is described.
■ Flash Memory Sector Erase Resumption
To restart the suspended sector erase, you can restart by sending the sector erase restart command
sequentially in the command sequence table (See Table 25.4-1) to the flash memory.
The sector erase resume command resumes sector erasing suspended by the sector erase suspend command.
This command can be executed by writing the erase restart code (30H), for which the address should
indicate arbitrary address in the flash memory area.
Further, issuing the sector erase restart command is ignored while erasing a sector.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
595
CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY
25.6 Write/Erase of Flash memory
596
MB90330A Series
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 26
EXAMPLE of CONNECTING
SERIAL WRITING
(FLASH MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMER MODE
by YOKOGAWA DIGITAL COMPUTER CORPORATION)
This chapter describes examples of serial write
connection when using flash microcontroller
programmer mode by Yokogawa Digital Computer
Corporation.
26.1 Basic Configuration
26.2 Oscillation Clock Frequency and Serial Clock Input Frequency
26.3 Flash Microcontroller Programmer System Configuration
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
597
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.1 Basic Configuration
26.1
MB90330A Series
Basic Configuration
The MB90F334A and MB90F335A support the serial on-board programming of flash
ROM (Fujitsu Microelectronics standard). The specification for serial on-board
programming are explained below.
■ The Serial On-board Writing Basic Component
The flash microcontroller programmer made by Yokogawa Digital Computer Corporation is used for
Fujitsu standard serial on-board programming. It is possible to choose between the program operated in
single-chip mode and the program operated in internal ROM external bus mode and to write.
Figure 26.1-1 shows the basic configuration of serial write connection examples.
Figure 26.1-1 Basic Configuration of Example for Serial Write Connection
Host interface cable
General-purpose common
connecting cable
Flash
microcontroller CLK
synchronous serial MB90F334A/
programmer
MB90F335A
User system
Memory card
Stand-alone operation enabled
Note:
Contact Yokogawa Digital Computer Corporation for details of the functions, operations, generalpurpose common connecting cable and applicable connectors of the flash microcontroller programmer.
598
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.1 Basic Configuration
MB90330A Series
■ Pins Used for Fujitsu Standard Serial On-board Programming
Table 26.1-1 shows the function of pins used for Fujitsu standard serial on-board programming.
Table 26.1-1 Function of Used Pins
Pin
Function
MD2,MD1,MD0 Mode Pin
Supplementary Information
Setting MD2=1, MD1=1, and MD0=0 allows the mode to be in the serial write
mode.
X0,X1
Oscillation pins
Because the internal CPU operation clock is set to be the 1 multiplication PLL
clock in the serial write mode, the internal operation clock frequency is the same
as the oscillation clock frequency. When you perform the serial write, the
frequency you can input into the high-speed oscillation input pin is fixed to 6
MHz.
P60,P61
Writing program
activating pins
Input a "L" level to P60 and a "H" level to P61.
RST
Reset
SIN0
Serial data input
SOT0
Serial data output
SCK0
Serial clock input
-
UART0 is used as CLK synchronous mode.
VCC
Supply voltage
The write voltage (VCC=3.3 V ± 0.3 V)
VSS
GND
GND pin is common to the ground of the flash microcontroller programmer.
Figure 26.1-2 Pin Control Circuit
Write control pin
MB90F334A/MB90F335A
Write control pin
10 kΩ
TICS pin
User
Notes:
•
When the P60, P61, SIN0, SOT0, or SCK0 pin is used also in a user system, the control circuit
shown in Figure 26.1-2 is required.
•
During serial write, the user circuit can be disconnected using the /TICS signal from the flash
microcontroller programmer. Please refer to Section "26.4 Example of Connecting Serial
Writing".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
599
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.2 Oscillation Clock Frequency and Serial Clock Input Frequency
26.2
MB90330A Series
Oscillation Clock Frequency and Serial Clock Input
Frequency
The MB90F334A and MB90F335A serial clock frequencies that can be input are
determined by the following expression:
Thus, set up the flash microcontroller programmer to change the serial clock input
frequency corresponding to the using oscillation clock frequency.
■ Oscillation Clock Frequency and Serial Clock Input Frequency
Serial clock frequencies that can be input are determined using the expression below.
Imputable serial clock frequency = 0.125 × oscillation clock frequency.
Table 26.2-1 shows the serial clock frequencies that can be input.
Table 26.2-1 Serial Clock Frequency that can be Input
Oscillation clock frequency
in 6 MHz
600
Maximum serial clock frequency that Maximum serial clock frequency that
can be input to the microcontroller
can be set
750 kHz
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
500 kHz
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.3 Flash Microcontroller Programmer System Configuration
MB90330A Series
26.3
Flash Microcontroller Programmer System Configuration
Table 26.3-1 shows the system configuration of the flash microcontroller programmer.
■ Flash Microcontroller Programmer System
Table 26.3-1 System Configuration of Flash Microcontroller Programme
Product name
Part number
Description
AF420/AC4P
FULL KEY model
100BASE-TX host interface
AF620/AC4P
FULL KEY model
CAN interface
100BASE-TX host interface
AF320/AC4P
Single KEY model
100BASE-TX host interface
AF520/AC4P
Single KEY model
CAN interface
100BASE-TX host interface
Standard Target Probe
AZ410
Standard Target Probe (a): 1 m
Compact Modules
FF801
Control modules for Fujitsu Microelectronics microcontroller
Remote Controller
AZ490
Remote Controller
Flash Microcontroller
Programmer Main Unit
Memory card
-
PC Card
Contact: Yokogawa Digital Computer Corporation Tel: + 81-42-333-6224
Note:
Sales of the AF2xx/AF1xx series products have been terminated since March 31, 2007. The maintenance
(repair) service of the products will be provided for five years from the date of the sales termination.
The customer who hopes for the new or additional purchase of the product might consider the
purchase of the succession product (AF400/300 and AF600/500 series) in the future. For details,
contact Yokokawa Digital Computer Ltd. We will continue the support for Fujitsu microcomputer
successors.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
601
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing
26.4
MB90330A Series
Example of Connecting Serial Writing
The examples of serial write connection is shown.
■ Example of Connecting Serial Writing
Example of connecting serial writing has following two types.
• Connection example in Single-chip mode (when using user power)
• Example of minimum connection to flash microcontroller programmer (when using user power)
602
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing
MB90330A Series
26.4.1
Example Connection in Single-chip Mode
(when Using User Power)
In a user system, from TAUX3 and TMODE of flash microcontroller programmer, "1" for
MD1 and "0" for MD0 are input to the MD2 and MD0 mode pins, which have been set to
the single chip mode; this changes the mode to serial write mode. (Serial write
mode:MD2, MD1, and MD0=110)
■ Connection Example in Single-chip Mode (when Using User Power)
Figure 26.4-1 Example of Connection in Single Chip Mode (with User Power)
User system
Flash microcontroller
programmer
TAUX3
MB90F334A/
MB90F335A
Connector
DX10-28S
MD2
(19)
MD1
TMODE
MD0
X0
(12)
6 MHz
X1
TAUX
(23)
/TICS
(10)
P60
User
/TRES
(5)
RST
P61
User
TTXD
(13)
SIN0
TRXD
(27)
SOT0
TCK
(6)
SCK0
TVCC
(2)
(7,8
GND
VCC
User power
14.15,
21.22,
1,28)
VSS
14 pin
3, 4, 9, 11, 16, 17, 18,
20, 24, 25, 26 pins are OPEN
DX10-28S : Right-angle type
CM44-10129-6E
1 pin
DX10-28S
28 pin
15 pin
Connector (Hirose Electronics Ltd.)
pin assignment
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
603
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing
MB90330A Series
Notes:
604
•
When the SIN0, SOT0, or SCK0 pin is used also in a user system, the control circuit shown in
Figure 26.1-2 is required like P60. (During serial write, the user circuit can be disconnected using
the /TICS signal from the flash microcontroller programmer.)
•
Connect the flash microcontroller programmer while the user power is off.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing
MB90330A Series
26.4.2
Example of Minimum Connection to Flash
Microcontroller Programmer (when Using User Power)
During serial write, when MD2, MD0, and P60 pins are set as shown in Figure 26.4-2, it is
unnecessary to connect these pins with the flash microcontroller programmer.
■ Example of Minimum Connection to Flash Microcontroller Programmer
(when Using User Power)
Figure 26.4-2 Example of Minimum Connection to Flash Microcontroller Programmer
(when Using User Power)
Flash microcontroller
programmer
User system
MB90F334A/
MB90F335A
At rewriting serial 1
MD2
MD1
At rewriting
serial 1
MD0
At rewriting serial 0
X0
6 MHz
X1
P60
At rewriting
serial 0
User circuit
P61
At rewriting serial 1
User circuit
Connector
DX10-28S
/TRES
TTXD
TRXD
TCK
TVcc
GND
(5)
(13)
(27)
(6)
(2)
(7, 8,
14, 15,
21, 22,
1, 28)
3, 4,9, 10, 11, 12, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20, 23, 24, 25, 16
pins are OPEN
DX10-28S : Right-angle type
CM44-10129-6E
RST
SIN0
SOT0
SCK0
Vcc
User power
Vss
14 pin
1 pin
28 pin
15 pin
DX10-28S
Pin assignment by connector
(Hirose Electronics Ltd.)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
605
CHAPTER 26 EXAMPLE of CONNECTING SERIAL WRITING
26.4 Example of Connecting Serial Writing
MB90330A Series
Notes:
606
•
When the SIN0, SOT0, or SCK0 pin is used also in a user system, the control circuit shown in
Figure 26.1-2 is required. (During serial write, the user circuit can be disconnected using the /TICS
signal from the flash microcontroller programmer.)
•
Connect the flash microcontroller programmer while the user power is off.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 27
SERIAL PROGRAMMING
CONNECTION
(FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS
SERIAL PROGRAMMER)
MB90F334A/335A supports serial onboard write (Fujitsu
Microelectronics standard) to flash memory.
This chapter explains the basic configuration for serial
write to flash memory by using the Fujitsu
Microelectronics Serial Programmer.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
607
CHAPTER 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
27.1 Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer
27.1
MB90330A Series
Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer
Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer (software) is an onboard programming tool
for all Fujitsu Microelectronics-made controllers with built-in flash memory.
Two types of Serial Programmer are available according to the PC interface (RS-232C or
USB) used. Choose the type according to your environment.
■ Basic Configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU Programmer
(Clock Asynchronous Serial Write)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU Programmer is used when the PC and microcontroller are
connected through an RS-232C cable. MCU Programmer writes data, through clock asynchronous serial
communication, to built-in flash memory of a microcontroller installed in the user system.
Figure 27.1-1 shows the basic configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU Programmer, and
Table 27.1-1 lists the system configuration.
Figure 27.1-1 Basic Configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU Programmer
*
User system
RS-232C
* RS-232C driver IC is required separately.
Table 27.1-1 System Configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU Programmer
Name
Type
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU
Programmer
-
Specifications
Software (can be downloaded from Web
(registration system))*
* For registration, contact your sales representatives.
608
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
27.1 Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer
MB90330A Series
Figure 27.1-2 shows a connection example.
Figure 27.1-2 Connection Example using FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS MCU Programmer
User system
4.7 kΩ
1 for serial rewriting
1
MB90F334A/335A
MD2
0
Vcc
1
MD1
4.7 kΩ
1
0 for serial rewriting
MD0
0
4.7 kΩ
4.7 kΩ
1
P60
0 for serial rewriting 0
4.7 kΩ
4.7 kΩ
1
0 for serial rewriting
P61
0
4.7 kΩ
X0
6 MHz
X1
RS-232C
driver
RST
SIN0
SOT0
RS-232C
Communication with UART
Vss
Note: The value of the pull-up resistor is just one example. Select the optimum value for each system.
Table 27.1-2 Oscillating frequency and communication baud rate available for clock asynchronous serial
communication
Master Oscillating Frequency
Communication Baud Rate
6 MHz
19200 bps
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
609
CHAPTER 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
27.1 Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer
MB90330A Series
■ Basic Configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer
(Clock Synchronous Serial Write)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer is used when the PC and microcontroller are connected
through an adapter (MB2146-09A-E). USB Programmer writes data, through clock synchronous serial
communication, to built-in flash memory of a microcontroller.
Figure 27.1-3 shows the basic configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer, and
Table 27.1-3 lists the system configuration.
Figure 27.1-3 Basic Configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer
CLK synchronous serial
USB
Adapter (MB2146-09A-E)
User system
Table 27.1-3 System Configuration of FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer
Name
Type
Specifications
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer
-
Software (can be downloaded from Web
(registration system))*
Adapter
MB2146-09A-E
F2MC family BGM adapter
(Accessory: USB cable)
* For registration, contact your sales representatives.
610
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CHAPTER 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
27.1 Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer
MB90330A Series
Figure 27.1-4 shows a connection example.
Figure 27.1-4 Connection example using FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS USB Programmer
3.3 V
MB90F334A/335A
3.3 V
Vcc
Connector of
Yamaichi Electronics Ltd.
FAP-10-08#4-0BS
3.3 V
4.7 kΩ
P60
4.7 kΩ
1 for serial rewriting
MOD2
1, 10
Connector of
Yamaichi Electronics Ltd.
FAP-10-08#4-0BS
Index mark
9 pin
3.3 V
3.3 V
MOD1
1 pin
4.7 kΩ
P61
3.3 V
4.7 kΩ
10 pin
2 pin
MOD0
(TOP VIEW)
"L" for serial rewriting
4.7 kΩ
BGM
Pin name of
Connector microcontroller
BGM
Connector
Pin name of
microcontroller
1
Vcc
6
SCK0
2
GND
7
SIN0
3
RSTX
8
Not connected
4
Not connected
9
GND
10
Vcc
5
SOT0
X0
6 MHz
X1
3
RST
7
SIN0
5
SOT0
6
SCK0
2, 9
Vss
Note: The value of the pull-up resistor is just one example. Select the optimum value for each system.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
611
CHAPTER 27 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
27.1 Fujitsu Microelectronics Serial Programmer
27.1.1
MB90330A Series
Pins Used
Table 27.1-4 Function of Used Pins
Pin
Function
MD2,MD1,MD0 Mode Pin
612
Supplementary Information
Setting MD2=1, MD1=1, and MD0=0 allows the mode to be in the serial write
mode.
X0,X1
Oscillation pins
Because the internal CPU operation clock is set to be the 1 multiplication PLL clock
in the serial write mode, the internal operation clock frequency is the same as the
oscillation clock frequency. When you perform the serial write, the frequency you
can input into the high-speed oscillation input pin is fixed to 6 MHz.
P60,P61
Writing program
activating pins
For CLK synchronous serial writing, input "L" level to P60 and "H" level to P61.
For CLK asynchronous serial writing, input "L" level to P60 and P61.
RST
Reset
SIN0
Serial data input
SOT0
Serial data output
SCK0
Serial clock input
-
UART0 is used in CLK synchronous mode/CLK asynchronous mode.
Note: SCK0 is not used in CLK asynchronous mode.
VCC
Supply voltage
The write voltage (VCC=3.3 V ± 0.3 V)
VSS
GND
GND pin is common to the ground of the flash microcontroller programmer.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
The appendix describes the memory map and the
instructions used in the F2MC-16LX.
APPENDIX A Memory Map
APPENDIX B Instructions
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
613
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
APPENDIX A Memory Map
The memory space divides into three modes.
■ Memory Map
Figure A-1 Memory Map of MB90330A Series (1/3)
Single chip mode (with ROM mirror function)
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
ROM (FF bank)
ROM (FE bank)
ROM (FD bank)
ROM (FC bank)
ROM (FB bank)
ROM (FA bank)
ROM (F9 bank)
ROM (F8 bank)
F80000H
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
007900H
MB90F335A
MB90F334A
MB90V330A
FFFFFFH
FFFFFFH
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
F80000H
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM (FF bank)
ROM (FE bank)
ROM (FD bank)
ROM (FB bank)
ROM (FA bank)
ROM (F9 bank)
FFFFFFH
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
ROM (FF bank)
ROM (FE bank)
ROM (FD bank)
ROM (FC bank)
ROM (FB bank)
ROM (FA bank)
ROM (F9 bank)
ROM (F8 bank)
F80000H
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
007900H
007900H
MB90333A
FFFFFFH
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
F80000H
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM (FF bank)
ROM (FE bank)
ROM (FD bank)
ROM (FB bank)
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
007900H
007100H
006100H
RAM area
(28K bytes)
000100H
Register
0000FBH
000100H
000000H
614
Register
000100H
004100H
RAM area
(16K bytes)
000100H
Register
0000FBH
Peripheral area
Peripheral area
000000H
Register
0000FBH
0000FBH
Peripheral area
RAM area
(30K bytes)
RAM area
(24K bytes)
000000H
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
Peripheral area
000000H
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Notes:
•
For setting the ROM mirror function, see "23. ROM mirror function selection module".
•
When the ROM mirror function register has been set, the mirror image data at higher addresses
(“FF8000H to FFFFFFH”) of bank FF is visible from the higher addresses (“008000H to 00FFFFH”)
of bank 00.
The ROM mirror function is effective for using the C compiler small model.
The lower 16-bit addresses of bank FF are equivalent to those of bank 00. Since the ROM area in
bank FF exceeds 48 Kbytes, however, the mirror image of all the data in the ROM area cannot be
reproduced in bank 00.
When the C compiler small model is used, the data table mirror image can be shown at “008000H
to 00FFFFH” by storing the data table at “FF8000H to FFFFFFH”. Therefore, data tables in the
ROM area can be referred without declaring the far addressing with the pointer.
MB90F335A has the larger size of RAM area than MB90V330A, so that the emulation memory
area needs to be set in the tools for a larger size of emulation area than 007100H. For details of
setting, please refer to "Notes on Debug Environment Setting for MB90330A Series" by clicking
"Application note" at the following URL.
•
•
•
•
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/micom/en-support/
• Access to the emulation memory area (007100H to 0078FFH) is 3 cycles, which is greater by one
cycle than access to the mounted RAM area.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
615
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Figure A-2 Memory Map of MB90330A Series (2/3)
Internal ROM external bus mode (with ROM mirror function)
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
ROM (FF bank)
ROM (FE bank)
ROM (FD bank)
ROM (FC bank)
ROM (FB bank)
ROM (FA bank)
ROM (F9 bank)
ROM (F8 bank)
F80000H
FFFFFFH
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
F80000H
Extenal area
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
007900H
MB90F335A
MB90F334A
MB90V330A
FFFFFFH
FFFFFFH
ROM (FF bank)
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
ROM (FE bank)
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
ROM (FD bank)
*1
ROM (FB bank)
ROM (FA bank)
ROM (F9 bank)
*1
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
ROM (FD bank)
ROM (FC bank)
ROM (FB bank)
ROM (FA bank)
ROM (F9 bank)
ROM (F8 bank)
FF0000H
FEFFFFH
FE0000H
FDFFFFH
FD0000H
FCFFFFH
FC0000H
FBFFFFH
FB0000H
FAFFFFH
FA0000H
F9FFFFH
F90000H
F8FFFFH
F80000H
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
00FFFFH
008000H
007FFFH
Extenal area
Register
RAM
(30K bytes)
0000FBH
RAM
(24K bytes)
000100H
Register
000000H
000100H
Peripheral area
000000H
Register
0000FBH
0000FBH
Peripheral area
ROM (FD bank)
*2
ROM (FB bank)
*2
Extenal area
Extenal area
ROM
(image of FF bank)
Peripheral area
Extenal area
006100H
000100H
ROM (FE bank)
007900H
007100H
RAM
(28K bytes)
ROM (FF bank)
Extenal area
Extenal area
007900H
007900H
Extenal area
ROM (FE bank)
F80000H
Extenal area
00FFFFH
ROM (FF bank)
MB90333A
FFFFFFH
004100H
RAM
(16K bytes)
Register
000100H
0000FBH
Peripheral area
000000H
Peripheral area
000000H
*1: In the area of F80000H to F8FFFFH and FC0000H to FCFFFFH at MB90F334 a value of "1" is read at read operating.
*2: In the area of FA0000H to FAFFFFH and FC0000H to FCFFFFH at MB90333, a value of "1" is read at read operating.
Notes:
•
For setting the ROM mirror function, see "23. ROM mirror function selection module" in "■ PERIPHERAL
RESOURCES".
•
When the ROM mirror function register has been set, the mirror image data at higher addresses
(“FF8000H to FFFFFFH”) of bank FF is visible from the higher addresses (“008000H to 00FFFFH”)
of bank 00.
The ROM mirror function is effective for using the C compiler small model.
The lower 16-bit addresses of bank FF are equivalent to those of bank 00. Since the ROM area in
bank FF exceeds 48 Kbytes, however, the mirror image of all the data in the ROM area cannot be
reproduced in bank 00.
When the C compiler small model is used, the data table mirror image can be shown at “008000H
to 00FFFFH” by storing the data table at “FF8000H to FFFFFFH”. Therefore, data tables in the
ROM area can be referred without declaring the far addressing with the pointer.
MB90F335A has the larger size of RAM area than MB90V330A, so that the emulation memory
area needs to be set in the tools for a larger size of emulation area than 007100H. For details of
setting, please refer to "Notes on Debug Environment Setting for MB90330A Series" by clicking
"Application note" at the following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/micom/en-support/
Access to the emulation memory area (007100H to 0078FFH) is 3 cycles, which is greater by one
cycle than access to the mounted RAM area.
•
•
•
•
•
616
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Figure A-3 Memory Map of MB90330A Series (3/3)
External ROM external bus mode
FFFFFFH
FFFFFFH
FFFFFFH
Extenal area
008000H
007FFFH
Extenal area
007900H
MB90F335A
MB90F334A
MB90V330A
Extenal area
007900H
Extenal area
FFFFFFH
Extenal area
Extenal area
Extenal area
008000H
007FFFH
008000H
007FFFH
MB90333A
007900H
008000H
007FFFH
Extenal area
Extenal area
Extenal area
007100H
RAM area
(28K bytes)
Register
000100H
0000FBH
006100H
000100H
000100H
Peripheral area
000000H
Register
0000FBH
0000FBH
Peripheral area
000000H
RAM area
(30K bytes)
RAM area
(24K bytes)
Register
Extenal area
007900H
004100H
RAM area
(16K bytes)
000100H
Register
0000FBH
Peripheral area
000000H
Peripheral area
000000H
Notes:
•
For setting the ROM mirror function, see "23. ROM mirror function selection module" in "■ PERIPHERAL
RESOURCES".
•
When the ROM mirror function register has been set, the mirror image data at higher addresses
(“FF8000H to FFFFFFH”) of bank FF is visible from the higher addresses (“008000H to 00FFFFH”)
of bank 00.
The ROM mirror function is effective for using the C compiler small model.
The lower 16-bit addresses of bank FF are equivalent to those of bank 00. Since the ROM area in
bank FF exceeds 48 Kbytes, however, the mirror image of all the data in the ROM area cannot be
reproduced in bank 00.
When the C compiler small model is used, the data table mirror image can be shown at “008000H
to 00FFFFH” by storing the data table at “FF8000H to FFFFFFH”. Therefore, data tables in the
ROM area can be referred without declaring the far addressing with the pointer.
MB90F335A has the larger size of RAM area than MB90V330A, so that the emulation memory
area needs to be set in the tools for a larger size of emulation area than 007100H. For details of
setting, please refer to "Notes on Debug Environment Setting for MB90330A Series" by clicking
"Application note" at the following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/micom/en-support/
•
•
•
•
• Access to the emulation memory area (007100H to 0078FFH) is 3 cycles, which is greater by one
cycle than access to the mounted RAM area.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
617
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
■ I/O Map
Table A-1 lists addresses assigned to registers of each peripheral function.
Table A-1 I/O Map (1 / 9)
Address
Registers
Abbreviation
Access
Release
Initial value
000000H Port 0 data register
PDR0
R/W
Port 0
XXXXXXXX
000001H Port 1 data register
PDR1
R/W
Port 1
XXXXXXXX
000002H Port 2 data register
PDR2
R/W
Port 2
XXXXXXXX
000003H Port 3 data register
PDR3
R/W
Port 3
XXXXXXXX
000004H Port 4 data register
PDR4
R/W
Port 4
XXXXXXXX
000005H Port 5 data register
PDR5
R/W
Port 5
XXXXXXXX
000006H Port 6 data register
PDR6
R/W
Port 6
XXXXXXXX
000007H Port 7 data register
PDR7
R/W
Port 7
XXXXXXXX
000008H Port 8 data register
PDR8
R/W
Port 8
XXXXXXXX
000009H Port 9 data register
PDR9
R/W
Port 9
-XXXXXXX
00000AH Port A data register
PDRA
R/W
Port A
XXXXXXXX
00000BH
Use prohibited
00000CH Port B data register
PDRB
R/W
Port B
-XXXXXXX
00000DH Port B direction register
DDRB
R/W
Port B
-0000000
00000EH
Use prohibited
00000FH
000010H Port 0 data direction register
DDR0
R/W
Port 0
00000000
000011H Port 1 direction register
DDR1
R/W
Port 1
00000000
000012H Port 2 direction register
DDR2
R/W
Port 2
00000000
000013H Port 3 direction register
DDR3
R/W
Port 3
00000000
000014H Port 4 direction register
DDR4
R/W
Port 4
00000000
000015H Port 5 direction register
DDR5
R/W
Port 5
00000000
000016H Port 6 direction register
DDR6
R/W
Port 6
00000000
000017H Port 7 direction register
DDR7
R/W
Port 7
00000000
000018H Port 8 direction register
DDR8
R/W
Port 8
00000000
000019H Port 9 direction register
DDR9
R/W
Port 9
-0000000
00001AH Port A direction register
DDRA
R/W
Port A
00000000
00001BH Port 4 output terminal register
ODR4
R/W
Port 4 (OD
control)
00000000
00001CH Port 0 Pull-up resistance register
RDR0
R/W
Port 0(PULLUP)
00000000
00001DH Port 1 Pull-up resistance register
RDR1
R/W
Port 1(PULLUP)
00000000
00001EH Analog input enable register 0
ADER0
R/W
Port 7,A/D
11111111
00001FH Analog input enable register 1
ADER1
R/W
Port 8,A/D
11111111
618
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (2 / 9)
Address
Abbreviation
Access
000020H Serial mode register 1
SMR0
R/W
000021H Serial control register 0
SCR0
R/W,W
000022H
Registers
Serial input data register 0/serial output data
SIDR0/ SODR0
register 0
000023H Serial Status Register 0
R/W
SSR0
R/W,R
000024H UART prescaler reload register 0
UTRLR0
R/W
000025H UART prescaler control register 0
UTCR0
R/W
000026H Serial mode register 1
SMR1
R/W
000027H Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W,W
000028H
Serial input data register 1/serial output data
SIDR1/ SODR1
register 1
000029H Serial status register 1
R/W
Release
Initial value
00100000
00000100
UART0
XXXXXXXX
00001000
Communication
Prescaler (UART0)
00000000
0000-000
00100000
00000100
UART1
XXXXXXXX
SSR1
R/W,R
00002AH UART prescaler reload register 1
UTRLR1
R/W
00002BH UART prescaler control register 1
UTCR1
R/W
00002CH Serial mode register 2
SMR2
R/W
00100000
00002DH Serial control register 2
SCR2
R/W,W
00000100
00002EH
Serial input data register 2/serial output data
SIDR2/ SODR2
register 2
00002FH Serial Status Register 2
R/W
00001000
Communication
Prescaler (UART1)
UART2
00000000
0000-000
XXXXXXXX
SSR2
R/W,R
000030H UART prescaler reload register 2
UTRLR2
R/W
000031H UART prescaler control register 2
UTCR2
R/W
000032H Serial mode register 3
SMR3
R/W
00100000
000033H Serial control register 3
SCR3
R/W,W
00000100
000034H
Serial input data register 3/serial output data
SIDR3/ SODR3
register 3
000035H Serial Status Register 3
R/W
SSR3
R/W,R
000036H UART prescaler reload register 3
UTRLR3
R/W
000037H UART prescaler control register 3
UTCR3
R/W
000038H
to
00003BH
Communication
Prescaler (UART2)
UART3
00000000
0000-000
XXXXXXXX
00001000
Communication
Prescaler (UART3)
00000000
0000-000
Use prohibited
00003CH DTP/interruption permission register
ENIR
R/W
00003DH DTP/interruption request register
EIRR
R/W
00003EH
00001000
Request level set register subordinate
position
00003FH High rank of request level set register
CM44-10129-6E
ELVR
R/W
R/W
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
00000000
DTP/external
interrupt
00000000
00000000
00000000
619
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (3 / 9)
Address
Registers
Abbreviation
Access
000040H A/D Control Status Register (Low)
ADCS0
R/W
000041H A/D Control Status Register (High)
ADCS1
R/W,W
000042H A/D Data Register (Low)
ADCR0
R
000043H A/D Data Register (High)
ADCR1
W,R
000044H
Release
Initial value
00-----0
8/10-bit A/D
converter
00000000
XXXXXXXX
00101XXX
Use prohibited
Analog to digital conversion channel
selection register
ADMR
R/W
8/10-bit A/D
converter
00000000
000046H PPG0 operation mode control register
PPGC0
R/W
PPG ch.0
0X000XX1
000047H PPG1 operation mode control register
PPGC1
R/W
PPG ch.1
0X000001
000048H PPG2 operation mode control register
PPGC2
R/W
PPG ch.2
0X000XX1
000049H PPG3 operation mode control register
PPGC3
R/W
PPG ch.3
0X000001
00004AH PPG4 operation mode control register
PPGC5
R/W
PPG ch.4
0X000XX1
00004BH PPG5 operation mode control register
PPGC6
R/W
PPG ch.5
0X000001
00004CH PPG0,1 output control register
PPG01
R/W
PPG ch.0/1
000000XX
R/W
PPG ch.2/3
000000XX
R/W
PPG ch.4/5
000000XX
000045H
00004DH
Use prohibited
00004EH PPG2,3 output control register
00004FH
PPG23
Use prohibited
000050H PPG4,5 output control register
000051H
PPG45
Use prohibited
000052H Input capture control status register 01
ICS01
R/W
Input capture 0/1
00000000
000053H Input capture control status register 23
ICS23
R/W
Input capture 2/3
00000000
000054H
Low order of output compare control
register ch.0
OCS0
R/W
000055H
High order of output compare control
register ch.1
OCS1
R/W
000056H
Low order of output compare control
register ch.2
OCS2
R/W
000057H
High order of output compare control
register ch.3
OCS3
R/W
Serial mode control status register
SMCS
R/W
SDR
R/W
SDCR
R/W
PWC Control Status Registers
PWCSR
R/W,R
PWC data buffer register
PWCR
R/W
PWC ratio of dividing frequency
control register
DIVR
R/W
000058H
000059H
00005AH Serial data register
00005BH Communication Prescaler Control Register
00005CH
00005DH
00005EH
00005FH
000060H
620
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
Output compare
ch.0/1
Output compare
ch.2/3
0000--00
---00000
0000--00
---00000
XXXX0000
I/O Extended serial
00000010
XXXXXXXX
Communication
Prescaler
0XXX0000
00000000
0000000X
16-bit PWC timer
00000000
00000000
------00
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (4 / 9)
Address
Registers
000061H
000062H
000063H
000064H
000065H
000066H
000067H
000068H
000069H
00006AH
00006BH
00006CH
00006DH
Abbreviation
Access
Initial value
Use prohibited
Timer control status register 0
Low order of 16-bit timer register 0
Low order of 16-bit reloading 0
High order of 16-bit timer register 0
TMCSR0
R/W
TMR0
R
TMRLR0
W
00000000
XXXX0000
16bit reload timer
ch.0
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
TMR0
R
XXXXXXXX
High order of 16-bit reloading 0
TMRLR0
W
XXXXXXXX
Timer control status register 1
TMCSR1
R/W
TMR1
R
TMRLR1
W
TMR1
R
XXXXXXXX
High order of 16-bit reloading 1
TMRLR1
W
XXXXXXXX
Timer control status register 2
TMCSR2
R/W
TMR2
R
TMRLR2
W
TMR2
R
XXXXXXXX
TMRLR2
W
XXXXXXXX
Low order of 16-bit timer register 1
Low order of 16-bit reloading 1
High order of 16-bit timer register 1
Low order of 16-bit timer register 2
Low order of 16-bit reloading 2
High order of 16-bit timer register 2
High order of 16-bit reloading 2
00006EH
00000000
XXXX0000
16bit reload timer
ch.1
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
00000000
XXXX0000
16bit reload timer
ch.2
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Use prohibited
00006FH ROM Mirroring Function Select Register
ROMM
R/W,W
000070H I2C bus status register 0
IBSR0
R
000071H I2C bus control register 0
IBCR0
R/W
000072H
Release
I2C
ROM mirror
function
------11
00000000
00000000
I2C
ICCR0
R/W
000073H I2C bus address register 0
IADR0
R/W
XXXXXXXX
000074H I2C bus data register 0
IDAR0
R/W
XXXXXXXX
bus clock control register 0
000075H
interface ch.0
XX0XXXXX
Use prohibited
000076H I2C bus status register 1
IBSR1
R
00000000
000077H I2C bus control register 1
IBCR1
R/W
00000000
000078H I2C bus clock control register 1
ICCR1
R/W
000079H I2C bus address register 1
IADR1
R/W
XXXXXXXX
IDAR1
R/W
XXXXXXXX
2
00007AH I C bus data register 1
00007BH
CM44-10129-6E
I2C interface ch.1
XX0XXXXX
Use prohibited
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
621
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (5 / 9)
Address
Registers
Abbreviation
Access
IBSR2
R
00000000
IBCR2
R/W
00000000
ICCR2
R/W
00007FH I C bus address register 2
IADR2
R/W
XXXXXXXX
000080H I2C bus data register 2
IDAR2
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
00000000
R/W
00000000
00007CH I2C bus status register 2
00007DH
I2C
bus control register 2
00007EH I2C clock control register 2
2
000081H
to
000085H
Release
I2C interface ch.2
Initial value
XX0XXXXX
Use prohibited
000086H Low order of timer counter data register
000087H High order of timer counter data register
000088H Timer control status register, lower
000089H Timer control status register, higher
00008AH Low order of compare clear register
TCDT
TCCS
R/W
R/W
16-bit free-run
timer
00000000
0XX00000
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
DCSR
R/W
00000000
00009CH Low order of DMA status register
DSRL
R/W
00009DH Low order of DMA status register
DSRH
R/W
00009EH
Program address detection control
status register
PACSR
R/W
Address compare
detection
00000000
00009FH
Delay interruption factor generation/release
register
DIRR
R/W
Delayed interrupt
-------0
0000A0H
Low-power consumption mode
control register
LPMCR
R/W,W
Low power
consumption
00011000
CKSCR
R/W,R
Clock
11111100
μDMAC
00000000
00008BH High order of compare clear register
00008CH
to
00009AH
00009BH
CPCLR
Use prohibited
DMA descriptor channel specification
register
0000A1H Clock select register
0000A2H
μDMAC
00000000
00000000
Use prohibited
0000A3H
0000A4H DMA stop status register
DSSR
R/W
0000A5H Automatic ready function selection register
ARSR
W
0000A6H External address output control register
HACR
W
0000A7H Bus control signal selection register
EPCR
W
0000A8H Watchdog timer control register
WDTC
R,W
Watchdog
Timers
X-XXX111
0000A9H Time-base timer control register
TBTC
R/W,W
Time-base
Timers
1--00100
0000AAH Watch timer control register
WTC
R/W,R
Watch timer
10001000
0000ABH
622
0011--00
External pin
********
1000*10-
Use prohibited
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (6 / 9)
Address
Registers
Abbreviation
Access
0000ACH Low order of DMA permission register
DERL
R/W
0000ADH High order of DMA permission register
DERH
R/W
0000AEH Flash memory control status register
FMCS
R/W,R,W
0000AFH
Release
μDMAC
Flash memory I/F
Initial value
00000000
00000000
000X0000
Use prohibited
0000B0H Interrupt control registers 00
ICR00
R/W
00000111
0000B1H Interrupt control registers 01
ICR01
R/W
00000111
0000B2H Interrupt control registers 02
ICR02
R/W
0000B3H Interrupt control registers 03
ICR03
R/W
00000111
0000B4H Interrupt control registers 04
ICR04
R/W
00000111
0000B5H Interrupt control registers 05
ICR05
R/W
00000111
0000B6H Interrupt control registers 06
ICR06
R/W
00000111
0000B7H Interrupt control registers 07
ICR07
R/W
00000111
0000B8H Interrupt control registers 08
ICR08
R/W
00000111
0000B9H Interrupt control registers 09
ICR09
R/W
00000111
0000BAH Interrupt control registers 10
ICR10
R/W
0000BBH Interrupt control registers 11
ICR11
R/W
00000111
0000BCH Interrupt control registers 12
ICR12
R/W
00000111
0000BDH Interrupt control registers 13
ICR13
R/W
00000111
0000BEH Interrupt control registers 14
ICR14
R/W
00000111
0000BFH Interrupt control registers 15
ICR15
R/W
00000111
0000C0H Host control register 0
HCNT0
R/W
00000000
0000C1H Host control register 1
HCNT1
R/W
00000001
0000C2H Host interruption register
HIRQ
R/W
00000000
0000C3H Host error status register
HERR
R/W
00000011
0000C4H Host state status register
HSTATE
R/W,R
XX010010
HFCOMP
R/W
00000000
0000C5H
SOF interruption FRAME comparison
register
Interrupt controller
Interrupt controller
0000C6H
HRTIMER
R/W
0000C8H
HADR
R/W
HEOF
R/W
HFRAME
R/W
0000CEH Host token end point register
HTOKEN
R/W
0000CFH
Use prohibited
0000CCH
0000CDH
USB HOST
00000000
XXXXXX00
0000C9H Host address register
0000CBH
00000111
00000000
0000C7H Retry timer setting register
0000CAH
00000111
EOF setting register
FRAME setting register
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
X0000000
00000000
XX000000
00000000
XXXXX000
00000000
623
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (7 / 9)
Address
Abbreviation
Access
UDC control register
UDCC
R/W
EP0 control register
EP0C
EP1 control register
EP1C
EP2 control register
EP2C
EP3 control register
EP3C
EP4 control register
EP4C
EP5 control register
EP5C
Time stamp register
TMSP
0000E0H UDC status register
0000E1H UDC interruption permission register
0000D0H
0000D1H
0000D2H
0000D3H
0000D4H
0000D5H
0000D6H
0000D7H
0000D8H
0000D9H
0000DAH
0000DBH
0000DCH
0000DDH
0000DEH
0000DFH
0000E2H
0000E3H
0000E4H
0000E5H
0000E6H
0000E7H
0000E8H
0000E9H
0000EAH
0000EBH
0000ECH
0000EDH
0000EEH
0000EFH
0000F0H
0000F1H
0000F2H
0000F3H
624
Registers
Release
Initial value
10100000
00000000
R/W
01000000
R/W
XXXX0000
R/W
00000000
R/W
01100001
R/W
01000000
R/W
01100000
R/W
01000000
R/W
01100000
R/W
01000000
R/W
01100000
R/W
01000000
R/W
01100000
R
00000000
R
XXXXX000
UDCS
R/W
XX000000
UDCIE
R/W,R
EP0I status register
EP0IS
EP0O status register
EP0OS
EP1 status register
EP1S
EP2 status register
EP2S
EP3 status register
EP3S
EP4 status register
EP4S
EP5 status register
EP5S
EP0 data register
EP0DT
EP1 data register
EP1DT
R/W
USB function
00000000
XXXXXXXX
R/W
10XXX1XX
R/W,R
0XXXXXXX
R/W
100XX000
R
XXXXXXXX
R/W,R
1000000X
R
0XXXXXXX
R/W,R
10000000
R
0XXXXXXX
R/W,R
10000000
R
0XXXXXXX
R/W,R
10000000
R
0XXXXXXX
R/W,R
10000000
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (8 / 9)
Address
0000F4H
0000F5H
0000F6H
0000F7H
0000F8H
0000F9H
0000FAH
0000FBH
Registers
Abbreviation
EP2 data register
EP2DT
EP3 data register
EP3DT
EP4 data register
EP4DT
EP5 data register
EP5DT
0000FCH
to
0000FFH
Use prohibited
000100H
to #H
RAM Area
Access
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
R/W
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
001FF1H
Middle order of program address detection
register ch.0
001FF2H
High order of program address detection
register ch.0
R/W
001FF3H
Low order of program address detection
register ch.1
R/W
001FF4H
Middle order of program address detection
register ch.1
001FF5H
High order of program address detection
register ch.1
Address Match
detection
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
#H to
0078FFH
Unused area
007900H Lower ch.0 of PPG reload register
PRLL0
R/W
007901H Higher ch.0 of PPG reload register
PRLH0
R/W
007902H Lower ch.1 of PPG reload register
PRLL1
R/W
007903H Higher ch.1 of PPG reload register
PRLH1
R/W
007904H Lower ch.2 of PPG reload register
PRLL2
R/W
007905H Higher ch.2 of PPG reload register
PRLH2
R/W
007906H Lower ch.3 of PPG reload register
PRLL3
R/W
007907H Higher ch.3 of PPG reload register
PRLH3
R/W
007908H Lower ch.4 of PPG reload register
PRLL4
R/W
007909H Higher ch.4 of PPG reload register
PRLH4
R/W
00790AH Lower ch.5 of PPG reload register
PRLL5
R/W
00790BH Higher ch.5 of PPG reload register
PRLH5
R/W
CM44-10129-6E
USB function
R/W
Low order of program address detection
register ch.0
PADR1
Initial value
R/W
001FF0H
PADR0
Release
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
PPG ch.0
PPG ch.1
PPG ch.2
PPG ch.3
PPG ch.4
PPG ch.5
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
625
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
Table A-1 I/O Map (9 / 9)
Address
Registers
00790CH
to
00790FH
Abbreviation
Access
Release
Initial value
Use prohibited
007910H Input Capture Data Register lower ch.0
007911H Input Capture Data Register upper ch.0
007912H Input Capture Data Register lower ch.1
007913H Input Capture Data Register upper ch.1
007914H Input Capture Data Register lower ch.2
007915H Input Capture Data Register upper ch.2
007916H Input Capture Data Register lower ch.3
007917H Input Capture Data Register upper ch.3
007918H Lower ch.0 of output compare register
007919H Higher ch.0 of output compare register
00791AH Lower ch.1 of output compare register
00791BH Higher ch.1 of output compare register
00791CH Lower ch.2 of output compare register
00791DH Higher ch.2 of output compare register
00791EH Lower ch.3 of output compare register
00791FH Higher ch.3 of output compare register
IPCP0
IPCP1
IPCP2
IPCP3
OCCP0
OCCP1
OCCP2
OCCP3
R
R
R
XXXXXXXX
Input capture
ch.0/1
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
R
XXXXXXXX
R
XXXXXXXX
R
R
Input capture
ch.2/3
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
R
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
R/W
Output compare
ch.0/1
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
R/W
R/W
Output compare
ch.2/3
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007920H DMA Buffer address pointer lower 8 bit
DBAPL
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007921H DMA Buffer address pointer middle 8 bit
DBAPM
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007922H DMA Buffer address pointer upper 8 bit
DBAPH
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007923H DMA control register
DMACS
R/W
XXXXXXXX
μDMAC
007924H
DMA I/O Register Address Pointer lower 8
bit
DIOAL
R/W
007925H
DMA I/O Register Address Pointer upper 8
bit
DIOAH
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007926H Lower 8 bits of DMA data counter
DDCTL
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007927H Higher 8 bits of DMA data counter
DDCTH
R/W
XXXXXXXX
007928H
to
007FFFH
Use prohibited
XXXXXXXX
• Explanation of reading/writing
R/W: Readable and Writable
R: Read only
W: Write only
• Explanation of initial value
0: The initial value is "0".
626
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
1: The initial value is "1".
X: The initial value is irregular.
-: It is Undefined bit. The initial value is indefinite.
*: The initial value is "1" or "0".
Note:
You cannot use any I/O-related command to registers that are placed from 7900H to 7FFFH.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
627
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
■ Interrupt Factors, Interrupt Vectors, and Interrupt Control Registers
Table A-2 lists the correspondence between interrupt factors, and interrupt vectors and interrupt control
registers.
Table A-2 Correspondence between Interrupt Factors, and Interrupt Vectors and Interrupt Control
Registers
EI2OS
Clear
Interrupt cause
Reset
INT9 instruction
Exception
USB function 1
USB function 2
USB function 3
USB function 4
USB HOST 1
USB HOST 2
0, 1
2 to 6 *
I2C ch.0
DTP/External interrupt ch.0/ch.1
❍
I2C ch.1
DTP/External interrupt ch.2/ch.3
❍
I2C ch.2
DTP/External interrupt ch.4/ch.5
PWC/reload timer ch.0
DTP/External interrupt ch.6/ch.7
Input capture ch.0/ch.1
Reload timer ch.1
Input capture ch.2/ch.3
Reload timer ch.2
Output compare ch.0/ch.1
PPG ch.0/ch.1
Output comparech.2/ch.3
PPG ch.2/ch.3
❍
Interrupt vector
Address
ICR
Address
#08
#09
#10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
#16
FFFFDCH
FFFFD8H
FFFFD4H
FFFFD0H
FFFFCCH
FFFFC8H
FFFFC4H
FFFFC0H
FFFFBCH
-
-
ICR00
0000B0H
ICR01
0000B1H
ICR02
0000B2H
#17
FFFFB8H
#18
FFFFB4H
ICR03
0000B3H
#19
FFFFB0H
#20
FFFFACH
ICR04
0000B4H
#21
FFFFA8H
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
ICR05
0000B5H
ICR06
0000B6H
ICR07
0000B7H
ICR08
0000B8H
ICR09
0000B9H
ICR10
0000BAH
ICR11
0000BBH
ICR12
0000BCH
ICR13
0000BDH
ICR14
0000BEH
ICR15
0000BFH
❍
#29
#30
❍
#31
#32
FFFF80H
FFFF7CH
#33
#34
#35
#36
FFFF78H
FFFF74H
FFFF70H
FFFF6CH
#37
#38
#39
#40
#41
#42
FFFF68H
FFFF64H
FFFF60H
FFFF5CH
FFFF58H
FFFF54H
14
Δ
Δ
7
Δ
Δ
8
Δ
❍
11
Δ
10
15
❍
13
9
12
Interrupt control
register
Number
FFFFA4H
FFFFA0H
FFFF9CH
FFFF98H
FFFF94H
FFFF90H
FFFF8CH
FFFF88H
FFFF84H
Δ
UART transmit end ch.2/ch.3
PPG ch.4/ch.5
UART receive end ch.2/ch.3
Analog to digital conversion / free-run timer
UART transmit end ch.0/ch.1
Extended serial I/O
UART receive end ch.0/ch.1
Time-base timer /Watch timer
Flash writing/deletion
Delay interrupt generation module
628
μDMAC
Channel
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Memory Map
MB90330A Series
: Available. With the EI2OS stop function (the interrupt request flag is cleared with the interrupt clear signal. With a stop
request.)
❍: Available (the interrupt request flag is cleared with the interrupt clear signal.)
Δ: Usable at non-using interrupt source of sharing
: Use disabled
*: Channels 2 and 3 can use even when USB HOST is operated.
Notes:
• If the same interrupt control register (ICR) has two interrupt factors and the use of the EI2OS is
permitted, the EI2OS is activated when either of the factors is detected. As any interrupt other than
the activation factor is masked while the EI2OS is running, it is recommended that you should mask
either of the interrupt requests when using the EI2OS.
• The interrupt flag is cleared by the EI2OS interrupt clear signal for the resource that has two
interrupt factors in the same interrupt control register (ICR).
• When the same interrupt number has two interrupt factors, both interrupt request flags for a
resource are cleared with the μDMAC interrupt clear signal. Therefore, when you use either of two
interrupt factors for the DMAC function, another interrupt function is disabled. Set the interrupt
request permission bit to "0" in the appropriate resource, and take measures by software polling.
■ Type and Function of USB Interrupt
USB interrupt factor
Details
USB function1
End Point0-IN End Point0-OUT
USB function 2
End Point1 to 5 *
USB function 3
SUSP SOF BRST WKUP CONF
USB function 4
SPK
USB HOST 1
DIRQ CNNIRQ URIRQ RWKIRQ
USB HOST 2
SOFIRQ CMPIRQ
*: End Point 1 and 2 can use even when USB HOST is operated.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
629
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
APPENDIX B Instructions
APPENDIX B describes the instructions used by the F2MC-16LX.
B.1 Instruction Types
B.2 Addressing
B.3 Direct Addressing
B.4 Indirect Addressing
B.5 Execution Cycle Count
B.6 Effective address field
B.7 How to Read the Instruction List
B.8 F2MC-16LX Instruction List
B.9 Instruction Map
Code: CM44-00202-3E
630
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
B.1
Instruction Types
The F2MC-16LX supports 351 types of instructions. Addressing is enabled by using an
effective address field of each instruction or using the instruction code itself.
■ Instruction Types
The F2MC-16LX supports the following 351 types of instructions:
•
41 transfer instructions (byte)
•
38 transfer instructions (word or long word)
•
42 addition/subtraction instructions (byte, word, or long word)
•
12 increment/decrement instructions (byte, word, or long word)
•
11 comparison instructions (byte, word, or long word)
•
11 unsigned multiplication/division instructions (word or long word)
•
11 signed multiplication/division instructions (word or long word)
•
39 logic instructions (byte or word)
•
6 logic instructions (long word)
•
6 sign inversion instructions (byte or word)
•
1 normalization instruction (long word)
•
18 shift instructions (byte, word, or long word)
•
50 branch instructions
•
6 accumulator operation instructions (byte or word)
•
28 other control instructions (byte, word, or long word)
•
21 bit operation instructions
•
10 string instructions
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
631
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
B.2
MB90330A Series
Addressing
With the F2MC-16LX, the address format is determined by the instruction effective
address field or the instruction code itself (implied). When the address format is
determined by the instruction code itself, specify an address in accordance with the
instruction code used. Some instructions permit the user to select several types of
addressing.
■ Addressing
The F2MC-16LX supports the following 23 types of addressing:
632
•
Immediate (#imm)
•
Register direct
•
Direct branch address (addr16)
•
Physical direct branch address (addr24)
•
I/O direct (io)
•
Abbreviated direct address (dir)
•
Direct address (addr16)
•
I/O direct bit address (io:bp)
•
Abbreviated direct bit address (dir:bp)
•
Direct bit address (addr16:bp)
•
Vector address (#vct)
•
Register indirect (@RWj j = 0 to 3)
•
Register indirect with post increment (@RWj+ j = 0 to 3)
•
Register indirect with displacement (@RWi + disp8 i = 0 to 7, @RWj + disp16 j = 0 to 3)
•
Long register indirect with displacement (@RLi + disp8 i = 0 to 3)
•
Program counter indirect with displacement (@PC + disp16)
•
Register indirect with base index (@RW0 + RW7, @RW1 + RW7)
•
Program counter relative branch address (rel)
•
Register list (rlst)
•
Accumulator indirect (@A)
•
Accumulator indirect branch address (@A)
•
Indirectly-specified branch address (@ear)
•
Indirectly-specified branch address (@eam)
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
■ Effective Address Field
Table B.2-1 lists the address formats specified by the effective address field.
Table B.2-1 Effective Address Field
Code
Representation
00
R0
RW0
RL0
01
R1
RW1
(RL0)
02
R2
RW2
RL1
03
R3
RW3
(RL1)
04
R4
RW4
RL2
05
R5
RW5
(RL2)
06
R6
RW6
RL3
07
R7
RW7
(RL3)
08
@RW0
09
@RW1
Address format
Default bank
Register direct: Individual parts correspond to the
byte, word, and long word types in order from the
left.
None
DTB
DTB
Register indirect
0A
@RW2
ADB
0B
@RW3
SPB
0C
@RW0+
DTB
0D
@RW1+
DTB
Register indirect with post increment
0E
@RW2+
ADB
0F
@RW3+
SPB
10
@RW0+disp8
DTB
11
@RW1+disp8
DTB
Register indirect with 8-bit displacement
12
@RW2+disp8
ADB
13
@RW3+disp8
SPB
14
@RW4+disp8
DTB
15
@RW5+disp8
DTB
Register indirect with 8-bit displacement
16
@RW6+disp8
ADB
17
@RW7+disp8
SPB
18
@RW0+disp16
DTB
19
@RW1+disp16
DTB
Register indirect with 16-bit displacement
CM44-10129-6E
1A
@RW2+disp16
ADB
1B
@RW3+disp16
SPB
1C
@RW0+RW7
Register indirect with index
DTB
1D
@RW1+RW7
Register indirect with index
DTB
1E
@PC+disp16
PC indirect with 16-bit displacement
PCB
1F
addr16
Direct address
DTB
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
633
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
B.3
MB90330A Series
Direct Addressing
An operand value, register, or address is specified explicitly in direct addressing mode.
■ Direct Addressing
● Immediate addressing (#imm)
Specify an operand value explicitly (#imm4/ #imm8/ #imm16/ #imm32).
Figure B.3-1 Example of Immediate Addressing (#imm)
MOVW A, #01212H (This instruction stores the operand value in A.)
Before execution
A 2233
4455
After execution
A 4455
1 2 1 2 (Some instructions transfer AL to AH.)
● Register direct addressing
Specify a register explicitly as an operand. Table B.3-1 lists the registers that can be specified. Figure B.3-2
shows an example of register direct addressing.
Table B.3-1 Direct Addressing Registers
General-purpose register
Special-purpose register
Byte
R0, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7
Word
RW0, RW1, RW2, RW3, RW4, RW5, RW6,
RW7
Long word
RL0, RL1, RL2, RL3
Accumulator
A, AL
Pointer
SP *
Bank
PCB, DTB, USB, SSB, ADB
Page
DPR
Control
PS, CCR, RP, ILM
*: One of the user stack pointer (USP) and system stack pointer (SSP) is selected and used depending on
the value of the S flag bit in the condition code register (CCR). For branch instructions, the program
counter (PC) is not specified in an instruction operand but is specified implicitly.
634
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Figure B.3-2 Example of Register Direct Addressing
MOV R0, A (This instruction transfers the eight low-order bits of A to the generalpurpose register R0.)
Before execution
A 0716
2534
Memory space
R0
After execution
A 0716
2564
??
Memory space
R0
34
● Direct branch addressing (addr16)
Specify an offset explicitly for the branch destination address. The size of the offset is 16 bits, which
indicates the branch destination in the logical address space. Direct branch addressing is used for an
unconditional branch, subroutine call, or software interrupt instruction. Bit23 to bit16 of the address are
specified by the program counter bank register (PCB).
Figure B.3-3 Example of Direct Branch Addressing (addr16)
JMP 3B20H (This instruction causes an unconditional branch by direct branch
addressing in a bank.)
Before execution
After execution
CM44-10129-6E
PC 3 C 2 0
PC 3 B 2 0
PCB 4 F
PCB 4 F
Memory space
4F3B20H
Next instruction
4F3C20H
62
4F3C21H
20
4F3C22H
3B
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
JMP 3B20H
635
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Physical direct branch addressing (addr24)
Specify an offset explicitly for the branch destination address. The size of the offset is 24 bits. Physical
direct branch addressing is used for unconditional branch, subroutine call, or software interrupt instruction.
Figure B.3-4 Example of Direct Branch Addressing (addr24)
JMPP 333B20H (This instruction causes an unconditional branch by direct branch 24-bit
addressing.)
Before execution
After execution
PC 3 C 2 0
PC 3 B 2 0
PCB 4 F
PCB 3 3
Memory space
333B20H
Next instruction
4F3C20H
63
4F3C21H
20
4F3C22H
3B
4F3C23H
33
JMPP 333B20H
● I/O direct addressing (io)
Specify an 8-bit offset explicitly for the memory address in an operand. The I/O address space in the
physical address space from 000000H to 0000FFH is accessed regardless of the data bank register (DTB)
and direct page register (DPR). A bank select prefix for bank addressing is invalid if specified before an
instruction using I/O direct addressing.
Figure B.3-5 Example of I/O Direct Addressing (io)
MOVW A, I:0C0H (This instruction reads data by I/O direct addressing and stores it in A.)
Before execution
After execution
A 0716
2534
Memory space
0000C0H
EE
0000C1H
FF
A 2534 FFEE
Note : "I:" is Addressing Specifier that shows the I/O Direct Addressing.
636
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Abbreviated direct addressing (dir)
Specify the eight low-order bits of a memory address explicitly in an operand. Address bits 8 to 15 are
specified by the direct page register (DPR). Address bits 16 to 23 are specified by the data bank register
(DTB).
Figure B.3-6 Example of Abbreviated Direct Addressing (dir)
MOV S:20H, A (This instruction writes the contents of the eight low-order bits of A in
abbreviated direct addressing mode.)
Before execution
A 4455
DPR 6 6
After execution
A 4455
DPR 6 6
1212
DTB 7 7
Memory space
776620H
1212
DTB 7 7
??
Memory space
776620H
12
Note : "S:" is Addressing Specifier that shows the Abbreviated Direct Addressing.
● Direct addressing (addr16)
Specify the 16 low-order bits of a memory address explicitly in an operand. Address bits 16 to 23 are
specified by the data bank register (DTB). A prefix instruction for access space addressing is invalid for
this mode of addressing.
Figure B.3-7 Example of Direct Addressing (addr16)
MOVW A, 3B20H (This instruction reads data by direct addressing and stores it in A.)
Before execution
After execution
CM44-10129-6E
A 2020
A AABB
AABB
0123
DTB 5 5
Memory space
553B21H
01
553B20H
23
DTB 5 5
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
637
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● I/O direct bit addressing (io:bp)
Specify bits in physical addresses 000000H to 0000FFH explicitly. Bit positions are indicated by ":bp",
where the larger number indicates the most significant bit (MSB) and the lower number indicates the least
significant bit (LSB).
Figure B.3-8 Example of I/O Direct Bit Addressing (io:bp)
SETB I:0C1H:0 (This instruction sets bits by I/O direct bit addressing.)
Memory space
Before execution
00
0000C1H
Memory space
After execution
0000C1H
01
Note : "I:" is Addressing Specifier that shows the I/O Direct Addressing.
● Abbreviated direct bit addressing (dir:bp)
Specify the eight low-order bits of a memory address explicitly in an operand. Address bits 8 to 15 are
specified by the direct page register (DPR). Address bits 16 to 23 are specified by the data bank register
(DTB). Bit positions are indicated by ":bp", where the larger number indicates the most significant bit
(MSB) and the lower number indicates the least significant bit (LSB).
Figure B.3-9 Example of Abbreviated Direct Bit Addressing (dir:bp)
SETB S:10H:0 (This instruction sets bits by abbreviated direct bit addressing.)
Memory space
Before execution
DTB 5 5
DPR 6 6
556610H
00
Memory space
After execution
DTB 5 5
DPR 6 6
01
556610H
Note : "S:" is Addressing Specifier that shows the Abbreviated Direct Addressing.
● Direct bit addressing (addr16:bp)
Specify arbitrary bits in 64 kilobytes explicitly. Address bits 16 to 23 are specified by the data bank register
(DTB). Bit positions are indicated by ":bp", where the larger number indicates the most significant bit
(MSB) and the lower number indicates the least significant bit (LSB).
Figure B.3-10 Example of Direct Bit Addressing (addr16:bp)
SETB 2222H : 0 (This instruction sets bits by direct bit addressing.)
Memory space
Before execution
DTB 5 5
552222H
00
Memory space
After execution
638
DTB 5 5
552222H
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
01
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Vector Addressing (#vct)
Specify vector data in an operand to indicate the branch destination address. There are two sizes for vector
numbers: 4 bits and 8 bits. Vector addressing is used for a subroutine call or software interrupt instruction.
Figure B.3-11 Example of Vector Addressing (#vct)
CALLV #15 (This instruction causes a branch to the address indicated by the interrupt
vector specified in an operand.)
Before execution
PC 0 0 0 0
Memory space
PCB F F
After execution
FFC000H
EF
FFFFE0H
00
FFFFE1H
D0
CALLV #15
PC D 0 0 0
PCB F F
Table B.3-2 CALLV Vector List
Instruction
Vector address L
Vector address H
CALLV #0
XXFFFEH
XXFFFFH
CALLV #1
XXFFFCH
XXFFFDH
CALLV #2
XXFFFAH
XXFFFBH
CALLV #3
XXFFF8H
XXFFF9H
CALLV #4
XXFFF6H
XXFFF7H
CALLV #5
XXFFF4H
XXFFF5H
CALLV #6
XXFFF2H
XXFFF3H
CALLV #7
XXFFF0H
XXFFF1H
CALLV #8
XXFFEEH
XXFFEFH
CALLV #9
XXFFECH
XXFFEDH
CALLV #10
XXFFEAH
XXFFEBH
CALLV #11
XXFFE8H
XXFFE9H
CALLV #12
XXFFE6H
XXFFE7H
CALLV #13
XXFFE4H
XXFFE5H
CALLV #14
XXFFE2H
XXFFE3H
CALLV #15
XXFFE0H
XXFFE1H
Note: A PCB register value is set in XX.
Note:
When the program counter bank register (PCB) is FFH, the vector area overlaps the vector area of
INT #vct8 (#0 to #7). Use vector addressing carefully (see Table B.3-2).
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
639
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
B.4
MB90330A Series
Indirect Addressing
In indirect addressing mode, an address is specified indirectly by the address data of
an operand.
■ Indirect Addressing
● Register indirect addressing (@RWj j = 0 to 3)
Memory is accessed using the contents of general-purpose register RWj as an address. Address bits 16 to
23 are indicated by the data bank register (DTB) when RW0 or RW1 is used, system stack bank register
(SSB) or user stack bank register (USB) when RW3 is used, or additional data bank register (ADB) when
RW2 is used.
Figure B.4-1 Example of Register Indirect Addressing (@RWj j = 0 to 3)
MOVW A, @RW1 (This instruction reads data by register indirect addressing and stores
it in A.)
Before execution
A 0716
2534
Memory space
RW1 D 3 0 F
After execution
DTB 7 8
78D30FH
EE
78D310H
FF
A 2534 FFEE
RW1 D 3 0 F
DTB 7 8
● Register indirect addressing with post increment (@RWj+ j = 0 to 3)
Memory is accessed using the contents of general-purpose register RWj as an address. After operand
operation, RWj is incremented by the operand size (1 for a byte, 2 for a word, or 4 for a long word).
Address bits 16 to 23 are indicated by the data bank register (DTB) when RW0 or RW1 is used, system
stack bank register (SSB) or user stack bank register (USB) when RW3 is used, or additional data bank
register (ADB) when RW2 is used.
If the post increment results in the address of the register that specifies the increment, the incremented
value is referenced after that. In this case, if the next instruction is a write instruction, priority is given to
writing by an instruction and, therefore, the register that would be incremented becomes write data.
640
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Figure B.4-2 Example of Register Indirect Addressing with Post Increment (@RWj+ j = 0 to 3)
MOVW A, @RW1+ (This instruction reads data by register indirect addressing with post
increment and stores it in A.)
Before execution
A 0716
2534
Memory space
RW1 D 3 0 F
After execution
DTB 7 8
78D30FH
EE
78D310H
FF
A 2534 FFEE
RW1 D 3 1 1
DTB 7 8
● Register indirect addressing with offset (@RWi + disp8 i = 0 to 7, @RWj + disp16 j = 0 to 3)
Memory is accessed using the address obtained by adding an offset to the contents of general-purpose
register RWj. Two types of offset, byte and word offsets, are used. They are added as signed numeric
values. Address bits 16 to 23 are indicated by the data bank register (DTB) when RW0, RW1, RW4, or
RW5 is used, system stack bank register (SSB) or user stack bank register (USB) when RW3 or RW7 is
used, or additional data bank register (ADB) when RW2 or RW6 is used.
Figure B.4-3 Example of Register Indirect Addressing with Offset
(@RWi + disp8 i = 0 to 7, @RWj + disp16 j = 0 to 3)
MOVW A, @RW1+10H (This instruction reads data by register indirect addressing with
an offset and stores it in A.)
Before execution
A 0716
2534
(+10H)
RW1 D 3 0 F
After execution
78D31FH
EE
78D320H
FF
A 2534 FFEE
RW1 D 3 0 F
CM44-10129-6E
DTB 7 8
Memory space
DTB 7 8
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
641
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Long register indirect addressing with offset (@RLi + disp8 i = 0 to 3)
Memory is accessed using the address that is the 24 low-order bits obtained by adding an offset to the
contents of general-purpose register RLi. The offset is 8-bits long and is added as a signed numeric value.
Figure B.4-4 Example of Long Register Indirect Addressing with Offset (@RLi + disp8 i = 0 to 3)
MOVW A, @RL2+25H (This instruction reads data by long register indirect addressing with
an offset and stores it in A.)
Before execution
A 0716
2534
(+25H)
RL2 F 3 8 2
After execution
4B02
Memory space
824B27H
EE
824B28H
FF
A 2534 FFEE
RL2 F 3 8 2
4B02
● Program counter indirect addressing with offset (@PC + disp16)
Memory is accessed using the address indicated by (instruction address + 4 + disp16). The offset is one
word long. Address bits 16 to 23 are specified by the program counter bank register (PCB). Note that the
operand address of each of the following instructions is not deemed to be (next instruction address +
disp16):
•
DBNZ eam, rel
•
DWBNZ eam, rel
•
CBNE eam, #imm8, rel
•
CWBNE eam, #imm16, rel
•
MOV eam, #imm8
•
MOVW eam, #imm16
Figure B.4-5 Example of Program Counter Indirect Addressing with Offset (@PC + disp16)
MOVW A, @PC+20H (This instruction reads data by program counter indirect
addressing with an offset and stores it in A.)
Before execution
A 0716
2534
Memory space
PCB C 5 PC 4 5 5 6
After execution
A 2534
FFEE
PCB C 5 PC 4 5 5 A
642
+4
C54556H
73
C54557H
9E
C54558H
20
C54559H
00
MOVW
A, @PC+20H
C5455AH
.
.
.
+20H
C5457AH
EE
C5457BH
FF
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Register indirect addressing with base index (@RW0 + RW7, @RW1 + RW7)
Memory is accessed using the address determined by adding RW0 or RW1 to the contents of generalpurpose register RW7. Address bits 16 to 23 are indicated by the data bank register (DTB).
Figure B.4-6 Example of Register Indirect Addressing with Base Index (@RW0 + RW7, @RW1 + RW7)
MOVW A, @RW1+RW7 (This instruction reads data by register indirect addressing with
a base index and stores it in A.)
Before execution
A 0716
RW1 D 3 0 F
WR7 0 1 0 1
After execution
A 2534
RW1 D 3 0 F
2534
+
DTB 7 8
Memory space
78D410H
EE
78D411H
FF
FFEE
DTB 7 8
WR7 0 1 0 1
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
643
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Program counter relative branch addressing (rel)
The address of the branch destination is a value determined by adding an 8-bit offset to the program
counter (PC) value. If the result of addition exceeds 16 bits, bank register incrementing or decrementing is
not performed and the excess part is ignored, and therefore the address is contained within a 64-kilobyte
bank. This addressing is used for both conditional and unconditional branch instructions. Address bits 16 to
23 are indicated by the program counter bank register (PCB).
Figure B.4-7 Example of Program Counter Relative Branch Addressing (rel)
BRA 3C32H (This instruction causes an unconditional relative branch.)
Before execution
After execution
PC 3 C 2 0
PC 3 C 3 2
PCB 4 F
PCB 4 F
Memory space
4F3C32H
Next instruction
4F3C21H
10
4F3C20H
60
BRA 3C32H
● Register list (rlst)
Specify a register to be pushed onto or popped from a stack.
Figure B.4-8 Configuration of the Register List
MSB
LSB
RW7 RW6 RW5 RW4 RW3 RW2 RW1 RW0
A register is selected when the corresponding bit is 1 and deselected when the bit is 0.
644
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Figure B.4-9 Example of Register List (rlst)
POPW RW0, RW4 (This instruction transfers memory data indicated by the SP to
multiple word registers indicated by the register list.)
SP
34FA
SP
34FE
RW0
×× ××
RW0
02 01
RW1
×× ××
RW1
×× ××
RW2
×× ××
RW2
×× ××
RW3
×× ××
RW3
×× ××
RW4
×× ××
RW4
04 03
RW5
×× ××
RW5
×× ××
RW6
×× ××
RW6
×× ××
RW7
×× ××
RW7
×× ××
Memory space
SP
Memory space
01
34FAH
01
34FAH
02
34FBH
02
34FBH
03
34FCH
03
34FCH
04
34FDH
04
34FDH
34FEH
SP
Before execution
34FEH
After execution
● Accumulator indirect addressing (@A)
Memory is accessed using the address indicated by the contents of the low-order bytes (16 bits) of the
accumulator (AL). Address bits 16 to 23 are specified by a mnemonic in the data bank register (DTB).
Figure B.4-10 Example of Accumulator Indirect Addressing (@A)
MOVW A, @A (This instruction reads data by accumulator indirect addressing and stores it in A.)
Before execution
A
0716
2534
DTB B B
After execution
A
0716
Memory space
BB2534H
EE
BB2535H
FF
FFEE
DTB B B
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
645
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Accumulator indirect branch addressing (@A)
The address of the branch destination is the content (16 bits) of the low-order bytes (AL) of the
accumulator. It indicates the branch destination in the bank address space. Address bits 16 to 23 are
specified by the program counter bank register (PCB). For the Jump Context (JCTX) instruction, however,
address bits 16 to 23 are specified by the data bank register (DTB). This addressing is used for
unconditional branch instructions.
Figure B.4-11 Example of Accumulator Indirect Branch Addressing (@A)
JMP @A (This instruction causes an unconditional branch by accumulator indirect
branch addressing.)
Before execution
PC 3 C 2 0
A 6677
After execution
PC 3 B 2 0
A 6677
PCB 4 F
3B20
Memory space
4F3B20H
Next instruction
4F3C20H
61
JMP @A
PCB 4 F
3B20
● Indirect specification branch addressing (@ear)
The address of the branch destination is the word data at the address indicated by ear.
Figure B.4-12 Example of Indirect Specification Branch Addressing (@ear)
JMP @@RW0 (This instruction causes an unconditional branch by register indirect
addressing.)
Before execution
After execution
646
PC 3 C 2 0
PCB 4 F
RW0 7 F 4 8
DTB 2 1
PC 3 B 2 0
PCB 4 F
RW0 7 F 4 8
DTB 2 1
Memory space
217F48H
20
217F49H
3B
4F3B20H
Next instruction
4F3C20H
73
4F3C21H
08
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
JMP @@RW0
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
● Indirect specification branch addressing (@eam)
The address of the branch destination is the word data at the address indicated by eam.
Figure B.4-13 Example of Indirect Specification Branch Addressing (@eam)
JMP @RW0 (This instruction causes an unconditional branch by register indirect
addressing.)
Before execution
PC 3 C 2 0
PCB 4 F
RW0 3 B 2 0
After execution
PC 3 B 2 0
PCB 4 F
Memory space
4F3B20H
Next instruction
4F3C20H
73
4F3C21H
00
JMP @RW0
RW0 3 B 2 0
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
647
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
B.5
MB90330A Series
Execution Cycle Count
The number of cycles required for instruction execution (execution cycle count) is
obtained by adding the number of cycles required for each instruction, "correction
value" determined by the condition, and the number of cycles for instruction fetch.
■ Execution Cycle Count
The number of cycles required for instruction execution (execution cycle count) is obtained by adding the
number of cycles required for each instruction, "correction value" determined by the condition, and the
number of cycles for instruction fetch. In the mode of fetching an instruction from memory such as internal
ROM connected to a 16-bit bus, the program fetches the instruction being executed in word increments.
Therefore, intervening in data access increases the execution cycle count.
Similarly, in the mode of fetching an instruction from memory connected to an 8-bit external bus, the
program fetches every byte of an instruction being executed. Therefore, intervening in data access increases
the execution cycle count. In CPU intermittent operation mode, access to a general-purpose register,
internal ROM, internal RAM, internal I/O, or external data bus causes the clock to the CPU to halt for the
cycle count specified by the CG0 and CG1 bits of the low power consumption mode control register.
Therefore, for the cycle count required for instruction execution in CPU intermittent operation mode, add
the "access count x cycle count for the halt" as a correction value to the normal execution count.
648
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
■ Calculating the Execution Cycle Count
Table B.5-1 lists execution cycle counts and Table B.5-2 and Table B.5-3 summarize correction value data.
Table B.5-1 Execution Cycle Counts in Each Addressing Mode
(a) *
Code
Operand
00
|
07
Ri
Rwi
RLi
08
|
0B
Execution cycle count in
each addressing mode
Register access count in
each addressing mode
See the instruction list.
See the instruction list.
@RWj
2
1
0C
|
0F
@RWj+
4
2
10
|
17
@RWi+disp8
2
1
18
|
1B
@RWi+disp16
2
1
1C
1D
1E
1F
@RW0+RW7
@RW1+RW7
@PC+disp16
addr16
4
4
2
1
2
2
0
0
*: (a) is used for ~ (cycle count) and B (correction value) in "B.8 F2MC-16LX Instruction List".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
649
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.5-2 Cycle Count Correction Values for Counting Execution Cycles
(b) byte *
Operand
(c) word *
(d) long *
Cycle
count
Access
count
Cycle
count
Access
count
Cycle
count
Access
count
Internal register
+0
1
+0
1
+0
2
Internal memory
Even address
+0
1
+0
1
+0
2
Internal memory
Odd address
+0
1
+2
2
+4
4
External data bus
16-bit even address
+1
1
+1
1
+2
2
External data bus
16-bit odd address
+1
1
+4
2
+8
4
External data bus
8-bits
+1
1
+4
2
+8
4
*: (b), (c), and (d) are used for ~ (cycle count) and B (correction value) in "B.8 F2MC-16LX
Instruction List".
Note:
When an external data bus is used, the cycle counts during which an instruction is made to wait by
ready input or automatic ready must also be added.
Table B.5-3 Cycle Count Correction Values for Counting Instruction Fetch Cycles
Instruction
Byte boundary
Word boundary
Internal memory
-
+2
External data bus 16-bits
-
+3
External data bus 8-bits
+3
-
Notes:
• When an external data bus is used, the cycle counts during which an instruction is made to wait
by ready input or automatic ready must also be added.
• Actually, instruction execution is not delayed by every instruction fetch. Therefore, use the
correction values to calculate the worst case.
650
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
B.6
Effective address field
Table B.6-1 shows the effective address field.
■ Effective Address Field
Table B.6-1 Effective Address Field
Code
Representation
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
@RW0
@RW1
@RW2
RW0
RW1
RW2
RW3
RW4
RW5
RW6
RW7
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
@RW3
@RW0+
@RW1+
@RW2+
@RW3+
@RW0+disp8
@RW1+disp8
@RW2+disp8
@RW3+disp8
@RW4+disp8
@RW5+disp8
RL0
(RL0)
RL1
(RL1)
RL2
(RL2)
RL3
(RL3)
Address format
Byte count of
extended
address part *
Register direct: Individual parts correspond to
the byte, word, and long word types in order
from the left.
-
Register indirect
0
Register indirect with post increment
0
Register indirect with 8-bit displacement
1
16
@RW6+disp8
17
@RW7+disp8
18
@RW0+disp16
19
@RW1+disp16
Register indirect with 16-bit displacement
2
1A
@RW2+disp16
1B
@RW3+disp16
1C
@RW0+RW7
Register indirect with index
0
1D
@RW1+RW7
Register indirect with index
0
1E
@PC+disp16
PC indirect with 16-bit displacement
2
1F
addr16
Direct address
2
*1: Each byte count of the extended address part applies to + in the # (byte count) column in "B.8 F2MC-16LX
Instruction List".
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
651
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
B.7
MB90330A Series
How to Read the Instruction List
Table B.7-1 describes the items used in "B.8 F2MC-16LX Instruction List", and Table
B.7-2 describes the symbols used in the same list.
■ Description of Instruction Presentation Items and Symbols
Table B.7-1 Description of Items in the Instruction List (1/2)
Item
Mnemonic
Uppercase, symbol: Represented as is in the assembler.
Lowercase: Rewritten in the assembler.
Number of following lowercase: Indicates bit length in the instruction.
#
Indicates the number of bytes.
~
Indicates the number of cycles.
See Table B.2-1 for the alphabetical letters in items.
RG
B
Operation
652
Description
Indicates the number of times a register access is performed during instruction
execution.
The number is used to calculate the correction value for CPU intermittent
operation.
Indicates the correction value used to calculate the actual number of cycles during
instruction execution.
The actual number of cycles during instruction execution can be determined by
adding the value in the ~ column to this value.
Indicates the instruction operation.
LH
Indicates the special operation for bit15 to bit08 of the accumulator.
Z: Transfers 0.
X: Transfers after sign extension.
-: No transfer
AH
Indicates the special operation for the 16 high-order bits of the accumulator.
*: Transfers from AL to AH.
-: No transfer
Z: Transfers 00 to AH.
X: Transfers 00H or FFH to AH after AL sign extension.
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.7-1 Description of Items in the Instruction List (1/2)
Item
Description
I
Each indicates the state of each flag: I (interrupt enable), S (stack), T (sticky bit), N
(negative), Z (zero), V (overflow), C (carry).
*: Changes upon instruction execution.
-: No change
S: Set upon instruction execution.
R: Reset upon instruction execution.
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
Indicates whether the instruction is a Read Modify Write instruction (reading data
from memory by the I instruction and writing the result to memory).
*: Read Modify Write instruction
-: Not Read Modify Write instruction
Note:
Cannot be used for an address that has different meanings between read and
write operations.
Table B.7-2 Explanation on Symbols in the Instruction List (1/2)
Symbol
A
CM44-10129-6E
Explanation
The bit length used varies depending on the 32-bit accumulator instruction.
Byte: Low-order 8 bits of byte AL
Word: 16 bits of word AL
Long word: 32 bits of AL and AH
AH
16 high-order bits of A
AL
16 low-order bits of A
SP
Stack pointer (USP or SSP)
PC
Program counter
PCB
program counter bank register
DTB
Data bank register
ADB
Additional data bank register
SSB
System stack bank register
USB
User stack bank register
SPB
Current stack bank register (SSB or USB)
DPR
Direct page register
brg1
DTB, ADB, SSB, USB, DPR, PCB, SPB
brg2
DTB, ADB, SSB, USB, DPR, SPB
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
653
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.7-2 Explanation on Symbols in the Instruction List (1/2)
Symbol
Ri
R0, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7
RWi
RW0, RW1, RW2, RW3, RW4, RW5, RW6, RW7
RWj
RW0, RW1, RW2, RW3
RLi
RL0, RL1, RL2, RL3
dir
Abbreviated direct addressing
addr16
Direct addressing
addr24
Physical direct addressing
ad24 0-15
Bit0 to bit15 of addr24
ad24 16-23
Bit16 to bit23 of addr24
io
I/O area (000000H to 0000FFH)
#imm4
4-bit immediate data
#imm8
8-bit immediate data
#imm16
16-bit immediate data
#imm32
32-bit immediate data
ext (imm8)
16-bit data obtained by sign extension of 8-bit immediate data
disp8
8-bit displacement
disp16
16-bit displacement
bp
654
Explanation
Bit offset
vct4
Vector number (0 to 15)
vct8
Vector number (0 to 255)
( )b
Bit address
rel
PC relative branch
ear
Effective addressing (code 00H to 07H)
eam
Effective addressing (code 08H to 1FH)
rlst
Register list
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
B.8
F2MC-16LX Instruction List
Table B.8-1 to Table B.8-18 list the instructions used by the F2MC-16LX.
■ F2MC-16LX Instruction List
Table B.8-1 41 Transfer Instructions (Byte)
Mnemonic
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOVN
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOVX
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
XCH
XCH
XCH
XCH
A,dir
A,addr16
A,Ri
A,ear
A,eam
A,io
A,#imm8
A,@A
A,@RLi+disp8
A,#imm4
A,dir
A,addr16
A,Ri
A,ear
A,eam
A,io
A,#imm8
A,@A
A,@RWi+disp8
A,@RLi+disp8
dir,A
addr16,A
Ri,A
ear,A
eam,A
io,A
@RLi+disp8,A
Ri,ear
Ri,eam
ear,Ri
eam,Ri
Ri,#imm8
io,#imm8
dir,#imm8
ear,#imm8
eam,#imm8
@AL,AH
A,ear
A,eam
Ri,ear
Ri,eam
#
~
RG
B
2
3
1
2
2+
2
2
2
3
1
2
3
2
2
2+
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
1
2
2+
2
3
2
2+
2
2+
2
3
3
3
3+
2
2
2+
2
2+
3
4
2
2
3 + (a)
3
2
3
10
1
3
4
2
2
3 + (a)
3
2
3
5
10
3
4
2
2
3 + (a)
3
10
3
4 + (a)
4
5 + (a)
2
5
5
2
4 + (a)
3
4
5 + (a)
7
9 + (a)
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
2
1
2
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
4
2
(b)
(b)
0
0
(b)
(b)
0
(b)
(b)
0
(b)
(b)
0
0
(b)
(b)
0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
0
0
(b)
(b)
(b)
0
(b)
0
(b)
0
(b)
(b)
0
(b)
(b)
0
2 × (b)
0
2 × (b)
Operation
byte (A) ← (dir)
byte (A) ← (addr16)
byte (A) ← (Ri)
byte (A) ← (ear)
byte (A) ← (eam)
byte (A) ← (io)
byte (A) ← imm8
byte (A) ← ((A))
byte (A) ← ((RLi)+disp8)
byte (A) ← imm4
byte (A) ← (dir)
byte (A) ← (addr16)
byte (A) ← (Ri)
byte (A) ← (ear)
byte (A) ← (eam)
byte (A) ← (io)
byte (A) ← imm8
byte (A) ← ((A))
byte (A) ← ((RWi)+disp8)
byte (A) ← ((RLi)+disp8)
byte (dir) ← (A)
byte (addr16) ← (A)
byte (Ri) ← (A)
byte (ear) ← (A)
byte (eam) ← (A)
byte (io) ← (A)
byte ((RLi)+disp8) ← (A)
byte (Ri) ← (ear)
byte (Ri) ← (eam)
byte (ear) ← (Ri)
byte (eam) ← (Ri)
byte (Ri) ← imm8
byte (io) ← imm8
byte (dir) ← imm8
byte (ear) ← imm8
byte (eam) ← imm8
byte ((A)) ← (AH)
byte (A) ↔ (ear)
byte (A) ↔ (eam)
byte (Ri) ↔ (ear)
byte (Ri) ↔ (eam)
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
-
-
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) and (b) in the table.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
655
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-2 38 Transfer Instructions (Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
XCHW
XCHW
XCHW
XCHW
MOVL
MOVL
MOVL
MOVL
MOVL
A,dir
A,addr16
A,SP
A,RWi
A,ear
A,eam
A,io
A,@A
A,#imm16
A,@RWi+disp8
A,@RLi+disp8
dir,A
addr16,A
SP,A
RWi,A
ear,A
eam,A
io,A
@RWi+disp8,A
@RLi+disp8,A
RWi,ear
RWi,eam
ear,RWi
eam,RWi
RWi,#imm16
io,#imm16
ear,#imm16
eam,#imm16
@AL,AH
A,ear
A,eam
RWi, ear
RWi, eam
A,ear
A,eam
A,#imm32
ear,A
eam,A
#
~
RG
B
2
3
1
1
2
2+
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
1
1
2
2+
2
2
3
2
2+
2
2+
3
4
4
4+
2
2
2+
2
2+
2
2+
5
2
2+
3
4
1
2
2
3 + (a)
3
3
2
5
10
3
4
1
2
2
3 + (a)
3
5
10
3
4 + (a)
4
5 + (a)
2
5
2
4 + (a)
3
4
5 + (a)
7
9 + (a)
4
5 + (a)
3
4
5 + (a)
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
0
1
0
0
2
0
4
2
2
0
0
2
0
(c)
(c)
0
0
0
(c)
(c)
(c)
0
(c)
(c)
(c)
(c)
0
0
0
(c)
(c)
(c)
(c)
0
(c)
0
(c)
0
(c)
0
(c)
(c)
0
2 × (c)
0
2 × (c)
0
(d)
0
0
(d)
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
-
word (A) ← (dir)
word (A) ← (addr16)
word (A) ← (SP)
word (A) ← (RWi)
word (A) ← (ear)
word (A) ← (eam)
word (A) ← (io)
word (A) ← ((A))
word (A) ← imm16
word (A) ← ((RWi)+disp8)
word (A) ← ((RLi)+disp8)
word (dir) ← (A)
word (addr16) ← (A)
word (SP) ← (A)
word (RWi) ← (A)
word (ear) ← (A)
word (eam) ← (A)
word (io) ← (A)
word ((RWi)+disp8) ← (A)
word ((RLi)+disp8) ← (A)
word (RWi) ← (ear)
word (RWi) ← (eam)
word (ear) ← (RWi)
word (eam) ← (RWi)
word (RWi) ← imm16
word (io) ← imm16
word (ear) ← imm16
word (eam) ← imm16
word ((A)) ← (AH)
word (A) ↔ (ear)
word (A) ↔ (eam)
word (RWi) ↔ (ear)
word (RWi) ↔ (eam)
long (A) ← (ear)
long (A) ← (eam)
long (A) ← imm32
long (ear) ← (A)
long(eam) ← (A)
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a), (c), and (d) in the table.
656
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-3 42 Addition/Subtraction Instructions (Byte, Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADDC
ADDC
ADDC
ADDDC
A,#imm8
A,dir
A,ear
A,eam
ear,A
eam,A
A
A,ear
A,eam
A
2
2
2
2+
2
2+
1
2
2+
1
2
5
3
4 + (a)
3
5 + (a)
2
3
4 + (a)
3
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
(b)
0
(b)
0
2 × (b)
0
0
(b)
0
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUBC
SUBC
SUBC
SUBDC
A,#imm8
A,dir
A,ear
A,eam
ear,A
eam,A
A
A,ear
A,eam
A
2
2
2
2+
2
2+
1
2
2+
1
2
5
3
4 + (a)
3
5 + (a)
2
3
4 + (a)
3
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
(b)
0
(b)
0
2 × (b)
0
0
(b)
0
ADDW
ADDW
ADDW
ADDW
ADDW
ADDW
ADDCW
ADDCW
SUBW
SUBW
SUBW
SUBW
SUBW
SUBW
SUBCW
SUBCW
ADDL
ADDL
ADDL
SUBL
SUBL
SUBL
A
A,ear
A,eam
A,#imm16
ear,A
eam,A
A,ear
A,eam
A
A,ear
A,eam
A,#imm16
ear,A
eam,A
A,ear
A,eam
A,ear
A,eam
A,#imm32
A,ear
A,eam
A,#imm32
1
2
2+
3
2
2+
2
2+
1
2
2+
3
2
2+
2
2+
2
2+
5
2
2+
5
2
3
4+(a)
2
3
5+(a)
3
4+(a)
2
3
4+(a)
2
3
5+(a)
3
4+(a)
6
7+(a)
4
6
7+(a)
4
0
1
0
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
(c)
0
0
2 × (c)
0
(c)
0
0
(c)
0
0
2 × (c)
0
(c)
0
(d)
0
0
(d)
0
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
byte (A) ← (A) + imm8
byte (A) ← (A) + (dir)
byte (A) ← (A) + (ear)
byte (A) ← (A) + (eam)
byte (ear) ← (ear) + (A)
byte (eam) ← (eam) + (A)
byte (A) ← (AH) + (AL) + (C)
byte (A) ← (A) + (ear)+ (C)
byte (A) ← (A) + (eam)+ (C)
byte (A) ← (AH) + (AL) + (C)
(decimal)
byte (A) ← (A) - imm8
byte (A) ← (A) - (dir)
byte (A) ← (A) - (ear)
byte (A) ← (A) - (eam)
byte (ear) ← (ear) - (A)
byte (eam) ← (eam) - (A)
byte (A) ← (AH) - (AL) - (C)
byte (A) ← (A) - (ear) - (C)
byte (A) ← (A) - (eam) - (C)
byte (A) ← (AH) - (AL) - (C)
(decimal)
word (A) ← (AH) + (AL)
word (A) ← (A) + (ear)
word (A) ← (A) + (eam)
word (A) ← (A) + imm16
word (ear) ← (ear) + (A)
word (eam) ← (eam) + (A)
word (A) ← (A) + (ear) + (C)
word (A) ← (A) + (eam) + (C)
word (A) ← (AH) - (AL)
word (A) ← (A) - (ear)
word (A) ← (A) - (eam)
word (A) ← (A) - imm16
word (ear) ← (ear) - (A)
word (eam) ← (eam) - (A)
word (A) ← (A) - (ear) - (C)
word (A) ← (A) - (eam) - (C)
long (A) ← (A) + (ear)
long (A) ← (A) + (eam)
long (A) ← (A) + imm32
long (A) ← (A) - (ear)
long (A) ← (A) - (eam)
long (A) ← (A) - imm32
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (d) in the table.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
657
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-4 12 Increment/decrement Instructions (Byte, Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
INC
ear
2
3
2
0
INC
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
byte (ear) ← (ear) + 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
byte (eam) ← (eam) + 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
DEC
ear
2
3
2
0
byte (ear) ← (ear) - 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
DEC
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
byte (eam) ← (eam) - 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
INCW
ear
2
3
2
0
word (ear) ← (ear) + 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
INCW
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
word (eam) ← (eam) + 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
DECW
ear
2
3
2
0
DECW
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
INCL
ear
2
7
4
0
INCL
eam
2+
9+(a)
0
2 × (d)
DECL
ear
2
7
4
0
DECL
eam
2+
9+(a)
0
2 × (d)
word (ear) ← (ear) - 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
word (eam) ← (eam) - 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
long (ear) ← (ear) + 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
long (eam) ← (eam) + 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
long (ear) ← (ear) - 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
long (eam) ← (eam) - 1
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (d) in the table.
Table B.8-5 11 Compare Instructions (Byte, Word, Long Word)
#
~
RG
B
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
CMP
Mnemonic
A
1
1
0
0
byte (AH) - (AL)
Operation
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMP
A,ear
2
2
1
0
byte (A) - (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMP
A,eam
2+
3+(a)
0
(b)
byte (A) - (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMP
A,#imm8
2
2
0
0
byte (A) - imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPW
A
1
1
0
0
word (AH) - (AL)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPW
A,ear
2
2
1
0
word (A) - (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPW
A,eam
2+
3+(a)
0
(c)
word (A) - (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPW
A,#imm16
3
2
0
0
word (A) - imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPL
A,ear
2
6
2
0
long (A) - (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPL
A,eam
2+
7+(a)
0
(d)
long (A) - (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CMPL
A,#imm32
5
3
0
0
long (A) - imm32
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (d) in the table.
658
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-6 11 Unsigned Multiplication/Division Instructions (Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
DIVU
A
1
*1
0
0
word (AH) / byte (AL)
quotient → byte (AL) remainder → byte (AH)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIVU
A,ear
2
*2
1
0
word (A) / byte (ear)
quotient → byte (A) remainder → byte (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIVU
A,eam
2+
*3
0
*6
word (A) / byte (eam)
quotient → byte (A) remainder → byte (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIVUW
A,ear
2
*4
1
0
long (A) / word (ear)
quotient → word (A) remainder → word (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIVUW
A,eam
2+
*5
0
*7
long (A) / word (eam)
quotient → word (A) remainder → word (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
MULU
A
1
*8
0
0
byte (AH) * byte (AL) → word (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MULU
A,ear
2
*9
1
0
byte (A) * byte (ear) → word (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MULU
A,eam
2+
*10
0
(b)
byte (A) * byte (eam) → word (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MULUW
A
1
*11
0
0
word (AH) * word (AL) → Long (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MULUW
A,ear
2
*12
1
0
word (A) * word (ear) → Long (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MULUW
A,eam
2+
*13
0
(c)
word (A) * word (eam) → Long (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1: 3: Division by 0 7: Overflow 15: Normal
*2: 4: Division by 0 8: Overflow 16: Normal
*3: 6+(a): Division by 0 9+(a): Overflow 19+(a): Normal
*4: 4: Division by 0 7: Overflow 22: Normal
*5: 6+(a): Division by 0 8+(a): Overflow 26+(a): Normal
*6: (b): Division by 0 or overflow 2 × (b): Normal
*7: (c): Division by 0 or overflow 2 × (c): Normal
*8: 3: Byte (AH) is 0. 7: Byte (AH) is not 0.
*9: 4: Byte (ear) is 0. 8: Byte (ear) is not 0.
*10: 5+(a): Byte (eam) is 0, 9+(a): Byte (eam) is not 0.
*11: 3: Word (AH) is 0. 11: Word (AH) is not 0.
*12: 4: Word (ear) is 0. 12: Word (ear) is not 0.
*13: 5+(a): Word (eam) is 0. 13+(a): Word (eam) is not 0.
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (c) in the table.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
659
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-7 11 Signed Multiplication/Division Instructions (Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
DIV
A
2
*1
0
0
word (AH) / byte (AL)
quotient → byte (AL) remainder → byte (AH)
Z
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIV
A,ear
2
*2
1
0
word (A) / byte (ear)
quotient → byte (A) remainder → byte (ear)
Z
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIV
A,eam
2+
*3
0
*6
word (A) / byte (eam)
quotient → byte (A) remainder → byte (eam)
Z
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIVW
A,ear
2
*4
1
0
long (A) / word (ear)
quotient → word (A) remainder → word (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
DIVW
A,eam
2+
*5
0
*7
long (A) / word (eam)
quotient → word (A) remainder → word (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
MUL
A
2
*8
0
0
byte (AH) * byte (AL) → word (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MUL
A,ear
2
*9
1
0
byte (A) * byte (ear) → word (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
byte (A) * byte (eam) → word (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
word (AH) * word (AL) → Long (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
word (A) * word (ear) → Long (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
(c)
word (A) * word (eam) → Long (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MUL
A,eam
2+
*10
0
(b)
MULW
A
2
*11
0
0
MULW
A,ear
2
*12
1
MULW
A,eam
2+
*13
0
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
3: Division by 0, 8 or 18: Overflow, 18: Normal
4: Division by 0, 11 or 22: Overflow, 23: Normal
5+(a): Division by 0, 12+(a) or 23+(a): Overflow, 24+(a): Normal
When dividend is positive; 4: Division by 0, 12 or 30: Overflow, 31: Normal
When dividend is negative; 4: Division by 0, 12 or 31: Overflow, 32: Normal
*5: When dividend is positive; 5+(a): Division by 0, 12+(a) or 31+(a): Overflow, 32+(a): Normal
When dividend is negative; 5+(a): Division by 0, 12+(a) or 32+(a): Overflow, 33+(a): Normal
*6: (b): Division by 0 or overflow, 2 × (b): Normal
*7: (c): Division by 0 or overflow, 2 × (c): Normal
*8: 3: Byte (AH) is 0, 12: result is positive, 13: result is negative
*9: 4: Byte (ear) is 0, 13: result is positive, 14: result is negative
*10: 5+(a): Byte (eam) is 0, 14+(a): result is positive, 15+(a): result is negative
*11: 3: Word (AH) is 0, 16: result is positive, 19: result is negative
*12: 4: Word (ear) is 0, 17: result is positive, 20: result is negative
*13: 5+(a): Word (eam) is 0, 18+(a): result is positive, 21+(a): result is negative
Notes:
• The execution cycle count found when an overflow occurs in a DIV or DIVW instruction may be a
pre-operation count or a post-operation count depending on the detection timing.
• When an overflow occurs with DIV or DIVW instruction, the contents of the AL are destroyed.
• See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (c) in the table.
660
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-8 39 Logic 1 Instructions (Byte, Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
-
AND
A,#imm8
2
2
0
0
byte (A) ← (A) and imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
AND
A,ear
2
3
1
0
byte (A) ← (A) and (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
AND
A,eam
2+
4+(a)
0
(b)
byte (A) ← (A) and (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
byte (ear) ← (ear) and (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
byte (eam) ← (eam) and (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
AND
ear,A
2
3
2
0
AND
eam,A
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
OR
A,#imm8
2
2
0
0
byte (A) ← (A) or imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
OR
A,ear
2
3
1
0
byte (A) ← (A) or (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
OR
A,eam
2+
4+(a)
0
(b)
byte (A) ← (A) or (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
OR
ear,A
2
3
2
0
byte (ear) ← (ear) or (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
OR
eam,A
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
byte (eam) ← (eam) or (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
XOR
A,#imm8
2
2
0
0
byte (A) ← (A) xor imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XOR
A,ear
2
3
1
0
byte (A) ← (A) xor (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XOR
A,eam
2+
4+(a)
0
(b)
byte (A) ← (A) xor (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XOR
ear,A
2
3
2
0
byte (ear) ← (ear) xor (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XOR
eam,A
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
byte (eam) ← (eam) xor (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
NOT
A
1
2
0
0
byte (A) ← not (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
NOT
ear
2
3
2
0
byte (ear) ← not (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
NOT
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
byte (eam) ← not (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
ANDW
A
1
2
0
0
word (A) ← (AH) and (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ANDW
A,#imm16
3
2
0
0
word (A) ← (A) and imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ANDW
A,ear
2
3
1
0
word (A) ← (A) and (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ANDW
A,eam
2+
4+(a)
0
(c)
word (A) ← (A) and (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
word (ear) ← (ear) and (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
word (eam) ← (eam) and (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
0
word (A) ← (AH) or (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
0
word (A) ← (A) or imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
1
0
word (A) ← (A) or (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
4+(a)
0
(c)
word (A) ← (A) or (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
2
3
2
0
word (ear) ← (ear) or (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
eam,A
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
word (eam) ← (eam) or (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
XORW
A
1
2
0
0
word (A) ← (AH) xor (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XORW
A,#imm16
3
2
0
0
word (A) ← (A) xor imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XORW
A,ear
2
3
1
0
word (A) ← (A) xor (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ANDW
ear,A
2
3
2
0
ANDW
eam,A
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
ORW
A
1
2
0
ORW
A,#imm16
3
2
0
ORW
A,ear
2
3
ORW
A,eam
2+
ORW
ear,A
ORW
XORW
A,eam
2+
4+(a)
0
(c)
word (A) ← (A) xor (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
XORW
ear,A
2
3
2
0
word (ear) ← (ear) xor (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XORW
eam,A
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
word (eam) ← (eam) xor (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
NOTW
A
1
2
0
0
word (A) ← not (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
NOTW
ear
2
3
2
0
word (ear) ← not (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
NOTW
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
word (eam) ← not (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
*
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (c) in the table.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
661
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-9 6 Logic 2 Instructions (Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
ANDL
A,ear
2
6
2
0
long (A) ← (A) and (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ANDL
A,eam
2+
7+(a)
0
(d)
long (A) ← (A) and (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ORL
A,ear
2
6
2
0
long (A) ← (A) or (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
ORL
A,eam
2+
7+(a)
0
(d)
long (A) ← (A) or (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XORL
A,ear
2
6
2
0
long (A) ← (A) xor (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
XORL
A,eam
2+
7+(a)
0
(d)
long (A) ← (A) xor (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
R
-
-
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) and (d) in the table.
Table B.8-10 6 Sign Inversion Instructions (Byte, Word)
Mnemonic
NEG
A
#
~
RG
B
1
2
0
0
byte (A) ← 0 - (A)
byte (ear) ← 0 - (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
byte (eam) ← 0 - (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
word (A) ← 0 - (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
NEG
ear
2
3
2
0
NEG
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
NEGW
A
1
2
0
0
NEGW
ear
2
3
2
0
NEGW
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (c)
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
X
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
word (ear) ← 0 - (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
word (eam) ← 0 - (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (c) in the table.
Table B.8-11 1 Normalization Instruction (Long Word)
Mnemonic
NRML
A,R0
#
~
RG
B
2
*1
1
0
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
long (A) ← Shift left to the position where '1' is set
for the first time.
byte (R0) ← Shift count at that time
*1: 4 when all accumulators have a value of 0; otherwise, 6+(R0)
662
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-12 18 Shift Instructions (Byte, Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
RORC
A
2
2
0
0
byte (A) ← Right rotation with carry
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
ROLC
A
2
2
0
0
byte (A) ← Right rotation with carry
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
RORC
ear
2
3
2
0
byte (ear) ← Right rotation with carry
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
RORC
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
byte (eam) ← Right rotation with carry
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
*
ROLC
ear
2
3
2
0
byte (ear) ← Left rotation with carry
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
ROLC
eam
2+
5+(a)
0
2 × (b)
byte (eam) ← Left rotation with carry
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
*
ASR
A,R0
2
*1
1
0
byte (A) ← Arithmetic right shift (A, 1 bit)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSR
A,R0
2
*1
1
0
byte (A) ← Logical right barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSL
A,R0
2
*1
1
0
byte (A) ← Logical left barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
ASRW
A
1
2
0
0
word (A) ← Arithmetic right shift (A, 1 bit)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSRW
A/SHRW A
1
2
0
0
word (A) ← Logical right shift (A, 1 bit)
-
-
-
-
*
R
*
-
*
-
LSLW
A/SHLW A
1
2
0
0
word (A) ← Logical left shift (A, 1 bit)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
ASRW
A,R0
2
*1
1
0
word (A) ← Arithmetic right barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSRW
A,R0
2
*1
1
0
word (A) ← Logical right barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSLW
A,R0
2
*1
1
0
word (A) ← Logical left barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
ASRL
A,R0
2
*2
1
0
long (A) ← Arithmetic right barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSRL
A,R0
2
*2
1
0
long (A) ← Logical right barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
LSLL
A,R0
2
*2
1
0
long (A) ← Logical left barrel shift (A, R0)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
*
-
*1: 6 when R0 is 0; otherwise, 5 + (R0)
*2: 6 when R0 is 0; otherwise, 6 + (R0)
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) and (b) in the table.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
663
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-13 31 Branch 1 Instructions
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
BZ/BEQ
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (Z) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BNZ/
BNE
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (Z) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BC/BLO
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (C) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BNC/
BHS
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (C) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BN
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (N) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BP
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (N) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BV
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (V) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BNV
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (V) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BT
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (T) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BNT
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (T) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLT
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (V) xor (N) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BGE
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (V) xor (N) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLE
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on ((V) xor (N)) or (Z) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BGT
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on ((V) xor (N)) or (Z) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLS
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (C) or (Z) = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BHI
rel
2
*1
0
0
Branch on (C) or (Z) = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BRA
rel
2
*1
0
0
Unconditional branch
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JMP
@A
1
2
0
0
word (PC) ← (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JMP
addr16
3
3
0
0
word (PC) ← addr16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JMP
@ear
2
3
1
0
word (PC) ← (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JMP
@eam
2+
4+(a)
0
(c)
word (PC) ← (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JMPP
@ear *3
2
5
2
0
word (PC) ← (ear), (PCB) ← (ear+2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JMPP
@eam *3
2+
6+(a)
0
(d)
JMPP
addr24
4
4
0
0
word (PC) ← (eam), (PCB) ← (eam+2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
word (PC) ← ad24 0-15, (PCB) ← ad24 16-23
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CALL
@ear *4
2
6
1
(c)
word (PC) ← (ear)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CALL
@eam *4
2+
7+(a)
0
2 × (c)
word (PC) ← (eam)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CALL
addr16 *5
3
6
0
(c)
word (PC) ← addr16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CALLV
#vct4 *5
1
7
0
2 × (c)
Vector call instruction
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CALLP
@ear *6
2
10
2
2 × (c)
word (PC) ← (ear), (PCB) ← (ear+2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CALLP
@eam *6
2+
11+(a)
0
*2
CALLP
addr24 *7
4
10
0
2 × (c)
word (PC) ← (eam), (PCB) ← (eam+2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
word (PC) ← ad24 0-15, (PCB) ← ad24 16-23
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1: 4 when a branch is made; otherwise, 3
*2: 3 × (c) + (b)
*3: Read (word) of branch destination address
*4: W: Save to stack (word) R: Read (word) of branch destination address
*5: Save to stack (word)
*6: W: Save to stack (long word), R: Read (long word) of branch destination address
*7: Save to stack (long word)
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (d) in the table.
664
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-14 19 Branch 2 Instructions
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S T N Z V C
RMW
CBNE
A,#imm8,rel
3
*1
0
0
Branch on byte (A) not equal to imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CWBNE
A,#imm16,rel
4
*1
0
0
Branch on word (A) not equal to imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CBNE
ear,#imm8,rel
4
*2
1
0
Branch on byte (ear) not equal to imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CBNE
eam,#imm8,rel *9
4+
*3
0
(b)
Branch on byte (eam) not equal to imm8
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CWBNE
ear,#imm16,rel
5
*4
1
0
Branch on word (ear) not equal to imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
CWBNE
eam,#imm16,rel*9
5+
*3
0
(c)
Branch on word (eam) not equal to imm16
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
DBNZ
ear,rel
3
*5
2
0
byte (ear) ← (ear) - 1, Branch on (ear) not equal to 0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
DBNZ
eam,rel
3+
*6
2
DWBNZ
ear,rel
3
*5
2
DWBNZ
eam,rel
3+
*6
2
2 × (b) byte (eam) ← (eam) - 1, Branch on (eam) not equal to 0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
-
2 × (c) word (eam) ← (eam) - 1, Branch on (eam) not equal to 0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
-
*
0
word (ear) ← (ear) - 1, Branch on (ear) not equal to 0
INT
#vct8
2
20
0
8 × (c) Software interrupt
-
-
R
S
-
-
-
-
-
-
INT
addr16
3
16
0
6 × (c) Software interrupt
-
-
R
S
-
-
-
-
-
-
INTP
addr24
4
17
0
6 × (c) Software interrupt
-
-
R
S
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
20
0
8 × (c) Software interrupt
-
-
R
S
-
-
-
-
-
-
INT9
RETI
LINK
#imm8
UNLINK
1
*8
0
*7
Return from interrupt
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
2
6
0
(c)
Saves the old frame pointer in the stack upon entering the
function, then sets the new frame pointer and reserves the
local pointer area.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
5
0
(c)
Recovers the old frame pointer from the stack upon exiting
the function.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RET
*10
1
4
0
(c)
Return from subroutine
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RETP
*11
1
6
0
(d)
Return from subroutine
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1: 5 when a branch is made; otherwise, 4
*2: 13 when a branch is made; otherwise, 12
*3: 7+(a) when a branch is made; otherwise, 6+(a)
*4: 8 when a branch is made; otherwise, 7
*5: 7 when a branch is made; otherwise, 6
*6: 8+(a) when a branch is made; otherwise, 7+(a)
*7: 3 × (b) + 2 × (c) when jumping to the next interruption request; 6 × (c) when returning from the current interruption
*8: 15 when jumping to the next interruption request; 17 when returning from the current interruption
*9: Do not use RWj+ addressing mode with a CBNE or CWBNE instruction.
*10: Return from stack (word)
*11: Return from stack (long word)
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) to (d) in the table.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
665
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-15 28 Other Control Instructions (Byte, Word, Long Word)
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
PUSHW
A
1
4
0
(c)
word (SP) ← (SP) - 2, ((SP)) ← (A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PUSHW
AH
1
4
0
(c)
word (SP) ← (SP) - 2, ((SP)) ← (AH)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PUSHW
PS
1
4
0
(c)
word (SP) ← (SP) - 2, ((SP)) ← (PS)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PUSHW
rlst
2
*3
*5
*4
(SP) ← (SP) - 2n, ((SP)) ← (rlst)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
POPW
A
1
3
0
(c)
word (A) ← ((SP)), (SP) ← (SP) + 2
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
POPW
AH
1
3
0
(c)
word (AH) ← ((SP)), (SP) ← (SP) + 2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
POPW
PS
1
4
0
(c)
word (PS) ← ((SP)), (SP) ← (SP) + 2
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
POPW
rlst
2
*2
*5
*4
(rlst) ← ((SP)), (SP) ← (SP) + 2n
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JCTX
@A
1
14
0
6 × (c)
Context switch instruction
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
AND
CCR,#imm8
2
3
0
0
byte (CCR) ← (CCR) and imm8
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
OR
CCR,#imm8
2
3
0
0
byte (CCR) ← (CCR) or imm8
-
-
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
MOV
RP,#imm8
2
2
0
0
byte (RP) ← imm8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOV
ILM,#imm8
2
2
0
0
byte (ILM) ← imm8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOVEA
RWi,ear
2
3
1
0
word (RWi) ← ear
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOVEA
RWi,eam
2+
2+(a)
1
0
word (RWi) ← eam
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOVEA
A,ear
2
1
0
0
word (A) ← ear
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOVEA
A,eam
2+
1+(a)
0
0
word (A) ← eam
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ADDSP
#imm8
2
3
0
0
word (SP) ← (SP) + ext(imm8)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ADDSP
#imm16
3
3
0
0
word (SP) ← (SP) + imm16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOV
A,brg1
2
*1
0
0
byte (A) ← (brg1)
Z
*
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
MOV
brg2,A
-
2
1
0
0
byte (brg2) ← (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
NOP
1
1
0
0
No operation
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ADB
1
1
0
0
Prefix code for AD space access
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTB
1
1
0
0
Prefix code for DT space access
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCB
1
1
0
0
Prefix code for PC space access
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SPB
1
1
0
0
Prefix code for SP space access
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
NCC
1
1
0
0
Prefix code for flag no-change
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CMR
1
1
0
0
Prefix code for common register bank
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1: PCB, ADB, SSB, USB, SPB: 1, DTB, DPR: 2
*2: 7 + 3 × (POP count) + 2 × (POP last register number), 7 when RLST = 0 (no transfer register)
*3: 29 + 3 × (PUSH count) - 3 × (PUSH last register number), 8 when RLST = 0 (no transfer register)
*4: (POP count) × (c) or (PUSH count) × (c)
*5: (POP count) or (PUSH count)
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (a) and (c) in the table.
666
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-16 21 Bit Operand Instructions
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
MOVB
A,dir:bp
3
5
0
(b)
byte (A) ← (dir:bp)b
Z
*
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
MOVB
A,addr16:bp
4
5
0
(b)
byte (A) ← (addr16:bp)b
Z
*
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
MOVB
A,io:bp
3
4
0
(b)
byte (A) ← (io:bp)b
Z
*
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
MOVB
dir:bp,A
3
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (dir:bp)b ← (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
*
MOVB
addr16:bp,A
4
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (addr16:bp)b ← (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
*
MOVB
io:bp,A
3
6
0
2 × (b)
bit (io:bp)b ← (A)
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
*
SETB
dir:bp
3
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (dir:bp)b ← 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
SETB
addr16:bp
4
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (addr16:bp)b ← 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
SETB
io:bp
3
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (io:bp)b ← 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
CLRB
dir:bp
3
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (dir:bp)b ← 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CLRB
addr16:bp
4
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (addr16:bp)b ← 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
CLRB
io:bp
3
7
0
2 × (b)
bit (io:bp)b ← 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
BBC
dir:bp,rel
4
*1
0
(b)
Branch on (dir:bp) b = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
BBC
addr16:bp,rel
5
*1
0
(b)
Branch on (addr16:bp) b = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
BBC
io:bp,rel
4
*2
0
(b)
Branch on (io:bp) b = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
BBS
dir:bp,rel
4
*1
0
(b)
Branch on (dir:bp) b = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
BBS
addr16:bp,rel
5
*1
0
(b)
Branch on (addr16:bp) b = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
BBS
io:bp,rel
4
*2
0
(b)
SBBS
addr16:bp,rel
5
*3
0
2 × (b)
Branch on (io:bp) b = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
Branch on (addr16:bp) b = 1,
bit (addr16:bp) b ← 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
*
WBTS
io:bp
3
*4
0
WBTC
io:bp
3
*4
0
*5
Waits until (io:bp) b = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*5
Waits until (io:bp) b = 0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RMW
*1: 8 when a branch is made; otherwise, 7
*2: 7 when a branch is made; otherwise, 6
*3: 10 when the condition is met; otherwise, 9
*4: Undefined count
*5: Until the condition is met
Note:
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (b) in the table.
Table B.8-17 6 Accumulator Operation Instructions (Byte, Word)
#
~
RG
B
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
SWAP
Mnemonic
1
3
0
0
byte (A)0-7 ↔ (A)8-15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SWAPW
1
2
0
0
word (AH) ↔ (AL)
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EXT
1
1
0
0
Byte sign extension
X
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
EXTW
1
2
0
0
Word sign extension
-
X
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
ZEXT
1
1
0
0
Byte zero extension
Z
-
-
-
-
R
*
-
-
-
ZEXTW
1
1
0
0
Word zero extension
-
Z
-
-
-
R
*
-
-
-
CM44-10129-6E
Operation
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
667
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Table B.8-18 10 String Instructions
Mnemonic
#
~
RG
B
Operation
LH
AH
I
S
T
N
Z
V
C
RMW
-
MOVS / MOVSI
2
*2
*5
*3
byte transfer @AH+ ← @AL+, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOVSD
2
*2
*5
*3
byte transfer @AH- ← @AL-, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SCEQ / SCEQI
2
*1
*8
*4
byte search @AH+ ← AL, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
SCEQD
2
*1
*8
*4
byte search @AH- ← AL, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
FILS / FILSI
2
6m+6
*8
*3
byte fill @AH+ ← AL, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
MOVSW / MOVSWI
2
*2
*5
*6
word transfer @AH+ ← @AL+, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MOVSWD
2
*2
*5
*6
word transfer @AH- ← @AL-, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SCWEQ / SCWEQI
2
*1
*8
*7
word search @AH+ - AL, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
SCWEQD
2
*1
*8
*7
word search @AH- - AL, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
-
FILSW / FILSWI
2
6m+6
*8
*6
word fill @AH+ ← AL, counter = RW0
-
-
-
-
-
*
*
-
-
-
*1: 5 when RW0 is 0, 4 + 7 × (RW0) when the counter expires, or 7n + 5 when a match occurs
*2: 5 when RW0 is 0; otherwise, 4 + 8 × (RW0)
*3: (b) × (RW0) + (b) × (RW0) When the source and destination access different areas, calculate the (b) item individually.
*4: (b) × n
*5: 2 × (b) × (RW0)
*6: (c) × (RW0) + (c) × (RW0) When the source and destination access different areas, calculate the (c) item individually.
*7: (c) × n
*8: (b) × (RW0)
Note:
m: RW0 value (counter value), n: Loop count
See Table B.5-1 and Table B.5-2 for information on (b) and (c) in the table.
668
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
B.9
Instruction Map
Each F2MC-16LX instruction code consists of 1 or 2 bytes. Therefore, the instruction
map consists of multiple pages. Table B.9-2 to Table B.9-21 summarize the F2MC-16LX
instruction map.
■ Structure of Instruction Map
Figure B.9-1 Structure of Instruction Map
Basic page map
Bit operation
instructions
Character string
operation
instructions
2-byte
instructions
: Byte 1
ea instructions × 9 : Byte 2
An instruction such as the NOP instruction that ends in one byte is completed within the basic page. An
instruction such as the MOVS instruction that requires two bytes recognizes the existence of byte 2 when it
references byte 1, and can check the following one byte by referencing the map for byte 2. Figure B.9-2
shows the correspondence between an actual instruction code and instruction map.
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
669
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B Instructions
MB90330A Series
Figure B.9-2 Correspondence between Actual Instruction Code and Instruction Map
Some instructions do
not contain byte 2.
Instruction
code
Length varies
depending on the
instruction.
Byte 1
Byte 2
Operand
Operand
...
[Basic page map]
XY
+Z
[Extended page map]*
UV
+W
*: The extended page map is a generic name of maps for bit operation instructions, character
string operation instructions, 2-byte instructions, and ea instructions. Actually, there are
multiple extended page maps for each type of instructions.
An example of an instruction code is shown in Table B.9-1.
Table B.9-1 Example of an Instruction Code
Byte 1
(from basic page map)
Byte 2
(from extended page map)
NOP
00 +0=00
-
AND A, #8
30 +4=34
-
MOV A, ADB
60 +F=6F
00 +0=00
CBNE @RW2+d8, #8, rel
70 +0=70
F0 +2=F2
Instruction
670
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
CM44-10129-6E
CM44-10129-6E
FUJITSU MICROELECTRONICS LIMITED
+F
+E
+D
+C
+B
+A
+9
+8
+7
+6
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1
+0
A
ZEXT
SWAP
ADDSP
DTB
ADB
SPB
#8
A, #8
dir, A
A, dir
io, A
A, io
JMP
BRA
60
MULU
DIVU
ea
@A instruction 2
A
MOVW
MOVX
RET
SP, A A, addr16
A0
B0
C0
ea
instruction 8
D0
E0
F0
rel
LSRW
ASRW
LSLW
SWAPW
ZEXTW
XORW
ORW
ANDW
ORW
PUSHW
POPW
A, #16
AH
AH
MOVW
ea, RWi
Bit operation MOV
A instruction
ea, Ri
MOVW
RWi, ea
PUSHW
POPW
2-byte
XCHW
A
rlst
rlst instruction
RWi, ea
Character
XORW
PUSHW
POPW
XCH
operation
A
A, #16
PS
PS string
Ri, ea
instruction
A
ANDW
PUSHW
POPW
A
A, #16
A
CMPW
MOVL
MOVW
RETI
A, #16
A, #32 addr16, A
ADDSP
MULUW
NOTW
A
#16
A
A
A
EXTW
A
BHI
BLS
BGT
BLE
rel
rel
rel
rel
rel
BGE
CMPL
CMPW
A, #32
NEGW
A
rel
BLT
rel
rel
rel
rel
rel
MOV
MOV
CBNE A, CWBNE A, MOVW
MOVW
INTP
MOV
RP, #8
ILM, #8
#8, rel
#16, rel
A, #16 A,addr16
addr24
Ri, ea
BT
BNV
BV
BP
BN
BNC/BHS
rel
BC/BLO
BNZ/BNE
rel
rel
ADDW
MOVW
MOVW
INT
ea
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW
MOVW A, MOVW
A, #16
A, dir
A, io
#vct8 instruction 9
A, RWi
RWi, A RWi, #16 @RWi+d8 @RWi+d8, A
NOT
ea
instruction 7
MOVX
MOVX
CALLP
ea
A, dir
A, io
addr24 instruction 6
MOVW
MOVW
RETP
A, #8
A, SP
io, #16
A, #8
90
BNT
SUBL
SUBW
A, #32
A
A
A
XOR
OR
OR
CCR, #8
80
ea
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOVX
MOVX A, MOVN
CALL
BZ/BEQ
rel instruction 1
A, Ri
Ri, A
Ri, #8
A, Ri @RWi+d8
A, #